Gate by RK Kanodia

GATE EC BY RK Kanodia
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION
Electronics & Communication Engineering

Fifth Edition
R. K. Kanodia
B.Tech.
NODIA & COMAPNY

JAIPUR
www.gatehelp.com
MRP 400.00
Price 550.00
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
1.1
BASIC CONCEPTS
1. A solid copper sphere, 10 cm in diameter is deprived

of 10
20
electrons by a charging scheme. The charge on
the sphere is
(A) 160.2 C
(B) -160.2 C
(C) 16.02 C
(D) -16.02 C
(A) 1 A
(B) 2 A
(C) 3 A
(D) 4 A
6. In the circuit of fig P1.1.6 a charge of 600 C is

delivered to the 100 V source in a 1 minute. The value
of v1 must be
v1
2. A lightning bolt carrying 15,000 A lasts for 100 ms. If

the lightning strikes an airplane flying at 2 km, the
charge deposited on the plane is
(A) 13.33 mC
(B) 75 C
(C) 1500 mC
(D) 1.5 C
60 V
20 W
100 V
3. If 120 C of charge passes through an electric
Fig. P.1.1.6
conductor in 60 sec, the current in the conductor is

(A) 0.5 A
(B) 2 A
(C) 3.33 mA
(D) 0.3 mA
(A) 240 V
(B) 120 V
(C) 60 V
(D) 30 V
4. The energy required to move 120 coulomb through

7. In the circuit of the fig P1.1.7, the value of the
3 V is
(B) 360 J
(C) 40 J
(D) 2.78 mJ
voltage source E is
0V
+
(A) 25 mJ
2V
5. i = ?
5V
4V
1A
1V
10 V
2A
5A
Fig. P.1.1.7
3A
4A
Fig. P.1.1.5
(A) -16 V
(b) 4 V
(C) -6 V
(D) 16 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
3
UNIT 1
8. Consider the circuit graph shown in fig. P1.1.8. Each
Networks
12. v1 = ?
branch of circuit graph represent a circuit element. The
v1
value of voltage v1 is
1 kW
7V
+ 105 V
15 V +
55 V
+ v1
8V
35 V
5V
6V
kW
100 V
10 V +
+
65 V
kW
30
30
4 kW
Fig. P1.1.12
Fig. P.1.1.8
(A) -30 V
(B) 25 V
(C) -20 V
(D) 15 V
9. For the circuit shown in fig P.1.1.9 the value of
(A) -11 V
(B) 5 V
(C) 8 V
(D) 18 V
13. The voltage vo in fig. P1.1.11 is always equal to

1A
voltage vo is
5W
+
vo
4W
+
vo
1A
15 V
5V
Fig. P1.1.11
Fig. P.1.1.9
(A) 10 V
(B) 15 V
(C) 20 V
(D) None of the above
(A) 1 V
(B) 5 V
(C) 9 V
14. Req = ?
5W
10 W
10 W
10 W
10. R1 = ?
60 W
Req
10 W
10 W
10 W
up to
R1
100 V
R2
+
20 V
70 V
Fig. P1.1.14
Fig. P.1.1.10
(A) 11.86 W
(B) 10 W
(C) 25 W
(D) 11.18 W
15. vs = ?
(A) 25 W
(B) 50 W
(C) 100 W
(D) 2000 W
180 W
+
60 W
11. Twelve 6 W resistor are used as edge to form a cube.
vs
The resistance between two diagonally opposite corner

of the cube is
5
(A) W
6
(C) 5 W
Page
4
(B)
90 W
6
W
5
(D) 6 W
40 W
20 V
Fig. P.1.1.15
(A) 320 V
(B) 280 V
(C) 240 V
(D) 200 V
www.gatehelp.com
180 W
UNIT 1
24. Let i( t) = 3te-100 t A and v( t) = 0.6(0.01 - t) e -100 t V for
Networks
28. vab = ?
the network of fig. P.1.1.24. The power being absorbed
2
8
b
0.3i1
A
2
0.2i1
i1
i
v
by the network element at t = 5 ms is
Fig. P.1.1.24
(A) 18.4 mW
(B) 9.2 mW
(C) 16.6 mW
(D) 8.3 mW
Fig. P.1.1.28
25. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.25 bulb A uses 36 W when

lit, bulb B uses 24 W when lit, and bulb C uses 14.4 W
(A) 15.4 V
(B) 2.6 V
(C) -2.6 V
(D) 15.4 V
29. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.29 power is delivered by
when lit. The additional A bulbs in parallel to this
500 W
circuit, that would be required to blow the fuse is
400 W
ix
20 A
200 W
2ix
40 V
12 V
C
Fig. P.1.1.29
(A) dependent source of 192 W
Fig. P.1.1.25
(A) 4
(B) 5
(B) dependent source of 368 W
(C) 6
(D) 7
(C) independent source of 16 W
26. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.26, the power absorbed by
(D) independent source of 40 W
the load RL is
30. The dependent source in fig. P.1.1.30
i1
5W
RL = 2 W
2i1
1W
1V
v1
20 V
v1
5
5W
Fig. P.1.1.26
(A) 2 W
(B) 4 W
(C) 6 W
(D) 8 W
Fig. P.1.1.30
27. vo = ?
(A) delivers 80 W
(B) delivers 40 W
(C) absorbs 40 W
(D) absorbs 80 W
31. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.31 dependent source

0.2 A
5W
+
v1 0.3v1
8W
+
v2
5v2
18 W
+
vo
+ 8V
ix
Page
6
(A) 6 V
(B) -6 V
(C) -12 V
(D) 12 V
2ix
4A
Fig. P.1.1.27
Fig. P.1.1.31
(A) supplies 16 W
(B) absorbs 16 W
(C) supplies 32 W
(D) absorbs 32 W
www.gatehelp.com
Basic Concepts
Chap 1.1
32. A capacitor is charged by a constant current of 2 mA
36. The waveform for the current in a 200 mF capacitor
and results in a voltage increase of 12 V in a 10 sec
is shown in fig. P.1.1.36 The waveform for the capacitor
interval. The value of capacitance is
voltage is
(A) 0.75 mF
(B) 1.33 mF
(C) 0.6 mF
(D) 1.67 mF
i(mA)
5
33. The energy required to charge a 10 mF capacitor to

100 V is
Fig. P. 1.1.36
(A) 0.10 J
(C) 5 10
t(ms)
(B) 0.05 J
-9
(D) 10 10
-9
v
50m
34. The current in a 100 mF capacitor is shown in fig.
t(ms)
P.1.1.34. If capacitor is initially uncharged, then the
(A)
(B)
waveform for the voltage across it is
t(ms)
v
50m
250m
i(mA)
t(ms)
(C)
t(ms)
t(ms)
(D)
Fig. P. 1.1.34
v
37. Ceq = ?
v
10
10
t(ms)
(A)
2.5 mF
t(ms)
1.5 mF
(B)
1 mF
Ceq
0.2
0.2
t(ms)
(C)
2 mF
t(ms)
(D)
Fig. P.1.1.37
35. The voltage across a 100 mF capacitor is shown in

fig. P.1.1.35. The waveform for the current in the
(A) 3.5 mF
(B) 1.2 mF
capacitor is
(C) 2.4 mF
(D) 2.6 mF
v
6
38. In the circuit shown in fig. P.1.1.38

1
t(ms)
iin ( t) = 300 sin 20 t mA, for t 0.
Fig. P.1.1.35
i(mA)
6
C2
C2
C2
C2
i(mA)
600
vin C1
iin
1
t(ms)
C1
C1
C1
60 mF
t(ms)
(A)
(B)
i(mA)
6
Fig. P. 1.1.38
i(mA)
600
2
1
(C)
t(ms)
2
1
t(ms)
Let C1 = 40 mF and C2 = 30 mF. All capacitors are

initially uncharged. The vin ( t) would be
(D)
(A) -0.25cos 20t V
(B) 0.25cos 20t V
(C) -36cos 20t mV
(D) 36cos 20t mV
www.gatehelp.com
Page
7
Basic Concepts
Chap 1.1
v3 - 30 = v2
SOLUTIONS
v3 = 65 V
105 + v4 - v3 - 65 = 0
v4 = 25 V
v4 + 15 - 55 + v1 = 0 v1 = 15 V
1. (C) n = 10 20 , Q = ne = e10 20 = 16.02 C

Charge on sphere will be positive.
9. (B) Voltage is constant because of 15 V source.
2. (D) DQ = i D t = 15000 100m = 15

. C
10. (C) Voltage across 60 W resistor = 30 V

30
Current =
= 0.5 A
60
3. (B) i =
dQ 120
=
=2 A
dt
60
4. (B) W = Qv = 360 J
Voltage across R1 is = 70 - 20 = 50 V
50
= 100 W
R1 =
0.5
6. (A)
11. (C) The current i will be distributed in the cube

branches symmetrically
1A
i=1A
5A
2A
3A
4A
i
3
i
i
3
6A
1A
i
3
2A
i
6
Fig. S 1.1.5
6. (A) In order for 600 C charge to be delivered to the

100 V source, the current must be anticlockwise.
dQ 600
i=
=
= 10 A
dt
60
Applying KVL we get
0V
Fig. S. 1.1.11
1V
12. (C) If we go from +side of 1 kW through 7 V, 6 V and

5 V, we get v1 = 7 + 6 - 5 = 8 V
13. (D) It is not possible to determine the voltage across
5V
1 A source.
10 V
Fig. S 1.1.7
14. (D) Req = 5 +
10 + 5 + E + 1 = 0 or E = -16 V
8. (D) 100 = 65 + v2
v2 = 35 V
+ 105 V
30
+
Req
Fig. S 1.1.14
10 W
v2
Req
55 V
+ v1
5W
10 V +
30
+ v3
10 + 5 + Req
5W
v4
10 ( Req + 5)
15 V +
65 V
100 V
6i 6i 6i
+
+
= 5 i,
3
6
3
v
Req = ab = 5 W
i
7. (A) Going from 10 V to 0 V
4V
vab =
v1 + 60 - 100 = 10 20 or v1 = 240 V
2V
i
3
Req2 + 15 Req = 5 Req + 75 + 10 Req + 50

Fig. S 1.1.8
Req = 125 = 1118

. W
www.gatehelp.com
Page
9
Basic Concepts
vo - 20 vo 20
+
=
5
5
5
Power is P = vo
We can say Cd = 20 mF, Ceq = 20 + 40 = 60 mF

1
1 300
cos 20 t 10 -3 = - 0.25 cos 20 t V

vC = idt=
60m 20
C
vo = 20 V
20
v1
= 20
= 80 W
5
5
39. (C) iC1 =
31. (D) Power P = vi = 2 ix ix = 2 ix2

ix = 4 A, P = 32 W (absorb)
32. (D) vt 2 - vt1 =
1
C
t2
idt
iin C1
= 0.8 sin 600 t mA
C1 + C2
At t = 2 ms, iC1 = 0.75 mA
12 =
t1
12 C = 2m 10
Chap 1.1
1
2m ( t2 - t1 )
C
40. (B) vC1 =
4 vin
vin C2
=
C1 + C2 6 + 4
vc1
= 0.4
vin
C = 1.67 mF
41. (D) V = 2 + 3 + 5 = 10, Q = 1 C, C =
1
33. (B) E = Cv 2 = 5 10 -6 100 2 = 0.05 J
2
42. (A) vL = L
di
dt
This 0.2 V increases linearly from 0 to 0.2 V. Then
43. (B) vL = L
di
= 0.01 2( 377 cos 377 t) V
dt
current is zero. So capacitor hold this voltage.
= 7.54 cos 377 t V
1
34. (D) vc =
c
35. (D) i = C
-3
10 10
-3
0 idt = 100 10 -6 (2 10 ) = 0.2 V
2m
dv
dt
For 0 < t < 1 , C
dv
6 -0
= 100 10 -6
= 600 mA
dt
10 -3 - 0
1
1
12000
120 cos 3t dt =
vdt =
sin 377 t
0.01
L
377
12000 120
P = vi =
(sin 377 t)(cos 377 t)
377
45. (D) vL = L
1
1
idt =
200 10 -6
C
5m
4m tdt = 3125 t
vC = 3vL
iC = 3 LC
46. (B) vL = L
It will be parabolic path. at t = 0 t-axis will be tangent.
combination
is
in
series
with
1.5
mF.
15
. (2 + 1)
= 1mF, C1 is in parallel with 2.5 mF
C1 =
15
. +2+1
. mF
Ceq = 1 + 2.5 = 35
diL
dt
-100 - 0
vL = (0.05)
= - 2.5 V
2
For 4 < t 8,
100 + 100
vL = (0.05)
= 2.5 V
4
For 8 < t 10,
0 - 100
vL = (0.05)
= - 2.5 V
2
Thus (B) is correct option.
30 60
30(20 + 40)
38. (A) Ca =
= 20 mF, Cb =
= 20 mF
30 + 60
30 + 20 + 0
C2
Cc
C2
Cb
C2
Ca
47. (C) Algebraic sum of the current entering or leaving

a cutset is equal to 0.
6 16
i2 + i4 + i3 = 0
+
+ i3 = 0
2
4
C2
i3 = - 7 A,
C1
d 2 iL
= - 9.6 sin 4 t A
dt
For 2 < t 4,
37. (A) 2 mF is in parallel with 1 mF and this
vin
diL
dv
, iC = C C
dt
dt
At t = 4 ms, vc = 0.05 V
iin
L = 2 mH
= 1910 sin 754 t W
36. (B) For 0 t 4,
Cd
44. (A) i =
For 1 ms < t < 2 ms,

dv
0-6
C
= 100 10 -6
= - 600 mA
( 3 - 2)m
dt
vC =
100m = L
200m
4m
Q
= 0.1 F
V
C1
C1
C1
v3 = - 7 3 = - 21 V
60 mF
Fig. S 1.1.38
*********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
11
CHAPTER
1.2
GRAPH THEORY
1. Consider the following circuits :
Non-planner graphs are

(A) 1 and 3
(B) 4 only
(C) 3 only
(D) 3 and 4
3. A graph of an electrical network has 4 nodes and 7

branches. The number of links l, with respect to the
(1)
(2)
chosen tree, would be

(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
4. For the graph shown in fig. P.1.1.4 correct set is
(3)
(4)
Fig. P.1.1.4
The planner circuits are

(A) 1 and 2
(B) 2 and 3
(C) 3 and 4
(D) 4 and 1
2. Consider the following graphs
Node
Branch
Twigs
Link
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5. A tree of the graph shown in fig. P.1.2.5 is

c
(1)
(2)
3
g
Fig. P.1.2.5
(3)
Page
12
(4)
(A) a d e h
(B) a c f h
(C) a f h g
(D) a e f g
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
1 -1 0
(A) -1 0
1
1 -1
0
-1 -1 0
(C) 0
1 1
1 0 -1
1 0 -1
(B) -1 -1 0
1 1
0
1
-1 0
(D) 0
1 -1
1 -1 0
13. The incidence matrix of a graph is as given below
(C)
-1 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 -1 1 1 0
A =
0 -1 0 -1 0 -1
1 0 0 0 -1 -1
(D)

-1 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 -1 1 1 0
A =
0 -1 0 -1 0 0
1 0 0 0 -1 -1
The graph is
2
Networks
The graph is
4
4
3
(A)
(B)
(A)
4
(B)
4
3
(C)
(D)

- 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 0
0 0 0
1 0
1 1
A = 0 0
1 0 0 0 -1
0
1 0 0 -1 -1 0
1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0
(C)
(D)
16. The graph of a network is shown in fig. P.1.1.16. The

number of possible tree are
The graph is
2
Fig. P.1.1.16
(A)
Page
14
(A) 8
(B) 12
(C) 16
(D) 20
(B)
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
Networks
22. The fundamental cut-set matrix of a graph is

1 -1 0 0 0
0 -1 1 0
1
QF =
0
0
0
0
1
0 0 0 1 -1
0
0
1
0
The oriented graph of the network is
(C)
24. A graph is shown in fig. P.1.2.24 in which twigs are
solid line and links are dotted line. For this tree
fundamental loop matrix is given as below

1 1 1 0
BF =
1 0 1 1
(A)
(D)
(B)
5
6
Fig. P.1.2.24
(C)
(D)
The oriented graph will be
23. A graph is shown in fig. P.1.2.23 in which twigs are

solid line and links are dotted line. For this chosen tree
fundamental set matrix is given below.
1 1
BF = 0 -1
0 0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
(A)
(B)
3
2
(C)
Fig. P. 1.2.23
(D)
25. Consider the graph shown in fig. P.1.2.25 in which

twigs are solid line and links are dotted line.
(A)
(B)
Fig. P. 1.2.25
Page
16
www.gatehelp.com
Graph Theory
A fundamental loop matrix for this tree is given as

below
1
BF = 0
0
1
0
1
0 -1 -1 0
1 0
1 -1
0
1
0
(D)
0
-1
Chap 1.2
1 -1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
27. Branch current and loop current relation are
expressed in matrix form as
(A)
i1 0
i 0
2
i3 1
i -1
4 =
i5 1
i 0
6

i
7 0
i8 0
(B)
1 -1
0 -1
0 0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
-1 I1
0 I 2

0 I 3
0 I 4
0
1
where i j represent branch current and I k loop

current. The number of independent node equation are
(C)
(D)
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
28. If the number of branch in a network is b, the
26. In the graph shown in fig. P.1.2.26 solid lines are

twigs and dotted line are link. The fundamental loop
number of nodes is n and the number of dependent loop

is l, then the number of independent node equations
will be
matrix is
i
c
(A) n + l - 1
(B) b - 1
(C) b - n + 1
(D) n - 1
Statement for Q.2930:

h
Branch current and loop current relation are
expressed in matrix form as

1 0
i1 0 0
i -1 -1 -1 0
2
1 0 0 I1
i3 0
i 1 0 0 0 I
4 =
2
i
0
0
1
1
5
I 3
i 1 1 0 -1 I
4
6

i7 1 0 0 0
i8 0 0 0
1
Fig. P.1.2.26
1
0
(A)
0
-1
-1 1 0 0
0 -1 -1 -1
(B)
0 0 0 -1
1 0
1 0
(C)
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 0
0 0
1 -1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1 0 0 0
1 -1 -1 0
0 0
1 -1
0 -1 0 -1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0 0
1 0
1 -1
0 -1
0
0
1
0
0 -1
1 0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
1
where i j represent branch current and I k loop

current.
29. The rank of incidence matrix is
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 8
www.gatehelp.com
Page
17
UNIT 1
30. The directed graph will be
Networks
33. The oriented graph for this network is
8
5
6
5
(C)
2
4
1
(D)
(C)
************
(D)
31. A network has 8 nodes and 5 independent loops.

The number of branches in the network is
(A) 11
(B) 12
(C) 8
(D) 6
32. A branch has 6 node and 9 branch. The independent

loops are
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6

For a network branch voltage and node voltage
relation are expressed in matrix form as follows:
1
v1 1 0 0
v 0
1 0 0
2
1 0 V1
v3 0 0
v 0 0 0
1 V2
4 =

v5 1 -1 0 0 V3
v 0
1 -1 0 V4
6

1 -1
v7 0 0
v8 1 0 -1 0
where vi is the branch voltage and Vk is the node
voltage with respect to datum node.
33. The independent mesh equation for this network
are
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D 7
Page
18
www.gatehelp.com
Graph Theory
Chap 1.2
7. (D) D is not a tree
SOLUTIONS
1. (A) The circuit 1 and 2 are redrawn as below. 3 and 4 can
not be redrawn on a plane without crossing other branch.
(A)
(1)
(B)
(2)
Fig. S1.2.1
2. (B) Other three circuits can be drawn on plane

without crossing
(C)
(1)
(D)
(2)
Fig. S .1.2.7
8. (D) it is obvious from the following figure that 1, 3,

and 4 are tree
2
(3)
a
Fig. S1.2.1
3. (C) l = b - ( n - 1) = 4.
(1)
2
a
c
1
g
(2)
5. (C) From fig. it can be seen that a f h g is a tree of
l=b-n+1=3
given graph
3
e
4. (B) There are 4 node and 6 branches.

t = n - 1 = 3,
3
e
b
3
e
f
4
(3)
Fig. S 1.2.5
(4)
2
6. (B) From fig. it can be seen that a d f is a tree.

c
b
a
e
b
c
f
4
(5)
Fig. S. 1.2.6
Fig. S. 1.2.8
www.gatehelp.com
Page
19
UNIT 1
So independent mesh equation =Number of link.
i
l1
34. (D) We know that [ vb ] = ArT [ Vn ]
So reduced
1 0
0 1
Ar =
0 0
0 0
l4
l2
h
l3
Networks
Fig. S 1.2.26
incidence matrix is
0 0
1 0 0
1
0 0 -1 1 0 0
1 0 0 -1 1 -1
0 1 0 0 -1 0
At node-1, three branch leaves so the only option is (D).
This in similar to matrix in (A). Only place of rows has

been changed.
27. (A) Number of branch =8
***********
Number of link =4
Number of twigs =8 - 4 = 4
Number of twigs =number of independent node
equation.
28. (D) The number of independent node equation are
n - 1.
29. (A) Number of branch b = 8
Number of link l = 4
Number of twigs t = b - l = 4
rank of matrix = n - 1 = t = 4
30. (B) We know the branch current and loop current
are related as
[ ib ] = [ B T ] [ I L ]
So fundamental loop matrix is
1 1 0
0 -1 0 1 0
0 -1 1 0 0
1 0 0
Bf =
1 -1 0 0 -1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 1
f-loop 1 include branch (2, 4, 6, 7) and direction of

branch2 is opposite to other (B only).
31. (B) Independent loops =link
l = b - ( n - 1)
5 = b - 7, b = 12
32. (B) Independent loop =link

l = b - ( n - 1) = 4
33. (A) There are 8 branches and 4 + 1 = 5 node
Number of link = 8 - 5 + 1 = 4
Page
22
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
1.3
METHODS OF ANALYSIS
1. v1 = ?
6R
6R
4vs
+
v1
(B) -120 V
(D) -90 V
(A) 120 V
(C) 90 V
3R
vs
4. va = ?
10 W
4W
12 V
10 V
Fig. P1.3.1
(A) 0.4vs
(B) 1.5vs
(C) 0.67vs
(D) 2.5vs
va
4A
1W
2. va = ?
2W
Fig. P1.3.4
3A
(A) 4.33 V
(C) 8.67 V
2W
5. v2 = ?
va
3W
(B) 4.09 V
(D) 8.18 V
20 W
1A
+
30 W
60 W
v2
10 V
0.5 A
30 W
Fig. P1.3.2
(A) -11 V
(B) 11 V
(C) 3 V
(D) -3 V
Fig. P1.3.5
(A) 0.5 V
(C) 1.5 V
3. v1 = ?
10 W
6. ib = ?
30 V
3A
(B) 1.0 V
(D) 2.0 V
64 W
30 W
37 W
ib
20 W
0.5 A
10 V
60 W
69 W
36 W
v1
+
9A
6A
60 W
Fig. P1.3.6
Fig. P1.3.3
(A) 0.6 A
(C) 0.4 A
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 0.5 A
(D) 0.3 A
Page
23
UNIT 1
7. i1 = ?
6A
8W
(A) 20 mA
(B) 15 mA
(C) 10 mA
(D) 5 mA
11. i1 = ?
2W
i1
Networks
50 W
10 W
5W
3W
4W
75 V
100 W
i1
6.6 V
Fig. P1.3.7
(A) 3.3 A
(B) 2.1 A
(C) 1.7 A
(D) 1.1 A
0.1 A
40 W
0.06 A
60W
8. i1 = ?
0.1A
i2
90 kW
7.5mA
i1
10 kW
Fig. P1.3.11
10 kW
75 V
(A) 0.01 A
(B) -0.01 A
(C) 0.03 A
(D) 0.02 A
90 kW
12. The value of the current measured by the ammeter

in Fig. P1.3.12 is
Fig. P1.3.8
(A) 1 mA
(B) 1.5 mA
(C) 2 mA
(D) 2.5 mA
2A
Ammeter
4W
7W
9. i1 = ?
2A
6W
3A
5W
3V
4W
2W
Fig. P1.3.12
3W
4A
2W
i1
(B) 3 A
(C) 6 A
(D) 5 A
2
A
3
(C) -
Fig. P1.3.9
(A) 4 A
(A)
5
A
6
(B)
5
A
3
(D)
2
A
9
13. i1 = ?
200 W
10. i1 = ?
2 kW
45 V
i1
40 mA
500 W
Fig. P1.3.10
Page
24
15 mA
100 W
50 W
i1
Fig. 1.3.13
(A) 10 mA
(B) -10 mA
(C) 0.4 mA
(D) -0.4 mA
www.gatehelp.com
10 mA
Methods of Analysis
Chap 1.3
5W
8W
4W
14. The values of node voltage are va = 12 V, vb = 9.88 V

and vc = 5.29 V. The power supplied by the voltage
i1
12 V
source is
2W
i3
2W
i2
20 V
8V
6W
va
4W
3W
vb
12 V
1A
vc
Fig. 1.3.17
0 i1 12
4 -2
(A) -2
8 -2 i2 = -8

5 i3 20
0 -2
2W
-2
0 i1 12
6
(B) 2 -12
2 i2 = 8

2 -7 i3 20
0
Fig. 1.3.14
(A) 19.8 W
(B) 27.3 W
(C) 46.9 W
(D) 54.6 W
0 i1 12
6 -2
(C) -2 12 -2 i2 = 8

7 i3 20
0 -2
15. i1 , i2 , i3 = ?
2W
3W
15 V
9W
i1
6W
i2
0 i1 12
4 -2
(D) 2 -8
2 i2 = 8

2 -5 i3 20
0
18. For the circuit shown in Fig. P1.3.18 the mesh
21 V
i3
equation are
6 kW
Fig. P1.3.15
6 kW
(A) 3 A, 2 A, and 4 A
(B) 3 A, 3 A, and 8 A
(C) 1 A, 3 A, and 4 A
(D) 1 A, 2 A, and 8 A
i3
6 kW
i1
6V
i2
5 mA
6 kW
16. vo = ?
Fig. 1.3.18
4 mA
2 kW
2 mA
6 k -12 k -12 k i1
-6
(A) -6 k
6 k -18 k i2 = 0

-1k
0 k i3
-1k
5
1 kW
1 kW
+
1 kW
2 kW
1 mA
vo
6 k 12 k -12 k i1
-6
(B) -6 k -6 k
18 k i2 = 0

1k
0 k i3
-1k
5
Fig. P1.3.16
(A)
6
V
5
(B)
8
V
5
(C)
6
V
7
(D)
5
V
7
-6 k -12 k 12 k i1
-6
(C) 6 k
-6 k 18 k i2 = 0

1k 0 k i3
1k
5
17. The mesh current equation for the circuit in Fig.

P1.3.17 are
-6 k 12 k -12 k i1
-6
(D) -6 k 6 k -18 k i2 = 0

1k
0 k i3
-1k
5
www.gatehelp.com
Page
25
Methods of Analysis
R1
i3
R2
Chap 1.3
(A) 66.67 mA
(B) 46.24 mA
(C) 23.12 mA
(D) 33.33 mA
R3
29. va = ?
i1
R4
i2
10 W
v2
v1
25i2
4A
50 W
va
40 W
Fig. P1.3.25
200 W
10 A
The value of R4 is
(A) 40
(B) 15
(C) 5
(D) 20
2.5 kW
10 kW
20 V
10 kW
(A) 342 V
(B) 171 V
(C) 198 V
(D) 396 V
30. ia = ?
va
5 kW
20 A
Fig. P1.3.29
26. va = ?
10 kW
20 W
100 W
5A
50 W
150 W
4 mA
225 W
100 W
200 W
ia
Fig. P1.3.26
2V
(A) 26 V
(B) 19 V
(C) 13 V
(D) 18 V
75 W
2A
50 W
(A) 14 mA
(B) -6.5 mA
(C) 7 mA
(D) -21 mA
31. v2 = ?
20 W
8V
Fig. P1.3.30
27. v = ?
10 W
4V
50 W
v2 +
4A
100 W
10 V
15 W
0.04v2
5W
Fig. P.3.1.27
Fig. P1.3.31
(A) 60 V
(B) -60 V
(A) 5 V
(B) 75 V
(C) 30 V
(D) -30 V
(C) 3 V
(D) 10 V
32. i1 = ?
28. i1 = ?
2W
300 W
40 V
i1
500 W
8V
0.4i1
0.5i1
4A
4W
6V
i1
Fig. P1.3.32
Fig. P1.3.28
www.gatehelp.com
Page
27
UNIT 1
(A) -1.636 A
(B) -3.273 A
(C) -2.314 A
(D) -4.628 A
Networks
37. va = ?
0.8va
16 A
33. vx = ?
+
100 W
1.6 A
2.5 W
5W
10 A
vx
50 W
0.02vx
2W
va
Fig. P1.3.37
Fig. P1.3.33
(A) 32 V
(B) -32 V
(C) 12 V
(D) -12 V
(A) 25.91 V
(B) -25.91 V
(C) 51.82 V
(D) -51.82 V
38. For the circuit of Fig. P1.3.38 the value of vs , that
34. ib = ?
will result in v1 = 0, is
1 kW
va
3A
3 kW
2A
ib
0.1v1
6V
4va
2 kW
10 W
20 W
+
vs
40 W
Fig. P1.3.34
(A) 4 mA
(B) -4 mA
(C) 12 mA
(D) -12 mA
4 kW
vb
(A) 28 V
(B) -28 V
(C) 14 V
(D) -14 V
39. i1 , i2 = ?
2ix
4W
2V
48 V
Fig. P1.3.38
35. vb = ?
ia
v1
2W
5ia
2 kW
ix
15 V
6W
i1
i2
18 V
Fig. P1.3.35
(A) 1 V
(B) 1.5 V
(C) 4 V
(D) 6 V
Fig. P1.3.39
36. vx = ?
(A) 2.6 A, 1.4 A
(B) 2.6 A, -1.4 A
(C) 1.6 A, 1.35 A
(D) 1.2 A, -1.35 A
40. v1 = ?
50 W
3W
iy
+
2A
100 W
25iy
50 W
vx
+
vy
0.2vx
3W
2A
6W
14 V
+
v1
Fig. P1.3.36
Page
28
(A) -3 V
(B) 3 V
(C) 10 V
(D) -10 V
7A
Fig. P1.3.40
www.gatehelp.com
2W
2vy
Methods of Analysis
(A) 10 V
(B) -10 V
(C) 7 V
(D) -7 V
SOLUTIONS
1. (B) Applying the nodal analysis
v
4 vs
+ s
R
R
6
3
v1 =
= 15
. vs
1
1
1
+
+
6 R 3R 6 R
41. vx = ?
vx +
500 W
0.5vx
500 W
900 W
600 W
0.6 A
Chap 1.3
2. (C) va = 2( 3 + 1) + 3 (1) = 11 V
0.3 A
3. (D) -
v1
-v
+ 1 + 6 =9
60 60
v1 = - 90 V
Fig. P1.3.41
(A) 9 V
(B) -9 V
(C) 10 V
(D) -10 V
42. The power being dissipated in the 2 W resistor in the
4. (C)
va - 10 va
+
=4
4
2
5. (D)
v2 v2 + 10
+
= 0.5
20
30
va = 8.67 V
v2 = 2 V
circuit of Fig. P1.3.42 is

5W
6. (B) Using Thevenin equivalent and source transform
ia
3W
8W
3
2W
i1
2W
10 W
va
60 V
2A
2.5 A
4W
6ia
3W
25 V
30 V
Fig. P1.3.42
Fig. S.1.3.6
(A) 76.4 W
(B) 305.6 W
(C) 52.5 W
(D) 210.0 W
43. i1 = ?
500 W
+ vx
100 W
180 V
400 W
5W
25
60
+
+ 2 15
va =
= 15.23 V
3
1
1
+ +
14 3 15
25 - 15.23
= 2.09 A
i1 =
14
3
8
3
0.6 A
+
vy
7. (A) ib =
0.001vy
100 W
10
+ 0.5 = 0.6 A
64 + 36
8. (B) 75 = 90 ki1 + 10 k( i1 - 7.5m)

150 = 100 ki1
i1 = 15
. mA
9. (B) 3 = 2 i1 + 3( i1 - 4)
0.005vy
i1 = 3 A
Fig. P1.3.43
10. (B) 45 = 2 ki1 + 500 ( i1 + 15m)

(A) 0.12 A
(B) 0.24 A
(C) 0.36 A
(D) 0.48 A
i1 = 15 mA
11. (D)
6.6 = 50 i1 + 100( i1 + 0.1) + 40( i1 - 0.06) + 60( i1 - 0.1)
*****************
i1 = 0.02 A
www.gatehelp.com
Page
29
UNIT 1
38. (D) If v1 = 0, the dependent source is a short circuit

v1
v - vs v1 - 48
+ 1
+
=2 - 3
40
10
20
48
v
- s = - 1 vs = - 14 V
10 20
3A
v1 = 0
ia =
Networks
30 + 7.5 + 2
= 329
. A
12
6 ia = 19.75 V
voltage across 2 W resistor

30 - 19.75 = 10.25 V,
P=
2A
(10.25) 2
= 52.53 W
2
43. (A) vx = 500 i1

10 W
40 W
vs
v y = 400( i1 - 0.001vx ) = 400 ( i1 - 0.5 i1 ) = 200 i1
20 W
+
v1
180 = 500 i1 + 100( i1 - 0.6) + 200 i1 + 100( i1 + 0.005 v y)
48 V
180 = 900 i1 - 60 + 100 0.005 200 i1

i1 = 0.12 A
Fig. S1.3.38
************
39. (D) ix = i1 - i2
15 = 4 i1 - 2( i1 - i2 ) + 6( i1 - i2 )
8 i1 - 4 i2 = 15
K(i)
-18 = 2 i2 + 6( i2 - i1 )
3i1 - 4 i2 = 9
K(ii)
. A, i2 = -1.35 A
i1 = 12
40. (B) 14 = 3i1 + v y + 6( i1 - 2 - 7) + 2 v y + 2( i1 - 7)
v y = 3( i1 - 2)
14 = 3i1 + 9( i1 - 2) + 6( i1 - 9) + 2( i1 - 7)
14 = 20 i1 - 18 - 54 - 14
i1 = 5 A
v1 = 6(5 - 2 - 7) + 2 3(5 - 2) + 2(5 - 7) = -10 V

3W
+
vy
3W
2A
6W
14 V
i1
+
v1
2vy
7A
2W
Fig. S1.3.40
41. (D) Let i1 and i2 be two loop current

0.5 vx = 500 i1 + 500( i1 - i2 ),
vx = -500 i1
5 i1 - 2 i2 = 0
K(i)
500( i2 - i1 ) + 900( i2 + 0.3) + 600( i2 - 0.6) = 0

-5 i1 + 20 i2 = 0.9
K(ii)
i1 = 20 mA, vx = -500 20m = -10 V

42. (C) 30 = 5 ia + 3( ia - 2.5) + 4( ia - 2.5 + 2)
Page
32
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
1.4
NETWORKS THEOREM
1. vTH , RTH = ?
3W
4. A simple equivalent circuit of the 2 terminal network
2W
6W
6V
shown in fig. P1.4.4 is
vTH, RTH
Fig. P.1.4.1
(A) 2 V, 4 W
(B) 4 V, 4 W
(C) 4 V, 5 W
(D) 2 V, 5 W
2. i N , R N = ?
2W
Fig. P.1.4.4
2W
R
v
4W
15 V
iN, RN
(A)
(B)
Fig. P.1.4.2
10
W
3
(A) 3 A,
(B) 10 A, 4 W
(C) 1,5 A, 6 W
2W
3W
i
i
(D) 1.5 A, 4 W
3. vTH , RTH = ?
2A
R
R
(C)
(D)
5. i N , R N = ?
1W
2W
vTH, RTH
6A
4W
3W
iN RN
Fig. P.1.4.3
(A) -2 V,
6
W
5
5
(C) 1 V,
W
6
(B) 2 V,
5
W
6
6
(D) -1 V,
W
5
Fig. P.1.4.5
(A) 4 A, 3 W
(B) 2 A, 6 W
(C) 2 A, 9 W
(D) 4 A, 2 W
www.gatehelp.com
Page
33
UNIT 1
6. vTH , RTH = ?
Networks
The value of the parameter are

25 W
30 W
20 W
vTH, RTH
5V
5A
vTH
RTH
iN
RN
(A)
4 V
2 W
2 A
2 W
(B)
4 V
2 W
2 A
3 W
(C)
8 V
1.2 W
30
3
1.2 W
8 V
5 W
8
5
5 W
(D)
Fig. P.1.4.6
10. v1 = ?
(A) -100 V, 75 W
(B) 155 V, 55 W
(C) 155 V, 37 W
(D) 145 V, 75 W
2W
3W
1W
6W
2W
8V
7. RTH = ?
1W
+
v1
6W
18 V
6W
Fig. P.1.4.10
6W
2A
RTH
5V
Fig. P.1.4.7
(A) 6 V
(B) 7 V
(C) 8 V
(D) 10 V
11. i1 = ?
(A) 3 W
(B) 12 W
(C) 6 W
(D)
4 kW
8. The Thevenin impedance across the terminals ab of
12 V
i1
20 V
4 kW
6 kW
24 V
3 kW
4 kW
the network shown in fig. P.1.4.8 is

a
3W
6W
2A
Fig. P.1.4.11
2V
8W
(A) 3 A
(B) 0.75 mA
(C) 2 mA
(D) 1.75 mA
8W
Fig. P.1.4.8
(A) 2 W
(B) 6 W
(C) 6.16 W
4
(D) W
3
A circuit is given in fig. P.1.4.1213. Find the

Thevenin equivalent as given in question..
10 W
16 W
40 W
5V
8W
9. For In the the circuit shown in fig. P.1.4.9 a network

and its Thevenin and Norton equivalent are given
2W
3W
Fig. P.1.4.1213
RTH
4V
iN
2A
vTH
RN
12. As viewed from terminal x and x is

(A) 8 V, 6 W
(B) 5 V, 6 W
(C) 5 V, 32 W
(D) 8 V, 32 W
Fig. P.1.4.9
Page
34
www.gatehelp.com
1A
Network Theorems
13. As viewed from terminal y and y is

(A) 8 V, 32 W
(B) 4 V, 32 W
(C) 5 V, 6 W
(D) 7 V, 6 W
Chap 1.4
19. vTH , RTH = ?

6W
3i1
14. A practical DC current source provide 20 kW to a
i1
iN,
4W
RN
50 W load and 20 kW to a 200 W load. The maximum

power, that can drawn from it, is
Fig. P1.4.19
(A) 22.5 kW
(B) 45 kW
(C) 30.3 kW
(D) 40 kW

In the circuit of fig. P.1.4.1516 when R = 0 W , the
(A) 0 W
(B) 1.2 W
(C) 2.4 W
(D) 3.6 W
20. vTH , RTH = ?
current iR equals 10 A.
2W
4W
4V
2W
4W
2W
5W
0.1v1
4A
vTH RTH
v1
iR
Fig. P.1.4.20
Fig. P.1.4.1516.
15. The value of R, for which it absorbs maximum
(A) 8 V, 5 W
(B) 8 V, 10 W
power, is
(C) 4 V, 5 W
(D) 4 V, 10 W
(A) 4 W
(B) 3 W
(C) 2 W
21. RTH = ?
3W
2W
16. The maximum power will be

(A) 50 W
(B) 100 W
(C) 200 W
(D) value of E is required
vx
4
4V
vx
RTH
17. Consider a 24 V battery of internal resistance
Fig. P.1.4.21
r = 4 W connected to a variable resistance RL . The rate

of heat dissipated in the resistor is maximum when the
current drawn from the battery is i . The current drawn
form the battery will be i 2 when RL is equal to
(A) 3 W
(B) 1.2 W
(C) 5 W
(D) 10 W
(A) 2 W
(B) 4 W
22. In the circuit shown in fig. P.1.4.22 the effective
(C) 8 W
(D) 12 W
resistance faced by the voltage source is
18. i N , R N = ?
4W
5W
10 W
i1
20i1
iN,
30 W
vs
RN
i
4
Fig. P.1.4.22
Fig. P.1.4.18
(A) 2 A, 20 W
(B) 2 A, -20 W
(A) 4 W
(B) 3 W
(C) 0 A, 20 W
(D) 0 A, -20 W
(C) 2 W
(D) 1 W
www.gatehelp.com
Page
35
UNIT 1
23. In the circuit of fig. P1.4.23 the value of RTH at
Networks
26. The value of RL will be
terminal ab is
ix
0.75va
16 V
Fig. P.1.4.2627
va
+
4W
Fig. P.1.4.23
(A) -3 W
9
W
8
(B)
8
W
3
(C) -
RL
2W
8W
9V
3W
0.9 A
(A) 2 W
(B) 3 W
(C) 1 W
27. The maximum power is
(A) 0.75 W
(B) 1.5 W
(C) 2.25 W
(D) 1.125 W
28. RTH = ?
24. RTH = ?
-2ix
200 W
va
100
va
+
100 W
50 W
RTH
100 W
300 W
Fig. P.1.4.24
(A)
(C)
(D)
125
W
3
maximum power if RL is equal to
(B) 136.4 W
(C) 200 W
(D) 272.8 W
29. Consider the circuits shown in fig. P.1.4.29

ia
100 W
200 W
2W
6W
6W
2W
2W
3i
(A) 100 W
i
6V
RTH
Fig. P.1.4.28
25. In the circuit of fig. P.1.4.25, the RL will absorb

40 W
+
vx
800 W
ix
(B) 0
3
W
125
100 W
0.01vx
RL
12 V
12 V
8V
Fig. P.1.4.25
6W
(A)
400
W
3
(B)
2
kW
9
(C)
800
W
3
(D)
4
kW
9
ib
2W
6W
6W
2W
18 V
2W
6W
3A
In the circuit shown in fig. P1.4.2627 the

maximum power transfer condition is met for the load
RL .
Page
36
www.gatehelp.com
Fig. P.1.4.29a & b
12 V
Network Theorems
Chap 1.4
33. If vs1 = 6 V and vs 2 = - 6 V then the value of va is
The relation between ia and ib is

(A) ib = ia + 6
(B) ib = ia + 2
(A) 4 V
(B) -4 V
(C) ib = 15
. ia
(D) ib = ia
(C) 6 V
(D) -6 V
34. A network N feeds a resistance R as shown in fig.
30. Req = ?
12 W
P1.4.34. Let the power consumed by R be P. If an
4W
identical network is added as shown in figure, the

Req
6W
power consumed by R will be
2W
18 W
6W
9W
Fig. P.1.4.30
Fig. P.1.4.34
72
(B)
W
13
(A) 18 W
36
(C)
W
13
(D) 9 W
31. In the lattice network the value of RL for the

maximum power transfer to it is
(A) equal to P
(B) less than P
(C) between P and 4P
(D) more than 4P
35. A certain network consists of a large number of

ideal linear resistors, one of which is R and two
constant ideal source. The power consumed by R is P1
7W
when only the first source is active, and P2 when only
6
W
the second source is active. If both sources are active

RL
simultaneously, then the power consumed by R is
9W
(A) P1 P2
(B)
(C) ( P1 P2 ) 2
(D) ( P1 P2 ) 2
P1 P2
Fig. P.1.4.31
(A) 6.67 W
(B) 9 W
36. A battery has a short-circuit current of 30 A and an
(C) 6.52 W
(D) 8 W
open circuit voltage of 24 V. If the battery is connected

to an electric bulb of resistance 2 W, the power
dissipated by the bulb is

A circuit is shown in fig. P.1.4.3233.
12 W
1W
3W
3W
1W
(A) 80 W
(B) 1800 W
(C) 112.5 W
(D) 228 W
37.
The
following
results
were
obtained
from
measurements taken between the two terminal of a

vs1
1W
va
vs2
resistive network
Terminal voltage
12 V
0V
Terminal current
0A
1.5 A
Fig. P.1.4.3233
32. If vs1 = vs 2 = 6 V then the value of va is

(A) 3 V
(B) 4 V
(C) 6 V
(D) 5 V
The Thevenin resistance of the network is

(A) 16 W
(B) 8 W
(C) 0
(D)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
37
UNIT 1
SOLUTIONS
38. A DC voltmeter with a sensitivity of 20 kW/V is used

to find the Thevenin equivalent of a linear network.
Reading on two scales are as follows
1. (B) vTH =
(a) 0 - 10 V scale : 4 V
The Thevenin voltage and the Thevenin resistance
(C) 18 V,
32
V,
3
1
MW
15
(D) 36 V,
200
kW
3
(B)
2
MW
15
( 6)( 6)
= 4 V,
3+ 6
RTH = ( 3||6) + 2 = 4 W
(b) 0 -15 V scale : 5 V
of the network is
16
200
(A)
V,
kW
3
3
Networks
2. (A)
2W
isc
Fig. S.1.4.2
R N = 2 ||4 + 2 =
+
RL
4W
15 V
39. Consider the network shown in fig. P.1.4.39.
Linear
Network
2W
v1
10
W,
3
15
2
v1 =
=6 V
1 1 1
+ +
2 2 4
v
isc = i N = 1 = 3 A
2
vab
Fig. P.1.4.39
The power absorbed by load resistance RL is

shown in table :
(2)( 3)(1)
= 1 V,
3+ 3
5
= 1||5 = W
6
3. (C) vTH =
RL
10 kW
30 kW
3.6 MW
4.8 MW
RTH
4. (B) After killing all source equivalent resistance is R

The value of RL , that would absorb maximum
power, is
(A) 60 kW
(B) 100 W
(C) 300 W
(D) 30 kW
Open circuit voltage = v1

5. (D) The short circuit current across the terminal is
2W
isc
40. Measurement made on terminal ab of a circuit of
6A
4W
3W
fig.P.1.4.40 yield the current-voltage characteristics

shown in fig. P.1.4.40. The Thevenin resistance is
Fig. S1.4.5
i(mA)
+
30
Resistive
Network
20
10
-4
-3 -2
-1
vab
Fig. P.1.4.40
isc =
6 4
= 4 A = iN ,
4+2
R N = 6 ||3 = 2 W
6. (B) For the calculation of RTH if we kill the sources
then 20 W resistance is inactive because 5 A source will
(A) 300 W
(B) -300 W
be open circuit
(C) 100 W
(D) -100 W
RTH = 30 + 25 = 55 W,
vTH = 5 + 5 30 = 155 V
***********
Page
38
www.gatehelp.com
Network Theorems
Chap 1.4
12. (B) We Thevenized the left side of xx and source
7. (C) After killing the source, RTH = 6 W
transformed right side of yy
6W
8W
16 W
8W
6W
RTH
4V
8V
Fig. S.1.4.7
Fig. S1.4.12
8. (B) After killing all source,

RTH = 3||6 + 8 ||8 = 6 W
4
8
+
= 8 24 = 5 V,
1
1
+
8 24
vxx = vTH
9. (D) voc = 2 2 + 4 = 8 V = vTH

RTH = 2 + 3 = 5 W = R N ,
iN =
RTH = 8 ||(16 + 8) = 6 W
vTH 8
= A
RTH 5
13. (D) Thevenin equivalent seen from terminal yy is

4
8
+
24
8 = 7 V,
=
1
1
+
24 8
10. (A) If we solve this circuit direct, we have to deal

with three variable. But by simple manipulation
v yy = vTH
variable can be reduced to one. By changing the LHS

and RHS in Thevenin equivalent
1W
1W
1W
RTH = ( 8 + 16)||8 = 6 W
2W
14. (A)
+
6W
4V
12 V
v1
RL
Fig. S1.4.10
Fig. S1.4.14
4
12
+
v1 = 1 + 1 1 + 2 = 6 V
1
1
1
+ +
1+1 6 1+2
ir
50 = 20 k,
r + 50
( r + 200) 2 = 4( r + 50) 2
11. (B) If we solve this circuit direct, we have to deal

with three variable. But by simple manipulation
r = 100 W
i = 30 A,
Pmax =
variable can be reduced to one. By changing the LHS

and RHS in Thevenin equivalent
2 kW
i1
4 kW
ir
200 = 20 k
r + 200
20 V
6V
( 30) 2 100
= 22.5 kW
4
15. (C) Thevenized the circuit across R, RTH = 2 W

4W
2 kW
2W
2W
4W
8V
2W
Fig. S1.4.15
Fig. S1.4.11
i1 =
20 - 6 - 8
= 0.75 mA
2k + 4k + 2k
16. (A) isc = 10 A, RTH = 2 W,

2
10
Pmax =
2 = 50 W
2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
39
UNIT 1
Now in this circuit all straight-through connection
Networks
i 2 R = ( P1 P2 ) 2
have been cut as shown in fig. S1.4.32b

6W
36. (C) r =
1W
3W
2W
P=
voc
= 1. 2 W
isc
24 2
2 = 112.5 W
(1. 2 + 2) 2
6V
va
37. (B) RTH =
voc 12
=
=8W
isc 15
.
Fig. S.1.4.32b
va =
6 (2 + 3)
=5 V
2 + 3+1
38. (A) Let
33. (B) Since both source have opposite polarity, hence

short circuit the all straight-through connection as
shown in fig. S.1.4.33
6W
2W
For 0 -10 V scale Rm = 10 20 k = 200 kW

For 0 -50 V scale Rm = 50 20 k = 1 MW
4
For 4 V reading i =
50 = 20 mA
10
vTH = 20mRTH + 20m 200 k = 4 + 20mRTH
5
For 5 V reading i =
50m = 5 mA
50
1W
3W
1
1
=
= 50 mA
sensitivity
20 k
vTH = 5m RTH + 5m 1M = 5 + 5mRTH

6V
va
Solving (i) and (ii)

16
200
V, RTH =
vTH =
kW
3
3
Fig. S1.4.33
39. (D) v10 k = 10 k 3.6m = 6
6 ( 6 ||3)
va = = -4 V
2 +1
v30 k = 30 k 4.8m = 12 V
34. (C) Let Thevenin equivalent of both network

RTH
RTH
vTH
vTH
RTH
vTH
6 =
10
vTH
10 + RTH
12 =
30 vTH
30 + RTH
10 vTH = 6 RTH + 60
5 vTH = 2 RTH + 60
RTH = 30 kW
40. (D) At v = 0 , isc = 30 mA
Fig. S1.4.34
At i = 0, voc = - 3 V
v
-3
RTH = oc =
= - 100 W
isc 30m
VTH
R
P =
RTH + R
V
TH
P =
R + RTH
2
VTH
R = 4
2 R + RTH
************
Thus P < P < 4 P

35. (C) i1 =
P1
P2
and i2 =
R
R
using superposition i = i1 + i2 =
Page
42
P1
P2
R
www.gatehelp.com
...(i)
...(ii)
CHAPTER
1.6
THE RLC CIRCUITS
1. The natural response of an RLC circuit is described
(A) iL ( t) + 1100 iL ( t) + 11 108 iL ( t) = 108 is ( t)
by the differential equation
(B) iL ( t) + 1100 iL ( t) + 11 108 iL ( t) = 108 is ( t)
d 2v
dv
dv(0)
+2
+ v = 0, v(0) = 10,
= 0.
dt 2
dt
dt
The v( t) is
(A) 10(1 + t) e - t V
(B) 10(1 - t) e - t V
(C) 10e - t V
(D) 10te - t V
vs
2W
1 mH
. iL ( t)
iL ( t) 11
. iL ( t) = is ( t)
+
+ 11
108
10 4
(D)
iL ( t) 11iL ( t)
+
+ 11iL ( t) = is ( t)
108
10 4
4. In the circuit of fig. P.1.6.4 vs = 0 for t > 0. The initial
2. The differential equation for the circuit shown in fig.

P1.6.2. is
(C)
condition are v(0) = 6 V and dv(0) dt = -3000 V s. The

v( t) for t > 0 is
1H
10 mF
100 W
vs
25 mF
80 W
+
vC
Fig. P1.6.2
(A) v( t) + 3000 v( t) + 102

. 108 v( t) = 108 vs ( t)
Fig. P1.6.4
(B) v( t) + 1000 v ( t) + 102

. 10 v( t) = 10 vs ( t)
8
(A) -2 e -100 t + 8 e -400 t V
(B) 6 e -100 t + 8 e -400 t V

(C)
2 v ( t)
v( t)
. v( t) = vs ( t)
+
+ 102
108
10 5
(C) 6 e -100 t - 8 e -400 t V
(D)
2 v ( t)
v( t)
. v( t) = vs ( t)
+
+ 198
8
10
10 5
5. The circuit shown in fig. P1.6.5 has been open for a

long time before closing at t = 0. The initial condition is
3. The differential equation for the circuit shown in fig.
v(0) = 2 V. The v( t) for t > is
P1.6.3 is
t=0
1H
10 W
is
3
4W
1
3F
+
vC
10 mF
100 W
Fig. P.1.6.5
iL
Fig. P.1.6.3
Page
54
-t
(A) 5 e - 7 e
-3t
(C) - e - t + 3e -3t V
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 7 e - t - 5 e -3t V
(D) 3e - t - e -3t V
The RLC Circuits
Statement for Q.67:
Chap 1.6
10. The switch of the circuit shown in fig. P1.6.10 is
Circuit is shown in fig. P.1.6. Initial conditions are
opened at t = 0 after long time. The v( t) , for t > 0 is
i1 (0) = i2 (0) = 11 A
t=0
3W
i1
i2
2H
1W
1
2H
1W
6V
+
vC
1
4F
2W
3H
Fig. P1.6.10
Fig. P1.6.67
6. i1 (1 s) = ?
(A) 4 e -2 t sin 2 t V
(B) -4 e -2 t sin 2 t V
(C) 4 e -2 t cos 2 t V
(D) -4 e -2 t cos 2 t V
(A) 0.78 A
(B) 1.46 A
11. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.23 the switch is opened at
(C) 2.56 A
(D) 3.62 A
t = 0 after long time. The current iL ( t) for t > 0 is

4H
iL
7. i2 (1 s) = ?
(A) 0.78 A
(B) 1.46 A
(C) 2.56 A
(D) 3.62 A
t=0
2W
1
4F
8W
8. vC ( t) = ? for t > 0
4W
7A
25 mH
Fig. P1.6.11
10 mF
100 W
30u(-t) mA
+
vC
(A) e -2 t (2 cos t + 4 sin t) A
(B) e -2 t ( 3 sin t - 4 cos t) A
(C) e -2 t ( -4 sin t + 2 cos t) A
(D)e -2 t (2 sin t - 4 cos t) A

Fig. P1.6.8
In the circuit shown in fig. P1.6.1214 all initial
(A) 4 e -1000 t - e -2000 t V
(B) ( 3 + 6000 t) e -2000 t V
(C) 2 e -1000 t + e -2000 t V
(D) ( 3 - 6000 t) e -2000 t V
condition are zero.

iL
9. The circuit shown in fig. P1.6.9 is in steady state

with switch open. At t = 0
10 mH
1 mF
+
vL
the switch is closed. The
output voltage vC ( t) for t > 0 is
Fig. P1.5.12-14
12. If is ( t) = 1 A, then the inductor current iL ( t) is
0.8 H
250 W
100
W
65
isu(t) A
500 W
t=0
9V
5 mF
+
vC
(A) 1 A
(B) t A
(C) t + 1 A
(D) 0 A
13. If is ( t) = 0.5 t A,
Fig. P1.6.9
(B) 2 t - 3250 A
-3
(D) 2 t + 3250 A
(A) 0.5 t + 3. 25 10
(C) 0.5 t - 0. 25 10
then iL ( t) is
-3
(B) e
-400 t
[ 3 cos 300 t + 4 sin 300 t ]
14. If is ( t) = 2 e -250 t A then iL ( t) is

4000 -250 t
4000 -250 t
(A)
A
(B)
A
te
e
3
3
(C) e
-300 t
[ 3 cos 400 t + 4 sin 300 t ]
(C)
(A) -9 e
-400 t
+ 12 e
-300 t
(D) e -300 t [ 3 cos 400 t + 2. 25 sin 300 t ]
200 -250 t
A
e
7
www.gatehelp.com
(D)
200 -250 t
A
te
7
Page
55
UNIT 1
15. The forced response for the capacitor voltage v f ( t) is
Networks
19. In the circuit shown in fig. P 1.5.19 v( t) for t > 0 is
100 W
2u(-t) A
iL
vx +
avx
50 W
1H
20 mH
0.04 F
+ vC
2W
4W
Fig. P1.6.15
(A) 0. 2 t + 117
. 10 -3 V
(B) 0. 2 t - 117
. 10 -3 V
(C) 117
. 10 -3 t - 0. 2 V
(D) 117
. 10 -3 t + 0. 2 V
50u(t) V
Fig. P1.6.19
16. For a RLC series circuit R = 20 W , L = 0.6 H, the

value of C will be
(B) 50 + ( 46.5 sin 3t + 62 cos 3t) e -4 t V
[CD =critically damped, OD =over damped,
(C) 50 + ( 62 cos 4 t + 46.5 sin 4 t) e -3t V
UD =under damped].
CD
OD
UD
(A) C = 6 mF
C >6 mF
C <6 mF
(B) C = 6 mF
C < 6 mF
C > 6 mF
(C) C >6 mF
C = 6 mF
C < 6 mF
(D) C < 6 mF
C =6 mF
C > 6 mF
(A) 50 - ( 46.5 sin 3t + 62 cos 3t) e -4 t V
(D) 50 - ( 62 cos 4 t + 46.5 sin 4 t) e -3t V

20. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.20 the switch is closed at
t = 0 after long time. The current i( t) for t > 0 is
1
16 F
+ vC
17. The circuit shown in fig. P1.6.17 is critically

damped. The value of R is
20 V
t=0
1
4H
Fig. P1.6.20
120 W
5W
iL
10 mF
4H
(A) -10 sin 8 t A
(B) 10 sin 8 t A
(C) -10 cos 8 t A
(D) 10 cos 8 t A
21. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.21 switch is moved from 8

Fig. P1.6.17
(A) 40 W
(B) 60 W
(C) 120 W
(D) 180 W
V to 12 V at t = 0. The voltage v( t) for t > 0 is

2W
t=0
18. The step response of an RLC series circuit is given
8V
12 V
by
1H
d 2 i( t) 2 di( t)
di(0 + )
= 4.
+
+ 5 i( t) = 10, i(0 + ) = 2,
dt
dt
dt
Fig. P1.6.21
(A) 12 - ( 4 cos 2 t + 2 sin 2 t) e - t V
The i( t) is
(A) 1 + e - t cos 4 t A
(B) 4 - 2 e - t cos 4 t A
(B) 12 - ( 4 cos 2 t + 8 sin 2 t) e - t V
(C) 2 + e - t sin 4 t A
(D) 10 + e - t sin 4 t A
(C) 12 + ( 4 cos 2 t + 8 sin 2 t) e - t V

(D) 12 + ( 4 cos 2 t + 2 sin 2 t) e - t V
Page
56
www.gatehelp.com
1
F
6
+
vC
The RLC Circuits
22. In the circuit of fig. P1.5.22 the voltage v( t) is
5W
3u(t) A
25. In the circuit shown in fig. P1.6.25 a steady state

has been established before switch closed. The i( t) for
1W
5H
t > 0 is
5W
+
vC
0.2 F
20 V
Chap 1.6
20 W
1H
2W
t=0
1
F
25
5W
100 V
Fig. P1.6.22
(A) 40 - (20 cos 0.6 t + 15 sin 0.6 t) e -0 .8 t V

(B) 35 + (15 cos 0.6 t + 20 sin 0.6 t) e
-0 .8 t
(C) 35 - (15 cos 0.6 t + 20 sin 0.6 t) e

(D) 35 - 15 cos 0.6 t e
-0 .8 t
-0 .8 t
Fig. P1.6.25
(A) 0.73e -2 t sin 4.58 t A
(B) 0.89 e -2 t sin 6.38 t A
(C) 0.73e -4 t sin 4.58 t A
23. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.23 the switch is opened at

t = 0 after long time. The current i( t) for t > 0 is
(D) 0.89 e -4 t sin 6.38 t A

26. The switch is closed after long time in the circuit of
fig. P1.6.26. The v( t) for t > 0 is
2A
2A
3
4H
10 W
1
3F
t=0
1W
1H
6W
5W
10 W
4V
t=0
1
25 F
+
vC
Fig. P1.6.23
(A) e-2 .306 t + e-0 . 869t A
Fig. P1.6.26
(B) -e -2 .306 t + 2 e -0 . 869t A
(A) -8 + 6 e -3t sin 4 t V
(C) e -4 .431 t + e -0 .903t A
(B) -12 + 4 e -3t cos 4 t V
(D) 2 e -4 .431 t - e -0 .903t A
(C) -12 + ( 4 cos 4 t + 3 sin 4 t) e -3t V
24. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.24 switch is moved from

position a to b at t = 0. The iL ( t) for t > 0 is
0.02 F
(D) -12 + ( 4 cos 4 t + 6 sin 4 t) e -3t V

27. i( t) = ?
2 kW
14 W
2 H t=0
2W
12 V
5 mF
12u(t) V
8 mH
a
iL
6W
Fig. P1.6.27
(A) 6 - ( 6 cos 500 t + 6 sin 5000 t) e -50 t mA

(B) 8 - ( 8 cos 500 t + 0.06 sin 5000 t) e -50 t mA
4A
Fig. P1.6.24
(A) ( 4 - 6 t) e 4 t A
(B) ( 3 - 6 t) e -4 t A
(C) ( 3 - 9 t) e -5t A
(D) ( 3 - 8 t) e -5t A
(C) 6 - ( 6 cos 5000 t + 0.06 sin 5000 t) e -50 t mA

(D) 6 e -50 t sin 5000 t mA
www.gatehelp.com
Page
57
UNIT 1
Networks
SOLUTIONS
28. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.28 i(0) = 1 A and v(0) = 0.

The current i( t) for t > 0 is
i
4u(t) A
1. (A) s 2 + 2 s + 1 = 0
2W
1H
s = -1, - 1,
v( t) = ( A1 + A2 t) e
dv(0)
v(0) = 10 V,
= 0 = - 1 A1 + A2
dt
0.5 F
A1 = A2 = 10
Fig. P1.6.28
(A) 4 + 6.38 e -0 .5t A
-t
(B) 4 - 6.38 e -0 .5t A
(C) 4 + ( 3 cos 1.32 t + 113

. sin 1.32 t) e -0 .5t A
2. (A) iL =
(D) 4 - ( 3 cos 1.32 t + 113

. sin 1.32 t) e -0 .5t A
v
dv
+ 10 10 -6
100
dt
iL
29. In the circuit of fig. P1.6.29 a steady state has been
2W
1 mH
established before switch closed. The vo( t) for t > 0 is

10 W
vs
t=0
5W
3A
10 mF
1H
Fig. S1.6.2
vo
vs = 2 iL + 10 -3
Fig. P1.6.29
(A) 100 te -10 t V
(B) 200 te -10 t V
(C) 400 te -50 t V
(D) 800 te -50 t V
108 vs ( t) = v( t) + 3000 v( t) + 102

. v( t)
t > 0 is
established before switch closed. The i( t) for

i
1H
1
4F
2W
t=0
(B) -e
sin 2 t A
(C) -2(1 - t) e
-2 t
-2 t
sin 2 t A
(D) 2(1 - t) e -2 t A
4. (A)

established. The i( t) for t > 0 is
i
3A
10 W
6u(t) A
diL
di
d 2 iL
+ iL + 10 -4 L + 10 -8
dt
dt
dt 2
.
iL ( t) 11
. iL ( t) = is ( t)
+
iL ( t) + 11
108
10 4
Fig. P1.6.30
(A) 2 e
vC
dvC
+ iL + 10m
100
dt
di
vC = 10 iL + 10 -3 L
dt
di
d
di
is = 0.1iL + 10 -5 L + iL + 10 -5 (10 iL + 10 -3 L )
dt
dt
dt
3. (C) is =
= 0.1iL + 10 -5
6V
-2 t
diL
+v
dt
1 dv
dv
d2 v
v
+ v
+ 10 -3
= 2
+ 10 -6 10 - t
+ 10 10 -6
dt
dt 2
100
100 dt
1W
10 mF
100 W
40 W
10 mF
4H
v
dv
+ 25m
+ ( v - vs ) dt = 0
80
dt
d 2v
dv
+ 500
+ 40000 = 0
2
dt
dt
s 2 + 500 s + 40000 = 0
s = -100, - 400,
v( t) = Ae -100 t + Be -400 t
A + B = 6, -100 A - 400 B = -3000
Fig. P1.6.31
(A) 9 + 2 e
-10 t
- 8e
-2 .5t
(B) 9 - 8 e
10 t
(C) 9 + (2 cos 10 t + sin 10 t) e
-2 .5t
(D) 9 + (cos 10 t + 2 sin 10 t) e -2 .5t A

***************
Page
58
+ 2e
-2 .5t
B = 8, A = -2
A
5. (C) The characteristic equation is s 2 +
After putting the values,
v( t) = Ae - t + Be -3t ,
www.gatehelp.com
s2 + 4 s + 3 = 0
1
s
+
=0
RC LC
The RLC Circuits
v(0 + ) = 2 V
iL (0 + ) = 0
iR (0) =
-C
9. (B) vC (0 + ) = 3 V , iL (0 + ) = -12 mA
A + B =2
dv(0 + ) 8
=
dt
3
vC
dvC
+ iL + 5 10 -6
=0
250
dt
2
8
= ,
34 3
dvC (0 + )
3
dvC (0 + )
- 12m + 5 10 -6
=0
=0
dt
250
dt
1
s
+
=0
s2 +
-6
250 5 10
0.8 5 10 -6
dv(0 + )
= - 8,
dt
- A - 3B = -8, B = 3, A = -1
di1
di
- 3 2 = 0,
dt
dt
3di2
di
2 i2 +
- 3 1 =0
dt
dt
6. (D) i1 + 5
i1 = A e
+ Be
-2 t
10. (B) v(0 + ) = 0,

s2 + 4 s + 8 = 0
A1 = 0,
, i(0) = A + B = 11
1
6
i2 = - e
2W
1
4F
t
6
+ De
+ 12 e
di2 (0) -143

C
=
= - - 2D
dt
6
6
A, i2 (1 s) = e
+
vC
8W
diL (0 + )
diL (0 + )
= 8 - ( -4) 8
= 10
dt
dt
1
s
vC + vC + iL = 0, vC = 4 siL + 8 iL
4
2
-2 t
s 2 iL + 4 siL + 5 = 0, s = -2 j
and D = 12
-2 t
4H
Fig. S1.6.11
1
6
+ 12 e
-2
= 0.78 A
iL ( t) = e-2 t ( A1 cos t + A2 sin t)

A1 = -4,
8. (B) vC (0 + ) = 30m 100 = 3 V

dvC (0 - )
dvC (0 + )
= iL (0 - ) = 0 = iL (0 + ) = C
dt
dt
100
1
s2 +
s+
25 10 -3
25 10 -3 10 10 -6
C
vC (0 + ) = 8 V
iL
+ 8 e -2 = 3.62 A
i2 (0) = 11 = C + D,
t
6
11. (D) iL (0 + ) = -4,
+ 8e ,
7. (A) i2 = Ce
dvC (0 + )
= -8 = -2 (0 + 0) + (0 + 2 A2 ), A2 = -4
dt
-2 t
i1 (1 s) = 3e
C = -1
s = - 2 j2
vC ( t) = e ( A1 cos 2 t + A2 sin 2 t)
di1 (0 + )
33 di2 (0 + )
143
==,
dt
2
dt
6
A
33
- 2 B = - , A = 3, B = 8,
6
2
i1 = 3e
1 dvC (0 + )
= -2
4 xdt
iL (0 + ) = 2 A,
-2 t
In differential equation putting t = 0 and solving
t
6
s = -400 j 300
vC ( t) = e-400 t ( A1 cos 300 t + A2 sin 300 t)

dvC (0)
A1 = 3,
= -400 A1 + 300 A2 , A2 = 4
dt
6 s 2 + 13s + 2 = 0
1
s = - , -2
6
1
- t
6
s 2 + 800 s + 25 10 4 = 0
(1 + 5 s) i1 - 3si2 = 0, -3si1 + (2 + 3s) i2 = 0

( 3s)( 3s) i1
(1 + 5 s) i1 =0
2 + 3s
Chap 1.6
s = -2000, -2000
diL (0 + )
= 10 = -2 ( A1 + 0) + A2 , A2 = 2
dt
12. (A) is =
is =
v
dv
di
+ 10 -3
+ iL , v = 10 10 -3 L
100 65
dt
dt
di
d 2 iL
65
(10 10 -3) L + 10 -3(10 10 -3)
+ iL = 0
dt
dt
100
d 2 iL
di
+ 650 L + 10 5 iL = 10 5 is
dt
dt
vC ( t) = ( A1 + A2 t) e -2000 t
dvC ( t)
= A2 e -2000 t + ( A1 + A2 t) e -2000 t ( -2000)
dt
dvC (0)
= A2 - 2000 3 = 0
vC (0 + ) = A1 = 3,
dt
0 + 0 + 10 5 B = 10 5,
0 + 650 A + ( At + B)10 5 = 10 5(0.5 t), A = 0.5
A2 = 6000
Trying iL ( t) = B
B = 1,
iL = 1 A
13. (A) Trying iL ( t) = At + B,

www.gatehelp.com
Page
59
The RLC Circuits
Chap 1.6
di(0 + ) -16
=
= -4.431 A - 0.903B
dt
3
28.(D) i(0 + ) = 1 A, v(0 + ) =
A = 1, B = 1
a=
Ldi(0 + )
dt
1
= 0.5,
2 2 0.5
4 6
=3
6 +2
dvC (0)
dv (0)
= 150
0.02 C
= iL (0) = 3
dt
dt
6 + 14
1
a=
= 5,
wo =
=5
22
2 0.02
1 = 4 + A,
A = -3
di(0)
= 0 = 0.5 A + 1.32 B,
dt
a = wo critically damped
29. (B) Vo(0 + ) = 0 ,iL (0 + ) = 1 A
24. (C) vC (0) = 0,
v( t) = 12 + ( A + Bt) e
0 = 12 + A,
v( t) = 12 + (90 t - 12) e
A = -12,
iL ( t) = 0.02( -5) e (90 t - 12) + 0.02(90) e
-5t
= ( 3 - 9 t) e
-5t
diL (0 + )
= v1 (0) = 0
dt
1
a=
= 10,
2 5 0.01
B = -113
.
Wo =
1
1 0.01
= 10
a = Wo, so critically damped response
100 5
50
,
25. (A) v(0 ) =
=
5 + 5 + 20
3
+
iL (0 ) = 0
s = -10, - 10
i( t) = 3( A + Bt) e -10 t ,
if = 0 A
i(0) = 1 = 3 + A
di(0 )
= -10 A + B
dt
diL (0 + )
50 10
= 20 =
dt
3
3
4
1
a=
= 2, wo =
=5
21
1
1
25
iL ( t) = 3 - (2 + 20 t) e -10 t ,
i( t) = ( A cos 4.58 t + B sin 4.58 t) e -2 t

26.(A) iL (0 + ) = 0, vL (0 + ) = 4 - 12 = -8
+
LdiL ( t)
= 200 te -10 t
dt
di(0 + )
-6
vc (0 + ) = 2 1 = 2 =
= -2 A,
dt
1+2
1
1
1
a=
=
= 2,
Wo =
=2
2 RC 2 1 0.25
LC
a = Wo, critically damped response
s = -2 , -2
1 dvL (0 )
= iL (0 + ) = 0
25
dt
6
1
a = = 3, Wo =
=5
2
1 1 / 25
A = -2
i( t) = ( A + Bt) e -2 t ,
di( t)
= ( -2 + Bt) e 2 t ( -2) + (0 + B) e -2 t
dt
b = -3 9 - 25 = -3 j 4
v1 ( t) = -12 + ( A cos 4 t + B sin 4 t) e
vo =
30. (C) i(0 + ) =
s = -2 4 - 25 = -2 j 4.58
At t = 0, B = -2
-3t
vL (0) = -8 = 12 + A,
A =4
dvL (0)
= 0 = -3 A + 4 B,
B=3
dt
1
1
=
= 50
2 RC 2 2 k 54
1
1
=
= 5000
LC
8 m 5m
27. (C) a =
Wo =
B = 90
-5t
-5t
= 2
i( t) = 4 + ( A cos 1.32 t + B sin 1.32 t) e -0 .5t
-5t
1 - 0.5
s = -0.5 0.5 2 - 2 = 0.5 j1.323
iL (0) =
150 = -5 A + B
Wo =
31. (A) i(0 + ) = 3 A, vC (0 + ) = 0 V =

is = 9 A, R = 10||40 = 8 W
1
1
a=
=
= 6.25
2 RC 2 8 0.01
1
1
Wo =
=
=5
LC
4 0.01
a > Wo, so overdamped response
a < Wo, underdamped response.
s = -6.25 6.25 2 - 25 = -10, -2.5
s = -50 50 2 - 5000 2 = -50 j5000
i( t) = 9 + Ae -10 t + Be -2 .5t
i( t) = 6 + ( A cos 5000 t + B sin 5000 t) e -50 t mA
3 = 9 + A + B,
i(0) = 6 = 6 + A,
A = -6
di(0)
= -50 A + 5000 B = 0,
B = -0.06
dt
4 di(0 + )
dt
0 = -10 A - 2.5 B
On solving, A = 2, B = -8
************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
61
CHAPTER
1.7
SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE ANALYSIS
1. i( t) = ?
20cos 300t V
(A)
3W
(C)
25 mH
1
2
1
2
cos (2 t - 45 ) V
(B)
sin (2 t - 45 ) V
(D)
1
2
1
2
cos (2 t + 45 ) V
sin (2 t + 45 ) V
4. vC ( t) = ?
Fig. P1.7.1
3H
(A) 20 cos ( 300 t + 68. 2 ) A

(B) 20 cos( 300 t - 68. 2 ) A
8cos 5t V
(C) 2.48 cos( 300 t + 68. 2 ) A
+
vC
50 mF
9W
(D) 2.48 cos( 300 t - 68. 2 ) A
Fig. P1.7.4
2. vC ( t) = ?
(A) 2. 25 cos (5 t + 150 ) V
3
cos 10 t A
2W
+
vC
1 mF
(B) 2. 25 cos (5 t - 150 ) V

(C) 2. 25 cos (5 t + 140.71 ) V
(D) 2. 25 cos (5 t - 140.71 ) V
Fig. P1.7.2
(A) 0.89 cos (10 3 t - 63.43 ) V
5. i( t) = ?
(B) 0.89 cos (10 3 t + 63.43 ) V
1W
4W
(C) 0.45 cos (10 t + 26.57 ) V

3
(D) 0.45 cos (10 t - 26.57 ) V

3
10cos 2t V
0.25 F
4H
3. vC ( t) = ?
5W
cos 2t V
0.1 F
Fig. P1.7.5
+
vC
(A) 2 sin (2 t + 5.77 ) A
(B) cos (2 t - 84. 23 ) A
(C) 2 sin (2 t - 5.77 ) A
(D) cos (2 t + 84. 23 ) A
Fig. P1.7.3
Page
62
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
13. In the bridge shown in fig. P1.7.13, Z1 = 300 W,

Z 2 = ( 300 - j 600) W, Z 3 = (200 + j 100)W. The Z 4
Networks
Statement for Q.17-18:
at
The circuit is as shown in fig. P1.7.17-18
balance is
1W
1W
1H
1H
1W
i1
10cos (4t-30 ) V
1F
i2
5cos 4t V
Fig. P1.7.1718
17. i1 ( t) = ?
(A) 2.36 cos ( 4 t - 4107
. ) A
Fig. P1.7.13
(A) 400 + j 300 W
(B) 400 - j 300 W
(C) j100 W
(D) - j900 W
(B) 2.36 cos ( 4 t + 4107

. ) A
(C) 1.37 cos ( 4 t - 4107
. ) A
(D) 2.36 cos ( 4 t + 4107
. ) A
14. In a two element series circuit, the applied

voltage
and
the
resulting
current
are
v( t) = 60 + 66 sin (10 3 t) V, i( t) = 2.3 sin (10 3 t + 68.3 ) A.

The nature of the elements would be
(A) R - C
(B) L - C
(C) R - L
(D) R - R
(A) 2.04 sin ( 4 t + 92.13 ) A

(B) -2.04 sin ( 4 t + 2.13 ) A
(C) 2.04 cos ( 4 t + 2.13 ) A
(D) -2.04 cos ( 4 t + 92.13 ) A
19. I x = ?
15. Vo = ?
40 W
j20
120-15o V
18. i2 ( t) = ?
50 W
-j30
Ix
630 A
1030 V
Fig. P1.7.15
-j2 W
(B) 22356 V
(C) 124 - 154 V
(D) 124 154 V
16. vo( t) = ?
(A) 394
. 46. 28 A
(B) 4.62 97.38 A
(C) 7.42 92.49 A
(D) 6.78 49. 27 A
20. Vx = ?
3W
j10 W
20 W
10sin (t+30o) V
1F
+
vo
j3 W
Fig. P1.7.19
(A) 223 - 56 V
1H
0.5Ix
4W
Vo
20cos (t-45 ) V
4Vx
30 A
o
20 W
+
Vx
Fig. P1.7.16
Fig. P1.7.20
(A) 315
. cos ( t + 112 ) V
(B) 43. 2 cos ( t + 23 ) V
(A) 29.11166 V
(B) 29.11 - 166 V
(C) 315
. cos ( t - 112 ) V
(C) 43. 24 124 V
(D) 43. 24 - 124 V
(D) 43. 2 cos ( t - 23 ) V

Page
64
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
Networks
35. In the circuit shown in fig. P1.7.35 power factor is
Determine the complex power for hte given values
-j2
4W
in question.
27. P = 269 W, Q = 150 VAR (capacitive)
(A) 150 - j269 VA
(B) 150 + j269 VA
(C) 269 - j150 VA
(D) 269 + j150 VA
-j2
j5
Fig. P1.7.35
28. Q = 2000 VAR, pf = 0.9 (leading)

(A) 4129.8 + j2000 VA
(B) 2000 + j 4129.8 VA
(C) 2000 - j 4129

. .8 VA
(D) 4129.8 - j2000 VA
(A) 56.31 (leading)
(B) 56.31 (lagging)
(C) 0.555 (lagging)
(D) 0.555 (leading)
36. The power factor seen by the voltage source is

29. S = 60 VA, Q = 45 VAR (inductive)
(A) 39.69 + j 45 VA
(B) 39.69 - j 45 VA
(C) 45 + j 39.69 VA
(D) 45 - j 39.69 VA
4W
1W
+ v1
10cos 2t V
30. Vrms = 220 V, P = 1 kW, |Z |= 40 W (inductive)

(A) 1000 - j 68125
. VA
(B) 1000 + j 68125

. VA
(C) 68125
. + j1000 VA
(D) 68125
. - j1000 VA
31. Vrms = 2120 V, Vrms = 2120 V, I rms = 8.5 - 50 A

(A) 154.6 + j 89.3 VA
(B) 154.6 - j 89.3 VA
(C) 61 + j167.7 VA
(D) 61 - j167.7 VA
1
3F
3v
4 1
Fig. P1.7.36
(A) 0.8 (leading)
(B) 0.8 (lagging)
(C) 36.9 (leading)
(D) 39.6 (lagging)
37. The average power supplied by the dependent

source is
32. Vrms = 120 30 V, Z = 40 + j 80 W
Ix
(A) 72 + j144 VA
(B) 72 - j144 VA
(C) 144 + j72 VA
(D) 144 - j72 VA
290 A
o
j1.92
4.8 W
8W
1.6Ix
33. Vo = ?
Fig. P1.7.37
60 A
o
16 kW
0.9 pf lagging
VO
20 kW
0.8 pf lagging
(A) 96 W
(B) -96 W
(C) 92 W
(D) -192 W
38. In the circuit of fig. P1.7.38 the maximum power
Fig. P1.7.33
absorbed by Z L is
(A) 7.132. 29 kV
(B) 42.59 32.29 kV
(C) 38.49 24.39 kV
(D) 38.49 32. 29 kV
10 W
1200o V
34. A relay coil is connected to a 210 V, 50 Hz supply. If
j15
-j10
it has resistance of 30 W and an inductance of 0.5 H, the

Fig. P1.7.38
apparent power is
Page
66
(A) 30 VA
(B) 275.6 VA
(C) 157 VA
(D) 187 VA
(A) 180 W
(B) 90 W
(C) 140 W
(D) 700 W
www.gatehelp.com
ZL
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis
Chap 1.7
39. The value of the load impedance, that would
The line impedance connecting the source to load is
absorbs the maximum average power is
0.3 + j0.2 W. If the current in a phase of load 1 is
j100
320o A
I = 10 20 A rms , the current in source in ab branch is
-j40
80 W
ZL
(A) 15 - 122 A rms
(B) 8.67 - 122 A rms
(C) 15 27.9 A rms
(D) 8.67 - 57.9 A rms
45.
Fig. P1.7.39
(A) 12.8 - j 49.6 W
(B) 12.8 + j 49.6 W
(C) 339
. - j 86.3 W
(D) 339
. + j 86.3 W
An
abc
phase
sequence
3-phase
balanced
Y-connected source supplies power to a balanced

D connected load. The impedance per phase in the load
is 10 + j 8 W. If the line current in a phase is
I aA = 28.10 - 28.66 A rms and the line impedance is
zero, the load voltage V AB is

In a balanced Yconnected three phase generator
Vab = 400 Vrms
40. If phase sequence is abc then phase voltage
Va , Vb , and Vc are respectively
(A) 207.8 - 140 Vrms
(B) 148.340 Vrms
(C) 148.3 - 40 Vrms
(D) 207.8 40 Vrms
46. The magnitude of the complex power supplied by a

3-phase balanced Y-Y system is 3600 VA. The line
voltage is 208 Vrms . If the line impedance is negligible
(A) 2310 , 231120 , 231240
and the power factor angle of the load is 25, the load
(B) 231 - 30 , 231 - 150 , 23190
impedance is
(C) 23130 , 231150 , 231 - 90
(A) 5.07 + j10.88 W
(B) 10.88 + j5.07 W
(D) 23160 , 231180 , 231 - 60
(C) 432
. + j14.6 W
(D) 14.6 + j 432

. W
41. If phase sequence is acb then phase voltage are

(A) 2310 , 231120 , 231240
(B) 231 - 30 , 231 - 150 , 23190
***********
(C) 23130 , 231150 , 231 - 90

(D) 23160 , 231180 , 231 - 60
42. A balanced three-phase Y-connected load has one
phase voltage Vc = 277 45 V. The phase sequence is
abc. The line to line voltage V AB is
(A) 480 45 V
(B) 480 - 45 V
(C) 339 45 V
(D) 339 - 45 V
43. A three-phase circuit has two parallel balanced D

loads, one of the 6 W resistor and one of 12 W resistors.
The magnitude of the total line current, when the
line-to-line voltage is 480 Vrms , is
(A) 120 A rms
(B) 360 A rms
(C) 208 A rms
(D) 470 A rms
44. In a balanced three-phase system, the source has an

abc phase sequence and is connected in delta. There are
two parallel Y-connected load. The phase impedance of
load 1 and load 2 is 4 + j 4 W and 10 + j 4 W respectively.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
67
UNIT 1
SOLUTIONS
-j
7. (C) Z =
||( 6 + j(27m) w)
w(22m )
1. (D) Z = 3 + j(25m)( 300) = 3 + j7.5 W = 8.08 68. 2

I=
20 0
= 2.48 - 68. 2 A
8.08 68. 2
i( t) = 2.48 cos ( 300 t - 68. 2 ) A

1
+ j(1m)(10 3) = 0.5 + j = 112
. 63.43
2
(10)
VC =
= 0.89 - 63.43 V
112
. 63.43
2. (A) Y =
vC ( t) = 0.89 cos (10 3 t - 63.43 ) V
(10) (5 - 90 )
vC ( t) =
5 2 - 45
1
2
27 10 3 j 6 106
- j106
( 6 + j27 10 -3 w)
22
22 w
= 22 w
=
6
10
106
6 + j(27mw )
6 + jw 27m 22 w
22 w2
j27 10 3
- j 36 106
22
w22
106
w 27m 22 w2
w = 1278
1278
w
Hz =
= 203 Hz
f =
2p
2p
V1 = Vs - V2 = 7.68 47 - 7.5135 = 159

. 125
9. (B) vin = 32 + (14 - 10) 2 = 5
- 45 V
10. (C) I1 = 744 - 118 mA,
cos (2 t - 45 ) V
I 2 = 540 100 mA
4. (D) Z = 9 + j( 3)(5) +
I = I1 + I 2 = 744 - 118 + 540.5 100
-j
= 9 + j11
(50m) (5)
= 460 - 164
i( t) = 460 cos ( 3t - 164 ) mA
Z = 14.2150.71 W
( 8 0)( 4 - 90 )
VC =
= 2. 25 140.71 V
14. 2150.71
11. (A)
2 45 =
VC
V - 20 0
+ C
- j4
j5 + 10
vC ( t) = 2. 25 cos (5 t - 140.71 ) V
j50
10 0
10 0
1
5. (B) Va =
V
=
1
1
1
105
. + j0.4
+
+
1 - j2 4 + j 8
I=
= 0
8. (C) Vs = 7.68 47 V, V2 = 7.5135
-j
3. (A) Z = 5 +
= 5 - j5 = 5 5 - 45
(0.1)(2)
VC =
Networks
245 A
o
+
-j4
Va
10 0
=
= 1 - 84. 23 A
4 + j 8 1 + j10
1W
Va
100 V
200 V
o
Fig. S1.7.11
4W
I
VC
10 W
-j2
j8
(1 + j)( - j 4)(10 + j5) = VC (10 + j5 - j 4) + j 8
60 - j100 = VC (10 + j)
VC = 11.6 - 64.7
12. (D) X = X L + X C = 0
Fig. S1.7.5
i( t) = cos (2 t - 84.23 ) A
6. (D) w = 2 p 10 10 3 = 2 p 10 4
-j
1
Y = j(1m )(2 p 10 4 ) +
+
4
(160m )(2 p 10 ) 36
= 0.0278 - j0.0366 S
1
Z=
= 1316
. + j17.33 W
Y
Page
68
So reactive power drawn from the source is zero.

13. (B) Z1 Z 4 = Z 3Z 2
300 Z 4 = ( 300 - j 600)(200 + j100)
Z 4 = 400 - j 300
14. (A) R - C causes a positive phase shift in voltage
Z =|Z |q , -90 < q < 0 ,
I=
V
V
=
-q
Z |Z |
www.gatehelp.com
120 15
- 6 30
40 + j20
15. (C) Vo =
= 124 - 154
1
1
1
+
+
40 + j20 - j 30 50
20. (B) Let Vo be the voltage across current source

Vo - 4 Vx Vo - Vx
+
=3
20
j10
Vo(20 + j10) - (20 + j 40) Vx = j 600
Vo(20)
V
Vx =
Vo = x (2 + j)
20 + j10
2
16. (C) 10 sin ( t + 30 ) = 10 cos ( t - 60 )

10 - 60 20 - 45
+
j
3
Vo =
1
1
1
+
+
j -j 3
(2 + j)(20 + j10)
Vx =
- 20(1 + j2) = j 600
2
j 600
Vx =
= 29. 22 - 166
-5 - j20
= 30 - 150 +20 - 45
. - 112 V
Vo = 315
10-60 V
j V - V2
21. (A) I1 = V3 + 3
= j0.1V2 + j0.4 V3
j10
2
3W
j1
-j1 W
Vo
= (0.190 )(0.757 66.7 ) + (0.4 90 )(0.606 - 69.8 )
20-45 V
o
I1 = 0.196 35.6
22. (A)
Fig. S.1.7.16
1W
50 V
o
1W
10-30 V
o
120 V
o
-j0.25 W
j4
2W
I1
Vo
I2
2W
( 8 + j15) I1 - ( 4 - j) I 2 = 20 0
j
j
-10 - 30 = I 2 (1 + j 4 + 1 - ) - I1 (1 - )
4
4
( 4 - j) I1 - ( 8 + j15) I 2 = 40 - 30
...(i)
20o A
Fig. P1.7.23
...(ii)
12 0 = I1 ( - j 3 + 2 + 2) + 8 90 -4 0
= (20 0)( 8 + j15) - ( 40 - 30 )( 4 - j)
I1 ( -176 + j248) = 41.43 + j 414.64
. + j0.64 + j 4) = 11.65 52.82 V

Vo = 2( 352
. - j0.9 = 1.37 - 4107

.
I1 = 103
. + j0.64
I1 = 352
24. (D) I 2 = 30 A , I 4 - I 3 = 6 0 A
( 8 + j15)(103
. - j0.9) - 20 0
18. (B) I 2 =
4-j
= -0.076 + j2.04
2W
I1 [( 8 + j15) - ( 4 - j) ]
2
490 V
Fig. S.1.7.17
Vo = 5.65 - 75
-j3
I2
23. (D) I 2 = 4 90 , I 3 = 2 0
j4
1W
I1
Vo Vo - 3Vo
+
= 4 - 30
2
j4
Vo(0.5 + j0.5) = 3.46 - j2
j
j
17. (C) 5 0 = I1 j 4 + 1 + 1 - - I 2 1 -
4
4
j4
Chap 1.7
Io
I 2 = 2.04 92.13
1590o V
2W
I2
-j4
j2
30o A
19. (B) 10 30 = 4 I1 - 0.5 I x + ( - j2) I x

( - j2) I x = ( I1 - I x ) j 3, I1 =
4
10 30 = - 0.5 - j2 I x
3
Ix
3
1W
Ix =
10 30
2.17 - 67.38
I3
60 A
I4
o
1W
Fig. S.1.7.24
I 3(1) + ( I 3 - I o)( - j 4) + ( I 4 + I 2 )( j2) + I 4 = 0

www.gatehelp.com
Page
69
UNIT 1
I 3 + ( I 3 - I o)( - j 4) + ( I 3 + 6 0 +30 )( j2) + I 3 + 60 = 0

I 3(2 - j2) + I o( j 4) = -18 j - 6
-I ( j2) - 3 - 9 j
I3 = o
(1 - j)
S2 = 20 + j
15 90 = ( I o + 30 )(2) + ( I o - I 3)( - j 4)
VTH =
|V |2
(120) 2
=
= 72 + j144 VA
Z*
40 - j 80
20
sin (cos -1 (0.8)) = 20 + j15
0.8
S = VoI * = 6 Vo
( j10)( 8 - j5)
=
= 9 + j 4.4
8 + j10 - j5
S=
|V |2
(210) 2
=
*
Z
30 - j157
...(i)
Apparent power =|S |=
...(ii)
35. (D) Z = 4 +
300 I 2 = 3V1 , V1 = ( - j 300)( I1 - I 2 )

I 2 = - j 3( I1 - I 2 )
3I1 = ( 3 + j) I 2
Solving (i) and (ii) I 2 = 12.36 - 16 mA
36. (A)
q = 25.84
3V
4 1
-j1.5
Fig. S.1.7.36
I1 = 136.9
(136.9 )(10 0 )
S=
= 5 - 36.9
2
S = 4129.8 - j2000
29. (A) Q = S sin q
1W
Q
2000
=
= 4588.6 VA
sin q sin 25.84
P = S cos q = 4129.8,
V1 = 4 36.9 ,
+ V1
I1
o
S=
4W
100 V
= 275.6 VA
( - j2)( j5 - j2)
- j2 + j5 - j2
10 - V1
V1 3
+ V1 =
4
4
1 - j15
.
27. (C) S = P - jQ = 269 - j150 VA
Q = S sin q
30 2 + 152 2
pf = cos 56.31 = 0.555 leading
-2 V1 - V1 = 0 V1 = 0
9 0
I sc =
= 15 0 mA
600
311
. - 16
V
Z TH = oc =
= 247 - 16 W
I sc 15 0 10 -3
(210) 2
= 4 - j 6 = 7.21 - 56.31,
. - 16
Voc = 300 I 2 = 371
28. (D) pf = cos q = 0.9
Vo = 7.132.29
34. (B) Z = 30 + j(0.5)(2 p)(50) = 30 + j157,
( 32 0 )( j10)
= 339
. 58 V
8 + j10 - j5
26 (D) ( 600 - j 300) I1 + j 300 I 2 = 9
16
sin (cos -1 (0.9)) = 16 + j7.75
0.9
S = S1 + S2 = 36 + j2.75 = 42.59 32.29
j15 = 2 I o + 6 + ( j 4)( 3 - j 6)
25. (A) Z TH
32. (A) S =
33. (A) S1 = 16 + j
I3 = Io + 3 - j6
Networks
sin q =
Q 45
or
=
S 60
q = 48.59 ,
pf = cos 36.9 = 0.8 leading

37. (A) (2 - 90 ) 4.8 = - I x ( 4.8 + j192
. ) + 0.6 I x ( 8)
P = S cos q = 39.69,
Ix
j1.92
Va
S = 39.69 + j 45 VA
4.8 W
|V |2 (220 2 )
30. (B) S = rms =
= 1210
|Z |
40
1.6Ix
(290o)4.8 V
P 1000
cos q = =
= 0.8264 or q = 34.26 ,
S 1210
Fig. S.1.7.37
Q = S sin q = 68125,
.
S = 1000 + j 68125
. VA
*
31. (C) S = Vrms I rms
= (2120 )( 8.5 50 )
I x = 5 0 ,
Va = 0.6 5 8 = 24 0 ,
1
Pave = 24 1.6 5 = 96
2
= 61 + j167.7 VA
Page
70
www.gatehelp.com
8W
38. (A) Z TH =
VTH =
( - j10)(10 + j15)
= 8 - j14 W
10 + j15 - j10
120( - j10)
= 107.3 - 116.6 V
10 + j5
40. (B) Va =
I aA
3
( q + 30 ) = 16.22 1.34 A rms
= 207.8 40 Vrms
46. (B) |S |= 3VL I L
ZY =
( - j 40)( 80 + j100)
= 12.8 - j 49.6 W
80 + j 60
400
45. (D) I AB =
V AB = I AB Z D = (16. 22 1.340 )(10 + j 8)
107.3 - 116.6
IL =
= 6.7 - 116.6
16
1
PLmax = ( 6.7) 2 8 = 180 W
2
39. (B) Z TH =
Chap 1.7
208
10 3
IL =
3600
208 3
= 10 A rms
25 = 12 25 = 10.88 + j5.07 W
********
- 30 = 231 - 30 V
Vb = 231 - 150 V, Vc = 231 - 270 V

41. (C) For the acb sequence
Vab = Va - Vb = Vp 0 - Vp 120
1
3
400 = Vp 1 + - j
2
2
400
Vp =
30
3
= Vp 3 - 30
Va = Vp 0 = 23130 V,
Vb = Vp 120 = 231150 V
Vc = Vp 240 = 231 - 90 V
42. (B) V A = 277 ( 45 -120 ) = 277 - 75 V
VB = 277 ( 45 + 120 ) = 277 165 V
V AB = V A - VB = 480 - 45 V
43. (C) Z A = 6 ||12 = 4,
IP =
480
= 120 A rms
4
I L = 3I P = 208 A rms
44 (B) I =
I aA (10 + j 4)
= 10 20
(10 + j 4) + ( 4 + j 4)
IaA
Iac
Iab
Ibc
IbB
b
icC
Fig. S.1.7.44
I aA = 15 - 27.9 A rms
|I |
I ab = - aA ( q + 30 ) = 8.67 - 122.1 A rms
3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
71
CHAPTER
1.8
CIRCUIT ANALYSIS IN THE S-DOMAIN
s2 + 1
s2 + 2 s + 1
2 s2 + 1
(C) 2
s + 2s + 2
1. Z ( s) = ?
2( s 2 + 1)
( s + 1) 2
s2 + 1
(D)
3s + 2
(A)
1F
2H
Z(s)
1W
1W
(B)
4. Z ( s) = ?
1W
Z(s)
1H
1W
s 2 + 3s + 1
s( s + 1)
2 s 2 + 3s + 1
(D)
2 s( s + 1)
(B)
Fig. P1.8.1
s 2 + 15
. s+1
(A)
s( s + 1)
2 s 2 + 3s + 2
(C)
s( s + 1)
0.5 F
Fig. P1.8.4
2. Z ( s) = ?
3s 2 + 8 s + 7
s(5 s + 6)
3s 2 + 7 s + 6
(C)
s(5 s + 6)
s(5 s + 6)
3s 2 + 8 s + 7
s(5 s + 6)
(D)
3s 2 + 7 s + 6
(B)
(A)
1F
Z(s)
1W
1H
1W
5. The s-domain equivalent of the circuit of Fig.P1.8.5. is

t=0
Fig. P1.8.2
s + s+1
s( s + 1)
s( s + 1)
(C)
2 s2 + s + 1
2s + s + 1
s( s + 1)
s( s + 1)
(D) 2
s + s+1
3W
(A)
(B)
6V
3F
+
vC
Fig. P1.8.5
3. Z ( s) = ?
3W
3W
+
1
3s
1H
Z(s)
2W
1F
Fig. P1.8.3
6 V
s
(A)
(C) Both A and B
Page
72
1
3s
VC(s)
www.gatehelp.com
+
VC(s)
-
(B)
(D) None of these
2A
Circuit Analysis in the s-Domain
Chap 1.8
6. The sdomain equivalent of the circuit shown in Fig.
9. For the network shown in fig. P1.8.9 voltage ratio
P1.8.6 is
transfer function G12 is

t=0
+
12 W
2A
2H
1H
1H
1F
1F
vL
v1
1F
1F
1F
+
v2
-
Fig. P1.8.6
Fig. P1.8.9
(A)
(B)
+
(A)
( s 2 + 2)
5 s + 5 s2 + 1
(B)
s2 + 1
5 s + 5 s2 + 1
(C)
( s 2 + 2) 2
5 s4 + 5 s2 + 1
(D)
( s 2 + 1) 2
5 s4 + 5 s2 + 1
2s
12 W
12 W
VL
2A
s
VL
2s
4V
-
(C) Both A and B
10. For the network shown in fig. P1.8.10, the

admittance transfer function is
(D) None of these
Y12 =
K ( s + 1)
( s + 2)( s + 4)
3
W
2
The circuit is as shown in fig. P1.8.78. Solve the
i1
problem and choose correct option.
i2
1W
+
+
is
1W
1H
io
v1
+
vs
1F
1F
1W
2F
2F
Fig. P1.8.10
The value of K is
(A) -3
V ( s)
7. H1 ( s) = o
=?
Vs ( s)
(C)
(A) s( s3 + 2 s2 + 3s + 1) -1
(B) 3
1
3
(D) -
1
3
11. In the circuit of fig. P1.8.11 the switch is in position
(B) ( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1) -1
1 for a long time and thrown to position 2 at t = 0. The
(C) ( s 3 + 2 s 2 + 3s + 2) -1
equation for the loop currents I1 ( s) and I 2 ( s) are
(D) s( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s2 + 2) -1
1F
I o( s)
=?
Vs ( s)
t=0
12 V
(A)
-s
( s + 3s + 2 s + 1)
(B) -( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1) -1
(C)
-s
3
2
( s + 2 s + 3s + 1)
(D) ( s 3 + 2 s 2 + 3s + 2) -1
v2
Fig. P1.8.78
vo
8. H 2 ( s) =
1W
i1
3H
2W
i2
1F
Fig. P1.8.11
2 + 3s + s
(A)
-3s
www.gatehelp.com
- 3s
1
2+
s
12
I1 ( s) s
I ( s) =
2 0

Page
73
UNIT 1
2 + 3s + s
(B)
-3s
- 3s
1
2+
s
12
I1 ( s) - s
I ( s) =
2 0
-3s
2 + 3s + s
(C)
2 + 3s +
-3s
12
I1 ( s) - s
=
1 I 2 ( s)
0
-3s
2 + 3s + s
(D)
2 + 3s +
-3s
12
I1 ( s) s
=
1 I 2 ( s)
0
s

Networks
3F
S1
-
4F
Va
+
5V
10 V
2F
1V
S2
+
6V
5V
Fig. P1.8.14
(A)
9
t
(B) 9e - t V
(C) 9 V
(D) 0 V
15. A unit step current of 1 A is applied to a network

whose driving point impedance is
12. In the circuit of fig. P1.8.12 at terminal ab
The steady state and initial values of the voltage
4 A
+
Vo(s)
-
2W
(s+1)
developed across the source would be respectively
2Vo(s)
(A)
3
4
(C)
3
4
V, I V
1
4
V,
3
4
(D) 1 V,
3
4
(B)
V, 0 V
16. In the circuit of Fig. P1.8.16 i(0) = 1 A, vC (0) = 8
Fig. P1.8.12
V and v1 = 2 e -2 10 t u( t). The i( t) is
(A) VTH ( s) =
-8( s + 2)
-(2 s + 1)
, Z TH ( s) =
3s( s + 1)
3s
(B) VTH ( s) =
8( s + 2)
(2 s + 1)
, Z TH ( s) =
3s( s + 1)
3s
(C) VTH ( s) =
4( s + 3)
(2 s + 1)
, Z TH ( s) =
3s( s + 1)
6s
50 W
1m H
2.5 mF
v1
+
vC
Fig. P1.8.16
4
-4( s + 3)
-(2 s + 1)
(D) VTH ( s) =
, Z TH ( s) =
3s( s + 1)
6s
(A)
1
15
[10 e-10
(B)
1
15
[ -10 e -10
13. In the circuit of fig. P1.8.13 just before the closing of
(C) 13 [10 e-10
switch at t = 0, the initial conditions are known to be
(D) 13 [ -10 e -10
V ( s) ( s + 3)
=
I ( s) ( s + 2) 2
Z ( s) =
Thevenin equivalent is
vC1 (0 ) = 1 V, vC2 (0 ) = 0. The voltage vC1 ( t) is
- 3e-2 10
t
4
- 22 e-4 10 t ]u( t) A
+ 3e -2 10
+ 3e-2 10
+ 22 e -4 10 t ]u( t) A
4
+ 22 e-4 10 t ]u( t) A
+ 3e -2 10
- 22 e -4 10 t ]u( t) A
17. In the circuit shown in Fig. P1.8.18 v(0 - ) = 8 V and

+
vC1
-
iin ( t) = 4d( t). The vC ( t) for t 0 is
t=0
1F
1F
+
vC2
-
iin
50 W
20 mF
Fig. P1.8.13
(A) u( t) V
(C) 0.5 e
-t
(B) 0.5 u( t) V
V
Fig. P1.8.17
(D) e - t V
-
14. The initial condition at t = 0 of a switched capacitor
(A) 164e- t V
(B) 208e- t V
(C) 208(1 - e -3t ) V
(D) 164 e -3t V
circuit are shown in Fig. P1.8.14. Switch S1 and S2 are

closed at t = 0. The voltage va ( t) for t > 0 is
Page
74
+
vC
www.gatehelp.com
18. The driving point impedance Z ( s) of a network has
Chap 1.8
The steady state voltage across capacitor is
the pole zero location as shown in Fig. P1.8.18. If
(A) 6 V
(B) 0 V
Z(0) = 3, the Z ( s) is
(C)
(D) 2 V
jw
23.
-3
transformed
VC ( s) =
-1
4( s + 3)
s2 + s + 1
(B)
2( s + 3)
(C) 2
s + 2s + 2
2( s + 3)
2
s + 2s + 2
4( s + 3)
(D) 2
s + s+2
20 s + 6
(10 s + 3)( s + 4)
(B) - 0.12 mA
(C) 0.48 mA
(D) - 0.48 mA
24. The current through an 4 H inductor is given by

I L ( s) =
The circuit is as shown in the fig. P1.8.1921. All

initial conditions are zero.
io
1H
60 mF
the
(A) 0.12 mA
iin
across
The initial current through capacitor is
Fig. P1.8.18
(A)
voltage
capacitor is given by
-1
The
1W
1F
10
s( s + 2)
The initial voltage across inductor is

(A) 40 V
(B) 20 V
(C) 10 V
(D) 5 V
25. The amplifier network shown in fig. P1.8.25
1W
is stable if
4W
1F
1H
Fig. P1.8.1921
19.
I o( s)
=?
I in ( s)
(A)
( s + 1)
2s
+
+
v1 Amplifier v
2
gain=K
-
2W
(B) 2 s( s + 1) -1
(C) ( s + 1) s -1
Fig.P1.8.25
(D) s( s + 1) -1
(A) K 3
20. If iin ( t) = 4d( t) then io( t) will be
(C) K
(A) 4d( t) - e- t u( t) A
(B) 4 d( t) - 4 e- t u( t) A
(B) K 3
1
3
(D) K
1
3
26. The network shown in fig. P1.8.26 is stable if
(C) 4 e - t u( t) - 4 d( t) A
2F
1W
(D) e - t u( t) - d( t) A
21. If iin ( t) = tu( t) then io( t) will be

(A) e - t u( t) A
(B) (1 - e - t ) u( t) A
(C) u( t) A
(D) (2 - e - t ) u( t) A
Kv2
1W
1F
v2
-
Fig.P1.8.26
22. The voltage across 200 mF capacitor is given by

VC ( s) =
2s + 6
s( s + 3)
5
2
2
(C) K
5
(A) K
www.gatehelp.com
5
2
2
(D) K
5
(B) K
Page
75
UNIT 1
27. A circuit has a transfer function with a pole s = - 4

and a zero which may be adjusted in position as s = - a
The response of this system to a step input has a term
of form Ke -4 t . The K will be
a
(A) H 1 -
4
(H= scale factor)

a
(B) H 1 +
4
(C) H 4 -
4
(D) H 4 +
4
io( t) = 2 sin 2 t u( t) A. The circuit had no internal stored

energy at t = 0. The admittance transfer function is
2
s
(A)
(B)
s
2
(D)
31. The current ratio transfer function
Io
is
Is
(A)
s( s + 4)
s + 3s + 4
(B)
s( s + 4)
( s + 1)( s + 3)
(C)
s 2 + 3s + 4
s( s + 4)
(D)
( s + 1)( s + 3)
s( s + 4)
32. The response is
28. A circuit has input vin ( t) = cos 2 t u( t) V and output
(C) s
Networks
1
s
(A) Over damped
(B) Under damped
(C) Critically damped
(D) cant be determined
33. If input is is 2u( t) A, the output current io is

(A) (2 e - t - 3te -3t ) u( t) A
(B) ( 3te - t - e -3t ) u( t) A
(C) ( 3e - t - e -3t ) u( t) A
(D) ( e -3t - 3e - t ) u( t) A
34. In the network of Fig. P1.8.34, all initial condition

are zero. The damping exhibited by the network is
29. A two terminal network consists of a coil having an

inductance L and resistance R shunted by a capacitor
1F
4
C. The poles of the driving point impedance function Z

of this network are at - 12 j
3
2
and zero at -1. If
Z(0) = 1 the value of R, L, C are

1
(A) 3 W, 3 H, F
3
2H
vs
2W
vo
-
1
(B) 2 W, 2 H, F
2
Fig. P1.8.34
1
(C) 1 W, 2 H, F
2
(D) 1 W, 1 H, 1 F
(A) Over damped

(B) Under damped
30. The current response of a network to a unit step

input is

(D) value of voltage is requires
10( s + 2)
Io = 2
s ( s + 11s + 30)
35. The voltage response of a network to a unit step

input is
The response is
(A) Under damped
(B) Over damped
Vo( s) =
10
s( s 2 + 8 s + 16)
The response is
(A) under damped
(B) over damped
(C) critically damped
(D) cant be determined
The circuit is shown in fig. P1.8.31-33.

36. The response of an initially relaxed circuit to a
1H
io
signal vs is e -2 t u( t). If the signal is changed to vs +

, the response would be
1F
is
4W
(A) 5 e -2 t u( t)
(B) -3e -2 t u( t)
(C) 4 e -2 t u( t)
(D) -4 e -2 t u( t)
Fig. P1.8.31-33
Page
76
www.gatehelp.com
2 dvs
dt
37. Consider the following statements in the circuit

shown in fig. P1.8.37
i
4W
2H
1W
10 V
1F
+
vC
42. The network function
(B) RL admittance
(C) LC impedance function
(D) LC admittance
43. A valid immittance function is

( s + 4)( s + 8)
s( s + 1)
(A)
(B)
( s + 2)( s - 5)
( s + 2)( s + 5)
s( s + 2)( s + 3)
( s + 1)( s + 4)
(C)
1. It is a first order circuit with steady state value of
10
5
, i= A
vC =
3
3
2. It is a second order circuit with steady state of
vC = 2 V , i = 2 A
V ( s)
has one pole.
I ( s)
V ( s)
has two poles.
I ( s)
(D)
(B) 1 and 4
(C) 2 and 3
(D) 2 and 4
(B) RC admittance
(C) LC admittance
(D) Above all
Z ( s) =
3W
s 2 + 10 s + 24
represent a
s 2 + 8 s + 15
1F
(C) LC impedance
(D) None of these
3W
8F
1F
(A)
(B)
1F
1W
1H
1F
s( 3s + 8)
represents an
( s + 1)( s + 3)
1W
3W
(C)
(A) RL admittance
(B) RC impedance
(C) RC admittance
1W
s( s + 4)
represents
( s + 1)( s + 2)( s + 3)
(B) RL impedance
1W
1F
(C) LC impedance
(A) RC impedance
3( s + 2)( s + 4)
s( s + 3)
The network for this function is
(B) RL impedance
an
s 2 + 8 s + 15
is a
s2 + 6 s + 8
45. A impedance function is given as
(A) RC admittance
s( s + 2)( s + 6)
( s + 1)( s + 4)
(A) RLadmittance
The true statements are

(A) 1 and 3
s2 + 7 s + 6
is a
s+2
(A) RL impedance function
Fig. P1.8.37
Chap 1.8
( s + 1)( s + 4)
is a
s( s + 2)( s + 5)
1H
3W
(D)
************
(A) RL impedance function

(B) RC impedance function
(C) LC impedance function
(D) Above all
www.gatehelp.com
Page
77
UNIT 1
18. (B) Z ( s) =
K ( s + 3)
K ( s + 3)
= 2
( s - ( -1 + j))( s - (1 - j)) s + 2 s + 2
3K
Z (0) =
=3
2
I ( s)
19. (D) o
=
I in ( s)
26. (B) Let v1 be the node voltage of middle node

V1 ( s) =
K =2
s
s+1
s
1
+
s+1 s+1
4s
4
=4s+1
s+1
s
s+1
(2 s + 1) V2 ( s) = 2 sV1 ( s)
( 3s + 1)(2 s + 1) = 2 s(2 s + K )
2 s 2 + (5 - 2 K ) s + 1 = 0,
5
5 - 2 K > 0, K <
2
io( t) = 4 d( t) - 4 e - t u( t)
H ( s + a)
s+4
27. (A) H ( s) =
1
,
s2
1
1
1
I o( s) =
= s( s + 1) s s + 1
21. (B) I in ( s) =
H 1 -
H ( s + a) Ha
4
R( s) =
=
+
s( s + 4)
4s
s+4
io( t) = u( t) - e - t u( t) = (1 - e - t ) u( t)
22. (D) vC ( ) = lim sVC ( s) = lim
s 0
KV2 ( s) + 2 sV2 ( s)
1 + 2s + s
( 3s + 1) V1 ( s) = (2 s + K ) V2 ( s)
2 sV1 ( s)
V2 ( s) =
2s + 1
20. (B) I in ( s) = 4
I o( s) =
Networks
s 0
r ( t) =
2s + 6
=2 V
s+3
Ha
a
u( t) + H 1 - e - 4 t
4
4
28. (A) Vin ( s) =

23. (D) vC (0 + ) = lim sVC ( s)=
s
CdvC
iC =
dt
s(20 s + 6)
=2 V
(10 s + 3)( s + 4)
I C ( s) = C[ sVC ( s) - vC (0 )]
s(20 s + 6)
-480 10 -6 (10 s + 3)
= 60 10 -6
- 2 =
10 s 2 + 43s + 12
(10 s + 3)( s + 4)
R
1
1
s +
C
L
sC =
29. (D) Z ( s) =
R
1
1
s2 +
sL + R +
+
L LC
sC
K ( s + 1)
K ( s + 1)
Z ( s) =
= 2
(
s
+ s + 1)
1
3
1
3
s + + j
s + - j
2
2
2
2
( sL + R)
iC (0 + ) = lim sI C ( s) = - 480 10 -6 = - 0.48 mA
I o( s) 2
s
2
, I o( s) = 2
,
=
s2 + 1
s + 1 Vin ( s) s
d iL
VL ( s) = L [ sI L ( s) - iL (0 + )]
dt
10
iL (0 + ) = lim sI L ( s) =
=0
s
s+2
24. (A) vL = L
VL ( s) =
s 40
= 40
s+2
25. (A) V2 ( s) = KV1 ( s)

V1 ( s) V1 ( s) - KV1 ( s)
+
=0
1
2
4+s+
s
1
4 + s + + 2 - 2K = 0
s
s2 + ( 6 - 2 K ) s + 1 = 0
(6 - 2K ) > 0
Page
80
1
Cs
R
40 s
40
=
s( s + 2) s + 2
vL (0 + ) = lim sVL ( s) =
sL
Z(s)
Fig. S1.8.29
Since Z (0) = 1, thus K = 1

1
R
1
= 1,
= 1,
=1
C
L
LC
C = 1, L = 1, R = 1
30. (B) The characteristic equation is

s 2 ( s 2 + 11s + 30) = 0
s 2 ( s + 6) ( s + 5) =0
s = -6, - 5, Being real and unequal, it is overdamped.
K <3
www.gatehelp.com
31. (B)
Io
s+4
s( s + 4)
=
=
3
Is s + 4 +
( s + 1)( s + 3)
s
39. (D) Poles and zero does not interlace on negative

real axis so it is not a immittance function.
32. (A) The characteristic equation is ( s + 1) ( s + 3) = 0.

Being real and unequal root, it is overdamped response.
33. (C) is = 2 u( t)
I o ( s) =
40. (C) The singularity nearest to origin is a zero. So it

may be RL impedance or RC
admittance function.
Because of (D) option it is required to check that it is a

valid RC
2
I s ( s) =
s
Chap 1.8
admittance function. The poles and zeros
interlace along the negative real axis. The residues of

YRC ( s)
are real and positive.
s
2( s + 4)
3
1
=
( s + 1)( s + 3)
s+1 s+ 3
io = ( 3e- t - e-3t ) u( t) A
41. (B) The singularity nearest to origin is a pole. So it

may be RC impedance or RL admittance function.
V ( s)
2
1
34. (B) o
=
= 2
4
Vs ( s)
+ 2s + 2 s + s + 2
s
42. (A)
The roots are imaginary so network is underdamped.
s 2 + 7 s + 6 ( s + 1)( s + 6)
=
s+2
( s + 2)
The singularity nearest to origin is at zero. So it may be
35. (C) The characteristic equation is
RC admittance or RL impedance function.
s( s 2 + 8 s + 16) = 0, ( s + 4) 2 = 0, s = -4, - 4
43. (D)
Being real and repeated root, it is critically damped.
(A) pole lie on positive real axis
36. (B) vo = e -2 t u( t)
vs = vs +
2 dvs
dt
Vo( s) = H ( s) Vs ( s) =
(B) poles and zero does not interlace on axis.
1
s+2
(C) poles and zero does not interlace on axis.

(D) is a valid immittance function.
Vs( s) = (1 + 2 s) Vs ( s)
44. (A)
Vo( s) = H ( s) Vs( s) = (1 + 2 s) Vs ( s) H ( s)
Vo( s) =
1 + 2s
3
=2 s+2
s+2
vo = 2 d( s) - 3e -2 t u( t)
The singularity nearest to origin is a pole. So it may be

a RL admittance or RC impedance function.
37. (C) It is a second order circuit. In steady state

i=
10
=2 A , v =2 1 =2 V
4+1
I ( s) =
10
2s + 4 +
V ( s) =
1
1
1+ s
2
10
1
1+ s
2
1
(2 s + 4) +
1
1+ s
2
s 2 + 8 s + 15 ( s + 3) ( s + 5)
=
s 2 + 6 s + 8 ( s + 2) ( s + 4)
45. (A) The singularity nearest to origin is a pole. So

this is RC impedance function.
8
1
8
13
Z ( s) = 3 + +
=3+ +
s s+3
s 1+ s
3
5( s + 2)
( s + 2) 2 + 1
**************
10
( s + 2) 2 + 1
V ( s)
2
, It has one pole at s = -2
=
I ( s) s + 2
38. (D)
s 2 + 10 s + 24 ( s + 4)( s + 6)
=
s 2 + 8 s + 15 ( s + 3)( s + 5)
The singularity near to origin is pole. So it may be RC

impedance or RL admittance function.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
81
CHAPTER
1.9
MAGNETICALLY COUPLED CIRCUITS
4. If i1 = e -2 t V and i2 = 0, the voltage v2 is

In the circuit of fig. P1.9.1-2 i1 = 4 sin 2 t A, and
i2 = 0.
i2
i1
1H
+
2H
v1
(A) -6 e -2 t V
(B) 6 e -2 t V
(C) 15
. e -2 t V
(D) -15
. e -2 t V

Consider the circuit shown in fig. P19.5-6
v2
1H
i2
i1
2H
Fig. P1.9.1-2
v1
2H
3H
v2
1. v1 = ?
(A) -16 cos 2 t V
(B) 16 cos 2 t V
(C) 4 cos 2 t V
(D) -4 cos 2 t V
Fig. P1.9.5-6
5. If current i1 = 3 cos 4 t A and i2 = 0, then voltage v1 and
2. v2 = ?
(A) 2 cos 2 t V
(B) -2 cos 2 t V
v2 are
(C) 8 cos 2 t V
(D) -8 cos 2 t V
(A) v1 = -24 sin 4 t V,
v2 = -24 sin 4 t V
(B) v1 = 24 sin 4 t V,
v2 = -36 sin 4 t V
(C) v1 = 15
. sin 4 t V,
v2 = sin 4 t V
(D) v1 = -15
. sin 4 t V,
v2 = -sin 4 t V

Consider the circuit shown in Fig. P1.9.3-4
i2
i1
3H
+
v1
3H
+
4H
v2
-
Fig. P1.9.5-6
3. If i1 = 0 and i2 = 2 sin 4 t A, the voltage v1 is
Page
82
(A) 24 cos 4 t V
(B) -24 cos 4 t V
(C) 15
. cos 4 t V
(D) -15
. cos 4 t V
6. If current i1 = 0 and i2 = 4 sin 3t A, then voltage v1 and

v2 are
(A) v1 = 24 cos 3t V,
v2 = 36 cos 3t V
(B) v1 = 24 cos 3t V,
v2 = -36 cos 3t V
(C) v1 = -24 cos 3t V,
v2 = 36 cos 3t V
(D) v1 = -24 cos 3t V,
v2 = -36 cos 3t V
www.gatehelp.com
Magnetically Coupled Circuits
Chap 1.9
12. Leq = ?
In the circuit shown in fig. P1.9.7-8, i1 = 3 cos 3t A
3.6 H
and i2 = 4 sin 3t A.
Leq
1H
+
v1
1H
i2
i1
2H
1.4 H
+
v2
2H
Fig. P1.9.12
(A) 4 H
(B) 6 H
(C) 7 H
(D) 0 H
Fig. P1.9.7-8
7. v1 = ?
(A) 6( -2 cos t + 3 sin t) V
(B) 6( 2 cos t + 3 sin t) V
(C) -6(2 cos t + 3 sin t) V
(D) 6(2 cos t - 3 sin t) V
13. Leq = ?
4H
Leq
2H
8. v2 = ?
2H
(A) 3( 8 cos 3t - 3 sin t) V
(B) 6(2 cos t + 3 sin t) V
(C) 3( 8 cos 3t + 3 sin 3t) V
(D) 6(2 cos t - 3 sin t) V

In the circuit shown in fig. P1.9.9-10, i1 = 5 sin 3t A
and i2 = 3 cos 3t A
3H
(A) 2 H
(B) 4 H
(C) 6 H
(D) 8 H
14. Leq = ?
i2
i1
Fig. P1.9.13
4H
+
Leq
v1
3H
v2
4H
6H
4H
Fig. P1.9.14
Fig. P1.9.9-10
9. v1 =?
(A) 9(5 cos 3t + 3 sin 3t) V
(B) 9(5 cos 3t - 3 sin 3t) V
(C) 9( 4 cos 3t + 5 sin 3t) V
(D) 9(5 cos 3t - 3 sin 3t) V
(A) 8 H
(B) 6 H
(C) 4 H
(D) 2 H
15. Leq = ?
2H
10. v2 = ?
(A) 9( -4 sin 3t + 5 cos 3t) V
(B) 9( 4 sin 3t - 5 cos 3t) V
(C) 9( -4 sin 3t - 5 cos 3t) V
(D) 9( 4 sin 3t + 5 cos 3t) V
Leq
11. In the circuit shown in fig. P1.9.11 if current
Fig. P1.9.15
i1 = 5 cos (500 t - 20 ) mA and i2 = 20 cos (500 t - 20 ) mA,

the total energy stored in system at t = 0 is
i2
i1
k=0.6
2H
4H
(A) 0.4 H
(B) 2 H
(C) 1.2 H
(D) 6 H
16. The equivalent inductance of a pair of a coupled

v1
2.5 H
0.4 H
v2
inductor in various configuration are
(a) 7 H after series adding connection
Fig. P1.9.11
(A) 151.14 mJ
(B) 45.24 mJ
(C) 249.44 mJ
(D) 143.46 mJ
(b) 1.8 H after series opposing connection

(c) 0.5 H after parallel connection with dotted
terminal connected together.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
83
UNIT 1
Networks
20. Leq = ?
The value of L1 , L2 and M are

(A) 3 H, 1.6 H, 1.2 H
(B) 1.6 H, 3 H, 1.4 H
(C) 3.7 H, 0.7 H, 1.3 H
(D) 2 H, 3 H, 3 H
1H
1H
Leq
2H
17. Leq = ?
2H
2H
3H
Leq
2H
4H
Fig. P1.9.20
Fig. P1.9.17
(A) 0.2 H
(B) 1 H
(C) 0.4 H
(D) 2 H
(A) 1 H
(B) 2 H
(C) 3 H
(D) 4 H
21. Leq = ?
4H
18. Leq = ?
Leq
3H
Leq
3H
3H
2H
2H
3H
5H
Fig. P1.9.21
Fig. P1.9.18
41
(A)
H
5
(B)
49
H
5
51
H
5
(D)
39
H
5
(C)
(A) 1 H
(B) 2 H
(C) 3 H
(D) 4 H
19. In the network of fig. P1.9.19 following terminal are
Consider the circuit shown in fig. P1.9.2224.
connected together
(i) none
(ii) A to B
(iii) B to C
(iv) A to C
2H
a
A
2H
3H
6t A
20 H
C
5H
4H
3H
5H
Fig. P1.9.2224
1H
22. The voltage V AG of terminal AD is
Fig. P1.9.19
(A) 60 V
(B) -60 V
(C) 180 V
(D) 240 V
The correct match for equivalent induction seen at

terminal a - b is
Page
84
4H
6H
15t A
23. The voltage vBG of terminal BD is
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(A) 45 V
(B) 33 V
(A)
1 H
0.875 H
0.6 H
0.75 H
(C) 69 V
(D) 105 V
(B)
13 H
0.875 H
0.6 H
0.75 H
(C)
13 H
7.375 H
6.6 H
2.4375 H
(A) 30 V
(B) 0 V
(D)
1 H
7.375 H
6.6 H
2.4375 H
(C) -36 V
(D) 36 V
24. The voltage vCG of terminal CD is
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
Networks
33. In the circuit of fig. P1.9.33 the w = 2 rad s. The
37. In the circuit of fig. P1.9.37 the maximum power
resonance occurs when C is
delivered to RL is
10 W
2H
Zin
1 : 4
4W
2H
2H
100 Vrms
RL
Fig. P1.9.33
(A) 1 F
(C)
1
3
Fig. P1.9.37
(B)
1
2
(D)
1
6
34. In the circuit of fig. P1.9.34, the voltage gain is zero

at w = 333.33 rad s. The value of C is
20 W
vin
0.12 H
(B) 200 W
(C) 150 W
(D) 100 W
38. The average power delivered to the 8 W load in the

circuit of fig. P1.9.38 is
40 W
0.09 H
(A) 250 W
300 W
0.27 H
2F
I1
I2
+
+
vout
-
50 Vrms
+
8W
V1
-
-0.04V2
Fig. P1.9.34
5 : 1
Fig. P1.9.38
(A) 100 mF
(B) 75 mF
(A) 8 W
(B) 1.25 kW
(C) 50 mF
(D) 25 mF
(C) 625 kW
(D) 2.50 kW
35. In the circuit of fig. P1.9.35 at w = 333.33 rad s, the
39. In the circuit of fig. P1.9.39 the ideal source supplies
voltage gain vout vin is zero. The value of C is
1000 W, half of which is delivered to the 100 W load. The
value of a and b are
20 W
4W
40 W
k=0.5
vin
0.12 H
25 W
1 : a
+
0.27 H
20 W
100 Vrms
vout
1 : b
100 W
Fig. P1.9.39
Fig. P1.9.35
(A) 3.33 mF
(B) 33.33 mF
(C) 3.33 mF
(D) 33.33 mF
36. The Thevenin equivalent at terminal ab for the
(A) 6, 0.47
(B) 5, 0.89
(C) 0.89, 5
(D) 0.47, 6
40. I 2 = ?
25 W
network shown in fig. P1.9.36 is

60 W
I2
2W
3 : 1
1 : 4
50 Vrms
4 : 3
3W
20Ix
20 W
Fig. P1.9.40
Ix
b
Fig. P1.9.36
Page
86
V2
-
(A) 6 V, 10 W
(B) 6 V, 4 W
(C) 0 V, 4 W
(D) 0 V, 10 W
(A) 1.65 A rms
(B) 0.18 A rms
(C) 0.66 A rms
(D) 5.90 A rms
www.gatehelp.com
41. V2 = ?
Chap 1.9
SOLUTIONS
50 W
40 W
1. (B) v1 = 2
5 : 2
80 Vrms
10 W
V2
2. (C) v2 = (1)
Fig. P1.9.41
(A) -12.31 V
(B) 12.31 V
(C) -9.231 V
(D) 9.231 V
42. The power being dissipated in 400 W resistor is

1W
di2
di
di
+ (1) 1 = 1 = 8 cos 2 t V
dt
dt
dt
3. (B) v1 = 3
di1
di
di
- 3 2 = - 3 2 = - 24 cos 4 t V
dt
dt
dt
4. (C) v2 = 4
di
di2
di
- 3 1 = - 3 1 = 6 e -2 t V
dt
dt
dt
di1
di
di
- 2 2 = 2 1 = -24 sin 4 t V
dt
dt
dt
di2
di1
di1
v2 = -3
+2
=2
= -24 sin 4 t V
dt
dt
dt
5. (A) v1 = 2
4W
1 : 2
10 Vrms
di1
di
di
+ 1 2 = 2 1 = 16 cos 2 t V
dt
dt
dt
1 : 5
48 W
400 W
di1
di
di
- 2 2 = - 2 2 = - 24 cos 3t V
dt
dt
dt
di
di
di
v2 = 3 2 + 2 1 = -3 2 = -36 cos 3t V
dt
dt
dt
6. (D) v1 = 2
Fig. P1.9.42
(A) 3 W
(B) 6 W
(C) 9 W
(D) 12 W
7. (A) v1 = 2
43. I x = ?
8W
di1
di
+1 2
dt
dt
= -18 sin t + 12 cos t = 6 (2 cos t - 3 sin t) V
10 W
2 : 1
1000 V
o
8. (A) v2 = 2
j6
= 24 cos 3t - 9 sin 3t = 3 ( 8 cos 3t - 3 sin 3t) V
-j4
Ix
9. (A) v1 = 3
Fig. P1.9.43
(A) 1921
.
57.4 A
(B) 2.93159.4 A
(C) 1.68 43.6 A
(D) 179
. 43.6 A
di1
di
-3 2
dt
dt
= 45 cos 3t + 27 sin 3t = 9 (5 cos 3t + 3 sin 3t) V

10. (D) v2 = -4
44. Z in = ?
j16
di2
di
+1 1
dt
dt
6W
1 : 5
= 36 sin 3t + 45 cos 3t = 9 ( 4 sin 3t + 5 cos 3t) V
6W
24 W
4 : 1
Zin
di2
di
+3 1
dt
dt
11. (A) W =
-j10
1
1
L1 i12 + L2 i22 + Mi1 i2
2
2
At t = 0, i1 = 4 cos ( -20 ) = 4.7 mA

i2 = 20 cos ( -20 ) = 18.8 mA ,
Fig. P1.9.44
(A) 46.3 + j 6.8 W
(B) 432.1 + j0.96 W
(C) 10.8 + j9.6 W
(D) 615.4 + j0.38 W

********************
M = 0.6 2.5 0.4 = 0.6

W =
1
1
(2.5)( 4.7) 2 + (0.4)(18.8) 2 + 0.6( 4.7)(18.8)
2
2
= 151.3 mJ
12. (C) Leq = L1 + L2 + 2 M = 7 H
www.gatehelp.com
Page
87
UNIT 1
13. (A) Leq = L1 + L2 - 2 M = 4 + 2 - 2 2 = 2 H
Networks
22. (C) v AG = 20
14. (C) Leq =
L1 L2 - M 2
24 - 16
=
=4 H
L1 + L2 - 2 M 6 + 4 - 8
23. (B) vBG = 3
15. (A) Leq =
L1 L2 - M 2
8 -4
=
= 0.4 H
L1 + L2 + 2 M 6 + 4
24. (C) vCG = -6
16. (C) L1 + L2 + 2 M = 7, L1 + L2 - 2 M = 1.8
d( 6 t)
d(15 t)
+4
= 180 V
dt
dt
d(15 t)
d 6( t)
d ( 6 t)
+4
-6
= 33 V
dt
dt
dt
d( 6 t)
= -36 V
dt
25. (B) Z = Z11 +
L1 + L2 = 4.4, M = 1.3
w2 M 2
Z 22
2
L1 L2 - M 2
= 0.5, L1 L2 - 1.32 = 0.5 1.8
L1 + L2 - 2 M
1
(50) 2
1
5
= 4 + j (50)
+
10 5 + j (50) 1
2
L1 L2 = 2.59, ( L1 - L2 ) 2 = 4.4 2 - 4 2.59 = 9

. , L2 = 0.7
L1 - L2 = 3, L1 = 37
= 4.77 + j 115
. W
17. (D) Leq = L1 -
M
4
= 4 - =2 H
L2
2
26. (B) Vs = j (0.8)10(12

. 0) - j (0.2)(10)(2 0)
+[ 3 + j(0.5)(10)] (12
. 0 + 2 0)
18. (B) Leq = L1 -
= 9.6 + j21.6 = 26.64 66.04 V
M
9
=5 - =2 H
L2
3
27. (A) [ j(100 p) (2) + 10 ]I 2 + j(100 p)(0.4) (2 0) = 0

19. (A)
-1 H
2H
= 4 - 179.1
3H
2H
5H
I 2 = -0.4 - j0.0064,
Vo = 10 I 2 = -4 - j0.064
vo = 4 cos (100 pt - 179.1 ) V
28. (B) 30 30 = I ( - j 6 + j 8 - j 4 + j12 - j 4 + 10)

Fig. S.1.9.19
20. (D) VL1 = 1sI + 1sI = 2 sI
30 30
= 2.57 - j0.043
(10 + j 6)
Vo = I ( j12 - j 4 + 10)
VL 2 = 2 sI + 1sI - 2 sI = sI ,
= (2.57 - j0.043)(10 + 8 j)
VL 3 = 3sI - 2 sI = sI
VL = VL1 + VL 2 + VL 3 = 4 sI
I=
= 26.067 + j20.14 = 32.9 37.7 V
Leq = 4 H
21. (B) Let I1 be the current through 4 H inductor and
29. (A)
-j
2W
I 2 and I 3 be the current through 3 H, and 2 H inductor
- Vx +
respectively
I1 = I 2 + I 3 , V2 = V3
3-90o A
3sI 2 + 3sI1 = 2 sI 3 + 2 sI1
3I 2 + I1 = 2 I 3
4
I1
I 2 = , I 3 = I1
5
5
j4
j4
I1
4I2 = I3
V = 4 sI1 + 3sI 2 + 2 sI 3 + 3sI 2 + 3s I1

6s
2 4s
= 7 sI1 +
I1 +
I3
5
5
49
49
H
V =
sI1 , Leq =
5
5
Page
88
2W
Fig. S1.9.29
( - j + 2 + j 4) I1 - jI 2 = - j 3
( j 4 + 2) I 2 - jI1 = -12 30 V
I1 = -1.45 - j0.56,
.
Vx = -2 I1 = 2.9 + j112
= 311
. 2112
. V
www.gatehelp.com
I2
1230 V
o
Chap 1.9
20 W
30. (D)
j8
j10
0.03 H
j10
j20
j10
0.09 H
Fig. P1.9.34
35. (D) The p equivalent circuit of coupled coil is shown

in fig. S1.9.35
= 112
. + j112
. W
31. (C) Z in = ( - j 6)||( Z o)

(12) 2
Z o = j20 +
= 0.52 + j15.7
( j 30 + j5 - j2 + 4)
L1
L 1L2 - M
L1L2 - M
L2
L1 L2 - M 2
=
M
w2 M 2
Z L + jwL2
= j250 10 3 2 10 -6 +
L1L2 - M 2
L1 - M
Fig. S1.9.35
M 2 = 160 10 -12
32. (D) M = k L1 L2 ,
L2 - M
( - j 6)(0.52 + j15.7)
= 0.20 - j9.7 W
( - j 6 + 0.52 + j15.7)
Z in = jwL1 +
j30
-j3
1000C
( j14) ( j10 + 2 - j 6)
= 10 + j 8 +
j14 + j10 + 2 - j 6
Z in =
Vout
-
2F
Fig. S.1.9.30
Z eq
0.18 H
+
Vin
j18
40 W
L1 L2 (1 - k2 )
0.12 0.27 (10
. .5 2 )
=
= 0.27
0.5
k
Output is zero if
(250 10 3)2 160 10 -12
2 + j10 + j 250 10 3 80 10 -6
Z in = 0.02 + j0.17 W
C=
-j
+ jCw = 0
0.27 w
1
= 33.33 mF
0.27 w2
36. (C) Applying 1 V test source at ab terminal,
33. (D)
-j
2C
60 W
j2 2
V1
I1
j4
1 : 4
j4
I2
4W
20 W
1V
20Ix
Ix
Fig. S.1.9.33
V1 = -
jI1
+ j 4 I1 + j2 2 I 2
2C
0 = ( 4 + 4 j) I 2 + j2 2 I1
I2 =
- j 2 I1
2 (1 + j)
2
V1 - j
- j + j 8 C + 2 C - j2 C
=
+ j4 +
=
1+ j
I1 2 C
2C
Z in =
- j + j8C + 2C - j 2C
2C
Im ( Z in ) = 0
C=
- j + j 8 C - j2 C = 0
1
6
34. (A) j 30 -
3j
= 0, C = 100 mF
1000 C
Fig. S1.9.36
Vab = 1 V, I x =
1
= 0.05 A, V2 = 4 V ,
20
4 = 60 I 2 + 20 0.05
I 2 = 0.05 A
I in = I x + I1 = I x + 4 I 2 = 0.25 A
1
RTH =
=4W ,
VTH = 0
I in
37. (A) Impedance seen by RL = 10 4 2 = 160 W
For maximum power RL = 160 W, Z o = 10 W
2
100
PLmax =
10 = 250 W
10 + 10
38. (B) I 2 =
www.gatehelp.com
V2
I
V
, I1 = 2 = 2 , V1 = 5 V2
8
5 40
Page
89
CHAPTER
1.10
TWO PORT NETWORK

The circuit is given in fig. P.1.10.14
2W
I1
2W
I2
+
3W
1W
V1
V2
Fig. P.1.10.14
1. [ z ] = ?
1
(A) 2
- 17
6
17
(C) 6
-1
6
3
2
1
2
(B) 2
17
6
3
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
17
(D) 6
1
6
1
2
3
2
3. [ h] = ?
3
6
17
17
(A)
24
3
17
17
(B) 3
- 1
3
1
3
2
3
(C) 17
- 3
17
(D) 3
1
3
1
-
3
2
3
3
17
24
17
4. [ T ] = ?
17
8
(A) 3
3
2
17
(B) 3
-2
17
- 8
(C) 3
2 - 3
17
(D) 3
5. [ z ] = ?
2W
I1
- 8
- 8
- 3
2W
I2
+
1W
V1
2. [ y ] = ?
1
3
8
8
(A)
1
17
8
24
(B) 8
- 1
8
17
(C) 6
1
2
17
(D) 6
- 1
8
1
2
3
2
1
8
17
24
1
-
2
3
2
3W
2W
V2
-
Fig. P.1.10.5
(A)
21
16
1
8
21
(C) 16
- 1
8
www.gatehelp.com
1
8
7
12
(B)
7
9
1
6
1
6
7
4
1
8
7
12
(D)
7
9
1
3
1
3
7
4
Page
91
UNIT 1
6. [ y ] = ?
Networks
11. [ y ] = ?
2W
1W
I1
3W
V2
V1
+
2W
V1
1W
1W
I1
I2
+
2W
1W
2
41
19
41
11
(B) 41
- 2
41
2
41
19
41
19
(C) 41
2
41
2
41
11
41
19
(D) 41
- 2
41
2
41
11
41
(A)
-1
1
2
3
2
(C) 2
- 1
4
(B)
3
2
1
2
-1
1
(D) 4
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
12. [ z ] = ?
2W
I1
is
V2
Fig. P.1.10.11
11
(A) 41
2
41
port
I1
Fig. P.1.10.6
A two
I2
described
by
V1 = I1 + 2 V2 ,
2V1
I2
I 2 = - 2 I1 + 0.4 V2
1W
V1
7. [ z ] = ?
2W
V2
11
(A)
-5
-5
2.5
11 5
(B)
5 2.5
1
(C)
5
-2
0.4
1
(D)
-2
Fig. P.1.10.12
2
0.4
(A) 3
- 2
3
2
3
2
3
(B)
1
2
1
2
1
-
2
2
(C) 3
4
3
2
3
2
3
(D)
1
2
1
2
8. [ y ] = ?
11 5
(A)
5 2.5
1
(B)
-2
-2
4.4
-2 4.4
(C)
4 -2
11
(D)
- 5
-5
2.5
1
-
2
13. [ y ] = ?
2W
2W
I1
I2
9. [ h] = ?
3
(A)
4
- 6
- 4
1
(C)
-2
4
(B)
-2
-2
4.4
2
0.4
11
(D)
5
5
2.5
0.5
0.5
2. 2 - 0.5
(B)
0. 2 - 0.5
10. [ T ] = ?
2. 2
(A)
0. 2
1
(C)
-2
Page
92
2
0.4
-2
1
(D)
-2 - 0.4
2W
V1
2V1
1W
V2
Fig. P.1.10.13
(A)
7
4
1
2
(C)
10
19
6
19
www.gatehelp.com
1
-
4
5
4
2
19
14
19
(B)
7
4
3
4
(D)
6
19
10
19
1
4
5
4
14
19
2
19
Two Port Networks
14. [ z ] = ?
Chap 1.10
17. [ z ] = ?
4V3
I1
2W
I1
2W
I2
+
+
I1
I2
2W
2I2
1W
V1
V3
2W
V1
1W
Fig. P.1.10.17
3
(A)
6
Fig. P.1.10.14
2
(A)
3
3
3
-3
(B)
3
- 2
3
3
(C)
3
3
2
3
(D)
-3
3
- 2
(C)
15. [ z ] = ?
2V1
2W
I1
2
1
7
4
1
2
+
2W
V1
2W
3
3V
2 2
I1
Fig. P.1.1.15
2
(C)
3
2
(D)
1
2
7
4
1V
5 1
4W
I2
+
1V
10 2
V1
2
(A) 3
1
7
V2
6
(B)
18. [ T ] = ?
I2
V2
V2
2W
4W
V2
-2
(B)
3
2
-2
2 -2
(D) 3
2
2
Fig. P.1.10.18
0.35 - 1
(A)
2 - 3.33
- 3.33
2
(B)
0
.
35
- 1
2
(C)
0.35
0.35
(D)
2
3.33
1
1
3.33
19. [ h] = ?
16. [ y ] = ?
I1
1W
2W
I1
I2
V2
2W
I2
+
+
+
3W
V1
1
2 I2
V1
V2
4W
V2
V2
-
Fig. P.1.10.19
1
-1
(A)
-1 - 2
1 - 1
(B)
1 - 2
4
(A)
-2
1
2
- 3
3
(C)
- 1 - 1
3
3
1
2
- 3 - 3
(D)
1 - 1
3
3
4 - 2
(C)
1
2
Fig. P.1.10.16
www.gatehelp.com
3
2
1
2
-2
(B)
4
1
2
3
2
2
(D)
4
1
2
3
-
2
Page
93
Two Port Networks
Z ab
Z + Z ab
(A) a
Z b + Z ab
Z ab
Z - Z ab
(B) a
Z ab
Z + Z ab
(C) a
- Z ab
Z - Z a
(D) ab
Z ab
- Z ab
Z b + Z ab
Z b - Z ab
Z ab
- Z b
Z ab
Z ab
Chap 1.10
The value of
Vo
is
Vs
(A)
3
32
(B)
1
16
(C)
2
33
(D)
1
17
27. [ y ] = ?
30. The T-parameters of a 2-port network are
Yab
Ya
2
[T ] =
1
Yb
1
.
1
If such two 2-port network are cascaded, the

Fig. P.1.10.27
Y + Yab
(A) a
- Yab
- Yab
Yb + Yab
Y - Yab
(B) a
Yab
Yab
Yb - Yab
Y - Ya
(C) ab
Yab
Yab
Yab - Ya
Y - Yab
(D) a
- Yab
- Yab
Yb - Yab
28. The y-parameters of a 2-port network are

5
[ y] =
1
3
S
2
z parameter for the cascaded network is

1
5
-
2 - 2
3
3
(A) 1
(B)
1
2
1
3
3
(C)
5
3
1
3
1
3
2
3
2
(D) 1
31. [ y ] = ?
2W
A resistor of 1 ohm is connected across as shown in
1W
fig. P.1.10.2 8. The new y parameter would be
1W
1W
2W
1W
2
1W
[ y] = 5 3
1 2
Fig. P.1.10.31
19
(A) 10
- 9
10
Fig. P.1.10.28
6
(A)
2
4
S
3
6
(B)
0
2
S
3
5
(C)
2
4
S
2
4
(D)
2
4
S
1
(C)
2 0
29. For the 2-port of fig. P.1.10.29, [ ya ] =
mS
0 10
19
10
9
10
-9
10
31
10
9
10
31
10
19
(B) 10
- 7
10
-7
10
31
10
(D)
7
10
31
10
19
10
7
10
32. [ y ] = ?
2F
I1(s)
60 W
I2(s)
+
[ ya]
Vs
100 W
+
Vo
-
300 W
V1(s)
1W
3
2F
2V1(s)
1W
4
2F
V2(s)
-
Fig. P.1.10.32
Fig. P.1.10.29
www.gatehelp.com
Page
95
UNIT 1
s+3
(A)
2 s + 2
s+3
(B)
-2 s - 2
2 s
4
s + 3 - 2 s
(C)
-2 s - 2 4
- 2s
4 s + 4
Networks
37. The circuit shown in fig. P.1.10.37 is reciprocal if a

is
3s + 3 - 2 s
(D)
- 2 s - 2 4 s + 4
I1
0.5V1
1W
I2
+
2W
33. h21 = ?
V1
I1
+
V1
V2
I2
aI1
+
R
Fig. P.1.10.37
V2
Fig. P.1.10.33
(A) -
3
2
(B)
1
2
(C) -
1
2
(D)
3
2
(A) 2
(B) -2
(C) 1
(D) -1
38. Z in = ?
Zin
I2
I1
1 kW
34. In the circuit shown in fig. P.1.10.34, when the
Vs
[ y] = 4 -0.1 mS
50 1
V1
voltage V1 is 10 V, the current I is 1 A. If the applied
V2
1 kW
voltage at port-2 is 100 V, the short circuit current

Fig. P.1.10.38
flowing through at port 1 will be
V1
Linear
Resistive
Network
(A) 86.4 W
(B) 64.3 W
(C) 153.8 W
(D) 94.3 W
39. V1 , V2 = ?
25 W
Fig. P.1.10.34
(A) 0.1 A
(B) 1 A
(C) 10 A
(D) 100 A
+
[ y] = 10 -5 mS
50 20
V1
100 V
V2
100 W
Fig. P.1.10.39
35. For a 2-port symmetrical bilateral network, if

transmission parameters A = 3 and B = 1 W, the value of
parameter C is
(A) -68.6 V,
114.3 V
(B) 68.6 V, - 114.3 V
(C) 114.3 V,
- 68.6 V
(D) -114.3 V,
68.6 V
(A) 3
(B) 8 S
(C) 8 W
40. A 2-port network is driven by a source Vs = 100 V in
(D) 9
series with 5 W, and terminated in a 25 W resistor. The

impedance parameters are
36. A 2-port resistive network satisfy the condition

3
4
A = D = B = C. The z11 of the network is
2
3
4
3
(A)
(B)
3
4
2
(C)
3
Page
96
3
(D)
2
20
[z ] =
40
2
W
10
The Thevenin equivalent circuit presented to the

25 W resistor is
(A) 80 V, 2.8 W
(B) 160 V, 6.8 W
(C) 100 V, 2.4 W
(D) 120 V, 6.4 W
www.gatehelp.com
Two Port Networks
[z ] =
7
4
1
2
Chap 1.10
Z R = n2 4 = 36
ZR
I1=0
+
1 : 3
+
V1
18. (D) Let I 3 be the clockwise loop current in center
I2
4W
V2
9W
V1
-
V2
loop
I1 =
V2
+ I 3,
10
I1 = 0.35 V2 - I 2
V2 = 4( I 2 + I 3)
I 3 = 0.25 V2 - I 2
...(i)
V1 = 4 I1 - 0.2 V1 + V2
V1 = 2 V2 - 3.33I 2
...(ii)
I
1
19. (A) V2 = 4 I 2 + I1 - 2 I 2 = -2 I1 + V2
2
2
( V - V2 ) - V2
I
V
V
= -I1 + 2 + 1 - V2
I1 = 2 + 1
2
2
4
2
3
V1 = 4 I1 + V2
2
...(ii)
V1
-
V2
9 W V2
-
Fig. S1.10.23a
4
V2 = V2 = nV1 = 3 I1
5
z11 =
V1
= 0.8
I1
z 21 =
V2
+ 0( -I 2 ),
5
...(ii)
I1 = (0) V2 + 5( -I 2 )
...(i)
27. (A) I1 = ( V1 - V2 ) Yab + V1 Ya
...(ii)
I2=0
1 : 3
V2 = 2 sI1 + 3sI 2
...(ii)
...(i)
V2 = sI1 + (2 + 2 s) I 2
ZR
4
I1
5
V2 = ( Z a + Z ab ) I 2 + Z ab I1 = Z ab I1 + ( Z a + Z ab ) I 2
...(ii)
9 9
= =1
n2 9
V1 = ( 4||1) I1 =
V2 = 3sI 2 + 2 sI1
...(i)
...(i)
...(i)
I1
1
+ sI1 + sI 2 = + s I1 + sI 2
s
s
4W
V1 = 6 sI1 + 2 sI 2
I1 = V1 ( Ya + Yab ) - V2 Yab
V2
= 2.4,
I1
....(ii)
...(i)
I 2 = ( V2 - V1 ) Yab + V2 Yb = -V1 Yab + V2 ( Yb + Yab )
I1 = (2 + j2) V1 - jV2
V2
+ V1 + j( V2 - V1 ) = (1 - j) V1 + (1 + j) V2
I2 =
1
V1
I1
V2
= 7.2,
I2
26. (A) V1 = ( Z a + Z ab ) I1 + Z ab I 2
21. (D) I1 = 2 V1 + jV1 + j( V1 - V2 )
23. (D) Z R =
z 22 =
...(i)
V1 V1 - V2 3
3
+
= V1 - V2
1
2
2
2
V
V - V1 3
3
I 2 = 2 V1 + 2 + 2
= V1 + V2
1
2
2
2
24. (C) V1 = 3sI1 + 3sI1 - 3sI1 + 3sI1 + 2 sI 2
25. (C) V1 =
20. (B) I1 = -V2 +
V2 = 2 I 2 + 2 s I 2 + sI1
V2 = ( 36 || 9) I 2 = 7.2 I 2
z12 = z 21 = 2.4
. V1 = 4(0.35 V2 - I 2 ) + V2 = 2.4 V2 - 4 I 2
12
22. (B) V1 =
Fig. S1.10.23b
...(ii)
28. (B) y-parameter of 1 W resistor network are

1
-1
- 1
1
5
New y-parameter =
1
3 1 - 1
6
+
=
2 -1
1
0
2
.
3
-1
0
5000 0
2 mS
29. (A) [ z a ] =
= 0
100
mS
0
10
5000
[z ] =
0
0 100
+
100 100
100 600
=
100 100
100
200
V1 = 600 I1 + 100 I 2 , V2 = 100 I1 + 200 I 2

Vs = 60 I1 + V1 = 660 I1 + 100 I 2 , V2 = Vo = -300 I 2
2
V
Vo = 100 I1 - Vo
I1 = o
60
3
Vo
3
V
=
Vs = 11Vo - o
V5 32
3
2
30. (C) [ TN ] =
1
1
1
2
1
1 5
=
1 3
3
2
V1 = 5 V2 - 3I 2 , I1 = 3V2 - 2 I 2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
99
UNIT 1
3V1 - 5 I1 = I 2
V2 =
V1 =
5
1
I1 + I 2
3
3
...(i)
1
2
I1 + I 2
3
3
31. (B)
...(ii)
Networks
I 2
= 0.1, I 2 = 100 0.1 = 10
V1
Interchanging the port
35. (B) For symmetrical network A = D = 3

For bilateral AD - BC = 1, 9 - C = 1,
1W
2W
C=8 S
2W
36. (A) z11 =

1W
1W
2
1W
A 4
=
C 3
37. (A) V1 = 0.5 V1 + I1 + 2( I1 + I 2 ) + aI1

Fig. S.1.10.31a & b
3
[ za ] =
1
1
2
3
5 - 5
2
1
, [ ya ] =
, [ yb ] =
2
3
- 1
- 1
5
2
5
19
[ y ] = [ ya ] + [ yb ] = 10
- 7
10
7
10
31
10
V1 = ( 6 + 2 a) I1 + 4 I 2
V2 = 2( I1 + I 2 ) + aI1
...(i)
V2 = (2 + a) I1 + 2 I 2
...(ii)
For reciprocal network

z12 = z 21 , 4 = 2 + a
a =2
38. (C) I1 = 4 10 3 V1 - 0.1 10 -3 V2

I 2 = 50 10 -3 V1 + 10 -3 V2 , V2 = -10 3 I 2
-10 -3 V2 = 50 10 -3 V1 + 10 -3 V2 , V2 = -25 V1
- 2s
3
, [ yb ] =
4 s
-2
3s
32. (D) [ ya ] =
-2 s
1
-
2
5
2
0
4
2F
10 3 I1 = 4 V1 + 2.5 V1 ,
V1 10 3
=
= 153.8
I1
6.5
39. (B) I1 = 10 10 -3 V1 - 5 10 -3 V2 ,
100 = 25 I1 + V1
2F
2F
100 - V1 = 0. 25 V1 - 0.125 V2
-3
800 = 10 V1 - V2
...(i)
-3
I 2 = 50 10 V1 + 20 10 V2 , V2 = -100 I 2
V2 = -5 V1 - 2 V2
Fig. S.1.10.32a
1W
3
40. (B) 100 = 5 I1 + V1 ,
I2
I1
I1
, -I 2 =
V2 = 0
- 2s
4 s + 4
I2
Fig. S.1.10.33
34. (C)
I2
V1
= y21 =
V2 = 0
1
= 0.1
10
V2 z 21
=
V1 z11
42. (B) I 2 = y21 V1 + y22 V2 , I 2 = -V2 YL

y21 V1 + ( y22 + YL ) V2 = 0 ,
+
V1
V2 = 160 + 6.8 I 2
41. (B) V1 = z11 I1 , V2 = z 21 I1 ,
I
1
I1 R
, 2 =2
R + R I1
V1 = 20 I1 + 2 I 2
VTH = 160 V, RTH = 6.8 W
Fig. S.1.10.32b
33. (C) h21 =
V2 = -114.3 V.
100 = 25 I1 + 2 I 2 , V2 = 40 I1 + 10 I 2
800 - 5 V2 = -34 I 2
3s + 3
[ y ] = [ ya ] = [ yb ] =
-2 s - 2
3V2 + 5 V1 = 0
From (i) and (ii) V1 = 68.6 V,
1W
4
2V1
V2
- y21
=
V1 ( y22 + yL )
43. (A) V2 = z 21 I1 + z 22 I 2 ,
V2 = -Z L I 2
V
V2 = z 21 I1 + z 22 - 2
ZL
V2 ( Z L + z 22 ) = z 21 Z L I1 ,
V2
z Z
= 21 L
I1 z 22 + Z L
**********
Page
100
www.gatehelp.com
...(ii)
CHAPTER
1.11
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
7. A parallel circuit has R = 1 kW , C = 50 mF and L = 10
A parallel resonant circuit has a resistance of 2 kW

and half power frequencies of 86 kHz and 90 kHz.
1. The value of capacitor is
(A) 6 mF
(C) 2 nF
BW = 10 3 rad/s. The value of R and C will be

(A) 100 mF, 10 W
(C) 100 pF, 10 MW
(B) 43 mH
(D) 1.6 mH
The required R for the BW 15.9 Hz is
(A) 22
(C) 48
(A) 0.1 W
(C) 15.9 mW
(B) 100
(D) 200
(B) 0.2 W
(D) 500 W
10. For the RLC parallel resonant circuit when
resonant
admittance of 25 10
(B) 100 pF, 10 W

(D) 100 mF, 10 MW
9. A series resonant circuit has L = 1 mH and C = 10 mF.
3. The quality factor is
-3
(B) 90.86
The resonant frequency wo = 106 rad s and bandwidth is
2. The value of inductor is
A parallel
(A) 100
(C) 70.7
8. A series resonant circuit has an inductor L = 10 mH.
(B) 20 nF
(D) 60 mF
(A) 4.3 mH
(C) 0.16 mH
mH. The quality factor at resonance is
circuit
has
midband
S, quality factor of 80 and a
resonant frequency of 200 krad s.
R = 8 kW, L = 40 mH and C = 0. 25 mF, the quality factor

Q is
(A) 40
(B) 20
(C) 30
(D) 10
4. The value of R is
(A) 40 W
(C) 80 W
11. The maximum voltage across capacitor would be
(B) 56.57 W
(D) 28. 28 W
0.105v1
5. The value of C is
(A) 2 mF
(C) 10 mF
(B) 28.1 mF
(D) 14.14 mF
25 W
3V
6. A parallel RLC circuit has R = 1 kW and C = 1 mF. The

quality factor at resonance is 200. The value of inductor is
(A) 35.4 mH
(B) 25 mH
(C) 17.7 mH
(D) 50 mH
v1
4H
10 W
1
mF
4
+
vC
Fig. P1.11.11
(A) 3200 V
(C) -3 V
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 3 V
(D) 1600 V
Page
101
UNIT 1
12. For the circuit shown in fig. P1.1.11 resonant

frequency fo is
10 W
Networks
16. H ( w) =
Vo
=?
Vi
v1 -
40 W
1 mH
Zin
vs
v1
2
50 nF
10 W
0.5 F
vO
Fig. P1.11.16
Fig. P1.11.12
(A) 346 kHz

(C) 196 kHz
(B) 55 kHz
(D) 286 kHz
(A) (5 + j20 w) -1
(B) (5 + j 4 w) -1
(C) (5 + j 30 w) -1
(D) 5(1 + j 6 w) -1
13. For the circuit shown in fig. P1.11.13 the resonant
17. The value of input frequency is required to cause a
frequency fo is
gain equal to 1.5. The value is

2 kW
10 mH
600 pF
vs
22 kW
60 mF
+
vO
1.8 W
Fig. P1.11.17
Fig. P1.11.13
(A) 12.9 kHz
(B) 12.9 MHz
(C) 2.05 MHz
(D) 2.05 kHz
14.
The
network
function
of
circuit
shown
fig.P1.11.14 is
in
(A) 20 rad s
(B) 20 Hz
(C) 10 rad s
(D) No such value exists.
18. In the circuit of fig. P1.11.18 phase shift equal to

-45 is required at frequency w = 20 rad s . The value of
R is
4
V
H ( w) = o =
V1 1 + j0.01w
2 kW
10 W
15 kW
Vs
+
vi
+
vC
1 mF
+
vO
vo
AvC
Fig. P1.11.18
Fig. P1.11.14
The value of the C and A is

(A) 10 mF, 6
(B) 5 mF, 10
(C) 5 mF, 6
(D) 10 mF, 10
15. H ( w) =
ia
Vo
=?
Vi
(A) 200 kW
(B) 150 kW
(C) 100 kW
(D) 50 kW
19. For the circuit of fig. P1.11.19 the input frequency is

adjusted until the gain is equal to 0.6. The value of the
frequency is
20 W
2H
+
vi
3ia
4H
0.25 F
vO
vs
30 W
+
vO
Fig. P1.11.15
0.6
(A)
jw(1 + j0. 2 w)
3
(C)
jw(1 + jw)
Page
102
0.6
jw(5 + jw)
3
(D)
jw(20 + j 4 w)
Fig. P1.11.19
(B)
(A) 20 rad s
(B) 20 Hz
(C) 40 rad s
(D) 40 Hz
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 1
Networks
31. Bode diagram of the network function Vo Vs for the
SOLUTIONS
circuit of fig. P1.11.30 is

4W
1. (B) BW = w2 - w1 = 2 p(90 - 86)k = 8 p krad s
+
vs
2W
BW=
vo
30 mF
Fig.P1.11.30
2. (C) wo =
dB
c.
5.56 16.7
dB
/d
e
20
log w
5.56 16.7
5.56 16.7
.
0 dB
1
1
=
RBW
8 p 10 3 2 10 3
( w1 + w2 ) 2 p(90 + 86)k
=
= 176p krad s
2
2
1
L= 2 C
wo
1
= 0.16 mH
(176 p 10 ) (20 10 -9)
log w
wo 176 pk
=
= 22
8 pk
B
-40
-2
dB
B
0d
/de
/d
ec
log w
C =
3 2
3. (A) Q =
c.
5.56 16.7
log w
LC
(B)
(A)
0 dB
wo =
c.
dB
/de
40
= 19.89 nF
dB
1
RC
4. (A) At mid-band frequency Z = R , Y =

R=
(C)
(D)
1
= 40 W
25 10 -3
5. (C) Q = wo RC
Q
80
C=
=
= 10 mF
wo R 200 10 3 40
***************
C
L
6. (B) Qo = R
8. (B) wo =
C=
BW =
1
LC
1
-3
10 10 (106 ) 2
R
L
www.gatehelp.com
= 100 pF
R = 10 10 -3 10 3 = 10
R
L
R
= 15.9 2 p = 0.1 W
1 10 -3
10. (B) Q = R
Page
104
10 -6
L
C
50 10 -6
= 10 3
= 70.7
L
10 10 -3
9. (A) BW =
200 = 10 3
L = 25 mH
7. (C) Qo = R
C
L
1
R
Frequency Response
= 8 10 3
0. 25 10 -6
= 20
40 10 -3
15. (A) I a =
11. (A) Thevenin equivalent seen by L-C combination

v - 0.105 v1
3 = v1 + 10 1
125
I sc =
v1 = 100
1100
= 0.8 V
125
Open Circuit : v1 = 0, voc = 3 V

RTH =
Chap 1.11
3
= 375
. W, wo =
0.8
1
LC
= 1000
w L 1000 4
= 1066.67
Qo = o =
375
.
R
|vC|max = Qo vTH = 1066.67 3 = 3200 V
12. (B) Applying 1 A at input port V1 = 10 V
Vtest = 10 + jw10
j
(5 + 1)
w50 10 -9
Z in = Vtest
wo 10 -3 =
6
wo 50 10 -9
wo = 346 kHz
fo = 55 kHz
10
10
jw(0.51)
16. (A) Z1 =
=
1
+ 10 1 + j 3w
jw0.5
Vo
Z1
=
=
Vi 40 + Z1
= jw6 10 -10 + 45.45 +
1
1
+
2 10 3 1.8 + jw10 -5
1.8 - jw10 -5
3. 24 + w2 10 -50
At resonance Im { Y } = 0
wo 6 10 -10 ( 324
. + w2o 10 -10 ) - wo 10 -5 = 0
3. 24 + w 10
2
o
-10
17. (D) H ( w) =
Vo = AVc
18. (D) H ( w) =
= - tan -1 wCR = - 450
Vi
1 + j2 10 3 Cw
(15 k)
2 AVc
2 AVi
=
=
16 k + 30 k
3
3(1 + j2 10 3 Cw)
C = 5 mF
20 1 10 -6 R = 1
19. (A) H ( w) =
gain =
A = 6,
R = 50 kW.
Vo
R
=
Vs
1 + jwL
R
R +w L
2
30
900 + 4 w2 + 0.6
2
50 2 - 30 2
= 20 rad s
2
20. (A) H ( w) =
1
2 10 3 +
jCw
Vo
1
=
Vs 1 + jwCR
wCR = 1,
w=
2A
Vo
3
=
Vi 1 + j2 p 10 3 Cw
2A
=4
3
(1 + w2 RC)
For any value of w, R, C gain 1.
= 16.67 10 wo = 12.9 Mrad s
w
fo = o = 2.05 MHz
2p
14. (C) VC =
Vo
1
=
Vi 1 + jwRC
gain =
Vi
jCw
10
1 + j5 w
10
+ 40
1 + j5 w
10
= (5 + j20 w) -1
50 + j200 w
phase shift
13. (C) Y = jw600 10 -12 +
3I a
0. 25 jw
Thus (D) is correct option.
At resonance Im { Z in } = 0
Vo =
Vo
3
0.6
=
=
V1
jw(5 + jw) jw(1 + j0.2 w)
voltage across 1 A source

-3
Vi
,
20 + j 4w
Vo
1
1
=
=
Vs 1 + jwCR 1 + j
Phase shift = - tan -1 wCR = - 45

gain =
1
1
=
= 0.707
| j + 1|
2
21. (B) BW= w2 - w1 = 2 p( 456 - 434) = 44 p

wo = 2 pfo = QBW = 20 44 p
fo = 440 Hz
2 10 3 C = 0.01
22. (C) fo =
www.gatehelp.com
1
2 p LC
Page
105
UNIT 1
1
2 p 360 10
fo =
-12
240 10
-6
1
2 p 50 10
-12
240 10 -6
= 541 kHz
= 1.45 MHz
R=
Networks
1
. kW
= 106
2 p 15 10 10 -6
30. (B) 20 log H = 20 log
1
R2
- 2
LC L
1
= -40 log w
w2
R
400
10 7
=
=
-6
L 240 10
6
1
jw
1+
Vo
jw30 10 -3
.67
16
31. (D)
=
=
jw
1
Vs 6 +
1+
.
jw30 10 -3
356
1
1
1016
=
=
LC 240 10 -6 120 10 -12 288
20 dB/decade line starting from w = 16.67 rad s
23. (B) fo =
1
2p
2+
-20 dB/decade line starting from w = 5.56 rad s

Hence -20 dB/decade line for 5.56 < w < 16.67
R
1
1
<
, fo =
= 938 kHz
L LC
2 p LC
parallel to w axis to w > 16.67
1
, R and C should be as small as possible.
RC
(1.8)
R = ( 3.3)
= 1165
.
kW
3.3.+1.8
( 30)
C = (10)
= 7.5 pF
(10 + 30)
24. (B) wo =
w=
1
= 114.5 106 rad s
.
1165
7.5 10 -9
25. (D) R = K m R = 800 12 10 3 = 9.6 MW

L =
800
Km
40 10 -6 = 32 mF
=
K f L 1000
C =
C
10 -9
K F = 30
1000 = 0.375 pF
Km
80
26. (A) LC =
LC
K 2f
K 2f =
4 20 10 -3 10 -6
1 6
K f = 2 10 -4
(1)(20 10 -6 )
L L 2
K m2 =
= Km
(2) ( 4 10 -3)
C C
K m = 0.05
1
RC
1
= 15.9 W
R=
2 p 20 10 3 0.5 10 -6
27. (D) wc = 2 pfc =
28. (A) RTH across the capacitor is

RTH = (1k + 4 k)||5 k = 2.5 kW
1
. kHz
fc =
= 106
2 p 2.5 10 3 40 10 -9
29. (B) wc = 2 pfc =
Page
106
1
RC
www.gatehelp.com
***********
CHAPTER
2.1
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
In the problems assume the parameter given in
3. Two semiconductor material have exactly the same
following table. Use the temperature T = 300 K unless
properties except that material A has a bandgap of 1.0
otherwise stated.
eV and material B has a bandgap energy of 1.2 eV. The

ratio of intrinsic concentration of material A to that of
Property
Si
Ga As
Ge
material B is
Bandgap Energy
1.12
1.42
0.66
(A) 2016
(B) 47.5
Dielectric Constant
11.7
13.1
16.0
(C) 58.23
(D) 1048
Effective density of
2.8 1019
states in conduction
band N c (cm -3)
4.7 1017
104
. 1019
Effective density of
104
. 1019
states in valence
band N v(cm -3)
7.0 1018
Intrinsic carrier
concertration
ni (cm -3)
Mobility
Electron
Hole
15
. 1010
4. In silicon at T = 300 K the thermal-equilibrium

concentration of electron is n0 = 5 10 4 cm -3. The hole
concentration is
1.8 106
6.0 1018
2.4 1013
(A) 4.5 1015 cm -3
(B) 4.5 1015 m -3
(C) 0.3 10 -6 cm -3
(D) 0.3 10 -6 m -3
5. In silicon at T = 300 K if the Fermi energy is 0.22 eV

above the valence band energy, the value of p0 is
1350
480
8500
400
3900
1900
(A) 2 1015 cm -3
(B) 1015 cm -3
(C) 3 1015 cm -3
(D) 4 1015 cm -3
6. The thermal-equilibrium concentration of hole p0 in

1. In germanium semiconductor material at T = 400 K
silicon at T = 300 K is 1015 cm -3. The value of n0 is
the intrinsic concentration is
(A) 3.8 108 cm -3
(B) 4.4 10 4 cm -3
(C) 2.6 10 4 cm -3
(D) 4.3 108 cm -3
(A) 26.8 1014 cm -3
(B) 18.4 1014 cm -3
(C) 8.5 1014 cm -3
(D) 3.6 1014 cm -3
7. In germanium semiconductor at T = 300 K, the
2. The intrinsic carrier concentration in silicon is to be
acceptor concentrations is N a = 1013 cm -3 and donor
no greater than ni = 1 1012 cm -3. The maximum
concentration is
temperature allowed for the silicon is ( E g = 112

. eV)
concentration p0 is
(A) 300 K
(B) 360 K
(A) 2.97 10 9 cm -3
(B) 2.68 1012 cm -3
(C) 382 K
(D) 364 K
(C) 2.95 1013 cm -3
(D) 2.4 cm -3
www.gatehelp.com
N d = 0. The thermal equilibrium
Page
109
UNIT 2
Electronics Devices
15. For a particular semiconductor at T = 300 KE g = 15

.
In germanium semiconductor at T = 300 K, the
eV, mp* = 10 mn* and ni = 1 1015 cm -3. The position of

Fermi level with respect to the center of the bandgap is
impurity concentration are

N d = 5 1015 cm -3 and N a = 0
(A) +0.045 eV
(B) - 0.046 eV
(C) +0.039 eV
(D) - 0.039 eV
8. The thermal equilibrium electron concentration n0 is

(A) 5 1015 cm -3
(C) 115
. 10 cm
9
(B) 115
. 1011 cm -3
-3
(D) 5 10 cm
6
16. A silicon sample contains acceptor atoms at a
-3
concentration of N a = 5 1015 cm -3. Donor atoms are
9. The thermal equilibrium hole concentration p0 is

(A) 396
. 1013
(B) 195
. 1013 cm -3
(C) 4.36 1012 cm -3
(D) 396
. 1013 cm -3
conduction band edge. The concentration of donors

atoms added are
10. A sample of silicon at T = 300 K is doped with boron

at a concentration of 2.5 1013 cm -3 and with arsenic at
a concentration of 1 1013 cm -3. The material is
(B) 4.6 1016 cm -3
(C) 39
. 1012 cm -3
(D) 2.4 1012 cm -3
doped with phosphorus atoms at a concentrations of 1015
(B) p - type with p0 = 15

. 10 7 cm -3
(C) n - type with n0 = 15
. 10 cm
(A) 12
. 1016 cm -3
17. A silicon semiconductor sample at T = 300 K is
(A) p - type with p0 = 15

. 1013 cm -3
13
added forming and n - type compensated semiconductor

such that the Fermi level is 0.215 eV below the
cm -3. The position of the Fermi level with respect to the
-3
intrinsic Fermi level is
(D) n - type with n0 = 15

. 10 7 cm -3
11. In a sample of gallium arsenide at T = 200 K,
n0 = 5 p0 and N a = 0. The value of n0 is
(A) 0.3 eV
(B) 0.2 eV
(C) 0.1 eV
(D) 0.4 eV
(A) 9.86 10 9 cm -3
(B) 7 cm -3
18. A silicon crystal having a cross-sectional area of
(C) 4.86 10 3 cm -3
(D) 3 cm -3
0.001 cm 2 and a length of 20 mm is connected to its ends

to a 20 V battery. At T = 300 K, we want a current of
12. Germanium at T = 300 K is uniformly doped with

an acceptor concentration of N a = 10 cm
15
-3
and a donor
100 mA in crystal. The concentration of donor atoms to

be added is
concentration of N d = 0. The position of fermi energy
(A) 2.4 1013 cm -3
(B) 4.6 1013 cm -3
with respect to intrinsic Fermi level is
(C) 7.8 1014 cm -3
(D) 8.4 1014 cm -3
(A) 0.02 eV
(B) 0.04 eV
(C) 0.06 eV
(D)0.08 eV
19. The cross sectional area of silicon bar is 100 mm 2 .

The length of bar is 1 mm. The bar is doped with
13. In germanium at T = 300 K, the donor concentration

are N d = 1014 cm -3 and N a = 0. The Fermi energy level
with respect to intrinsic Fermi level is
Page
110
(A) 0.04 eV
(B) 0.08 eV
(C) 0.42 eV
(D) 0.86 eV
arsenic atoms. The resistance of bar is

(A) 2.58 mW
(B) 11.36 kW
(C) 1.36 mW
(D) 24.8 kW
20. A thin film resistor is to be made from a GaAs film

doped n - type. The resistor is to have a value of 2 kW.
14. A GaAs device is doped with a donor concentration

of 3 1015 cm -3. For the device to operate properly, the
intrinsic carrier concentration must remain less than
5% of the total concentration. The maximum
temperature on that the device may operate is
10 -6 cm 2 . The doping efficiency is known to be 90%. The
(A) 763 K
(B) 942 K
(A) 8.7 1015 cm -3
(B) 8.7 10 21 cm -3
(C) 486 K
(D) 243 K
(C) 4.6 1015 cm -3
(D) 4.6 10 21 cm -3
The resistor length is to be 200 mm and area is to be

mobility of electrons is 8000
cm 2 V - s. The doping
needed is
www.gatehelp.com
Semiconductor Physics
21. A silicon sample doped n - type at 1018 cm -3 have a

-6
Chap 2.1
27. For a sample of GaAs scattering time is t sc = 10 -13 s
and electrons effective mass is me* = 0.067 mo . If an
and a length of 10 mm . The doping efficiency of the
electric field of 1 kV cm is applied, the drift velocity
sample is (m n = 800 cm V - s)
produced is
resistance of 10 W . The sample has an area of 10
cm
(A) 43.2%
(B) 78.1%
(A) 2.6 106 cm s
(B) 263 cm s
(C) 96.3%
(D) 54.3%
(C) 14.8 106 cm s
(D) 482
22.
Six
volts
is
applied
across
cm
long
semiconductor bar. The average drift velocity is 10 4

cm s. The electron mobility is
(A) 4396 cm 2 V - s
(B) 3 10 4 cm 2 V - s
(C) 6 10 4 cm 2 V - s
(D) 3333 cm 2 V - s
28. A gallium arsenide semiconductor at T = 300 K is

doped with impurity concentration N d = 1016 cm -3. The
mobility m n is 7500 cm 2 V - s. For an applied field of 10
V cm the drift current density is
23. For a particular semiconductor material following
(A) 120 A cm 2
(B) 120 A cm 2
(C) 12 10 4 A cm 2
(D) 12 10 4 A cm 2
parameters are observed:

29. In a particular semiconductor the donor impurity
m n = 1000 cm 2 V - s ,
concentration is N d = 1014 cm -3. Assume the following
m p = 600 cm V - s ,
2
N c = N v = 10 cm
19
parameters,
-3
m n = 1000 cm 2 V - s,
These parameters are independent of temperature.
T
N c = 2 1019
300
The measured conductivity of the intrinsic material is

s = 10 -6 (W - cm) -1 at T = 300 K. The conductivity at
T
N v = 1 1019
300
T = 500 K is
(A) 2 10
-4
(C) 2 10
-5
(W - cm)
(W - cm)
-1
-1
(B) 4 10
-5
-1
(W - cm)
(D) 6 10
-3
(W - cm) -1
24. An n - type silicon sample has a resistivity of 5

W - cm at T = 300 K. The mobility is m n = 1350
32
cm -3,
32
cm -3,
. eV.
E g = 11
An electric field of E = 10 V cm is applied. The
electric current density at 300 K is
cm 2 V - s. The donor impurity concentration is
(A) 2.3 A cm 2
(B) 1.6 A cm 2
(A) 2.86 10 -14 cm -3
(B) 9.25 1014 cm -3
(C) 9.6 A cm 2
(D) 3.4 A cm 2
(C) 11.46 1015 cm -3
(D) 11
. 10 -15 cm -3
25.
In a silicon sample the electron concentration

18
drops linearly from 10
cm
-3
16
to 10
cm
-3
A semiconductor has following parameter
over a length
m n = 7500 cm 2 V - s,
of 2.0 mm. The current density due to the electron

diffusion current is ( Dn = 35 cm 2 s).
m p = 300 cm 2 V - s,
(A) 9.3 10 4 A cm 2
(B) 2.8 10 4 A cm 2
ni = 3.6 1012 cm -3
(C) 9.3 10 9A cm 2
(D) 2.8 10 9 A cm 2
30.
26. In a GaAs sample the electrons are moving under

an
electric
field
of
kV cm
and
the
carrier
concentration is uniform at 1016 cm -3. The electron

velocity is the saturated velocity of 10
(A) 1.6 10 A cm
(C) 1.6 108 A cm 2
conductivity
is
minimum,
the
hole
(A) 7.2 1011 cm -3
(B) 1.8 1013 cm -3
(C) 1.44 1011 cm -3
(D) 9 1013 cm -3
cm s. The drift
31. The minimum conductivity is
current density is
4
When
concentration is
(A) 0.6 10 -3 (W - cm) -1
(B) 17
. 10 -3 (W - cm) -1
(D) 2.4 108 A cm 2
(C) 2.4 10 -3 (W - cm) -1
(D) 6.8 10 -3 (W - cm) -1
(B) 2.4 10 A cm
4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
111
UNIT 2
32.
particular
intrinsic
semiconductor
has
Electronics Devices
-x
15 L p
Hole concentration p0 = 10 e
resistivity of 50 (W - cm) at T = 300 K and 5 (W - cm) at

T = 330 K. If change in mobility with temperature is
cm -3,x 0
-x
neglected, the bandgap energy of the semiconductor is
Electron concentration n0 = 5 1014 e L n cm -3,x 0
(A) 1.9 eV
(B) 1.3 eV
Hole diffusion coefficient Dp = 10 cm 2 s
(C) 2.6 eV
(D) 0.64 eV
Electron diffusion coefficients Dn = 25 cm 2 s

a
Hole diffusion length Lp = 5 10 -4 cm,
semiconductor. If only the first mechanism were
Electron diffusion length Ln = 10 -3 cm
33.
Three
scattering
mechanism
exist
in
present, the mobility would be 500 cm V - s. If only the

2
second mechanism were present, the mobility would be
The total current density at x = 0 is
750 cm 2 V - s. If only third mechanism were present,
(A) 1.2 A cm 2
(B) 5.2 A cm 2
the mobility would be 1500 cm 2 V - s. The net mobility
(C) 3.8 A cm 2
(D) 2 A cm 2
is
(A) 2750 cm 2 V - s
(B) 1114 cm 2 V - s
37. A germanium Hall device is doped with 5 1015
(C) 818 cm 2 V - s
(D) 250 cm 2 V - s
donor atoms per cm 3 at T = 300 K. The device has the

geometry d = 5 10 -3 cm, W = 2 10 -2 cm and L = 0.1 cm.
34. In a sample of silicon at T = 300 K, the electron
The current is I x = 250 mA, the applied voltage is
concentration varies linearly with distance, as shown in
Vx = 100
fig. P2.1.34. The diffusion current density is found to be
tesla. The Hall voltage is
J n = 0.19 A cm 2 . If the electron diffusion coefficient is
(A) -0.31mV
(B) 0.31 mV
Dn = 25 cm 2 s, The electron concentration at is
(C) 3.26 mV
(D) -3.26 mV
51014
n(cm-3)

A silicon Hall device at T = 300 K has the
geometry d = 10 -3 cm , W = 10 -2 cm, L = 10 -1 cm. The
following parameters are measured: I x = 0.75 mA,
n(0)
0
mV, and the magnetic flux is Bz = 5 10 -2
0.010
Vx = 15 V, V H = +5.8 mV, tesla
x(cm)
Fig. P2.1.34
38. The majority carrier concentration is

(A) 4.86 10 cm
8
-3
(C) 9.8 10 26 cm -3
-3
(A) 8 1015 cm -3, n - type
(D) 5.4 1015 cm -3
(B) 8 1015 cm -3, p - type
(B) 2.5 10 cm
13
35. The hole concentration in p - type GaAs is given by

x
p = 10 1 - cm -3 for 0 x L
L
(C) 4 1015 cm -3, n - type

(D) 4 1015 cm -3, p - type
16
39. The majority carrier mobility is
where L = 10 mm. The hole diffusion coefficient is

10 cm s. The hole diffusion current density at x = 5 mm
2
(A) 430 cm 2 V - s
(B) 215 cm 2 V - s
(C) 390 cm 2 V - s
(D) 195 cm 2 V - s
is
(A) 20 A cm 2
(B) 16 A cm 2
40. In a semiconductor n0 = 1015 cm -3 and ni = 1010 cm -3.
(C) 24 A cm 2
(D) 30 A cm 2
The excess-carrier life time is 10 -6 s. The excess hole
36. For a particular semiconductor sample consider

following parameters:
Page
112
concentration is dp = 4 1013 cm -3. The electron-hole

recombination rate is
(A) 4 1019 cm -3s -1
(B) 4 1014 cm -3s -1
(C) 4 10 24 cm -3s -1
(D) 4 1011 cm -3s -1
www.gatehelp.com
41. A semiconductor in thermal equilibrium, has a hole

concentration
cm -3
p0 = 1016
of
and
an
SOLUTIONS
intrinsic
-3
concentration of ni = 10 cm . The minority carrier life

10
time
4 10 -7s.
is
The
thermal
equilibrium
recombination rate of electrons is

(A) 2.5 10 22 cm -3 s -1
(B) 5 1010 cm -3 s -1
(C) 2.5 1010 cm -3 s -1
(D) 5 10 22 cm -3 s -1
n-type
1. (C) ni2 = N c N v e
For Ge at 300 K,
. 1019, N v = 6.0 1018 , E g = 0.66 eV
N c = 104
silicon
sample
contains
donor
concentration of N d = 106 cm -3. The minority carrier

hole lifetime is t p 0 = 10 m s.
-3
(A) 5 10 cm s
-1
-3
-1
-3
-1
(B) 10 cm s
-3
(C) 2. 25 10 cm s
9
-1
(D) 10 cm s
ni = 8.5 1014 cm -3
2. (C) n = N c N v e
2
i
electron is
T e
(A) 1125
.
10 cm s
(C) 8.9 10
44.
-10
-3
cm s
A n -type
-1
-3
(B) 2.25 10 cm s
9
-1
sample
concentration of N d = 10
16
contains
-1310 3
T
= 9.28 10 -8 , By trial T = 382 K
-1
(D) 4 10 9 cm -3 s -1
silicon
1 .12 e
kT
T -
(1012 ) 2 = 2.8 1019 104
. 1019
e
300
3
-3
-Eg
kT
3
43. The thermal equilibrium generation rate for

9
0 .66
-
400
0 .0345
ni2 = 104
. 1019 6.0 1018
e
300
42. The thermal equilibrium generation rate of hole is

8
-Eg
kT
400
Vt = 0.0259
= 0.0345
300

A
Chap 2.1
donor
E gA
E - E gB
gA
kT
-
n2
e kT
3. (B) iA
= E gB = e
2
niB
e kT
= 2257.5
niA
= 47.5
niB
-3
cm . The minority carrier
hole lifetime is t p 0 = 20 m s. The lifetime of the majority

carrier is ( ni = 15
. 1010 cm -3)
(A) 8.9 106 s
(B) 8.9 10 -6 s
(C) 4.5 10 -17 s
(D) 113
. 10 -7 s
concentration are N a = 10
cm
-3
and N a = 0. The
equilibrium recombination rate is Rp 0 = 1011 cm -3s -1 . A

uniform generation rate produces an excess- carrier
-3
concentration of dn = dp = 10 cm . The factor, by which

14
the total recombination rate increase is
ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 4.5 1015 cm -3
n0
5 10 4
5. (A) p0 = N v e
45. In a silicon semiconductor material the doping

16
4. (A) p0 =
6. (B) p0 = N v e
( EF - Ev )
kT
( EF - Ev )
kT
-0 .22
= 104
. 1019 e 0 .0259 = 2 1015 cm -3
At 300 K, N v = 10
. 1019 cm -3
104
. 1019
= 0. 239 eV
EF - Ev = 0.0259 ln
1015
( Ec - EF )
(A) 2.3 1013
(B) 4.4 1013
n0 = N c e
(C) 2.3 10 9
(D) 4.4 10 9
At 300 K, N c = 2.8 1019 cm -3
***********
N
EF - Ev = kT ln v
p0
kT
Ec - EF = 112
. - 0. 239 = 0.881 eV
n0 = 4.4 10 4 cm -3
2
7. (C) p0 =
Na - Nd
N
+ N a - d + ni2
2
2
For Ge ni = 2.4 10 3
2
1013
1013
+ (2.4 1013) 2 = 2.95 1013 cm -3
p0 =
+
2
2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
113
(1.6 10
n0 =
26. (A) J = evn = (1.6 10 -19)(10 7)(1016 ) = 1.6 10 4 A cm 2
0.1
= 11.36 kW
)(1100)(5 1016 )(100 10 -8 )
-19
L
,
sA
20. (A) R =
s e m n n0 ,
R=
27. (A) vd =
L
em n n0 A
et sc E (1.6 10 -19)(10 -13)(10 5)

=
(0.067)(9.1 10 -31 )
me*
= 26.2 10 3 m s = 2.6 106 cm s
L
em n AR
28. (A) N d >> ni
n0 = 0.9 N d
=
Chap 2.1
-4
20 10
= 8.7 1015 cm -3
(0.9)(1.6 10 -19)( 8000)(10 -6 )(2 10 3)
21. (B) s e m n n0 , R =
L
L
, n0 =
sA
em n AR
10 10 -4
= 7.81 1017 cm -3
=
(1.6 10 -19)( 800)(10 -6 )(10)
J = em n n0 E = (1.6 10
29. (D) ni2 = N c N v e
)(7500)(1016 )(10) = 120 A cm 2
-Eg
kT
= (2 1019)(1 1019) e
n0 = N d
-19
1 .1
-
0 .0259
= 7.18 1019
ni = 8.47 10 9 cm -3
N d >> ni
N d = n0
Efficiency =
n0
7.8 1017
100 =
100 = 78.1 %
Nd
1018
J = sE = em n n0 E
22. (D) E =
V 6
= = 3 V/cm, vd = m n E,
L 2
30. (A) s = em n n0 + em p p0 and n0 =
vd 10 4
= 3333 cm 2 V - s
=
E
3
mn =
= (1.6 10 -19)(1000)(1014 )(100) = 1.6 A cm 2
10 -6 = (1.6 10 -19)(1000 + 600)ni

At T = 300 K, ni = 391
. 10 cm
9
ni2 = N c N v e
ni2
+ em p p0 ,
p0
( -1) em n ni2
ds
=0 =
+ em p
dp0
p02
23. (D) s1 = eni (m n + m p )
Eg
kT
s = em n
ni2
p0
1
-3
N N
E g = kT ln c 2 v
ni
m
p0 = ni n
m
p
2
2
= 3.6 1012 7500
300
= 7. 2 1011 cm -3
1019
eV
= 1122
E g = 2(0.0259) ln
.
9
391
.
10
31. (B) smin =
500
At T = 500 K , kT = 0.0259
= 0.0432 eV,
300
= 2 1.6 10 -19( 3.6 1012 ) (7500)( 300)
ni2 = (1019) 2 e
1 .122
-
0 .0432
32. (B) s =
= (1.6 10 -19)(2.29 1013)(1000 + 600)

= 5.86 10 -3(W - cm) -1
24. (B) r =
Nd =
1
1
=
s em n N d
1
1
= 9.25 1014 cm -3
=
5(1.6 10 -19)(1350)
rem n
25. (B) J n = eDn
dn
dx
1018 - 1016
= (1.6 10 -19)( 35)
-4
2 10
mp + mn
= 2 en i m pm n
= 17
. 10 -3(W - cm) -1
cm -3,
ni = 2.29 1013 cm -3
2 s i m pm n
1
= emni ,
r
Eg
1
ni1 e 2 kT1
r1
=
=
Eg
1
ni 2
2 kT2
e
r2
0.1 = e
Eg 1
1
T2
2 k T1
E g 330 - 300
= ln 10
2 k 330 300
E g = 22( k300) ln 10 = 1.31 eV
= 2.8 10 4 A cm 2
33. (D)
www.gatehelp.com
1 1
1
1
=
+
+
m m1 m 2 m 3
Page
115
CHAPTER
2.2
THE PN JUNCTION
In this chapter, N d and N a denotes the net donor
5. The Fermi level on p - side is
p-region.
(A) 0.2 eV
(C) 0.4 eV
1. An abrupt silicon in thermal equilibrium at T = 300
Statement for Q.68:
and acceptor concentration in the individual n and
K is doped such that Ec - EF = 0.21 eV in the n - region
(B) 0.1 eV
(D) 0.3 eV
A silicon pn junction at T = 300 K with zero
and EF - Ev = 0.18 eV in the p - region. The built-in
applied bias has doping concentrations of N d = 5 1016
potential barrier Vbi is
cm -3 and N a = 5 1015 cm -3.
(A) 0.69 V
(C) 0.61 V
(B) 0.83 V
(D) 0.88 V
6. The width of depletion region extending into the
2. A silicon pn junction at T = 300 K has N d = 1014
n-region is
cm and N a = 10 cm . The built-in voltage is
(A) 4 10 -6 cm
(C) 4 10 -5 cm
(A) 0.63 V
(C) 0.026 V
7. The space charge width is
-3
17
-3
(B) 0.93 V
(D) 0.038 V
3. In a uniformly doped GaAs junction at T = 300 K, at

zero bias, only 20% of the total space charge region is to
be in the p-region. The built in potential barrier is
Vbi = 1.20 V. The majority carrier concentration in
n-region is
(A) 1 1016 cm -3
(C) 1 10
22
cm
-3
(B) 4 10 16 cm -3
(D) 4 10
22
cm
(B) 3 10 -6 cm
(D)3 10 -5 cm
(A) 32
. 10 -5 cm
(C) 4.5 10 -4 cm
(B) 4.5 10 -5 cm
(D) 32
. 10 -4 cm
8. In depletion region maximum electric field | Emax | is

(A) 1 10 4 V cm
(C) 3 10 4 V cm
(B) 2 10 4 V cm
(D) 4 10 4 V cm
9. An n n isotype doping profile is shown in fig. P2.2.9.
-3
The built-in potential barrier is
(ni = 15
. 1010 cm -3 )
Nd(cm-3)
Statement for Q.45:
10
An abrupt silicon pn junction at zero bias and
10
T = 300 K has dopant concentration of N a = 1017 cm -3
16
15
and N d = 5 1015 cm -3.

0
4. The Fermi level on n - side is

(A) 0.1 eV
(B) 0.2 eV
(C) 0.3 eV
(D) 0.4 eV
Fig. P2.2.9
(A) 0.66 V
(C) 0.03 V
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 0.06 V
(D) 0.33 V
Page
117
UNIT 2
Electronics Devices
concentration are N d = 4 1016 cm -3 and N a = 4 1017

A silicon abrupt junction has dopant concentration
cm -3. The magnitude of the reverse bias voltage is
N a = 2 1016 cm -3 and N d = 2 10 15 cm -3. The applied
(A) 3.6 V
(B) 9.8 V
reverse bias voltage is VR = 8 V.
(C) 7.2 V
(D) 12.3 V
10. The maximum electric field | Emax | in depletion region is
17. An abrupt silicon pn junction has an applied
(A) 15 10 V cm
(B) 7 10 V cm
reverse bias voltage of VR = 10 V. it has dopant
(C) 35
. 10 4 V cm
(D) 5 10 4 V cm
concentration of N a = 1018 cm -3 and N d = 1015 cm -3. The
pn junction area is 6 10 -4 cm 2 . An inductance of 2.2
11. The space charge region is
mH is placed in parallel with the pn junction. The
(A) 2.5 mm
(B) 25 mm
resonant frequency is
(C) 50 mm
(D) 100 mm
(A) 1.7 MHz
(B) 2.6 MHz
(C) 3.6 MHz
(D) 4.3 MHz
12.
A uniformly
doped
silicon
pn junction
has
N a = 5 1017 cm -3 and N d = 10 17 cm -3. The junction has
18. A uniformly doped silicon p+ n junction is to be
a cross-sectional area of 10 -4 cm -3 and has an applied
designed such that at a reverse bais voltage of V R = 10
reverse-bias voltage of VR = 5 V. The total junction
V the maximum electric field is limited to Emax = 106
capacitance is
V cm. The maximum doping concentration in the
(A) 10 pF
(B) 5 pF
n-region is
(C) 7 pF
(D) 3.5 pF
(A) 32
. 1019 cm -3
(B) 32
. 1017 cm -3
(C) 6.4 1017 cm -3
(D) 6.4 1019 cm -3

An ideal one-sided silicon n+ p junction has
19. A diode has reverse saturation current I s = 10 -10 A
uniform doping on both sides of the abrupt junction.
and non ideality factor h = 2. If diode voltage is 0.9 V,
The doping relation is N d = 50 N a . The built-in potential
then diode current is
barrier is Vbi = 0.75 V. The applied reverse bias voltage
(A) 11 mA
(B) 35 mA
is V R = 10.
(C) 83 mA
(D) 143 mA
13. The space charge width is
20. A diode has reverse saturation current I s = 10 -18 A
(A) 1.8 mm
(B) 1.8 mm
and nonideality factor h = 105

. . If diode has current of 70
(C) 1.8 cm
(D) 1.8 m
mA, then diode voltage is
14. The junction capacitance is

(A) 3.8 10 -9 F cm 2
(B) 9.8 10 -9 F cm 2
(C) 2.4 10 -9 F cm 2
(D) 5.7 10 -9 F cm 2
(A) 0.63 V
(B) 0.87 V
(C) 0.54 V
(D) 0.93 V
21. An ideal pn junction diode is operating in the

forward bais region. The change in diode voltage, that
15. Two p n silicon junction is reverse biased at VR = 5
will cause a factor of 9 increase in current, is
V. The impurity doping concentration in junction A are
(A) 83 mV
(B) 59 mV
(C) 43 mV
(D) 31 mV
N a = 10 cm
18
-3
and N d = 10
-15
-3
cm , and those in junction
B are N a = 1018 cm -3 and N d = 1016 cm -3. The ratio of the

22. An pn junction diode is operating in reverse bias
space charge width is

(A) 4.36
(B) 9.8
region. The applied reverse voltage, at which the ideal
(C) 19
(D) 3.13
reverse current reaches 90% of its reverse saturation

current, is
16. The maximum electric field in reverse-biased silicon

pn junction
Page
118
is
| Emax | = 3 10
V cm.
The
doping
(A) 59.6 mV
(B) 2.7 mV
(C) 4.8 mV
(D) 42.3 mV
www.gatehelp.com
The pn Junction
p+ n junction diode the doping
23. For a silicon
cross-sectional area is 10 -3 cm 2 . The minority carrier
-3
cm .
lifetimes are t n 0 = 1 ms and t p 0 = 0.1 m s. The minority
The minority carrier hole diffusion coefficient is Dp = 12
carrier diffusion coefficients are Dn = 35 cm 2 s and
cm 2 s and the minority carrier hole life time is t p 0 = 10 -7
Dp = 10 cm 2 s. The total number of excess electron in
s. The cross sectional area is A = 10 -4 cm 2 . The reverse
the p - region, if applied forward bias is Va = 0.5 V, is
saturation current is
(A) 4 10 7 cm -3
(B) 6 1010 cm -3
(C) 4 1010 cm -3
(D) 6 10 7 cm -3
concentrations are N a = 10
18
(A) 4 10
-12
cm
-3
Chap 2.2
and N d = 10
16
(B) 4 10
(C) 4 10 -11 A
-15
(D) 4 10 -7 A
28. Two ideal pn junction have exactly the same
24. For an ideal silicon pn junction diode
electrical and physical parameters except for the band

gap of the semiconductor materials. The first has a
t no = t po = 10 -7 s ,
bandgap energy of 0.525 eV and a forward-bias current
Dn = 25 cm 2 s ,
of 10 mA with Va = 0.255 V. The second pn junction
Dp = 10 cm 2 s
diode is to be designed such that the diode current
The ratio of N a N d , so that 95% of the current in
I = 10 mA at a forward-bias voltage of Va = 0.32 V. The
the depletion region is carried by electrons, is
bandgap energy of second diode would be
(A) 0.34
(B) 0.034
(A) 0.77 eV
(B) 0.67 eV
(C) 0.83
(D) 0.083
(C) 0.57 eV
(D) 0.47 eV
29. A pn junction biased at Va = 0.72 V has DC bias
A ideal long silicon pn junction diode is shown in
current I DQ = 2 mA. The minority carrier lifetime is 1 ms
fig. P2.2.2526. The n - region is doped with 10
is both the n and p regions. The diffusion capacitance is
organic atoms per cm 3 and the p - region is doped with
in
5 10
cm . The minority carrier
(A) 49.3 nF
(B) 38.7 nF
lifetimes are D n = 23 cm s and Dp = 8 cm s. The
(C) 77.4 nF
(D) 98.6 nF
16
16
boron atoms per

2
forward-bias voltage is Va = 0.61 V.
30. A p+ n silicon diode is forward biased at a current of

1 mA. The hole life time in the n - region is 0.1 ms.
Neglecting
p
Va
x=0
the
diode
(A) 38.7 + j12.1 W
(B) 235
. + j7.5 W
(C) 38.7 - j12.1 mW
(D) 235
. - j7.5 W
forward-bias current of a p+ n diode is 2.5 10 -6 F A.
(A) 6.8 1012 e -246 x cm -3, x 0
The hole lifetime is
(B) 6.8 1012 e -246 x cm -3, x 0

(C) 3.8 1014 e -3534 x cm -3, x 0
(D) 3.8 10 e
capacitance
31. The slope of the diffusion capacitance verses
25. The excess hole concentration is
+3534 x
depletion
impedance at 1 MHz is
Fig. P.2.2.25-26
14
the
(A) 1.3 10 -7 s
(B) 1.3 10 -4 s
(C) 6.5 10 -8 s
(D) 6.5 10 -4 s
-3
cm , x 0
32. A silicon pn junction with doping profile of N a = 1016
26. The hole diffusion current density at x = 3 mm is

(A) 0.6 A cm 2
(B) 0.6 10 -3 A cm 2
(C) 0.4 A cm 2
(D) 0.4 10 -3 A cm 2
cm -3 and N d = 10 15 cm -3 has a cross sectional area of

10 -2 cm 2 . The length of the p - region is 2 mm and
length of the n - region is 1 mm. The approximately
series resistance of the diode is
27. The doping concentrations of a silicon pn junction

are
N d = 10
16
cm
-3
and
N a = 8 10
15
-3
cm .
The
(A) 62 W
(B) 43 W
(C) 72 W
(D) 81 W
www.gatehelp.com
Page
119
UNIT 2
Electronics Devices
33. A gallium arsenide pn junction is operating in
39. A GaAs laser has a threshold density of 500 A cm 2 .
reverse-bias voltage VR = 5 V. The doping profile are
The laser has dimensions of 10 mm 200 mm. The active
N a = N d = 10
16
-3
cm . The minority carrier lifetime are
t p 0 = t n 0 = t 0 = 10
-8
s. The reverse-biased generation

(e r = 131
. , ni = 1.8 10 )
6
current density is
(A) 19
. 10
-8
(C) 1.4 10
-8
A cm
(B) 19
. 10
A cm
-9
(D) 1.4 10
-9
A cm
region is dLas = 100 A . The electron-hole recombination

time at threshold is 1.5 ns. The current density of 5J th
is injected into the laser. The optical power emitted, if
emitted photons have an energy of 1.43 eV, is
(A) 143 mW
(B) 71.5 mW
(C) 62.3 mW
(D) 124.6 mW
A cm
34. For silicon the critical electric field at breakdown is

approximately Ecrit = 4 10 5 V cm. For the breakdown
voltage
of 25
V,
maximum n - type
the
doping
concentration in an abrupt p n-junction is

(A) 2 1016 cm -3
(B) 4 10 16 cm -3
(C) 2 1018 cm -3
(D) 4 10 18 cm -3
35. A uniformly doped silicon pn junction has dopant

profile of N a = N d = 5 1016 cm -3. If the peak electric
field in the junction at breakdown is E = 4 10 5 V cm,
the breakdown voltage of this junction is
(A) 35 V
(B) 30 V
(C) 25 V
(D) 20 V
36. An abrupt silicon p+ n junction has an n - region

doping
concentration
n - region
minimum
of
N d = 5 10 15
width,
such
that
cm -3.
The
avalanche
breakdown occurs before the depletion region reaches

an ohmic contact, is (VB 100 V)
(A) 5.1 mm
(B) 3.6 mm
(C) 7.3 mm
(D) 6.4 mm
37. A silicon pn junction diode has doping profile

N a = N d = 5 1019 cm -3. The space charge width at a
forward bias voltage of Va = 0.4 V is
(A) 102 A
(B) 44 A
(C) 153 A
(D) 62 A
38. A
GaAs
pn+
junction LED has following
parameters
Dn = 25 cm 2 s, Dp = 12 cm 2 s
N d = 5 1017 cm -3, N a = 1016 cm -3
t n 0 = 10 ns , t p 0 = 10 ns
The injection efficiency of the LED is
Page
120
(A) 0.83
(B) 0.99
(C) 0.64
(D) 0.46
www.gatehelp.com
***************
UNIT 2
= 301
. 10 -5 cm,
CT =
-14
. 8.85 10 10
eA 117
=
301
. 10 -5
W
-4
= 35
. 10 -12 F
2
eEmax
2e
1
1
+
Na Nd
(117
. 8.85 10 -14 )( 3 10 5) 2
1
1
V
+
17
16
2 1.6 10 -19
4
10
4
10
= 8.008 V
2 e ( V + VR ) 1
1 2
W = s bi
+
,
e
Na Na
VR = 8.008 - 0.826 = 7.18 V

N N
17. (B) Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
Vbi + VR =
N a = 4. 2 1015 cm -3, N d = 2.1 1017 cm -3
Nd > > Na
4 1016 4 10 17
= 0.826 V
= 0.0259 ln
2. 25 10 20
2 e( Vbi + VR )
Na Nd 2
| Emax | =
e
( N a + N d )
N N
13. (A) Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
50 N a2
0.751 = 0.0259 ln
20
2.25 10
Electronics Devices
2 e( Vbi + VR ) 1 2
W
e
N a
1
2
2 (117
. 8.85 10 -4 )(10.752)
-4
=
= 1.8 10 cm
1.6 10 -19 4.2 1015
= 1.8 mm
1018 1015
= 0.0259 ln
20
2.25 10
= 0.754 V
2
eeN a N d
C =
2 ( Vi + VR )( N a + N d )
1
ee N a N d
14. (D) C =
2( Vbi + VR )( N a + N d )
ee N a
For N d >> N a , C =
2( Vbi + VR )
1.6 10
=
-19
. 8.85 10
117
2 (10 + 0.754)
-4
2
eeN d
For N a >> N d , C =
2 ( Vbi + VR )
1
2
1.6 10 -19 117

. 8.85 10 -4 1015 2
=
2 (10 + 0.754)
1
2
4.2 10
15
= 5.7 10 -9 F cm 2
1
2
= 2.77 10 -9 F cm 2
C = AC = 6 10 -4 2.77 10 -9 = 1.66 10 -12 F
1
1
fo =
=
= 2.6 MHz.
2p LC
2 p 2. 2 10 -3 1.66 10 -12
2 e ( V + VR ) 1
1 2
15. (D) W = s bi
+
N
e
a Na
W A ( Vbia + V R ) ( N aA + N dA ) N aB N dB 2
=
WB ( Vbib + R ) ( N aB + N dB ) N aA N dB
N N
Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
1018 1015
= 0.0259 ln
20
2.25 10
= 0.754 V
1018 1016
VbiB = 0.0259 ln
20
2.25 10
= 0.814 V
W A 5.754 1018 + 1015

=
WB 5.814 10 18 + 1016
1016 2
.
15 = 313
10
VbiA
N N
16. (C) Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
Page
122
18. (B) | Emax | =
eN a xn
e
2e( Vbi + VR )
For a p+ n junction, xn
eN d
2 eN d
2
So that | Emax | =
( Vbi + VR )
es
Assuming Vbi << VR ,

Nd =
2
eEmax
(117
. 8.85 10 -14 )(10 6 ) 2
=
2 eVR
2(1.6 10 -14 )(10)
= 3. 24 1017 cm -3
0 .9
VD
19. (B) I D = I s e hVt - 1 = 10 -10 ( e 2 ( 0 .0259) - 1 ) = 35 mA
VD
20. (B) I D = I s e hVt - 1
www.gatehelp.com
I
VD = hVt ln 1 + D
Is
The pn Junction
70 10 -6
= (105
. )(0.0259) ln 1 +
10 -18
21. (B) I d I s e
I
V1 - V2 = Vt ln d 2
I d1
= 0.87 V
V1
Vt
I d1 e
= V2 = e
I d2
e Vt
eVa
27. (A) N p = ALn np 0 e kT -1
ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 2.8 10 4 cm -3
Na
8 1015
np 0 =
( V1 - V2 )
Vt
Ln = Dn t no = 35 10 -6 = 5.9 10 -3 Cm
= 0.0259 ln 10 = 59.6 mV
VV
22. (A) I = I s e t - 1
Chap 2.2
0 .5
N p = 10 -3 5.9 10 -3 2.8 10 4 e 0 .0259 - 1
I
V = Vt ln + 1
I
= 4 10 7 cm -3
-Eg
V
t
Va

I
= -0.90 (ive due to reverse current)
Is
28. (A) I ni2 e Vt e
V = 0.0259 ln (1 - 0.9) = -59.6 mV
(10 -4 )(1.6 10 -19)(15

. 10 10 ) 2
1016
Jn
= 0.95,
Jn + Jp
24. (D)
1
J n = en
Na
2
i
Dn
N
Dn + a
Nd
Dn
,
t no
Dp
10 10 -3
=e
10 10 -6
t po
5
= 0.95
Na
5+
10
Nd
t n 0 = t p 0 = 10 -6 s,
I p 0 + I n 0 = I dQ = 2 mA
Cd =
Z=
Lp = Dp t p 0 = ( 8)(1 10 -8 ) = 2.83 10 -4 cm
0 .61
- x
dpn = 2.25 10 4 e 0 .0259 - 1 e 2 .8310 -4
= 3.8 10 e
cm
2 10 10
2( 0.0259)
I dQt p 0
2 Vt
I dQ
Vt
-6
= 3.86 10 -8 F
10 -3
= 3.86 10 -2 S
0.0259
10 -3 10 -7
= 193
. 10 -9 F
2 (0.0259)
1
1
=
= 235
. - j7.5 W
Y g d + jwCd
tp 0
1
( I pot po),
Cd =
2 Vt
-3
-4
2 Vt
= 2.5 10 -6
t p 0 = 2 0.0259 2.5 10 -6 = 1.3 10 -7 s
32. (C) RP =
x = 3 mm = 3 10 -4 cm
J p = (1.6 10 -19)(18)( 3.8 1014 )( 3534) e - ( 3534 )( 310
-3
31. (A) For a p+ n diode I p 0 >> I n 0
( dpn )
26. (A) J p = - eDp
= eDp ( 3.8 1014 )( 3534) e -3534 x
x
= 0.6 A cm 2
E g2 - 0 .59
0 .0259
30. (D) g d =
ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 2. 25 10 4 cm -3
Nd
1016
-3534 x
( 0 .0259)
I p 0 t p 0 + I n 0 tn 0
29. (B) Cd =
2 Vt
Cd =
Na
= 0.083
Nd
14
( 0 .255- 0 .32 - 0 .525+ E g2 )
E g 2 = 0.59 + 0.0259 ln 10 3 = 0.769 EV
Dp
eVa
- Lx
= pn 0 e kt - 1 e p
t
( Va1 - Va2 - E g1 + E g2 )
I1 e
= V - E = e Vt
a2
g2
I2
Vt
10 = e
1
J p = en
Nd
= 0.95,
V -Eg
a
2
i
25. (C) dpn = pn - pn 0
pn 0 =
12
= 394
. 10 -15 A
10 -7
Va

V
t
I e
V a - E g1
D
t po
1
23. (B) I s = Aen
Nd
2
i
rp L
A
L
A( em p N a )
0.2
= 26 W
(10 -2 )(1.6 10 -19)( 480)(10 16 )
www.gatehelp.com
Page
123
UNIT 2
Rn =
=
rn L
L
=
A
Ae(m n N d )
5 1019
= 2(0.0259) ln
. 1010
15
0.10
= 46.3 W
(10 )(1.6 10 -19)(1350)(1015)
R = Rp + Rn = 72.3 W
2 (117
. 8.85 10 -14 )(114
. - 0.4)
2
2
=
-14
19
1.6 10
5 10
N N
33. (B) Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
10
= 2(0.0259) ln
6
1.8 10
= 6.19 10 -7 cm = 62 A
=1.16 V
38. (B) Ln = Dn t n 0 , Lp = Dp t p 0
2 e ( V + VR )
W = s bi
e
Dn np 0
1
1 2
N + N
a
a
2 (131
. 8.85 10 -14 )( 6.16) 2
-4
=
16 = 1.34 10 cm
-19
1
.
6
10
10
eniW
2t o
1.6 10 -19 1.8 106 1.34 10 -4

= 193
. 10 -9 A cm 2
2 10 -8
34. (A) VB =
25 =
Dn np 0
Ln
35. (D) Emax =
eN d xn
e
=
np 0
Lp
Dp
Dn
+ pn 0
tn 0
tp 0
ni2 (1.8 106 ) 2

=
= 324
. 10 -4 cm -3
Na
1016
pn 0 =
ni2 (1.8 106 ) 2

=
= 6.48 106 cm -3
Nd
5 1017
Dn
=
tn 0
25
= 5 10 4 ,
10 10 -9
Dp
12
. 10 4
= 35
10 10 -9
tp 0
(5 10 4 )( 3. 24 10 -4 )
(5 10 )( 3. 24 10 -4 ) + ( 35
. 10 4 )( 6.48 10 -6 )
hinj =
N B = N d = 2 1016 cm -3
Dp pn 0
Dn
tn 0
np 0 =
2
eEcrit
2 eN B
(117
. 8.85 10 -4 )( 4 10 5) 2
2 1.6 10 -19 N B
np 0
Ln
hinj =
1
2
J gen =
= 114
. V
2 e ( V + VR ) 1
1 2
W = s bi
+
N
e
a Na
-3
16
Electronics Devices
= 0.986
xn =
eEmax
eN d
39. (B) The areal density at threshold is

n2 D =
(117
. 8.85 10 -14 )( 4 10 5)
=
= 5.18 10 -5 cm
(1.6 10 -19)(5 1016 )
N N
5 106
Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d = 2(0.0259) ln
. 1010
15
ni
= 0.778 V
. 10 -9)
J th t r (500)(15
=
= 4.69 1012 cm -3
1.6 10 -19
e
The carrier density is

nth =
n2 D 4.69 1012
=
= 4.69 1018 cm -3
dLas
10 -6
2 e V N
2
1
xn = s bi a
e N d N a + N d
Once the threshold is reached, the carrier density does
2(117
. 8.85 10 -4 )( Vbi + VR )
(5.18 10 ) =
-19
6
(1.6 10 )(2 5 10 )
15
. 10 -9
J th
= 3 10 -10 s
t r ( J th ) =
5
J
JA
The optical power produced is p =
hw
e
not
Vbi + VR = 20.7,
VR = 19.9 V,
xn
J > J th
the
VR = VB
2 eVB 2 2(117
. 8.85 10 -14 )(100) 2

=
-19
15

= 5.1 mm
eN d (1.6 10 )(5 10 )
(5 500)(2 10 -5)(1.43 1.6 10 -19)

= 715
. MW
1.6 10 -19
****************
N N
37. (D) Vbi = Vt ln a 2 d
ni
Page
124
electron
tr ( J ) =
36. (A) For a p+ n diode, Neglecting Vi compared to VB ,

1
When
recombination is
-5 2
change.
www.gatehelp.com
hole
CHAPTER
2.3
THE BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
5. A uniformly doped npn bipolar transistor is biased in
The parameters in the base region of an npn

bipolar transistor are as follows Dn = 20 cm 2 s, nB0 = 10 4
cm -3, xB = 1 mm, ABE = 10 -4 cm 2 .
the
forward-active
region.
The
transistor
doping
concentration are N E = 5 1017 cm -3, N B = 10 16 cm -3 and

N C = 1015 cm -3. The minority carrier concentration pE0 ,
nB0 and pC0 are
1. If VBE = 0.5 V, then collector current I C is
(A) 4.5 10 2 , 2. 25 10 4 , 2. 25 10 5 cm -3
(A) 7.75 mA
(B) 1.6 mA
(B) 2. 25 10 4 , 2. 25 10 5, 4.5 10 2 cm -3
(C) 0.16 mA
(D) 77.5 mA
(C) 2. 25 10 4 , 2. 25 10 5, 4.5 10 4 cm -3
(D) 4.5 10 4 , 2.25 10 4 , 2. 25 10 5 cm -3
2. If VBE = 0.7 V, then collector current I C is

(A) 418 mA
(B) 210 mA
(C) 17.5 mA
(D) 98 mA
6. A uniformly doped silicon pnp transistor is biased in

the forward-active mode. The doping profile is N E = 10 18
cm -3, N B = 5 1016 cm -3 and N C = 1015 cm -3. For VEB = 0.6
V, the pB at x = 0 is
(See fig. P2.3.7-8)
3. In bipolar transistor biased in the forward-active
(A) 5.2 10 cm
-3
(B) 5.2 10 13 cm -3
region the base current is I B = 50 mA and the collector
(C) 5.2 1016 cm -3
(D) 5.2 10 11 cm -3
currents is I C = 2.7 mA. The a is

(A) 0.949
(B) 54
(C) 0.982
(D) 0.018
19

An npn bipolar transistor having uniform doping
of N E = 10 18 cm -3 N B = 1016 cm -3 and N C = 6 10 15 cm -3
4. A uniformly doped silicon npn bipolar transistor is to

be biased in the forward active mode with the B-C
junction reverse biased by 3 V. The transistor doping
is operating in the inverse-active mode with VBE = - 2 V

and VBC = 0.6 V. The geometry of transistor is shown in
fig P2.3.7-8.
Emitter
-n-
are N E = 1017 cm -3, N B = 1016 cm -3 and N C = 10 15 cm -3.
Base
-p-
Collector
-n-
The BE voltage, at which the minority carrier electron

concentration at x = 0 is 10% of the majority carrier hole
xE
xB
xC
concentration, is
(A) 0.94 V
(C) 0.48 V
(B) 0.64 V
x' = xE
(D) 0.24 V
x'=0
x'
x=0
x
x = xB x'' = 0
x'' = xC
x''
Fig. P2.3.7-8
www.gatehelp.com
Page
125
UNIT 2
Electronics Devices
7. The minority carrier concentration at x = x B is
N E = 1018 cm -3, N B = 5 1016 cm -3,
(A) 4.5 1014 cm -3
(B) 2.6 10 12 cm -3
N C = 2 1019 cm -3,
(C) 2.6 1014 cm -3
(D) 39
. 10 14 cm -3
DE = 8 cm 2 s , DB = 15 cm 2 s , DC = 14 cm 2 s
xE = 0.8 mm, xB = 0.7 mm
8. The minority carrier concentration at x = 0 is

(A) 39
. 1014 cm -3
(C) 2.7 10
14
cm
(B) 2.7 10 12 cm -3
-3
(D) 4.5 10
14
cm
The emitter injection efficiency g is
-3
(A) 0.999
(B) 0.977
(C) 0.982
(D) 0.934
9. An pnp bipolar transistor has uniform doping of

N E = 6 1017 cm -3, N B = 2 10 16 cm -3 and N C = 5 1014
-3
15. A uniformly doped silicon epitaxial npn bipolar
cm . The transistor is operating is inverse-active mode.
transistor
The maximum V CB voltage, so that the low injection
N B = 3 10
condition applies, is
with N C = 5 10
fabricated
cm
-3
(A) 0.86 V
(B) 0.48 V
xB = 0.7 mm
(C) 0.32 V
(D) 0.60 V
punch-through is

The
following
currents
are
measured
in
with
base
doping
of
and a heavily doped collector region

cm -3. The neutral base width is
17
when
VBE = VBC = 0.
The
(A) 26.3 V
(B) 18.3 V
(C) 12.2 V
(D) 6.3 V
VBC
at
a
16. A silicon npn transistor has a doping concentration
uniformly doped npn bipolar transistor:
of
I nE = 120
. mA, I pE = 0.10 mA, I nC = 118
. mA
N B = 1017
cm -3
and
N C = 7 10 15
cm -3.
The
metallurgical base width is 0.5 mm. Let VBE = 0.6 V.
I R = 0.20 mA, I G = 1 mA, I pC0 = 1 mA
Neglecting the BE junction depletion width the VCE at

punch-through is
10. The a is
(A) 0.667
(B) 0.733
(C) 0.787
(D) 0.8
(A) 146 V
(B) 70 V
(C) 295 V
(D) 204 V
17. A uniformly doped silicon pnp transistor is to
11. The b is
(A) 3.69
(B) 0.44
(C) 2.27
(D) 8.39
designed with N E = 1019 cm -3 and N C = 10 16 cm -3. The

metallurgical base width is to be 0.75 mm. The
minimum
base
doping,
so
that
the
minimum
punch-through voltage is Vpt = 25 V, is
12. The g is
(A) 0.816
(B) 0.923
(C) 1.083
(D) 0.440
(A) 4.46 1015 cm -3
(B) 4.46 10 16 cm -3
(C) 195
. 1015 cm -3
(D) 195
. 1016 cm -3
13. A silicon npn bipolar transistor has doping
18. For a silicon npn transistor assume the following
concentration of N E = 2 1018 cm -3, N B = 10 17 cm -3 and
parameters:
. 1016 cm -3. The area is 10 -3 cm 2 and neutral

N C = 15
I E = 0.5 mA, b = 48
base width is 1 mm. The transistor is biased in the active
xB = 0.7 mA, xdc = 2 mm
region at VBE = 0.5 V. The collector current is
Cs = Cm = 0.08 pF, C je = 0.8 pF
(DB = 20 cm 2 s)
Page
126
is
16
(A) 9 mA
(B) 17 mA
(C) 22 mA
(D) 11 mA
Dn = 25 cm 2 s, rc = 30 W
The carrier cross the space charge region at a
speed of 10 7 cm s. The total delay time t ec is
14. A uniformly doped npn bipolar transistor has
(A) 164.2 ps
(B) 234.4 ps
following parameters:
(C) 144.2 ps
(D) 298.4 ps
www.gatehelp.com
The Bipolar Junction Transistor
19. In a bipolar transistor, the base transit time is 25%
of the total delay time. The base width is 0.5 mm and

base diffusion coefficient is DB = 20 cm 2 s. The cut-off
Chap 2.3
For the transistor in circuit of fig. P2.3.24-26. The

parameters are bR = 1 , bF = 100 , and I s = 1 fA .
frequency is
(A) 637 MHz
(B) 436 MHz
(C) 12.8 GHz
(D) 46.3 GHz
5V
20. The base transit time of a bipolar transistor is 100

ps and carriers cross the 1.2 mm BC space charge at a
speed of 10 7 cm s . The emitter-base junction charging
time is 25 ps and the collector capacitance and
resistance are 0.10 pF and 10 W, respectively. The cutoff
frequency is
(A) 43.8 GHz
(B) 32.6 GHz
(C) 3.26 GHz
(D) 1.15 GHz
Fig. P2.3.24-26
24. The current I C is

(A) 1 fA
(C) 1.384 fA
(B) 2 fA
(D) 0 A
25. The current I E is

Consider the circuit shown in fig. P2.3.21-22. If
voltage Vs = 0.63 V, the currents are I C = 275 mA and
I B = 5 mA .
(A) 1 fA
(B) -1 fA
(C) 2 fA
(D) -2 fA
26. The current I B is

(A) 2 fA
(B) -2 fA
(C) 1 fA
(D) -1 fA
27. For the transistor in fig. P2.3.27, I S = 10 -15 A,

bF = 100 , bR = 1. The current I CBO is
Vs
5V
Fig.P2.3.21-22
21. The forward common-emitter gain bF is

(A) 56
(B) 55
(C) 0.9821
(D) 0.9818
Fig.P2.3.27
(A) 101
. 10 -14 A
(C) 101
. 10 -15 A
22. The forward current gain a F is

(A) 0.9821
(B) 0.9818
(C) 55
(D) 56
(B) 2 10 -14 A
(D) 2 10 -15 A

Determine
23. Consider the circuit shown in fig P2.3.23. If Vs = 0.63

V, I1 = 275 mA and I 2 = 125 mA, then the value of I 3 is
the
region
of
operation
for
the
transistor shown in circuit in question.

28.
I1
6V
I2
I3
Vs
Fig. P2.3.23
(A) - 400 mA
(B) 400 mA
(C) - 600 mA
(D) 600 mA
Fig.P2.3.28
(A) Forward-Active
(C) Saturation
www.gatehelp.com
(B) Reverse-Active
(D) Cutoff
Page
127
UNIT 2
29.
Electronics Devices
33. The current I1 is

(A) -12.75 mA
(B) 12.75 mA
(C) 12.5 mA
(D) - 12.5 mA
6V
The leakage current of a transistor are I CBO = 5 m

A and I CEO = 0.4 mA, and I B = 30 mA.
Fig. P2.3.29
(A) Forward-Active
(B) Reverse-Active
(C) Saturation
(D) Cutoff
34. The value of b is
30.
(A) 79
(B) 81
(C) 80
35. The value of I C is

(A) 2.4 mA
(B) 2.77 mA
(C) 2.34 mA
(D) 1.97 mA
6V

Fig.P2.3.30
(A) Forward-Active
(B) Reverse-Active
(C) Saturation
(D) Cutoff
For a BJT, I C = 5 mA, I B = 50 mA and I CBO = 0.5 mA.

36. The value of b is
31.
3V
(A) 103
(B) 91
(C) 83
(D) 51
37. The value of I E is
6V
(A) 5.25 mA
(B) 5.4 mA
(C) 5.65 mA
(D) 5.1 mA
Fig.P2.3.31
(A) Forward-Active
(B) Reverse-Active
(C) Saturation
(D) Cutoff
********

For the circuit shown in fig. P2.3.32-33, let the
value of b R = 0.5 and bF = 50. The saturation current is
10 -16 A.
+3 V
250 mA
I1
Fig. P2.3.32-33
32. The base-emitter voltage is
Page
128
(A) 0.53 V
(B) 0.7 V
(C) 0.84 V
(D) 0.98 V
www.gatehelp.com
SOLUTIONS
1. (A) I C = I s e
0 .5
2. (C) I C = 32
. 10
-14
0 .7
0 .0259
= 17.5 mA
pC (0) = 0.10 N C = 5 1013 cm -3,

ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 4.5 10 5
NC
5 1014
VCB
V
t
pC (0) = pC 0 e
10. (C) a =
ni2
(15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 2. 25 10 4 cm -3
NB
1016
VBE
V
t
At x = 0, np (0) = np 0 e
VBE
np (0)
VBE = VT ln
n
p0
1015
= 0.0259 ln
4
2.25 10
= 0.635 V
ni2 (15
. 10 10 ) 2
=
= 450 cm -3
NE
5 1017
nB 0 =
ni2 (15
. 10 10 ) 2
=
= 2. 25 10 4 cm -3
NB
5 1016
pC 0 =
ni2 (15
. 10 10 ) 2
=
= 2. 25 10 5 cm -3
NE
5 1015
6. (B) pB 0 =
pB (0) = pB 0 e
7. (C) nB 0 =
ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 4.5 10 3 cm -3
NB
5 1016
VEB
V
t
0 .6
3 0 .0259
= 4.5 10 e
= 5. 2 1013 cm -3
ni2 (15
. 10 10 ) 2
=
= 2. 25 10 4 cm -3
NB
1016
nB ( x = xB ) = nB 0 e
p (0)
VCB = Vt ln C
pC 0
VBC
V
t
0 .6
= 2. 25 10 4 e 0 .0259 = 2.6 10 14 cm -3
J nE
J nC
I nC
=
+ J R + J pE I nE + I R + I pE
118
.
= 0.787
12
. + 0.2 + 0.1
11. (A) b =
a
0.787
==
= 3.69
1-a
1 - 0.787
12. (B) g =
J nE
I nE
1. 2
=
=
= 0.923
J nE + J pE I nE + I pE 1. 2 + 0.1
10
1016
NB =
= 10 15
100
10
5. (A) pE 0 =
5 1013
= 0.48 V
= 0.0259 ln
5
4.5 10
IC
2.7m
=
= 0.982
I C + I B 2.7m + 50m
np (0) =
0 .6
9. (B) Low injection limit is reached when
pC 0 =
I
bF
3. (C) bF = C , a F =
IB
1 + bF
VBC
V
t
I C = 3. 2 10 -14 e 0 .0259 = 7.75 mA
4. (B) np 0 =
ni2 (15
. 1010 ) 2
=
= 375
. 10 4 cm -3
NC
6 1015
= 375
. 10 4 e 0 .0259 = 4.31 1014 cm -3
(1.6 10 -19)(20)(10 -4 )(10 4 )

= 32
. 10 -14 A
10 -4
aF =
8. (D) pC 0 =
pC ( x = 0) = pC 0 e
VBE
V
b
eDn ABE nB 0
Is =
xB
=
Chap 2.3
13. (B) nB 0 =
ni2 (15
. 10 10 ) 2
=
= 2.25 10 3 cm -3
NB
1017
VBE
V
t
nB (0) = nB 0 e
IC =
=
0 .5
eDB AnB (0)

xB
(1.6 10 -19)(20)(10 -3)(5.45 10 11 )

= 17.4 mA
10 -4
14. (B) g =
= 2.25 10 3 e 0 .0259 = 5.45 1011 cm -3
1
N B D E xB
1+
N E D B xE
1
= 0.977
5 1016 8 0.7
1+
1018 15 0.8
N N
15. (B) Vbi = Vt ln B 2 C
ni
3 1016 5 1017
= 0.0259 ln
. 1010 ) 2
(15
= 0.824 V
At punch-through
www.gatehelp.com
Page
129
VBE
VBC
VBE
I
27. (C) I E = I S e Vt - e Vt + S e Vt - 1 = 0
bF
VBE
V
t
33. (A) I E = (bF + 1) I B = 12.75 mA

I1 = - I E = - 12.75 mA.
VBC
Vt
1
bR
+
e
1 + bF 1 + BF
34. (A) I CEO = (b + 1) I CBO

b+1=
VBC
VBC
VBE
V
I
I C = I S e Vt - e t - S e Vt - 1
bR
I CBO =
IS
1 - e
1 + bF
VBC
V
t
I
- S e
bR
VBC
V
t
0.4m
= 80
5m
b = 79
35. (B) I C = bI B + I CEO = 79( 30m ) + 0.4m =2.77 mA
- 1
36. (A) I C = bI B + I CEO = b I B + (b + 1) I CBO

b=
VBC = - 5 V, Vt = 0.0259 V
I CBO =
Chap 2.3
Is
I
(1 - 0) - S (0 - 1) = 101
. I S = 101
. 10 -15 A
101
1
I C - I CBO 5.2m - 0.5m

=
10396
.
I B + I CBO 50m + 0.5m
37. (A) a =
28. (D)
IE =
b
= 0.9904
b+1
I C - I CBO 5.2m - 0.5m

=
= 5.25 MA
a
0.9904
B-C Junction VBC
B-E junction VBE
Reverse Bias
Forward bias
Forward bias
Forward-Active
Saturation
Reverse Bias
Cut-off
Reverse-Active
*******
VBE = 0 , VBC < 0, Thus both junction are in reverse bias.

Hence cutoff region.
29.(A) VBE > 0 , VBC = 0, Base-Emitter junction forward
bais,
Base-collector
junction
reverse
bias,
Hence
forward-active region.
30. (B) VBE = 0 , VBC > 0, Base-Emitter junction reverse
bais , Base-collector junction forward bias, Hence
reverse-active region.
31. (C) VBE = 6 V, VBC = 3 V, Both junction are forward
biase, Hence saturation region.
32. (C) The current source will forward bias the
base-emitter junction and the collector base junction
will then be reverse biased. Therefore the transistor is
in the forward active region
IC = ISe
VBE
V
t
I C = bF I B = 50 250 10 -6 = 12.5 10 -3 A
12.5 10 -3
I
VBE = Vt ln C = 0.0259 ln
-16
= 0.84 V
10
IS
www.gatehelp.com
Page
131
UNIT 2
electronics Devices
11. In n-well CMOS fabrication substrate is
18. Monolithic integrated circuit system offer greater
(A) lightly doped n - type
reliability than discrete-component systems because
(B) lightly doped p - type
(A) there are fewer interconnections
(C) heavily doped n - type
(B) high-temperature metalizing is used
(D) heavily doped p - type
(C) electric voltage are low

(D) electric elements are closely matched
12. The chemical reaction involved in epitaxial growth

in IC chips takes place at a temperature of about
(A) 500 C
(B) 800 C
(C) 1200 C
(D) 2000 C
19. Silicon dioxide is used in integrated circuits

(A) because of its high heat conduction
(B) because it facilitates the penetration of diffusants
13. A single monolithic IC chip occupies area of about
(C) to control the location of diffusion and to protect

and insulate the silicon surface.
(A) 20 mm 2
(B) 200 mm 2
(D) to control the concentration of diffusants.
(C) 2000 mm 2
(D) 20,000 mm 2 s
20. Increasing the yield of an IC
14. Silicon dioxide layer is used in IC chips for
(A) reduces individual circuit cost
(A) providing mechanical strength to the chip
(B) increases the cost of each good circuit

(C) results in a lower number of good chips per wafer
(B) diffusing elements
(D) means that more transistor can be fabricated on

the same size wafer.
(C) providing contacts

(D) providing mask against diffusion
21. The main purpose of the metalization process is

15. The p-type substrate in a monolithic circuit should
be connected to
(A) to act as a heat sink

(B) to interconnect the various circuit elements
(A) any dc ground point
(C) to protect the chip from oxidation
(B) the most negative voltage available in the circuit
(D) to supply a bonding surface for mounting the chip
(C) the most positive voltage available in the circuit

22. In a monolithic-type IC
(D) no where, i.e. be floating

16. The collector-substrate junction in the epitaxial
(A) each transistor is diffused into a separate

isolation region
(B) all components are fabricated into a single crystal
of silicon
collector structure is, approximately

(A) a step-graded junction
(C) resistors and capacitors of any value may be

made
(B) a linearly graded junction

(C) an exponential junction
(D) all isolation problems are eliminated

23. Isolation in ICs is required
17. The sheet resistance of a semiconductor is
(A) to make it simpler to test circuits
(A) an important characteristic of a diffused region

especially when used to form diffused resistors
(B) to protect the transistor from possible ``thermal

run away
(B) an undesirable parasitic element
(C) to protect the components mechanical damage
(C) a characteristic whose value determines the

required area for a given value of integrated
capacitance
(D) to minimize electrical interaction between circuit

components
(D) a parameter whose value is important in a

thin-film resistance
Page
140
24. Almost all resistor are made in a monolithic IC

(A) during the base diffusion
www.gatehelp.com
Integrated Circuits
Chapc2.5
(B) during the collector diffusion
30. For the circuit shown in fig. P2.5.30, the minimum
(C) during the emitter diffusion
number and the maximum number of isolation regions
(D) while growing the epitaxial layer
are respectively
25. The equation governing the diffusion of neutral
(A)
N
2 N
=D
t
x 2
(C)
N
N
=D
2
t
x
R1
R2
atom is
(B)
N
2 N
=D
x
t 2
(D)
N
N
=D
2
x
t
Vo2
Q1
Q2
Fig. P2.5.32
26. The true statement is

(A) thick film components are vacuum deposited
(B) thin film component are made by screen-and- fire
process
(A) 2, 6
(B) 3, 6
(C) 2, 4
(D) 3, 4
31. For the circuit shown in fig. P2.5.31, the minimum

number of isolation regions are
(C) thin film resistor have greater precision and are

more stable
(D) thin film resistor are cheaper than the thin film
resistor
27. The False statement is
(A) Capacitor of thin film capacitor made with proper
dielectric is not voltage dependent
(B) Thin film resistors and capacitor need to be
biased for isolation purpose
(C) Thin film resistors and capacitor have smaller
stray capacitances and leakage currents.
Fig. P2.5.31
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 7
*******
28. Consider the following two statements

S1 : The dielectric isolation method is superior to
junction isolation method.
S2 : The beam lead isolation method is inferior to
junction isolation method.
The true statements is (are)
(A) S1 , S2
(B) only
(C) only
(D) Neither nor S2
29. If P is passivation, Q is n-well implant, R is

metallization and S is source/drain diffusion, then the
order in which they are carried out in a standard n-well
CMOS fabrication process is
(A) S - R - Q - P
(B) R - P - S - Q
(C) Q - S - R - P
(D) P - Q - R - S
www.gatehelp.com
Page
141
UNIT 2
SOLUTIONS
1. (D)
2. (D)
3. (B)
4. (B)
5. (C)
6. (B)
7. (C)
8. (B)
9. (C)
10. (D)
11. (B)
12. (C)
13. (C)
14. (D)
15. (B)
16. (A)
17. (A)
18. (A)
19. (C)
20. (A)
21. (B)
22. (B)
23. (D)
24. (A)
25. (A)
26. (C)
27. (B)
28. (B)
29. (C)
30. (D) The minimum number of isolation region is 3

one containing Q1 , one containing and one containing
both and . The maximum number of isolation region is
4, or one per component.
31. (A) The minimum number of isolation region is two.
One for transistor and one for resistor.
*******
Page
142
www.gatehelp.com
electronics Devices
CHAPTER
3.1
DIODE CIRCUITS
vo
Statement for Q.14:
vo
22
18
In the question a circuit and a waveform for the

t
input voltage is given. The diode in circuit has cutin

(A)
voltage Vg = 0. Choose the option for the waveform of
(B)
vo
output voltage vo .
vo
t
-3
(C)
vi
+
20
2.2 kW
3.
vo
5V
(D)
2 kW
t
-7
1.
vi
vi
16
-5
vo
vi
Fig.3.1.1
2
T
4V
20
15
-5
-10
(A)
(B)
Fig. P3.1.3
vo
vo
16
T
2
vo
20
(A)
20
(A)
2.
(D)
10 kW
T
2
-4
(D)
vi
+
D1
t
-5
4.
vi
vo
_
(C)
20
vi
T
2
16
12
2V
+
vo
T
2
(B)
vo
t
-16
12
vo
6V
vo
vi
8V
Fig.3.1.2
10
D2
t
-10
Fig.3.1.4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
145
UNIT 3
vo
vo
Analog Electronics
vo
vo
10
9.42
9.42
5.7
t
4.3
5.7
-6
15
vi
(C)
-10
(A)
vi
(D)
7. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.1.7, each diode has
(B)
vo
15
4.3
Vg = 0.7 V. The vo for -10 vs +10 V is
vo
+10 V
10 kW
-6
D1
-8
(C)
D2
vs
(D)
vo
5. For the circuit in fig. P.3.1.5, let cutin voltage Vg = 0.7

V. The plot of vo verses vi for -10 vi 10 V is
10 kW
D4
D3
10 kW
+
10 kW
20 kW
-10 V
vo
vi
Fig. P3.1.7.
10 V
10 V
vo
vo
8.43
7.48
Fig. P3.1.5
vo
vo
9.3
-10
10
9.3
3.33
3.33
-10
10
4.03
10
(B)
vo
vi
vo
5.68
vo
10
10
4.65
-10 -6.8
6.8 10
vs
-10
-5.68
4.65
-4.65
(C)
3.33
10
vi
4.33
-10
(C)
10
vi
(D)
clipping circuit shown in fig. P3.1.8. If diode has rf = 0
(D)
and rr = 2 MW and Vg = 0, the output waveform is
is Vg = 0.7 V. The plot of vo versus vi is
+
1 MW
vo
vi
1 kW
2.5 V
vo
1 kW
vi
15 V
Fig. P3.1.8
vo
Fig. P3.1.6
vo
vo
10
vo
19.6
19.6
-5
5.7
(A)
Page
146
15
(B)
vo
vo
4.3
vi
15
4.3
vi
(B)
-5
(C)
www.gatehelp.com
-10
(A)
5.7
vs
varies between +10 V and -10 V is impressed upon the
6. For the circuit in fig. P3.1.6 the cutin voltage of diode
2 kW
10
4.65
8. A symmetrical 5 kHz square wave whose output
3.33
3.33
-10
vs
-7.48
(B)
vo
10
(A)
-10
(A)
-10
-8.43
3.33
vi
vs
(D)
Diode Circuits
Chap 3.1
9. In the circuit of fig. P3.1.9, the three signals of fig are
vi
10
impressed on the input terminals. If diode are ideal

then the voltage vo is
vi
D1
v
D2
D3
+
v1
v2
vo
v3
10 kW
vo
R
5V
v3
v2
-20
Fig. P.3.1.11
v1
vo
35
vo
25
Fig. P.3.1.9
vo
5
t
vo
-5
(A)
(B)
vo
t
(A)
15
(B)
vo
vo
-15
(C)
t
(D)
12. In the circuit of fig. P3.1.12, D1 and D2 are ideal

diodes. The current i1 and i2 are
(C)
(D)
D1
10. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.1.10 the input
i1
voltage vi is as shown in fig. Assume the RC time
D2
i2
500 W
constant large and cutin voltage of diode Vg = 0. The
3V
5V
output voltage vo is
5V
C
vi
Fig. P3.1.12
10
vi
vo
-10
_
Fig. P.3.1.10
vo
vo
(A) 0, 4 mA
(B) 4 mA, 0
(C) 0, 8 mA
(D) 8 mA, 0
13. In the circuit of Fig. P3.1.13 diodes has cutin
20
voltage of 0.6 V. The diode in ON state are
10
t
(A)
D1
(B)
vo
12 W
6W
D2
vo
t
5.4 V
18 W
5V
-10
-20
(C)
Fig. P3.1.13
(D)
11. For the circuit shown in fig. P.3.1.11, the input
(A) only D1
(B) only D2
voltage vi is as shown in fig. Assume the RC time
(C) both D1 and D2
constant large and cutin voltage Vg = 0. The output

voltage vo is
www.gatehelp.com
Page
147
Diode Circuits
Chap 3.1
22. The diodes in the circuit in fig. P3.1.22 has
26. If v2 = 0, then output voltage vo is
parameters Vg = 0.6 V and rf = 0. The current iD2 is
(A) 6.43 V
(B) 9.43 V
(C) 7.69 V
(D) 8.93 V
+10 V
9.5 kW
27. If v2 = 5 V, then vo is
D2
0.5 kW
0V
iD2
vo
+5 V
D1
0.5 kW
D3
Fig. P3.1.22
(B) 10 mA
(C) 7.6 mA
(D) 0 mA
(B) 12.63 V
(C) 18.24 V
(D) 10.56 V
28. If v2 = 10 V, then vo is
+5 V
(A) 8.4 mA
(A) 8.93 V
(A) 10 V
(B) 9.16 V
(C) 8.43 V
(D) 12.13 V

The diode in the circuit of fig. P3.1.2930 has the
non linear terminal characteristic as shown in fig. Let
The diodes in the circuit in fig. P3.1.23-25 have

linear parameter of Vg = 0.6 V and rf = 0.
the voltage be vs = cos wt V.

100 W
vi
9.5 kW
0.5 kW
D2
iD
4
+
vD
100 W
2V
vo
v2
iD(mA)
+10 V
v1
vD(V)
Fig. P3.1.2930
D1
0.5 kW
0.5 0.7
Fig. P3.1.2325
29. The current iD is
23. If v1 = 10 V and v2 = 0 V, then vo is

(A) 8.93 V
(B) 7.82 V
(C) 1.07 V
(D) 2.18 V
(A) 2.5(1 + cos wt) mA
(B) 5(0.5 + cos wt) mA
(C) 5(1 + cos wt) mA
(D) 5(1 + 0.5 cos wt) mA
30. The voltage vD is
24. If v1 = 10 V and v2 = 5 V, then vo is

(A) 9.13 V
(B) 0.842 V
(A) 0.25( 3 + cos wt) V
(C) 5.82 V
(D) 1.07 V
(C) 0.5( 3 + 1 cos wt) V
(B) 0.25(1 + 3 cos wt) V

(D) 0.5(2 + 3 cos wt) V
25. If v1 = v2 = 0, then output voltage vo is
31. The circuit inside the box in fig. P3.1.31. contains
(A) 0.964 V
(B) 1.07 V
only resistor and diodes. The terminal voltage vo is
(C) 10 V
(D) 0.842 V
connected to some point in the circuit inside the box.

The largest and smallest possible value of vo most
nearly to is respectively
+15 V
The diodes in the circuit of fig. P3.1.2628 have

linear parameters of Vg = 0.6 V and rf = 0.
500 W
D2
-9 V
v2
Circuit Containing
Diode and Resistor
vo
vo
+10 V
500 W
D1
Fig. 3.1.31
9.5 kW
(A) 15 V, 6 V
(B) 24 V, 0 V
(C) 24 V, 6 V
(D) 15 V, -9 V
Fig. P3.1.2628
www.gatehelp.com
Page
149
UNIT 3
32. In the voltage regulator circuit in fig. P3.1.32 the
maximum load current iL that can be drawn is
In the voltage regulator circuit in fig. P3.1.3638
15 kW
the Zener diode current is to be limited to the range

iL
30 V
Analog Electronics
Vz = 9 V
Rz = 0
5 iz 100 mA.
12 W
RL
iL
iz
Fig. 3.1.32
(A) 1.4 mA
(B) 2.3 mA
(C) 1.8 mA
(D) 2.5 mA
power dissipation in the Zener diode is

150 W
Vz = 15 V
Rz = 0
Fig. P3.1.33
(B) 1.5 W
(C) 2 W
(D) 0.5 W
36. The range of possible load current is

(A) 5 iL 130 mA
(B) 25 iL 120 mA
(C) 10 iL 110 mA
37. The range of possible load resistance is
75 W
(A) 1 W
RL
Fig. P3.1.3638
33. In the voltage regulator shown in fig. P3.1.33 the
50 V
Vz = 4.8 V
Rz = 0
6.3 V
(A) 60 RL 372 W
(B) 60 RL 200 W
(C) 40 RL 192 W
(D) 40 RL 360 W
38. The power rating required for the load resistor is
34. The Q-point for the Zener diode in fig. P3.1.34 is
(A) 576 mW
(B) 360 mW
(C) 480 mW
(D) 75 mW
11 kW
39. The secondary transformer voltage of the rectifier

20 V
Vz = 4 V
Rz = 0
circuit shown in fig. P3.1.39 is vs = 60 sin 2 p60 t V. Each
3.6 kW
diode has a cut in voltage of Vg = 0.6 V. The ripple

voltage is to be no more than Vrip = 2 V. The value of
filter capacitor will be
Fig. P3.1.34
(A) (0.34 mA, 4 V)
(B) (0.34 mA, 4.93 V)
(C) (0.94 mA, 4 V)
(D) (0.94 mA, 4.93 V)
vi
35. In the voltage regulator circuit in fig. P3.1.35 the
+ vo 10 kW
+
vs
-
power rating of Zener diode is 400 mW. The value of RL
C
-
that will establish maximum power in Zener diode is
Fig. P3.1.39
222 W
20 V
Vz = 10 V
Rz = 0
RL
(A) 48.8 mF
(B) 24.4 mF
(C) 32.2 mF
(D) 16.1 mF
40. The input to full-wave rectifier in fig. P3.1.40 is

Fig. P3.1.35
Page
150
(A) 5 kW
(B) 2 kW
(C) 10 kW
(D) 8 kW
vi = 120 sin 2 p60 t V. The diode cutin voltage is 0.7 V. If

the output voltage cannot drop below 100 V, the
required value of the capacitor is
www.gatehelp.com
Diode Circuits
1 : 1
vi
SOLUTIONS
+
+
vs
+
vs
-
2.5 kW
vo
-
1. (D) Diode is off for vi < 5 V. Hence vo = 5 V.

For vi > 5 V, vo = vi , Therefore (D) is correct option.
2. (C) Diode will be off if vi + 2 > 0.Thus vo = 0
Fig. P3.1.40
(A) 61.2 mF
(B) 41.2 mF
(C) 20.6 mF
(D) 30.6 mF
For vi + 2 < 0 V,
voltage is Vin = 0. The ripple voltage is to be no more

than vrip = 4 V. The minimum load resistance, that can
be connected to the output is
+
50 mF
vo
vi < - 2, vo = vi + 2 = -3 V
Thus (C) is correct option.
41. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.1.41 diode cutin
75sin 2p60t V
Chap 3.1
3. (D) For vi < 4 V the diode is ON and output vo = 4 V.

For vi > 4 V diode is off and output vo = vi .
4. (C) During positive cycle when vs < 8 V, both diode
are OFF vo = vs . For vs > 8 V , vo = 8 V, D1 is ON. During
RL
negative cycle when |vs | < 6 V, both diode are OFF,
vo = vs . For vs > 6 V, D2 is on vo = -6 V. Therefore (C) is
Fig. P3.1.41
correct.
(A) 6.25 kW
(B) 12.50 kW
(C) 30 kW
10 10
5. (B) For D off , vo = 20 20 = 3.33 V.
1
1
+
20 10
For vi 3.33 + 0.7 = 4.03 V, vo = 3.33 V
****************
For vi > 4.03 V , vo = vi - 0.7

For vi = 10 V, vo = 9.3 V
6. (C) Let v1 be the voltage at n-terminal of diode,
v1 =
15 1
=5 V
2 +1
For vi 5.7 V, vo = vi
v1 - 15 v1
v - vi
+
+ o
=0
2k
1k
1k
3v1 + 2 vo - 2 vi = 15
vo = 0.4 vi + 3.42
vo = v1 + 0.7
5 vo - 2 v1 = 15 + 2.1 = 17.9
7. (D) For vs > 0, when D1 is OFF, Current through D2 is

i=
10 - 0.7
= 0.465 mA, vo = 10 ki = 4.65 V
10 + 10
vo = vs for 0 < vs < 4.65 V.

For negative values of vs , the output is negative of
positive part. Thus (D) is correct option.
8. (B) The diode conducts (zero resistance) when vi < 2.5
V and vo = vi . Diode is open (2 MW resistance) when
v - 2.5
vi > 2.5 V and vo = 2.5 + i
= 5 V.
3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
151
UNIT 3
= 50 5 (1 + cos wt) 10 -3 + 0.5
C=
= 0.75 + 0. 25 cos wt = 0. 25( 3 + cos wt) V

31. (D) The output voltage cannot exceed the positive
power supply voltage and cannot be lower than the
negative power supply voltage.
32. (A) At regulated power supply is =
vmax
2 fkVrip
RL =
30 - 9
= 1.4 mA iL
15 k
75(50)
50
V
=
75 + 150
3
50
> VZ , RTH = 150 ||75 = 50 W
3
1 50
iZ =
- 15 = 33 mA, P = 15 iZ = 0.5 W
50 3
3.6(20)
= 4.93 V > VZ ,
11 + 3.6
4.93 - 4
= 11 || 3.6 = 2.71 kW, iZ =
= 0.34 mA
2.71k
34. (A) vTH =

RTH
35. (B) iZ ( max ) =

iL + iZ =
400m
= 40 mA
10
20 - 10
= 45 mA
222
iL ( min ) = 45 - 40 = 5 mA, RL =
10
= 2 kW
5m
36. (B) Current through 12 W resistor is

6.3 - 4.8
i=
= 125 mA
12
iL = i - iZ = 125 - iZ
25 iL 120 mA
37. (C) 25 iL 120 mA, iL RL = 4.8 V

25
4.8
120 mA
RL
40 RL 192 W
38. (A) PL = iL VZ = (120m)( 4.8) = 576 mV

39. (B) vs = 60 sin 2 p60 t V
vmax = 60 - 1.4 = 58.6 V
58.6
vmax
C=
=
= 24.4 mF
2 fRVrip
2( 60)10 10 3 2
40. (C) Full wave rectifier
vs = vi = 120 sin 2 p60 t V
vmax = 120 - 0.7 = 119.3 V
Vrip = 119.3 - 100 = 19.3 V
Page
154
41. (A) Vrip =
will remain less than 1.4 mA.

33. (D) vTH =
Analog Electronics
www.gatehelp.com
119.3
= 20.6 mF
2( 60)2.5 10 3 14.4
vmax
fRL C
75
vmax
= 6.25 kW
=
fCVrip 60 50 10 -5 4
***************
CHAPTER
3.2
BASIC BJT CIRCUITS
VBE ( ON ) = 0.7
VCE ( Sat ) = 0.2
(A) 8.4 V
(B) 6.2 V
transistor if not given in problem.
(C) 4.1 V
3. I C , RC = ?
Use
V,
for
npn
+5 V
The common-emitter current gain of the transistor

is b =75. The voltage VBE in ON state is 0.7 V.
1. I E , RC = ?
RC
VC = 2 V
50 kW
+12 V
10 kW
IQ = 1 mA
+
VEC = 6 V
-
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.3
RC
(A) 0.987 mA, 3.04 kW

(B) 1.013 mA, 2.96 kW
-12 V
(D) 0.946 mA, 4.18 kW
Fig. P3.3.1
(A) 1.46 mA, 6.74 kW
(B) 0.987 mA, 3.04 kW
(C) 1.13 mA,, 5.98 kW
(D) 1.057 mA, 3.96 kW

4. VC = ?
2. VEC = ?
+5 V
+8 V
10 kW
20 kW
10 kW
VC
10 kW
-2 V
2 kW
3 kW
-8 V
Fig. P3.3.2
Fig. P3.3.4
(A) 1.49 V
(B) 2.9 V
(C) 1.78 V
(D) 2.3 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
155
UNIT 3
Analog Electronics
9. VB = 1 V
In the circuit of fig.P3.3.5-6 VB = - 1 V
(A) 4 V
(C) 1 V
+3 V
(B) 3 V
(D) 1.9 V
10. VB = 2 V
500 kW
4.8 kW
(B) 1.5 V
(C) 2.6 V
-3 V
The transistor in circuit shown in fig. P3.3.11-12

has b = 200. Determine the value of voltage Vo for given
value of VBB .
Fig. P3.3.5-6
5. b = ?
(A) 103.4
(C) 134.5
(A) -7 V
(B) 135.5
(D) 102.4
+5 V
5 kW
6. VCE = ?
(A) 6.4 V
(C) 1.3 V
Vo
50 kW
(B) 4.7 V
(D) 4.2 V
10 kW
VBB
7. In the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.7 voltage VE = 4 V.

The value of a and b are respectively
+5 V
Fig. P3.3.11-12
11. VBB = 0
2 kW
(A) 2.46 V
(C) 3.33 V
100 kW
VE
(B) 1.83 V
(D) 4.04 V
12. VBB = 1 V
8 kW
(A) 4.11 V
(C) 2.46 V
(B) 1.83 V
(D) 3.44 V
-5 V
13. VBB = 2 V
Fig. P3.3.7
(A) 0.943, 17.54

(C) 0.914, 11.63
(B) 0.914, 17.54

(D) 0.914, 11.63
(A) 3.18 V
(C) 0.2 V
(B) 1.46 V

For the transistor in circuit shown in fig.
P3.3.8-10, b = 200. Determine the value of I E and I C for
given value of VB in question.
The transistor shown in the circuit of fig.

P3.3.14-16 has b = 150. Determine Vo for given value of
I Q in question.
+5 V
+6 V
5 kW
10 kW
Vo
VC
VB
IQ
1 kW
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.14-16
Fig. P3.3.8-10
14. I Q = 0.1 mA
8. VB = 0 V
(A) 6.43 mA, 2.4 V
(C) 0 A, 6 V
Page
156
(B) 2.18 mA, 3.4 V

(A) 1.4 V
(B) 4.5 V
(C) 3.2 V
www.gatehelp.com
Basic BJT Circuits
15. I Q = 0.5 mA
(A) 3.16 V
(B) 2.52 V
(C) 2.14 V
(D) 394
. V
Chap 3.2
(A) 0.991
(B) 0.939
(C) 0.968
(D) 0.914
20. For the transistor in fig. P3.3.20 , b = 50. The value
16. I Q = 2 mA
of voltage VEC is
(A) 4.9 V
(B) -4.9 V
(C) 0.5 V
(D) -0.5 V
+9 V
1 mA
17. For the circuit in fig. P3.3.17 VB = VC and b = 50. The

value of VB is
+6 V
50 kW
10 kW
4.7 kW
VC
-9 V
VB
Fig. P3.3.20
1 kW
Fig. P3.317
(A) 0.9 V
(B) 1.19 V
(C) 2.14 V
(D) 1.84 V
(A) 3.13 V
(B) 4.24 V
(C) 5.18 V
(D) 6.07 V
21. In the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.21 if b = 50, the

power dissipated in the transistor is
+9 V
18. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.18, VCB = 0.5 V and
b = 100. The value of I Q is
0.5 mA
+5 V
5 kW
Vo
50 kW
4.7 kW
-9 V
IQ
Fig. P3.3.21
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.18
(A) 1.68 mA
(B) 0.909 mA
(C) 0.134 mA
19. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.19 the emitter

voltage is VE = 2 V. The value of a is
(A) 3.87 mW
(B) 10.46 mW
(C) 7.49 mW
(D) 18.74 mW
22. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.22 the Q-point is

VCEQ = 12 V and I CQ = 2 A when b = 60. The value of
resistor RC and RB are
+24 V
+10 V
RC
RB
10 kW
VE
50 kW
10 kW
-10 V
Fig. P3.3.19
Fig. P3.3.22
(A) 10 kW, 241 kW
(B) 10 kW, 699 kW
(C) 6 kW, 699 kW
(D) 6 kW, 241 kW
www.gatehelp.com
Page
157
Basic BJT Circuits
Chap 3.2
29. For the transistor in the circuit of fig. P3.3.29,
32. The current gain of the transistor shown in the
b = 100. The voltage VB is
circuit of fig.P3.3.32 is b = 100. The values of Q-point

( I CQ , VCEQ) is
+10 V
+5 V
20 kW
1 kW
5 kW
12 kW
15 kW
0.5 kW
2 kW
Fig. P3.3.29
-5 V
(A) 3.6 V
(B) 4.29 V
(C) 3.9 V
(D) 4.69 V
Fig. P3.3.32
30. The current gain of the transistor shown in the
(A) (1.8 mA, 2.1 V)
(B) (1.4 mA, 2.3 V)
(C) (1.4 mA , 1.8 V)
(D) (1.8 mA, 1.4 V)
circuit of fig. P3.3.30 is b = 125. The Q-point values

( I CQ , VCEQ) are
33. For the circuit in fig. P3.3.33, let b = 60. The value of
+24 V
VECQ is
+5 V
+10 V
58 kW
42 kW
10 kW
2 kW
20 kW
2.2 kW
10 kW
Fig. P3.3.30
-5 V
(A) (0.418 mA, 20.4 V)
(B) (0.915 mA, 14.8 V)
(C) (0 .915 mA, 16.23 V)
(D) (0.418 mA, 18.43 V)
31. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.31, let b = 75. The
-10 V
Fig.P3.3.33
(A) 2.68 V
(B) 4.94 V
(C) 3.73 V
(D) 5.69 V
34. In the circuit of fig. P3.3.34 Zener voltage is VZ = 5
Q-point (I CQ , VCEQ) is
+24 V
V and b = 100. The value of I CQ and VCEQ are

+12 V
25 kW
3 kW
500 W
8 kW
1 kW
Fig. P3.3.34
Fig. P3.3.31
(A) ( 4.68 mA, 16.46 V)
(B) ( 312
. mA , 1.86 V)
(C) ( 312
. mA, 8.46 V)
(D) ( 4.68 mA , 5.22 V)
(A) 12.47 mA, 4.3 V
(B) 12.47 mA, 5.7 V
(C) 10.43 A, 5.7 V
(D) 10.43 A , 4.3 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
159
UNIT 3
35. The two transistor in fig. P3.2.35 are identical. If

b = 25, the current I C2 is
Analog Electronics
(A) 36.63 mA
(C) 49.32 mA
(B) 36.17 mA
(D) 49.78 mA
+5 V
IC2
39. In the bipolar current source of fig. P3.2.39 the

diode voltage and transistor BE voltage are equal. If
25 mA
base current is neglected then collector current is
Fig. P3.2.35
(A) 28 mA
(B) 23.2 mA
(C) 26 mA
(D) 24 mA
10 kW
36. In the shunt regulator of fig. P3.2.26, the VZ = 8.2 V
4.7 kW
and VBE = 0.7 V. The regulated output voltage Vo is
10 kW
120 W
Vo
+22 V
-20 V
Fig. P3.2.39
(A) 6.43 mA
(C) 1.48 mA
100 W
(B) 2.13 mA
(D) 9.19 mA
40. In the current mirror circuit of fig. P3.2.40. the

transistor parameters are VBE = 0.7 V, b = 50 and the
Early voltage is infinite.
Fig. P3.2.36
(A) 11.8 V
(B) 7.5 V
(C) 12.5 V
(D) 8.9 V
Assume transistor are
matched. The output current I o is

+5 V
37. In the series voltage regulator circuit of fig. P3.2.37
1 mA
VBE = 0.7 V, b = 50, VZ = 8.3 V. The output voltage Vo is

+25 V
Io
Vo
220 W
20 kW
50 kW
Fig. P3.2.40
50 kW
(A) 1.04 mA
(C) 962 mA
30 kW
(B) 1.68 mA
(D) 432 mA
41. All transistor in the N output mirror in fig. P3.2.41

are matched with a finite gain b and early voltage
Fig. P3.2.37
(A) 25 V
(B) 25.7 V
(C) 15 V
(D) 15.7 V
V A = . The expression for each load current is

V
38. In the regulator circuit of fig. P3.2.38 VZ = 12 V,

b = 50, VBE = 0.7 V. The Zener current is
+20 V
Io1
Iref
Io2
Io3
R1
Vo
QS
220 W
QR
1 kW
Q1
Q2
Fig. P32.41
Fig. P3.2.38
Page
160
www.gatehelp.com
QN
Basic BJT Circuits
(A)
(C)
I ref
(B)
(1 + N )
1 +
b
(b + 1)
b I ref
(D)
(1 + N )
1 +
(b + 1)
I ref
Chap 3.2
SOLUTIONS
N
1 +
(
b
+ 1)
1. (C) I E =
b I ref
N
1 +
+ 1
b
12 - 0.7
10 k
. mA
I E = 113
75
I C =
. ) = 112
. mA
(113
75 + 1
42. Consider the basic three transistor current source in
VCE = 12 - 1.13 10 - 1.12 RC - ( -12) = 6 V
fig. P3.2.42. Assume all transistor are matched with
RC = 5.98 kW
finite gain and early voltage V A = . The expression for

I o is
V
2. (C) 8 = 10 (75 + 1) I B + 0.7 + 10 I B - 2
IB =
Io
I C = bI B = 0.906 mA, I E = (b + 1) I B = 0.918 mA
R1
Iref
9.3
= 12.08 mA,
10 + 760
8 = 10(0.918) + VEC + 3(0.906) - 8
VEC = 4.1 V
75
75
3. (A) I C =
(1m) = 0.987 mA
IE =
76
75 + 1
V
RC =
Fig. P3.2.42
(A)
(C)
I ref
(B)
2
1 +
(1 + b)
I ref
(D)
2
1 +
b
(
1
+
b
)
I ref
1
1 +
(2 + b)
4. (A) 5 = (1 + b)10 kI B + 20 kI B + 0.7 + b2 kI B

5 = (760 k + 20 k + 150 k) I B + 0.7
I ref
1
1 +
b
(
2
+
b
)
VC = 5 - (b + 1) I B RC = 5 - 760 4.62 10 -3 = 1.49 V
Both of transistor are identical and b >> 1 and VBE1 = 0.7

V. The value of resistance R1 and RE to produce I ref = 1
mA and I o = 12 mA is ( Vt = 0.026)
5. (C) VB = - I B RB
IB =
-VB
1
=
= 2.0 mA
RB 500k
VE = -1 - 0.7 = - 17
. V
V - ( -3) -17
. +3
IE = E
=
= 0.271 mA
4.8 k
4.8 k
IE
0.271m
= (b + 1) =
IB
2m
+5 V
Iref
Io
Q1
I B = 4.62 mA,
I C = bI B = 0.347 mA
43. Consider the wilder current source of fig. P3.2.43.
R1
5.2
= 304
. kW
0.987m
Q2
b = 134.5
6. (B) VCE = 3 - VE = 3 - ( -17

. ) = 4.7 V
RE
-5 V
7. (C) I E =
Fig. P3.2.43
5.4
= 0.5 mA
2k
(A) 9.3 kW, 18.23 kW
(B) 9.3 kW , 9.58 kW
4 = 0.7 + I B RB + I C RC - 5, I C I E ,
(C) 15.4 kW , 16.2 kW
(D) 15.4 kW , 32.4 kW
8.3 = 100 I B + 0.5 8
*****************
I B = 43 mA ,
IE
0.5m
=1 + b =
= 11.63
IB
43m
www.gatehelp.com
Page
161
UNIT 3
b = 10.63, a =
b
a = 0.914
1+b
Vo = VCE ( sat ) - VBE = 0.2 - 0.7 = - 0.5 V

17. (B) I E =
8. (C) VB = 0 Transistor is in cut-off region.
VB - 0.7
1k
b
50
I C =
I E =
( VB - 0.7) mA
51
b + 1
I E = 0, VC = 6 V
9. (B) VB = 1 V , I E =
Analog Electronics
1 - 0.7
= 0.3 mA
1k
IC =
I C I E = 0.3 mA
6 - VC
mA, VC = VB
10
50
6 - VB
( VB - 0.7) =
51
10
VC = 6 - I C RC = 6 - (0.3)(10) = 3 V
10.8 VB = 12.86 , VB = 119

. V
2 - 0.7
10. (B) VB = 2 V, I E =
= 1.3 mA,
1
18. (B) VCB = 0.5 V , VC = 0.5 V
I C I E = 1.3 mA
VC = 6 - (1.3)(10) = - 7 V
Transistor is in saturation. The saturation voltage
IC =
5 - 0.5
101
=0.9 mA, I Q =
0.9 = 0.909 mA
5k
100
VCE = 0.2 V
19. (C) I E =
11. (C) VBB = 0, Transistor is in cutoff region
VB = VE - 0.7 = 1.3 V
RL
10(5)
Vo =
VCC =
+ 5 = 3.33 V
RC + RL
10
IB =
12. (B) I B =
1 - 0.7
= 6 mA
50 k
I C = bI B = 75 6m = 0.45 mA
5 - Vo
V
= IC + o
5k
10 k
Vo Vo
Vo = 1.83 V
(1 - 0.45) =
+
,
5
10
13. (C) I B =
2 - 0.7
= 26 mA
50 k
I C = b I B = 75 26 mA =1.95 mA
. = -4.75 V
VC = 5 - I C RC = 5 - 5 195
Transistor is in saturation, VCE = 0.2 V = VC = Vo
14. (B) I E = 0.1 mA
IC =
b
150
IE =
(0.1) = 0.099 mA
(b + 1)
151
VB
1.3
=
= 26 mA
RB 50 k
b+1=
a=
I E 0.8m
=
= 30.77
I B 26m
b = 29.77
b
29.77
=
= 0.968
b + 1 30.77
b
50
20. (D) I C =
mA = 0.98 mA
I E =
b
+
1
51
VC = I C RC - 9 = (0.98)( 4.7) - 9 = - 4.394 V
IB =
IE
1
=
mA = 19.6 mA
(b + 1) 51
VE = I B RB + VEB = 50(0.0196) + 0.7 = 1.68 V

VEC = 1.68 - ( -4.394) = 6.074 V
b
50
21. (A) I C =
(0.5) = 0.49 mA
I E =
b
+
1
51
Vo = 5 - RC I C = 5 - 5(0.099) = 4.50 V
IB =
15. (B) I E = I Q = 0.5 mA
VE = I B RB + VEB = (0.0098)(50) + 0.7 = 1.19 V
150
IC =
(0.5m) = 0.497 mA
150 + 1
VC = I C RC - 9 = (0.49)( 4.7) - 9 = - 6.7 V

VEC = 119
. - ( -6.7) = 7.89 V
Vo = 5 - RC I C = 2.517 V
PQ = I C VEC + I B VEB
16. (D) Transistor is in saturation

Page
162
10 - VE
= 0.8 mA
10k
. V
VE = (1.3)(1) = 1.3 V , VC = VCE + VE = 15
0.5
= 9.8 mA
51
= (0.49)(7.89) + (0.0098)(0.7) mW = 3.87 mW

www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 3
R2
VTH =
R1 + R2
15
VCC =
(10) = 4.29 V
20 + 15
10 = I E (1k) + VEB +
10 = I E + 0.7 +
IB =
IE
( 8.57 k) + 4.29
b+1
Analog Electronics
5.82 - 0.7 = ( 6.06 k + 76 k) I BQ
I BQ = 62.4 mA
I EQ = (b + 1) I BQ = 4.74 mA
I CQ = bI BQ = 4.68 mA
VCEQ = 24 - I CQ RC - I EQ RE
IE
( 8.57 k) + 4.29
101
= 24 - ( 4.68)( 3) - ( 4.74)(1) = 5.22 V
I E = 4.62 MA
32. (B) R1 = 12 kW, R2 = 2 kW
IE
= 0.046 mA
b+1
RTH = R1||R2 = 12 ||2 = 171

. kW
2
VTH =
. V
(10) - 5 = - 357
12 + 2
VB = ( 8.57)(0.046) + 4.29 = 4.69 V

30. (B) R1 = 58 kW, R2 = 42 kW
+5 V
+24 V
5 kW
1.71 kW
-3.57 V
24.36 kW
+10.1 V
0.5 kW
10 kW
-5 V
Fig. S3.3.32
Fig. S3.3.30
-357
. = I BQ(171
. k) + VBE + (b + 1) I BQ(0.5 k) - 5
RTH = 58 ||42 = 24.36 kW

VTH
5 - 357
. - 0.7 = (171
. + 50.5)I BQ
42
=
(24) = 10.1 V
42 + 58
10.1 = I BQ(24.36 k) + VBE + (b + 1) I BQ(10 k)

10.1 - 0.7 = I BQ(24.36 k + 1260 k)
I BQ = 14 mA
I EQ = (100 + 1) I BQ = 1.412 mA
I CQ = 100 I BQ = 1.4 mA
VCEQ = 5 - RC I CQ - RE I EQ + 5
I BQ = 7.32 mA
= 5 - (5)(1.4) - (0.5)(1.412) + 5 = 2.3 V
I CQ = bI BQ = 0.915 mA
I EQ = (b + 1) I BQ = 0.922 mA
33. (B) RTH = 20 ||10 = 6.67 kW
VCEQ = 24 - (0.922)(10) = 14.8 V
20
VTH =
10 - 5 = 1.67 V
10 + 20
31. (D) R1 = 25 kW, R2 = 8 kW
+10 V
+24 V
2 kW
3 kW
6.67 kW
6.06 kW
+1.67 V
+5.82 V
2.2 kW
1 kW
-10 V
Fig. S3.3.33
Fig. S3.3.31
RTH = 25 ||8 = 6.06 kW, VTH
8
=
(24) = 5.82 V
25 + 8
5.82 = ( 6.06 k)( I BQ) + VBE + (b + 1) I B (1k)

Page
164
10 = (1 + b) I BQ(2) + VEB + I BQ( 6.67) + 1.67

10 - 1.67 - 0.7 = I BQ( 6.67 + 122)
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 3
41. (A) I ref = I CR + I BS = I CR +
I ref
I o RE = Vt ln
Io
I ES
1+b
I ES = I BR + I B1 + I B 2 + ....... I BN
I BR = I Bi , I CR = I Ci = I oi
(1 + N ) I CR
I ES = (1 + N ) I BR =
b
Then I ref = I CR +
1 10 -3
0.026
ln
-6
-6
12 10
12 10
R1 =
V + - VBE1 - V - 5 - 7 - ( -5)
=
= 9.3 kW
I ref
1m
(1 + N ) I CR
I ES
= I CR +
b (b + 1)
b+1
Iref
Io = IC2
Q3
IC1
IE3
Q2
Q1
IB1 IB2
Fig. S3.2.42
I E 3 = (1 + b) I B 3
2 IB2
IE3
I ref = I C1 +
= I C1 +
(1 + b)
(1 + b)
I C1 = I C 2 = bI B 2
2 IC2
2
= I C2 1 +
b(1 + b)
b
(
1
+
b
)
I ref
2
1 +
1
b
(
+
b
)
43. (B) If b >> 1 and transistor are identical

VBE1
VBE2
I ref I C1 = I S e
Vt
, Io = IC2 = IS e
Vt
I ref
VBE1 = Vt ln
IS
I
, VBE 2 = Vt ln o
IS
I ref
VBE1 - VBE 2 = Vt ln
Io
From the circuit,

VBE1 - VBE 2 = I E 2 RE I o RE
Page
166
= 9.58 kW
***********
42. (C) I ref = I C1 + I B 3 , I B1 = I B 2 , I E 3 = 2 I B 2
IC2 = Io =
RE =
(1 + N )
= I Oi 1 +
b(b + 1)
I ref
I oi =
(1 + N )
1 +
b(b + 1)
I ref = I C 2 +
Analog Electronics
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
3.3
BASIC FET CIRCUITS
Statement for Q.46:
Statement for Q.13:

In the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.13 the transistor
parameter are as follows:
parameters are as follows:

Threshold voltage
In the circuit shown in fig. P3.3.46 the transistor
VTN = 2 V
Conduction parameter K n = 0.5 mA / V
VTN = 2 V, kn = 60 mA / V 2 ,
W
= 60
L
+10 V
+10 V
32 kW
4 kW
14 kW
1.2 kW
18 kW
2 kW
6 kW
0.5 kW
-10 V
Fig. P3.3.13
Fig. P3.3.46
4. VGS = ?
1. VGS = ?
(A) 2.05 V
(B) 6.43 V
(A) -3.62 V
(B) 3.62 V
(C) 4.86 V
(D) 3.91 V
(C) -0.74 V
(D) 0.74 V
5. I D = ?
2. I D = ?
(A) 1.863 mA
(B) 1.485 mA
(C) 0.775 mA
(A) 13.5 mA
(B) 10 mA
(C) 19.24 mA
(D) 4.76 mA
6. VDS = ?
3. VDS =?
(A) 4.59 V
(B) 3.43 V
(A) 2.95 V
(B) 11.9 V
(C) 5.35 V
(D) 6.48 V
(C) 3 V
(D) 12.7 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
167
Basic FET Circuits
Chap 3.3
16. The parameter of the transistor in fig. P3.3.16 are
19. In the circuit of fig. P.3.3.19 the PMOS transistor
VTN = 1.2 V, K n = 0.5 mA / V 2 and l = 0. The voltage VDS
has parameter VTP = -1.5 V, kp = 25 mA / V 2 , L = 4 mm
is
and l = 0. If I D = 0.1 mA and VSD = 2.5 V, then value of W

will be
+5 V
+9 V
50 mA
Fig. P3.3.16
(A) 1.69 V
(B) 1.52 V
(C) 1.84 V
(D) 0
Fig. P3.3.19
17. The parameter of the transistor in fig. P3.3.17 are

VTN = 0.6 V and K n = 0. 2 mA / V 2 . The voltage VS is
(A) 15 mm
(B) 1.6 mm
(C) 32 mm
(D) 3.2 mm
20. The PMOS transistor in fig. P3.3.20 has parameters
+9 V
VTP = -1.2 V,
24 kW
W
= 20, and kp = 30 mA / V 2 .
L
+5 V
Rs
0.25 mA
RD
-9 V
Fig. P3.3.17
-5 V
(A) 1.72 V
(B) -1.72 V
(C) 7.28 V
(D) -7.28 V
Fig. P3.3.20
If I D = 0.5
mA and VD = -3 V, then value of RS
18. In the circuit of fig. P3.3.18 the transistor
and RD are
parameters are VTN = 17

. V and K n = 0.4 mA / V 2 .
(A) 4 kW, 5.8 kW
(B) 4 kW, 5 kW
(C) 5.8 kW, 4 kW
(D) 5 kW, 4 kW
+5 V
21. The parameters for the transistor in circuit of fig.
RD
P3.3.21 are VTN = 2 V and K n = 0.2 mA / V 2 . The power

dissipated in the transistor is
+10 V
RS
50 kW
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.18
10 kW
If I D = 0.8 mA and VD = 1 V, then value of resistor

Fig. P3.3.21
RS and RD are respectively

(A) 2.36 kW, 5 kW
(B) 5 kW, 2.36 kW
(C) 6.43 kW, 8.4 kW
(D) 8.4 kW, 6.43 kW
(A) 5.84 mW
(B) 2.34 mW
(C) 0.26 mW
(D) 58.4 mW
www.gatehelp.com
Page
169
UNIT 3
Analog Electronics
25. The transistors in the circuit of fig. P3.3.25 have
Consider the circuit shown in fig. P3.2.2233.
parameter VTN = 0.8 V, kn = 40 mA / V 2 and l = 0. The

width-to-length ratio of M 2
+5 V
when Vi = 5 V, then
( )
W
L 1
is
( WL )2 = 1.
If Vo = 0.10 V
for M1 is
+5 V
M1
Vo
M1
M2
Vo
The both transistor have parameter as follows

VTN = 0.8 V,
M2
Vi
Fig. P3.3.22-23
Fig. P3.3.25
kn = 30 mA / V 2
22. If the width-to-length ratios of M1 and M 2 are

W W
= = 40
L 1 L 2
(A) 47.5
(B) 28.4
(C) 40.5
(D) 20.3
The output Vo is
All transistors in the circuit in fig. P3.3.2627
(A) -2.5 V
(B) 2.5 V
(C) 5 V
(D) 0 V
have parameter VTN = 1 V and l = 0.

+5 V
W
W
23. If the ratio is = 40 and = 15, then Vo is
L 1
L 2
(A) 2.91 V
(B) 2.09 V
(C) 3.41 V
(D) 1.59 V
RD
M4
M1
ID1
24. In the circuit of fig. P3.324. the transistor
RG
ID4
M3
M2
parameters are VTN = 1 V and kn = 36 mA / V 2 . If I D = 0.5

mA, V1 = 5 V and V2 = 2 V then the width to-length
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.2627
ratio required in each transistor is

+5 V
The conduction parameter are as follows:

M1
K n1 = 400 mA / V 2
V1
K n 2 = 200 mA / V 2
M2
K n 3 = 100 mA / V 2
V2
K n 4 = 80 mA / V 2
M3
Fig. P3.3.24
Page
170
26. I D1 = ?
(A) 0.23 mA
(B) 0.62 mA
(C) 0.46 mA
(D) 0.31 mA
W

L 1
W

L 2
W

L 3
(A)
1.75
6.94
27.8
27. I D4 = ?
(B)
4.93
10.56
50.43
(A) 0.62 mA
(B) 0.31 mA
(C)
35.5
22.4
8.53
(C) 0.46 mA
(D) 0.92 mA
(D)
56.4
38.21
12.56
www.gatehelp.com
Basic FET Circuits
Chap 3.3
28. For the circuit in fig. P3.3.28 the transistor
(A) 7.43 V
(B) 8.6 V
parameter are VTN = 0.8 V and kn = 30 mA / V 2 . If output
(C) -1.17 V
(D) 1.17 V
voltage is Vo = 0.1 V, when input voltage is Vi = 4.2 V,

the required transistor width-to length ratio is
32. A p-channel JFET biased in the saturation region

with VSD = 5 V has a drain current of I D = 2.8 mA, and
+5 V
I D = 0.3 mA at VGS = 3 V. The value of I DSS is

10 kW
Vo
(A) 10 mA
(B) 5 mA
(C) 7 mA
(D) 2 mA
Vi

For the p-channel transistor in the circuit of fig.
Fig. P3.3.28
(A) 1.568
(B) 0.986
(C) 0.731
(D) 1.843
P3.3.3334 the parameters are I DSS = 6 mA, VP = 4 V

and l = 0.
1 kW
29. For the transistor in fig. P3.3.29 parameters are

VTN = 1 V and K n = 12.5 mA / V 2 . The Q-point ( I D , VDS ) is
+10 V
0.4 kW
20 kW
-5 V
Fig. P3.3.3334
10 kW
33. The value of I DQ is

Fig. P3.3.29.
(A) 8.86 mA
(B) 6.39 mA
(C) 4.32 mA
(D) 1.81 mA
(A) (1 mA, 8 V)
(B) (0.2 mA, 4 V)
34. The value of VSD is
(C) (1.17 mA, 8 V)
(D) (0.23 mA, 3.1V)
(A) -4.28 V
(B) 2.47 V
30. For an n-channel JFET, the parameters are I DSS = 6
(C) 4.28 V
(D) 2.19 V
mA and VP = -3 V. If VDS > VDS ( sat ) and VGS = -2 V, then
35. The transistor in the circuit of fig. P3.3.35 has
I D is
parameters I DSS = 8 mA and VP = -4 V. The value of VDSQ
(A) 16.67 mA
(B) 0.67 mA
(C) 5.55 mA
(D) 1.67 mA
is
31. For the circuit in fig. P3.3.32 the transistor
+20 V
140 kW
2.7 kW
parameters are Vp = - 35
. V, I DSS = 18 mA, and l = 0. The
value of VDS is
+15 V
60 kW
2 kW
0.8 kW
Fig. P3.3.35
IQ = 8 mA
(A) 2.7 V
(B) 2.85 V
(C) -1.30 V
(D) 1.30 V
-15 V
Fig. P3.3.32
******************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
171
UNIT 3
10 - ( 4.67 + VSG) = (0.5)(1)( VGS )
SOLUTIONS
1. (A) R1 = 32 kW,
R2
VG =
R1 + R2
R2 = 18 kW,
VDD = 10 V
18
VDD =
10 = 3.6 V
18 + 32
VGS = 2.05 V
10. (C) Assume transistor in saturation.

I D = 0.4 mA,
VG = 0,
VSG = 2 + 0.8 = 2.21 V
VSG = VS - VG = VS
11. (A) VD = I D RD - 5 = (0.4)(5) - 5 = -3 V
= 10 - 0.775( 4 + 2) = 5.35 V
VSD = VS - VD = 2. 21 - ( -3) = 5. 21 V
VDS ( sat ) = VGS - VTN = (2.05 - 0.8) = 1. 25 V

VDS > VDS ( sat ) as assumed.
12. (C) R1 = 14.5 kW, R2 = 5.5 kW,
4. (B) R1 = 14 kW, R2 = 6 kW, RS = 0.5 kW, RD = 1.2 kW
RS = 0.6 kW, RD = 0.8 kW,

RL
VG =
R1 + R2
6
(20) - 10 =
(20) - 10 = -4 V
14 + 6
5.5
(10) - 5 =
(10) - 5 = -2.25 V
14.5 + 5.5
Assume transistor in saturation.

V - ( -5)
ID = S
= K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
RS
Assume transistor in saturation

V - ( -10) VG - VGS + 10
ID = S
=
= K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
RS
RS
VS = VG - VGS
kn W
( 60)( 60 10 -6 )
=
= 1.8 mA / V 2
2 L
2
-2.25 - VGS + 5 = (0.6)(0.5) ( VGS - ( -1)) 2
- 4 - VGS + 10 = (0.5)(1.8)( VGS - 2) 2
VGS = 3.62, - 0.74 V, VGS will be positive.
VGS is positive. Thus (D) is correct option.
5. (D) I D =
VG - VGS + 10 -4 - 3.62 + 10
=
= 4.76 mA
RS
0.5 k
VGS = 124
. , - 6.58 V
13. (D) I D =
VS + 5 VG - VGS + 5 -2.25 - 124

. +5
=
=
RS
RS
0.6 k
= 2.52 mA, Therefore (D) is correct option.
6. (B) 10 = I D( RS + RD) + VDS - 10

VDS = 20 - 4.76(12
. + 0.5) = 119
. V
14. (B) 5 = I D( RS + RD) + VDS - 5
VDS ( sat ) = VGS - VTN = 3.62 - 2 = 1.62 V
VDS = 10 - I D( RS + RD) = 10 - 2.52(0.8 + 0.6) = 6.47 V
. V > VDS ( sat ) , Assumption is correct.

VDS = 119
VDS ( sat ) = VGS - VTH = 124

. - ( -1) =2.24
7. (B) R1 = 8 kW, RL = 22 kW, RS = 0.5 kW, RD = 2 kW

R2
VG =
R1 + R2
22
(20) - 10 =
(20) - 10 = 4.67 V
8 + 22
Assume transistor in saturation

10 - VS
ID =
= K P ( VSG + VTP ) 2
RS
VS = VG + VSG
VDS > VDS ( sat ) ,Assumption is correct.

15. (B) I S = 50 mA = I D ,I D = K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
50 10 -6 = 0.5 10 -3( VGS - 12

. )2
V
VG = 0, VS = VG - VGS = -1516
.
VDS = VD - VS = 5 - ( -1516
.
) = 6.516 V
16. (B) I D = 50m = K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
Page
172
0.4 = K P ( VGS + VTP ) 2
0.4 = (0.2)( VSG - 0.8) 2
3. (C) VDS = VDD - I D( RD + RS )
Kn =
10 - ( 4.67 + 377
. )
= 312
. mA
0.5
VSD = 20 - I D ( RS + RD)= 20 - 2.12(2 + 0.5) = 12.2 V
V - VGS
3.6 - 2.05
2. (C) I D = G
=
= 0.775 mA
RS
2k
RL
VG =
R1 + R2
10 - VS 10 - ( VG + VGS )
=
RS
RS
9. (C) 10 = I D( RS + RD) + VSD - 10
K n = 0.5 mA / V 2
3.6 - VGS = (2)(0.5)( VGS - 0.8) 2
VSG = 377
. V, - 177
. V, VSG is positive voltage.
8. (A) I D =
Assume that transistor in saturation region

V
V - VGS
ID = S = G
= K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
RS
RS
RS = 2 kW,
Analog Electronics
www.gatehelp.com
50 10 -6 = 0.5 10 -3( VGS - 12

. )2
V,
VGS = 1516
.
Basic FET Circuits
VGS = 152
. V,
W W
23. (A) > thus VGS1 < VGS 2
L 1 L 2
VGS = VDS
17. (B) I D = K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
0.25 = 0.2( VGS - 0.6)
VGS = VG - VS ,
18. (A) I D =
VG = 0,
40( VGS1 - 0.8) 2 = 15( VGS 2 - 0.8) 2
V,
VGS = 172
.
VGS 2 = 5 - VGS1
V
VS = -172
.
5 - VD
= 0.8 mA,
RD
RD =
1.63( VGS1 - 0.8) = (5 - VGS1 - 0.8)

VGS1 = 2.09, VGS 2 = 2.91 V, Vo = VGS 2 = 2.91 V
6 -1
= 5 kW
0.8m
24. (A) Each transistor is biased in saturation because
I D = K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
0.8 = (0.4)( VGS - 17
. )2
VDS = VGS and VDS > VGS - VTN
VGS = 311
. V
For M 3 , V2 = 2 V = VGS 3
VGS = VG - VS , VG = 0, VS = -311
. V
-311
. - ( -5)
I D = 0.8 mA =
RS = 2.36 kW
RS
25 W
10 -4 =
2 4
. )2
(2.5 - 15
30 10 -6
20. (D) K p =
2
I D = K p ( VSG + VTP ) 2
36 10 -3 W
(2 - 1) 2
I D = 0.5 =
2
L 3
36 10 -3 W
( 3 - 1) 2
I D = 0.5 =
2
L 2
25. (D) M 2 is in saturation because
0.5 = 0.3( VSG - 12

. )2
VGS 2 = VDS 2 > VGS 2 - VTN
VSG = 2.49 V, VG = 0
VD - ( -5)
RD
RD =
M1 is in non saturation because

VGS1 = Vi = 5 V, VDS1 = VD = 0 V
VDS1 < VGS1 - VTN , I D1 = I D2
W
W
2
2
[2( VGS1 - VTN1 ) VDS1 - VDS 2 ]= ( VGS 2 - VTN 2 )
L
L
1
2
-3 + 5
= 4 kW
0.5m
W
[2(5 - 0.8)(0.1) - (0.1) 2 ] = (1)(5 - 0.1 - 0.8) 2
L 1
21. (B) Assume transistor in saturation

10 - VGS
ID =
= K n ( VGS - VTN ) 2
10 k
W
(0.83) = 16.81
L 1
10 - VGS = (10)(0.2)( VGS - 2) 2
. V
VGS = VDS = 377
10 - 377
.
ID =
= 0.623 mA
10 k
VGS1 = 5 - VGS 2
VDS > VGS - VTN assumption is correct.
transistor
I D1 = I D2
are
K n 1 ( VGS1 - VTN1 ) = K n 2 ( VGS 2 - VTN 2 )
K n 1 = K n 2 , VTN1 = VTN 2
5
VGS1 = VGS 2 = V
2
Vo = VGS 2 = 2.5 V
-6
(5 - VGS 2 - 1) 2 = 200 ( VGS 2 - 1) 2

VGS1 = 2.24 V
(2.24 - 1) 2 =0.62 mA
I D4 = K n 4 ( VGS 4 - VTN ) 2 = K n 3 ( VGS 3 - VTN ) 2

in
saturation.
2
W
=20.3
L 1
27. (B) VGS 2 = VGS 3 = 2.76 V
22. (B) For both transistor VDS = VGS ,

both
VGS 2 = 2.76 V,
I D1 = 400 10
Power = I DVDS = 2.35 mW
Therefore
26. (B) I D1 = K n 1 ( VGS1 - VTN ) 2 = K n 2 ( VGS 2 - VTN ) 2
. V, - 0.27 V, VGS will be 3.77 V

VGS = 377
VDS > VGS - VTN
W
= 6.94
L 2
36
W
W
I D = 0.5 =
10 -5 (5 - 1) 2 = 174
.
2
L 1
L 1
VS = VSG = 2.49 V
5 - VS
5 - 2.49
ID =
RS =
= 5.02 kW
RS
0.5m
ID =
For M1 , VGS1 = 10 - V1 = 10 - 5 = 5 V
W = 32 mm
(20) = 0.3 mA / V 2
W
= 27.8
L 3
For M 2 , VGS 2 = V1 - V2 = 5 - 2 = 3 V
kp W
( VGS + VTP ) 2
2 L
19. (C) VSD = VSG, I D =
Chap 3.3
= 100 10 -6 (2.76 - 1) 2 = 0.31 mA

28. (C) VGS = 4.2 V,
VDS = 0.1 V
VDS < VGS - VTN , Thus transistor is in non saturation.

5 - 0.1
ID =
= 0.49 mA
10 k
k W
ID = n
{2 ( VGS - VTN ) VDS - VDS2 }
2 L
www.gatehelp.com
Page
173
CHAPTER
3.4
AMPLIFIERS
1. If the transistor parameter are b = 180 and Early
3. The small signal votlage gain Av = vo vs is
voltage V A = 140 V and it is biased at I CQ = 2 mA, the
(A) -4.38
(B) 4.38
values of hybrid-p parameter g m , rp and ro are
(C) -1.88
(D) 1.88
respectively
4. The nominal quiescent collector current of a
(A) 14 A V, 2.33 kW, 90 kW
transistor is 1.2 mA. If the range of b for this transistor
(B) 14 A V, 90 kW , 2.33 kW
is 80 b 120 and if the quiescent collector current
(C) 77 mA V, 2.33 kW , 70 kW
changes by 10 percent, the range in value for rp is
(D) 77.2 A V, 70 kW, 2.33 kW
(A) 1.73 kW < rp < 2.59 kW

(B) 1.93 kW < rp < 2.59 kW
Statement for Q.23.
(C) 1.73 kW < rp < 2.59 kW
Consider the circuit of fig. P3.4.23. The transistor
(D) 1.56 kW < rp < 2.88 kW
parameters are b = 120 and V A = .

Statement for Q.56:
+5 V
Consider the circuit in fig. P3.4.5.6. The transistor

parameter are b = 100 and V A = .
4 kW
250 kW
vs
+10 V
vo
RC
50 kW
2V
vs
Fig. P3.4.23
vBB
2. The hybrid-p parameter values of g m , rp and ro are

(A) 24 mA V, , 5 kW
Fig. P3.4.56
(B) 24 mA V, 5 kW ,
5. If Q-point is in the center of the load line and I CQ = 0.5
(C) 48 mA V, 10 kW , 18.4 kW
mA, the values of VBB and RC are
(D) 48 mA V, 18.4 kW, 10 kW
(A) 10 kW , 0.95 V
(B) 10 kW , 1.45 V
(C) 48 kW , 0.95 V
(D) 48 kW , 1.45 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
175
Amplifiers
Chap 3.4
19. For an n-channel MOSFET biased in the saturation
Consider the common Base amplifier shown in fig.

P3.4.1415. The parameters are
g m = 2 mS
and
region, the parameters are VTN = 1 V, 12 m n Cox = 18 mA V 2

and l = 0.015 V -1 and I DQ = 2 mA. If transconductance is
ro = 250 kW. Find the Thevenin equivalent faced by load
g m = 3.4 mA V, the width-to-length ratio is
resistance RL .
(A) 80.6
(B) 43.2
(C) 190
(D) 110
Thevenin equivalent
20. In the circuit of fig. P3.4.20, the parameters are
270 W
vi
g m = 1mA / V, ro = 50 kW. The gain Av = vo vs is
RL
VDD
Fig. P3.4.1415
60 kW
14. The Thevenin voltage vTH is

(A) 263vi
(B) 132vi
(C) 346vi
(D) 498vi
2 kW
vs
300 kW
15. The Thevenin equivalent resistance RTH is

(A) 384 kW
(B) 697 kW
(C) 408 kW
(D) 915 kW
Fig. P3.4.20
(A) -8.01
(B) 8.01
(C) 14.16
(D) -14.16
The common-base amplifier is drawn as a two-port

in fig. P3.4.1617. The parameters are b = 100, g m = 3
mS, and ro = 800 kW.
+
For the circuit shown in fig. P3.4.2123 transistor

parameters are VTN = 2 V, K n = 0.5 mA / V 2 and l = 0.
The transistor is in saturation.
i2
i1
v1
+
3.9 kW
10 kW
18 kW
+10 V
v2
10 kW
vo
Fig. P3.4.1617
vi
16. The h-parameter h21 is
VGG
(A) 2.46
(B) 0.9
(C) 0.5
(D) 0.67
Fig. P3.4.2123
21. If I DQ is to be 0.4 mA, the value of VGSQ is
17. The h-parameter h12 is

(A) 3.8 10 -4
(B) 4.83 10 -3
(C) 3.8 10 4
(D) 4.83 10 3
18. For an n-channel MOSFET biased in the saturation

region, the parameters are K n = 0.5 mA V 2 , VTN = 0.8 V
and l = 0.01 V -1 , and I DQ = 0.75 mA. The value of g m and
ro are
(A) 5.14 V
(B) 4.36 V
(C) 2.89 V
(D) 1.83 V
22. The values of g m and ro are

(A) 0.89 mS,
(B) 0.89 mS, 0
(C) 1.48 mS, 0
(D) 1.48 mS,
23. The small signal voltage gain Av is
(A) 0.68 mS, 603 kW
(B) 1.22 mS, 603 kW
(A) 14.3
(B) -14.3
(C) 1.22 mS, 133 kW
(D) 0.68 mS, 133 kW
(C) -8.9
(D) 8.9
www.gatehelp.com
Page
177
Amplifiers
(A) 4.44
(B) -4.44
(C) 2.22
(D) -2.22
SOLUTIONS
the
source-follower
circuit
in
fig.
P3.4.33-34. The values of parameter are g m = 2 mS and

ro = 100 kW.
+5 V
Ro
vs
I CQ
1. (C) g m =

Consider
Chap 3.4
IQ
500 kW
bVt
b
180
=
=
= 2.33 kW
I CQ g m 77.2m
ro =
V A 140
=
= 70 kW
I CQ 2m
gm =
Fig. P3.4.33-34
rp =
33. The voltage gain Av is

(B) -0.89
(C) 2.79
(D) -2.79
2 - 0.7
= 5.2 m A
250 k
I CQ
Vt
0.624
= 24 mA V
0.0259
bVt
b
120
=
=
= 5 kW, ro =
I CQ g m 24m
rp
bRC
3. (C) Av = - g m RC
=
r
+
R
r
B
p + RB
p
34. The output resistance Ro is
5k
= - (24m)( 4 k)
= -1.88
5
k
+
250
k
(A) 100 kW
(B) 0.498 kW
(C) 1.33 kW

4. (D) rp =
rp(min) =
bVT
,
I CQ
(120)(0.0259)
= 2.88 kW,
108
. m
rp( max ) =
*******************
2m
= 77.2 mA V
0.0259
I CQ = bI B = (120)(5.2m ) = 0.642 mA
4 kW
-5 V
(A) 0.89
rp =
2. (B) I BQ =
vo
Vt
( 80)(0.0259)
= 156
. kW
1.32m
5. (A) VECQ =
1
VCC = 5 V
2
VECQ = 10 - I CQ RC = 5
10 - (0.5m) RC = 5
RC = 10 kW,
I BQ =
I CQ
b
0.5
=5 mA
100
VEB ( ON ) + I BQ RB = VBB
0.7 + (5m ) (50 k) = 0.95 V
6. (D) g m =
rp =
I CQ
Vt
0.5
= 19.3 mA V
0.0259
bVt (100)(0.0259)
=
= 5.18 kW , ro =
0.5m
I CQ
100
7. (B) I CQ =
(0.35) = 0.347 mA
1001
www.gatehelp.com
Page
179
UNIT 3
The small-signal equivalent circuit is as shown in fig.

S3.4.7
500 W
vo
+
vs
10 kW
rp
Vp
_
gmVp
ro
7 kW
Analog Electronics
9. (A) DC Analysis: VTH =
RTH = 11||50 = 8.33 kW

12 - 0.7 - 10
I BQ =
= 119
. mA
8.33k + (101)1k
. mA, I EQ = 12
. mA
I CQ = bI BQ = 119
. )2 = 8.42 V
VECQ = 12 - (1. 20)1 - (119
AC Analysis:
Ib
Fig. S3.4.7
rp
vs
rp ||10 k
vo
( ro ||7 k)
= - g m
vs
500
r
|
|
10
k
+
I CQ 0.347m
gm =
=
= 1313
. mA V
Vt
0.0259
rp =
288 7
7.6 10
= 6.83 kW, rp ||10k =
= 4.32 kW
288 + 7
7.6 + 10
vo
10||50 kW
bIb
E
2 kW
(b+1)Ib
bVt
(100)(0.0259
=
= 2.18 kW
119
. m
I CQ
vo = bI b (2k) , vs = - (b + 1) I b (1k) + I b ( rp)

v
-b(2 k)
-(100)(2 k)
Av = o =
=
= -196
.
vs
rp + (b + 1)1k
2.18 k + (100)(1k)
10. (B) VECQ = 8.42 V,
4.32 k
Av = -1313
. m
( 6.83k) = - 80
500 + 4.32 k
Output voltage swing = 5.16 V peak to peak.
8. (C) DC Analysis: I CQ = I EQ
11. (B) Since the BC junction is not reverse biased, the

transistor continues to operate in the forward-active
I CQ = 3.57 mA
-mode
AC Analysis:
Ib
vo
+
rp
vs
R1 || R2
Ie
+
vce
_
vce
rp
gmvce
Vp bIb
_ E
Fig. S 3.4.11
1.2 kW
bVt
(0.0259)
= (150)
= 109
. kW , ro =
357
. m
I CQ
1
vce
1
, So rp ||
|| ro
=
g m Vce g m
gm
(100)(0.0259)
rp =
= 2.33 kW
2m
I CQ
2m
gm =
=
= 77.2 mA V
Vt 0.0259
vo -(b I b ) RC
, vs = I b rp + (b + 1) RE I b
=
vs
vs
1
V
150
= 12.95 , ro = A =
= 75 kW
gm
I CQ 2m
0.2 kW
Fig. S3.4.8
rp =
DvEC = 11 - 8.42 = 2.58 V
For 1 vEC 11 V,
VCEQ = 5 = 10 - I CQ ( RC + RE )
5 = 10 - I CQ(1. 2 k + 0. 2 k)
3.57
I BQ =
= 23.8 m A
150
Av =
Av =
Page
180
Fig. S3.4.9
VA
100
=
= 288 kW
I CQ 0.347m
ro ||7k =
Vp
+
1 kW
b
bV
100
= t =
= 7.6 kW
rp =
. m
g m I CQ 1313
ro =
Ic
B
_
rp ||10 k
( vs ), vo = - g m Vp( ro ||7k)
500 + rp ||10 k
Vp =
50
(12) = 10 V
10 + 50
-bRC
-(150)(12
. )k
=
= -5.75
rp + (1 + b) RE 109
. k + (151)(0.2 k)
r=
re = (2.33k)||(12.95)||(75 k) =12.87 W
www.gatehelp.com
ro
Amplifiers
VA
I CQ
12. (C) ro =
I CQ =
Vp Vp
v + Vpi
+
+ g m Vp + i
=0
rp
ro
270
VA
75
=
= 0.375 mA
ro 200 k
vi + Vpi
Vp
Vp
+
+ 2mVp +
=0
50 k 250 k
270
bV
75(0.0259)
13. (B) rp = t =
= 194
.
kW
I CQ
1m
E
bIb
Ie
Ib
2.7 kW
16. (B) The equivalent small-signal circuit is shown in
+
vo
_
fig. S3.4.16
1.5 kW
ro
Fig. S 3.4.13
i1
vi = I b ( rp + 15k
. ), I in = I e = (b + 1) I b
Vi ( rp + 15
. k) 194
.
+ 15
. k
Rin =
=
=
= 45 W
Ie
(b + 1)
76
vs
3.9 kW rp
rp =
gmVp
Vp
+
vi rp
Removing the RL , -Vp =
270 + rp
rp =
vi rp(1 + g m ro)
270 + rp
i2
i1
, i2 =
v2 = 0
Vp
V
V
- p - p - g m Vp ,
39
. k rp
ro
h21 =
i2
=
i1
. k
- g m rp 39
- gm
=
= 0.91
1
1
39
.
k
. k
r
+
+
g
p
m rp 39
+ + gm
39
. k rp
i1 = 0
3.9 kW rp
fig. S3.4.15
Vp
+
gmVp
18 kW
i2
v2
ro
Fig. S 3.4.17
270 W
_
rp
gmVp
Vp
+
Fig. S 3.4.15
I sc = g m Vp +
v1
v
v - v2
+ 1 + 1
= g m Vp
39
. k rp
ro
15. (A) The equivalent small-signal circuit is shown in
Vp
can be neglected
ro
ro
vi 50 k(1 + (2m)(250 k))

= 498 vi
270 + 50 k
vi
Vp
+ g m Vp
r0
i1 = -
17. (A) v1 = -Vp ,
b
100
=
= 50 kW
g m 2m
vTH =
v2 = 0
b
100
=
= 33.3 kW
gm
3m
h21 =
Fig. S 3.4.14
vTH = -ro g m Vp - Vp =
18 kW
Vp
+
Fig. S 3.4.16
270 W
_
gmVp
ro
rp
14. (D) The equivalent circuit is shown below
vi
Vp = -0.647 vi ,
.
mvi
I sc = 1297
vTH
498 vi
RTH =
=
= 384 kW
I SC 1297
.
mvi
rp
vi
Chap 3.4
Vp
Vp
= 2.004 mVp
= 2mVp +
ro
250 k
Isc
1
1 1 v
+ + - 2 = - g m v1
v1
39
.
k
r
ro ro
p
1
1
v1
ro
800
k
=
=
1
1
1
1
1 1
v2
+
+
+ 3m
+ + + gm
39
. k 33.3k 800 k
39
. k rp ro
= 3.8 10 -4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
181
Amplifiers
RS = 4 kW, v gs = 0.84 vi ,
v gs = vi ,
vo = - g m v gs ( ro ||RD)
Chap 3.4
vo
= Av = - g m (7k)
vi
g m = 2 K n ( VGS - VTN )
= -(1.41m)(0.84 vi )(100 k || 5 k)
vo
= Av = - 5.6
vi
= 2 (1m)(151
. - 0.8) = 1.42 mS
28. (A) Ro = RD ||ro || 100k =4.76 kW
32. (A) The small-signal equivalent circuit is shown in
Av = -(1.42m) (7 k) = - 9.9
fig. S.3.4.34
29. (A) As shown in fig. S3.4.27, Ri = R1 || R2 = 20.6 kW
. V, I DQ = 0.5 mA
VGSQ = 15
vi
g m = 2 K n ( VGS - VTN ) = 2(1m) (15

. - 0.8) = 1.4 mA V
ro = [ lI DQ ]
vo
vgs
10 kW
RS
5 kW
+
RD
RL
4 kW
=
Fig. S3.4.32
The resulting small-signal equivalent circuit is shown

in fig. S5.4.30
G
vi
30. (C) From the DC analysis:
-1
gmvgs
vgs gmvgs
RTH
RD
vo = - g m v gs ( RD || RL ), vi = -v gs
v
Av = o = g m ( RD || RL ) = (2m)(5 k ||4 k) = 4.44
vi
vo
7 kW
33. (A) The small-signal equivalent circuit is shown in
fig. S3.4.33
RS
0.5 kW
G
Fig. S 3.4.30
vi
vo = - g m v gs RD, vi = v gs + g m v gs RS
vo
- g m RD
(7 k)
=
= - (1.4m)
= -5.76
vi
1 + g m RS
1 + (1.4m) (0.5 k)
ro
vgs gmvgs
500 kW
_
vo
4 kW
31. (B) Since the DC gate current is zero, VS = -VGSQ

Fig. S3.4.33
I DQ = I Q = K n ( VGSQ - VTN ) 2
0.5 = 1( VGSQ - 0.8) 2
vo = g m v gs ( RL || ro)
VGSQ = 151
. V = -VS
. ) = 301
. V
VDSQ = 5 - (0.5m)(7 k) - ( -151
The transistor is therefore biased in the saturation
region. The small-signal equivalent circuit is shown in
fig.S3.4.31.
D
G
+
vs
vgs
_
gmvgs
vo
7 kW
vi = v gs + vo = v gs + g m v gs ( RL || ro)
1
v gs =
1 + g m ( RL || ro)
vo
g m ( RL || ro)
= Av =
vi
1 + g m ( RL || ro)
RL ||ro = 4 k ||100 k =
Av =
(2m)( 3.85 k)
= 0.89
1 + (2m)( 3.85 k)
34. (B) Ro =
Fig. S3.4.31
vo = - g m v gs (7k)
100 k
= 3.86 kW
26
1
||ro
gm
1
= ||(100) 0.498 kW
2
********************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
183
CHAPTER
3.5
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
1. Av =
vo
=?
vi
400 kW
vi
(A) -2 sin wt m A
(B) -7 sin wt m A
(C) -5 sin wt m A
(D) 0
40 kW
4. In circuit shown in fig. P3.5.4, the input voltage vi is
vo
0.2 V. The output voltage vo is

50 kW
150 kW
10 kW
vi
25 kW
Fig. P3.5.1
(A) -10
(B) 10
(C) -11
(D) 11
2. Av =
vo
Fig. P3.5.4
vo
=?
vi
400 kW
40 kW
vi
vo
(A) 6 V
(B) -6 V
(C) 8 V
(D) -8 V
5. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.5.5 gain is
60 kW
Av = vo vi = -10. The value of R is

R
Fig. P3.5.2
(A) -10
(B) 10
(C) 13.46
(D) -13.46
100 kW
vi
3.
The
input
to
the
circuit
in
fig.
100 kW
P3.5.3
100 kW
vo
is
vi = 2 sin wt mV. The current io is

10 kW
vi
Fig. P3.5.5
1 kW
io
vo
(A) 600 kW
(B) 450 kW
(C) 4.5 MW
(D) 6 MW
4 kW
Fig. P3.5.3
Page
184
www.gatehelp.com
Operational Amplifiers
6. For the op-amp circuit shown in fig. P3.5.6 the
Chap 3.5
10. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.10 the output voltage vo is
voltage gain Av = vo vi is
20 kW
20 kW
+0.5 V
40 kW
-1 V
vi
vo
60 kW
+2 V
R
vo
Fig. P3.5.10
Fig. P3.5.6
(A) -8
(B) 8
(C) -10
(D) 10
(B) -2.67 V
(C) -6.67 V
(D) 6.67 V
11. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.11 the voltage vi1 is
7. For the op-amp shown in fig. P3.5.7 open loop

differential gain is Aod = 10 3. The output voltage vo for
vi = 2 V is
(A) 2.67 V
(1 + 2 sin wt) mV and vi2 = -10 mV. The output voltage

vo is
20 kW
20 kW
100 kW
vi1
vi
2 kW
1 kW
100 kW
vo
vo
vi2
1 kW
Fig. P3.5.11
Fig. P3.5.7
(A) -1.996
(B) -1.998
(A) -0.4(1 + sin wt) mV
(B) 0.4(1 + sin wt) mV
(C) -2.004
(D) -2.006
(C) 0.4(1 + 2 sin wt) mV
(D) -0.4(1 + 2 sin wt) mV
8. The op-amp of fig. P3.5.8 has a very poor open-loop
12. For the circuit in fig. P3.5.12 the output voltage is
voltage gain of 45 but is otherwise ideal. The closed-loop
vo = 2.5 V in response to input voltage vi = 5 V. The finite
gain of amplifier is
open-loop differential gain of the op-amp is
100 kW
vi
2 kW
500 kW
vo
vo
1 kW
vi
Fig. P3.5.8
(A) 20
(B) 4.5
(C) 4
(D) 5
Fig. P3.5.12
(A) 5 10 4
(B) 250.5
(C) 2 10
(D) 501
9. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.5.9 the input voltage

13. vo = ?
vi is 1.5 V. The current io is

10 kW
vi
100 kW
6 kW
100 kW
8 kW io
vo
vo
20 kW
+18 V
5 kW
40 kW
+15 V
Fig. P3.5.13
Fig. P3.5.9
(A) -1.5 mA
(B) 1.5 mA
(A) 34 V
(B) -17 V
(C) -0.75 mA
(D) 0.75 mA
(C) 32 V
(D) -32 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
185
UNIT 3
28. For the circuit shown in fig. P3.5.28 the input
Analog Electronics
31. io = ?
resistance is
6 kW
io
2 kW
vo
6A
2 kW
4 kW
is
Fig. S3.5.31
2 kW
10 kW
(A) -18 A
(B) 18 A
(C) -36 A
(D) 36 A
Fig. P3.5.28
(A) 38 kW
(B) 17 kW
(C) 25 kW
(D) 47 kW

Consider the circuit shown below
29. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.29 the op-amp slew rate is

SR = 0.5 V ms. If the amplitude of input signal is 0.02 V,
then the maximum frequency that may be used is
vi
3 kW
D1
6 kW
D2
2 kW
vo
240 kW
vi
10 kW
vo
Fig. P3.5.3233
32. If vi = 2 V, then output vo is
Fig. P3.5.29
(A) 0.55 106 rad/s
(B) 0.55 rad/s
(C) 1.1 106 rad/s
(D) 1.1 rad/s
(B) -4 V
(C) 3 V
(D) -3 V
33. If vi = -2 V, then output vo is
30. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.30 the input offset voltage

and input offset current are Vio = 4 mV and I io = 150 nA.
The total output offset voltage is
(A) 4 V
(A) -6 V
(B) 6 V
(C) -3 V
(D) 3 V
34. vo( t) = ?
500 kW
vi
8 mF
5 kW
vo
5u(t) mA
250 W
vo
50 W
1 kW
5 kW
Fig. P3.5.34
Fig. P3.5.30
(A) e
(A) 479 mV
(C) 168 mV
Page
188
(B) 234 mV
(D) 116 mV
(C) e
www.gatehelp.com
t
10
t
1 .6
u( t) V
(B) -e
u( t) V
(D) -e
t
10
t
1 .6
u( t) V
u( t) V
Chap 3.5
35. The circuit shown in fig. P3.5.35 is at steady state
(A) vs vss
(B) -vs vss
before the switch opens at t = 0. The vC ( t) for t > 0 is

t=0
v
(C) - s
vss
(D)
20 kW
39. If the input to the ideal comparator shown in fig.
vs
vss
P3.5.39 is a sinusoidal signal of 8 V (peak to peak)
20 kW
20 kW
without any DC component, then the output of the

+
4 mF
5V
comparator has a duty cycle of
vC
-
Input
Output
Fig. P3.5.35
(A) 10 - 5 e -12 .5t V

(C) 5 + 5 e
t
12 .5
Vref = 2 V
(B) 5 + 5 e -12 .5t V

(D) 10 - 5 e
t
12 .5
Fig. P3.5.39
36. The LED in the circuit of fig. P3.5.36 will be on if vi

is
10 kW
+10 V
470W
10 kW
vi
(A)
1
2
(B)
1
3
(C)
1
6
(D)
1
12
40. In the op-amp circuit given in fig. P3.5.40 the load

current iL is
Fig. P3.5.36
(A) > 10 V
(B) < 10 V
(C) > 5 V
(D) < 5 V
R1
R1
vs
37. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.37 the CMRR of the

op-amp is 60 dB. The magnitude of the vo is
R2
2V
IL
R2
RL
100 kW
R
1 kW
Fig. P3.5.40
R
vo
1 kW
(A) -
vs
R2
(B)
vs
R2
(C) -
vs
RL
(D)
vs
RL
100 kW
Fig. P3.5.37
(A) 1 mV
(B) 100 mV
(C) 200 mV
(D) 2 mV
41. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.41 output voltage is |vo| = 1
V for a certain set of w, R, an C. The |vo| will be 2 V if

R1
38. The analog multiplier X of fig. P.3.5.38 has the

R1
characteristics vp = v1 v2 . The output of this circuit is

vss
vi = sin wt V
vo
10 kW
X
vs
C
vo
Fig. P3.5.41
Fig. P3.5.38
(A) w is doubled
(B) w is halved
(C) R is doubled
www.gatehelp.com
Page
189
UNIT 3
Analog Electronics
42. In the circuit of fig. P3.5.42. the 3 dB cutoff
+15 V
frequency is
50 nF
47 kW
6 kW
3 kW
vo
vi
vo
Fig. P3.5.42
(A) 10 kHz
(B) 1.59 kHz
(C) 354 Hz
(D) 689 Hz
Vz = 5 V
100 W
Fig. P3.5.45
43. The phase shift oscillator of fig. P3.5.43 operate at
46. In the circuit in fig. P3.5.46 both transistor Q1 and
f = 80 kHz. The value of resistance RF is
Q2 are identical. The output voltage at T = 300 K is
RF
100 pF
100 pF
100 pF
R1
R2
v1
v2
vo
333 kW
20 kW
Fig. P3.5.43
(A) 148 kW
(B) 236 kW
(C) 438 kW
(D) 814 kW
vo
20 kW
333 kW
44. The value of C required for sinusoidal oscillation of

Fig. P3.5.46
frequency 1 kHz in the circuit of fig. P3.5.44 is

2.1 kW
1 kW
C
1 kW
v R
(A) 2 log10 2 1
v1 R2
v R
(B) log10 2 1
v1 R2
v R
(C) 2.303 log10 2 1
v1 R2
v R
(D) 4.605 log10 2 1
v1 R2
47. In the op-amp series regulator circuit of fig. P8.3.47

Vz = 6.2 V, VBE = 0.7 V and b = 60. The output voltage vo is
1 kW
vo
+36 V
1 kW
Fig. P3.5.44
(A)
(C)
1
mF
2p
1
2p 6
30 kW
(B) 2p mF
mF
(D) 2 p 6 mF
10 kW
45. In the circuit shown in fig. P3.5.45 the op-amp is

ideal. If bF = 60, then the total current supplied by the
15 V source is
(A) 123.1 mA
(B) 98.3 mA
(C) 49.4 mA
(D) 168 mA
Fig. P3.5.47
(A) 35.8 V
(B) 24.8 V
(C) 29.8 V
*******
Page
190
www.gatehelp.com
26. (C) v2 + = v2 - = 0 V, current through 6 V source

i=
6
= 2 mA, vo = -2m( 3k + 2 k) = -10 V
3k
33. (D) If vi < 0, then vo > 0, D2 blocks and D1 conduct

Av = -
vo(1) vo
v (2) vo(1)
= , v- = i
+
1+ 3 4
2+1 2 +1
2v v
v
v
v+ = v- , o = o + i , o = -8
4
3
3
vi
Chap 3.5
3k
. )=3 V
= -15
. , vo = ( -2)( -15
2k
34. (A) Voltage follower vo = v- = v+
27. (D) v+ =
v+ (0 + ) = 5m(250 ||1000) = 1 V, v+ ( ) = 0
t = 8m(1000 + 250) = 10 s
35. (A) vc (0 - ) = 5 V = vc (0 + ) = 5 V
28. (B) Since op-amp is ideal
For t > 0 the equivalent circuit is shown in fig. S3.5.35

20 kW
i1
is
+
vC
is
2 kW
i2
Fig. S3.5.35
10 kW
t = 20 k 4m = 0.08 s
vc = 10 + (5 - 10) e
Fig. S3.5.28
v- = v+ , 2 kis = 4 ki1
is = 2 i1
vs = 2 kis + 10 ki2
36. (C) v- =
i2 = is + i1 , vs = 2 kis + 10 k( is + i1 ), i1 =
i
vs = 2 kis + 10 k is + s
2
is
2
t
0 .08
= 10 - 5 e -12 .5t V for t > 0
(10)(10 k)
=5 V
10 k + 10 k
When v+ > 5 V, output will be positive and LED will be

on. Hence (C) is correct.
vs
= 17k = Rin
is
R
R
= 1 V, v- = (2)
= 1 V, vd = 0
2R
2R
v + vR
VCM
VCM = +
= 1, vo = F
2
1 CMRR
100 1
CMRR = 60 dB = 10 3 , vo =
= 100 mV
1 10 3
37. (B) v+ = (2)
R 240 k
29. (C) Closed loop gain A = F =
= 24
R1 10 k
The maximum output voltage vom = 24 0.02 = 0.48 V
w
4 mF
10 V
4 kW
0.5 / m
SR
. 106 rad/s
=
= 11
0.48
vom
38. (C) v+ = 0 = v- ,
R
30. (A) The offset due to Vio is vo = 1 + 1 Vio
R1
Let output of analog multiplier be vp .

vp
vs
= vs = -vp , vp = vss vo
R
R
v
vs = -vss vo , vo = - s
vss
500
= 1 +
4m = 404 mV
5
Due to I io, vo = RF I io = (500 k)(150n) = 75 mV

Total offset voltage vo = 404 + 75 = 479 mV
39. (B) When vi > 2 V, output is positive. When vi < 2 V,
-vo
v
, io = - 6 + o
6k
3k
-6( 6 k)
io = - 6 +
= -18 A.
3k
output is negative.
31. (A) 6 =
V
4V
2V
32. (B) If vi > 0, then vo < 0, D1 blocks and D2 conducts

Av = -
6k
= -2
3k
p
6
2p
5p
6
vo = ( -2)(2) = -4 V
Fig. S3.5.39
www.gatehelp.com
Page
193
UNIT 3
5p p
TON
1
Duty cycle =
= 6 6 =
2p
T
3
vs - v- v- - vo
=
R1
R1
40.(A)
v+
v
v - vo
+ + + +
=0
R2 RL
R2
Analog Electronics
44. (A) This is Wien-bridge oscillator. The ratio

R2 2.1k
=
= 2.1 is greater than 2. So there will be
R1
1k
oscillation
2 v1 = vs + vo
R2
R1
R
vo = 2 + 2 v+
R
R
2 v- = vs + 2 + 2 v+ , v- = v+
R
L
R
0 = vs + 2 v+
RL
v+ = -
RL
vs ,
R2
iL =
v+
,
RL
iL = -
R
R
vs
R2
Fig. S3.5.44
Frequency =
41. (D) This is a all pass circuit

vo
1 - jwRC
,
= H ( jw) =
vi
1 + jwRC
| H( jw)| =
1 + ( wR 2 C) 2
1 + ( wRC) 2
=1
C=
1
2pRC
1 10 3 =
1
mF
2p
Thus when w and R is changed, the transfer function is
45. (C) v+ = 5 V = v- = vE ,
unchanged.
The input current to the op-amp is zero.

i+15V = iZ + iC = iZ + a F iE
42. (B) Let R1 = 3 kW , R2 = 6 kW , C = 50 nF

vi
v - vo
+ i
=0
1
R2
R1 ||
sC
vi
v
v
+ i = o
R2 R2
R1
1
+
sR
C
vi 2 (1 + sR1 C) + 1 = vo
R
1
vi
[R2 + R1 + sR1 R2 C ] = vo
R1
vo
R + R1
= 2
vi
R1
f3dB
=
sR1 R2 C
1 + R + R
1
2
vo
R
= 1 + 2 (1 + s( R1 || R2 ) C)
vi
R1
1
=
2 p( R1 || R2 ) C
1
1
=
= 159
. kHz
2 p( 3k ||6 k)50n 2 p(2 k)50n
R=
1
( 80 k)(2 p 6 )(100 p)
RF
= 29
R
15 - 5 60 5
+
= 49.4 mA
47 k
61 100
46. (B) vo =
333
( vo1 - vo2 )
20
i
vo1 = -vBE1 - Vt ln c1
is
43. (B) The oscillation frequency is

1
1
f =
80 k =
2 p 6 RC
2 p 6 R(100 p)
= 8.12 kW
RF = ( 8.12 k)(29) = 236 kW
i
vo1 - vo2 = -Vt ln c1
ic 2
v1
,
R1
ic1 =
ic 2 =
i
, vo2 = -vBE 2 - Vt ln c 2
is
= Vt ln c 2
ic1
v2
R2
v R
vo1 - vo2 = Vt ln 2 1 , Vt = 0.0259 V
R2 v1
vo =
v R
333
333
( vo1 - vo2 ) =
(0.0259) ln 2 1
20
20
v1 R2
v R
v R
= 0.4329 ln 2 1 = 0.4329(2.3026) log10 2 1
v1 R2
v1 R2
v R
= log10 2 1
v1 R2
47. (B) v+ = v- , vZ =
10 vo
v
= o
10 + 30 4
vo = 4 vz = 6.2 4 = 24.8 V
************
Page
194
1
2 p(1k) C
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
4.1
NUMBER SYSTEMS & BOOLEAN ALGEBRA
1. The 100110 2 is numerically equivalent to

1. 2616
2. 3610
3. 468
5. A computer has the following negative numbers

stored in binary form as shown. The wrongly stored
4. 212 4
number is
The correct answer are

(A) 1, 2, and 3
(B) 2, 3, and 4
(C) 1, 2, and 4
(D) 1, 3, and 4
(B) 5
(C) 7
(D) 9
(B) -89 as 1010 0111
(C) -48 as 1110 1000
(D) -32 as 1110 0000
6. Consider the signed binary number A = 01010110
2. If (211) x = (152)8 , then the value of base x is

(A) 6
(A) -37 as 1101 1011
and B = 1110 1100 where B is the 1s complement and

MSB is the sign bit. In list-I operation is given, and in
list-II resultant binary number is given.
3. 11001, 1001 and 111001 correspond to the 2s

ListI
complement representation of the following set of
List-II
numbers
(A) 25, 9 and 57 respectively
P. A + B
(B) -6, -6 and -6 respectively
Q. B - A
(C) -7, -7 and -7 respectively
R. A - B
(D) -25, -9 and -57 respectively
1. 0 1 0 0
2. 0 1 1 0
3. 0 1 0 0
4. 1 0 0 1
5. 1 0 1 1
6. 1 0 0 1
7. 1 0 1 1
8. 0 1 1 0
S. - A - B
4. A signed integer has been stored in a byte using 2s
0011
1001
0010
0101
1100
0110
1101
1010
complement format. We wish to store the same integer

The correct match is
in 16-bit word. We should copy the original byte to the

less significant byte of the word and fill the more
significant byte with

(A) 0
(A)
(B) 1
(B)
(C) equal to the MSB of the original byte
(C)
(D) complement of the MSB of the original byte.
(D)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
197
UNIT 4
28.
The
simplified
form
of
logic
Digital Electronics
function
Y = A( B + C( AB + AC)) is
(A) A B
(B) AB
(C) AB
(D) AB
(B) A + B
(C) AB + AB
(D) A B + AB
(C) 0
(D) 1
C
D
(C)
(D)
35. In fig. P.4.1.35 the input condition, needed to
30. If X Y + XY = Z then XZ + XZ is equal to

(B) Y
(A) A + B
(B)
Y = ( AB ) ( AB) is
(A)
29. The reduced form of the Boolean expression of
(A) Y
B
C
produce X = 1, is
A
B
31. If XY = 0 then X Y is equal to

(A) X + Y
(B) X + Y
(C) XY
(D) X Y
Fig. P4.1.34
32. From a four-input OR gate the number of input

condition, that will produce HIGH output are
(A) 1
(B) 3
(C) 15
(D) 0
(A) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
(B) A = 1, B = 1, C = 1
(C) A = 0, B = 1, C = 1
(D) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
36. Consider the statements below:
33. A logic circuit control the passage of a signal

according to the following requirements :
1. Output X will equal A when control input B and
1. If the output waveform from an OR gate is the same

as the waveform at one of its inputs, the other input is
being held permanently LOW.
2. If the output waveform from an OR gate is always
HIGH, one of its input is being held permanently
HIGH.
C are the same.
The statement, which is always true, is
2. X will remain HIGH when B and C are

different.
The logic circuit would be
A
X
(B)
(C) Only 2
is
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
number of two-input NAND required to implement
(D)
34. The output of logic circuit is HIGH whenever A and

B are both HIGH as long as C and D are either both
LOW or both HIGH. The logic circuit is
38. If the X and Y logic inputs are available and their

complements X and Y are not available, the minimum
(C)
Page
200
(B) Only 1
NAND gates, minimum number of requirement of gate
(A)
(A) Both 1 and 2
37. To implement y = ABCD using only two-input
X Y is
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
www.gatehelp.com
Number Systems & Boolean Algebra
Chap 4.1
Assuming complements of x and y are not
A Boolean function Z = ABC is to be implement
available, a minimum cost solution for realizing f using
using NAND and NOR gate. Each gate has unit cost.
2-input NOR gates and 2-input OR gates (each having
Only A, B and C are available.
unit cost) would have a total cost of
39. If both gate are available then minimum cost is

(A) 2 units
(B) 3 units
(C) 4 units
(D) 6 units
(A) 1 units
(B) 2 units
(C) 3 units
(D) 4 units
44. The gates G1 and G2 in Fig. P.4.2.44 have

propagation delays of 10 ns and 20 ns respectively.
40. If NAND gate are available then minimum cost is

(A) 2 units
(B) 3 units
(C) 4 units
(D) 6 units
G1
1
Vi
0
G2
Vo
Vi
to
Fig. P4.1.44
If the input Vi makes an abrupt change from logic
41. In fig. P4.1.41 the LED emits light when
0 to 1 at t = t0 then the output waveform Vo is

VCC = 5 V
1 kW
1 kW
[t1 = t0 + 10 ns, t2 = t1 + 10 ns, t3 = t2 + 10 ns]

(B)
(A)
1 kW
t0
1 kW
t2
t1
t3
t1
t2
t3
t0
t1
t2
t3
(D)
(C)
t0
Fig. P4.1.41
(A) both switch are closed
t0
t2
t1
t3
45. In the network of fig. P4.1.45 f can be written as
(B) both switch are open
X0
(C) only one switch is closed
1
2
X1
(D) LED does not emit light irrespective of the switch

positions
3
X2
42. If the input to the digital circuit shown in fig.
n-1
X3
Xn-1
Xn
Fig. P4.1.45
P.4.1.42 consisting of a cascade of 20 XOR gates is X,
(A) X 0 X1 X 3 X 5 + X 2 X 4 X 5 .... X n -1 + .... X n -1 X n
then the output Y is equal to
(B) X 0 X1 X 3 X 5 + X 2 X 3 X 4 .... X n + .... X n -1 X n

(C) X 0 X1 X 3 X 5 .... X n + X 2 X 3 X 5 K X n + .... + X n -1 X n
(D) X 0 X1 X 3 X 5... X n -1 + X 2 X 3 X 5 K X n +..+ X n -1 X n - 2 + X n

Y
X
Fig. P4.1.42
(A) X
(B) X
(C) 0
(D) 1
*******
43. A Boolean function of two variables x and y is

defined as follows :
f (0, 0) = f (0, 1) = f (1, 1) = 1; f (1, 0) = 0
www.gatehelp.com
Page
201
UNIT 4
Digital Electronics
A - B = A + B,
SOLUTIONS
010 10110
+ 00010011
0110 1001
1. (D) 100110 2 = 2 5 + 2 2 + 21 = 3810
- A - B = A + B,
2616 = 2 16 + 6 = 3810
468 = 4 8 + 6 = 3810
1010 1001
+ 00010011
10111100
212 4 = 2 4 2 + 41 = 3810
7. (B) Here A , B are 2s complement
So 3610 is not equivalent.

2. (C) 2 x 2 + x + 1 = 64 + 5 8 + 2
A + B,
x =7
0100 0110
+ 1101 0011
1 0001 1001
3. (C) All are 2s complement of 7
11001
Discard the carry 1
00110
+
1001
B - A,
= 710
= 710
1101 0011
+ 1011 1010
Discard the carry 1

- A - B = A + B,
42 in a byte
00101010
42in a word
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
-42 in a byte
11010110
-42 in a word
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
1011 1010
+ 0010 1101
8. (B) 1110 = 10112

2Fi-1
Bi
Fi
0.3
0.6
0.6
1.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
11010000
0.8
0.8
1.6
0.6
00110000 2
1100 1111
+
6. (D) Here A , B are 1s complement

A
01010110
B + 1110 1100
10100 0010 ,
+
1
0100 0011
B
1110 1100
+ 1010 1001
110010101
1
+
Repeat from the second line 0.310 = 0.01001
9. (C)
Received
b4
b3
b2
p3
b1
p2
p1
C1* = b4 b2 b1 p1 = 0
C2* = b4 b3 b1 p2 = 1
C3* = b4 b3 b2 p3 = 1
10010110
Page
202
1110 0111
Therefore (C) is correct.
B - A = B + A,
+ 0010 1101
1 1000 1101
4. (C) See a example
A + B,
000111
-4810 =
010 0 0110
0111 0011
000110
+
5. (C) 4810 =
0110
+ 1
0111
111001
A - B = A + B,
= 710
00111
www.gatehelp.com
Number Systems & Boolean Algebra
Chap 4.1
C3* C2* C1* = 110 which indicate position 6 in error
= ( AA + AB)( A + B + C) = A( A + B + C) = A
Transmitted code 1001100.
Therefore No gate is required to implement this

function.
10. (D) X = MNQ + M NQ + M NQ
23. (A)
= MQ + M NQ = Q( M + M N ) = Q( M + N )
11. (A) The logic circuit can be modified as shown in fig.
S. 4.1.11
A
B
C+D
E
Fig. S4.1.11
Now Z = AB + ( C + D) E
( A + BC)
( A + B)( A + C)
Fig. S 4.1.23
12. (D) You can see that input to last XNOR gate is
same. So output will be HIGH.
24. (B) X = ABC + ABC + ABC = BC + ABC
13. (D) Z = A + ( AB + BC) + C
25. (B) ( A + B)( B + C ) = ( AB)( BC) = ABC
= A + ( A + B + B + C) + C = A + B + C
( A + B)( B + C ) = ( A + B) + ( B + C) = A + B + C
ABC = A + B + C
( A + B)( B + C) = ( A + B) + ( B + C)
AB + BC + AC = A + B + B + C + A + C = A + B + C
= AB + B + C = A + B + C
14. (C) ( X + Y )( X + Y ) = XY + X Y
From truth table Z = A + B + C
( X + Y )( X + Y )( X + Y ) = ( X + Y )( XY + X Y )
Thus (B) is correct.
= XY + XY = XY
26. (D) AC + BC = AC( B + B) + ( A + A) BC

= ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC
15. (B) Using duality

( A + B)( A + C)( B + C) = ( A + B)( A + C)
27. (D) F = A + AB + A BC + A B C( D + DE)
Thus (B) is correct option.
= A + AB + A B( C + C( D + E))
= A + A( B + B( C + D + E)) = A + B + C + D + E
16. (B) Z = ( AB)( CD)( EF ) = AB + CD + EF

17. (A) X = ( A B + AB)( A + B) = ( AB + A B)( AB) = AB
18. (B) Y = ( A B) C = ( AB + AC) C
= ( AB + AB) + C = A B + AB + C
19. (C) Z = A( A + A) BC = ABC
20. (A) Z = AB( B + C) = ABC
21. (A) Z = ( A + B ) BC = ( AB) BC = ABC
28. (B) A( B + C ( AB + AC)) = AB + AC ( AB AC)

= AB + AC[( A + B)( A + C)]
= AB + AC ( A + AC + AB + B C) = AB
29. (C) ( AB ) ( AB) = AB + AB = AB + AB
30. (B) X Z + XZ = X ( XY + XY ) + X ( X Y + XY )
= X ( XY + X Y ) + XY = XY + XY = Y
31. (A) X Y = X Y + XY = ( XY + XY ) = ( XY ) = X + Y
22. (A) A( A + B)( A + B + C)

www.gatehelp.com
Page
203
UNIT 4
Digital Electronics
(A) ( w + y)( x + y + z)( w + x + z)
(A) AC + AB
(B) AC + AB + BC
(B) ( w + x)( w + z )( x + y)( y + z )
(C) AB + BC + ABC
(D) Above all
(C) ( x + z)( w + y)
12. In the logic circuit of fig. P4.2.12 the redundant gate
(D) ( x + z )( w + y)
is
7. A function with dont care condition is as follows
x
y
z
w
x
z
w
y
z
f ( a, b, c, d) = Sm(0, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11) + Sdc ( 4, 15)

The minimized expression for this function is
(A) ab + b d + cd + abc
(B) ab + b d + cd + abd
(C) ab + b d + b c + abd
(D) Above all
8. A function with dont cares is as follows :

g( X , Y , Z ) = Sm(5, 6) + Sdc (1, 2, 4)
Fig. P4.2.12
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
For above function consider following expression

1. XYZ + XYZ
2. XY + XZ
3. XZ + XZ + YZ
4. YZ + YZ
13. If function W, X, Y, and Z are as follow

W = R + PQ + RS
The solution for g are

(A) 1, 2, and 3
(B) 1, 2, and 4
(C) 1, and 4
(D) 1, and 3
X = PQRS + P Q RS + PQ R S
Y = RS + PR + PQ + P Q
Z = R + S + PQ + P Q R + PQ S
9. A logical function of four variable is given as
Then
f ( A, B, C, D) = ( A + B C)( B + CD)
The function as a sum of product is
(A) A + BC + ACD + BCD
(B) A + BC + ACD + BCD
(A) W = Z , X = Z
(B) W = Z , X = Y
(C) W = Y
(D) W = Y = Z
14. In a certain application four inputs A, B, C, D are
(C) AB + BC + ACD + BCD
fed to logic circuit, producing an output which operates
(D) AB + AB + ACD + BCD
a relay. The relay turns on when f(A, B, C, D) =1 for the
10. A combinational circuit has input A, B, and C and

its K-map is as shown in fig. P4.2.10. The output of the
circuit is given by
00
00
01
0101, 0110, 1101 and 1110. States 1000 and 1001 do not
occur, and for the remaining states the relay is off. The
minimized Boolean expression f is
CD
following states of the inputs (ABCD) : 0000, 0010,
01
11
10
1
(A) ACD + BCD + BCD
(B) BCD + BCD + ACD
(C) ABD + BCD + BCD
(D) ABD + BCD + BCD
15. There are four Boolean variables x1 , x2 , x3 and x4 .
The following function are defined on sets of them

f ( x3 , x2 , x1 ) = Sm( 3, 4, 5)
Fig. P4.2.1
Page
206
(A) ( AB + AB ) C
(B) ( AB + AB ) C
(C) ABC
(D) A B C
g( x4 , x3 , x2 ) = Sm(1, 6, 7)
h( x4 , x3 , x2 , x1 ) = fg
Then h( x4 , x3 , x2 , x1 ) is
11. The Boolean Expression Y = ( A + B)( A + C) is equal
(A) Sm(3, 12, 13)
(B) Sm(3, 6)
to
(C) Sm(3, 12)
(D) 0
www.gatehelp.com
Combinational Logic Circuits
Chap 4.2
21. For a binary half subtractor having two input A and
A switching function of four variable, f ( w, x y, z) is

to equal the product of two other function f1 and f2 , of
B, the correct set of logical expressions for the outputs

D = ( A - B) and X (borrow) are
the same variable f = f1 f2 . The function f and f1 are as
(A) D = AB + AB , X = AB
follows :
(B) D = AB + AB , X = AB
f = Sm( 4, 7, 15)
(C) D = AB + AB , X = AB
f1 = Sm(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 15)
(D) D = AB + AB , X = AB
22. f1 f2 = ?
16. The number of full specified function, that will

satisfy the given condition, is
(A) 32
(B) 16
x0
I0
(C) 4
(D) 1
x1
I1
17. The simplest function for f2 is
x2
I2
(A) x
(B) x
(C) y
(D) y
D0
3-to-8
Decoder D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
and m9. If the literals in these minterms are

complemented, the corresponding minterm numbers are
(A) m3 and m0
(B) m9 and m6
(C) m2 and m0
(D) m6 and m9
(A) x0 x1 x2
(B) x0 x1 x2
(C) 1
(D) 0
23. The logic circuit shown in fig. P4.2.23 implements
I0
I1
I2
19. The minimum function that can detect a divisible

by 3 8421 BCD code digit (representation D8 D4 D2 D1 ) is
given by
(A) D8 D1 + D4 D2 + D8 D2 D1
(B) D8 D1 + D4 D2 D1 + D4 D2 D1 + D8 D4 D2 D1
D0
3-to-8
D
Decoder 1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
EN
Fig. P4.2.23
(D) D4 D2 D1 + D4 D2 D1 + D8 D4 D2 D1
(A) D( A
I1
x2
I2
u C + AC )
(B) D( B C + AC )
(C) D( B C + AB )
20. f ( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = ?
x1
(C) D4 D1 + D4 D2 + D8 D1 D2 D1
I0
f2
Fig. P4.2.22
18. A four-variable switching function has minterms m6
x0
f1
(D) D( B
u C + AB )
D0
3-to-8
D
Decoder 1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
The building block shown in fig. P4.2.2425 is a

f
active high output decoder.
Fig. P4.2.21
(A) P(1, 2, 4, 5, 7)
(B) S(1, 2, 4, 5, 7)
(C) S(0, 3, 6)
(D) None of Above
I0
I1
I2
D0
3-to-8
Decoder D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Fig. P4.2.24-25
www.gatehelp.com
Page
207
UNIT 4
24. The output X is
Digital Electronics
28. Z 2 = ?
(A) AB + BC + CA
(B) A + B + C
(A) ab + bc + ca
(B) a + b + c
(C) ABC
(C) abc
(D) a u b u c
25. The output Y is
29. This circuit act as a
(A) A + B
(B) B + C
(A) Full adder
(B) Half adder
(C) C + A
(C) Full subtractor
(D) Half subtractor
26. A logic circuit consist of two 2 4 decoder as shown
30. The network shown in fig. P4.2.30 implements
in fig. P4.2.26.
x
1 MUX
D0
A0
D1
D2
y
A1
D0
A1
D3
D1
1 MUX
S0
D2
z
A0
D3
S0
C
Fig. P4.2.26
Fig. P4.2.30
The output of decoder are as follow

D0 = 1 when A0 = 0,
A1 = 0
D1 = 1 when A0 = 1,
A1 = 0
D2 = 1 when A0 = 0,
A1 = 1
D3 = 1 when A0 = 1,
A1 = 1
(A) NOR gate
(B) NAND gate
(C) XOR gate
(D) XNOR gate
31. The MUX shown in fig. P4.2.31 is 4 1 multiplexer.

The output Z is
C
The value of f ( x, y, z) is
I3
I2
(A) 0
(B) z
(C) z
(D) 1
MUX
I0
+5 V
S 1 S0
A
B) A B C
(A) ABC
MUX
Z1
Fig. P4.2.31
A MUX network is shown in fig. P4.2.27-29.

c
I1
(C) A u B
uC
(D) A + B + C
32. The output of the 4 1 multiplexer shown in fig.
S0
P4.2.32 is
a
MUX
Z0
S0
b
S0
MUX
+5 V
Z2
Page
208
(A) a + b + c
(B) ab + ac + bc
(C) a u b u c
(D) a b c
MUX
I1
I0
S 1 S0
Y
Fig. P4.2.32
Fig. P4.2.27-29
27. Z1 = ?
I3
I2
(A) X + Y
(B) X + Y
(C) XY + X
(D) XY
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 4.2
33. The MUX shown in fig. P4.2.33 is a 4 1
36. The 4to1 multiplexer shown in fig. P4.2.36
multiplexer. The output Z is
implements the Boolean expression
I3
I3
I2
MUX
I1
I0
uC
(D) B u C
0
1
0
1
1
The input to I1 and I 3 will be

(A) yz , y + z
(B) y + z, y u z
(C) y + z, y z
(D) x + y ,
y z
37. The 8-to-1 multiplexer shown in fig. P4.2.37 realize

0
1
1
I0
I1 MUX
I2
I3
EN
S 1 S0
w
f ( w, x, y, z) = Sm( 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 15)
34. f = ?
S1 S0
w
(B) A
(C) B C
Fig. P4.2.36
Fig. P4.2.33
I0
I1 MUX
I2
I3
EN
S 1 S0
I0
(A) A C
0
1
1
0
1
MUX
I1
S1 S0
A
I2
I0
I1 MUX
I2
I3
EN
S1 S0
y
the following Boolean expression

1
z
z
0
z
0
1
z
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
MUX
EN S2 S1 S0
0
Fig. P4.2.37
Fig. P4.2.34
(A) wxyz + wx yz + xy + yz
(A) wxz + w x z + wyz + xy z
(B) wxyz + wxyz + x y + yz
(B) wxz + wyz + wyz + w x y
(C) wx yz + w x yz + yz + zx
(C) w x z + wy z + w yz + wxz
(D) wxyz + wxyz + gz + zx
(D) MUX is not enable
35. For the logic circuit shown in fig. P4.2.35 the output
Y is
A PLA realization is shown in fig. P4.2.3840

x0
1
0
I 0 I1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7
C
B
A
EN
S2
S1
S0
x1
x2
MUX
Fig. P4.2.35
(A) A B
(B) A B
(C) A B C
(D) A B C
X
X
X
X
X
f1
f2
f3
Fig. P.4.2.38-40
www.gatehelp.com
Page
209
UNIT 4
38. f1 ( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = ?
Digital Electronics
The terms P1 , P2 , P3 , P4 and P5 are
(A) x2 x0 + x1 x0
(B) x2 x0 + x1 x2
(C) x2 x0
(D) x2
ux
39. f2 ( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = ?
(A) Sm(1, 2, 5, 6)
(B) Sm(1, 2, 6, 7)
(C) Sm(2, 3, 4)
(A) ab, ac, bc, bc, ab
(B) ab , bc, ac, ab , bc
(C) ac, ab, bc, ab , bc
(D) Above all
43. The circuit shown in fig. P.4.2.43 has 4 boxes each

described by input P, Q, R and output Y , Z with
Y = P Q R and Z = RQ + PR + QP .
Q
40. f3( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = ?
(A) P M(0, 4, 6, 7)
(B) P M(2, 4, 5,7)
(C) P M(1, 2, 3, 5)
(D) P M(2, 3, 4, 7)
P
P
41. If the input X 3 X 2 X1 X 0 to the ROM in fig. P4.2.41

are 8421 BCD numbers, then output Y3Y2 Y1 Y0 are
X3
X2
X1
X0
Output
Fig. P4.2.43
The circuit act as a 4 bit
BCD to Decimal Decoder
(A) adder giving P + Q
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
X X X X Y3
(C) subtractor giving Q - P
X X X X X X Y2
(D) adder giving P + Q + R
X X
X
(B) subtractor giving P - Q
X X Y1
X
44. The circuit shown in fig. P4.2.44 converts
X Y0
MSB
Fig. P4.2.41
(A) 2421 BCD number
(B) gray code number
(C) excess 3 code converter
(D) none of the above

+
42. It is desired to generate the following three Boolean
function
f1 = ab c + abc + bc
MSB
Fig. P4.2.44
f2 = ab c + ab + abc,
f3 = ab c + abc + ac
(A) BCD to binary code
by using an OR gate array as shown in fig. P4.2.42

where P1 and P5 are the product terms in one or more
of the variable a, a , b, b , c and c.
P1
P2
(B) Binary to excess

(C) Excess3 to Gray Code
(D) Gray to Binary code
X
X
P3
*******
X
P4
P5
X
F1
F2
F3
Fig. P4.2.42
Page
210
www.gatehelp.com
16. (A) f = Sm(4, 7, 15),
RS
00
01
11
00
PQ
Chap 4.2
f1 = Sm(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 15)
10
f2 = Sm(4, 7, 15) + Sdc(5, 6, 12, 13, 14)
01
11
There are 5 don't care condition. So 2 5 = 32 different
functions f2 .
17. (A) f2 = Sm(4, 7, 15) + Sdc(5, 6, 12, 13, 14), f2 = x
10
yz
00
01
11
10
00
01
11
10
Fig. S 4.2.13c
Z = R + S + PQ + P Q R + PQ S= R + S + PQP Q R PQ S
wx
= R + S + ( P + Q )( P + Q + R)( P + Q + S)
= R + S + ( PQ + PR + Q P + Q R)( P + Q + S)
= R + S + PQ + PQS + PR + PRQ + PRS + Q PS + Q PR + Q RS
Fig. S 4.2.17
RS
00
01
11
10
11
10
00
PQ
01
18. (B) m6 = ABCD ,
m9 = ABCD
After complementing literal

m6 = ABCD = m9 ,
m9 = ABCD = m6
19. (B) 0, 3, 6 and 9 are divisible by 3

D2 D1
00
00
Fig. S 4.2.13d
D8 D4 01
11
= R + S + PQ
We can see that W = Z , X = Z
01
11
10
1
1
10
14. (D) ABD + BCD + BCD

Fig. S 4.2.19
CD
00
00
AB
01
11
10
1
01
11
10
f = D8 D1 + D4 D2 D1 + D4 D2 D1 + D8 D4 D2 D1
20. (B) f = Sm(0, 3, 6) = Sm(1, 2, 4, 5, 7)
21. (C) D = AB + AB,
X = AB
Fig. S 4.2.14
15. (A) f = x3 x2 x1 + x3 x2 x1 + x3 x2 x1 = x3 x2 x1 + x3 x2
g = x4 x3 x2 + x4 x3 x2 + x4 x3 x2 = x4 x3 x2 + x4 x3
fg = x4 x3 x2 x1 + x4 x3 x2
Fig. S 4.2.20
= x4 x3 x2 x1 + x4 x3 x2 x1 + x4 x3 x2 x1
h = Sm(3, 12, 13)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
213
UNIT 4
Digital Electronics
22. (D) f1 = Sm(0, 2, 4, 6),
29. (A) The equation of Z1 is the equation of sum of A
f2 = Sm(1, 3, 5, 7), f1 f2 = 0
and B with carry and equation of 2 is the resultant

carry. Thus, it is a full adder.
23. (D) Z = D( ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC)

= D( AB ( C + C) + BC( A + A) + ABC )
30. (B) f1 = CD + CB = CB ,
= D( AB + BC + ABC ) = D( B ( A + AC ) + BC)
f = f 1 + f1 A = CB + CBA = CB + A
= D( BA + BC + BC) = D( B
u C + AB )
24. (A) X = Sm(3, 5, 6, 7),
S = F1
= C + B + A = ABC
X = AB + BC + CA
31. (D) Z = ABC + AB + AB + AB

= A ( BC + B) + A( B + B) = A ( B + C) + A = A + B + C
25. (D) Y = Sm(1, 3, 5, 7),
Y =C
32. (A) Z = XY + XY + XY ,
Z=X +Y
BC
00
A
01
11
00
33. (A) Z = ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC
10
= AC + AC = A C
01
34. (A) The output from the upper first level

and from the lower first level
multiplexer is fa
multiplexer is fb
Fig. S4.2.24
fa = wx + wx,
26. (D) D0 = A1 A0 , D1 = A1 A0 ,
fb = wx + wx = x
f = fa yz + fb yz + yz = ( wx + wx) yz + xyz + yz
D2 = A1 A0 ,
= wxyz + wx yz + xy + yz
BC
00
A
01
11
00
01
10
35. (D) Output is 1 when even parity

BA
00
00
C
Fig. S4.2.25
01
11
10
1
1
01
D3 = A1 A0
Fig. S4.2.35
For first decoder A0 = x , A1 = y, D2 = yx , D3 = xy

For second decoder A1 = D2 D3 = yxxy = 0,
A0 = z
Therefore Y = A B C
f = D0 + D1 = A1 A0 + A1 A0 = A1 = 1
36. (B) I1 = y + z ,
27. (D) The output of first MUX is

Z o = ab + ab = ( a b)
28. (A) Z 2 = bS0 + cS0

= b( ab + ab ) + c( ab + ab ) = ab + ab c + abc
yz
00
01
11
10
00
I0 = 0
01
I1 = y + z
11
10
This is input to select S0 of both second-level MUX

Z1 = CS0 + CS0 = C S0 = a b c
I3 = y
S1 S0
bb
wx
= a( b + b c) + abc = ab + ac + abc
= ab + ac + bc
Fig. S 4.2.36
Page
214
www.gatehelp.com
I 3 = yz + yz = y u z
I2 = z
Chap 4.2
37. (C) Let z = 0, Then
42. (A) f1 = ab c + abc + bc = ac + ab
f = w x y + w xy + wx y + wxy = w x + w y
f2 = ab c + ab + abc = ac + b c
If we put z = 0 in given option then
f3 = ab c + abc + ac = ab + bc
(A) = w x + xy
(B) = wy + w x y
(C) = w x + wy
Since MUX is enable so option (C) is correct.
Thus P1 = ab, P2 = ac,
P3 = bc, P4 = bc, P5 = ab
43. (B) Let P = 1001 and Q = 1010 then
38. (C)f = x0 x2 + x0 x1 x2 + x0 x2 = x0 x2 (1 + x1 ) + x0 x2
Yn = Pn Qn Rn ,
= x0 x2 + x0 x2
Z n = Rn Qn + Pn Rn + Qn Pn
output is 1111 which is 2s complement of 1. So it gives
39. (B) f2 = x0 x1 + x1 x2 + x0 x1 x2
P - Q . Let another example
= x0 x1 x2 + x0 x1 x2 + x1 x2 x0 + x1 x2 x0 + x0 x1 x2
then output is 00111. It gives PQ.
P = 1101 and Q = 0110
So (B) is correct.
= x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0
f2 ( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = Sm(1, 2, 6, 7)
Pn
Qn
Rn
Zn
Yn
40. (C) f3 = x0 x1 + x1 x2
n =1
= x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0 + x2 x1 x0
n =2
f3( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = Sm(0, 4, 6, 7)
n=3
f3( x2 , x1 , x0 ) = PM(1, 2, 3, 5)
n=4
1
1
41. (A)
Fig. S4.2.43a
Let X 3 X 2 X1 X 0 be 1001 then Y3Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1111.

Let X 3 X 2 X1 X 0 be 1000 then Y3Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1110
Let X 3 X 2 X1 X 0 be 0110 then Y3Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1100
bc
00
01
00
a
01
Pn
Qn
Rn
Zn
Yn
n =1
11
10
n =2
n=3
n=4
0
Fig. S4.2.43b
Fig. S4.2.42a
44. (D) Let input be
1010
10
output will be
1101
Let input be
0110
output will be 0100
bc
00
01
11
00
a
01
This convert gray to Binary code.

Fig. S4.2.42b
bc
00
a
00
01
11
01
*******
10
1
Fig. S4.2.42b
So this converts 2421 BCD numbers.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
215
Sequential Logic Circuits
(B)
Q1
D1
D2
13. The counter shown in fig. P4.3.13 counts from
Q2
Chap 4.3
X
Q1
(C)
Q1
D1
D2
Q1
(D)
Q2
D2
A CLR K
Fig.P4.3.13
Q2
Q1
D1
B CLR K
A
B
C
Q2
C CLR K
Q2
(A) 0 0 0 to 1 1 1
(B) 1 1 1 to 0 0 0
(C) 1 0 0 to 0 0 0
(D) 0 0 0 to 1 0 0
14. The mod-number of the asynchronous counter

Q1
Q2

J
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
11. The circuit shown in fig. P4.3.11 is

K CLR
K CLR
K CLR
K CLR
K CLR
Q
All J.K. input are HIGH
CLK
CLK
Fig.P4.3.14
Fig.P4.3.11
(A) a MOD2 counter
(A) 24
(B) 48
(C) 25
(D) 36
(B) a MOD3 counter

15. The frequency of the pulse at z in the network
(C) generate sequence 00, 10, 01, 00.....
shown in fig. P4.3.15. is
(D) generate sequence 00, 10, 00, 10, 00 ......
160 kHZ
12. The counter shown in fig. P4.3.12 is a
10-Bit
Ring Counter
w 4-Bit Parallel
Counter
Mod-25
Ripple Counter
4-Bit Johnson
Counter
Fig.P4.3.15
C
Q
(B) 160 Hz
(C) 40 Hz
(D) 5 Hz
16. The three-stage Johnson counter as shown in fig.
A
K
(A) 10 Hz
P4.2.16 is clocked at a constant frequency of fc from the

CLK
starting state of Q2Q1Q0 = 101. The frequency of output

Q2Q1Q0 will be
Fig.P4.3.12
(A) MOD8 up counter
J2
Q2
J1
Q1
J0
Q0
K2
Q2
K1
Q1
K0
Q0
(B) MOD8 down counter

(C) MOD6 up counter
CLK
(D) MOD6 down counter
Fig.P4.3.16
www.gatehelp.com
Page
218
UNIT 4
(A)
fc
8
fc
6
21. In the circuit shown in fig. P4.3.21 is PIPO 4-bit
f
(D) c
2
input lines are connected to a 4 bit bus. Its output acts
(B)
f
(C) c
3
register, which loads at the rising edge of the clock. The

as the input to a 16 4 ROM whose output is floating
17. The counter shown in the fig. P4.3.17 has initially

Q2Q1Q0 = 000. The status of Q2Q1Q0 after the first pulse
is
J2
Q1
J1
Q2
Digital Electronics
J0
when the enable input E is 0. A partial table of the

contents of the ROM is as follows
Address
10
12
Data
0011
1111
0100
1010
1011
1000
0010
The clock to the register is shown below, and the
Q0
data on the bus at time t1 is 0110.

K2
Q2
Q1
K1
K0
MSB
Q0
CLK
Fig.P4.3.17
(A) 0 0 1
(B) 0 1 0
(C) 1 0 0
(D) 1 0 1
CLK
18. A 4 bit ripple counter and a 4 bit synchronous

1
counter are made by flips flops having a propagation
delay of 10 ns each. If the worst case delay in the ripple
ROM
counter and the synchronous counter be R and S

respectively, then
(A) R = 10 ns, S = 40 ns
(B) R = 40 ns, S = 10 ns
(C) R = 10 ns, S = 30 ns
(D) R = 30 ns, S = 10 ns
19. A 4 bit modulo6 ripple counter uses JK flip-flop. If

the propagation delay of each FF is 50 ns, the
maximum clock frequency that can be used is equal to
(A) 5 MHz
(B) 10 MHz
(C) 4 MHz
(D) 20 Mhz
t2
Fig. P4.3.21
right-shift, register shown in fig. P4.3.20 is 0 1 1 0.

After three clock pulses are applied, the contents of the
CLK
t
t1
20. The initial contents of the 4-bit serial-in-parallel-out
shift register will be
CLK
The data on the bus at time t2 is

(A) 1 1 1 1
(B) 1 0 1 1
(C) 1 0 0 0
(D) 0 0 1 0
22. A 4-bit right shift register is initialized to value

1000 for (Q3 , Q2 , Q1 , Q0 ). The D input is derived from
0
Q0 , Q2 and Q3 through two XOR gates as shown in fig.

P4.2.22. The pattern 1000 will appear at
Fig.P4.3.20
Page
219
(A) 0 0 0 0
(B) 0 1 0 1
(C) 1 1 1 1
(D) 1 0 1 0
Q0
Q1
Fig.P4.3.22
www.gatehelp.com
Q2
Q3
Chap 4.3
(A) 3rd pulse
(B) 7th pulse
28. To count from 0 to 1024 the number of required
(C) 6th pulse
(D) 4th pulse
flip-flop is

The 8-bit left shift register and D-flip-flop shown
in fig. P4.3.2223 is synchronized with same clock. The
(A) 10
(B) 11
(C) 12
(D) 13
29. Four memory chips of 16 4 size have their address

buses connected together. This system will be of size
b7
b 6 b 5 b4 b 3 b 2 b 1 b0
(A) 64 4
(B) 32 8
(C) 16 16
(D) 256 1
30. The address bus width of a memory of size 1024 8
CLK
bits is
Q
Fig.P4.3.23-24
(A) 10 bits
(B) 13 bits
(C) 8 bits
(D) 18 bits
31. For the circuit of Fig. P4.3.31 consider the
D flip-flop is initially cleared.
statement:
23. The circuit act as
Assertion (A) : The circuit is sequential
(A) Binary to 2s complement converter
Reason (R) : There is a loop in circuit
(B) Binary to Gray code converter
(C) Binary to 1s complement converter

(D) Binary to Excess3 code converter
24. If initially register contains byte B7, then after 4
(B) 72
(C) 7E
(D) 74
b
e
z0
clock pulse contents of register will be

(A) 73
z1
a
b
Fig.P4.3.131
Choose correct option

A Mealy system produces a 1 output if the input
has been 0 for at least two consecutive clocks followed
immediately by two or more consecutive 1s.
(A) Both A and R true and R is the correct

explanation of A
(B) Both A and R true but R is not a correct
explanation on of A
(C) A is true but R is false
25. The minimum state for this system is

(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 8
(D) 9
(D) A is false
*****************
26. The flip-flop required to implement this system are

(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
27. The output of a Mealy system is 1 if there has been

a pattern of 11000, otherwise 0. The minimum state for
this system is
(A) 4
(B) 5
(C) 6
(D) 7
www.gatehelp.com
Page
220
UNIT 4
Digital Electronics
6. (D) Q + = LM + LMQ
SOLUTIONS
= L( M + MQ )
1. (C) Given FF is a negative edge triggered T flip-flop.
= L M + LQ
So at the negative edge of clock Vi FF will invert the
Q+
2. (A) At first rising edge of clock, D is HIGH. So Q will
be high till 2nd rising edge of clock. At 2nd rising edge,
D is low so Q will be LOW till 3rd rising edge of clock.
Q1
output if there is 1 at input.
At 3rd rising edge, D is HIGH, so Q will be HIGH till

Fig. S4.3.6
4th rising edge. At 4th rising edge D is HIGH so Q will

be HIGH till 5th rising. edge. At 5th rising edge, D is
LOW, so Q will be LOW till 6th rising edge.
7. (D)
Initially
3. (C)
Qn + 1
Qn +1
Q+
Clock 1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Fig. S4.3.3
Fig. S4.3.7
4. (D) Q + = x Q
Therefore sequence is 010101.
Q1+ = x1 Q0 = x1 0 + x1 0 = x1
8. (A)
Q2+ = x2 x1 ,
Q3+ = x3 x2 x1
Q4+ = x4 x3 x2 x1
5. (C)
X and Y are fixed at 0 and 1.
So this generate the even parity and check odd parity.
9. (D) Z = XQ + YQ
Q+
Comparing from the truth table of JK FF
Y = J, X = K
Q1
Fig. S4.3.9
Fig. S4.3.5
Q + = AB + AQ = AB + BQ
Page
221
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 4.3
14. (A) It is a 5 bit ripple counter. At 11000 the output
10. (C)
of NAND gate is LOW. This will clear all FF. So it is a

t0
t2
t1
Mod24 counter. Note that when 11000 occur, the
t3
CLR input is activated and all FF are immediately
Q1
cleared. So it is a MOD 24 counter not MOD 25.
0
1
15. (D) 10-bit ring counter is a MOD10, so it divides
D2=Q1
the 160 kHz input by 10. therefore, w = 16 kHz. The

Q2
four-bit parallel counter is a MOD16. Thus, the

t0
frequency at x = 1 kHz. The MOD25 ripple counter
t1
produces a frequency at y = 40 Hz. (1 kHz/25 = 40 Hz).
Fig.S4.3.10
11. (B)
The four-bit Johnson Counter is a MOD-8. This, the
Present State
FF Input
Next State
Q A QB
TA TB
Q +A QB+
frequency at z = 5 Hz.
16. (D)
Q0 Q0
Q2 Q2
Q1 Q1
J2 K2
J1 K 1
J0 K0
Q2+ Q1+ Q0+

1 0 1
Fig. S4.3.11
From table it is clear that it is a MOD3 counter.

12. (B) It is a down counter because 0 state of previous
0 1
1 0
0 1
0 1 0
1 0
0 1
1 0
1 0 1
0 1
1 0
0 1
0 1 0
1 0
0 1
1 0
1 0 1
FFs change the state of next FF. You may trace the
following sequence, let initial state be 0 0 0
Fig. S4.3.16
We see that 1 0 1 repeat after every two cycles, hence

frequency will be fc / 2 .
FF C
FF B
FF A
JK C
JK B
JK A
C+ B+ A+
111
111
111
111
J 2K 2 = 1 0
Q2 = 1,
000
000
110
110
J1 K 1 = 0 0
Q1 = 1,
000
110
111
101
J 0K 0 = 0 0
Q0 = 0
000
001
110
100
18. (B) In ripple counter delay 4Td = 40 ns.
111
111
111
011
The synchronous counter are clocked simultaneously,
001
000
110
010
then its worst delay will be equal to 10 ns.
001
110
111
001
19. (A) 4 bit uses 4 FF
000
001
110
000
Total delay Ntd = 4 50 ns = 200 10 -9

1
f =
= 5 Mhz
200 10 -9
Fig. S4.3.12
13. (C) It is a down counter because the inverted FF
17. (C) At first cycle
output drive the clock inputs. The NAND gate will clear
20. (D) At pulse 1 input,
FFs A and B when the count tries to recycle to 111. This
So contents are 1 0 1 1,
will produce as result of 100. Thus the counting
At pules 2 input 1 1 = 0
sequence will be 100, 011, 010, 001, 000, 100 etc.
So contents are 0 1 0 1,
1 0 =1
At pules 3 input 0 1 = 1, contents are 1 0 1 0
www.gatehelp.com
Page
222
CHAPTER
4.4
DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES
Statement for Q.12:
4. In the circuit shown in fig. P.4.4.4. the output Z is

+5 V
Consider the DL circuit of fig. P4.4.12.
+5 V
+5 V
+5 V
Z
A
B
Fig. P4.4.4
V1
+
Vo
-
V2
-
Fig. P4.4.1-2
1. For positive logic the circuit is a
(A) AB + C
(B) ABC
(C) ABC
(D) ABC
Statement for Q.57:
(A) AND
(B) OR
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
Consider the AND circuit shown in fig. P4.4.57.

The binary input levels are V(0) = 0 V and V(1) = 25 V.
Assume ideal diodes. If V1 = V (0) and V2 = V (1), then Vo
2. For negative logic the circuit is a
is to be at 5 V. However, if V1 = V2 = V (1), then Vo is to
(A) AND
(B) OR
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
rise above 5 V.
Vss
3. The diode logic circuit of fig. P4.4.3 is a
20 kW
1 kW
D2
D1
V1
V1
Vo
V2
V2
Vo
1 kW
D1
D2
D0
+5 V
Fig. P4.4.5-7
Fig. P4.4.3
5. If Vss = 20 V
and V1 = V2 = V (1), the diode current
I D1 , I D2 , and I D0 are
Page
224
(A) AND
(B) OR
(A) 1 mA, 1 mA, 4 mA
(B) 1 mA, 1 mA, 5 mA
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
(C) 5 mA, 5mA, 1 mA
(D) 0,
www.gatehelp.com
0,
Digital Logic Families
Chap 4.4
6. If Vss = 40 V and both input are at HIGH level then,
+VCC
diode current I D1 , I D2 and I D0 are respectively

(A) 0.4 mA, 0.4 mA, 0
RC
(B) 0, 0, 1 mA
(C) 0.4 mA, 0.4 mA, 1 mA
Vo
RB1
(D) 0, 0, 0
RB2
V1
V2
Q2
Q1
7. The maximum value of Vss which may be used is

(A) 30 V
(B) 25 V
(C) 125 V
(D) 20 V
Fig. P4.4.10-11
10. For positive logic the gate is
8. The ideal inverter in fig. P4.4.8 has a reference
(A) AND
(B) OR
voltage of 2.5 V. The forward voltage of the diode is 0.75
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
V. The maximum number of diode logic circuit, that

may be cascaded ahead of the inverter without
producing logic error, is
+5 V
+5 V
11. For negative logic the gate is

(A) AND
(B) OR
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
+5 V

Consider the RTL circuit of fig. P4.4.1213.
+5 V
A
+VCC
B
C
RC
n Stages of Diode Logic
RB1
RB2
V1
Fig. P4.4.8
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 9
Vo2
RB3
V2
Q2
Q1
(A) 3
Vo1
Q3
Fig. P4.4.12-13
9. Consider the TTL circuit in fig. P4.4.9. The value of
12. If Vo1 is taken as the output, then circuit is a
V H and VL are respectively
(A) AND
(B) OR
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
+5 V
13. If Vo2 is taken as output, then circuit is a

2 kW
4 kW
Vo
(A) AND
(B) OR
(C) NAND
(D) NOR
Vi

Consider the TTL circuit of fig. P4.4.14. If either or
Fig. P4.4.9
(A) 5 V, 0 V
(B) 4.8 V, 0 V
(C) 4.8 V, 0.2 V
(D) 5 V, 0.2 V
both V1
and V2
are logic LOW, Q1
saturation.
+VCC
Statement Q.1011:
R1
R2
Consider the resistor transistor logic gate of fig.
Vo2
R3
V1
V2
P4.4.10-11.
is driven to
Q2
Q1
Vo1
Fig. P4.4.14-15
www.gatehelp.com
Page
225
22. The circuit shown in fig. P4.4.22 is
25. The circuit shown in fig. P4.4.25. implements the

function
+VDD
M2
M1
+VDD
Y
A
Chap 4.4
D
Y
Fig. P4.4.22
(A) NAND
(B) NOR
(C) AND
(D) OR
Fig. P4.4.25
+VDD
Y
M2
(A) ( A + B) C + D
(B) ( AB + C) D
(C) ( A + B) C + D
(D) ( AB + C) D
26. Consider the CMOS circuit shown in fig. P4.4.26.
M3
M1
23. The circuit shown in fig. P4.4.23 acts as a
The output Y is
+VDD
B
C
Fig. P4.4.23
B
(A) NAND
(B) NOR
C
(C) AND
(D) OR
B
24. The circuit shown in fig. P4.4.24 implements the

function
Fig. P4.4.26
+VDD
A
+VDD
(A) ( A + C) B
(B) ( A + B) C
(C) AB + C
(D) AB + C
27. The CMOS circuit shown in fig. P4.4.27 implement

Y
+5 V
Logic Input
A to E
PMOS
Network
Y
Fig. P4.4.24
E
(A) ABC + ABC
(B ABC + ( A + B + C)
(C) ABC + ( A + B + C)
Fig. P4.4.27
(A) AB + CD + E
(B) ( A + B)( C + D) E
(C) AB + CD + E
(D) ( A + B)( C + D) E
www.gatehelp.com
Page
227
UNIT 4
V1
V2
Digital Electronics
For n attached gate I o = nI B ( sat ) .
Vo
To assure no logic error Vo = VCC - I o RC > V H = 35

. V
V - 35
.
5 - 35
.
n CC
=
= 15.6 n 15
RC I B ( sat ) 640(0.15m)
Actual
Logic
Actual
Logic
Actual
Logic
VH
VH
VCE ( sat )
VL
VL
VCE
VH
VL
VCE ( sat )
19. (A) Let V1 = V2 = 0 V, then M 3 will be ON, M1 and
VL
VH
VCE ( sat )
M 2 OFF and M 4 ON, hence Vo = -VDD . Let V1 = 0 V and

V2 = -VDD then M 3 will be ON, M1 OFF M 4 OFF, M 2
13. (B) The Q3 stage is simply an inverter (a NOT gate).
ON, hence Vo = -VDD. Let V1 = -VDD and V2 = 0 V, then
Thus output Vo2
M 3 OFF, M 4 ON, M 2 OFF hence Vo = -VDD. Finally if
is the logic complement of Vo1 .
Therefore this is a OR gate.
V1 = V2 = -VDD, M 3 and M 4 will be OFF and M1 , M 2
14. (A) When Q1
satisfies the function of a negative NAND gate.
will be ON, hence Vo = 0 V. Thus the given CMOS gate
is saturated, Vo1 is logic LOW
otherwise Vo1 is logic HIGH. The following truth table

shows AND logic
20. (C) If V A = -VDD then M1
is ON and VY = 0 V. If
VB = VC = -VDD and V A = 0 V then M 3 and M 2 are ON
V1
V2
Vo1
but M1 is OFF hence VY = 0 V. If V A = 0 V and either or
both VB , VC are 0 V then M1 is OFF and either or both
M2
and M 3
will be OFF, which implies no current
flowing through M 4
hence VY = -VDD . Thus given
circuit satisfies the logic equation A + BC .

21. (A) Let V1 = V2 = 0 V = V (0) then M 4 and M 3 will be
OFF hence Vo = VDD = V (1). Let
15. (C) The Q2 stage is simply an inverter. Thus output
ON and M 2 , M1
Vo2 is the logic complement of Vo1 .
V1 = 0 V, V2 = VDD then M 4 and M 2 will be ON but M 3

and
16. (C) If V1 = V2 VL , Vo1 VCC . If V1 ( V2 ) > V H , while

V2 ( V1 ) VL , Q1 (Q2 )
is ON and Q2 (Q1 )
is OFF and
Vo1 VCC . If V1 = V2 > V H , both Q1 and Q2 are ON and

Vo1 2 VCE ( sat ) . The truth table shows NAND logic
M1
will
be
OFF
hence
Vo = 0 = V (0).
Let
V1 = VDD , V2 = 0 V , then M 4 and M 3 will be OFF and

M1 ON hence Vo = 0 V = V (0). Finally if V1 = V2 = VDD ,
M1
and M 2
will be ON but M 4 will be OFF hence
Vo = 0 V = V (0). Thus the given CMOS satisfy the

function of a positive NOR gate.
V1
V2
Vo
Actual
Logic
Actual
Logic
Actual
Logic
VL
VL
VCC
VH
VL
VCC
VL
VH
VCC
VH
VH
2VCE ( sat )
22. (A) If either one or both the inputs are V(0) = 0 V

the corresponding FET will be OFF, the voltage across
the load FET will be 0 V, hence the output is VDD . If
boths inputs are V (1) = VDD , both M1 and M 2 are ON
and the output is V(0) = 0 V. It satisfy NAND gate.
23. (B) If both the inputs are at V(0) = 0 V,
17. (A) The Q3 stage is simple an inverter. Hence AND
transistor M1
and M 2 are OFF, hence the output is
logic.
V (1) = VDD . If either one or both of the inputs are at
18. (C) For each successive gate, that has a transistor in
output will be V (0) = 0 V. Hence it is a NOR gate.
V (1) = VDD , the corresponding FET will be ON and the
saturation, the current required is

I B ( sat ) =
Page
230
the
I C ( sat ) VCC - VCE ( sat ) 5 - 0. 2

=
=
= 0.15 mA
b
bRC
50( 640)
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 4.4
24. (B) If all inputs A, B and C are HIGH, then input to
30. (A) When an output is LOW, it may be as high as
invertor is LOW and output Y is HIGH. If all inputs are
VOL ( max ) = 0.4 V. The maximum voltage that an input will
LOW, then input to inverter is also LOW and output Y
respond to as a LOW is V IL ( max ) = 0.8 V. A positive noise
is HIGH. In all other case the input to inverter is HIGH
spike can drive the actual voltage above the 0.8 V level
and output Y is LOW.
if its amplitude is greater than

V NL = V IL ( max ) - VOL ( max ) = 0.8 - 0.4 = 0.4 V
Y = ABC + ABC = ABC + ( A + B + C)
Hence
31. (B) A positive noise spike can drive the voltage
25. (C) The operation of circuit is given below

ABCD
PA
PB
0 0
0010
PC
PD
above 1.0 V level if the amplitude is greater than

Y
NA NB NC ND
OFF
V NL = V IL ( max ) - VOL ( max ) = 1 - 0.1 = 0.9 V,

A negative noise spike can drive the voltage below 3.5 V
OFF OFF
HIGH
ON ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
HIGH
0110
ON OFF OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF
LOW
32. (B) V IH ( min ) = VOH ( min ) - V NH = - 0.8 - 0.5 = - 1.3 V
1010
OFF ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF
LOW
V IL ( max ) = VOL ( max ) + V NL = 0.5 + ( -2) = -15

. V
1110
OFF OFF OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF
LOW
ON
ON
ON
LOW
if the amplitude is greater than

V NH = VOH ( min ) - V IH ( min ) = 4.9 - 35
. = 1.4 V
33. (C) V NH = VOH ( min ) - V IH ( min ) , V NL = V IL ( max ) - VOL ( max )

V NH = 2.7 (for LS) -2.0 (for ALS) = 0.7 V
Y = ( A + B)C + D
26. (B) The operation of this circuit is given below :
V NL = 0.8 (for ALS) -0.5 (for LS) = 0.3 V

34. (B) V NH = 2.5 (for ALS) - 2.0 (for LS) = 0.5 V
A B C
PA
PB
PC
N A NB NC
ON
0 1
1 1
V NL = 0.8 (for LS) - 0.4 (for ALS) = 0.4 V
OFF
HIGH
ON ON OFF
OFF OFF ON
HIGH
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
LOW
ON
LOW
ON
35. (D) V NH ( min ) = 0.5 V ,
V NL ( min ) = 0.3 V
36. (B) fanout (LOW) =
I OL ( max )
8m
=
= 80
I IL ( max ) 0.1m
fanout (HIGH) =
Y = ( A + B) C
I OH ( max ) 400m
=
= 20
I IH ( max )
20m
The fanout is chosen the smaller of the two.

27. (B) If input E is LOW, output will not be LOW. It
37. (B) In HIGH state the loading on the output of gate
must be HIGH. Option (B) satisfy this condition.
1 is equivalent to six 74LS input load.

28. (A) In this circuit parallel combination are OR gate
and series combination are AND gate.
Hence load = 6 I IH = 6 20m = 120 mA

38. (C) The NAND gate represent only a single input
Hence Y = ( A + B)( C + D)( E + F )
load in the LOW state. Hence only five loads in the
29. (A) When an output is HIGH, it may be as low as

VOH ( min ) = 2.4 V. The minimum voltage that an input will
LOW state.
load = 5I IL = 5 0.4 = 2 mA
respond to as a HIGH is V IH ( min ) = 2.0 V. A negative noise

spike that can drive the actual voltage below 2.0 V if its
amplitude is greater than
*******
V NH = VOH ( min ) - V IH ( min ) = 2.4 - 2.0 = 0.4 V
www.gatehelp.com
Page
231
CHAPTER
4.6
MICROPROCESSOR
1. After an arithmetic operation, the flag register of

8085 mP has the following contents
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
HLT
DSPLY : XRA
OUT
HLT
A
PORT1
The output at PORT1 is

(A) 00
(B) FEH
(C) 01H
(D) 11H
The contents of accumulator after operation may be

(A) 75
(B) 6C
5. Consider the following 8085 assembly program
(C) DB
(D) B6
MVI
A, DATA1
MOV
B, A
SUI
51H
JC
DLT
MOV
A, B
SUI
82H
JC
DSPLY
DLT :
XRA
A
OUT PORT1
HLT
DSPLY : MOV
A, B
OUT PORT2
HLT
2. In an 8085 microprocessor, the instruction CMP B

has been executed while the contents of accumulator is
less than that of register B. As a result carry flag and
zero flag will be respectively
(A) set, reset
(B) reset, set
(C) reset, reset
(D) set, set
3. Consider the following 8085 instruction

MVI
MVI
ADD
ORA
This program will display
A, A9H
B, 57H
B
A
(A) the bytes from 51H to 82H at PORT2

(B) 00H AT PORT1
The flag status (S, Z, CY) after the instruction

ORA A is executed, is
(C) all byte at PORT1

(D) the bytes from 52H to 81H at PORT 2
(A) (0, 1, 1)
(B) (0, 1, 0)
(C) (1, 0, 0)
(D) (1, 0, 1)
6. It is desired to mask is the high order bits ( D7 - D4 ) of

the data bytes in register C. Consider the following set
4. Consider the following set of 8085 instructions

MVI
ADI
JC
OUT
A, 8EH
73H
DSPLY
PORT1
of instruction
(a)
www.gatehelp.com
MOV
ANI
MOV
HLT
A, C
F0H
C, A
Page
239
UNIT 4
(b)
(c)
(d)
Digital Electronics
MOV
MVI
ANA
MOV
HLT
A, C
B, F0H
B
C, A
(C) 8529H are complemented and stored at location

529H
MOV
MVI
ANA
MOV
HLT
A, C
B, 0FH
B
C, A
10. Consider the sequence of 8085 instruction
MOV
ANI
MOV
HLT
A, C
0FH
C, A
(D) 5829H are complemented and stored at location

85892H
MVI
ADI
MOV
HLT
A, 5EH
A2H
C, A
The initial contents of resistor and flag are as

follows
The instruction set, which execute the desired

A
operation are
(A) a and b
(B) c and d
(C) only a
(D) only d
S
0
CY
0
After execution of the instructions the contents of
A
B, 4AH
4FH
B
The contents of register A and B are respectively
CY
(A) 10H
10H
(B) 10H
10H
(C) 00H
00H
(D) 00H
00H
(A) 05, 4A
(B) 4F, 00
11. It is desired to multiply the number 0AH by 0BH
(C) B1, 4A
and store the result in the accumulator. The numbers
8. Consider the following 8085 assembly program :

MVI
MOV
MOV
MVI
OUT
HLT
B, 89H
A, B
C, A
D, 37H
PORT1
are available in register B and C respectively. A part of

the 8085 program for this purpose is given below :
A, 00H
MVI
LOOP : ----------------------------------------------------------------------HLT
END
The output at PORT1 is

(A) 89
(B) 37
(C) 00
The sequence of instruction to complete the

program would be
9. Consider the sequence of 8085 instruction given
(A)
JNZ
ADD
DCR
LOOP
B
C
(B)
ADD
JNZ
DCR
B
LOOP
C
(C)
DCR
JNZ
ADD
C
LOOP
B
(D)
ADD
DCR
JNZ
B
C
LOOP
below
LXI
MOV
CMA
MOV
H, 9258H
A, M
M, A
By this sequence of instruction the contents of

memory location
(A) 9258H are moved to the accumulator
(B) 9258H are compared with the contents of the
accumulator
Page
240
Z
0
register and flags are
7. Consider the following 8085 instruction

XRA
MVI
SUI
ANA
HLT
www.gatehelp.com
Microprocessor
Chap 4.6
12. Consider the following assembly language program:
(A) A7H
(B) 98H
MVI
MOV
START : JMP
MVI
XRA
OUT
HLT
NEXT : XRA
JP
OUT
HLT
(C) 47H
B, 87H
A, B
NEXT
B, 00H
B
PORT1
15. The memory requirement for this program is
B
START1
PORT2
16. The instruction, that does not clear the accumulator
(A) 20 Byte
(B) 21 Byte
(C) 23 Byte
(D) 18 Byte
of 8085, is
The execution of the above program in an 8085

will result in
(A) XRA A
(B) ANI 00H
(C) MVI A, 00H
(A) an output of 87H at PORT1
17. The contents of some memory location of an 8085 mP
(B) an output of 87H at PORT2
based system are shown
(C) infinite looping of the program execution with

accumulator data remaining at 00H
Address Hex.
Contents (Hex.)
(D) infinite looping of the program execution with

accumulator data alternating between 00H and 87H.
3000
02
3001
30
13. Consider the following 8085 program
3002
00
MVI
ORA
JM
OUT
CMA
DSPLY : ADI
OUT
HLT
3003
30
A, DATA1
A,
DSPLY
PORT1
01H
PORT1
Fig. P4.6.17
The program is as follows
If DATA1 = A7H, the output at PORT1 is

(A) 47H
(B) 58H
(C) 00
LHLD
MOV
INX
MOV
LDAX
MOV
INX
LDAX
MOV

Consider the following program of 8085 assembly
language:
LXI
LDA
MOV
LDA
CMP
JZ
JC
MOV
JMP
MOV
FNSH : HLT
3000H
E, M
H
D, M
D
L, A
D
D
H, A
The contents if HL pair after the execution of the
H 4A02H
4A00H
B, A
4A01H
B
FNSH
GRT
M, A
FNSH
M, B
program will be
(A) 0030 H
(B) 3000 H
(C) 3002 H
(D) 0230H
18. Consider the following loop
14. If the contents of memory location 4A00H, 4A01H

and 4A02H, are respectively A7H, 98H and 47H, then
XRA
LXI
LOOP : DCX
JNZ
A
B, 0007H
B
LOOP
This loop will be executed
after the execution of program contents of memory
(A) 1 times
(B) 8 times
location 4A02H will be respectively
(C) 7 times
(D) infinite times
www.gatehelp.com
Page
241
UNIT 4
19. Consider the following loop

LXI
LOOP : DCX
MOV
ORA
JNZ
24. Consider the following program

MVI
RRC
RRC
H, 000AH
B
A, B
C
LOOP
(A) 1 time
(B) 10 times
(C) 11 times
(D) infinite times
execution of program will be

(A) 08H
(B) 8CH
(C) 12H
25. Consider the following program
20. The contents of accumulator after the execution of

following instruction will be
A, A7H
A
(A) CFH
(B) 4FH
(C) 4EH
(D) CEH
RJCT :
21. The contents of accumulator after the execution of

following instructions will be
MVI
ORA
RAL
A, BYTE1
If BYTE1 = 32H, the contents of A after the
This loop will be executed
MVI
ORA
RLC
Digital Electronics
MVI
MVI
MVI
CMP
JC
CMP
JNC
OUT
HLT
SUB A
OUT
HLT
PORT1
If the following sequence of byte is loaded in

accumulator,
A, B7H
A
DATA (H)
(A) 6EH
(B) 6FH
(C) EEH
(D) EFH
58
64
73
C8
FA
(A) 00, 00, 73, B4, 00, FA

(B) 58, 64, 00, 00, C8, FA
(C) 58, 00, 00, 00, C8, FA
of the following program will be
(D) 00, 64, 73, B4, 00, FA
A, C5H
A
26. Consider the following instruction to be executed by

a 8085 mp. The input port has an address of 01H and
has a data 05H to input:
(A) 45H
(B) C5H
(C) C4H
IN
ANI
23. Consider the following set of instruction

MVI
RLC
MOV
RLC
RLC
ADD
B4
then sequence of output will be
22. The contents of the accumulator after the execution
MVI
ORA
RAL
01H
80H
After execution of the two instruction the contents
A, BYTE1
of flag register are
B, A
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
If BYTE1 = 07H, then content of A, after the

execution of program will be
Page
242
A, DATA
B, 64H
C, C8H
B
RJCT
C
RJCT
PORT1
(A) 46H
(B) 70H
(C) 38H
(D) 68H
www.gatehelp.com
Microprocessor
ORA
JM
A
DSPLY
OUT
DSPLY : CMA
ADI
OUT
HLT
PORT1
01H
PORT1
;Set flag
;If negative jump to
;DSPLY
;A PORT1
;Complement A
;A+1 A
;A PORT1
Chap 4.6
18. (A) The instruction XRA will set the Z flag. LXI and
DCX does not alter the flag. Hence this loop will be
executed 1 times.
19. (B) LXI
LOOP : DCX
This program displays the absolute value of DATA1. If
MOV
ORA
JNZ
DATA1 is negative, it determine the 2s complements

and display at PORT1.
B, 000AH
B
A, B
C
LOOP
;00 C, 0AH B
; CB 1 B,
;flag not affected
;B A
;A OR C A, set flag
Hence this loop will be executed 0AH or ten times.

14. (A)
LXI
H, 4A02H
LDA
4A00H
MOV
LDA
B, A
4A01H
CMA
JZ
B
FNSH
JC
GRT
MOV
JMP
GRT :
MOV
FNSH : HLT
M, A
FNSH
M, B
;Store destination address

;in HL pair
;Load A with contents of
;memory location A00H
;A B
;Load A with contents of
;memory location 4A01H
;Compare A and B
;Jump to FNSH if two
;number are equal
;If CY = 1, (A <B) jump
;to GRT
;Otherwise A (4A02H)
MVI
ORA
RLC
A, B7H
A
;B7H A
;Set Flags, CY = 1
;Rotate accumulator left
The contents of bit D7 are placed in bit D0 .

Accumulator
Before RLC
10100111
After RLC
01001111
21. (A) RAL instruction rotate the accumulator left

through carry.
D7 CY ,
CY D0 ,
ORA reset the carry.

Accumulator
This program find the larger of the two number stored

in location 4A00H and 4A01H and store it in memory
location 4A002.
A7H > 98H
20. (B)
Thus A7H will be stored at 4A02H.
15. (C) Operand R, M or implied : 1Byte instruction

Operand 8bit
: 2Byte instruction
Operand 16bit
: 3Byte instruction
CY
Before RAL
10110111
After RAL
01101110
22. (A) RRC instruction rotate the accumulator right

and D0 is placed in D7 .
MVI
ORA
RAL
3Byte instruction are: LXI, LDA, JZ, JC, JMP
A, C5H
A
RRC
;C5H A
;Reset Carry flag
;Rotate A left through
;carry, A = 8AH
;Rotate A right, A = 45H
PByte instruction are : MOV, CMP, HLT

Hence memory = 3 6 + 1 5 = 23
Byte.
23. (A) This program multiply BYTE1 by 10. Hence

content of A will be 46H.
16. (D) All instruction clear the accumulator
17. (C)
XRA
ANI
MVI
A
00H
A
LHLD
MOV
INX
MOV
LDAX
MOV
INX
LDAX
MOV
3000H
E, M
H
D, M
D
L, A
D
D
H, A
;A A
;A AND 00
;00 A
;(3000A) HL = 3002H
;(3002H) E = 00
;HL +1 HL = 3003H
;M D=(3003H) = 30H
;(DE) A=(3000H) = 02H
;A L = 02H
;DE +1 DE = 3001H
;(DE) A = (3001) = 30H
;A H = 30H
Hence HL pair contain 3002H.
07H = 0710 ,7 10 = 70, 7010 = 46H

24. (B) Contents of Accumulator A = 0011 0010
After First RRC
= 0001 1001
After second RRC
= 1000 1100
25. (D) This program will display the number between

64H to C8H including 64H. C8H will not be displayed.
26. (C) 05H AND 80H =00
www.gatehelp.com
Page
245
UNIT 4
After the ANI instruction S, Z and P are modified to

reflect the result of operation. CY is reset and AC is set
. Thus,
S = 0, Z = 1, AC = 1, P =1, CY = 0
27. (B)
ACI
;A + 56H + CY A
56H
37H + 56H + 1 =8EH

28. (C) Instruction load the register pairs HL with
01FFH. SHLD instruction store the contents of L in the
memory location 2050H and content of H in the memory
location 2051H. Contents of HL are not altered.
29. (B) At a time 8085 can drive only a digit. In a second
each digit is refreshed 500 times. Thus time given to
1
each digit =
= 0.4 ms.
(5 500)
30. (C) The stack pointer register SP point to the upper
memory location of stack. When data is pushed on
stack, it stores above this memory location.
31. (B) Line 5 push the content of HL register pair on
stack. The contents of L will go to 03FFH and contents
of H will go to 03FEH. Hence memory location 03FEH
contain 22H.
32. (C) Contents of register pair B lie on the top of stack
when POP H is executed, HL pair will be loaded with
the contents of register pair B.
33. (C) The instruction PUSH B store the contents of
BC at stack. The POP PSW instruction copy the
contents of BC in to PSW. The contents of register C
will be copied into flag register.
D0 = 1 = carry flag,
D6 = 0 = zero flag.
Hence zero flag will be reset and carry will be set.

34. (A)
MVI A DATA1
ORA
A
JP
DSPLY
XRA
DSPLY OUT
HLT
A
PORT1
;DATA1 A
; Set flag
;If A is positive, then
;jump to DSPLY
; Clear A
; A PORT2
If DATA1 is positive, it will be displayed at port1

otherwise 00.
********************
Page
246
www.gatehelp.com
Digital Electronics
UNIT 5
e2 t, t < 0
30. y( t) = u( t) * h( t) , where h( t) = -3t
e , t >0
1
5 1
(A) e -2 t u( - t - 1) + - e -3t u( -t)
2
6 3
Signal & System
(A)
5
3
1
13 -4 t
sin t +
cos t + e - t e , t 0
34
34
6
61
(B)
5
3
13 -4 t 1 - t
sin t +
cos t e + e , t 0
34
34
51
6
(B)
1 2t
5 1
e u( -t - 1) + - e-3t u( -t)
2
6 3
(C)
3
5
13 -4 t 1 - t
sin t +
cos t e + e , t 0
34
34
51
6
(C)
1 2t 1
e + [5 - 3e 2 t - 2 e -3t ]u( t)
2
6
(D)
3
5
1
13 -4 t
sin t +
cos t + e -4 t e , t 0
34
34
6
51
(D)
1 2t 1
e + [5 - 3e 2 t - 2 e -3t ]u( -t)
2
6
37.
d 2 y ( t)
dy ( t)
+6
+ 8 y( t) = 2 x( t),
dt 2
dt
y (0 - ) = -1,
The impulse response of LTI system is given.

Determine the step response.
(A)
2 - t 5 -2 t 5 -4 t
e - e + e , t 0
3
2
6
31. h( t) = e - |t |
(B)
2 5 -2 t 5 -4 t
+ e + e , t 0
3 2
6
(A) 2 + e t - e - t
(B) e t u( -t + 1) + 2 - e - t
(C) e t u( -t + 1) + [2 - e - t ]u( t)
(D) e t + [2 - e - t - e t ]u( t)
(C) 4 + 5( 3e -2 t + e -4 t ) , t 0
(D) 4 - 5( 3e -2 t + e -4 t ), t 0
32. h( t) = d( 2 ) ( t)
(A) 1
(B) u( t)
(C) d( 3) ( t)
(D) d( t)
38.
d 2 y( t)
3dx( t)
,
+ y( t) =
dt 2
dt
y (0 - ) = -1,
33. h( t) = u( t) - u( t - 4)
(A) tu( t) + (1 - t) u( t - 4)
(B) tu( t) + (1 - t) u( t - 4)
(C) 1 + t
(D) (1 + t) u( t)
(A) sin t + 4 cos t - 3te -3t + t, t 0

(B) 4 sin t - cos t - 3te - t , t 0
(D) 4 sin t + cos t - 3te - t , t 0
(A) u( t)
(B) t
(C) 1
(D) tu( t)
39. The raised cosine pulse x( t) is defined as

1
(cos wt + 1) ,
x ( t) = 2
0,

The system described by the differential equations
has been specified with initial condition. Determine the
output of the system and choose correct option.
dy( t)
+ 10 y( t) = 2 x( t), y(0 - ) = 1, x( t) = u( t)
dx
(A) 15 (1 + 4 e -10 t ) u( t)
(B) 15 (1 + 4 e -10 t )
(C) - 15 (1 + 4 e -10 t ) u( t)
(D) - 15 (1 + 4 e -10 t )
p
p
t
w
w
otherwise
The total energy of x ( t) is

3p
3p
(B)
(A)
4w
8w
(C)
3p
w
(D)
3p
2w
40. The sinusoidal signal x( t) = 4 cos (200 t + p 6) is
d 2 y( t)
dy( t)
dx( t)
,
36.
+5
+ 4 y( t) =
2
dt
dt
dt
dy( t)
= 1, x( t) = sin t u( t)
y (0 - ) = 0,
dt 0 -
Page
252
dy( t)
= 1, x( t) = 2 te- t u( t)
dt 0 -
(C) sin t - 4 cos t + 3te -3t + t, t 0
34. h( t) = y( t)
35.
dy( t)
= 1, x( t) = e - t u( t)
dt 0 -
passed through a square law device defined by the

input output relation y ( t) = x 2 ( t). The DC component in
the signal is
(A) 3.46
(B) 4
(C) 2.83
(D) 8
www.gatehelp.com
Continuous-Time Systems
41. The impulse response of a system is h( t) = d( t - 0.5).

If two such systems are cascaded, the impulse response
Chap 5.1
46. The y( t) = x( t) * h( t) is
y(t)
y(t)
of the overall system will be

(A) 0.58( t - 0.25)
(B) d( t - 0.25)
(C) d( t - 1)
(D) 0.5 d( t - 1)
1+a
y(t)
h(t)
a
1
1+a
2
1+a
1-a
(C)
Fig P5.1.42
The output of the system is zero every where

except for the
value of a is
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 1 < t < 5
(D) 1 < t < 8
(C) 3
(D) 0
S1 : h1 ( t) = e - (1 - 2 j ) t u( t)
48. Consider the signal x( t) = d( t + 2) - d( t - 2).The value

of E for the signal y( t) =
S2 : h2 ( t) = e cos 2 t u( t)
The stable system is
(A) S1
(B) S2
(C) Both S1 and S2
(D) None
x( t) dt
is
(A) 4
(B) 2
(C) 1
(D)
49. The
response of a system S to a complex input
x( t) = e j 5t is specified as y( t) = te j 5t . The system
44. The non-invertible system is

(B) y( t) =
(A) is definitely LTI

x( t) dt
(B) is definitely not LTI
dx( t)
dt
-t
(A) y( t) = x( t - 4)
47. If dy( t) dt contains only three discontinuities, the
(B) 0 < t < 8
43. Consider the impulse response of two LTI system
(D)
(A) 0 < t < 5
(C) y( t) =
(B)
y(t)
impulse response h( t) of the system.
1-a
(A)
42. Fig. P5.1.40 show the input x( t) to a LTI system and

x(t)
(C) may be LTI

(D) information is insufficient
45. A continuous-time linear system with input x( t) and

output y( t) yields the following input-output pairs:
x( t) = e j 2 t y( t) = e j 5t
(B) is definitely not LTI
If x1 ( t) = cos (2 t - 1), the corresponding y1 ( t) is

(B) e- j cos (5 t - 1)
(D) e j cos (5 t - 1)
Suppose that
0 t 1
elsewhere
(C) may be LTI

(D) information is insufficient.
51. The auto-correlation of the signal x( t) = e - t u( t) is
1,
x( t) =
0,
response of a system S to a complex input
x( t) = e j8 t is specified as y( t) = cos 8 t. The system

(A) is definitely LTI
x( t) = e - j 2 t y( t) = e - j 5t
(A) cos (5 t - 1)
(C) cos 5( t - 1)
50. The
and
t
h( t) = x , where 0 < a 1.
a
(A)
1 t
1
e u( -t) + e - t u( t)
2
2
(B)
et 1 - t
+ ( e - e t ) u( t)
2 2
(C)
1 -t
1
e u( -t) + e - t u( t)
2
2
(D)
1 t
1
e u( -t) - e - t u( t)
2
2
*********************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
253
UNIT 5
Signal & System
11. (C)
SOLUTIONS
x(10t)
x(10t-5)
1. (A)
2p
= 60 p
T
2. (C) T1 =
T=
p
30
-0.5 -0.4
0.4 0.5
0.1
0.9
Fig S5.1.11
12. (D) Multiplication by 5 will bring contraction on
2p
2p
2p 2p
s, T2 =
s, LCM
,
= 2p
5
7
7
5
time scale. It may be checked by x(5 0.8) = x( 4).
3. (D) Not periodic because of t.

4. (D) Not periodic because least common multiple is
13. (A) Division by 5 will bring expansion on time scale.

20
It may be checked by y( t) = x
= x( 4).
5
infinite.
5. (C) y( t) is not periodic although sin t and 6 cos 2 pt are
independently periodic. The fundamental frequency
cant be determined.
| x ( t)|dt <
-4 t
-4 t
e u( t) dt = e dt =
7. (A) | x( t)| = 1, E =
| x( t)| dt
2
1
4
1
T 2T
-5
otherwise
=8+
=
| x( t)| dt
2
15. (D) E = 2 x 2 ( t) dt = 2 (1)1 dt + 2 (5 - t) 2 dt

2 26
=
3 3
16. (B) Let x1 ( t) = v( t) then y1 ( t) = u{v( t)}
So this is a power signal not a energy.

P = lim
-4
for - 5 < t < - 4

for
4 < t <5
E = (1) 2 dt + ( -1) 2 dt = 2
6. (C) This is energy signal because

E =
1,
14. (C) y( t) = -1,

0,
Let x2 ( t) = kv( t) then y2 ( t) = u{kv( t)} ky1 ( t)
=1
(Not homogeneous not linear)
-T
8. (D) v( t) is sum of 3 unit step signal starting from, 1, 2,

and 3, all signal ends at 4.
y1 ( t) = u{v( t)},
y2 ( t) = u{v( t - to)} = y1 ( t - to)
(Time invariant)
The response at any time depends only on the
9. (A) The function 1 does not describe the given pulse.
excitation at time t = to and not on any future value.

(Causal)
It can be shown as follows :

u(a-t)
u(t-b)
17. (C) y1 ( t) = v( t - 5) - v( 3 - t)
u(a-t) - u(t-b)
y2 ( t) = kv( t - 5) - kv( 3 - t) = ky1 ( t)

t
(Homogeneous)
Let x1 ( t) = v( t) then y1 ( t) = v( t - 5) - v( 3 - t)
Let x2 ( t) = 2 w( t) then y2 ( t) = w( t - 5) - w( 3 - t)
Fig S5.1.3.9
Let x3( t) = x( t) + w( t)
10. (B)
Then
r(t-4)
r(t-6)
r(t-4) - r(t-6)
y3( t) = v( t - 5) + w( t - 5) - v( 3 - t) - w( 3 - t)
= y1 ( t) + y2 ( t)
(Additive)
Since it is both homogeneous and additive, it is also

linear.
Fig S5.1.10
Page
254
y1 ( t) = v( t - 5) - v( 3 - t)
y2 ( t) = v( t - to - 5) - v( 3 - t + to) = y1 ( t - to)
www.gatehelp.com
(Time invariant)
Continuous-Time Systems
At
time,
t = 0, y(0) = x( -5) - x( 3).
Therefore
the
Chap 5.1
21. (C) All option are linear. So it is not required
response at time, t = 0 depends on the excitation at a
to check linearity.
later time t = 3.
d
y1 ( t) - 8 y1 ( t) = v( t)
dt
d
Let x2 ( t) = v( t - to) then t
y2 ( t) - 8 y2 ( t) = v( t - to)
dt
(Not causal)
If x( t) is bounded then x( t - 5) and x( 3 - t) are bounded

and so is y( t).
(Stable)
t
t
18. (D) y1 ( t) = v , y2 ( t) = kv = ky1 ( t)
2
2
(Homogeneous)
Let x1 ( t) = v( t) then t
The first equation can be written as

d
( t - to)
y( t - to) - 8 y( t - to) = v( t - to)
dt
This equation is not satisfied if y2 ( t) = y1 ( t - to) therefore
x3 = v( t) + w( t) then
t
t
y3( t) = v + w = y1 ( y) + y2 ( t)
2
2
(Additive)
Since it is both homogeneous and additive, it is also
y2 ( t) y1 ( t - to)
(Time Variant)
The system can be written as

y( t) =
linear
x( l)
y( l)
dl + 8
dl
l
-
- l
t
So the response at any time, t = to depends on the
t
t
t - to
y1 ( t) = v , y2 - to y( t - to) = v
2
2

excitation at t to , and not on any future values.
(Time variant)
(Causal)
At time t = -2, y( -2) = x( -1), therefore, the response at
The Homogeneous solution to the differential equation
time t = -2, depends on the excitation at a later time,
is of the form y( t) = kt8 . If there is no excitation but the
t = -1.
zero excitation, response is not zero. The response will
(Not causal)
It x( t) is bounded then y( t) is bounded.
(Stable)
increases without bound as time increases.

(Unstable)
19. (C) y1 ( t) = cos 2 pt v( t)

y2 ( t) k cos 2 pt v( t) = ky1 ( t)
(Homogeneous)
22. (C) y1 ( t) =
x3( t) = v( t) + w( t)
t+ 3
v(l)dl
y3( t) = cos 2 pt [ v( t) + w( t)] = y1 ( t) + y2 ( t)
(Additive)
t+ 3
t+ 3
kv(l)dl = k v(l)dl = ky1 ( t)
y2 ( t) =
Since it is both homogeneous and additive. It is also

linear.
x3( t) = v( t) + w( t)
y1 ( t) = cos 2 pt v( t)
y3( t) =
y2 ( t) = cos 2 pt ( t - to) y( t - to)

= cos [2p( t - to)]v( t - to)
(Time Variant)
(Homogeneous)
t+ 3
t+ 3
t+ 3
[ v( l) + w( l)]dl =
v( l)dl +
w( l)dl
= y1 (t) + y2 (t)
(Additive)
The response at any time t = to depends only on the

excitation at that time and not on the excitation at any
Since it is Homogeneous and additive, it is also linear.
later time.
(Causal)
y1 ( t) =
If x( t) is bounded then y( t) is bounded.
(Stable)
v(l)dl
y2 ( t) =
20. (C) y1 ( t) = |v( t)|, y2 ( t) = |kv( t)| = k y1 ( t)
t+ 3
t+ 3
t - to + 3
v(l - to )dl =
v(l)dl = y (t - t )
o
If k is negative k y1 ( t) ky1 ( t)
(Time invariant)
(Not Homogeneous Not linear).

y1 ( t) = |v( t)|, y2 ( t) = | y( t - to)| = y1 ( t - to)
The response at any time, t = to , depends partially on

the excitation at time to to < t < ( to + 3) which are in
(Time Invariant)
The response at any time t = to depends only on the
excitation at that time and not on the excitation at any
later time.
If x( t) is bounded then y( t) is bounded.
(Causal)
future.
If x( t) is a constant k, then y ( t) =
(Not causal)
t+ 3
t+ 3
kdl = k dl and as
t , y ( t) increases without bound.
(unstable)
(Stable)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
255
UNIT 5
Signal & System
pn
pn
pn p
14. x[ n] = cos
+
- sin
+ 3 cos
3
2
8
4
11. x[ n + 2 ] y[ n - 2 ]
x[n]
3
(A) periodic with period 16
(A)
(B) periodic with period 4
1
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
(C) periodic with period 2

(D) Not periodic
x[n]
3
15. x[ n] = 2 e
(B)
1
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
(A) periodic with 12p
(B) periodic with 12
(C) periodic with 11p
(D) Not periodic
16. The sinusoidal signal has fundamental period

n
N = 10 samples. The smallest angular frequency, for

which x[ n] is periodic, is
1
(A)
rad/cycle
10
-1
(C)
j - p
6
-2
-3
(C) 5 rad/cycle
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-1
(D)
(B) 10 rad/cycle
(D)
p
rad/cycle
5
17. Let x[ n], - 5 n 3 and h[ n], 2 n 6 be two finite

duration signals. The range of their convolution is
-2
-3
(A) -7 n 9
(B) -3 n 9
(C) 2 n 3
(D) -5 n 6

A discrete-time signal is given. Determine the
period of signal and choose correct option.
x[ n] and h[ n] are given in the question. Compute

the convolution y[ n] = x[ n] * h[ n]
pn
pn 1
12. x[ n] = cos
+ sin
+
9
2
7
(A) periodic with period N = 126
(B) periodic with period N = 32
Page
260
and choose correct
option.
18. x[ n] = {1, 2, 4}, h[ n] = {1, 1, 1, 1, 1}
(A) {1, 3, 7, 7, 7, 6, 4}
(B) {1, 3, 3, 7, 7, 6, 4}
(C) periodic with period N = 252
(C) {1, 2, 4}
(D) Not periodic
(D) {1, 3, 7}
n
pn
13. x[ n] = cos cos
8
8
19. x[ n] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, h [ n] = {1}

(A) {1, 3, 6, 10, 15}
(B) {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(A) Periodic with period 16p
(C) {1, 4, 9, 16, 20}
(D) {1, 4, 6, 8, 10}
(B) periodic with period 16( p + 1)
20. x[ n] = {1, 2, -1}, h [ n] = x [ n]
(C) periodic with period 8
(A) {1, 4, 1}
(B) {1, 4, 2, -4, 1}
(D) Not periodic
(C) {1, 2, -1}
(D) {2, 4, -2}
www.gatehelp.com
Discrete-Time Systems
21. x[ n] = {1, -2, 3}, h [ n] = {0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1}
Chap 5.2
25. x[ n] = {1, 4, -3, 6, 4}, h[ n] = {2, -4, 3}
(A) {2, 4, -19, 36, -25, 2, 12}
(A) {1, -2, 4, 1, 1, 1}
(B) {4, -19, 36, -25}
(B) {0, 0, 3}
(C) {1, 4, -3, 6, 4}
(C) {0, 0, 3, 1, 1, 1, 1}
(D) {1, 4, -3, 6, 4}
(D) {0, 0, 1, -1, 2, 2, 1, 3}
22. x[ n] = {0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1}, h[ n] = {1, -2, 3}
(A) {0, 0, 1, -1, 2, 2, 1, 3}
1,
26. x[ n] = 2,
0
n = -2, 0, 1
n = -1
elsewhere
h (n) = d[ n ] - d[ n - 1] + d[ n - 4]
(A) d[ n ] - 2 d[ n - 1 ] + 4 d[ n - 4 ] + d[ n - 5 ]
(B) {0, 0, 1, -1, 2, 2, 1, 3}
(B) d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n + 1 ] - d[ n ] + 2 d[ n - 3 ] + d[ n - 4 ] + d[ n - 5 ]
(C) d[ n + 2 ] - d[ n + 1 ] + d[ n ] + 2 d[ n - 3 ] - d[ n - 4 ] + 2 d[ n - 5 ]
(C) {1, -2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1}
(D) d[ n ] + 2 d[ n - 1 ] + 4 d[ n - 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]
(D) {1, -2, 3, 1, 1, 1, 1}
In question y[ n] is the convolution of two signal.
23. x[ n] = {1, 1, 0, 1, 1}, h[ n] = {1, -2, - 3, 4}
(A) {1, -1, - 2, 4, 1, 1}
(B) {1, -1, - 2, 4, 1, 1}
(C) {1, -1, - 5, 2, 3, -5, 1, 4}
(D) {1, -1, - 5, 2, 3, -5, 1, 4}
24. x[ n] = {1, 2, 0, 2, 1}, h[ n] = x[ n]
(A) {1, 4, 4, 4, 10, 4, 4, 4, 1}
(B) {1, 4, 4, 4, 10, 4, 4, 4, 1}
(C) {1, 4, 4, 10, 4, 4, 4, 1}
(D) {1, 4, 4, 10, 4, 4, 4, 1}
Choose correct option for y[ n].

27. y[ n] = ( -1) n * 2 n u[2 n + 2 ]
(A)
4
6
(B)
4
u[ -n + 2 ]
6
(C)
8
( -1) n u[ -n + 2 ]
3
(D)
8
( -1) n
3
28. y[ n] =
1
u[ n] * u[ n + 2 ]
4n
1 1
(A) - n u[ n]
3 4
1 12
(B) - n u[ n + 2 ]
3 4
4 1 1 n
u[ n + 2 ]
(C) 3 12 4
1
16
(D)
- n u[ n + 2 ]
3 4
29. y[ n] = 3n u[ -n + 3] * u[ n - 2 ]
3n
,
(A) 2
83 ,
2
3n
,
(C) 2
81 ,
2
www.gatehelp.com
n 5
n6
n 5
n6
3n ,
(B) 83
2 ,
3n
,
(D) 6
81 ,
2
n 5
n6
n 5
n6
Page
261
UNIT 5
30. y[ n] = u[ n + 3] * u[ n - 3]
37. x[ n] as shown in fig. P5.2.37
(A) ( n + 1) u[ n]
(B) nu[ n]
(C) ( n - 1) u[ n]
(D) u[ n]
31.
The
convolution
of
x[ n] = cos ( 2p n) u[ n]
x[n]
and
10
y[n]
Fig. P5.2.37
h[ n] = u[ n - 1] is f [ n]u[ n - 1]. The function f [ n] is

n = 4 m + 1, 4 m + 2
1,
(A)
n = 4 m, 4 m + 3
0,
0,
(B)
1,
Signal & System
(A) P, Q, R, S
(B) Q, R, S
(C) P, R, S
(D) P, Q, S
n = 4 m + 1, 4 m + 2
n = 4 m, 4 m + 3
1,
(C)
0,
n = 4 m + 1, 4 m + 3
0,
(D)
1,
n = 4 m + 1, 4 m + 3
n = 4 m, 4 m + 2

x[n]
n = 4 m, 4 m + 2
y[n]
+
Fig. P5.2.38

Let P be linearity, Q be time invariance, R be
causality and S be stability. In question discrete time
(A) P, Q, R, S
(B) P, Q, R
(C) P, Q
(D) Q, R, S

and S2
Two discrete time systems S1
input x[ n] and output y[ n] relationship has been given. In

the option properties of system has been given. Choose
the option which match the properties for system.
fig. P5.2.3941.
32. y[ n] = rect ( x[ n])
x[n]
(A) P, Q, R
(B) Q, R, S
(C) R, S, P
(D) S , P, Q
S2
S1
y[n]
Fig. P5.2.3941.
39. Consider the following statements
33. y[ n] = nx[ n]
(A) P, Q, R, S
(B) Q, R, S
(a) If S1 and S2 are linear, the S is linear
(C) P, R
(D) Q, S
(b) If S1 and S2 are nonlinear, then S is nonlinear
34. y[ n] =
(c) If S1 and S2 are causal, then S is causal
n +1
u[ m ]
(d) If S1 and S2 are time invariant, then S is time

invariant
m = -
(A) P, Q, R, S
(B) R, S
(C) P, Q
(D) Q, R
35. y[ n] = x[ n]
(A) Q, R, S
(B) R, S, P
(C) S, P, Q
(D) P, Q, R

x[n]
y[n]
True statements are :

(A) a, b, c
(B) b, c, d
(C) a, c, d
(D) All
40. Consider the following statements

(a) If S1 and S2 are linear and time invariant, then
interchanging their order does not change the system.
(b) If S1 and S2 are linear and time varying, then
interchanging their order does not change the system.
True statement are
Fig. P5.2.36
Page
262
are
connected in cascade to form a new system as shown in
(A) P, Q, R, S
(B) Q, R, S
(C) P, Q
(D) R, S
(A) Both a and b
(B) Only a
(C) Only b
(D) None
www.gatehelp.com
41. Consider the statement
Chap 5.2
(D) Above all
(a) If S1 and S2 are noncausal, the S is non causal

(b) If S1 and/or S2 are unstable, the S is unstable.
45. The system shown in fig. P5.2.45 is
(A) Both a and b
y[n]
1
4
x[n]
True statement are :

(B) Only a
(C) Only b
y[n-2]
(D) None
1
4
-1
2
42. The following input output pairs have been
Fig. P5.2.45
observed during the operation of a time invariant

(A) Stable and causal
system :
x1 [ n] = {1, 0, 2}
y1 [ n] = {0, 1, 2}
(B) Stable but not causal
(C) Causal but unstable
x2 [ n] = {0, 0, 3}
y2 [ n] = {0, 1, 0, 2}
x3[ n] = {0, 0, 0, 1}
46. The impulse response of a LTI system is given as
y3[ n] = {1, 2, 1}
(D) unstable and not causal
1
h[ n] = - u[ n].
2
The conclusion regarding the linearity of the
The step response is
system is
(A) System is linear
1
1
2 --
3
2
(C)
1
1
2 + -
3
2
(B) System is not linear

(C) One more observation is required.
n +1
(A)
(D) Conclusion cannot be drawn from observation.
n +1
u[ n]
(B)
1
1
2 --
3
2
u[ n]
(D)
1
1
2 + -
3
2
u[ n]
u[ n]
43. The following input output pair have been observed
47. The difference equation representation for a system
during the operation of a linear system:
is
x1 [ n] = { -1, 2, 1}
y1 [ n] = {1, 2, - 1, 0, 1}
x2 [ n] = {1, - 1, - 1}
y2 [ n] = { - 1, 1, 0, 2}
x3[ n] = {0, 1, 1}
y[ n] -
(A)
3 1
- u[ n]
2 2
(C)
3 1
u[ n]
2 2
(A) System is time-invariant
(A) y[ n] = x[ n] + 11
. y[ n - 1]
(B) y[ n] = x[ n] -
1
( y[ n - 1] + y[ n - 2 ])
2
(D)
21
u[ n]
32
y[ n] - 2 y[ n - 1] + y[ n - 2 ] = x[ n] - x[ n - 1]
If y[ n] = 0 for n < 0 and x[ n] = d[ n], then y[2 ] will
(C) One more observation is required
44. The stable system is
2 1
- u[ n]
3 2
48. The difference equation representation for a system is
(B) System is time variant
(D) Conclusion cannot be drawn from observation
(B)
The conclusion regarding the time invariance of

the system is
y [ -1] = 3
The natural response of system is

n
y3[ n] = {1, 2, 1}
1
y[ n - 1] = 2 x[ n],
2
be
(A) 2
(B) -2
(C) -1
(D) 0
49. Consider a discrete-time system S whose response

to a complex exponential input e jpn
S : e jpn
(C) y[ n] = x[ n] - (15
. y[ n - 1] + 0.4 y[ n - 2 ])
www.gatehelp.com
e jp3n
is specified as
Page
263
UNIT 5
24. (B) y[ n] = {1, 4, 4, 10, 4, 4, 4, 1}
Signal & System
28. (C) For n + 2 < 0
for
n + 2 0
or
n < - 2, y [ n] = 0
n - 2, y[ n] =
or
n+2
4k
4 1 1
,
3 12 4 n
k=0
4 1 1 n
u[ n + 2 ]
y[ n] = 3 12 4
n -2
k=
for n - 2 4 or n 6, y[ n] =
Fig. S5.2.24
25. (A) y[ n] = {2, 4, -19, 36, -25, 2, 12}
-3
-6
12
-4
-4
-16
12
-24
-16
12
3n
,
y[ n] = 6
81 ,
2
-9
18
81
,
2
n6
n < 0,
y[ n] = 0
n -3
n > 0, y[ n] =
for n - 3 - 3 or
1 = n + 1,
k = -3
y[ n] = ( n + 1) u[ n]
31. (A) For n - 1 < 0
12
For
Fig. S5.2.25
26. (B) x[ n] = {1, 2, 1, 1}, h[ n] = {1, -1, 0, 0, 1}
n 5
30. (A) For n - 3 < - 3 or
k = -
3n
6
3k =
29. (D) For n - 2 3 or n 5 , y[ n] =
n -1 0
1,
y[ n] =
0,
or
or
n <1 ,
y[ n] = 0
p
n 1, y[ n] = cos k
k=0
2
n -1
n = 4 m + 1, 4 m + 2
n = 4 m, 4 m + 3
32. (B) y1 [ n] = rect ( v[ n]) ,
y2 [ n] = rect ( kv[ n])
y2 [ n] k y1 [ n]
-1
y1 [ n] = rect ( v[ n]), y2 [ n] = rect ( v[ n - no ])
-1
-1
-2
-1
-1
(Not Homogeneous not linear)
y1 [ n - no ] = rect ( v[ n - no ]) = y2 [ n]
(Time Invariant)
At any discrete time n = no , the response depends only

on the excitation at that discrete time.
(Causal)
No matter what values the excitation may have the

response can only have the values zero or one.
(Stable)
Fig. S5.2.26
33. (C) y1 [ n] = nv[ n] ,
y[ n] = {1, 1, -1, 0, 0, 2, 1, 1}
ky1 [ n] = y2 [ n]
y[ n ] = d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n + 1 ] - d[ n ] + 2 d[ n - 3 ] + d[ n - 4 ] + d[ n - 5 ]
( -1)
27. (D) y[ n] =
k=n -2
1
2n -
2
=
1
1+
2
Page
266
n -2
8
( -1) n
3
2n -k = 2n
k=n -2
y2 [ n] = nkv[ n]
1
-
2
(Homogeneous)
Let x1 [ n] = v[ n]
then
y1 [ n] = nv[ n]
Let x2 [ n] = w[ n]
then
y2 [ n] = nw[ n]
Let x3[ n] = v[ n] + w[ n] then

y3[ n] = n( v[ n] + w[ n]) = nv[ n] + nw[ n]
= y1 [ n] + y2 [ n]
(Additive)
Since the system is homogeneous and additive, it is also

linear.
y1 [ n - no ] = ( n - no) v[ n - no ] yn [ n] = nv[ n - no ]
www.gatehelp.com
(Time variant)
Chap 5.2
If the excitation is bounded, the response is bounded.
At any discrete time, n = no the response depends only

on the excitation at that same time.
(Causal)
(Stable).
If the excitation is a constant, the response is
37. (B) y1 [ n] = 10 v[ n] - 5,
unbounded as n approaches infinity.
y2 [ n] ky1 [ n]
n +1
34. (C) y1 [ n] =
v[ m ] ,
y2 [ n ] =
m = -
(Unstable)
n +1
kv[ m ]
n = -
y3[ n] =
y1 [ n - no ] = 10 v[ n - no ] - 5, = y2 [ n]
m = -
(Homogeneous)
v[ m ], y2 [ n] =
(Not Homogeneous so not linear)
y1 [ n] = 10 v[ n] - 5, y2 [ n] = 10 v[ n - no ] - 5
n +1
y2 [ n] = ky1 [ n]
y1 [ n] =
y2 [ n] = 10 kv[ n] - 5
n +1
w[ m ]
(Time Invariant)
At any discrete time, n = no the response depends only

on the excitation at that discrete time and not on any
future excitation.
n = -
(Causal)
n +1
( v[ n] + w[ m ])
(Stable).
m = -
n +1
n +1
m = -
m = -
v[ m ] + w[ n] = y [ n] + y [ n]
1
(Additive)
Since the system is homogeneous and additive it is also

linear
y1 [ n] =
n +1
v[ n] , y2 [ n] =
m = -
y1 [ n - no ] =
y[ n] = x[ n] + x[ n - 1] + y[ n - 2 ], Then by induction
y[ n] = x[ n - 1] + x[ n - 2 ] + K x[ n - k] + K = x[ n - k]
k=0
n +1
v[ m - no ]
n +1
m = -
q = -
v[ q - no ] = y2 [ n]
y1 [ n] =
v[ m ] ,
m =n
m = -
kv[ m ] = ky [ n]
y2 [ n ] =
m = -
x[ m ] = x[ m ]
Let m = n - k then y[ n] =
m = -
n -no +1
v[ m ] =
38. (B) y[ n] = x[ n] + y[ n - 1], y[ n - 1] = x[ n - 1] + y[ n - 2 ]
m = -
(Time Invariant)
At any discrete time, n = no , the response depends on
the excitation at the next discrete time in future.
(Anti causal)
(Homogeneous)
y3[ n] =
m = -
m = -
m = -
(v[ m ] + w[ m ]) = v[ m ] + w[ m ]
= y1 [ n] + y2 [ n]
(Additive)
If the excitation is a constant, the response increases
System is Linear.
without bound.
y1 [ n] =
(Unstable)
v[ m ]
m = -
35. (A) y1 [ n] = v[ n] , y2 = kv[ n] = k v[ n]

y1 [ n] = v[ n] , y2 [ n] = v[ n - no ]
(Time Invariant)
At any discrete time n = no , the response depends only

on the excitation at that time
m = -
y1 [ n] can be written as
ky1 [ n] = k v[ n] y2 [ n] (Not Homogeneous Not linear)
y1 [ n - no ] = v[ n - no ] = y2 [ n]
v[ n - n ]
, y2 =
(Causal)

(Stable).
36. (B) y[ n] = 2 x [ n]
y1 [ n - no ] =
n -no
m = -
q = -
v[ m ] = v[ q - n ] = y [ n]
o
(Time Invariant)
At any discrete time n = no the response depends only
on the excitation at that discrete time and previous
discrete time.
(Causal)
If the excitation is constant, the response increase

without bound.
(Unstable)
Let x1 [ n] = v[ n]
Let x2 [ n] = kv[ n] then

ky[ n] y2 [ n]
Let x1 [ n] = v[ n]
39. (C) Only statement (b) is false. For example
then y1 [ n] = 2 v 2 [ n]
S1 : y[ n] = x[ n] + b, and S2 : y[ n] = x[ n] - b , where b 0
y2 [ n] = 2 k2 v 2 [ n]
S{x[ n]} = S2 {S1 {x[ n]}} = S2 {x[ n] + b} = x[ n]
(Not homogeneous Not linear)

then
y1 [ n] = 2 v 2 [ n]
Hence S is linear.
Let x2 [ n] = v[ n - no ] then y2 [ n] = 2 v 2 [ n - no ]
40. (B) For example
y1 [ n - no ] = 2 v[ n - no ] = y2 [ n]
S1 : y[ n] = nx[ n]
(Time invariant)
At any discrete time, n = no , the response depends only

on the excitation at that time.
(Causal)
and S2 : y[ n] = nx[ n + 1]
If x[ n] = d[ n] then S2 {S1 {d[ n]}} = S2 [0 ] = 0,
www.gatehelp.com
Page
267
CHAPTER
5.3
THE LAPLACE TRANSFORM
6. x( t) = u( t) - u( t - 2)
Determine the Laplace transform of given signal.

1. x( t) = u( t - 2)
-2 s
(A)
-e
s
(B)
-2 s
e -2 s - 1
s
(B)
1 - e -2 s
s
(C)
2
s
(D)
-2
s
s
7. x( t) =
-2 s
e
(C)
1+ s
(A)
(D) 0
(A)
1
s( s + 1) 2
(B)
s
( s + 1) 2
(C)
e- s
s+1
(D)
e- s
( s + 1) 2
2. x( t) = u( t + 2)
(A)
1
s
(B) -
(C)
e -2 s
s
(D)
1
s
-e - 2 s
s
3. x( t) = e -2 t u( t + 1)
(A)
(C)
1
s+2
(B)
e- ( s + 2 )
s+2
(D)
e- s
s+2
-e - s
s+2
4. x( t) = e 2 t u( -t + 2)
(A)
2 (s - 2 )
-1
s -2
-2 ( s - 2 )
(C)
1-e
s -2
8. x( t) = tu( t) * cos 2pt u( t)

(A)
1
s( s 2 + 4 p2 )
(B)
2p
s 2 ( s 2 + 4 p2 )
(C)
1
s ( s + 4 p2 )
(D)
s3
s + 4 p2
-3
s4
e
s+2
-2 s
(D)
9. x( t) = t 3u( t)
(A)
3
s4
(B)
(C)
6
s4
(D) -
-2 s
(B)
d
{ te - t u( t)}
dt
e
s -2
6
s4
10. x( t) = u( t - 1) * e -2 t u( t - 1)
5. x( t) = sin 5 t
5
(A) 2
s +5
s
(B) 2
s +5
(A)
e -2 ( s + 1 )
2s + 1
(B)
e -2 ( s + 1 )
s+1
5
(C) 2
s + 25
s
(D) 2
s + 25
(C)
e- ( s + 2 )
s+2
(D)
e -2 ( s + 1 )
s+2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
269
UNIT 5
11. x( t) = e -3t cos 2 t dt
17. X ( s) =
s2 - 3
( s + 2)( s 2 + 2 s + 1)
(A)
-( s + 3)
s(( s + 3) 2 + 4)
(B)
( s + 3)
s(( s + 3) 2 + 4)
(A) ( e -2 t - 2 te - t ) u( t)
(B) ( e -2 t + 2 te - t ) u( t)
(C) ( e - t - 2 te -2 t ) u( t)
(D) ( e - t + 2 te -2 t ) u( t)
(C)
s( s + 3)
( s + 3) 2 + 4
(D)
-s( s + 3)
( s + 3) 2 + 4
18. X ( s) =
12. x( t) = t
( s + 2 s + 2)
( s 2 + 4 s + 2) 2
(C) ( 3e - t cos 3t - e - t sin 3t) u( t)
-( s + 2 s + 2)
( s 2 + 4 s + 2) 2
2
(D)
(D) ( 3e - t sin 3t + 3e- t cos 3t) u( t)

19. X ( s) =

Determine the time signal x( t) corresponding to
given X ( s) and choose correct option.
(B) (2 e - t - e -2 t ) u( t)
(C) (2 e -2 t - e - t ) u( t)
(D) (2 e - t + e -2 t ) u( t)
(A) 2 d( t) + ( e -3t - e-2 t ) u( t)
(A) (2 e -2 t + 2 e - t sin 2 t - 2 e - t cos 2 t) u( t)

(B) (2 e -2 t + 2 e - t cos 2 t - 2 e - t sin 2 t) u( t)
(D) (2 e -2 t + 2 e - t sin 2 t - e - t cos 2 t) u( t)
(A) (2 e -2 t + e - t ) u( t)
2 s 2 + 10 s + 11
s2 + 5 s + 6
20. X ( s) =
(C) 2 d( t) + ( e
+ e ) u( t)
(D) 2 d( t) - ( e
-2 t
+ e -3t ) u( t)
15. X ( s) =
-t
-3t
2s - 1
s2 + 2 s + 1
-t
(A) ( 3e - 2 te ) u( t)
(B) ( 3e- t + 2 te- t ) u( t)
(B) ( e -2 t + 2 e -3t cos t - 6 e -3t sin t) u( t)

(C) ( e -2 t + 2 e -3t cos t - 2 e -3t sin t) u( t)
(D) (9 e -2 t - 6 e -3t cos t + 3e -3t sin t) u( t)
21. X ( s) =
16. X ( s) =
5s + 4
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s
2 s 2 + 11s + 16 + e -2 s
( s2 + 5 s + 6)
(A) 2 d( t) + ( 3e -2 t - 2 e-3t ) u( t - 2)
(B) 2 d( t) + (2 e -2 t - e -3t + e -2 ( t - 2 ) + e -3( t - 2 ) ) u( t)
(C) 2 d( t) + (2 e -2 t - e -3t ) u( t) + ( e -2 t - e -3t ) u( t - 2)
(D) 2 d( t) + (2 e -2 t - e -3t ) u( t) + ( e -2 ( t - 2 ) - e -3( t - 2 ) ) u( t - 2)
22. X ( s) = s
(C) (2 e- t - 3te- t ) u( t)
(D) (2 e- t + 3te- t ) u( t)
3s 2 + 10 s + 10
( s + 2)( s 2 + 6 s + 10)
(A) ( e -2 t + 2 e -3t cos t + 2 e -3t sin t) u( t)
(B) 2 d( t) + ( e -2 t - e-3t ) u( t)
-2 t
4 s 2 + 8 s + 10
( s + 2)( s 2 + 2 s + 5)
(C) (2 e -2 t + 2 e - t cos 2 t - e - t sin 2 t) u( t)
s+3
13. X ( s) = 2
s + 3s + 2
14. X ( s) =
(B) 3e- t sin 3t - e- t cos 3t u( t)

3
( s 2 + 4 s + 2)
(B) 2
( s + 2 s + 2) 2
(C)
3s + 2
s + 2 s + 10
1
-t
(A) 3e cos 3t - e- t sin 3t u( t)

3
d -t
{ e cos t u( t)}
dt
-( s 2 + 4 s + 2)
(A) 2
( s + 2 s + 2) 2
d2
ds 2
1
1
2
+
9
3
s
+
s
+
2t
t2
(A) e -3t +
sin 3t + cos 3t u( t)
3
9
(B) ( e -3t + 2 t sin 3t + t 2 cos 3t) u( t)
(A) (2 + e - t + 3e -2 t ) u( t)
2t
(C) e -3t +
sin 3t + t 2 cos 3t u( t)
3
(B) (2 + e - t - 3e -2 t ) u( t)
(D) ( e -3t + t 2 sin 3t + 2 t cos 3t) u( t)
(C) ( 3 + e - t - 3e -2 t ) u( t)
(D) ( 3 + e - t + 3e -2 t ) u( t)
Page
270
Signal & System
www.gatehelp.com
The Laplace Transform
23. X ( s) =
(A) e
(C)
-0 .5t
Chap 5.3
1
(2 s + 1) 2 + 4
Given the transform pair
1
(B) e - t sin t u( t)
2
sin t u( t)
1 -0 .5t
e
sin t u( t)
4
x( t) u( t)
(D) e - t sin t u( t)
2s
.
s2 + 2
Determine the Laplace transform Y ( s) of the given

time signal in question and choose correct option.
24. X ( s) = e
-2 s
1
d
ds ( s + 1) 2
30. y( t) = x( t - 2)
(A) - te - t u(1 - t)
(B) -te - t u( t - 1)
(C) -( t - 2) 2 e - ( t - 2 ) u( t - 2)
(D) te - t u( t - 1)
(A)
2 se -2 s
s2 + 2
(B)
2 se 2 s
s2 + 2
(C)
2( s - 2)
( s - 2) 2 + 1
(D)
2( s + 2)
( s + 2) 2 + 1
Given the transform pair below. Determine the

31. y( t) = x( t) *
time signal y( t) and choose correct option.

cos 2t u( t)
X ( s).
dx( t)
dt
(A)
4 s3
( s 2 + 2) 2
(B)
4
( s 2 + 2) 2
-4 s 3
( s + 2) 2
(D)
4
( s 2 + 2) 2
25. Y ( s) = ( s + 1) X ( s)
(A) [cos 2 t - 2 sin 2 t ]u( t)
sin 2 t
(B) cos 2 t +
u( t)
2
(C)
(C) [cos 2 t + 2 sin 2 t ]u( t)
sin 2 t
(D) cos 2 t u( t)
2
32. y( t) = e - t x( t)
(A)
2( s + 1)
( s + 1) 2 + 2
(B)
2( s + 1)
s2 + 2 s + 2
(C)
2( s + 1)
s2 + 2 s + 4
(D)
2( s + 1)
s2 + 2 s
26. Y ( s) = X ( 3s)
2
(A) cos t u( t)
3
1
2
(B) cos t u( t)
3
3
(C) cos 6t u( t)
(D)
1
cos 6 t u( t)
3
33. y( t) = 2 tx( t)
(A)
8 - 4 s2
( s 2 + 2) 2
(B)
4 s2 - 8
( s 2 + 2) 2
(C)
4 s2
s2 + 1
(D)
s2
s +1
27. Y ( s) = X ( s + 2)
(A) cos 2( t - 2) u( t)
(B) e2 t cos 2 t u( t)
(C) cos 2( t + 2) u( t)
(D) e-2 t cos 2 t u( t)

X ( s)
28. Y ( s) = 2
s
(A) 4 cos 2 t u( t)
2
(C) t cos 2 t u( t)
29. Y ( s) =
Determine the bilateral laplace transform and

(B)
1 - cos 2 t
u( t)
4
cos 2 t
(D)
u( t)
t2
d -3s
[ e X ( s)]
ds
(A) t cos 2( t - 3) u( t - 3)
(B) t cos 2( t - 3) u( t)
(C) -t cos 2( t - 3) u( t - 3)
(D) -t cos 2( t - 3) u( t)
choose correct option.

34. x( t) = e - t u( t + 2)
(A)
e2 ( s + 1 )
,
s+1
Re ( s) > -1
(B)
1
,
1+ s
Re ( s) < - 1
(C)
e2 ( s + 1 )
,
s+1
Re ( s) < - 1
(D)
1
,
1+ s
Re ( s) > -1
www.gatehelp.com
Page
271
UNIT 5
35. x( t) = u( -t + 3)
1 - e -3s
,
(A)
s
(B)
1-e
(C)
s
(D)
-3s
Re ( s) > 3
(B)
e 3s
,
s-3
Re ( s) < 3
(C)
e 3( s -1 )
,
s-3
Re ( s) > 3
(D)
e 3( s -1 )
,
s-3
Re ( s) < 3
Re ( s) < 0
-e -3s
,
s
Re ( s) > 0
(A) e , Re( s) > 0

s
(B) e , Re ( s) < 0
(D) None of above
(C) e , all s
37. x( t) = sin t u( t)
1
,
(A)
(1 + s 2 )
Re ( s) > 0
-1
(C)
,
(1 + s 2 )
Re ( s) < 0
-1
,
(1 + s 2 )
Re ( s) > 0
t
2
41. x( t) = cos 3t u( -t) * e - t u( t)

-s
,
(A)
( s + 1)( s2 + 9)
-s
,
( s + 1)( s2 + 9)
-1 < Re ( s) < 0
(C)
s
,
( s + 1)( s 2 + 9)
-1 < Re ( s) < 0
(D)
s
,
( s + 1)( s 2 + 9)
Re ( s) > 0
42. x( t) = e t sin (2 t + 4) u( t + 2)
-t
38. x( t) = e u( t) + e u( t) + e u( -t)
t
(A)
6 s2 + 2 s - 2
,
(2 s + 1)( s 2 - 1)
Re ( s) < - 0.5
(B)
6 s2 + 2 s - 2
,
(2 s + 1)( s 2 - 1)
-1 > Re ( s) > 1
(C)
1
1
1
,
+
+
s + 0.5 s + 1 s - 1
-1 < Re ( s) < 1
(D)
1
1
1
,
+
s + 0.5 s + 1 s - 1
-0.5 < Re ( s) < 1
(A)
e 2 ( s -1 )
,
( s - 1) 2 + 4
Re ( s) > 1
(B)
e 2 ( s -1 )
,
( s - 1) 2 + 4
Re ( s) < 1
(C)
e( s - 2 )
,
( s - 1) 2 + 4
Re ( s) > 1
(D)
e( s - 2 )
,
( s - 1) 2 + 4
43. x( t) = e t
(A)
1-s
,
s+1
Re ( s) > -1
(C)
s -1
,
s+1
Re ( s) < - 1
s -1
,
s+1
Re ( s) > -1
(1 - s)
1
1
, 0.5 < Re ( s) < 1
+
+
2
( s - 1) + 4 s + 1 s - 0.5
(D)
(B)
(1 - s)
1
1
, -1 < Re ( s) < 1
+
+
( s - 1) 2 + 4 s + 1 s - 0.5
(C)
( s - 1)
1
1
, 0.5 < Re ( s) < 1
+
+
( s - 1) 2 + 4 s + 1 s - 0.5
bilateral Laplace transform.
40. x( t) = e ( 3t + 6 ) u( t + 3)
Page
272
Re ( s) < - 1
(A)
( s - 1)
1
1
, -1 < Re ( s) < 1
+
+
( s - 1) 2 + 4 s + 1 s - 0.5
Re ( s) < 1
d -2 t
[ e u( -t)]
dt
1-s
,
s+1
(B)
39. x( t) = e t cos 2 t u( -t) + e - t u( t) + e 2 u( t)
(D)
Re ( s) > 0
(B)
Re ( s) < 0
1
,
(1 + s 2 )
(D)
e 3s
,
s-3
Re ( s) < 0
36. y( t) = d( t + 1)
(B)
(A)
Re ( s) > 0
-e -3s
,
s
Signal & System
Determine the corresponding time signal for given
44. X ( s) =
e 5s
with ROC: Re ( s) < -2
s+2
(A) e -2 ( t + 5) u( t + 5)
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 5
(A)
1 -t
e sin t u( t)
2
(D)
58.
62. A stable system has input
(B) 2e- t cos t u( t)
(C) 2 e - t cos t u( t) +
is
(A) d( t) - ( e -2 t cos t + e -2 t sin t) u( t)
1 -t
e cos t u( t - 1) + 2 e - t sin t u( t - 1)
2
(B) d( t) - ( e -2 t cos t + e -2 t sin t) u( t - 2)

(C) d( t) - ( e 2 t cos t + e 2 t sin t) u( t)
d 3 y( t)
d 2 y( t)
dy( t)
+
4
+3
= x( t)
3
2
dt
dt
dt
(D) d( t) - ( e 2 t cos t + e 2 t sin t) u( t + 2)
All initial condition are zero, x( t) = 10 e -2 t
63. The relation ship between the input x( t) and output

y( t) of a causal system is described by the differential
5
5
(A) + 5 e - t - 5 e -2 t + e -3t u( t)
3
3
equation
5
5
(B) - 5 e - t + 5 e -2 t + e -3t u( t)
3
3
5
5
u( t) - 5 u( t - 1) + 5 u( t - 2) + u( t - 3)
3
3
(D)
5
5
u( t) + 5 u( t - 1) - 5 u( t - 2) + u( t - 3)
3
3
dy( t)
+ 10 y( t) = 10 x( t)
dt
The impulse response of the system is
59. The transform function H ( s) of a causal system is
(A) -10 e -10 t u( -t + 10)
(B) 10 e -10 t u( t)
(C) 10 e -10 t u( -t + 10)
(D) -10 e -10 t u( t)
64. The relationship between the input x( t) and output

y( t) of a causal system is defined as
2 s2 + 2 s - 2
H ( s) =
s2 - 1
d 2 y( t) dy( t)
dx( t)
.
- 2 y( t) = -4 x( t) + 5
2
dt
dt
dt
The impulse response is
The impulse response of system is
(A) 2d( t) - ( e- t + et ) u( -t)

-t
(A) 3e - t u( t) + 2 e 2 t u( -t)
(B) 2d( t) - ( e + e ) u( t)
t
-t
(B) ( 3e - t + 2 e 2 t ) u( t)
(C) 2d( t) + e u( t) - e u( -t)

t
(C) 3e - t u( t) - 2 e 2 t u( -t)
(D) 2d( t) + ( e- t + et ) u( t)
(D) ( 3e - t - 2 e 2 t ) u( -t)
60. The transfer function H ( s) of a stable system is

2s - 1
H ( s) = 2
s + 2s + 1
(A) 2 u( -t + 1) - 3tu( -t + 1)
(B) ( 3te- t - 2 e- t ) u( t)
(C) 2 u( t + 1) - 3tu( t + 1)
(D) (2 e- t - 3te- t ) u( t)
61. The transfer function H ( s) of a stable system is
H ( s) =
s2 + 5 s - 9
( s + 1)( s 2 - 2 s + 10)

(A) -e - t u( t) + ( e t sin 3t + 2 e t cos 3t) u( t)
(B) -e - t u( t) - ( e t sin 3t + 2 e t cos 3t) u( -t)
(C) -e - t u( t) - ( e t sin 3t + 2 e t cos 3t) u( t)
(D) -e - t u( t) + ( e t sin 3t + 2 e t cos 3t) u( -t)
Page
274
x( t) and output
y( t) = e -2 t cos t u( t). The impulse response of the system
1 -t
e sin t u( t)
2
(C)
Signal & System
www.gatehelp.com
*******
SOLUTIONS
1. (B) X ( s) = x( t) e - st dt = e - st dt =
Chap 5.3
r ( t) = e -2 t u( t)
v( t) = e -2 t u( t - 1)
e -2 s
s
x( t) = q( t) * v( t)
2. (A) X ( s) = x( t) e -3t dt = u( t + 2) -3t dt = e -3t dt =
1
s
3. (A) X ( s) = e -2 t e - st dt =
0
1
s+2
- 1 1 - e -2 ( 2 - s )
=
2-s
s -2
p( t) dt
1
P ( s)
p( t) dt +
s -
s
X ( s) =
5
( e j 5t - e - j 5t ) - st
e dt = 2
2
25
j
s
+
0
q( t) =
d
p( t)
dt
x( t) = tq( t)
6. (B) X ( s) = e - st dt =
1 - e -2 s
s
7. (B) p( t) = te - t u( t)
d
p( t)
dt
P ( s) =
1
( s + 1) 2
s
( s + 1) 2
X ( s) =
8. (A) p( t) = tu( t)
P ( s) =
1
s2
q( t) = cos 2 pt u( t)
Q( s) =
s
s + 4 p2
x( t) = p( t) * q( t)
X ( s) =
q( t) = - tp( t)
t n u( t)
X ( s) = P ( s)Q( s)
P ( s) =
Q( s) =
X ( s) =
1
s2
d
-2
P ( s) = 3
ds
s
d
6
Q( s) = 4
ds
s
n!
sn + 1
10. (D) p( t) = u( t)
q( t) = u( t - 1)
Q( s) =
X ( s) = -
P ( s) =
s+1
( s + 1) 2 + 1
s( s + 1)
( s + 1) 2 + 1
d
Q( s)
ds
-( s 2 + 4 s + 2)
( s 2 + 2 s + 2) 2
13. (B) X ( s) =
A=
s+3
A
B
=
+
( s + 3s + 2) s + 1 s + 2
2
s+3
s+3
= 2, B =
= -1
s + 2 s = -1
s + 1 s = -2
x( t) = [2 e - t - e -2 t ]u( t)
14. (A) X ( s) = 2 -
1
1
1
=2 +
( s + 2) ( s + 3)
( s + 2) ( s + 3)
x( t) = 2 d( t) + ( e-3t - e-3t ) u( t)
2s - 1
A
B
=
+
s 2 + 2 s + 1 ( s + 1) ( s + 1) 2
B = (2 s - 2) s = -1 = -3, A = 2
x( t) = x( t) = [2 e - t - 3te - t ]u( t)
16. (B) X ( s) =
5s + 4
A
B
C
=
+
+
2
s + 3s + 2 s s s + 1 s + 2
3
A = sX ( s) s = 0 = 2, B = ( s + 1) X ( s) s = -1 = 1,
C = ( s + 2) X ( s) s = -2 = -3
x( t) = [2 + e - t - 3e -2 t ]u( t)
15. (C) X ( s) =
9. (C) p( t) = tu( t)
X ( s) =
1
s( s + 4 p2 )
x( t) = - tq( t)
( s + 3)
s[( s + 3) 2 + 4 ]
12. (A) p( t) = e - t cos t u( t)
s+3
( s + 3) 2 + 4
5. (C) X ( s) =
X ( s) = Q( s) V ( s)
2 (2 - s )
x( t) =
e- ( s + 2 )
s2
e
X ( s) =
s+2
4. (C) X ( s) = x( t) e - st dt = e 2 t u( -t + 2) e - st dt
e
V ( s) =
-2 ( s + 1 )
= e t ( 2 - s ) dt =
1
s+2
L
11. (B) p( t) = e -3t cos 2 t u( t)
P ( s) =
R( s) =
P ( s) =
Q( s) =
e- s
s2
1
s
17. (C) X ( s) =
=
s2 - 3
( s + 2)( s 2 + 2 s + 1)
A
B
C
+
+
( s + 2) ( s + 1) ( s + 1) 2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
275
UNIT 5
A = ( s + 2) X ( s) s = -2 = 1, C = ( s + 1) 2 X ( s)
A + B =1
x( t) = [ e
-2 t
B =0
s
L
23. (C) P
ap( at)
a
1
1 -t
L
e sin 2 t u( t)
( s + 1) 2 + 4
2
= -2
s = -1
-t
- te ]u( t)
3s + 2
3( s + 1)
1
=
2
2
( s + 1) 2 + 32
s + 2 s + 10 ( s + 1) + 3
18. (A) X ( s) =
x( t) = 3e - t cos 3t - e - t sin 3t u( t)
3
Q( s) =
A = ( s + 2) X ( s) s = -2 = 2
C = -2
x( t) = [2 e -2 t + 2 e - t cos 2 t - e - t sin 2 t ]u( t)
A = ( s + 2) X ( s) s = -2 = 1, A + B = 3
x( t) = [ e
-2 t
+ 2e
-3t
21. (D) X ( s) =
-3t
sin t ]u( t)
( s + 2)(2 s 2 + 11s + 16)

=2
( s2 + 5 s + 6)
s = -2
B=
( s + 3)(2 s + 11s + 16)

= -1
( s2 + 5 s + 6)
s = -3
R( s) = sQ( s)
e-2 t x( t)
X ( s)
s
p( t) =
x( t) dt
-
t
cos 2 t u( t) dt =
P ( s)
s
1
sin 3t u( t)
3
sin 2 t
1 - cos 2 t
dt =
u( t),
2
4
0
31. (A) p( t) =
q( t) = - p( t)
32. (A) e - t x ( t)
www.gatehelp.com
d
x( t)
dt
y( t) = x( t) * p( t)
2 t
x( t) = v( t) + r ( t) = sin 3t u( t) + t 2 cos 3t u( t) + e -3t u( t)

3
p( t) = x( t - 3)
= -t cos 2( t - 3) u( t - 3).
t2
sin 3t u( t)
3
2t
sin 3t u( t) + t 2 cos 3t u( t)
3
1
L
V ( s) =
v( t) = e -3t u( t)
s+3
= cos 2( t - 3) u( t - 3)
d
L
Q( s) =
P ( s)
ds
30. (A) x( t - 2)
d
q( t) - q(0 - )
dt
sin 2 t
2
29. (C) P ( s) = e -3s X ( s)
q( t) = ( -1) 2 t 2 p( t) =
r ( t) =
Page
276
x( t) = 2 d( t) + [2 e -2 t - e-3t ]u( t) + [ e -2 ( t - 2 ) - e -3( t - 2 ) ]u( t - 2)
ax( at)
1
2
cos t u( t)
3
3
28. (B) P ( s) =
d2
P ( s)
ds 2
2 s 2 + 11s + 16 + e -2 s
( s2 + 5 s + 6)
A=
Q( s) =
dx( t)
+ x( t)
dt
C = -6
cos t - 6 e
1
s2 + 9
x( t) = q( t - 2)
y( t) = ( -2 sin 2 t + cos 2 t ) u( t)
27. (D) X ( s + 2)
B =2
A
B
e -2 s
e -2 s
=2 +
+
+
( s + 2) ( s + 3) ( s + 2) ( s + 3)
22. (C) P ( s) =
x( t) = - ( t - 2) e ( t - 2 ) u( t - 2)
X ( 3s)
A
B( s + 3)
C
=
+
+
( s + 2) ( s + 3) 2 + 1 ( s + 3) 2 + 1
q( t) = -tp( t) = -t 2 e - t u( t)
s
26. (B) X
a
3s 2 + 10 s + 10
20. (B) X ( s) =
( s + 2)( s 2 + 6 s + 10)
10 A + 6 B + 2 C = 10
d
P ( s)
ds
p( t) = te - t u( t)
25. (A) sX ( s) + X ( s)
B =2
5 A + 2 B + 2 C = 10
1
( s + 1) 2
X ( s) = e -2 sQ( s)
A
B( s + 1)
C
=
+
+
2
2
( s + 2) ( s + 1) + 2
( s + 1) 2 + 2 2
A + B=4
1 -0 .5t
e
sin t u( t)
4
x( t)
24. (C) P ( s) =
4 s 2 + 8 s + 10
( s + 2)( s 2 + 2 s + 5)
19. (C) X ( s) =
Signal & System
e -2 s X ( s), Y ( s) =
2 se -2 s
s2 + 2
P ( s) = sX ( s)
Y ( s) = P ( s) X ( s) = s( X ( s)) 2
X ( s + 1) =
2( s + 1)
( s + 1) 2 + 2
33. (B) 2 tx( t)
x( t) e
34. (A) X ( s) =
-2
- st
d
4 s2 - 8
X ( s) = 2
ds
( s + 2) 2
Chap 5.3
42. (A) x( t) = e -2 e t + 2 sin (2 t + 4) u( t + 2)

p( t + 2)
X ( s) =
dt
e 2 s P ( s),
e 2 s e -2
,
( s - 1) 2 + 4
Re ( s) > 1
-2
-2
= e - t e - st dt = e - t ( s + 1 ) dt =
e2 ( s + 1 )
, Re( s) > - 1
s+1
-3s
-e
35. (B) X ( s) = u( -t + 3) e - st dt = e - st dt =
s
-
-
36. (C) Y ( s) =
d( t + 1) e
- st
dt = e s ,
43. (A) p( t) = e -2 t u ( -t)

q( t) =
Re ( s) < 0
( e - e ) - st
e dt
2j
0
37. (B) X ( s) =
X ( s) = e 5s P ( s)
1
1
1
,
e t ( j - s ) dt e - t ( j + s ) dt =
=
2 j 0
2 j 0
1 + s2
t
2
38. (D) X ( s) = e e - st + e - t e - st dt +
0
Re ( s) > 0
ee
t - st
dt
X ( s) = -
0.5 < Re ( s) < 1
q( t) = p( t + 3)
X ( s) =
e 3( s -1 )
,
s-3
Re ( s) > 3
41. (B) p( t) * q( t)
d2
P ( s)
ds 2
1
R( s)
s
u( -( t + 5))
p( t) = e 3t u( t)
x( t) = t 2 e 3t u( t)
Re ( s) > -1, Re ( s) < 0

-1 < Re ( s) < 0
P ( s)Q( s)
p( t) = u( t)
r ( t) = -tq( t) = -tu( t - 3)
v( t) =
r( t) dt
e 3s
s-3
q( t) = p( t - 3) = u( t - 3)
v( t) = - tdt = -
X ( s) =
1
s
1
v( s)
s
1 2
( t - 9)
2
x( t) = -
1
2
( t - 9)
2 -
9
-1
x( t) = ( t 3 - 27) + ( t - 3) u( t - 3)
6
2
48. (B) X ( s) =
-s 1
X ( s) = 2
s + 9 s + 1
x( t) = p( t + 5)
47. (C) Right-sided, P ( s) =
1
P ( s) =
s-3
Q( s) = e 3s P ( s) =
V ( s) =
40. (C) x( t) = e -3e -3( t + 3) u( t + 3)

p( t) = e u( t)
-2 ( t + 5)
Q( s) = e-3s P ( s)
d
R( s) =
Q( s)
ds
s -1
1
1
+
+
( s - 1) 2 + 4 ( s + 1) s - 0.5
3t
t
2
( e - e ) - st
e dt + e - t e- st dt + e e - st dt
2j
0
0
Re ( s) < 1, Re ( s) > -1, Re ( s) > 0.5

Therefore
p( t) = -e -2 t u( -t)
x( t) = -u( -t) + u ( -t + 1) + d( t + 2)
- jt
jt
1-s
1+ s
46. (D) Left-sided
-0.5 < Re ( s) < 1
39. (A) X ( s) =
x( t) = - e
X ( s) =
Re ( s) > -0.5, Re ( s) > -1, Re ( s) < 1
X ( s) = Q( s - 1) =
45. (A) Right-sided

1
L
P ( s) =
( s - 3)
1
1
1
+
s + 0.5 s + 1 s - 1
-1
, Re ( s) < - 2
s+2
Q( s) = sP ( s)
44. (C) Left-sided

1
L
P ( s) =
s+2
- jt
jt
x( t) = e t q( t)
P ( s) =
Re ( s) < - 1 thus left-sided .
All s
d
p( t)
dt
-s - 4
-3
2
=
+
s 2 + 3s + 2 ( s + 1) s + 2
Left-sided, x( t) = 3e - t u( -t) - 2 e -2 t u( -t)

49. (A) X ( s) =
Left-sided,
www.gatehelp.com
5
1
( s + 1) ( s + 1) 2
x( t) = -5 u( -t) + te - t u( -t)
Page
277
UNIT 5
50. (D) x(0 + ) = lim sX ( s) =

x
h( t) = (2 e - t - 3te - t ) u( t).
s
=0
s + 5s - 2
2
61. (A) H ( s) =
s2 + 2 s
51. (A) x(0 + ) = lim sX ( s) = 2
=1
s
s + 2s - 3
52. (D) x(0 + ) = lim sX ( s) =
s
53. (A) x( ) = lim sX ( s) =

s 0
-2 s
h( t) = - e - t u( t) + (2 e t cos 3t + et sin 3t) u( -t)
(6s + s )
=0
s2 + 2 s - 2
3
s 0
62. (A) X ( s) =
2 s3 + 3s
=0
s2 + 5 s + 1
H ( s) =
=1 -
1
,
s+1
Y ( s) =
( s + 2)
( s + 2) 2 + 1
Y ( s) ( s + 1)( s + 2)
=
X ( s) ( s + 2) 2 + 1
( s + 2)
1
( s + 2) 2 + 1 ( s + 2) 2 + 1
h( t) = d( t) - ( e-2 t cos t + e-2 t sin t) u( t)
e -3s (2 s2 + 1) 1
=
s2 + 5 s + 4 4
63. (B) sY ( s) + 10 Y ( s) = 10 X ( s)
H ( s) =
56. (C) sY ( s) - y(0 ) + 10 Y ( s) = 10( s)
1
y(0 ) = 1, X ( s) =
s
10
1
1
Y ( s) =
+
=
s( s + 1) ( s + 1) s
-
-1
2( s - 1)
3
+
+
( s + 1) ( s - 1) 2 + 32 ( s - 1) 2 + 32
System is stable
s+2
54. (C) x( ) = lim sX ( s) = 2
=2
s 0
s + 3s + 1
55. (B) x( ) = lim sX ( s) =
Signal & System
Y ( s)
10
=
X ( s) s + 10
h( t) = 10 e-10 t u( t)
64. (B) Y ( s)( s 2 - s - 2) = X ( s)(5 s - 4)

H ( s) =
y( t) = u( t)
Y ( s)
5s - 4
3
2
=
=
+
X ( s) s 2 - s - 2 s + 1 s - 2
h( t) = 3e - t u( t) + 2 e 2 t u( t).
57. (C) s Y ( s) - 2 s + 2 sY ( s) - 2 + 5 Y ( s) = 1
2
( s 2 + 2 s + 5) Y ( s) = 3 + 2 s
2s + 3
2( s + 1)
1
Y ( s) = 2
=
+
s + 2 s + 5 ( s + 1) 2 + 2 2 ( s + 1) 2 + 2 2
y( t) = 2 e - t cos t u( t) +
1 -t
e sin t u( t)
2
58. (B) s 3Y ( s) + 4 s 2 Y ( s) + 3sY ( s) =

Y ( s) =
***********
10
( s + 2)
10
A
B
C
D
=
+
+
+
s( s + 1)( s + 2)( s + 3) s ( s + 1) ( s + 2) s + 3
5
A = sY ( s) s = 0 = , B = ( s + 1) Y ( s) s = -1 = -5,
3
C = ( s + 2) Y ( s) s = -2 = 5, D = ( s + 3) Y ( s) s = 0 =
5
5
y( t) = - 5 e - t + 5 e -2 t + e -3t u( t)
3
3
59. (D) For a causal system

H ( s) = 2 +
h( t) = 0
for t < 0
1
1
+
s + 1 s -1
h( t) = 2d( t) + ( e- t + e t ) u( t)
60. (D) H ( s) =
Page
278
5
3
2
3
, System is stable
s + 1 ( s + 1) 2
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
5.4
THE Z-TRANSFORM
Statement forQ.1-12:
Determine the z-transform and choose correct
option.
1. x[ n] = d[ n - k] , k > 0
k
(A) z ,
k
(C) z ,
z >0
z 0
(C)
(B) z
-k
z >0
(D) z
-k
z 0
(A) z - k , z 0
(B) z k , z 0
(C) z - k , all z
(D) z k , all z
(C)
z
, |z|< 1
1 - z -1
(B)
(D)
1
, |z|< 1
1 - z -1
z
, |z|> 1
1 - z -1
(A)
z - 0.25
, z > 0.25
z 4 ( z - 0.25)
(B)
z - 0.25
, z >0
z 4 ( z - 0.25)
(C)
z 5 - 0.25 5
, z < 0.25
z 3( z - 0.25)
(D)
z 5 - 0.25 5
, all z
z 4 ( z - 0.25)
(B)
-5 z
2
3
,
<|z|<
(2 z - 3)( 3z - 2)
3
2
(C)
5z
2
2
,
<|z |<
(2 z - 3) ( 3z - 2)
3
3
(D)
5z
3
2
, - <z <(2 z - 3)( 3z - 2)
2
3
(A)
4z
1
, |z|>
4z - 1
4
(B)
4z
1
, |z|<
4z - 1
4
(C)
1
1
, |z|>
1 - 4z
4
(D)
1
1
, |z|<
1 - 4z
4
1
1
8. x[ n] = u[ n] + u[ -n - 1]
2
4
(A)
(B)
1
5. x[ n] = u[ -n]
4
3
, |z|< 3
3-z
-5 z
3
2
, - <z <(2 z - 3)( 3z - 2)
2
3
(D)
(A)
z
, |z|< 3
3-z
|n|
1
4. x[ n] = ( u[ n] - u[ n - 5 ])
4
5
3
, |z|> 3
3-z
(B)
2
7. x[ n] =
3
2. x[ n] = d[ n + k] , k > 0
3. x[ n] = u[ n]
1
(A)
, |z|> 1
1 - z -1
6. x[ n] = 3n u[ -n - 1]
z
(A)
, |z|> 3
3-z
(C)
1
1
,
1 -1
1 -1
1- z
1- z
2
4
1
1
<|z|<
4
2
1
1
+
,
1 -1
1 -1
1- z
1- z
4
2
1
1
<|z|<
4
2
1
1
1
, |z|>
1 -1
1 -1
2
1- z
1- z
2
4

www.gatehelp.com
Page
279
UNIT 5
33. X ( z) =
Signal & System
37. Consider three different signal
1
1
, |z|<
-2
1 - 4z
4
1
x1 [ n] = 2 n - u[ n]
2
(A) - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) d[ -n - 2( k + 1)]
k=0
(B) - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) d[ -n + 2( k + 1)]
x2 [ n] = -2 n u[ -n - 1] +
1
u[ -n - 1]
2n
x3[ n] = - 2 n u[ -n - 1] -
1
u[ n]
2n
k=0
(C) - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) d[ n + 2( k + 1)]
k=0
(D) - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) d[ n - 2( k + 1)]
Fig. P.5.4.37 shows the three different region.
k=0
Choose the correct option for the ROC of signal
34. X ( z) = ln (1 + z -1 ) , |z|> 0
( -1)
(A)
k
k -1
Im
( -1)
(B)
k
d[ n - 1]
( -1) k
(C)
d[ n - 1]
k
k -1
R1
z - plane
d[ n + 1]
R2
R3 2
( -1) k
(D)
d[ n + 1]
k
Re
1
2
35. If z-transform is given by

X ( z) = cos ( z -3), |z|> 0,
Fig. P5.4.37
R1
R2
R3
(A)
x1 [ n]
x2 [ n ]
x3[ n]
(B)
x2 [ n ]
x3[ n]
x1 [ n]
(C)
x1 [ n]
x3[ n]
x2 [ n ]
(D)
x3[ n]
x2 [ n ]
x1 [ n]
The value of x[12 ] is

(A) -
1
24
(B)
(C) -
1
6
(D)
1
24
1
6
36. X ( z) of a system is specified by a pole zero pattern

in fig. P.5.4.36.
38. Given
7 -1
z
6
X ( z) =
1 -1
1 -1
1 - z 1 + z
2
3
Im
1+
z - plane
1
3
Re
2
For three different ROC consider there different

Fig. P.5.4.36
solution of signal x[ n] :
Consider three different solution of x[ n]
(a) |z|>
1
x1 [ n] = 2 n - u[ n]
3
n
1
1
-1
, x[ n] = n -1 -
u[ n]
2
3
2
(b) |z|<
-1 -1
1
, x[ n] = n -1 +
3
3
2
1
u[ n]
3n
1
x3[ n] = - 2 n u[ n - 1] + n u[ -n - 1]
3
Correct solution is
x2 [ n] = - 2 n u[ n - 1] -
Page
282
u[ -n + 1]
(c)
1
1
1
-1
<|z |< , x[ n] = - n -1 u[ -n - 1] -
u[ n]
3
2
2
3
Correct solutions are
(A) x1 [ n]
(B) x2 [ n]
(A) (a) and (b)
(B) (a) and (c)
(C) x3[ n]
(D) All three
(C) (b) and (c)
(D) (a), (b), (c)
www.gatehelp.com
The z-Transform
39. X ( z) has poles at z = 1 2 and z = -1. If
x [1] = 1
Chap 5.4
44. The transfer function of a causal system is given as
x [ -1] = 1, and the ROC includes the point z = 3 4. The
H ( z) =
time signal x[ n] is
(A)
1
u[ n] - ( -1) n u[ -n - 1]
2 n -1

(A) ( 3n + ( -1) n 2 n + 1 ) u[ n]
1
(B) n u[ n] - ( -1) n u[ -n - 1]
2
(C)
(D)
1
2 n -1
(B) ( 3n + 1 + 2 ( -2) n ) u[ n]
(C) ( 3n -1 + ( -1) n 2 n + 1 ) u[ n]
u[ n] + u[ -n + 1]
(D) ( 3n -1 - ( -2) n + 1 ) u[ n]
1
u[ n] + u[ -n + 1]
2n
45. A causal system has input
40. x[ n] is right-sided, X ( z) has a signal pole, and

x[0 ] = 2, x[2 ] = 1 2. x[ n] is
u[ -n]
(A) n -1
2
(C)
u[ n]
(B) n -1
2
u[ -n]
2n +1
as
3 -1
z
2
(1 - 2 z -1 ) (1 +
1
1
d[ n - 1] - d[ n - 2 ] and output
4
8
y[ n] = d[ n] -
3
d[ n - 1] .
4
(A)
n
n
1 -1
1
5
2
u[ n]

3 2
4
(B)
1 1
-1
5 + 2
3 2
4
(C)
1
3
(D)
1 1
1
5 + 2
3 2
4
41. The z-transform function of a stable system is given
2-
x[ n] = d[ n] +
The impulse response of this system is
u[ -n]
2n +1
(D)
H ( z) =
1 -1
z )
2
1
(A) 2 n u[ -n + 1] - u[ n]
2
u[ n]
u[ n]
46. A causal system has input x[ n] = ( -3) n u[ n] and
-1
(B) 2 n u[ -n - 1] +
u[ n]
2
output
n
1
y[ n] = 4(2) n - u[ n].
2
-1
(C) -2 n u[ -n - 1] +
u[ n]
2
The impulse response of this system is
1
(D) 2 n u[ n] - u[ n]
2
Let
n
1 n
-1
5
2
u[ n]
4
2
n
The impuse response h[ n] is
42.
5z2
z2 - z - 6
x[ n] = d[ n - 2 ] + d[ n + 2 ].
The
unilateral
z-transform is
(A) z -2
(B) z 2
(C) -2 z -2
(D) 2 z 2
n
1 n
1
(A) 7 - 10 u[ n]
2
2
1
(B) 7(2 n ) - 10 u[ n]
2
1 2
(C) 10 - 7(2) n u[ n]
2
1
(D) 10 (2 n ) - 7 u[ n]
2
47. A system has impulse response

h[ n] =
43. The unilateral z-transform of signal x[ n] = u[ n + 4 ]

is
(A) 1 + z + z 2 + 3z + z 4
(B)
1
1-z
(C) 1 + z -1 + z -2 + z -3 + z -4
(D)
1
1 - z -1
1
u[ n]
2n
The output y[ n] to the input x[ n] is given by

y[ n] = 2 d[ n - 4 ]. The input x[ n] is
(A) 2 d[ -n - 4 ] - d[ -n - 5 ]
(B) 2 d[ n + 4 ] - d[ n + 5 ]
(C) 2 d[ -n + 4 ] - d[ -n + 5 ]
(D) 2 d[ n - 4 ] - d[ n - 5 ]
www.gatehelp.com
Page
283
UNIT 5
48. A system is described by the difference equation

y[ n] -
1
2
n -2
53. The z-transform of a signal x[ n] is given by
1
y[ n - 1] = 2 x[ n - 1]
2
X ( z) =
The impulse response of the system is

-1
1
(B) n - 2 u[ n + 1]
(A) n - 2 u[ n - 1]
2
2
(C)
Signal & System
u[ n - 2 ]
(D)
If X ( z) converges on the unit circle, x[ n] is

1
(A) -
-1
u[ n - 2 ]
2n -2
(B)
49. A system is described by the difference equation
(C)
y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - 2 ] + x[ n - 4 ] - x[ n - 6 ]
3n -1 8
1
3n -1 8
1
3n -1 8
The impulse response of system is

(D) -
(A) d[ n] - 2 d[ n + 2 ] + 4 d[ n + 4 ] - 6 d[ n + 6 ]
(B) d[ n] + 2 d[ n - 2 ] - 4 d[ n - 4 ] + 6 d[ n - 6 ]
u[ n] -
3n + 3
u[ -n - 1]
8
u[ n] -
3n + 3
u[ -n]
8
1
n -1
3n + 3
u[ -n - 1]
8
u[ n] -
u[ n] -
3n + 3
u[ -n]
8
54. The transfer function of a system is given as
(C) d[ n] - d[ n - 2 ] + d[ n - 4 ] - d[ n - 6 ]
(D) d[ n] - d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n + 4 ] - d[ n + 6 ]
H ( z) =
50. The impulse response of a system is given by

h[ n] =
3
u[ n - 1].
4n
4 z -1
1 -1
1 - z
4
, |z|>
1
4
The h[ n] is
The difference equation representation for this

system is
(A) 4 y[ n] - y[ n - 1] = 3 x[ n - 1]
(A) Stable
(B) Causal
(C) Stable and Causal
55. The transfer function of a system is given as
(B) 4 y[ n] - y[ n + 1] = 3 x[ n + 1]
2 z +
2
.
H ( z) =
1
1
z - z -
2
3
(C) 4 y[ n] + y[ n - 1] = - 3 x[ n - 1]
(D) 4 y[ n] + y[ n + 1] = 3 x[ n + 1]
Consider the two statements
Statement(i) : System is causal and stable.
h[ n] = d[ n] - d[ n - 5 ]
The difference equation representation for this
Statement(ii) : Inverse system is causal and stable.
system is
The correct option is
(A) y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - 5 ]
(B) y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n + 5 ]
(A) (i) is true
(C) y[ n] = x[ n] + 5 x[ n - 5 ]
(D) y[ n] = x[ n] - 5 x[ n + 5 ]
(B) (ii) is true
52. The transfer function of a system is given by

H ( z) =
z( 3z - 2)
1
z2 - z 4
(C) Both (i) and (ii) are true

(D) Both are false
n
(A) Causal and Stable

(B) Causal, Stable and minimum phase
(C) Minimum phase
-1
-1
h[ n] = 10
u[ n] - 9
u[ n]
2
4
The system is
Page
284
3
10 -1
1z + z -2
3
For this system two statement are

Statement (i): System is causal and stable
Statement (ii): Inverse system is causal and stable.
www.gatehelp.com
The z-Transform
Chap 5.4
62. The impulse response of the system shown in fig.
The correct option is

(A) (i) is true
(B) (ii) is true
(C) Both are true
(D) Both are false
P5.4.62 is
X(z)
Y(z)
z-1
z-1
57. The system
z-1
y[ n] = cy[ n - 1] - 0.12 y[ n - 2 ] + x[ n - 1] + x[ n - 2 ]
Fig. P5.4.62
is stable if
(A) c < 112
.
(B) c > 112

.
(C) |c|< 112

.
(D) |c|> 112

.
- 2
(A) 2 2
(B)
58. Consider the following three systems
y2 [ n] = x[ n] - 0.1 x[ n - 1]
(C) 2 2
(D)
y3[ n] = 0.5 y[ n - 1] + 0.4 x[ n] - 0.3 x[ n - 1]
(B) y2 [ n] and y3[ n]
(C) y3[ n] and y1 [ n]
(D) all
1
d[ n]
2
2n
1
[1 + ( -1) n ] u [ n] - d [ n]
2
2
H ( z) =
z
z2 + z + 1
is shown in fig. P5.4.63. This system diagram is a

X(z)
59. The z-transform of a causal system is given as

X ( z) =
(1 + ( -1) n ) u[ n] -
63. The system diagram for the transfer function
The equivalent system are

(A) y1 [ n] and y2 [ n]
1
d[ n]
2
2n
1
(1 + ( -1) n ) u[ n] + d[ n]
2
2
n
- 2
y1 [ n] = 0.2 y[ n - 1] + x[ n] - 0.3 x[ n - 1] + 0.02 x[ n - 2 ]
(1 + ( -1) n ) u[ n] +
. z -1
2 - 15
-1
. z + 0.5 z -2
1 - 15
Y(z)
The x[0 ] is
z-1
z-1
(A) -15
.
(B) 2
(C) 1.5
(D) 0
Fig. P5.4.63
(A) Correct solution

60. The z-transform of a anti causal system is
X ( z) =
12 - 21z
3 - 7 z + 12 z 2
The value of x[0 ] is

7
(A) 4
(B) Not correct solution

(C) Correct and unique solution
(D) Correct but not unique solution
(B) 0
(C) 4
*****************
(D) Does not exist
61. Given the z-transforms

X ( z) =
z( 8 z - 7)
4z2 - 7z + 3
The limit of x[ ] is
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C)
(D) 0
www.gatehelp.com
Page
285
The z-Transform
z 2 - 3z
1 - 3z -1
=
3
3
z 2 + z -1 1 + z -1 - z -2
2
2
2
1
1
, ROC : <|z|< 2
=
1 + 2 z -1 1 - 1 z -1
2
2
1
x[ n] = -2(2) n u[ -n - 1] - n u[ n]
2
Chap 5.4
1 2
, n even and n 0
= 4
n odd
0 ,
n
24. (A) X ( z) =
2-n ,
=
0,
n even and n 0
n odd
k=0
k=0
33. (C) X ( z) = -4 z 2 (2 z) 2 k = - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) z 2 ( k + 1 )
25. (A) x[ n] is right sided

1
49
47
z - z -1
4
32
32
=
+
X ( z) =
1 - 16 z -1 1 + 4 z -1 1 - 4 z -1
47 n
49
x[ n] =
( -4) n +
4 u[ n]
32
32
x[ n] = - 2 2 ( k + 1 ) d[ n + 2 ( k + 1)]
k=0
34. (A) ln (1 + a) =
( -1) k -1
( a) k
k
k =1
( -1) k -1
( z -1 ) k
k
k =1
X ( z) =
26. (C) x[ n] is right sided
( -1) k -1
d[ n - 1]
k
k =1
x [ n] =
1
-1 2
X ( z) = 2 +
+
z
-1
1+ z
1 - z -1
35. (B) cos a =
x[ n] = 2 d[ n + 2 ] + (( -1) n - 1) u[ n + 2 ]
( -1) k 2 k
a
k = 0 (2 k) !
27. (A) d[ n] + 2 d[ n - 6 ] + 4 d[ n - 8 ]
( -1) k -3k 2 k
(z )
k = 0 (2 k) !
X ( z) =
10
k d[ n - k]
28. (B) x[ n] is right sided, x[ n] =
k=5
x [ n] =
( -1) k
(2 k) ! d [ n - 6 k]
k=0
n = 12
29. (D) x[ n] is right sided signal

X ( z) = 1 + 3z
-1
+ 3z
-2
+z
x[ n] = d[ n] + 3d[ n - 1] + 3d[ n - 2 ] + d[ n - 3]
12 - 6 k = 0, k = 2,
36. (D) All gives the same z transform with different
30. (A)
x[ n] = d[ n + 6 ] + d[ n + 2 ] + 3d[ n] + 2 d [ n - 3] + d[ n - 4 ]
31. (B) X ( z) = 1 + z +
z2 z3
+
+ .........
2 ! 3!
1
1
1
.........
+1 + +
+
2
z 2!z
3! z3
d[ n + 2 ] d[ n + 3]
x[ n] = d[ n] + d[ n + 1] +
+
......
2!
3!
d[ n - 2 ] d[ n - 3]
+d[ n] + d[ n - 1] +
+
.........
2!
3!
1
x [ n] = d [ n] +
n!
32. (A) X ( z) = 1 +
( -1) 2
1
x[12 ] =
=
4!
24
-3
-2
-2
z
z
+
4
4
1
x [ n] = d[ n - 2 k]
k=0 4
= z -2
k=0 4
ROC. So all are the solution.

37. (C) x1 [ n] is right-sided signal
z1 > 2 , z1 >
1
gives z1 > 2
2
x2 [ n] is left-sided signal
1
1
z 2 < 2, z 2 < gives z 2 <
2
2
x3[ n] is double sided signal
1
1
z 3 > and z 3 < 2 gives
< z3 < 2
2
2
38. (B) X ( z) =
2
-1
,
+
1 -1
1
1- z
1 + z -1
2
z
n
2
-1
u[ n] -
u[ n]
2n
3
|z|>
1
(Right-sided)
2
x[ n] =
|z|<
1
(Left-sided)
3
-2 -1 n
x[ n] = n +
u[ -n - 1]
3
2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
287
UNIT 5
1
1
2
-1
<|z|< (Two-sided) x[ n] = - n u[ -n - 1] -
u[ n]
3
2
2
3
So (b) is wrong.
3
39. (A) Since the ROC includes the z = , ROC is
4
1
<|z|< 1,
2
A
B
X ( z) =
+
1 -1 1 + z -1
1- z
2
A
x[ n] = n u[ n] B ( -1) n u[ -n - 1]
2
A
1=
A =2 ,
2
Signal & System
-2
5
Y ( z)
3
3
,
H ( z) =
=
+
X ( z ) 1 - 1 z -1 1 + 1 z -1
4
2
h[ n] =
n
n
1 -1
1
5
2
u[ n]
3 2
4
Y ( z) =
H ( z) =
4
1
3
=
-1
1
1
1 - 2z
1 - z -1
(1 - 2 z -1 ) 1 - z -1
2
2
10
Y ( z)
-7
=
+
X ( z ) 1 - 2 z -1 1 - 1 z -1
2
x[ -1] = 1 = ( -1) B( -1) B = 1

1
x[ n] = n -1 u[ n] - ( -1) n u[ -n - 1]
2
40. (B) x[ n] = Cpn u[ n] , x[0 ] = 2 = C
47. (D) H ( z) =
x[2 ] =
1
= 2 p2
2
p=
X ( z) =
41. (B) H ( z) =
1
1
+
-1
1
1 - 2z
1 + z -1
2
-1
h[ n] = (2) u[ -n - 1] +
u [ n]
2
-n
Y ( z)
= 2 z -4 - z -5
H ( z)
x[ n] = 2[ d - 4 ] - d[ n - 5 ]
H ( z) =
x[ n]z
= d[ n - 2 ]z - n = z -2
Y ( z)
2 z -1
=
z -1
X ( z)
12
1
h[ n] = 2
2
49. (C) H ( z) =
n =0
43. (D) X ( z) =
x[ n]z
n =0
-n
n =0
-n
1
=
1 - z -1
3
2
44. (B) H ( z) =
+
-1
1 - 3z
1 + 2 z -1
h[ n] is causal so ROC is |z|> 3,
h[ n] = [ 3n + 1 + 2 ( -2) n ]u[ n]
45. (A) X ( z) = 1 +
1
, Y ( z ) = 2 z -4
1 -1
1- z
2
z -1
-1
48. (A) Y ( z) 1 = 2 z X ( z)
2
h[ n] is stable, so ROC includes |z|= 1

1
ROC : <|z|< 2 ,
2
42. (A) X + ( z) =
1
h[ n] = 10(2) n - 7 u( n)
2
1
,
2
1
x[ n] = 2 u( n)
2
Page
288
1
1 + 3z -1
46. (D) X ( z) =
z -1 z -2
3z -1
, Y ( z) = 1 4
8
4
n -1
u[ n - 1]
Y ( z)
= (1 - z -2 + z -4 - z -6 )
X ( z)
h[ n] = d[ n] - d[ n - 2 ] + d[ n - 4 ] - d[ n - 6 ]
50. (A) h[ n] =
31

44
n -1
u[ n - 1]
3 -1
z
Y ( z)
4
H ( z) =
=
X ( z ) 1 - 1 z -1
4
1
3
Y ( z ) - z -1 Y ( z) = z -1 X ( z)
4
4
1
3
y[ n] - y[ n - 1] = x[ n - 1]
4
4
www.gatehelp.com
The z-Transform
51. (A) H ( z) =
Y ( z)
= 1 - z -5
X ( z)
So y1 and y2 are equivalent.

59. (B) Causal signal x[0 ] = lim X ( z) = 2
y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - 5 ]
52. (D) Zero at : z = 0,
Chap 5.4
1 2
2
, poles at z =
2
3
60. (C) Anti causal signal, x[0 ] = lim X ( z) = 4

z
(i) Not all poles are inside |z|= 1, the system is not
causal and stable.
3
61. (A) The function has poles at z = 1, . Thus final
4
(ii) Not are poles and zero are inside |z|= 1, the system
value theorem applies.
is not minimum phase.
7
)
4
=1
lim x( n) = lim( z - 1) X ( z) = ( z - 1)
n
z 1
3
( z - 1) z -
4
z(2 z -
3
27
8
8
53. (A) X ( z) =
+
1 -1 1 - 3z -1
1- z
3
-
62. (C) [2 Y ( z) + X ( z)] z -2 = Y ( z)
Since X ( z) converges on |z|= 1. So ROC must include

this circle.
1
ROC : <|z|< 3,
3
H ( z) =
3n + 3
x[ n] = - n -1 u[ n] u[ -n - 1]
3 8
8
1
=-
z -2
1 - 2 z -2
1
1
1
4
4
h[ n] = - +
+
2 1 - 2 z -1 1 + 2 z -1
1
1
d[ n] + {( 2 ) n + ( - 2 ) n } u[ n]
2
4
1
54. (C) h[ n] = 16 n u[ n]. So system is both stable and
4
63. (D) Y ( z) = X ( z) z -1 - { Y ( z) z -1 + Y ( z) z -2 }
causal. ROC includes z = 1.
Y ( z)
z -1
z
=
= 2
-1
-2
X ( z) 1 + z + z
z + z +1
1 1
,
2 3
1
Pole of inverse system at : z = 2
So this is a solution but not unique. Many other correct
55. (C) Pole of system at : z = -
diagrams can be drawn.
For this system and inverse system all poles are inside
***********
|z|= 1. So both system are both causal and stable.

56. (A) H ( z) =
10
9
1 -1
1
1+ z
1 + z -1
4
2
1 - 2 z -1
1 -1
1 -1
1 + z 1 + z
2
4
Pole of this system are inside |z|= 1. So the system is

stable and causal.
For the inverse system not all pole are inside |z|= 1. So
inverse system is not stable and causal.
57. (C) |a2|= 0.12 < 1, a1 =|-c|< 1 + 0.12, |c|< 112
.
58. (A) Y1 ( z) = 1 - 0.1z -1 , Y2 ( z) = 1 - 0.1z -1
Y3( z) =
0.4 - 0.3z -1
1 - 0.5 z -1
www.gatehelp.com
Page
289
CHAPTER
5.6
THE DISCRETE-TIME FOURIER TRANSFORM
-n
Statement for Q.19:

Determine the discrete-time Fourier Transform for
the given signal and choose correct option.
|n| 2
1,
1. x[ n] =
0,
sin 5W
(A)
sin W
(C)
otherwise
(B)
sin 2.5W
sin W
sin 4W
sin W
(C)
3
4
e - jW
(B)
1 - 43 e - jW
3
4
e - jW
1+
3
4
3
4
e jW
(B)
2 e jW
2 - e - jW
(C)
e jW
2 - e jW
(D)
2 e jW
2 - e jW
(A) 2 e - j 2 W
(B) 2 e j 2 W
(C) 1
(A) pd(W) -
1
1 + e - jW
(B)
1
1 - e - jW
(C) pd(W) +
1
1 - e - jW
(D)
1
1 + e - jW
1 - 43 e jW
e jW
8. x[ n] = {-2, - 1,
3. x[ n] = u[ n - 2 ] - u[ n - 6 ]
(A) e 3 jW + e 3 jW + e 4 jW + e 5 jW
(C) e -2 jW + e -3 jW + e -4 jW + e -5 jW
(B)
(D)
e -2 jW(1 - e 3 jW)
1 - e jW
e
-2 jW
-3 jW
(1 - e
1 - e - jW
0, 1, 2}
(A) 2 j(2 sin 2W + sin W)
(B) 2(2 cos 2W - cos W)
(C) -2 j(2 sin 2W + sin W)
(D) -2(2 cos 2W - cos W)
p
9. x[ n] = sin n
2
4. x[ n] = a|n| , |a|< 1
(A) p( d[W - p 2 ] - d[W + p 2 ])
(A)
1-a
1 - 2 a sin W + a 2
(B)
(C)
1 - a2
1 - 2 ja sin W + a 2
Page
300
e jW
2 - e - jW
7. x[ n] = u[ n]
(A)
6. x[ n] = 2 d[ 4 - 2 n]
3
2. x[ n] = u[ n - 4 ]
4
(A)
1
5. x[ n] = u[ -n - 1]
2
1-a
1 - 2 a cos W + a 2
2
(B)
j
( d[W + p 2 ] - d[W - p 2 ])
2
(C) 2 p( d[W - p 2 ] - d[W + p 2 ])

(D) jp( d[W + p 2 ] - d[W - p 2 ])
www.gatehelp.com
The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform
16. X ( e jW) = j 4 sin 4W - 1

Determine
the
signal
having
the
Fourier
(C) d[ n + 4 ] - d[ n - 4 ] - d[ n]
1
, |a|< 1
(1 - ae - jW) 2
(A) ( n - 1) a n u[ n]
(B) ( n + 1) a n u[ n]
(C) na u[ n]
(A) (d[ n + 2 ] + 2 d[ n] + d[ n - 2 ])
(C) -4(d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n] + d[ n - 2 ])
(d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n] + d[ n - 2 ])
(C)
2 j, 0 <W p
12. X ( e jW) =
- 2 j, - p < W 0
4
pn
(A) sin 2
pn
2
(C)
2-n
5
2
+ e - jW + 6
n +1
1 + -2 u[ n]
n +1
u[ n]
n +1
( -1) n + 2 u[ n]

4
pn
(B)
sin 2
pn
2
8
pn
sin 2
pn
2
5
2-n
-e
- j2 W
-2
(B) 2 - n 1 -
(B) 2(d[ n + 2 ] + 2 d[ n] + d[ n - 2 ])
1
2
17. X ( e jW) =
(A)
11. X ( e jW) = 8 cos 2 w
(D)
(A) 4 pd[ n + 4 ] - 4 pd[ n - 4 ] - 2 pd[ n]

(B) 2 d[ n + 4 ] - 2 d[ n - 4 ] - d[ n]
transform given in question.

10. X ( e jW) =
Chap 5.6
(D) -
18. X ( e jW) =
2+
- 18 e - j 2 W
e - jW
+ 14 e - jW + 1
1
4
(A) 2 - n + 1 [1 + ( -2) - n ]u[ n]
8
pn
sin 2
pn
2
(B) 2 - n [1 + ( -2) - n ]u[ n]

(C) 2 - n + 1 [( -1) n + 2 - n ]u[ n]
1,
jW
13. X ( e ) =
0,
(A)
(B)
3p
p
|W|<
4
4
p 3p
0 |W|< ,
|W| p
4
4
(D) 2 - n [( -1) n + 2 - n ]u[ n]

19. X ( e jW) =
2
3pn
pn
sin
- sin
n
4
4
(A) 2 n -1 [1 + ( -1) n ]u[ n]
1
3pn
pn
sin
- sin
pn
4
4
(C) 21 - n [1 - ( -1) n ]u[ n]
(B) 21 - n [1 + ( -1) n ]u[ n]

(D) 2 n -1 [1 - ( -1) n ]u[ n]
2
3pn
pn
(C) cos
+ cos
n
4
4
(D)
20. X ( e jW) =
1
3pn
pn
cos
+ cos
pn
4
4
14. X ( e jW) = e
2
(A)
9
jW
2
for
-p W p
(A) pd[ n - 1 2 ]
(C)
2 e - jW
1 - 14 e - j 2 W
( -1) n + 1
p(n - 12 )
(B) 2pd[ n - 1 2 ]
1 - 13 e - jW
1 - 14 e - jW - 18 e -2 jW
7 1
1
+ -
2
9 4

u[ n]
2 1 n 7 1 n
(B) - + u[ n]
9 2
9 4
2 1 n 7 1 n
(C) - - u[ n]
9 2
9 4
15. X ( e jW) = cos 2W + j sin 2W

(A) 2 pd[ n + 2 ]
(B) d[ n + 2 ]
(C) 0
2
(D)
9
www.gatehelp.com
7 1
1
- -
2
9 4

u[ n]
Page
301
UNIT 5
1
1
x[ n] = - u[ n] + u[ n] = 2 - n [( -1) n + 2 - n ]u[ n]
2
Signal & System
x[ n] , This condition is satisfied only
27. (D) X ( e j 0 ) =
n = -
if the samples of the signal add up to zero. This is true

2 e - jW
2
2
19. (C) X ( e ) =
=
1 - j2 W
1 - jW
1 - jW
1- e
1- e
1+ e
4
2
2
for signal (b) and (h).
jW
28. (A) X ( e j 0 ) =
1
1
x[ n] = 2 u[ n] - 2 - u[ n]
2
2
1
= n -1 [1 - ( -1) n ]u[ n] = 21 - n [1 - ( -1) n ]u[ n]
2
n = -
29. (A) y[ n] = x[ n + 2 ]
Y ( e ) is real and even.
Y ( e jW) = e j 2 W X ( e jW)
Thus arg{X ( e jW)} = -2W

30. (C)
X (e
jW
) dW = 2 px[0 ] = 4 p
-p
( -1)
31. (A) X ( e jp) =
21
7 1
x[ n] = u[ n] + - u[ n]
9 2
9 4
e j2 W
X ( e jW) = e - j 2 WY ( e jW),
Since Y ( e jW) is real. This imply arg{ Y ( e jW)} = 0
21. (C) X ( e jW) =
is an even signal. Therefore
jW
1 - jW
1- e
jW
3
20. (A) X ( e ) =
1
1
1 - e - jW - e -2 jW
4
8
2
7
9
9
=
+
1 - jW
1 - jW
1- e
1+ e
2
4
n
x[ n] = 6
x[ n] = 2
n = -
DTFT
32. (C) Ev{x[ n]}
Re{X ( e jW)}
( b - a) e jW
- ( a + b) e jW + ab
Ev{x[ n] =
- jW
( b - a) e
1
-1
=
+
1 - ( a + b) e - jW + abe- j 2 W 1 - be - jW 1 - ae - jW
( x[ n] + x[ -n])
2
1
1
1
1
, 1, 0, 0, 1, 2, 1, 0, 0, 1, , 0, -
= - , 0,
2
2
2
2
x[ n] = bn u[ n] + a n u[ -n - 1] .
22. (D) The signal must be read and odd. Only signal ( h)
33. (D)
23. (A) The signal must be real and even. Only signal (c)
and (e) are real and even.
24. (A) Y ( e jW) = e jaW X ( e jW),
y[ n] = x[ n + a ]
real.). Therefore x [ n + a ] is even and x [ n] has to be

symmetric about a.This is true for signal (a), (c), (e), (f)
and (g).
X (e
n = -
DTFT

) dW = 2 px[0 ] ,
35. (A) Y ( e jW) = e - j 4 W X ( e jW)

|n - 4|
3
y[ n] = x[ n - 4 ] = ( n - 4)
4
imaginary. Thus y[ n] = 0.
x[0 ] = 0 is for signal (c), (f), (g) and (h).
37. (D) X 2 ( e jW) = X ( e j 2 W)
is always periodic with period 2p.
X ( e j 2 W)
Therefore all signals satisfy the condition.
DTFT

x[ n] , n even
x 2 [ n] =
otherwise
0,
|n|
2 3
jn
, n even
y[ n] =
4
0 ,
otherwise
Page
306
d X ( e jW)
dW
36. (C) Since x[ n] is real and odd, X ( e jW) is purely
-p
26. (D) X ( e jW)
34. (C) nx[ n]
= 2 p | x[ n]| = 28 p
2
dX ( e jW)
|n|2 x[ n] = 316 p
- p dW = 2 pn
= -
If Y ( e ) is real, then y[ n] is real and even (if x[ n] is
25. (D)
jW
jW
jW
-p
is real and odd.
| X ( e )|
www.gatehelp.com
The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform
38. (B) Y ( e jW) = X ( e jW ) * X ( e j ( W- p 2 ) )

y[ n] = 2 px[ n] x1 [ n], x1 [ n] = e
y[ n] = 2 pn2 e jpn
39. (C) Y ( e jW) =
3

4
jpn 2
This is possible only if b = -a.
x[ n] ,
44. (A) For x[ n] = d[ n], X ( e jW) = 1,
2|n|
h[ n] =
d
X ( e jW)
dW
=
|n|
3
y[ n] = - jnx[ n] = - jn2
4
41. (C) For a real signal x[ n]
3=
dW =
| x[ n]|
n = -
x[0 ] = 1,
| x[ n]|
= ( x [0 ]) + 2
But
x[0 ] = 0,
Hence
n =0
-p
1
h2 [ n] = u[ n]
3

DTFT
1
2 - jW
1- e
3
d
j
dW
1 - 2 e - jW
2 - jW
= 3
1 - 2 e - jW
2 - jW
e
Y ( e jW )
3
47. (B) H ( e ) =
=
X ( e jW) 1 - 2 e - jW
3
2
2
1 - e - jW Y ( e jW) = e- jW X ( e jW)
3
3
jW
x[0 ] = 1
1
1

1 - jW 4
1- e
4
DTFT

1 - jW
n
e
d
1
1
DTFT
4
=
n u[ n] j
2
dW 1 - 1 e - jW
2
1 - 1 e - jW
4

4
e jWn dW
1
42. (C) u[ n]
4
- jW
2 - jW
e
2 e - jW
H( e ) = 3
=
- jW
2
1 - e - jW 3 - 2 e
3
x[ n] = d[ n] + d[ n + 1] - d[ n + 2 ]
n 2
jW
n =-
-1
DTFT

2
n u[ n]
3
Using Parsevals relation

jW
1
2p
Y ( e jW)
,
X ( e jW)
x[ n] = 2od{ x[ n] } = d[ n + 1] - d[ n + 2 ] For n < 0
| X ( e )|
1
,
1 - jW
1- e
3
2
u[ n]
3
Since x[ n] = 0 for n > 0,
-p
46. (D) H ( e jW) =
Therefore od{x[ n]} = F -1 { jIm{X ( e jW)}}

1
= ( d[ n + 1] - d[ n - 1] - d[ n + 2 ] + d[ n - 2 ])
2
x[ n] - x[ -n]
Od{ x[ n]} =
2
1
2p
) e jWn dW =
1
sin p( n - 1)
e jW ( n -1 ) dW =
2 p -p
p( n - 1)
H 2 ( e jW) =
jIm{X ( e jW)}= j sin W - j sin 2W,

1 jW
=
e - e - j W - e 2 jW + e -2 jW
2
jW
jIm{X ( e jW)}
DTFT

Y (e
-12 + 5 e - jW
1
-2
=
+
1 - jW
1
12 - 7 e - jW + e - j 2 W
1- e
1 - e - jW
3
4
y[ n] = x[ n] + x[ -n] = 0
od{x[ n]}
1
2p
dX ( e jW)
=0
dW
45. (B) H ( e jW) = H1 ( e jW) + H 2 ( e jW)
40. (B) Y ( e jW) = X ( e jW ) + X ( e - jW)
Chap 5.6
x[ n] = X ( e
j0
)=
n = -
y[ n] -
3 y[ n] - 2 y[ n - 1] = 2 x[ n - 1] .
4
9
2
2
y[ n - 1] = x[ n - 1]
3
3
*********
43. (A) For all pass system H ( e jW) = 1 for all W

H ( e jW) =
- jW
b+ e
, b + e - jW = 1 - a e - jW
1 - ae- jW
| |
1 + b2 + 2 b cos W = 1 + a 2 - 2 a cos W
www.gatehelp.com
Page
307
CHAPTER
5.7
THE CONTINUOUS-TIME FOURIER SERIES
x(t)
Determine the Fourier series coefficient for given

periodic signal x( t).
-2p
3
1. x( t) as shown in fig. P5.7.1
Fig. P5.7.3
10
-5
10
(C) - j
Fig. P5.7.1
(A) 1
p
(B) cos k
2
p
(C) sin k
2
(D) 2
A - j
e
2 pk
4 pk
(B) j
- 1
(D)
A - j
e
2 pk
4 pk
- A - j
e
2 pk
4 pk
- 1
- 1

x(t)
A
1
-1
-A
Fig. P5.7.4
x(t)
A
-T
T
4
T
2
A
(A)
(1 - ( - 1 ) k )
kp
A
(C)
(1 - ( - 1 ) k )
jkp
A
(1 + ( - 1 ) k )
kp
A
(D)
(1 + ( - 1 ) k )
jkp
(B)
5. x( t) = sin 2 t
Fig. P5.7.2
(A)
A
p
sin k
jpk
2
(B)
A
p
cos k
jpk
2
(A) -
1
1
1
d[ k - 1] + d[ k] - d[ k + 1]
4
2
4
(C)
A
p
sin k
pk
2
(D)
A
p
cos k
pk
2
(B) -
1
1
1
d [ k - 2 ] + d[ k] - d[ k + 2 ]
4
2
4
(C) -
1
1
d[ k - 1] + d[ k] - d[ k + 1]
2
2
(D) -
1
1
d[ k - 2 ] + d[ k] - d[ k + 2 ]
2
2
Page
308
4p
2p
4 pk
A - j 3
(A)
- 1
e
2 pk
x(t)
-10
-4p
3
www.gatehelp.com
The Continuous-Time Fourier Series
(A)
sin 9pt
sin pt
(B)
(C)
sin 18 pt
2 sin pt
In the question, the FS coefficient of time-domain

signal have been given. Determine the corresponding
time domain signal and choose correct option.
7. X [ k] = jd[ k - 1] - jd[ k + 1] + d[ k + 3] + d[ k - 3], wo = 2 p
(A) 2(cos 3pt - sin pt)
(B) -2(cos 3pt - sin pt)
(C) 2(cos 6 pt - sin 2 pt)
(D) -2(cos 6 pt - sin 2 pt)
Chap 5.7
sin 9pt
p sin pt
11. X [ k] As depicted in fig. P5.7.11, wo = p

X [k]
3
2
|k|
-1
8. X [ k] =
, wo = 1
3
4
(A)
5 + 3 sin t
5
(B)
4 + 3 sin t
5
(C)
4 + 3 cos t
4
(D)
5 + 3 cos t
1
k
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Fig. P5.7.11
(A) 3 cos 3pt + 2 cos 2 pt + cos pt

(B) 3 sin 3pt + 2 sin 2 pt + sin pt
9. X [ k] as shown in fig. P5.7.9 , wo = p

|{X [k]}|
(C) 6 sin 3pt + 4 sin 2 pt + 2 sin pt
(D) 6 cos 3pt + 4 cos 2 pt + 2 cos pt
1
k
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
{X [k]}
p
4
Consider a continuous time periodic signal x( t)

k
-p
4
with
coefficients
(C) e
-1
Determine
the
Fourier
series
- to
X [ k] + e to X [ -k]
2p
(B) 2 sin
kto X [ k]
T
(D) e
- to
X [ -k] + e to X [ k]
(A)
X [ k] + X [ - k]
2
(B)
X [ k] - X [ - k]
2
(C)
X [ k] + X *[ - k]
2
(D)
X [ k] + X *[ - k]
2
{X [k]}
8p
6p
4p
2p
14. y( t) =Re{x( t)}

k
-2p
-4p
-6p
-8p
series
13. y( t) = Ev{x( t)}
k
-2
Fourier
2p
(A) 2 cos
kto X [ k]
T
1
-3
and
12. y( t) = x( t - to ) + x ( t - to )
|{X [k]}|
-4
choose correct option.
10. X [ k] As shown in fig. P5.7.10 , wo = 2 p
-5
X [ k].
period
coefficient of the signal y( t) given in question and
Fig. P5.7.9
p
p
(A) 6 cos 2 pt + - 3 cos 3pt -

4
4
p
p
(B) 4 cos 4 pt - - 2 cos 3pt +

4
4
p
p
(C) 2 cos 2 pt + - 2 cos 3pt -

4
4
p
p
(D) 4 cos 4 pt + + 2 cos 3pt -

4
4
-6
fundamental
(A)
X [ k] + X [ - k]
2
(B)
X [ k] - X [ - k]
2
(C)
X [ k] + X *[ - k]
2
(D)
X [ k] + X *[ - k]
2
Fig. P5.7.10
www.gatehelp.com
Page
309
UNIT 5
d 2 x( t)
dt 2
15. y( t) =
2 pk
(A)
X [ k]
T
2
2 pk
(C) j
X [ k]
T
Signal & System

Let x1 ( t) and x2 ( t) be continuous time periodic
2 pk
(B) -
X [ k]
T
signal with fundamental frequency w1 and w2 , Fourier

series coefficients X1 [ k] and X 2 [ k] respectively. Given
2 pk
(D) - j
X [ k]
T
that
x2 ( t) = x1 ( t - 1) + x1 (1 - t)
20. The relation between w1 and w2 is

16. y( t) = x( 4 t - 1)
8p
(A)
X [ k]
T
(C) e
8 p
- jk
T
(A) w2 =
4p
(B)
X [ k]
T
X [ k]
(D) e
8 p
jk
T
w1
2
(B) w2 = w12
(C) w2 = w1
X [ k]
(D) w2 = w1
21. The Fourier coefficient X 2 [ k] will be
17. Consider a continuous-time signal
(A) ( X1 [ k] - jX1 [ -k]) e - jw 1 k
x( t) = 4 cos 100 pt sin 1000 pt

1
with fundamental period T =
. The nonzero FS
50
coefficient for this function are
(B) ( X1 [ -k] - jX1 [ k]) e - jw 1 k
(A) X[ -4 ], X[ 4 ], X[ -7 ], X[7 ]
(C) ( X1 [ k] + jX1 [ -k]) e - jw 1 k

(B) X[ -1], X[1], X[ -10 ], X[10 ]
Consider three continuous-time periodic signals
(C) X[ -3], X[ 3], X[ -4 ], X[ 4 ]
whose Fourier series representation are as follows.
(D) X[ -9 ], X[9 ], X[ -11], X[11]
2p
100
1 - jk t
x1 ( t) = e 50
k=0 3
18. A real valued continuous-time signal x( t) has a

fundamental period T = 8. The nonzero Fourier series
x2 ( t) =
coefficients for x( t) are
100
cos kp e
- jk
2p
t
50
k = -100
x3( t) =
X [1] = X [ -1] = 4, X [ 3] = X *[ -3] = 4 j
100
k = -100
2p
kp - jk 50 t
j sin
e
2
The signal x( t) would be

p
3p
(A) 4 cos t + 4 j sin
t
4
4
22. The even signals are

(A) x2 ( t) only
(B) x2 ( t) and x3( t)
p
3p
(B) 4 cos t - 4 j cos t
4
4
(C) x1 ( t) and x3( t)
(D) x1 ( t) only
p
p
3p
(C) 8 cos t + 8 cos t +
2
4
4
23. The real valued signals are

(A) x1 ( t) and x2 ( t)
(B) x2 ( t) and x3( t)
(C) x3( t) and x1 ( t)
(D) x1 ( t) and x3( t)
19. The continuous-time periodic signal is given as

2p
5p
x( t) = 4 + cos
t + 6 sin
t
3
3
The nonzero Fourier coefficients are
(A) X [0 ], X [ -1], X [1], X [ -5 ], X [5 ]
24. Suppose the periodic signal x( t) has fundamental

period T and Fourier coefficients X [ k]. Let Y [ k] be the
Fourier coefficient of y( t) where
Fourier coefficient X [ k] will be
(A)
TY [ k]
,k0
j2 pk
(B)
TY [ k]
j2pk
(C)
TY [ k]
,k0
jk
(D)
TY [ k]
jk
(B) X [0 ], X [ -2 ], X [2 ], X [ -5 ], X [5 ]
(C) X [0 ], X [ -4 ], X [ 4 ], X [ -10 ], X [10 ]
Page
310
y( t) = dx( t) dt . The
www.gatehelp.com
25. Suppose we have given the following information
The signal will be

p
p
(A) 4 cos t - 2 sin t
4
4
about a signal x( t) :
1. x( t) is real and odd.
p
p
(B) 2 cos t + 4 sin t
4
4
2. x( t) is periodic with T = 2
3. Fourier coefficients X [ k] = 0 for |k|> 1
p
p
(C) 2 cos t + 2 sin t
4
4
4.
Chap 5.7
2
1
x( t) dt = 1
20
The signal, that satisfy these condition, is

(A)
2 sin pt and unique
(B)
2 sin pt but not unique

Consider the following three continuous-time
(C) 2 sin pt and unique
signals with a fundamental period of T = 1
(D) 2 sin pt but not unique
x( t) = cos 2pt , y( t) = sin 2pt , z( t) = x( t) y( t)
26. Consider a continuous-time LTI system whose
29. The Fourier series coefficient X [ k] of x( t) are
frequency response is
(A)
1
2
( d[ k + 1] + d[ k - 1])
(B)
1
2
( d[ k + 1] - d[ k - 1])
(C)
1
2
( d[ k - 1] - d[ k + 1])
H ( jw) =
h( t) e
- jwt
dt =
sin 4 w
w
The input to this system is a periodic signal

2, 0 t 4
x( t) =
-2, 4 t 8
30. The Fourier series coefficient of y( t), Y [ k] will be
with period T = 8. The output y( t) will be

pt
(A) 1 + sin
4
pt
(B) 1 + cos
4
pt
pt
(C) 1 + sin + cos
4
4
(D) 0
(A)
j
2
( d[ k + 1] + d[ k + 1])
(B)
j
2
( d[ k + 1] - d[ k - 1])
(C)
j
2
( d[ k - 1] - d[ k + 1])
(D)
1
2j
( d[ k + 1] + d[ k + 1])
31. The Fourier series coefficient of z( t) , Z [ k] will be
27. Consider a continuous-time ideal low pass filter

having the frequency response
1, |w| 80
H ( jw) =
0, |w|> 80
(A)
1
4j
( d[ k - 2 ] - d[ k + 2 ])
(B)
1
2j
( d[ k - 2 ] - d[ k + 2 ])
(C)
1
2j
d[ k + 2 ] - d[ k - 2 ])
When the input to this filter is a signal x( t) with

fundamental frequency wo = 12 and Fourier series
32. Consider a periodic signal x( t) whose Fourier series

coefficients are
2,
X [ k] = 1 |k|
j 2 ,

S
coefficients X [ k], it is found that x( t)
y( t) = x( t).
The largest value of|k,

| for which X [ k] is nonzero, is
(A) 6
(B) 80
(C) 7
(D) 12
28.
continuous-time
periodic
otherwise
Consider the statements

signal
has
fundamental period T = 8. The nonzero Fourier series

coefficients are as,
X [1] = X [ -1] = j , X [5 ] = X [ -5 ] = 2,
*
k =0
1. x( t) is real.
2. x( t) is even
3.
dx( t)
is even
dt
The true statements are

(A) 1 and 2
(B) only 2
(C) only 1
(D) 1 and 3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
311
UNIT 5
(A)
A 2A
1
1
+
(sin t - sin 3t + sin 5 t....)
2
p
3
5
(B)
A 2A
1
1
+
(cos t - cos 2 t + cos 3t....)
2
p
2
3
(C)
A 2A
1
1
+
(cos t - cos 3t + cos 5 t....)
2
p
3
5
(D)
A 2A
1
1
+
(sin t + cos t + sin 3t + cos 3t ....)
2
p
3
3
A waveform for one peroid is depicted in figure in

question. Determine the trigonometric Fourier series
and choose correct option.
33.
x(t)
1
-p
p
Signal & System
36.
-1
x(t)
Fig. P5.7.33
2
1
1
1
(A) (cos t + cos 2 t + cos 3t + cos 4 t +....)
p
2
3
4
2
1
1
1
(sin t - sin 2 t + sin 3t - sin 4 t +....)
p
2
3
4
(C)
2
1
1
1
(sin t + cos t - sin 2 t - cos 2 t + sin 3t +....)
p
2
2
3
Fig. P5.7.36
(A)
1 12
1
1
+
(cos pt + cos 3pt +
cos 5 pt +....)
2 p2
9
25
(B) 3 +
(C)
x(t)
*****
Fig. P5.7.34
(A)
A 4A
1
1
+
sin t + sin 2 t + sin 3t +....
2
p
2
3
(B)
A 4A
1
1
+
cos t + cos 3t + cos 5 t +....
2
p
3
5
(C)
4A
1
1
sin t + sin 3t + sin 5 t + ....

p
3
5
(D)
4A
1
1
cos t + cos 2 t + cos 3t +....

p
2
3
35.
x(t)
A
-p
2
p
2
Fig. P5.7.35
Page
312
12
1
1
(sin pt - sin 3pt +
sin 5 pt -....)
2
p
9
25
-A
-p
12
1
1
(cos pt + cos 3pt +
cos 5 pt +....)
p2
9
25
1 12
1
1
+
(sin pt - sin 3pt +
sin 5 pt -....)
2 p2
9
25
(D) 3 +
-p
-1
2
1
1
1
(D) (sin t + cos t + sin 3t + cos 3t + sin 5 t + ....)
p
3
3
5
34.
-1
(B)
www.gatehelp.com
SOLUTIONS
1
T
T 2
- jkw t
Ad( t) e o dt =
-T 2
- jkw ot
-T 2
1
dt =
T
Ae
- jkw ot
- jkt
x( t) e dt =
0
dt
1
2p
Ae- jkt dt =
jA e
2 pk
- 1
4 pk
j
3
X [ k]e
k = -
X [ k]e
sin 9 pt
sin pt
jpkt
1
T
X1 [ k] =
x( t - t ) e
o
-k
e-
j kw o to
x( t) e
- jkw ot
dt
Y [ k] = X1 [ k] + X 2 [ k] = e - jkw oto X [ k] + e jkw oto X [ k]

= 2 cos ( wo kto ) X [ k]
13. (A) Ev{ x( t)} =
2p
=2 ,
p
x( t) + x( - t)
,
2
The FS coefficients of x( t) are

1
1
X1 [ k] = x( -t) e - jkw ot dt = x( t) e jkw ot dt = X [ -k]
TT
T T
Therefore, the FS
X [ k] + X [ -k]
Y [ k] =
2
j 2 pt
-1 jkt
=
e +
k = - 3
-1 - jt
e
4
1
= 3
+
=
1
1
1 + e - jt 1 + e j t 5 + 3cos t
3
3
dt =
The FS coefficients of x( t - to ) + x( t + to ) are
-1
- jkw ot
X 2 [ k] = e jkw oto X [ k]
- jkpt
0 Ae dt
= je j 2 p t - je -
series coefficients X1 [ k] of x( t - to ) are
+ e j6 pt + e -
-1 jkt
e
k=0 3
coefficients
of
Ev{ x( t)}
are
j6 pt
14. (C) Re{ x( t)} =
jkt
- j 2 pk ( t -1 )
k = -4
Similarly, the FS coefficients of x( t + to ) are
-1 2 jt
=
( e - 2 + e -2 jt )
4
j 2 pkt
e jpkt =
= e - jkw oto X [ k]
= - 2 sin 2 pt + 2 cos 6 pt
8. (D) x( t) =
12. (A) x( t - to ) is also periodic with T. The Fourier
k = -
e j ( 3) pt + 2 e 4 e j (4 )pt
= 6 cos 3pt + 4 cos 2 pt + 2 cos pt
-1
1
1
d[ k - 1] + d[ k] - d[ k + 1]
4
2
4
= 3e j ( -3) pt + 2 e j ( -2 ) pt + e j ( -1 ) pt + e j (1 ) pt + 2 e j ( 2 ) pt + 3e j ( 3) pt
4p
0<t<
3
4p
< t < 2p
3
The fundamental period of sin 2 ( t) is p and wo =
X [ k]e
jp
k = -
A 1 - e jkp e - jkp -1
A
=
(1 - ( -1) k )
=
+
2 jkp
- jkp jkp
7. (C) x( t) =
- j 2 pk
x( t) =
1
0
1
1
X [ k] = x( t) e - jkt dt = - Ae - jkpt dt +
2 -1
2 -1
X [ k] =
11. (D) X [ k] =|k|, - 3 k 3
4p 3
k = -4
- A, - 1 < t < 0
2p
4. (C) T = 2, wo =
= p, x( t) =
0< t<1
2
A,
e jt - e - jt
5. (A) sin 2 t =
2j
-T 4
A,
2p
3. (B) T = 2p , wo =
= 1, x( t) =
2p
0,
2p
e j ( -4 ) pt + e 4 e j ( -3) pt + e
x( t) =
T 4
1
2p
p
4
= 4 cos ( 4 pt + p 4) + 2 cos( 3pt - p 4)
e - jkw o t 4
A
pk
- jkw - T = pk sin 2

o
X [ k] =
- j
= 2( e - j ( 4 pt + p 4 ) + e j ( 4 pt + p 4 ) ) + ( e - j ( 3pt - p 4 ) + e j ( 3pt - p 4 ) )
A
,
T
A
=
T
jpkt
10. (A) X [ k] = e - j 2 pk , -4 k 4
T 2
x( t) e
X [ k]e
k = -
A = 10 , T = 5, X [ k] = 2
1
2. (C) X [ k] =
T
9. (D) x( t) =
= 2e
1. (D) X [ k] =
Chap 5.7
x ( t) + x *( t)
,
2
The FS coefficient of x *( t) is
1
X1 [ k] = x *( t) e - jkw ot dt = X1*[ -k]
TT
X1*[ k] =
1
T
x( t) e
jkw ot
dt = X [ -k]
X1 [ k] = X *[ -k]
Y [ k] =
www.gatehelp.com
X [ k] + X *[ - k]
2
Page
313
UNIT 5
10 p
4p
13. X [ k] = cos
k + 2 j sin
k
19
19
18. y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - N 2 ] , (assume that N is even)

(A) (1 - ( -1) k + 1 ) X [2 k]
(B) (1 - ( -1) k ) X [ k]
(D) (1 - ( -1) k\ ) X [2 k]
(A)
19
( d[ n + 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]) + 19(d[ n + 2 ] - d[ n - 2 ]),|n| 9
2
(C) (1 - ( -1) k + 1 ) X [ k]
(B)
1
( d[ n + 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]) + (d[ n + 2 ] - d[ n - 2 ]),|n| 9
2
19. y[ n] = x *[ -n]
9
(C) ( d[ n + 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]) + 9(d[ n + 2 ] - d[ n - 2 ]),|n| 9
2
(D)
1
( d[ n + 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]) + (d[ n + 2 ] - d[ n - 2 ]),|n| 9
2
pk
14. X [ k] = cos
21
(A) - X *[ k ]
(B) - X *[ -k ]
(C) X *[ k ]
(D) X *[ -k ]
20. y[ n] = ( -1) n x[ n], (assume that N is even)

N
(A) X k 2
(B) X k +
2
(D) X k +
- 1
2
(A)
21
(d[ n + 4 ] + d[ n - 4 ]),|n| 10
2
(C) X k + 1
2
(B)
1
(d[ n + 4 ] + d[ n - 4 ]),|n| 10
2
(C)
21
(d[ n + 4 ] - d[ n - 4 ]),|n| 10
2
(D)
1
(d[ n + 4 ] - d[ n - 4 ]),|n| 10
2
Consider a discrete-time periodic signal

1, 0 n 7
x[ n] =
0, 8 n 9
with period N = 10. Also y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - 1 ]

Consider a periodic signal x[ n] with period N and
21. The fundamental period of y[ n] is
FS coefficients X [ k]. Determine the FS coefficients Y [ k]
(A) 9
(B) 10
of the signal y[ n] given in question.
(C) 11
15. y[ n] = x[ n - no ]
(A) e
2 p
n ok
j
N
(B) e
X [ k]
2 p
n ok
- j
N
22. The FS coefficients of y[ n] are

(A)
8 p
j k
1
1-e 5
10
(B)
8 p
- j k
1
1-e 5
10
(C)
1
10
4 p
k
j
1 - e 5
(D)
1
10
X [ k]
(D) -kX [ k]
(C) kX [ k]
16. y[ n] = x[ n] - x[ n - 2 ]
4p
(A) sin
k X [ k]
N
4p
(B) cos
k X [ k]
N
4 p
k
- j
(C) 1 - e N X [ k]
4 p
k
j
(D) 1 - e N X [ k]
23. The FS coefficients of x[ n] are

pk
(A) -
17. y[ n] = x[ n] + x[ n + N 2 ] , (assume that N is even)

N
(A) 2 X [2 k - 1], for 0 k

- 1
2
(B) 2 X [2 k - 1], for 0 k
Page
318
Signal & System
N
2
(C) 2 X [2 k],
for 0 k
- 1
2
(D) 2 X [2 k],
for 0 k
N
2
j - j 10
pk
e
cosec
Y [ k], k 0
2
10
pk
(B)
j - j 10
pk
e
cosec
Y [ k], k 0
2
10
pk
(C) -
1 - j 10
pk
e
sec
Y [ k]
2
10
pk
(D)
1 - j 10
pk
e
sec
Y [ k]
2
10
www.gatehelp.com
4 p
k
- j
1 - e 5
The Discrete-Time Fourier Series
29. A real and odd periodic signal x[ n] has fundamental
Consider a discrete-time signal with Fourier
period N = 7 and FS coefficients X [ k]. Given that

X [15 ] = j,
representation.
x[ n]
X [ k]
Determine the corresponding signal y[ n] and choose

correct option.
p
(B) 2 cos n x[ n]
5
p
(C) 2 sin n x[ n]
2
p
(D) 2 cos n x[ n]
2
(A) 0, j, 2 j, 3 j
(B) 1, 1, 2, 3
(C) 1, -1, -2, -3
(D) 0, - j , -2 j, -3 j
(B)
4.
1
( x[ n + 2 ] + x[ n - 2 ])
2
1
10
X [ k]
The signal x[ n] is
p
(A) 5 cos
n
10
p
(B) 5 sin
n
10
p
(C) 10 cos n
5
p
(D) 10 sin n
5
31. Each of two sequence x[ n] and y[ n] has a period

N = 4. The FS coefficient are
(B) j2 p( x[ n]) 2
The FS coefficient Z [ k] for the signal

z[ n] = x[ n] y[ n] will be
x [ n] - x[ -n]
2
(B)
x [ n] + x[ -n]
2p
(D)
(A) 6
(B) 6|k|
(C) 6|k|
(D) e
11p
sin
n
20
x[ n] =
p
sin
n
20
1. x[ n] is periodic with N = 6
5
x[ n] = 2
n =0
with a fundamental period N = 20. The Fourier
x[ n] = 1
n -2
4. x[ n] has the minimum power per period among the

set of signals satisfying the preceding three condition.
The sequence would be..
1 1 1 1 1
(A) ... , , , , , ... (B)
2 6 2 6 2
1 1 1 1 1
(C) ... , , , , , ...
3 6 3 6 3
p
j k
2
32. Consider a discrete-time periodic signal
28. Consider a sequence x[ n] with following facts :
1
1
X [1] = X [2 ] = 1 and
2
2
Y [0 ], Y [1], Y [2 ], Y [ 3] = 1
(D) 2 p( x[ n]) 2
x [ n] - x[ -n]
2p
( -1)
= 50
X [0 ] = X [ 3] =
27. Y [ k] = Re{ X [ k]}

x [ n] + x[ -n]
(A)
2
3.
n =0
(C) ( x[ n]) 2
2.
of
30. Consider a signal x[ n] with following facts
26. Y [ k] = X [ k] * X [ k]
(C)
values
3. X[11] = 5
1
( x[ n + 10 ] + x[ n + 10 ]) (D) None of the above
2
( x[ n])
2p
The
2. The period of x[ n] is N = 10
p
(A) 2 sin n x[ n]
5
(A)
X [17 ] = 3 j.
1. x[ n] is a real and even signal
24. Y [ k ] = X [ k - 5 ] + X [ k + 5 ]
pk
25. Y [ k] = cos X [ k]
5
1
(A) ( x[ n + 5 ] + x[ n + 5 ])
2
X [16 ] = 2 j,
X [0 ], X [ -1], X [ -2 ], and X [ -3] will be
p
DTFS ;
10
In question the FS coefficient Y [ k] is given.
(C)
Chap 5.8
series coefficients of this function are

1
(A)
( u[ k + 5 ] - u[ k - 6 ]), |k| 10
20
(B)
1 1 1
...0, 1, , , , ...
2
3 4
1
( u[ k + 5 ] - u[ k - 5 ]), |k| 10
20
(C) ( u[ k + 5 ] - u[ k + 6 ]), |k| 10

(D) ( u[ k + 5 ] - u[ k - 6 ]), |k| 10
(D) {...0, 1, 2, 3, 4, ...}
************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
319
The Discrete-Time Fourier Series
11. (D) N = 7, W o =
x[ n] =
X [ k]e
2p
,
7
2 p
kn
j
7
17. (C) Note that y[ n] = x[ n] + x [ n + N 2 ] has a period
= 2e
2 p
n
j ( -1 )
7
- 1 + 2e
of N 2 and N has been assumed to be even,
2 p
n
j (1 )
7
Y [ k] =
n = -3
2p
= 4 cos
n - 1
7
p
- j k
6
p
j kn
6
e
=
9p
j ( n -1 )
6
p
j ( n -1 )
1-e 6
13. (A) N = 19, W o =
sin 3p ( n - 1)
=
4
sin
( n - 1)
12
4 p
kn
- j
N
n =0
19. (C) y[ n] = x *[ -n]

1
Y [ k] =
N
2p
19
N -1
x [ -n]e
*
2 p
kn
- j
N
= X *[ k]
n =0
20. (A) With N even
10 p
10 p
X [ k] = cos
k + 2 j sin
k
19
19
=
( x[ n] + x[ n + N 2 ]) e
k even
0,
=
2
X
[
k
],
k
odd
k = -6
1-e
2 p N
k
- j
Y [ k] = 1 - e N 2 X [ k] = (1 - e - jpk ) X [ k]
p
j k ( n -1 )
6
k = -6
p
j ( -4 ) ( n -1 )
6
N 2 -1
18. (B) y[ n] = x[ n] - x [ n - N 2 ]
2
N
= 2 X [2 k] for 0 k ( N 2 - 1)
- j k
p
12. (C) N = 12, W o = , X [ k] = e 6
6
x[ n] =
Chap 5.8
y[ n] = ( -1) n x[ n] = e jpn x[ n] = e
2p
2p
2p
2p
- j ( 5)
k
k
- j(2 )
k
- j ( -2 ) 19
1 - j ( -5) 19 k
19
19
e
e
+
e
+
+
e

Y [ k] =
By inspection
19
x[ n] =
( d[ n + 5 ] + d[ n - 5 ]) + 19 ( d[ n + 2 ] - d [ n - 2 ]),
2
Where |n| 9
1
N
1
N
N -1
2 p N
j
N 2
x[ n]e
2 p N
j
N 2
x[ n]
2 p
kn
- j
N
n =0
N -1
x[ n]e
2 p
N
n k -
- j
2
N
= X [k - N 2]
n =0
21. (B) y[ n] is shown is fig. S5.8.21. It has fundamental

y[n]
14. (A) N = 21, W o =
2p
21
1
9
2p
- j ( -4 ) k
21
2p
- j(4 ) k
21
8 p 1
X [ k] = cos
k = e
+e
21
2
1
Since X [ k] =
x[ n]e- jkWon , By inspection
N n=N
-1
15. (B) Y [ k] =
2 p
1 - j N kn o
e
N
1
N
N -1
x[ n - n ]e
o
n =0
x[ n]e
2 p
kn
- j
N
2 p
kn o
- j
N
22. (B) Y [ k] =
=
1
1-e
10
16. (C) Y [ k] = X [ k] - e
X [ k] = 1 - e
n
10 11
y[ n]e
2 p
kn
- j
10
n =0
1
=
10
1 - e
8 p
- j k
5
23. (A) y [ n] = x [ n] - x [ n - 1]
X [ k]
4 p
k
- j
N
1
10
2 p
k8
- j
10
n =0
2 p
2 k
- j
N
period of 10.
2 p
kn
- j
N
=e
Fig. S5.8.21
21
, n = 4
x[ n] = 2
0, otherwise n { -10, - 9, ......9. 10}
N -1
X [ k]
Y [ k] = X [ k] - e
www.gatehelp.com
2 p
k
- j
10
X [ k]
X [ k] =
Y [ k]
1-e
p
- j k
5
Page
321
UNIT 5
X [ k] =
e
-j
e
2
p
- j k
10
p
j k
10
Y [ k]
-e
p
- j k
10
p
cosec
10
24. (D) W o =
p
j k
10
p
j k
10
29. (D) Since the FS coefficient repeat every N. Thus
Y [ k]
pk
2 j sin
10
e
Signal & System
X [1] = X [15 ], X [2 ] = X [16 ], X [ 3] = X [17 ]

The signal real and odd, the FS coefficient X [ k] will be
purely imaginary and odd. Therefore X[0 ] = 0
k Y [ k]
X [ -1] = - X [1], X [ -2 ] = - X [2 ], X [ -3] = - X [ 3]

Therefore (D) is correct option.
p
, Y [ k] = X [ k - 5 ] + X [ k + 5 ]
10
30. (C) Since N = 10, X [11] = X [1] = 5
p
j ( -5) n
j ( 5) p n
p
y[ n] = e 10 + e 10 x[ n] = 2 cos n x[ n]
2
Since x[ n] is real and even X [ k] is also real and even.

Therefore X [1] = X [ -1] = 5.
Using Parsevals relation
e
p
25. (B) Y [ k] = cos k X [ k] =
5
p
j k
5
+e
2
p
-j k
5
X [ k]
X [ -1] + X [1] + X [0 ] +
2
X [0 ] +
X [ k]
27. (A) Y [ k] =Re{ X [ k]} y[ n] =Ev{ x[ n]} =
x[ n] = X [ k]e
2
x[ n] + x[ -n]
2
= 5 e
2 p
kn
j
N
2p
,
6
k = -1
1
X [0 ] = ,
3
1
6
n =0
Z[ k ] = X [ 0 ] Y [ k ] + X [ 1 ] Y [ k - 1 ] + X [ 2 ] Y [ k - 2 ] + X [ 3 ] Y [ k - 3 ]
32. (A) N = 20 We know that
1
1
x[ n] = , X [ 3] =
6
6
P = X [ k] ,
|n| 5
1,
0, 5 <|n| 10
The value of P is minimized by choosing

X [1] = X [2 ] = X [ 4 ] = X [5 ] = 0
Therefore
x[ n] = X [0 ] + X [ 3]e
p
10
3n
1
1 1
1
+ ( -1) n = + ( -1) n
3
6 3
6
Using duality
11p
sin
n
p
DTFS ;
20
10
p
sin
n
20
1 1 1 1 1
x[ n] = ... , , , , , ...
2 6 2 6 2
11p
sin
k
20
p
sin
k
20
|k| 5
1 1,
20 0, 5 <|k| 10
*********
Page
322
DTFS ;
k=0
2p
X [ l ]Y [ k - l ]
Thus Z [ k] = 6, for all k.
By Parsevals relation, the average power in x[ n] is

5
DTFS

Since Y [ k] is 1 for all values of k.
( -1) n x[ n] = 1
2 p
( 3) k
j
6
= 10 cos p n
= Y [ k] + 2 Y [ k - 1] + 2 Y [ k - 2 ] + Y [ k - 3]
1
x[ n] =
3
n =2
5
2 p
n
j
10
l= 0
From fact 3,
2 p
kn
j
10
Z [ k] = X [ l ]Y [ k - l ]
x[ n] = 2
n =0
+e
X [ k]e
k =< N>
n =0
2p
- j n
10
31. (A) z[ n] = x[ n] y[ n]
1
6
= 50
Therefore X [ k] = 0 for k = 0, 2, 3, ..... 8.
26. (C) Y [ k] = X [ k] * X [ k] y[ n] = x[ n] x[ n] = ( x[ n])
2 p
( 0 ) k
j
6
k = -1
=0
X [ k]
X [ k]
k=2
1
y[ n] = ( x[ n - 2 ] + x[ n + 2 ])
2
From fact 2,
= 50 =
k=2
28. (A) N = 6, W o =
j ( -2 )
k
1 j(2 ) k
10
= e 10 + e
X [ k]
2
X [ k]
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
6.1
TRANSFER FUNCTION
1. The equivalent transfer function of three parallel
R(s)
C(s)
G(s)
blocks
G1 ( s) =
1
1
s+3
, G2 ( s) =
and G3( s) =
is
s+1
s+4
s+5
H(s)
Fig. P.6.1.3
( s 3 + 10 s 2 + 34 s + 37)
(A)
( s + 1)( s + 4)( s + 5)
(A)
( s + 3)
( s + 1)( s + 4)( s + 5)
s( s + 2)( s + 3)
s + 7 s 2 + 12 s + 3
(B)
-( s 3 + 10 s 2 + 34 s + 37)
( s + 1)( s + 4)( s + 5)
s( s + 2)( s + 3)
s + 5 s2 + 4 s - 3
(C)
-( s + 3)
( s + 1)( s + 4)( s + 5)
( s + 1)( s + 4)
s + 7 s 2 + 12 s + 3
(D)
( s + 1)( s + 4)
s + 5 s2 + 4 s - 3
(B)
(C)
(D)
2. The block having transfer function
4. A feedback control system is shown in fig. P.6.1.4.
1
1
s+1
, G2 ( s) =
, G3( s) =
G1 ( s) =
s+2
s+5
s+3
The transfer function for this system is

R
are cascaded. The equivalent transfer function is

(A)
(B)
( s 3 + 10 s 2 + 37 s 2 + 31)
( s + 2)( s + 3)( s + 5)
1
G1
G3
Fig. P.6.1.4
-( s 3 + 10 s 2 + 37 s 2 + 31)
(C)
( s + 2)( s + 3)( s + 5)
(A)
G1 G2
1 + H1 G1 G2 G3
-( s + 1)
(D)
( s + 2)( s + 3)( s + 5)
(B)
G2 G3
G1 (1 + H1 G2 G3)
(C)
G2 G3
1 + H1 G1 G2 G3
(D)
G2 G3
G1 (1 + H1 G2 G3)
3. For a negative feedback system shown in fig. P.6.1.3

s+1
s+3
and H ( s) =
s( s + 2)
s+4
G2
H2
s+1
( s + 2) ( s + 3) ( s + 5)
G( s) =
The equivalent transfer function is

www.gatehelp.com
Page
325
UNIT 6
5. Consider the system shown in fig. P.6.1.5.

R(s)
G1
G2
(D)
Control Systems
G1 G2
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G1 G2 H1 H 2
C(s)
+
8. The closed loop gain of the system shown in fig.

P6.1.8 is
Fig. P.6.1.5
The input output relationship of this system is

R(s)
C(s)
G1G2
R(s)
1 + G1 + G1G2
(A)
R(s)
Fig.P6.1.8
(B)
C(s)
G1 + G2
R(s)
1 + G2 + G1G2
(C)
1
3
C(s)
C(s)
(D)
(A) -2
(B) 6
(C) -6
(D) 2
9. The block diagrams shown in fig. P.6.1.9 are
6. A feedback control system shown in fig. P.6.1.6 is
equivalent if G is equal to
R(s)
C(s)
s+2
s+1
subjected to noise N ( s).

N(s)
R(s)
R(s)
+
G1
1
s+1
C(s)
G2
Fig. P.6.1.6
C ( s)
The noise transfer function N
is
N ( s)
G2
1 + G1 G2 H
(B)
G2
(C)
1 + G2 H
C(s)
+
Fig. P.6.1.9
H2
(A)
(A) s + 1
(B) 2
(C) s + 2
(D) 1
10. Consider the systems shown in fig. P.6.1.10. If the
G2
1 + G1 H
forward path gain is reduced by 10% in each system,

then the variation in C1 and C2 will be respectively
R1
R2
7. A system is shown in fig. P6.1.7. The transfer
16
C1
C2
10
function for this system is

H1
R(s)
G1
Fig. P.6.1.10
+
G2
C(s)
(A) 10% and 1%
(B) 2% and 10%
(C) 10% and 0%
(D) 5% and 1%
H2
Fig. P.6.1.7
(A)
(B)
(C)
Page
326
G1 G2
1 + G1 G1 H 2 + G2 H1
11. The transfer function
C
R
of the system shown in the
fig. P.6.1.11 is
R
G1 G2
1 + G1 G2 + H1 H 2
1
H1
H2
G1
G2
G1 G2
1 - G1 H1 - G2 H 2 + G1 G2 H1 H 2
Fig. P.6.1.11
www.gatehelp.com
Transfer Function
(A)
(C)
G1 H 2
H1 (1 + G1 G2 H 2 )
(B)
G2 G1
1 + H1 H 2 G1 G2
(D)
Chap 6.1
15. A closed-loop system is shown in fig. P.6.1.15. The
G1 G2 H 2
H1 (1 + G1 G2 H 2 )
noise transfer function Cn ( s) N ( s) is approximately
G1 G2
H1 (1 + G1 G2 H 2 )
R(s) 1
G1 C(s)
-H2
H1
12. In the signal flow graph shown in fig. P6.1.12 the
sum of loop gain of non-touching loops is

t32
x2
x1
Fig. P.6.1.15
t56
t45
t34
t23
t12
N(s)
t44
t43
x5
x4
x3
x6
(A)
1
For |G1 ( s) H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)| << 1
G1 ( s) H1 ( s)
(B)
1
For |G1 ( s) H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)| >> 1
-H1 ( s)
(C)
1
For |G1 ( s) H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)| >> 1
H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)
(D)
1
For |G1 ( s) H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)| << 1
G1 ( s) H1 ( s) H 2 ( s)
t24
t25
Fig. P.6.1.12
(A) t32 t23 + t44
(B) t23t32 + t34 t43
(C) t24 t43t32 + t44
(D) t23t32 + t34 t43 + t44
13. For the SFG shown in fig. P.6.1.14 the graph

determinant D is
-c
16. The overall transfer function
of the system shown
in fig. P.6.1.16 will be
C
R
-H1
-H2
1
R
Fig. P.6.1.16
(A) G
-g
(B)
G
1 + H2
(D)
G
1 + H1 + H 2
Fig. P.6.1.13
(A) 1 - bc - fg - bcfg + cigj
(C)
G
(1 + H1 )(1 + H 2 )
(B) 1 - bc - fg - cigj + bcfg

(C) 1 + bc + fg + cig j - bcfg
17. Consider the signal flow graphs shown in fig.
(D) 1 + bc + fg + bcfg - cigj
P6.1.17. The transfer 2 is of the graph

1
14. The sum of the gains of the feedback paths in the

1
signal flow graph shown in fig. P.6.1.13 is

1
1
1
1
1
2
Fig. P.6.1.14
(C) af + be + cd + abef + abcdef

(D) af + be + cd + cbef + bcde + abcdef
1
1
2
1
2
(A) af + be + cd + abef + bcde

(B) af + be + cd
1
2
Fig. P.6.1.17
(A) a
(B) b
(C) b and c
(D) a, b and c
www.gatehelp.com
Page
327
UNIT 6
Control Systems
18. Consider the List I and List II

List I
-H3
List II
(Signal Flow Graph)
R(s) 1
(A)
(Transfer Function)
-H2
3
G1
1 C(s)
C(s)
C(s)
C(s)
G2
-H1H2
P.
Q.
xi
xi
xo
-H2
2
3
G1
G2
-H2
a xo
a
3.
(1 - ab)
S.
b
R.
-H2
xi 1
2. ab
b
xi 1
R(s) 1
(B)
xo
-H3
1. a + b
1 xo
4.
R(s) 1
(C)
G2
G1
-H3
-H1H2
a
1-b
H3
R(s) 1
(D)
G2
G1
H2
(A)
(B)
(C)
21. The block diagram of a system is shown in fig.
(D)
P.6.1.21. The closed loop transfer function of this system
-H1
19. For the signal flow graph shown in fig. P6.1.19 an
is
H1
equivalent graph is
ta
R(s)
tc
e1
G1
e1
Fig. P.6.1.21
tc+ td
tatb
e1
e4
(A)
e4
e3
(B)
ta + tb
e1
tatb
tctd
e2
e4
e1
(C)
1
+
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 G2 G3 H1
(B)
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 G2 G3 H1 H 2
(C)
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 G2 H1 + G2 G3 H 2
(D)
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 G2 H1 + G1 G3 H 2 + G2 G3 H1
tc+ td
e4
e2
block diagram shown in figure
P.6.1.20
R(s)
(A)
(D)
20. Consider the
2
+
C(s)
H2
tctd
e3
G3
e4
e3
Fig. P.6.1.19
ta + tb
G2
td
e2
tb
G2
4
G2
22. For the system shown in fig. P6.1.22 transfer

C(s)
function C( s) R( s) is
G3
H2
H1
R(s)
G1
G2
H3
H1
Fig. P.6.1.20
H2
For this system the signal flow graph is
Fig. P.6.1.22
Page
328
www.gatehelp.com
C(s)
Transfer Function
(A)
26. The transfer function of the system shown in fig.
G3
1 - H1 G2 - H 2 G3 - G1 G2 H 2
(B)
G3 + G1 G2
1 + H1 G2 + H 2 G3 + G1 G2 H 2
(C)
G3
1 + H1 G2 + H 2 G3 + G1 G2 H 2
Chap 6.1
P.6.1.26 is
R(s)
+
+
G1
C(s)
G2
H1
H2
Fig. P.6.1.26
G3
(D)
1 - H1 G2 - H 2 G3 - G1 G2 H 2
(A)
G1 G2
1 - G1 G2 H1 - G1 G2 H 2
(B)
G1 G2
1 - G2 H 2 - G1 G2 H1
(C)
G1 G2
1 - G2 H 2 + G1 G2 H1 H 2
(D)
G1 G2
1 - G1 G2 H1 H 2
transfer function is
3
27. For the block diagram shown in fig. P.6.1.27

transfer function C( s) R( s) is
-3
Fig. P.6.1.23
(B) -3
(C) 3
(D) -3.75
R(s)
G1
+
-1
-1
-1
G3
G5
G4
G2
(A) 3.75
gain C R is
C(s)
G8
G7
G6
Fig. P.6.1.27
(A)
G1 G2
1 + G1 G2 + G1 G7G3 + G1 G2 G8 G6 + G1 G2 G3G7G5
Fig. P.6.1.24
44
(A)
23
(B)
29
19
(B)
G1 G2
1 + G1 G4 + G1 G2 G8 + G1 G2 G5G7 + G1 G2 G3G6 G7
44
19
(D)
29
11
(C)
G1 + G2
1 + G1 G4 + G1 G2 G8 + G1 G2 G5G7 + G1 G2 G3G6 G7
(D)
G1 + G2
1 + G1 G2 + G3G6 G7 + G1 G3G4 G5 + G1 G2 G3G6 G7G8
(C)
25. The gain C( s) R( s) of the signal flow graph shown in

fig. P.6.1.25 is
28. For the block diagram shown in fig. P.6.1.28 the
G4
G3
R(s) 1
1 C(s)
G1
numerator of transfer function is
G2
G1
-H1
Fig. P.6.1.25
(A)
G1 G2 + G2 G3
1 + G1 G2 H1 + G2 G3 H1 + G4
(B)
G1 G2 + G2 G3
1 + G1 G3 H1 + G2 G3 H1 - G4
(C)
G1 G3 + G2 G3
1 + G1 G3 H1 + G2 G3 H1 - G4
(D)
G1 G3 + G2 G3
1 + G1 G3 H1 + G2 G3 H1 + G4
R(s)
G2
G5
G6
C(s)
G3
G4
Fig. P.6.1.28
(A) G6 [ G4 + G3 + G5( G3 + G2 )]
(B) G6 [ G2 + G3 + G5( G3 + G4 )]
www.gatehelp.com
Page
329
UNIT 6
Control Systems
33. The closed loop transfer function of the system
(C) G6 [ G1 + G2 + G3( G4 + G5)]

G1
29. For the block diagram shown in fig. P.6.1.29 the
transfer function C( s) R( s) is
50( s - 2)
50( s - 2)
(A) 3
(B) 3
2
s + s + 150 s - 100
s + s 2 + 150 s
(C)
50 s
s + s + 150 s - 100
3
(D)
+
+
G2
G3
H1
50
s + s + 150
Fig. P.6.1.32

30. For the SFG shown in fig. P.6.1.30 the transfer
function
C
R
G2
is
G2
G1
-H1
G3
-H2
-H3
+
+
G1
+
+
G3
H3
G4
H2
Fig. P.6.1.30
H1
Fig. P.6.1.33
(A)
G1 + G2 + G3
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3
(A)
G1 G2 G3 + G2 G3G4 + G1 G4
1 + G1 G3G4 H1 H 2 H 3 + G2 H 4 H1 H 2 + G4 H1
(B)
G1 + G2 + G3
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H1 H 3
(B)
G2 G4 + G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 G3 H1 H 2 H 3 + G4 H1 + G3G4 H1 H 2
(C)
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3
(C)
G1 G3G4 + G2 G4
1 + G3G4 H1 H 2 + G4 H1 + G1 G3 H 3 H 2
(D)
G1 G2 G3
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H1 H 3
(D)
G1 G3G4 + G2 G3G4 + G2 G4
1 + G1 G3G4 H1 H 2 H 3 + G3G4 H1 H 2 + G4 H1
31. Consider the SFG shown in fig. P6.1.31. The D for

this graph is

A block diagram of feedback control system is
G4
shown in fig. P6.1.34-37
-H3
R
G2
G1
G3
-H1
R1(s)
+
+
R2(s)
+
+
+
C1(s)
-H2
Fig. P.6.1.31
(A) 1 + G1 H1 + G2 G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H 2
(B) 1 + G1 H1 - G2 G3 H 3 - G1 G3 H 3 + G2 G4 H 2 H 3
(C) 1 + G1 H1 + G2 G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H 3 - G2 G4 H 2 H 3
32. The transfer function of the system shown in fig.
(C)
Page
330
G2 G3 + G1 G3
1 + G3 H1 + G2 G3
C2(s)
Fig. P.6.1.34-37
(D) 1 + G1 H1 + G2 G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H 3 + G2 G4 H 2 H 3
P.6.1.32 is
G2 G3 + G1 G3
(A)
1 - G3 H1 + G2 G3
C1
R1
is
R2 = 0
(B)
G2 G3 + G1 G3
1 + G3 H1 - G2 G3
(A)
G
1 - 2G2
(B)
G(1 - G)
1 - 2G2
(D)
G2 G3 + G1 G3
1 - G3 H1 - G2 G3
(C)
G(1 - 2 G)
1 - G2
(D)
G
1 - G2
www.gatehelp.com
Transfer Function

(A)
(C)
C1
R2
R1 = 0
(B)
G2
1 - 2G2
(D)
C2
R1
G (1 + G)
(A)
1 - 2G2
G
1 - G2
G
1 - G2
+
+
2s
C2(s)
Fig. P.6.1.40-41
is
R2 = 0
G
1 - G2
(D)
G(1 + G)
(A)
1 - 2G2
1
s
G2
(B)
1 - 2G2
C
37. The transfer function 2
R2
(C)
R1(s)
G2
1 - G2
(C)
40. The transfer function for this system is
is
G
1 - 2G2
Chap 6.1
(A)
2 s(2 s + 1)
2 s 2 + 3s + 5
(B)
2 s(2 s + 1)
2 s 2 + 13s + 5
(C)
2 s(2 s + 1)
4 s 2 + 13s + 5
(D)
2 s(2 s + 1)
4 s 2 + 3s + 5
41. The pole of this system are
is
R1 = 0
(A) -0.75 j1.39
(B) -0.41, - 6.09
(C) -0.5,
(D) -0.25 j0.88
- 1.67
G
(B)
1 - 2G2
G
1+ G
(D)
G
1 - G2
********

A signal flow graph is shown in fig. P.6.1.3839.
G4
Y1
Y2
G1
Y3
-H1
Y4 G3
G2
Y5
Y5
-H2
-H3
Fig. P.6.1.38-39
Y2
is
Y1
1 + G2 H 2
D
(A)
1
D
(B)
(C)
G1 G2 G3
D
Y5
is
Y2
(A)
G1 G2 G3 + G4 G3
D
(B) G1 G2 G3 + G4 G3
(C)
G1 G2 G3 + G4 G3
G1 G2 G3
(D)
G1 G2 G3 + G4 G3
1 + G2 H 2

A block diagram is shown in fig. P6.1.4041.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
331
UNIT 6
SOLUTIONS
C2 =
C2 =
9
9
= , C2 is reduced by 1%.
9 + 1 10
11. (A) Apply the feedback formula and then multiply

1
by
,
H1
1. (A) Ge ( s) = G1 ( s) + G2 ( s) + G3( s)
=
1
1
s+3
+
+
( s + 1) ( s + 4) ( s + 5)
s 2 + 9s + 20 + s 2 + 6s + 5 + s 3 + 5s 2 + 4s + 3s 2 + 15s + 12
(s + 1)(s + 4)(s + 5)
s 3 + 10 s 2 + 34 s + 37
( s + 1)( s + 4)( s + 5)
1
( H 2 G1 )
C
H 2 G1
H1 =
=
R
H1 (1 + G1 G2 H 2 )
1 + H 2 G1 G2
12. (A) There cannot be common subscript because
2. (B) Ge ( s) = G1 ( s) G2 ( s) G3( s) =
3. (C)
10
10
,
=
10 + 1 11
Control Systems
( s + 1)
( s + 2)( s + 5)( s + 3)
subscript refers to node number. If subscript is common,

that means that node is in both loop.
C( s)
G( s)
=
R( s) 1 + H ( s) G( s)
13. (D) L1 = -bc, L2 = - fg, L3 = jgic, L1 L3 = bcfg

D = 1 - ( -bc - fg + cigj) + bcfg = 1 + bc + fg - cig j + bcfg
s+1
( s + 1)( s + 4)
s( s + 2)
=
= 3
( s + 3) ( s + 1)
s + 7 s 2 + 12 s + 3
1+
( s + 4) s( s + 2)
14. (A) In this graph there are three feedback loop. abef
is not a feedback path because between path x2 is a
summing node.
4. (B) Multiply G2 and G3 and apply feedback formula

and then again multiply with
T( s) =
1
.
G1
P1 = - H 2 G1 , L1 = - G1 H 2 H1 , D1 = 1,
G2 G3
G1 (1 + G2 G3 H1 )
if |G1 H 2 H1 | >> 1, Tn ( s) =
5. (D) T( s) = G2 (1 + G1 ) + 1 = 1 + G1 + G1 G2
TN ( s) =
T( s) =
G2
1 + G1 G2 H
7. (D) Apply the feedback formula to both loop and then
G2
+
1
G2 H 2
- H 2 G1
-1
=
G1 H 2 H1 H1
G
G
=
1 + H1 + H 2 + H1 H 2 (1 + H1 )(1 + H 2 )
17. (B) Ga = 1, Gb = 1 + 1 = 2, Gc =
1 1 1 1
+ + + =1
4 4 4 4
18. (B)
P. P1 = ab, D = 1, L = 0 , T = ab
G1 G2
1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G1 G2 H1 H 2
8. (C) For positive feedback
Q. P1 = a, P2 = b , D = 1, L = Dk = 0, T = a + b
a
R. P1 = a, L1 = b, D = 1 - b, D1 = 1, T =
a-b
a
S. P1 = a, L1 = ab, D = 1 - ab, D1 = 1, T =
1 - ab
C
6
=
=-6
R 1 - 6 31
9. (D) For system (b) closed loop transfer function

G
G + s+1 G + s+1 s+2
,
,
Hence G = 1
+1=
=
s+1
s+1
s+1
s+1
Page
332
- H 2 G1
1 + G1 H 2 H1
There are no loop in any graph. So option (B) is correct.
multiply
G1
T( s) =
1
+
G1 H1
Tn ( s) =
16. (C) P1 = G , L1 = - H1 , L2 = - H 2 , L1 L2 = H1 H 2 , D1 = 1
6. (A) Open-loop gain = G2

Feed back gain = HG1
15. (B) By putting R ( s) = 0
19. (A) Between e1 and e2 , there are two parallel path.

Combining them gives ta + tb . Between e2 and e4 there
is a path given by total gain tc td . So remove node e3 and
10. (A) In open loop system change will be 10% in C1
place gain tc td of the branch e2 e4 . Hence option (A) is
also but in closed loop system change will be less
correct.
www.gatehelp.com
Transfer Function
20. (A) Option (A) is correct. Best method is to check the
Chap 6.1
28. (A) SFG:
signal flow graph. In block diagram there is feedback
G3
from 4 to 1 of gain -H1 H 2 . The signal flow graph of
G4
G3
option (A) has feedback from 4 to 1 of gain -H1 H 2 .
21. (C) Consider the block diagram as SFG. There are
G5
G2
-G1
22. (B) Consider the block diagram as a SFG. Two

forward path G1 G2 and G3 and three loops
P1 = G2 G5G6 , P2 = G3G5G6 , P3 = G3G6 , P4 = G4 G6

If any path is deleted, there would not be any loop.
Hence D1 = D2 = D3 = D4 = 1
C G4 G6 + G3G6 + G3G5G6 + G2 G5G6
=
D
R
-G1 G2 H 2 , - G2 H1 , - G3 H 2 .
There are no nontouching loop. So (B) is correct.
23. (C) P1 = 5 3 2 = 30, D = 1 - ( 3 - 3) = 10
29. (A)
C 30
D1 = 1 ,
=
=3
R 10
-2
s
1
s2
L3 = -4, L4 = -5,
-1
L1 L3 = 8, D = 1 - ( -2 - 3 - 4 - 5) + 8 = 23,
Fig. S6.1.29
D1 = 1, D2 = 1 - ( -3) = 4,
C 24 + 5 4 44
=
=
R
24
23
P1 =
1
50
50
s=
s2 ( s + 1)
s( s + 1)
P2 =
1 50
-100
( -2) = 2
s2 s + 1
s ( s + 1)
L1 =
50 -2
-100
=
s+1 s
s( s + 1)
L2 =
1 50
-50
s ( -1) =
s2 s + 1
s( s + 1)
L3 =
1 50
100
( -2) ( -1) = 2
s2 s + 1
s ( s + 1)
P2 = G3G2
L1 = -G3G2 H1 , L2 = -G1 G2 H1 ,
-2
1
50
(s + 1)
24. (A) P1 = 2 3 4 = 24 , P2 = 1 5 1 = 5
25. (B) P1 = G1 G2 ,
Fig. S6.1.28
forward path G1 G2 G3 . So (D) is correct option.
L2 = -3,
-1
two feedback loop -G1 G2 H1 and -G2 G3 H 2 and one
L1 = -2 ,
G6
L3 = G4 , D1 = D2 = 1
There are no nontouching loop.

P1 D1 + P2 D2
G1 G2 + G2 G3
T( s) =
=
1 - ( L1 + L2 + L3) 1 + G1 G2 H1 + G2 G3 H1 - G4
26. (C) P1 = G1 G2 , L1 = -G1 G2 H1 H 2 , L2 = G2 H 2
C( s)
G1 G2
=
R( s) 1 + G1 G2 H1 H 2 - G2 H 2
27. (B) There is one forward path G1 G2 .
D =1 +
100
50
100
+
s( s + 1) s( s + 1) s 2 ( s + 1)
D1 = D2 = 1
C P1 + P2
50( s - 2)
=
= 3
R
D
s + s2 + 150 s - 100
Four loops -G1 G4 , - G1 G2 G8 , - G1 G2 G5G7

30. (D) P1 = G1 G2 G3
and -G1 G2 G3G6 G7 .
L1 = - G1 H1 , L2 = - G2 H 2 , L3 = - G3 H 3
R(s) 1
G2
G1
1 C(s)
D = 1 - ( - G1 H1 - G2 H 2 - G3 H 3 ) + G1 G3 H1 H 3
1
-H1
L1 L3 = G1 G3 H1 H 3
H2
Fig. S6.1.27
There is no nontouching loop. So (B) is correct.
D = 1 + G1 H1 + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H1 H 3
D1 = 1
C
G1 G2 G3
=
R 1 + G1 H! + G2 H 2 + G3 H 3 + G1 G3 H1 H 3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
333
CHAPTER
6.2
STABILITY
1. Consider the system shown in fig. P6.2.1. The range

of K for the stable system is
R(s)
E(s)
C(s)
K(s2 - 2s + 2)
The range of K to ensure stability is

6
3
(A) K >
(B) K < - 1 or K >
8
4
(C) K < - 1
(D) -1 < K <
3
4
1
s2 + 2s + 1
5. Consider a ufb system with forward-path transfer
Fig. P6.2.1
(A) -1 < K < -
1
2
function
(B) -
(C) -1 < K < 1
1
< K <1
2
G( s) =
(D) Unstable
The system is stable for the range of K
2. The forward transfer function of a ufb system is

G( s) =
K ( s + 3)
s 4 ( s + 2)
K ( s 2 + 1)
( s + 1)( s + 2)
(A) K > 0
(B) K < 0
(C) K > 1
(D) Always unstable
6. The open-loop transfer function of a ufb
The system is stable for
control
system is
(A) K < - 1
(B) K > -1
(C) K < - 2
(D) K > -2
G( s) =
3. The open-loop transfer function with ufb are given

below for different systems. The unstable system is
For K > 6, the stability characteristic of the

open-loop and closed-loop configurations of the system
(A)
2
s+2
(B)
2
s 2 ( s + 2)
are respectively
(C)
2
s( s + 2)
(D)
2( s + 1)
s( s + 2)
(B) stable and stable
(A) stable and unstable
(C) unstable and stable

function
K ( s + 2)
( s + 1)( s - 7)
(D) unstable and unstable

7. The forward-path transfer function of a ufb system is
G( s) =
K ( s + 3)( s + 5)
( s - 2)( s - 4)
G( s) =
www.gatehelp.com
K ( s 2 - 4)
s2 + 3
Page
335
UNIT 6
For the system to be stable the range of K is

3
(A) K > -1
(B) K <
4
(C) -1 < K <
3
4
Control & System
13. The open-loop transfer function of a ufb system is

R(s)
C(s)
1
s(s + 1)(s + 5)
(D) marginal stable

Fig. P6.2.12
8. A ufb system have the forward-path transfer function

G( s) =
K ( s + 6)
s( s + 1)( s + 3)
G( s) =
K ( s + 10)( s + 20)
s 2 ( s + 2)
The closed loop system will be stable if the value of
The system is stable for

(A) K < 6
(B) -6 < K < 0
K is
(C) 0 < K < 6
(D) K > 6
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
9. The feedback control system shown in the fig. P6.2.8.

R(s)
K(1 + Ts)
s2(1 + s)
C(s)
A feedback system is shown in fig. P6.14-15.

2
s
Fig. P6.2.9
R(s)
+
is stable for all positive value of K , if

(A) T = 0
(B) T < 0
(C) T > 1
(D) 0 < T < 1
C(s)
+
s2
1
s+1
Fig. P6.2.1415

function
14. The closed loop transfer function for this system is

K
G( s) =
( s + 15)( s + 27)( s + 38)
The system will oscillate for the value of K equal to

(A) 23690
(B) 2369
(C) 144690
(D) 14469
(A)
s 5 + s 4 + 2 s 3 + ( K + 2) s 2 + ( K + 2) s + K
s3 + s2 + 2 s + K
(B)
2 s 4 + ( K + 2) s 3 + Ks 2
s3 + s2 + 2 s + K
(C)
s3 + s2 + 2 s + K
s 5 + s 4 + 2 s 3 + ( K + 2) s 2 + ( K + 2) s + K
(D)
s3 + s2 + 2 s + K
2 s + ( K + 2) s 3 + Ks 2

G( s) =
K ( s - 2)( s + 4)( s + 5)
( s 2 + 3)
1
3
<K <
54
40
15. The poles location for this system is shown in fig.
For system to be stable, the range of K is

1
3
(A) K >
(B) K <
54
40
(C)
K
s2
P6.2.15. The value of K is

jw
(D) Unstable
s
12. The closed loop system shown in fig. P6.2.12 become

marginally stable if the constant K is chosen to be
Page
336
(A) 30
(B) -30
(C) 10
(D) -10
Fig. P6.2.15
(A) 4
(B) -4
(C) 2
(D) -2
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 6
(A) stable
Control & System
32. The closed loop transfer function of a system is
(B) unstable
(C) marginally stable
T( s) =
(D) More information is required.
( s + 8)( s + 6)
s 5 - s 4 + 4 s 3 - 4 s 2 + 3s - 2
The number of poles in RHP and in LHP are

27. The forward path transfer of ufb system is
1
G( s) = 2 2
4 s ( s + 1)
(A) 4, 1
(B) 1, 4
(C) 3, 2
(D) 2, 3
The system is
(A) stable
(B) unstable
T( s) =
s 3 + 3s 2 + 7 s + 24
s - 2 s 4 + 3s 3 - 6 s 2 + 2 s - 4
5
The number of poles in LHP, in RHP, and on jw
(D) More information is required
axis are
G( s) =
G( s)
2 s4 + 5 s3 + s2 + 2 s
(B) 0, 1, 4
(C) 1, 0, 4
(D) 1, 2, 2
34. For the system shown in fig. P6.2.34. the number
The system is
(A) stable
(A) 2, 1, 2
of poles on RHP, LHP, and imaginary axis are
(B) unstable
R(s)
C(s)
507
s4 + 3s3 + 10s2 + 30s + 169
(D) more information is required.

1
s
29. The open loop transfer function of a system is as
Fig. P6.2.34
K ( s + 0.1)
s( s - 0.2)( s 2 + s + 0.6)
G( s) H ( s) =
(A) 2, 3, 0
(B) 3, 2, 0
(C) 2, 1, 2
(D) 1, 2, 2
The range of K for stable system will be

(A) K > 0.355
(B) 0.149 < K < 0.355
35. A Routh table is shown in fig. P6.2.36. The location
(C) 0.236 < K < 0.44
(D) K > 0.44
of pole on RHP, LHP and imaginary axis are
30. The open-loop transfer function of a ufb control

system is given by
G( s) =
K
s( sT1 + 1)( sT2 + 1)
s7
s5
s5
s4
-1
For the system to be stable the range of K is

1
1
(A) 0 < K <
+
T1 T2
1
1
(B) K >
+
T1 T2
(C) 0 < K < T1 T2
(D) K > T1 T2
(A) 1, 2, 4
(B) 1, 6, 0
(C) 1, 0, 6
36. For the open loop system of fig. P6.2.35 location of
poles on RHP, LHP, and an jw-axis are
s + 4 s + 8 s + 16
s + 3s 4 + 5 s 2 + s + 3
3
T( s) =
Fig. P6.2.35
R(s)
Page
338
(A) 3, 2
(B) 2, 3
(C) 1, 4
(D) 4, 1
C(s)
Fig. P6.2.35
The number of poles in right half-plane and in left

half-plane are
-8
s6 + s5 - 6s4 + s2 + s - 6
(A) 3, 3, 0
(B) 1, 3, 2
(C) 1, 1, 4
(D) 3, 1, 2
************
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 6
11. (C) T( s) =
=
Control & System
K 2
K 2
+ . Then apply feedback formula with 2 + and
2
s
s
s
s
1
, and then multiply with s 2 .
( s + 1)
G( s)
1 + G( s)
K ( s - 2)( s + 4)( s + 5)
Ks + (7 K + 1) s 2 + 2 Ks + ( 3 - 40 K )
3
K 2
s2 2 +
2 s 4 + ( K + 2) s 3 + Ks 2
s
s
T( s) =
=
1 K 2
s3 + s2 + 2 s + K
1+
2 +
s + 1 s
s
Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.211

s3
2K
s2
7K + 1
3 - 40 K
s1
54 K - K
7K + 1
s0
3 - 40 K
15. (C) Denominator = s 3 + s 2 + 2 s + K

Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.15
Fig. S.6.2.11
K > 0,
7K + 1 > 0
54 K 2 - K
>0
7K + 1
3 - 40 K > 0
12. (A) T( s) =
1
K >-
7
1
K >
54
3
K <
40
1
3
<K <
54
40
s2
s1
2-K
s0
K
Fig. S.6.2.15
Row of zeros when K = 2,

s 2 + 2 = 0,
1
s + 6s + 5s + K
3
s3
s = -1, j 2 , - j 2
16. (D) Applying the feedback formula on the inner loop
Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.212

s3
s2
s1
30 - K
s0
and multiplying by K yield

K
,
Ge ( s) =
s( s 2 + 5 s + 7)
T( s) =
K
s + 5s + 7s + K
3
17. (B) Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.17
Fig. S.6.2.12
K ( s + 10)( s + 20)
13. (D) T( s) = 3
s + ( K + 2) s 2 + 30 Ks + 200 K
s3
s2
s1
35- K
5
s0
s3
30K
s2
K +2
200K
s1
30 K 2 - 140 K
s0
200K
Fig. S.6.2.17
K >0 ,
K < 35
Auxiliary equation 5 s 2 + 35 = 0,
200 K > 0
K > 0, 30 K 2 - 140 K > 0
14
K > , 5 satisfy this condition.
3
Page
340
18. (C) At K = 35 system will oscillate.
Fig. S.6.2.13
14. (B) First combine the parallel loop
35 - K
>0
5
K
2
and
giving
2
s
s
19. (B) For inner loop

K
K
,
Gi ( s) =
=
( s - a)( s + 3a)( s + 4 a) P ( s)
For outer loop, Go( s) = Ti ( s) =
www.gatehelp.com
s= j 7
Ti ( s) =
K
,
P ( s) + K
K
P ( s) + K
Stability
To( s) =
K
,
P ( s) + 2 K
Therefore if inner loop is stable for X < K < Y , then

outer loop will be stable for X < 2 K < Y
X
Y
.
<K <
2
2
20. (D) T( s) =
2K - 1
>0
2
18 K - 109
>0
2K - 1
Chap 6.2
1
2
109
K >
18
K >
K ( s + 2)
s 4 + 3s 3 - 3s 2 + ( K + 3) s + (2 K - 4)
2K - 4
s4
20
s3
K
K
-3
s3
K +3
s2
180 - K
9
s2
- ( K +312 )
2K - 4
s1
K ( K - 99)
K -180
s1
K ( K + 33)
K + 12
s0
s0
2K - 4
For stability 0 < K < 99
-( K + 12)
> 0 K < - 12, 2 K - 4 > 0
3
24. (C) T( s) =
K > 2 and K > -33, These condition can not be met

simultaneously. System is unstable
for any value of K
.
s4
-3
s3
K +3
s2
- K + 12
3
2K - 4
s1
K ( K + 33)
K + 12
K -1
K
s0
2K - 4
s
s
K ( s + 2)
s + 3s - 3s + ( K + 3) s + (2 K - 4)
4
21. (D) Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.21
K -1 - K 2
K -1
2K - 4
Fig. S.6.2.24
For K < - 33, 1 sign change
For -33 < K < - 12, 1 sign change
Fig. S.6.2.21
K > 0, K - 1 > 0
Fig. S.6.2.23
Fig. S.6.2.20
s2
109
18
s4 + 9 s3 + 20 s2 + Ks + K = 0
s4
K >
23. (B) Characteristic equation
K >1 ,
For -12 < K < 0, 1 sign change
K -1 - K2
> 0,
K -1
For 0 < K < 2,
3 sign change
But for K > 1 third term is always -ive. Thus the three
For K > 2,
condition cannot be fulfilled simultaneously.
Therefore K > 2 yield two RHP pole.
22. (D) Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.22
2 sign change
s4
s3
20
25
s2
15
18 K -109
2 K -1
s1
25
s0
15
s4
4+K
s3
s2
2 K -1
2
s1
s0
25
Fig. S.6.2.22
15
ROZ
Fig. S.6.2.25
www.gatehelp.com
Page
341
UNIT 6
P ( s) = 3s 2 + 15,
d P ( s)
= 6 s, No sign change from s 2 to s 0
ds
on jw-axis 2 roots, RHP 0,
s
s
s1
s

2
0.4
s3
0.8
K - 0.12
0.1K
35
10
50
s2
0.55 - 125
. K
30
264
s1
-1 .25K 2 + 0 .63K - 0 .066

0 .55-1 .25K
s0
0.1K
-386
264
s4
ROZ
264
K > 0, 0.55 - 125

. K > 0 K < 0.44
Two sign change. RHP-2 poles. System is not stable.

27. (C) Closed loop transfer function
G( s)
1
T( s) =
=
1 + G( s) 4 s 4 + 4 s 2 + 1
-125
. K 2 + 0.63K - 0.066 > 0
( K - 0.149)( K - 0.355) < 0, 0.149 < K < 0.355
30. (A) Characteristic equation
s( sT1 + 1)( sT2 + 1) + K = 0
s4
s3
16
ROZ
s2
s1
46
s0
T1 T2 s 3 + ( T1 + T2 ) s2 + s + K = 0
s3
T1 T2
s2
T1 + T2
Fig. S.6.2.27
s1
( T1 + T2 ) - T1 T2K
T1 + T2
dp( s)
= 16 s 3 + 3s
ds
s0
ROZ
Fig. S.6.2.30
There is no sign change. So all pole are on jwaxis. So
1
1
0 < K <
+
T
T
1
2
system is marginally stable.
K > 0, ( T1 + T2 ) - T1 T2 K > 0
28. (B) Closed loop transfer function

1
G( s)
T( s) =
= 4
3
1 + G( s) 2 s + 5 s + s 2 + 2 s + 1
s5
s4
s4
s3
s3
3.67
s2
1
5
s2
s1
-23
s1
-2.75
s0
s0
Fig. S.6.2.28
Page
342
Fig. S.6.2.29
Fig. S.6.2.26
P ( s) = 4 s 4 + 4 s + 1,
s( s - 0.2)( s 2 + s + 0.6) + K ( s + 0.1) = 0
s 4 + 0.8 s 3 + 0.4 s 2 + ( K - 0.12) s + 0.1K = 0

s
2 RHP poles so unstable.

29. (B) The characteristic equation is 1 + G( s) H ( s) = 0
LHP 2.
26. (B) Closed-loop transfer function is

G( s)
240
T( s) =
= 4
3
s + 10 s + 35 s 2 + 50 s + 264
1 + G( s)
Control & System
In RHP -2 poles. In LHP -3 poles.
www.gatehelp.com
Stability
32. (C) Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.32

e
s5
s
- -
-1
-4
-2
1
-2
s2
1-4e
e
s1
2e2 +1-4e
1-4e
s0
-2
From s 4 row down to s 0 there is one sign change. So

LHP1 + 1 = 2 pole. RHP1 pole, jw-axis -2 pole.
35. (A) Notice that in s 5 row there would be zero. In this
row coefficient of
Corresponding to this pole there is a pole on LHP. Rest

4 out of 6 poles are on imaginary axis. Rest 1 pole is on
LHP.
36. (A) Routh table is as shown in fig. S.6.2.36
-2
-6
-4
-2
-3
ROZ
-3
-4
s
s
s
s
1
3
-4
Fig. S.6.2.33
dP ( s)
= - 8 s 3 - 12 s , -2 , -3
P ( s) = - 2 s - 6 s ,
ds
4
No sign change exist from the s row down to the s row.
+ + +
+
Thus, the even polynomial does not have RHP poles. Therefore
4 pole
RHP
1 pole
LHP
0 pole
s6
-6
s5
s4
-6
s3
-24
s2
s1
- 144
e
s0
-6
-6
ROZ
Fig. S.6.2.36
P ( s) = - 6 s 4 - 6,
because of symmetry all four poles must be on jw-axis.

jw-axis
P ( s) = s6 + 2 s 4 - s 2 - 2
Corresponding to this pole there is a pole on LHP.
, where
there is one sign change. So there is one pole on RHP.
2 LHP poles.
s5
dP ( s )
ds
have been entered. From s6 to row down to the s 0 row,
Fig. S.6.2.32
3 RHP,
dP ( s)
= 12 s 3 + 60
ds
P ( s) = 3s 4 + 30 s 2 + 507,
Chap 6.2
dP ( s)
= -24 s 3 ,
ds
There is two sign change from the s 4 row down to the s 0

(1 sign change)
row. So two roots are on RHS. Because of symmetry rest

two roots must be in LHP. From s6 to s 4 there is 1 sign
change so 1 on RHP and 1 on LHP.
34. (D) Closed loop transfer function

G( s)
T( s) =
1 + G( s) + H ( s)
=
Total
LHP 3 root,
RHP 3 root.
507 s
s 5 + 3s 4 + 10 s 3 + 30 s 2 + 169 s + 507
***********
10
69
s4
30
57
s3
12
60
ROZ
s2
15
507
s1
-345.6
s0
507
Fig. S.6.2.33
www.gatehelp.com
Page
343
Time Response
8. A system is shown in fig. P6.3.8. The rise time and
Chap 6.3
d. T( s) =
s+2
s2 + 9
e. T( s) =
( s + 5)
( s + 10) 2
settling time for this system is

R(s)
1
s
10
(s + 10)
C(s)
Consider the following response
Fig. P6.3.8
(A) 0.22s, 0.4s
(B) 0.4s, 0.22s
(C) 0.12s, 0.4s
(D) 0.4s, 0.12s
1. Overdamped
2. Under damped
3. Undamped
4. Critically damped.

9. For a second order system settling time is Ts = 7 s and
peak time is Tp = 3 s. The location of poles are
(A)
(A) -0.97 j0.69
(B) -0.69 j0.97
(B)
(C) -1.047 j0.571
(D) -0.571 j1.047
(C)
(D)
10. For a second order system overshoot = 10% and

peak time Tp = 5 s. The location of poles are
(A) -0.46 j0.63
(B) -0.63 j0.46
(C) -0.74 j0.92
(D) -0.92 j0.74
15. The forward-path transfer of a ufb control system is

G( s) =
11. For a second-order system overshoot = 12 % and

settling time = 0.6 s. The location of poles are
(A) -9.88 j6.67
(B) -6.67 j9.88
(C) -4.38 j6.46
(D) -6.46 j4.38
The step, ramp, and parabolic error constants are

(A) 0, 1000, 0
(B) 1000, 0, 0
(C) 0, 0, 0
(D) 0, 0, 1000
16. The open-loop transfer function of a ufb control

A system has a damping ratio of 1.25, a natural
system is
G( s) =
frequency of 200 rad/s and DC gain of 1.

12. The response of the system to a unit step input is
(A) 1 +
(C) 1 +
1000
(1 + 0.1s)(1 + 10 s)
5 -50 t 2 -150 t
e
- e
3
3
(B) 1 -
1 -100 t 4 -400 t
e
- e
3
3
(D) 1 +
4 -100 t 1 -400 t
e
+ e
3
3
2 -50 t 5 -150 t
e
- e
3
3
K (1 + 2 s)(1 + 4 s)
s 2 ( s 2 + 2 s + 8)
The position, velocity and acceleration error

constants are respectively
K
, 0
8
(A) 0, 0, 4K
(B) ,
(C) 0, 4 K ,
(D) , ,
K
8
13. The system is

(A) overdamped
(B) under damped
17. The open-loop transfer function of a unit feedback
(C) critically damped
system is
G( s) =
14. Consider the following system

a. T( s) =
5
( s + 3)( s + 6)
10( s + 7)
b. T( s) =
( s + 10)( s + 20)
20
c. T( s) = 2
s + 6 s + 144
50
(1 + 0.1s)(1 + 2 s)
The position, velocity and acceleration error

constants are respectively
(A) 0, 0, 250
(B) 50, 0, 0
(C) 0, 250,
(D) , 50, 0
www.gatehelp.com
Page
345
UNIT 5
Control Systems
D(s)
The forward-path transfer function of a unity

R(s)
feedback system is
G( s) =
1
(s + 5)
100
s(s + 2)
+
+
C(s)
K
s ( s + a)
n
Fig. P6.3.22
The system has 10% overshoot and velocity error

constant K v = 100.
(A) -
49
11
(B)
49
11
18. The value of K is
(C) -
63
11
(D)
63
11
(A) 237 10
(B) 144
(C) 14.4 10
(D) 237
23. The forward path transfer function of a ufb system
19. The value of a is

(A) 237
. 10
is
(C) 14.4 10
(B) 237
G( s) =
(D) 144
20. For the system shown in fig. P6.3.20 the steady

state error component due to unit step disturbance is
0.000012 and steady state error component due to unit
ramp input is 0.003. The values of K 1
and K 2
are
K
s( s + 4)( s + 8)( s + 10)
If a unit ramp is applied, the minimum possible

steady-state error is
(A) 0.16
(B) 6.25
(C) 0.14
(D) 7.25
respectively
24. The forward-path transfer function of a ufb system
D(s)
R(s)
K1(s + 2)
(s + 3)
is
K2
s(s + 4)
+
+
C(s)
G( s) =
1000( s 2 + 4 s + 20)( s 2 + 20 s + 15)

s 3( s + 2)( s + 10)
The system has r ( t) = t 3 applied to its input. The

steady state error is
Fig. P6.3.20
(A) 16.4, 1684
(B) 1250, 2.4
(C) 125 10 , 0.016
(D) 463, 3981
21. The transfer function for a single loop nonunity
(A) 4 10 -4
(B) 0
(C)
(D) 2 10 -5
25. The transfer function of a ufb system is
feedback control system is

G( s) =
G( s) =
1
1
, H ( s) =
s2 + s + 2
( s + 1)
10 5( s + 3)( s + 10)( s + 20)

s( s + 25)( s + a)( s + 30)
The value of a to yield velocity error constant

The steady state error due to unit step input is
6
6
(A)
(B)
7
5
2
(C)
3
(B) 0
(C) 8
(D) 16
26. A system has position error constant K p = 3. The
error due to a unit step input and a unit step
Page
346
(A) 4
(D) 0
22. For the system of fig. P6.3.22 the total steady state
disturbance is
K v = 10 4 is
steady state error for input of 8tu( t) is

(A) 2.67
(B) 2
(C)
(D) 0
www.gatehelp.com
Time Response
27. The forward path transfer function of a unity
If
Chap 6.3
the
r ( t) = 1 + t +
feedback system is
G( s) =
For input of 60u( t) steady state error is

(B) 300
(C)
(D) 10
E(s)
G(s)
subjected
(B) 0.1
(C) 10
(D)
to
an
input
32. The system shown in fig. P6.3.32 has steady-state

error 0.1 to unit step input. The value of K is
R(s)
function is
+
is
(A) 0
28. For ufb system shown in fig. P6.3.28 the transfer
R(s)
system
t 2 , t > 0 the steady state error of the
system will be
1000
( s + 20)( s 2 + 4 s + 10)
(A) 0
1
2
C(s)
K
(s + 1)(0.1s + 1)
C(s)
Fig. P6.3.32
Fig. P6.3.28
G( s) =
20( s + 3)( s + 4)( s + 8)

s 2 ( s + 2)( s + 15)
(B) 0
(C)
(D) 64
(B) 0.9
(C) 1.0
(D) 9.0
If input is 30 t 2 , then steady state error is

(A) 0.9375
(A) 0.1
Block diagram of a position control system is

shown in fig.P6.3.3334.
29. The forward-path transfer function of a ufb control
R(s)
Ka
1
s(0.5s + 1)
C(s)
system is
G( s) =
450( s + 8)( s + 12)( s + 15)

s( s + 38)( s 2 + 2 s + 28)
sKt
Fig. P6.3.3334
The steady state errors for the test input 37tu( t) is

(A) 0
(B) 0.061
(C)
(D) 609
unit ramp input is
30. In the system shown in fig. P6.3.30, r ( t) = 1 + 2 t,

t > 0. The steady state error e( t) is equal to
r(t)
10(s + 1)
s2(s + 2)
e(t)
1
5
(B) 5
(C) 0
(D)
G( s) =
10(1 + 4 s)
s 2 (1 + s)
(B) 0.2
(C)
(D) 0
0.7 without affecting the steady state error, then the
c(t)
value of K a and K t are

(A) 86, 12.8
(B) 49, 9.3
(C) 24.5, 3.9
(D) 43, 6.4
35. A system has the following transfer function

G( s) =
31. A ufb control system has a forward path transfer

function
(A) 5
34. If the damping ratio of the system is increased to
Fig. P6.3.30
(A)
33. If K t = 0 and K a = 5, then the steady state error to
100( s + 15)( s + 50)

s 4 ( s + 12)( s 2 + 3s + 10)
The type and order of the system are respectively

(A) 7 and 5
(B) 4 and 5
(C) 4 and 7
(D) 7 and 4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
347
Time Response
SOLUTIONS
Chap 6.3
10
1
1
= s( s + 10) s s + 10
8. (A) C( s) =
1. (D) Characteristic equation is s + 9 s + 18.
c( t) = 1 - e -10 t
a = 10,
w = 18, 2 xwn = 9
2
n
Therefore x = 106
. ,
wn = 4.24 rad/s
Settling time Ts =
1
0.6
6 ( s + 0.8) 2 + (0.6) 2
2. (A) T( s) =
wn 1 - x2 = 0.6 ,
Hence wn = 1,
9. (D) xwn =
xwn = 0.8
Ds = { s - ( -3 + j 4)}{ s - ( -3 - j 4)} = ( s + 3) + 4 .
2
= s + 6 s + 25, w = 25
2 xwn = 6 ,
x=
w2n = 4
wn = 2 ,
5. (D) M p = e
xp
1-x
T( s) =
=3
xp
1 - x2
x = 0.59
xp
1 - x2
x = 0.56, wn =
4
= 1192
.
xTs
Note :
32
.
, For 0 < x < 0.69
Ts =
xwn
5
= 0.05,
100
Ts =
4.5
, For
xwn
12. (B) T( s) =
1
= 1.45
0.69
Peak time,
Tp =
Therefore Poles = - xwn jwn 1 - x2 = - 6.67 j9.88
x = 0.5
2 xwn = 2,
x = 0.69,
wn =
xp
1 - x2
1 - x2 = 0.779,
11. (B) 0.12 = e
1
K
= 2
1 + G( s) s + 2 s + K
2 xwn = 2,
p
Tp
Poles = - xwn jwn 1 - x2 = - 0.46 j0.63
16
4
=
( 4 s 2 + 8 s + 16) ( s 2 + 2 s + 4)
wn =
6
= 0.6
25
4. (A) T( s) =
wn = 5 rad/s
4
= 0.4s
a
4
p
= 0.571, wn 1 - x2 =
= 1047
.
Ts
Tp
10. (A) 0.1 = e
3. (A) Characteristic equation is

2
n
2.2 2.2
=
= 0.22s
a
10
Poles = - 0.571 j1.047
x = 0.8
Rise time Tr =
p
p
p
=
=
= 3 sec
wd wn - x2
1.45 (1 - 0.69 2 )
40000
w2n
= 2
2
s + 2 xwn s + wn
s + 500 s + 40000
40000
( s + 100)( s + 400)
R( s) =
But the peak time Tp given is 1 sec. Hence these two
x > 0.69
40000
1
4
1
= +
s( s + 100)( s + 400) s 3( s + 100) 3( s + 400)
r ( t) = 1 -
4 -100 t 1 -400 t
e
+ e
3
3
specification cannot be met.

13. (A) System has two different poles on negative real
K1
,
6. (C) T( s) = 2
s + ( K 2 + s) + K 1
w2n = K 1 ,
14. (A) 1. Overdamped response (a, b)
2 xwn = 1 + K 2
wd = 0.10,
wn = 12.5
axis. So response is over damped.
x = 0.6,
wd = wn 1 - 0.6 2 = 10
2. Underdamped response (c)
K 1 = 156.25,
Poles : Two complex in left half plane
2 wn 3 = K 2 + 1
2 12.5 0.6 = K 2 + 1
7. (A) M p = e
K 2 = 14
xp
1 - x2
Poles : Two real and different on negative real axis.
3.Undamped response (d)

Poles : Two imaginary.
4.Critically damped (e)
, At x = 0,
M p = 1 = 100%
Poles : Two real and same on negative real axis.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
349
UNIT 5
15. (B) K p = lim G ( s) = 1000

s 0
K v = lim sG( s) = 0
s 0
ess = lim sE( s) = lim

s 0
R( s) =
K a = lim s 2 G( s) = 0
s 0
16. (D) H ( s) = 1,
K p = lim G( s) H ( s) =
s 0
s 0
17. (B) H ( s) = 1,
K
8
K p = lim G( s) H ( s) = 50
s 0
K v = lim sG( s) H ( s) = 0
ess = lim
s 0
sR( s)
,
1 + G ( s)
1
6
=
K 1 K 2 ( s + 2)
K
1K 2
s+
( s + 3)( s + 4)
6
= 0 .003
125 10 3 K 2
K 2 = 0.016
21. (C) E( s) = R( s) - C( s) H ( s)
= R( s) -
s 0
s 0
1
K 1 K 2 ( s + 2)
, G( s) =
s2
s( s + 3)( s + 4)
K v = lim sG( s) H ( s) =
K a = lim s 2 G ( s) H ( s) =
Control Systems
K a = lim s 2 G( s) H ( s) = 0.
R( s) G( s) H ( s)
R( s)
=
1 + G( s) H ( s)
1 + G( s) H ( s)
s 0
18. (C) System type = 1, so n = 1

K v = lim sG( s) =
s 0
ess = lim sE( s) = lim

s 0
K
= 100
a
s 0
For 10% overshoot,

0.1 = = e
T( s) =
22. (A) ess = lim
xp
1 - x2
s 0
x = 0.6
G( s)
K
= 2
1 + G ( s) s + as + K
2 xwn = a ,
w2n = K
K
0.6 K = 100
2
2 0.6 K = a
R( s) = D( s) =
K = 14400
K
= 100, K = 14400,
a
14400
= 100
a
a = 144
Error in output due to disturbance

E( s) = TD( s) D ( s),
1
,
s
essD = lim sE( s) = lim s

3
= 0.000012
2 K1
s 0
1
3
TD( s) = lim TD( s) =
s 0
s
2 K1
1
s+5
and
G2 ( s) =
100
s+2
1
s
23. (A) Using Routh-Hurwitz Criterion, system is stable

2000
= 6. 25
4 8 10
1
1
=
= 0.16
K v 6.25
K v = lim sG( s) =
s 0
24. (A) R( s) =
6
,
s4
E( s) =
R( s)
1 + G ( s)
ess = lim sE( s)

s 0
6s
s4
= lim
2
s 0
1000 ( s + 4 s + 20) ( s 2 + 20 s + 15)
1+
s 3( s + 2) ( s + 10)
= lim
s 0
K 1 = 125 10 3
Error due to ramp input

Page
350
sR( s) - sD( s) G2 ( s)
1 + G1 ( s) G2 ( s)
minimum possible error
K 2 ( s + 3)
s( s + 3)( s + 4) + K 1 K 2 ( s + 2)
s 0
2
3
100
-49
2
=
=
1 100
11
1+
5
2
maximum
K2
s( s + 4)
TD( s) =
K 1 K 2 ( s + 2)
1+
s( s + 4)( s + 3)
If D( s) =
for 0 < K < 2000
20. (C) If R ( s) = 0
1
1
1+ 2
( s + s + 2) ( s + 1)
1-
ess
19. (D)
G1 ( s) =
where
s
s
6
1000 ( s 2 + 4 s + 20) ( s 2 + 20 s + 15)
s +
( s + 2) ( s + 10)
3
6
0+
www.gatehelp.com
1000 20 15
2 10
= 4 10 -4
Time Response
25. (A) K v = lim sG( s)

10 4 3 10 20
25 a 30
10 4 =
a=4
1
=
K v = 0, ess =
Kv
26. (C) System is zero type
34. (C) The equivalent open-loop transfer function

Ka
Ka
s(0.5 s + 1)
Ge =
=
sK t
s(0.5 s + 1 + K t )
1+
s(0.5 s + 1)
27. (D) K p = lim G( s) = 5

s 0
60
= 10
1 + Kp
T( s) =
28. (A) K a = lim s 2 G( s) = 64

s 0
ess =
30 2
= 0.9375
64
G( s)
Ka
=
1 + G( s) 0.5 s 2 + s(1 + K t ) + K a
2K a
s 2 + 2 s(1 + K t ) + 2 K a
w2n = 2 K a wn =
29. (B) K v = lim sG( s) = 609.02

s 0
ess =
1
1
s2
= lim
=
= 0.2
s 0
5
5
1+
s(0.5 s + 1 )
s
ess
For input 60u( t), ess =
5
1
, H ( s) = 1, R( s) = 2
s(0.5 s + 1)
s
G( s) =
s 0
Chap 6.3
2K a
2 x wn = 2(1 + K t )
Kt
x =1 +
= 0.7
2K a
37
= 0.0607
Kv
30. (C) The system is type 2. Thus to step and ramp
ess = lim
s 0
input error will be zero.

E( s) = R( s) - C( s) = R( s) -
G( s) R( s)
1 + G ( s)
R( s)
1 + G( s)
... (i)
sR( s)
1
, R ( s) = 2
1 + Ge ( s)
s
1
1 + Kt
=
Ka
Ka
s 1 +
s(0.5 s + 1 + K t )
1 + Kt
=
= 0. 2
Ka
ess = lim
s 0
1 2
s+2
+
=
s s2
s2
s+2
E( s) =
10( s + 1)
s2 +
( s + 2)
R( s) =
ess
...(ii)
Solving (i) and (ii)

K a = 24.5 ,
ess ( t) = lim sE( s) = 0

s 0
.
K t = 39
35. (C) The s has power of 4 and denominator has order
31. (C) System is type 2. Therefore error due to 1 + t
of 7. So Type 4 and Order 7.
t2
1
would be
.
would be zero and due to
2
Ka
36. (D) For 8u( t),
K a = lim s 2 G( s) = 10,
ess ( t) =
s 0
1
= 0.1
10
ess =
8
= 2.
1 + Kp
For 8tu( t), ess = , since the system is type 0.
Note that you may calculate error from the formula

ess ( t) = lim sE( s) =
s 0
37. (A) For equivalent unit feedback system the forward
sR( s)
1 + G( s)
transfer function is
Ge =
32. (D) K p = lim G( s) = K

s 0
1
1
ess ( t) =
=
= 0.1
1 + Kp 1 + K
K = 9.
s 0
When K t = 0 and K a = 5
10 ( s + 10 )
s (s + 2 )
10 ( s + 10 )( s + 3)
s (s + 2 )
10( s + 10)
11s + 132 s + 300
2
The system is of Type 0. Hence step input will produce a
33. (B) ess = lim e( t) = lim sE( s) = lim

t
G( s)
=
1 + G( s) H ( s) - G( s) 1 +
s 0
sR( s)
1 + G( s) H ( s)
constant error constant.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
351
CHAPTER
6.5
FREQUENCY-DOMAIN ANALYSIS
Statement for Q.12:
4. The gain-phase plots of open-loop transfer function of
An under damped second order system having a
correct sequence of the increasing order of stability of
transfer function of the form

T( s) =
four different system are shown in fig. P6.5.4. The

these four system will be
Kw2n
2
s + 2 xwn s + w2n
dB
B
40 dB
has a frequency response plot shown in fig.
30 dB
P6.5.12.
20 dB
10 dB
|T( jw )|
-270o
2.5
-225o
-135
-90o
-45o
-20 dB
-30 dB
1.0
w
wn
Fig. P6.5.4
Fig. P6.5.1-2
1. The system gain K is

(A) 1
(C)
(B) 2
(D)
(A) D, C, B, A
(B) A, B, C, D
(C) B, C, A, D
(D) A, D, B, C
5. The open-loop frequency response of a
feedback system is shown in following table
2. The damping factor x is approximately
|G ( jw)|
G ( jw)
(A) 0.6
(B) 0.2
8.5
-119
(C) 1.8
(D) 2.4
6.4
-128
4.8
-142
2.56
-156
1.4
-164
1.00
-172
10
0.63
-180
3. For the transfer function

G( s) H ( s) =
1
s( s + 1)( s + 0.5)
the phase cross-over frequency is

(A) 0.5 rad/sec
(B) 0.707 rad/sec
(C) 1.732 rad/sec
(D) 2 rad/sec
Fig. P6.5.5
Page
362
www.gatehelp.com
unity
Frequency-Domain Analysis
The gain margin and phase margin of the system
Chap 6.5
10. The gain margin of the ufb system
are
(A) 2 dB, 8
(B) 2 dB, -172
(C) 4 dB, 8
(D) 4 dB, -172
G( s) =
Statement for Q.67:

Consider the gain-phase plot shown in fig.
2
is
( s + 1)( s + 2)
(A) 1.76 dB
(B) 3.5 dB
(C) -3.5 dB
(D) -1.76 dB
11. The open-loop transfer function of a system is

K
s(1 + 2 s)(1 + 3s)
G( s) H ( s) =
P6.5.67.
dB
w=2
2 dB
The phase crossover frequency is

(B) 2.46 rad/sec
(C) 0.41 rad/sec
(D) 3.23 rad/sec
G( jw)
w = 10
-2 dB
(A) 6 rad/sec
12. The open-loop transfer function of a ufb system is
w = 100
o
-270
-180
G( s) =
-140
-90
Fig. P6.5.6-7
1+ s
s(1 + 0.5 s)
The corner frequencies are
6. The gain margin and phase margin are
(A) 0 and 2
(B) 0 and 1
(A) -2 dB, 40
(B) 2 dB, 40
(C) 0 and -1
(D) 1 and 2
(C) 2 dB, 140
(D) -2 dB, 140
13. In the Bode-plot of a unity feedback control system,
7. The gain crossover and phase crossover frequency are
the value of magnitude of G( jw) at the phase crossover
respectively
frequency is
(A) 10 rad/sec, 100 rad/sec
(A) 2
1
2
(B) 100 rad/sec, 10 rad/sec

(C)
(C) 10 rad/sec, 2 rad/sec
. The gain margin is

1
(B)
2
1
3
(D) 3
(D) 100 rad/sec, 2 rad/sec

8. The phase margin of a system with the open loop
transfer function
14. In the Bode-plot of a ufb control system, the value of

phase of G( jw) at the gain crossover frequency is -120 .
The phase margin of the system is
G( s) H ( s) =
(1 - s)
is
(1 + s)( 3 + s)
(A) 68.3
(B) 90
(C) 0
(D)
(A) -120
(B) 60
(C) -60
(D) 120
15. The transfer function of a system is given by

G( s) =
9. Consider a ufb system having an open-loop transfer

function
K
1
; K <
s( sT + 1)
T
The Bode plot of this function is

G( s) =
K
s(0.2 s + 1)(0.05 s + 1)
dB
-20 dB/dec
For K = 1, the gain margin is 28 dB. When gain

margin is 20 dB, K will be equal to
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 2.5
dB
-40 dB/dec
-40 dB/dec
0 dB
0.1
T
1
T
(A)
www.gatehelp.com
0 dB
0.1
T
1
T
(B)
Page
363
UNIT 6
dB
dB
-20 dB/dec
(A)
100
s + 10
(B)
(C)
1
s + 10
-20 dB/dec
0 dB
1
T
0.1
T
0 dB
1
T
0.1
T
Control & System
10
s + 10
-40 dB/dec
19. Consider the asymptotic Bode plot of a minimum

(C)
(D)
phase linear system given in fig. P6.5.19. The transfer

function is
dB
16. The asymptotic approximation of the log-magnitude

versus frequency plot of a certain system is shown in
32
fig. P6.5.16. Its transfer function is
-20 dB/dec
dB
54 dB
-40 dB/dec
-20 dB/dec
w1
0.1
-60 dB/dec
w2
10
-40 dB/dec
-40 dB/dec
-60 dB/dec
0.1
25
(C)
Fig. P6.5.16
50( s + 5)
(A) 2
s ( s + 2)( s + 25)
(C)
10 s 2 ( s + 5)
( s + 2)( s + 25)
Fig. P6.5.19
8 s( s + 2)
(A)
( s + 5)( s + 10)
(B)
20( s + 5)
s 2 ( s + 2)( s + 25)
(D)
20( s + 5)
s( s + 2)( s + 25)
4( s + 2)
s( s + 5)( s + 10)
(B)
4( s + 5)
( s + 2)( s + 10)
(D)
8 s( s + 5)
( s + 2)( s + 10)
20. The Bode plot shown in fig. P6.5.20 represent

dB
100 dB
17. For the Bode plot shown in fig. P6.5.17 the transfer
-60 dB/dec
function is
40 dB/dec
dB
4
-4
100
( s + 4)( s + 10)
100 s 2
(1 + 0.1s) 3
(B)
1000 s 2
(1 + 0.1s) 3
100 s 2
(1 + 0.1s) 5
(D)
1000 s 2
(1 + 0.1s) 5
-2
0
de
B/
dB
/
0d
(C)
Fig. P6.5.20
(A)
(B)
100( s + 4)
s( s + 10) 2
(C)
(D)
100
s ( s + 4)( s + 10)
Fig. P6.5.17
100 s
(A)
( s + 4)( s + 10) 2
w = 10
10
de
c
0 dB
18. Bode plot of a stable system is shown in the fig.

P6.3.18. The open-loop transfer function of the ufb
The Bode plot of the transfer function K (1 + sT) is

given in the fig. P6.5.2122.
Phase
dB
system is
dB
-20 dB/dec
20 dB
-20 dB/dec
1
T
Page
364
Fig. P6.5.21-22
www.gatehelp.com
-45
10
T
/d
Fig. P6.5.18
0.1
T
ec
UNIT 6
Control & System
Im
Im
2
Consider the Bode plot of a ufb system shown in

fig. P6.5.2930.
w= 0
w=
Re
w= 0
w=
Re
dB
32 dB
0 dB
(A)
-20 dB/dec
18 dB
-40 dB/dec
w1
0.1
(B)
Im
Im
2
Fig. P6.5.29-30
Re
w= 0
w=
w= 0
w=
Re
29. The steady state error corresponding to a ramp

input is
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.2
(C) 0
(D)
(C)
(D)
35. Consider a ufb system whose open-loop transfer

30. The damping ratio is
function is
(A) 0.063
(B) 0.179
(C) 0.483
(D) 0.639
G( s) =
K
s( s 2 + 2 s + 2)
The Nyquist plot for this system is
31. The Nyquist plot of a open-loop transfer function
Im
G( jw) H ( jw) of a system encloses the ( -1, j0) point. The
Im
gain margin of the system is

(A) less than zero
(B) greater than zero
(C) zero
(D) infinity
w=
Re
Re
w=
w= 0
32. Consider a ufb system

G( s) =
K
s(1 + sT1 )(1 + sT2 )(1 + sT3)
w= 0
(A)
(B)
The angle of asymptote, which the Nyquist plot

approaches as w 0, is
Im
(A) -90
(B) 90
(C) 180
(D) -45
Im
w=
33. If the gain margin of a certain feedback system is
Re
Re
w=
w= 0
given as 20 dB, the Nyquist plot will cross the negative

real axis at the point
w= 0
(A) s = -0.05
(B) s = -0.2
(C) s = -0.1
(D) s = -0.01
(C)
34. The transfer function of an open-loop system is

G( s) H ( s) =
36. The open loop transfer function of a system is
s+2
( s + 1)( s - 1)
G( s) H ( s) =
K (1 + s) 2
s3
The Nyquist plot for this system is
The Nyquist plot will be of the form
Page
366
(D)
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 6.5
Im
Im
Im
w= 0
w= 0
Re
w=
10.64
Re
w=
w=
Re
w= 0
(A)
(B)
Im
Im
Fig. P6.5.38
The no. of poles of closed loop system in RHP are

w=
w=
Re
Re
(C)
(B) 1
(C) 2
D) 4
w= 0
w= 0
(A) 0
The open-loop transfer function of a feedback
(D)
control system is
37. For the certain unity feedback system
G( s) H ( s) =
K
G( s) =
s( s + 1)(2 s + 1)( 3s + 1)
-1
2 s(1 - 20 s)
39. The Nyquist plot for this system is
The Nyquist plot is
Im
Im
Im
Im
w= 0
w= 0
w=
w=
Re
Re
w=
Re
Re
w=
w= 0
w= 0
(A)
(A)
(B)
Im
(B)
Im
Im
Im
w=
w=
Re
Re
w=
Re
Re
w=
w= 0
w= 0
w= 0
w= 0
(C)
(C)
(D)
(D)
38. The Nyquist plot of a system is shown in fig.
40. Regarding the system consider the statements
P6.5.38. The open-loop transfer function is
1. Open-loop system is stable
G( s) H ( s) =
4s + 1
s ( s + 1)(2 s + 1)
2
2. Closed-loop system is unstable

3. One closed-loop poles is lying on the RHP
www.gatehelp.com
Page
367
UNIT 6
Control & System
Im
The correct statements are

(A) 1 and 2
(B) 1 and 3
(C) only 2
-2
3
Im
w=
-3
2
Re
w=
Re
(D) All
41. The Nyquist plot shown in the fig. P6.5.41 is for

(A) type0 system
(B) type1 system
(C) type2 system
(D) type3 system
w= 0
w= 0
(C)

The open-loop transfer function of a feedback
system is
(D)
45. The phase crossover and gain crossover frequencies

are
K (1 + s)
(1 - s)
(A) 1.414 rad/sec, 0.57 rad/sec
42. The Nyquist plot of this system is
(C) 0.707 rad/sec, 0.57 rad/sec
G( s) H ( s) =
(B) 1.414 rad/sec, 1.38 rad/sec
Im
(D) 0.707 rad/sec, 1.38 rad/sec
Im
46. The gain margin and phase margin are

w=
w= 0
Re
w=
w= 0
(A)
Re
(A) -3.52 dB, -168.5
(B) -3.52 dB, 11.6
(C) 3.52 dB, -168.5
(D) 3.52 dB, 11.6
(B)
****************
Im
Im
w=
w= 0
Re
w=
w= 0
(C)
Re
(D)
43. The system is stable for K

(A) K > 1
(B) K < 1
(C) any value of K
(D) unstable

A unity feedback system has open-loop transfer
function
G( s) =
1
s(2 s + 1)( s + 1)
44. The Nyquist plot for the system is

Im
Im
w=
w= 0
2
3
w=
(A)
Page
368
Re
3
2
w= 0
Re
(B)
www.gatehelp.com
At w = 10 rad/sec gain is 0 dB. Gain cross over frequency
SOLUTIONS
1. (A) T( s) =
w =10 rad/sec.
Kw2n
s + 2 xwn s + w2n
8. (D) |GH( jw)| 1, for any value of w. Thus phase
margin is .
Kw2n
T( jw) =
-w2 + 2 jxwn w + w2n
|T( jw)|
9. (D) For 28 dB gain Nyquist plot intersect the real

axis at a,
1
20 log = 28
a
K w
( w - w ) + 4 x2 w2n w2
2
2
n
4
n
2 2
From the fig. P6.5.12, |T( j0)| = 1
|T( j0)|
K 2 wn4
= K2 =1
wn4
denominator of function |T( jw)| is minimum i.e. when

2
w = wn
K w
K2
|T( jwn )| = 2 = 2
4x w
4x
2
x=
4
n
4
n
. = 35
. dB
= 15
GH ( jw) = -180
GH ( jw) =
K
jw(1 + 2 jw)(1 + 3 jw)
-90 - tan -1 2 wp - tan -1 3wp = -180
- tan -1 2 w - tan -1 w - 90 = -180
tan -1 2 wp + tan -1 3wp = 90

2 wp + 3wp
= tan 90
1 - (2 wp)( 3wp)
tan -1 2 w + tan -1 w = 90
2w + w
= tan 90 =
1 - (2 w)( w)
2
-1
11. (C) For phase crossover frequency
At phase cross over point f = -180
w=
1
2
-1
f = -90 - tan -1 2 w - tan -1 w
1 - (2 w) w = 0
This is achieved if the system gain is increased by factor

0.1
= 2.5. Thus K = 2.5.
0.04
KT1 T2
(2)(0.5)
Gain Margin =
= 1 + 0.5
+
T
T
2
1
1
jw( jw + 1)(0.5 + jw)
a = 0.04
10. (B) Here K = 2, T1 = 1, T2 =
K
|T( jwn )| = = 2.5
2x
K
= 0.2
5
3. (B) G( jw) H ( jw) =
For 20 dB gain Nyquist plot should intersect at b,

1
20 log
= 20 b = 0.1.
b
K =1
2. (B) The peak value of T( jw) occurs when the
w2n - w2 = 0
Chap 6.5
1 - 6 w2p = 0
= 0.707 rad/sec
12. (D) G( s) =
4. (B) For a stable system gain at 180 phase must be
wp = 0.41 rad/s
s+1
s+1
=
s(1 + 0.5 s)
s
s + 1
2
negative in dB. More magnitude more stability.
The Bode plot of this function has break at w = 1 and
5. (C) At 180 gain is 0.63. Hence gain margin is

1
= 20 log
= 4 dB
0.63
w = 2. These are the corner frequencies.

13. (A) G.M. =
At unity gain phase is -172 ,

Phase margin = 180 -172 = 8
14. (B) P.M. = 180 + GH ( jw1 ) = 180 -120 = 60
6. (A) At G( jw) = 180 gain is -2 dB. Hence gain

margin is 2 dB. At 0 dB gain phase is -140 . Hence
phase margin is 180 -140 = 40 .
7.
(A) At w = 100 rad/sec phase is 180. Phase cross-
over frequency wp = 100 rad/sec.
1
1
= =2
GH ( jwp) 1 2
15. (D) Due to pole at origin initial plot has a slope of

1
-20 dB/decade. At s = jw = . Slope increases to -40
T
1
dB/decade. At w = ,
T
|G( jw)| KT < 1 ,Gain

www.gatehelp.com
in dB < 0.
Page
369
27. (C) Initially slope is -20 dB/decade. Hence there is a
Chap 6.5
GH ( jw) = - tan -1
pole at origin and system type is 1. For type1 system

position error coefficient is .
20 log K = 6
GH ( jw) =
K = 2,
w (2 - w2 ) 2 + 4 w2
At w = 0,
28. (B) The system is type 0,
At w =
1
1
.
20 log K p = 40, K p = 100, estep ( ) =
=
1 + K p 101
At w = 1,
-20 dB/dec
0.5
0.1
1.4
K
2 18
- 206.6 ,
correct option.
4
36. (B) GH ( jw) =
Fig.S6.5.29
K v = 4, eramp ( ) =
GH ( jw) = 0 - 270 ,
K
GH ( jw) =
- 153.43,
5
Due to s there will be a infinite semicircle. Hence (C) is
-40 dB/dec
18 dB
0 dB
GH ( jw) = - 90 ,
At w = 2, GH ( jw) =
29. (A) The Bode plot is as shown in fig. S6.5.29

32 dB
2w
- 90
2 - w2
K
K (1 + w2 )
w3
|GH( jw)| =
1
1
= = 0.25
Kv 4
K (1 + jw) 2
( jw) 3
GH ( jw) = -270 + 2 tan -1 w

For w = 0, GH ( jw) = - 270
0.5
w
30. (B) From fig. S6.5.29 x = 2 =
= 0.179
2 w3 2(1.4)
For w = 1 , GH ( jw) = -180

For w = , GH ( jw) = 0 - 90
31. (A) If Nyquist plot encloses the point ( -1, j0), the
As w increases from 0 to , phase goes -270 to -90 .

Due to s 3 term there will be 3 infinite semicircle.
system is unstable and gain margin is negative.

37. (A) |GH ( jw)| =
K
32.(A) GH ( jw) =
jw(1 + jwT1 )(1 + jwT2 ) (1 + jwT2 )
GH ( jw) = -90 - tan -1 w - tan -1 2 w - tan -1 3w ,
K
K
lim GH ( jw) = lim
= lim
- 90
w 0
w 0
jw w 0 w
For w = 0, GH ( jw) = - 90 ,
Hence, the asymptote of the Nyquist plot tends to an

angle of -90 as w 0.
K
1 + w2 1 + 4 w2 1 + 9 w2
For w = , GH ( jw) = 0 - 360 ,

Hence (A) is correct option.
38. (C) The open-loop poles in RHP are P = 0. Nyquist
33. (C) 20 log
1
= 20
GH ( jw)
path enclosed 2 times the point ( -1 + j0). Taking
1
= 10
GH ( jw)
N = P - Z,
GH ( jw) = 0.1
Since system is stable, it will cross at s = -0.1.
clockwise encirclements as negative N = -2.

-2 = 0 - Z ,
Z = 2 which implies that two
poles of closed-loop system are on RHP.

-1
,
2 s(1 - 20 s)
s+2
34. (B) GH ( s) = 2
( s - 1)
39. (B) G( s) H ( s) =
jw + 2
GH ( jw) =
( -1 - w2 )
GH ( jw) =
At w = 0 ,
GH ( jw) = 2 - 180
GH ( jw) = 180 -90 - tan -1
At w = ,
GH ( jw) = 0 - 270
Hence (B) is correct option.

35. (C) GH ( jw) =
K
jw( -w + 2 jw + 2)
2
1
2 w 1 + 400 w2
-20 w
,
1
At w = 0 GH ( jw) = 90
At w = GH ( jw) = 0 180
At w = 0.1 GH ( jw) = 2.24 153.43
At w = 0.01 GH ( jw) = 49 9115
.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
371
UNIT 6
40. (C) One open-loop pole is lying on the RHP. Thus
Control & System
The frequency at which magnitude unity is
open-loop system is unstable and P = 1. There is one
Im
clockwise encirclement. Hence N = -1.

Z = P - N = 1 - ( -1) = 2,
-2
3
Hence there are 2 closed-loop poles on the RHP and
Re
-1 wp
system is unstable.
w1
41. (B) There is one infinite semicircle. Which represent
Phase Margin
single pole at origin. So system type is1.

K 1 + w2
42. (D) |GH ( jw)| =
1 + w2
GH ( jw) = tan -1 w - tan -1 -
=K
Fig.S6.5.44
w (1 + w ) (1 + 4 w ) = 1
2
1
-w
1
At w = 2 GH ( jw) = K127 ,
43. (A) RHP poles of open-loop system P = 1, Z = P - N .

For closed loop system to be stable,
w 0
At unit gain w1 = 0.57 rad/sec,
Phase margin = -168.42 +180 = 11.6

Note that system is stable. So gain margin and phase
margin are positive value. Hence only possible option is
H ( s) = 1
(D).
***************
1
jw(2 jw + 1)( jw + 1)
w 0
1
= - 90
jw
lim GH ( jw) = lim w

w
1
= 0 - 270
2( jw) 3
The intersection with the real axis can be calculated as

Im{ GH ( jw)} = 0, The condition gives w (2 w2 - 1) = 0
i.e. w = 0,
1
2
1 -2
GH j
=
2 3
With the above information the plot in option (C) is

correct.
45. (C) The Nyquist plot crosses the negative real axis
1
rad/sec. Hence phase crossover frequency is
at w =
2
wp =
Page
372
1
2
3
= 352
. dB.
2
GH ( jw) = -90 - tan -1 w - tan -1 2 w ,
1
s(2 s + 1)( s + 1)
lim GH ( jw) = lim
2
3
GH ( jw1 ) = -90 - tan -1 0.57 - tan -1 2(0.57) = -168.42
( -1 + j0). It is possible when K > 1.
GH ( jw) =
|GH( jwp)| =
Phase at this frequency is
N =1
There must be one anticlockwise rotation of point
GH ( s) =
|GH( jwp)|
Gain Margin = 20 log
At w = GH ( jw) = K180 ,
1
,
s(2 s + 1)( s + 1)
46. (D) G.M. = 20 log
At w = 1 GH ( jw) = K90 ,
44. (C) G( s) =
2
1
w2 = 0.326, w1 = 0.57 rad/sec
At w = 0 GH ( jw) = K0 ,
Z = 0, 0 = 1 - N
2
1
= 0.707 rad/sec.
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
6.6
DESIGN OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. The term reset control refers to
(C) is predictive in nature
(A) Integral control
(B) Derivative control
(D) increases the order of the system
(C) Proportional control
6. Consider the List I and List II
2. If stability error for step input and speed of response
List I
List II
be the criteria for design, the suitable controller will be
P. Derivative control
1. Improved overshoot response
(A) P controller
(B) PI controller
Q. Integral control
2. Less steady state errors
(C) PD controller
(D) PID controller
R. Rate feed back control
3. Less stable
S. Proportional control
4. More damping
1 + 0.5 s
represent a
1+ s
(A) Lag network

(B) Lead network
(C) Laglead network
(D) Proportional controller
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4. A lag compensation network
7. Consider the ListI (Transfer function) and ListII
(a) increases the gain of the original network without

affecting stability.
(Controller)
List I
List II
(b) reduces the steady state error.
P.
1. Pcontroller
(c) reduces the speed of response
Q.
(d) permits the increase of gain of phase margin is

acceptable.
2. PIcontroller
R.
K1s + K2
K 3s
3. PDcontroller
S.
K1
K 2s
4. PIDcontroller
In the above statements, which are correct

(A) a and b
(B) b and c
(C) b, c, and d
(D) all

P
(A)
5. Derivative control
(B)
(A) has the same effect as output rate control
(C)
(D)
(B) reduces damping
www.gatehelp.com
Page
373
UNIT 6
Control Systems
8. The transfer function of a compensating network is of
(B) Twoposition controller
form (1 + aTs) (1 + Ts). If this is a phaseLag network,
(C) Floating controller
the value of a should be
(D) Proportionalposition controller
(A) greater than 1

(B) between 0 and 1
14. In case of phaselag compensation used is system,
(C) exactly equal to 1
gain crossover frequency, band width and undamped
(D) exactly equal to 0
frequency are respectively

(A) decreased, decreased, decreased
9.
The
pollzero
configuration
of
phaselead
compensator is given by
jw
(A)
(B) increased, increased, increased

(C) increased, increased, decreased
jw
(B)
(D) increased, decreased, decreased

s
15. A process with openloop model

(C)
jw
(D)
jw
G( s) =
s
Ke - s TD
ts + 1
is controlled by a PID controller. For this purpose

10. While designing controller, the advantage of pole
zero cancellation is
(A) the derivative mode improves transient

performance
(A) The system order is increased
(B) the derivative mode improves steady state

performance
(B) The system order is reduced
(C) the integral mode improves transient performance
(C) The cost of controller becomes low
(D) the integral mode improves steady state

performance.
(D) Systems error reduced to optimum levels
The correct statements are

11. A proportional controller leads to
(A) (a) and (c)
(B) (b) and (c)
(A) infinite error for step input for type 1 system
(C) (a) and (d)
(D) (b) and (d)
(B) finite error for step input for type 1 system

(C) zero steady state error for step input for type 1
system
(D) zero steady state error for step input for type 0
system
12. The transfer function of a phase compensator is
given by (1 + aTs) (1 + Ts) where a > 1 and T > 0. The
16. A lead compensating network

(a) improves response time
(b) stabilizes the system with low phase margin
(c) enables moderate increase in gain without
affecting stability.
(d) increases resonant frequency
In the above statements, correct are
maximum phase shift provided by a such compensator

is
a + 1
(A) tan -1
a -1
(C) tan
-1
a -1
a + 1
(D) cos
-1
(B) (a) and (c)
(C) (a), (c) and (d)
(D) All
17. A Lag network for compensation normally consists
a -1
a + 1
of
(A) R, L and C elements
13. For an electrically heated temperature controlled
(B) R and L elements
liquid heater, the best controller is
(C) R and C elements
(A) Singleposition controller

Page
374
a -1
(B) sin -1
a + 1
(A) (a) and (b)
(D) R only
www.gatehelp.com
Design of Control Systems
18. The polezero plot given in fig.P6.6.18 is that of a
Chap 6.6
SOLUTIONS
jw
s
1. (A)
2. (D)
3. (A)
4. (D)
5. (B)
6. (D)
7. (A)
8. (B)
9. (A)
10. (B)
11. (C)
12. (B)
13. (C)
14. (D)
15. (C)
16. (D)
17. (C)
18. (D)
19. (D)
20. (D)
Fig. P6.6.18
(A) PID controller

(B) PD controller
(C) Integrator
21. (D)
(D) Laglead compensating network

19. The correct sequence of steps needed to improve
system stability is
(A) reduce gain, use negative feedback, insert
derivative action
(B) reduce gain, insert derivative action, use negative
feedback
(C) insert derivative action, use negative feedback,
reduce gain
(D) use negative feedback, reduce gain, insert
derivative action.
20. In a derivative error compensation
(A) damping decreases and setting time decreases
(B) damping increases and setting time increases
(C) damping decreases and setting time increases
(D) damping increases and setting time decreases
21. An ONOFF controller is a
(A) P controller
(B) PID controller
(C) integral controller
(D) non linear controller
**********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
375
CHAPTER
6.7
THE STATE-VARIABLE ANALYSIS
1. Consider the SFG shown in fig. P6.7.1

u
1
s
1
s
x3
1
s
x2
x1
-1
-2
-3
Fig. P6.7.1
For this
x& 1 3
(A) x& 2 = 0

x& 3 3
system dynamic equation is

1 2 x1 0
1 1 x2 + 0 u

2 1 x3 1
1 0
-2
(A) 0 -2 0
0 -3
0
2 -1 0
(B) 0 2 0
0 0 3
1 -2
2
(C) 0 -2
0
0
-3 0
0 -1 2
(D) 0 2 0
3 0 0
3.
5
1
s
1 0 x1 0
x& 1 0
(B) x& 2 = 0
0
1 x2 + 0 u

x& 3 -3 -2 -1 x3 1
-2
1
s
1
s
x2
x1
-2
1
x3
-3
x& 1 0 -1 0 x1 0
(C) x& 2 = 0 0 -1 x2 + 0 u

1 x3 1
x& 3 3 2
Fig. P6.7.3

Statement for Q.24:
Represent the given system in state-space
equation x& = A x + B u. Choose the correction option for
1 0 -2
(A) 0 -2
0
0
-3 0
-1 0 2
(B) 0 2 0
3 0 0
0
1
-2
(C) 0 -2 0
0 -3
0
2 0 -1
(D) 0 2 0
3
0 0
matrix A.
4.
2.
1
s
x2
1
s
x1
1
u
-2
1
s
-2
x3
1
s
x3 1
1
s
x2
Fig. P6.7.4
Fig. P6.7.2
www.gatehelp.com
1
s
-4
-3
-3
Page
376
x1 1
The State-Variable Analysis
Chap 6.7
0 1 -4
(A) 1 0
0
0
-3 0
0 -1 4
(B) -1 0 0
3 0 0
8. The F( t ) is
cos 2 t sin 2 t
(A)
- sin 2 t cos 2 t
cos 2 t - sin 2 t
(B)
cos 2 t
sin 2 t
- 4 1 0
(C) 0 0
1
0 0 -3
4 - 1 0
(D) 0 0 -1
3
0 0
sin 2 t cos 2 t
(C)
- cos 2 t sin 2 t
sin 2 t - cos 2 t
(D)
sin 2 t
cos 2 t
9. The q( t ) is
5. The state equation of a LTI system is represented by

1
0
0 1
x& =
x + 1 0 u
2
1
The Eigen values are

(A) -1, + 1
(B) -0.5 j1.323
(C) -1, - 1
-3 0
0
x& =
x + u
0 -3
1
The state-transition matrix F( t) is
-e -3t
(C)
0
e -3t
0
-e -3t
-e -3t
(B)
0
e -3t
e -3t
(D)
0
-e -3t
sin 2 t
(B)
cos 2 t
0.5(1 - cos 2 t)
(C)
0.5 sin 2 t
cos 2 t
(D)
sin 2 t
10. From the following matrices, the state-transition
6. The state equation of a LTI system is
e -3t
(A)
0
0.5(1 - sin 2 t)
(A)
0.5 cos 2 t
matrices can be
-e - t
0
(A)
0
1
e- t
1 - e - t
(B)
0
e- t
1
(C)
-t
1 - e
1 - e - t
(D)
0
e- t
e- t
0
e - t

A system is described by the dynamic equations
x& ( t) = A x ( t) + B u( t), y( t) = C x( t) where
1 0
0
0
A= 0
0
1 , B = 0 , C = [1 0 0 ]

-1 -2 -3
1
7. The state equation of a LTI system is

0 2
0
x& =
x + u
-2 0
1
11. The Eigen values of A are

(A) 0.325, -1.662 j0.562
The state transition matrix is

cos 2 t sin 2 t
(A)
- sin 2 t cos 2 t
cos 2 t - sin 2 t
(B)
cos 2 t
sin 2 t
(B) 2.325, 0.338 j0.562
sin 2 t cos 2 t
(C)
- cos 2 t sin 2 t
sin 2 t - cos 2 t
(D)
sin 2 t
cos 2 t
(D) -0.325, 1.662 j0.562
(C) -2.325, -0.338 j0.562
12. The transfer-function relation between X ( s) and
Statement for Q.89:

The state-space representation of a system is given
by x& ( t) = A x ( t) + B u( t), where
U ( s) is
(A)
1
1
-s
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s - 1 2
s
(B)
(C)
1
1
-s
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1 2
s
0
0 2
, B=
A =
1
-2 0
If x(0) is the initial state vector, and the
component of the input vector u( t) are all unit step
1
1
s
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1 2
s
function, then the state transition equation is given by

x& ( t) = F( t )x (0) + q( t ), where F( t ) is a state transition
13. The output transfer function Y ( s) U ( s) is
matrix and q( t ) is a vector matrix.
(A) s( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1) -1
(B) s( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s - 1) -1
(C) ( s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1) -1
www.gatehelp.com
Page
377
UNIT 6
14. A system is described by the dynamic equation

x& ( t) = A x ( t) + B u( t), y( t) = C x( t) where
-1 0
1
, B = and C = [1 1]
A =
0 -2
0
(C)
( s + 1)
( s + 2) 2
(B)
s+1
s+2
( s + 2)
( s + 1)
18.
15. The state-space representation of a system is given

by
(C) s( s 2 + 3s + 2) -1
(D) ( s + 1) -1
1 0
0
10
x& = 0
0
1 x + 0 u, y = [1 0 0 ]x

-1 -2 -3
0
(A)
10(2 s 2 + 3s + 1)
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
(B)
10(2 s 2 + 3s + 1)
s 3 + 2 s 2 + 3s + 1
(C)
10(2 s 2 + 3s + 2)
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
(D)
10(2 s 2 + 3s + 2)
s 3 + 2 s 2 + 3s + 1
1
0
0 0
(C) x& =
0 0
20 10
0
0
0
0
x + r
0
1
0
1
7 100

0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
x + r
(D) x& =
0
0
1
0
0
-20 -10 -7 -100

1
y = [100 0 0 0 ]x
19. A state-space representation of a system is given by

Determine the state-space representation for the
transfer function given in question. Choose the state
variable as follows
2
d c
d c
dc
c
= c& , x3 = 2 = &&c , x4 = 2 = &&&
dt
dt
dt
C( s)
24
= 3
R( s)
s + 9 s 2 + 26 s + 24
1
0 x1 0
x& 1 0
(A) x& 2 = 0
0
1 x2 + 0 r

x& 3 -24 -26 -9 x3 24
1 0 x1 0
x& 1 0
(B) x& 2 = 0 0 1 x2 + 0 r

x& 3 24 26 9 x3 24
Page
378
y = [100 0 0 0 ]x
The transfer function Y ( s) U ( s) is
17.
0
0
0
0 1 0
x +
r,
0 0
1
0
100
7 10 20
y = [1 0 0 0 ]x
16. The state-space representation for a system is
x1 = c = y, x2 =
0
0
(A) x& =
0
100
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
x +
r
(B) x& =
0
0
1
0
0
-100 -7 -10 -20
100
The transfer function of this system is

(B) ( s + 2) -1
C( s)
100
= 4
R( s)
s + 20 s 3 + 10 s2 + 7 s + 100
y = [1 0 0 0 ]x
-1 0
1
x& ( t) =
x( t) + u( t), y( t) = [1 1]x( t)
0 -2
1
(A) ( s 2 + 3s + 2) -1
x& 1 0 1 0 x1 0
(C) x& 2 = 0 0
1 x2 + 0 r

x& 3 9 26 24 x3 24
1
0 x1 0
x& 1 0
(D) x& 2 = 0
0
1 x2 + 0 r

x& 3 -9 -26 -24 x3 24
The output transfer function Y ( s) U ( s) is

(A)
Control & System
0 1
0
x& =
x, y = [1 - 1]x, and x(0) = 1
2
0

The time response of this system will be
3
(A) sin 2t
(B)
sin 2 t
2
(C) -
1
2
(D)
sin 2 t
3 sin 2 t
20. For the transfer function

Y ( s)
s+3
=
U ( s) ( s + 1)( s + 2)
The state model is given by x& = A x + B u,
y = C x. The A , B, C are
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 6
-4 -2
-5
1
29. x& = -3 -10

0 x + 1 r, y = [ -1 2 1]x

1 -5
-1
0
estep ( )

Consider the system shown in fig. P6.7.34-36.
1
s
eramp ( )
(A) 1.0976
1
u
(B) 1.0976
(C) 0
1.0976
(D)
1.0976
0.714
(B)
0.714
(C) 0
4.86
(D)
4.86
x2
1
s
-1
1
s
-10
x3
34. The controllability matrix for this system is

10
1 -2
10 -10
0
(A) -10
(B) 1 -1
0 -20
1
40
4
10 -20
1 -2
10
10 -10
(C) -10
0
20
10 -20 -40
-2
10
Fig. P6.7.34-36
Consider the system shown in fig. P6.7.31-33
x1
-2
1
s
1
s
10
eramp ( )
(A) 0
x2
-1
1 0
0
0
30. x& = -5 -9 7 x + 0 r, y = [1 0 0 ]x

-1 0 0
1
estep ( )
Control & System
x1
1 -1
0
(D) 1 6 -1
1 -4 -4
35. The observability matrix is

10
1 -2
10 -10
0
(A) -10
(B) 1 -1
0 -20
1
40
4
10 -10
1 -2
10
10 -10
(C) -10
0
20
10 -10 -40
1 2
0
(D) 1 -1 1
1 -2 4
-5
36. The system is
-6
Fig. P6.7.31-33
31. The controllability matrix is

1 0
1 -2
(A)
(B)
4
0 1
-2
1 0
(C)
0 -1
1 2
(D)
-2 -4
(A) Controllable and observable

(B) Controllable only
(C) Observable only
A state flow graph is shown in fig. P6.7.37-38
32. The observability matrix is

1 0
1 -2
(A)
(B)
0
1
4
-2
1 0
(C)
0 -1
(A) Controllable and observable
(C) Observable only
1
s x2
1
s
x1
-5
Fig. P6.7.37-38
37. The state and output equation for this system is

x
x& 0 -1 x 0
(A) 1 = 21 1 + u, y = [5 4 ] 1
5
&
x
x
1
2
x2
4 2

Page
380
-21
4
1 2
(D)
-2 -4
33. The system is

www.gatehelp.com
Chap 6.7
v& -1 -1 v1 1
v
(B) &1 =
+ vi , iR = [ 4 1] 1
i3 -3 -1 i3 0
i3
1 x 0
x& 0
x
21 1 + u, y = [5 4 ] 1
(B) 1 =
5
&
x
1
x2
x2
4 2
v& 1 -3 v1 1
v
(C) 1 =
+ vi , iR = [1 4 ] 1
&
v2 1 6 v2 -1
v2
x
x& 0 -1 x 1
(C) 1 = 21 1 + u, y = [ 4 5 ] 1
5
x
1
x2
x& 2
4 2
v& 1 3 v1 1
v1
(D) 1 =
v + -1 vi , iR = [1 4 ]v
&
v
1
6
2
2
2
1 x 1
x& 0
x
21 1 + u, y = [ 4 5 ] 1
(D) 1 =
5
&
x
x
1
2
x2
4 2
38. The system is
Consider the network shown in fig. P6.7.41-43.

This system may be represented in state space
representation x& = A x + B u
(A) Observable and controllable

(C) Observable only
iC

iR1
39. Consider the network shown in fig. P6.7.39. The

state-space representation for this network is
iL
iL
iR2
1
2F
1W
is
1W
4H
vs
2W
Fig. P6.7.41-43
iC
iR
41. The state variable may be
1F
Fig. P6.7.39
v& -0.25 1 vC 1
vC
(A) & C =
i + 0.25 vs , iR = [0.5 0 ] i
i
0
5
0
.
L
L
L
(A) iR1 , iR 2
(B) iL , iC
(C) vC , iL
42. If state variable are chosen as in previous question,

then the matrix A is
1 -1
(A)
-1 3
1 -3
(B)
-1 1
-1 3
(C)
1 -1
3 -1
(D)
-1 1
v& -1 0.25 vC 0.25

v
(D) & C =
vs , iR = [0.5 0 ] C
+
iL 0 -0.5 iL 0
iL
43. The matrix B is

3
(A)
-1
-1
(B)
3
40. For the network shown in fig. P6.7.40. The output is
-3
(C)
1
1
(D)
-3
v& -0.5 1 vC 0.25

vC
(B) & C =
i + 1 vs , iR = [0.5 0 ] i
i
0
25
0
.
L
L
L
v& 1 0.25 vC 0.25
v
(C) & C =
+
vs , iR = [0.5 0 ] C
iL 0 0.5 iL 0
iL
i1
1W
1H
v1
i3
v2
iR
i2
vi
1F
4vL

4v1
1W
Consider the network shown in fig. P6.7.44-47

i1
Fig. P6.7.40
iR ( t). The state space representation is
vi
v& 1 -1 v1 1
v
(A) &1 =
+ vi , iR = [ 4 1] 1
i3 -3 1 i1 0
i3
1W
i3
1W
i5
i2
i4
1H
1H
1W
1F
+
vo
-
Fig. P6.7.44-47
www.gatehelp.com
Page
381
UNIT 6
Control & System
44. The state variable may be

(A) i2 , i4
(B) i2 , i4 , vo
(C) i1 , i3
(D) i1 , i3 , i5
45. In state space representation matrix A is

1
1
2
- 3 - 3
3
1
2
2
(A)
3
3
3
- 1 - 2 - 1
3
3
3
1
2
1
3 - 3 - 3
2
2
1
(B)
-
3
3
3
- 1 - 2 - 1
3
3
3
1
1
2
3 - 3 - 3
1
2
2
(C)
3
3
3
1
- 1 - 2
3
3
3
1
2
1
- 3 - 3
3
2
2
1
(D)
3
3
3
- 1 - 2 - 1
3
3
3
46. The matrix B is

2
3
1
(A) -
3
- 1
3
2
3
1
(B)
3
1
3
1
- 3
1
(C) -
3
1
3
2
3
1
(D)
3
2
3
47. If output is vo , then matrix C is

(A) [-1 0 0]
(B) [1 0 0]
(C) [0 0 -1]
(D) [0 0 1]
SOLUTIONS
1. (B) From the SFG
x& 3 = -3 x1 - 2 x2
x
x2 = 3
s
x
x1 = 2
- x3 + u
x& 2 = x3
x& 1 = x2
2. (A) x& 1 = - 2 x1 + x3 , x& 2 = - 2 x2 + u , x& 3 = -3 x3 + u

1 0 x1 0
x& 1 -2
x& = 0 -2 0 x + 0 u
2
2
&
x
0
0
3
3
x3 1
3. (C) x& 1 = - 2 x1 + x3 , x& 2 = - 2 x2 + u , x& 3 = -3 x3 + u
y = 5 x1 + 5 x2 + 5 x3
0
1 x1 0
x& 1 -2
x& = 0 -2 0 x + 1 u
2
2
0 -3 x3 1
x& 3 0
4. (C) x& 1 = -4 x1 + x2 , x& 2 = x3 + 2 u , x& 3 = - 3 x3 + u
x& 1 -4 1 1 x1 0
x& = 0 0
1 x2 + 2 u
2

x& 3 0 0 -3 x3 1
5. (B) Ds = |sI - A| = s 2 + s + 2 = 0 s = - 0.5 j1.323
0
s + 3
6. (A) ( sI - A) =
s+
0
( sI - A)
-1
= s + 3
0
0
1
s + 3
e -3t
F( t ) = L-1 {( sI - A )} ==
0
************************
1
, |sI - A|=
3
( s + 3) 2
e -3t
s -2
2
7. (A) ( sI - A) =
, |sI - A|= s + 4
2 s
( sI - A)
-1
s
1 s 2 s2 + 4
= 2
=
s + 4 -2 s -2
s2 + 4
2
s2 + 4
s
2
s + 4
cos 2 t sin 2 t
F( t ) = L-1 {( sI - A )} =
- sin 2 t cos 2 t
s -2
2
8. (A) ( sI - A) =
, Ds =|sI - A|= s + 4
2 s
Page
382
www.gatehelp.com
( sI - A)
-1
s
1 s 2 s2 + 4
= 2
=
s + 4 -2 s -2
s2 + 4
1
1
15. (D) T( s) = ( sI - A) -1
0
1
2
s + 4
s
2
s + 4
2
( sI - A)
cos 2 t sin 2 t
F( t ) = L-1 {( sI - A )} =
- sin 2 t cos 2 t
1 s 2 0 1 1
2
1
-1
= L-1 2
=L 2

s + 4 -2 s 1 1 s
s( s + 4) s
2
s( s 2 + 4)
1
2
( s + 4)
10. (C) (A) is not a state-transition matrix, since F(0) I

(C) is a state-transition matrix since F(0) = I and
[ F( t)]-1 = F( -t)
0
s -1
11. (C) ( sI - A) = 0 s
-1
1 2 s + 3
|sI - A| = s3 + 3s2 + 2 s + 1,
s = - 2.325, - 0.338 j0.562

X ( s)
= ( sI - A) -1 B
U ( s)
12. (B)
s 3 + 3s + 2
s+3
1 0
1
s( s + 3) s 0
= 3
-1

s + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
2
-s
-2 s - 1 s 1
1
1
s
= 3
s + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1 2
s
13. (C)
Y ( s) CX ( s)
=
U ( s)
U ( s)
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
s
1
= [1 0 0 ] 3
= 3
2
2
s + 3s 2+ 2 s + 1 s + 3s + 2 s + 1
s
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
14. (D)
Y ( s)
= C ( sI - A) -1 B
U ( s)
B = [1 1]
1 0
s+2
1 s + 1
=
s + 1 1 ( s + 1) 2
Ds 0
= s + 1
0
0
1
s + 2
0 1
1
=
1 0 s + 1
s + 2
16. (C) x& = A x + B u, y = C x + Du
0.5(1 - cos 2 t)
=
0.5 sin 2 t
(B) is not a state-transition matrix since F(0) I
-1
1
1 s + 1
T( s) =
1 0
9. (C) q( t) = L-1 {( sI - A) -1 BR( s)}
= L-1
Chap 6.7
1 0
0
10
A = 0
0
1, B = 0 , C = [1 0 0 ], D = 0

-1 -2 -3
0
Y ( s)
T( s) =
= C ( sI - A ) -1 B + D
U ( s)
( sI - A)
-1
s 3 + 3s + 2
s+3
1
1
= 3
s
(
s
+
)
s
1
3
s + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
-s
-2 s - 1 s 2
Substituting the all values,

T( s) =
10(2 s 2 + 3s + 2)
s 3 + 3s 2 + 2 s + 1
17. (A)
C( s)
b0
24
=
=
R( s) s 3 + a2 s 2 + a1 s + a0 ( s 3 + 9 s 2 + 26 s + 24)
( s 3 + a2 s 2 + a1 s + a0 ) C( s) = b0 R( s)
Taking the inverse Laplace transform assuming zero
initial conditions
&&&
c + a2 &&c + a1 c& + a0 c = b0 r
x1 = c = y, x2 = c& , x3 = &&c
x& 1 = c& = x2 , x& 2 = &&c = x3
x& 3 = &&&
c = b0 r - a2 &&c - a1 c& - a0 c
= - a0 x1 - a1 x2 - a2 x3 + b0 r ,
1
0 x1 0
x& 1 0
x& = 0
0
1 x2 + 0 r
2

x& 3 -a0 -a1 -a1 x3 b0
a0 = 24 , a1 = 26, a2 = 9, b0 = 24
1
0 x1 0
x& 1 0
x& = 0
0
1 x2 + 0 r
2

x& 3 -24 -26 -9 x3 24
x1
y = [1 0 0 ] x2

x3
18. (B) Fourth order hence four state variable
www.gatehelp.com
Page
383
UNIT 6
0
0
x& =
0
-a
0
1
0
0
1
-a1
-a 2
0
0
0
0
x = r, y = [1 0 0 0 ]x
1
0

-a 3
b0
a0 = 100, a1 = 7, a2 = 10,
a3 = 20 ,
b0 = 100
Y ( s) = [0 1] X ( s) =
sin 2 t
cos 2 t
F( t ) = L-1 {( sI - A)} =
2
- 2 sin 2 t cos 2 t
20. (C) Find the transfer function of option

Y ( s)
1
For (A) ,
,
=
U ( s) s - 2
y( t) =
0 1
s + 2
Y ( s)
1
= [0 1]
s + 1 1
U ( s)
( s + 1)( s + 2) 2
|sI - A| = s
- 8 s - 11s + 8
-1
2 1 3
+ 2
1 1 s + 9
2 s + 4 s + 21s + 45
1
2
( s + 5)( s + 9) s 3 - 7 s 2 + 12 s - 7
3
1 1 -2 t
- e
2 2
-1
0.05 -0.05
-0.4
=
-1 -0.25 -0.25
-0.5
15
.
-2
-2 -
27. (A) estep ( ) = 1 + CA -1B, A -1 =
3
1
0
s = 9.11, 0.53, - 1.64
23. (D) X ( s) = ( sI - A) -1 (x(0) + B u)

s - 1 -2
=
s + 1
3
1
s( s + 2)
= 1 - 0.2 = 0.8
s = -5.79, - 121
.
-2
-3
s
22. (B) ( sI - A) = 0 s - 6 -5
-1 -4 s - 2
2
0 1
0 + 0 1
s
0 0
s( s + 2)
=
2
s ( s + 2)
1
s 2 ( s + 1)( s + 2)
-0.4 0.05 -0.05 0

estep ( ) = 1 + [ -1 1 0 ] -1 0.25 -0.25 0

15
.
-0.5 1
-2
-2 -1
21. (C) A =
,
-3 -5
X ( s) =
1 0
- 5
A= 0
-2 1,
20 -10 1
So (C) is correct option.
-1
26. (D) For a unit step input estep ( ) = 1 + CA -1B
s + 2
s+3
1
= [0 1]
=
( s + 1)( s + 2) s + 3 ( s + 1)( s + 3)
|sI - A| = s2 + 7 s + 7
1
1
- e - t + e -2 t
2
2
Y ( s) = [1 0 0 ],
Y ( s)
1
For (B) ,
=
U ( s) s - 2
For (C),
y( t) =
1
s( s + 1)( s + 2)
0
s + 2 -1
= 0
-1
s
0 s + 1
0
sin 2 t
1 1 1
0 + 1 s

25. (B) X ( s) = ( sI - A) -1 (x(0) + B u)
sin 2 t
cos 2 t +
x( t) = F( t )x(0) =
2
- 2 sin 2 t + cos 2 t
3
0
s + 1
1
( s + 1)( s + 2) -1 s + 2
( s + 1)
s( s + 2)
=
s( s + 1)( s + 2)
0 1
1 s 1
19. (B) A =
, ( sI - A) -1 = 2
s + 2 -2 s
-2 0
y = x1 - x2 =
Control & System
1 2
-2 - 0
estep ( ) = 1 + [1 1]
3 =1 - =
3 3
1
0 1
28. (C) eramp ( ) = lim [(1 + CA -1B) t + C( A -1 ) 2 B]
t
2
1 + CA -1B = ,
3
eramp ( ) = lim t + C( A -1 ) 2 B =
t 3
4 s 3 - 10 s 2 + 45 s - 105
Y ( s) = [1 2 ] X ( s) =
( s 2 + 5)( s 2 + 9)
24. (B) X ( s) = ( sI - A) -1 (x(0) + B u)
Page
384
29. (B) estep ( ) = 1 + CA -1B

-4 -2
-5
1
A = -3 -10
0 , B = 1 , C = [ -1 2 1]

1 -5
-1
0
www.gatehelp.com
-1
-1 1 0
A = 0 -1 0 , C = [10 - 10 10 ],
0 0 -2
0.134
0.122
-0.305
= 0.091 -0.140 -0.037
-0.079 -0.055 -0.232
-1 1 0
CA = [10 - 10 10 ] 0 -1 0 = [10
0 0 -2
.
estep ( ) = 1 + 0.0976 = 10976
-1
-1 2
eramp ( ) = lim [(1 + CA B) t + C( A ) B] =

t
-1
0
0
30. (B) A -1 = 1
0
0
1.286 0.143 -0.714
CA 2 = [10
0
-1 0
0
0
0 0 = 0
estep ( ) = 1 + [1 0 0 ] 1

1.286 0.143 -0.714 1
.
-0.143 0.714
-1286
0
0
-1
(A ) =
-0.776 -0.102 -0.776
nonsingular and system is controllable
1
0
1
A =
, B=
-6 -5
-2
10
10 -10
det O M = det-10
0 -10 = -3000
40
10 -20
1 1 1 -2
0
-6 -5 -2 = -2
4
The rank of O M is 3. Hence system is observable.
32. (A) y = x1 , y = [1 0 ]x ,
0 ], CA = [1
37. (B) x& 2 = - 5 x1 -
C 1 0
0 ] , OM =
=
CA 0 1
21
x2 + u , x& 1 = x2 , y = 5 x1 + 4 x2
4
1 x 0
x& 1 0
x1
1
x& = -5 - 21 x + 1 u, y = [5 4 ] x
2
2
4 2
33. (C) det CM = 0. Hence system is not controllable. det

O M = 1. Hence system is observable.
C 5 4
38. (B) O M =
=
CA -20 1
34. (B) x& 1 = - x1 + x2 , x& 2 = - x2 + u , x& 3 = - 2 x3 + u
det O M = 0. Thus system is not observable
-1 1 0
0
-1 1 0
0
&x = 0 -1 0 x + 1 u, A = 0 -1 0 , B = 1

0 0 -2
1
0 0 -2
1
1
0
21
CM = [B AB] =
1
4
-1 1 0 0 1
AB = 0 -1 0 1 = -1

0 0 -2 1 -2
det CM = -1. Thus system is controllable.

39. (B)
-1 1 0 1 -2
A 2B = 0 -1 0 -1 = 1

0 0 -2 -2 4
1 -2
0
1
Cm = [B AB A B] = 1 -1
4
1 -2
2
35. (A) y = 10 x1 - 10 x2 + 10 x3 , y = [10 - 10
40 ]
Since the determinant is not zero, the 3 3 matrix is
31. (B) x& 1 = x2 + u , x& 2 = - 5 x2 - 6 x1 - 2 u
C = [1
-1 1 0
0 - 20 ] 0 -1 0 = [10 - 10
0 0 -2
1 -2
0
36. (A) det Cm = det 1 -1
1 = -1,
4
1 -2
C( A -1 ) 2 B = 0.714, eramp ( ) = 0.714
1
CM = [B AB] =
-2
0 - 20 ]
10
C 10 -10
O M = CA = -10
0 -20
2
40
CA 10 -10
-1 2
1
0
1
x& =
x + u,
-6 -5
-2
Chap 6.7
10 ]x
dvc
di
v
= ic , L = L = 0.25 vL
dt
dt
4
vC and iL are state variable.

v
iL = iC + iR , iC = iL - iR = iL - C , vL = vs - vC
2
dvL
v
Hence equations are
= iL - C = - 0.5 vC + iL
dt
2
diL
= 0.25( vs - vC ) = - 0.25 vC + 0.25 vs
dt
v& C -0.5 1 vC 0.25
i& = -0.25 0 i + 1 vs ,
L
L
www.gatehelp.com
Page
385
UNIT 6
iR =
v
iR = [0.5 0 ] C
iL
vC
= 0.5 vC ,
2
45. (A)
Control & System
di2
di
dvo
= v2 , 4 = v4 ,
= i5
dt
dt
dt
i1
40. (B)
dv1
di
= i2 , 3 = vL
dt
dt
1W
vi
Hence v1 and i3 are state variable.
1W
v2 i3
v4 i5
i2
i4
1H
1H
1W
1F
+
vo
-
i2 = i1 - i3 = ( vi - v1 ) - i3 , i2 = - v1 - i3 + vi
vL = v1 - v2 = v1 - iR , = v1 - ( i3 + 4 v1 ) = -3v1 - i3
dv1
di
= - v1 - i3 + vi , 3 = - 3v1 - i3,
y = iR = 4 v1 + i3
dt
dt
v&1 -1 -1 v1 1
v1
i& = -3 -1 i + 0 vi , iR = [ 4 1] i
3
3
3
41. (C) Energy storage elements are capacitor and
inductor. vC and iL are available in differential form and
linearly independent. Hence vC and iL are suitable for
state-variable.
1 dvC
dvC
= iC
= 2 iC
2 dt
dt
1 diL
diL
= vL
= 2 vL
2 dt
dt
42. (B)
iC
iR1
is
1W
iL
+ vC 1
2F
vL
iR2
+
vR2
1W
4vL
Fig. S6.7.42
vL = vC + vR 2 = vC + iR2 , iC + 4 vL = iR 2
vL = vC + iC + 4 vL , -3vL = vC + iC
v
iC = is - iR1 - iL , iC = is - L - iL
1
...(i)
...(ii)
Solving equation (i) and (ii)

-3 ( is - iL - iC ) = vC + iC , 2 iC = vC - 3iL + 3is
Fig. S6.7.45
Now obtain v2 , v4 and i5 in terms of the state variable

-vi + i1 + i3 + i5 + vo = 0
But i3 = i1 - i2 and i5 = i3 - i4
-vi + i1 + ( i1 - i2 ) + ( i3 - i4 ) + vo = 0
2
1
1
1
i1 = i2 + i4 - vo + vi
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
2
v2 = vi - i1 = - i2 - i4 + vo + vi
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
i3 = i1 - i2 = - i2 + i4 - vo + vi
3
3
3
3
1
2
1
1
i5 = i3 - i4 = - i2 - i4 - vo + vi
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
1
v4 = i5 + vo = - i2 - i4 + vo + vi
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
i&2 3
3
3 i2 3
& 1
2
2 1
i4 + vi
i4 = - 3 - 3
3 3
v& o 1
2
1 vo 1
-
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
- 3 - 3
3
1
2
2
A = ,
3
3
3
- 1 - 2 - 1
3
3
3
47. (D) vo is state variable
-3vL = vC + is - vL - iL , 2vL = - vC + iL - is
dvC
di
= vC - 3iL + 3is , L = - vC + iL - is
dt
dt
v& C 1 -3 vC 3
i& = -1 1 i + -1 is
L
L
y = vo ,
i2
y = [0 0 1] = i4

vo
********
3
43. (A) B =
-1
44. (B) There are three energy storage elements, hence
3 variable. i2 , i4 and vo are available in differentiated
form hence these are state variable.
Page
386
2
3
1
46. (B) B =
3
1
3
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 7
10. If machine is not properly adjusted, the product
Statement for Question 15-16:
resistance change to the case where ax = 1050 W. Now

the rejected fraction is
Communication System
The life time of a system expressed in weeks is a

Rayleigh random variable X for which
(A) 5046%
(C) 2.18%
(B) 10.57%
(D) 6.43%
x -x
e 400
200
f X ( x) =
0
2
11. Cannon shell impact position, as measured along

the line of fire from the target point is described by a
0x
x <0
gaussian random variable X. It is found that 15.15% of
15. The probability that the system will not last a full
shell falls 11.2 m or farther from the target in a
week is
direction toward the cannon, while 5.05% fall farther
(A) 0.01%
(B) 0.25%
from the 95.6 m beyond the target. The value of ax and
(C) 0.40%
(D) 0.60%
sx
for X is
(Given that F(103

. ) = 0.8485 and
16. The probability that the system lifetime will exceed
F(1.64) = 0.9495)
(A) T + 40 m and 50 m
(B) T + 40 m and 30 m
in year is
(C) T + 10 m and 50 m
(D) T + 30 m and 40 m
(A) 0.01%
(B) 0.05%
(C) 0.12%
(D) 0.22%
12. A gaussian random voltage X for which a X = 0 and

s X = 4.2 V appears across a 100 W resistor with a power
rating of 0.25 W. The probability, that the voltage will
17. The cauchy random variable has the following

probability density function
f X ( x) =
cause an instantaneous power that exceeds the

resistor's rating, is
5
(A) 2Q
4.2
5
(B) Q
4.2
5
(C) 1 + Q
4.2
5
(D) 1 - Q
4.2
For real numbers 0 < b and - < a < . The

distribution function of X is
1
x -a
(A) tan -1
p
b
Statement for Question 13 -14 :

Assume that the time of arrival of bird at
Bharatpur
sanctuary
on
migratory
route,
first day), is approximated as a gaussian random

variable X with a X = 200 and sx = 20 days. Given that :
F(10
. ) = 0.8413.,
(B)
1
x -a
cot-1
p
b
(C)
1 1
x -a
+ tan -1
2 p
b
(D)
1 1
x -a
+ cot-1
2 p
b
as
measured in days from the first year (January 1 is the
F(0.5) = 0.6915,
b/ p
b2 + ( x - a) 2
F(15
. ) = 0.8531,
Statement for Question 18 - 19

The number of cars arriving at ICICI bank
F(155
. ) = 0.9394 and F(2.0) = 0.9773.
drive-in window during 10-min period is Poisson

13. What is the probability that birds arrive after 160
days but on or before the 210
th
(A) 0.6687
(B) 0.8413
(C) 0.8531
(D) 0.9773
day ?
18. The probability that more than 3 cars will arrive

during any 10 min period is
14. What is the probability that bird will arrive after

231st day ?
(A) 0.0432
(B) 0.1123
(C) 0.0606
(D) 0.0732
Page
390
random variable X with b = 2.
(A) 0.249
(B) 0.143
(C) 0.346
(D) 0.543
19. The probability that no car will arrive is

(A) 0.516
(C) 0.246
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 0.459
(D) 0.135
Random Variables
Chap 7.1
20. The power reflected from an aircraft of complicated
26. The mean of random variable X is
shape that is received by a radar can be described by an
(A) 1/4
(B) 1/6
exponential random variable W . The density of W is
(C) 1/3
(D) 1/5
1 - w W0
e
fW ( w) = W0
0
w > 0
w < 0
27. The variance of random variable X is
where W0 is the average amount of received power.
(A) 1/10
(B) 3/80
(C) 5/16
(D) 3/16
The probability that the received power is larger than

the power received on the average is
(A) e -2
(C) 1 - e
28. A Random variable X is uniformly distributed on

X
(B) e -1
-1
(D) 1 - e
the interval (-5, 15). Another random variable Y = e

-2
is formed. The value of E[ Y ] is
(A) 2
(B) 0.667
(C) 1.387
(D) 2.967
Delhi averages three murder per week and their

29. A random variable X has X = -3, x 2 = 11 and s2X = 2
occurrences follow a poission distribution.
For a new random variable Y = 2 x - 3, the Y , Y and s2Y

21. The probability that there will be five or more
are
murder in a given week is
(A) 0, 81, 8
(B) - 6, 8, 89
(C) - 9, 89, 8
(A) 0.1847
(B) 0.2461
(C) 0.3927
(D) 0.4167
22. On the average, how many weeks a year can Delhi
Statement for Question 31-32 :

A joint sample space for two random variable X
expect to have no murders ?

(A) 1.4
(B) 1.9
(C) 2.6
(D) 3.4
and Y has four elements (1, 1), (2, 2), ( 3, 3) and (4, 4).
Probabilities of these elements are 0.1, 0.35, 0.05 and
0.5 respectively.
23. How many weeds per year (average) can the Delhi
expect the number of murders per week to equal or
exceed the average number per week ?
(A) 15
(B) 20
(C) 25
(D) 30
30. The probability of the event{ X 2.5, Y 6} is

(A) 0.45
(B) 0.50
(C) 0.55
(D) 0.60
31. The probability of the event { X 3} is
24. A discrete random variable X has possible values
(A) 0.45
(B) 0.50
xi = i , i = 1, 2, 3, 4 which occur with probabilities 0.4,
(C) 0.55
(D) 0.60
0.25, 0.15, 0.1,. The mean value X = E[ X ] of X is

(A) 6.85
(C) 3.96
(B) 4.35
(D) 1.42

Random variable X and Y have the joint distribution
25. The random variable X is defined by the density

x
1
f X ( x) = u( x) e 2
2
The expected value of g( X ) = X 3 is

(A) 48
(B) 192
(C) 36
(D) 72
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y2
2
- e - y u( y), 0 x 4

x+1
4
FX , Y ( x, y) = 0
x < 0 or y < 0
1 -5 y 2 5 - y 2
- e ,
4 x and any y 0
1 + e
4
4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
391
UNIT 7
32. The marginal distribution function FX ( x) is
37. The marginal distribution function FX ( x) is
x, > 0
0,
5 x
(A)
, -4< x4
4( x + 1)
1,
x -4
x <0
0,
5 x
(B)
, 0 x<4
4( x + 1)
1,
x4
x >0
1,
5 x
(C)
, - 4 < x 0
4( x + 1)
0,
x -4
x <0
1,
5 x
(D)
, 0 x<4
4( x + 1)
0,
x4
33. The marginal distribution function FY ( y) is

5 - y2
- e ,
(A) 4
2
1 + 4 e -5 y ,
(A)
5
1
[ 4( x) - 4( x - 4)]
4 ( x + 1) 2
(B)
5
1
[ 4( x) - 4( x - 4)]
2 ( x + 1) 2
(C)
5
1
[ 4( x) - 4( x - 4)]
4 ( x + 1)

38. The marginal distribution function FY ( y) is
y >0
(A) [1 - e - y ]u( y)
y 0
(C)
y >0
0,
(B)
1 -5 y 2 5 - y 2
- e , y 0
1 + 4 e
4
5
4
(A) 0.001
(B) 0.002
(C) 0.003
(D) 0.004
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y2
2
- e - y ,

8
x+1
(C)
2
1 -5 y 2
- 5 e - y ],
1 + 4 [ e

Two random variable X and Y have a joint density
2
10
FX , Y ( x, y) =
[ u( x) - u( x - 4)]u( y) y 3e - ( x + 1 ) y
4
35. The marginal density f X ( x) is
u( x) - u( x - 4)
u( x) - u( x - 4)
(A) 5
(B) 5
( x + 1) 2
( x + 1)
5 u( x) - u( x - 4)
(D)
4
( x + 1)
(B)
5
2
y 2 [ e - y - e -5 y ]u( y)
(C)
5
4
y[ e - y - e -5 y ]u( y)
(D)
5
2
y[ e - y - e -5 y ]u( y)
Page
392
0 x 4 and y > 0
x > 4 and y > 0
0 x 4 and y > 0
x > 4 and y > 0
0 x 4 and y > 0
x > 4 and y > 0
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y2
2
- e - y ,

4
x+1
(D)
2
1 -5 y 2
- 5 e - y ],
1 + 2 [ e
0 x 4 and y > 0
x > 4 and y > 0
40. The function

FX , Y ( x, y) =
36. The marginal density fY ( y) is

y 2 [ e - y - e -5 y ]u( y)
[1 - e - y ]u( y)
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y2
2
- e - y ,

8
x+1
(B)
2
1 -5 y 2
- 5 e - y ],
1 + 2 [ e
34. The probability P { 3 < X 5, 1 < y 2} is
5
4
[1 - e - y ]u( y)
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y2
2
- e - y ,

4
x+1
(A)
2
1 -5 y 2
- 5 e - y ],
1 + 4 [ e
y <0
0,
(D)
1 -5 y 2 5 - y 2
- e , y 0
1 + 4 e
4
(A)
5
2
(B)
39. The joint distribution function is
-5 - y 2
e ,
y <0
(C) 4
2
2
1 + 1 e -5 y - 5 e - y , y 0
4
4
5 u( x) - u( x - 4)
(C)
4
( x + 1) 2
a p
x p
y
+ tan -1 + tan -1
2 2
2
2

3
is a valid joint distribution function for random

variables X and Y if the constant a is
1
2
(A) 2
(B) 2
p
p
(C)
4
p2
www.gatehelp.com
(D)
8
p2
Random Variables
41. Random variable
and Y
have the joint
(A)
a2
1 - e- a
(B)
(C)
1
1 - e- a
distribution function
0,
27
26
27
FX , Y ( x, y) =
26
27
26
1,
The
x < 0 or y < 0
y
,
x 1 27
y2
y 1 ,
27
Chap 7.1
a
1 - e- a
0 x < 1 and 1 y
1 x and 0 y < 1
x2 y2
xy 1 27
Random variable X and Y have the joint density

x y
- 1
f X , Y ( x, y) = u( x) u( y) e 4 3
2
0 x < 1 and 0 y < 1
46. The probability of the event {2 < X 4, - 1 < Y 5}
1 x and 1 y
probability
of
the
is
event
{0 < X 0.5, 0 < Y 0.25} is

(A) 0.13
(B) 0.24
(C) 0.69
(D) 1
(A) 0.1936
(B) 6.2964
(C) 0
47. The probability of the event {0 < X < , < y -2} is
Statement for question 42-43 :
(A) 0.2349
(B) 0.3168
(C) 0.4946
The joint probability density function of random

48. Let X and Y be two statistically independent
variable X and Y is given by

pXY ( x, y) = xye
random variables uniformly distributed in the ranges (
( x 2 + y2 )
2
-1, 1) and (-2, 1) respectively. Let Z = X + Y . Then the
u( x) u( y)
probability that ( Z -2) is

42. The pX ( x) is
2
(A) 2 xe - x u( x)
(B) xe
x2
2
x
(C) xe - x u( x)
(A) zero
(C) 1/3
u( x)
49. The probability density function of two statistically
(D) 2 xe 2 u( x)
independent random variable X and Y are

f X ( x) = 5 u( x) e -5x
43. The pY / X ( y/x) is

(A)
1
2
ye - y u( y)
(C) ye
(B) ye - y u( y)
y2
2
(D)
u( y)
(B) 1/6
(D) 1/12
1
2
ye
fY ( y) = 24( y) e -2 y
The density of the sum W = X + Y is
y2
2
u( y)
(A)
10
6
[ e -2 w - e 5w ]u( w)
10
8
[ e -2 w - e 5w ]u( w)
44. The probability density function of a random
((B)
variable X is given as f X ( x) . A random variable Y is
(C)
10
13
[ e -2 w - e -5w ]u( w)
defined as y = ax + b where a < 0. The PDF of random
(D)
10
2
[ e -2 w - e -5w ]u( w)
variable Y is
y - b
(A) bf X
a
(C)
y - b
(B) af X
1 y - b
f X
a a
(D)
50. The density function of two random variable X and

Y is
1
0 < x < 6 and 0 < y < 4
f X , Y ( x, y) = 24
0
else where
1 y - b
f X
b a
45. The function

be
f X , Y ( x, y) =
0
The expected value of the function g( x, y) = ( XY )

- ( x + y)
0 < x < a and 0 < y <

else where
is a valid joint density function if b is
is
(A) 64
(B) 96
(C) 32
(D) 48
www.gatehelp.com
Page
393
UNIT 7
51. The density function of two random variable X and
56. The value of s2X , s2Y , R XY and r are respectively
Y is
f X , Y ( x, y) =
x 2 + y2
-
2 s2
2 ps2
with s2 a constant. The mean value of the function

g( X , Y ) = X 2 + Y 2 is
(A) s2
(B) s
(C) 2s2
(D) 2s
have
Y = E[ Y ] = Y .
mean
They
X = E[ X ] = 2
values
have
33
11 27 1
1
, . 2 +
, and -3
2
4 2 2
3
(B)
33
11 11 1
1
, 2 +
, and -3
2
4 2 2
3
(C)
1 2
9 11 1
1
, 2 , and 3 33
4 2 2
3
(D)
1 2
9 11 1
1
, , 2 , and 3 33
4 2 2
3
W = ( X + 3Y ) 2 + 2 X + 3 is
The statistically independent random variable X

Y
(A)
57. The mean value of the random variable
and
second
and
moments
(A) 98 + 3
(B) 98 - 3
(C) 49 - 3
(D) 49 + 3
X 2 = E[ X 2 ] = 8 and Y 2 = E[ Y 2 ] = 25. Consider a random

***********
variable W = 3 X - Y .
52. The mean value E[W ] is
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 8
(D) 25
53. The second moment of W is

(A) 145
(B) 49
(C) 97
(D) 0
54. The variance of the random variable is

(A) 4
(B) 45
(C) 49
(D) 54
55. Two random variable X and Y have the density

function
xy
,
f X , Y ( x, y) = 9
0
0 < x < 2 and 0 < y < 3

elsewhere
The X and Y are

(A) Correlated but statistically independent
(B) uncorrelated but statistically independent
(C) Correlated but statistically dependent
(D) Uncorrelated but statistically dependent
Page
394
www.gatehelp.com
Random Variables
= FX (900) + [1 - FX (1100)]
SOLUTION
900 - ax
= F
sx
x
2
-x
dx =
1
x e - x dx = 0.368
2 1
0
2. (C) P { -1 < X 2} = -1
=1 -
= 2 - 2(0.9938) = 0.012 or 1.2 %

900 - 1050
10. (B) P(resistor rejected) = F
+1
40
1 x
1
xe dx + xe - x dx
2
2
0
1100 - 1050
- F
. ) + 1 - F (125
. )
= F ( -375
40
= 1 - F ( 375
. ) + 1 - F (125
. )
3. (A) Test 1: f X ( x) 0 is true
= 2 - 0.9999 - 0.8944 = 0.1057 or 20.57 %
l 3x
1 l 3b 1
Test 2: area must be 1 i.e.
dx =
- =1
4
4 3
3
0
b
4. (C)
11. (D) P { x > T + 95.6} = 0.0505

T + 95.6 - ax
( T + 95.6 - ax )
= F
sx
sx
T + 95.6 - ax
This occurs when
= 1.64
sx
1
ln 13
3
r( v) = 1
= F ( -2.5) + 1 - F (2.5) = 1 - F (2.5) + 1 - F (2.5) = 2 - 2 F(2.5)
1
3
= 0.429
e 2 e2
Thus b =
1100 - ax
+ 1 - F
sx
900 - 1000
11000 - 1000
= F
+ 1 - F
40
40
1. (A) P { X > 1} = pX ( x) dx
=
Chap 7.1
=1 - F
1
1
4k = 1 k =
2
2
2
2
x r( x) dx = x
x
dx = 8
8
This occur when -
P ( A) = FX ( 3) - FX (1) = e
1
2
-e
6. (D) P ( B) = FX (2.5) = 1 - e
3
2
2 .5
2
12. (A) 0.25 exceeds when
P ( C) = FX (2.5) - FX (1) = e
-e
100
> 0.21 or x > 5 v
P(0.25 W exceeded) = P { x > 5}
= 0.7135
= P { x > 5} + P { x < -5} = 1 - P ( x 5) + P { x < -5}

5 -0
-5 - 0
5
-5
= 1 - P
+ P
= 1 - F
+ F
4.2
4.2
4.2
4.2
2 .5
2
5
5
5
5
= 1 - F
+ 1 - F
= 2 1 - F
= 2Q
4
.
2
4
.
2
4
.
2
4.2
= 0.3200
13. (A) P {160 < X 120} = FX (210) - FX (160)

210 - 200
160 - 200
= F
- F
20
20
8. (A) P ( X > 2) = P {2 < x} + P { x < -2}

= 1 - P { x 2} + P { x < -2} = 1 - F (2) + F ( -2)
We know that for gaussian function F ( - x) = 1 - F ( x)
= F (0.5) - F ( -2) = F (0.5) + F (2) - 1
Thus P ( X > 2)= 1 - F (2) + 1 - F (2)
= 0.6915 + 0.9773 - 1 = 0.6687
= 2 - 2 F(2) = 2 - 2(0.9772) = 0.0456

9. (C) Rejected resistor corresponds to { x < 900 W} and
{ x > 1100 W}.
Fraction
rejected
corresponds
...(ii)
= 0.3834
7. (D) C = A B = {1 < X < 2.5}

1
2
. - ax
T - 112
= 103
.
sx
Solving (i) and (ii) we get ax = T + 30 and sx = 40
x
x
-
1 5. (B) For x = 0, FX ( x) = e 2 dx = 1 - e 2 u( x)
0 2
...(i)
P { x T - 112
. } = 0.1515
( T - 112
. - ax )
( T - 112
. - ax )
=F
=1 - F
= 8485
sx
sx
kv v
Thus r( v) =
=
4
8
Mean Square Value =
= 0.9495
to
14. (C) P { X > 231}= 1 - P { X 231} = 1 - FX (231)

231 - 200
= 1 - F
. ) = 1 - 0.9394 = 0.0606
= 1 - F(155
20
probability of rejection.
P {resistor rejected} = P { X < 900} + P { X < 1100}
www.gatehelp.com
Page
395
UNIT 7
15. (B) We use the Rayleigh distribution with a = 0 and

b = 400
For probability P { X 1}= FX (1) = 1 - e
1
400
17 -3
= 52 1 e = 29.994 weeks
2
24. (B) E[ X ] = X = xi P ( xi )
= 0.0025 or 0.25 %
i =1
= 10
. (0.4) + 4(0.25) + 9(0.15) + 16(0.1) = 4.35
16. (C) P { X 52} = 1 - FX (52)

52
52
= 1 - 1 - e 400 = 1 - e 400 = 0.00116 or 0.12 %
17. (C) FX =
( u) du =
x
1 3 -2 1 6
xe =
= 48
2 (1 2) 4
0 2
25. (A) E[ g( X )] = E[ X 3 ] =
( b p) du
+ ( u - a) 2
26. (A) Mean of X =
2
xf X ( x) dx = x 3(1 - x) dx =
1
4
Let v = u - a and dv = du to get

b
FX ( x) =
p
=
x -a
27. (B) Variance of X is s2x = E[ X 2 ] - m 2x
x -a
dv
b 1
v
=
tan -1
b2 + v 2 p b
b -
E[ X 2 ] =
1 1
x -a
+ tan -1
2 p
b
f X ( x) dx = x 2 3(1 - x) 2 dx =
0
s2x =
1 1
3
- =
10 4
80
Hence B is correct option
P { x > 0} = 1 - P { x 3}
28. (B) Here Y = g( X ) = e
= 1 - P ( x = 0) - P ( x = 1) - P ( x = 2) - P ( x = 3)
So E[ Y ] = E[ g( Y )] =
2 0 21 2 2 2 3
19
=1 - e
+
+
+ = 1 - e -2
= 0.1429
0
!
2
!
2
!
3
!
3
-2
2
= 0.135
0!
1
20
X
3
g( X ) g
15
( x) dx = e
-5
x
5
1
dx
15 - ( -5)
15
x
-
1 1
-3
5
-5 e = [ e - e ] = 0.667
5
-5
E[ Y 2 ] = E[(2 X - 3) 2 ] = 4 X 2 - 12 X - 9
= 1 - 1 - e W0 = e -1
W0
= 4(11) - 12( -3) - 9 = 89

2
s2Y = Y 2 - Y = 89 - 9 2 = 8
21. (A) P {5 or more}= 1 - P (0) - P (1) - P (2) - P ( 4)

30 31 32 33 34
131 -3
= 1 - e -3 +
+
+
+
=1 e = 0.1847
8
0 ! 11 2 ! 3 ! 4 !
30. (A) F
XY
(x, y) = 0.1u (x - 1)u ( y - 1) + 0.35u (x - 2)u ( y - 2)

+0.05u (x - 3)u ( y - 3) + 0.5u (x - y)u ( y - 4)
P { X 2.5, Y 6.0} = f XY (2.5, 6.0) = 0.1 + 0.35 = 0.45
-3
22. (C) P(0) = e = 0.0498

average number of week, per year with no murder
52 e -3 = 2.5889 week.
31. (B) P { X 30
. }= FX ( 30
. ) = FXY ( 30
. , )
= 0.1 + 0.35 + 0.05 = 0.5
32. (B) FX ( x) = FX , Y ( x, )
23. (D) P {3 or more}= 1 - P (0) - P (1) - P (2)
2
5x
5 x + e- ( x + 1 ) y
lim
- e - y u( y) =
y 4
x
+
4
(
x
+ 1)
1
32
17 -3
= 1 - e 1 + 3 +
= 1 - 2 e = 0.5768
2
-3
Average number of weeks per year that number of

murder exceeds the average
29. (C) E[ Y ] = E[2 X - 3] = 2 X - 3 = 2( -3) - 3 = -9
20. (B) P {W > W0 } = 1 - P {W W0 } = 1 - FW (W0 )
2
2
1
5
lim 1 + e -5 y - e - y = 1
y
4
4
33. (B) FY ( y)= FX , Y ( , y)

Page
396
1
10
3k
18. (B) Here f X ( x) = e -2 d( x - k)
k=0 k!
19. (D) P ( x = 0) = e -2
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 7
= 5 e - ( w- y) u( w - y) u( y)2 e -2 ydy = 10 e -5w+ 3 ydy, w > 0

-
10
=
u( w)[ e -2 w - e -5w ]
3
y= 0 x = 0
y 2 f X , Y ( x, y) dx dy
51. (C) E[ g( X , Y ) ] =
x2 e
x2
2 s2
2 ps2
dx
R XY = XY = C XY + X Y = -
(x
+ y2 )
- y2
2 ps2
dy +
y2 e 2 s
2 ps2
r=
x 2 + y2
-
2
2s
2 ps2
- -
y2
2 s2
dy
dx dy
e2s
2 ps2
dx
variance s2 .
Thus E[ g( x, y)]= E[( x 2 + y 2 )]2s2
52. (A) E[W ] = E[ 3 X - Y ] = 3 X - Y = 6 - 4 = 2
53. (B) E[W 2 ] = E[( 3 X - Y ) 2 ] = E[9 X 2 - 6 XY + Y 2 ]
= 9 X 2 - 6 XY + Y 2 = 9 X 2 - 6 X Y + Y 2
= 9( 8) - 6(2)( 4) + 25 = 49
2
54. (B) s2W = E[(W - W ) 2 ] = E[W 2 - 2W W + W ]

2
= W 2 - W = 49 - 4 = 45
- -
E[ X ] =
0 0
3 2
E[ Y ] =
0 0
3 2
f X , Y ( x, y) dxdy =
0 0
x2 y2
8
dx dy =
9
3
4
x y
dx dy =
9
3
x2 y
dx dy = 2
9
Since R XY =
8
4 8
= E[ X ] E[ Y ] = 2 = , we have X and Y
3
3 3
uncorrelated form
3
From marginal densities f X ( x) =

0
fY ( y) =
0
Page
398
xy
x
dy = , 0 < x < 2
9
2
xy
2y
, 0< y<3
dy =
9
9
we have f X ( x) fY ( y) =
1
2 3
1
1
1
(2) = 2
2
2
3
1
1 5
1
19
= 3 + 2 + + 6 2 + 9
= 98 - 3
3
2 2
2
2
second moment of gaussian density with zero mean and
3 2
= 3 + 2 X + X 2 + 6 XY + 9 Y 2
density. The first factor equal s2 because they are
xy
and
-1/2 3
-1 2
C XY
=
=
s X sY ( 914 )( 11/2 )
3 33
factors equal 1 because they are area of a gaussian
57. (B) W = ( X + 3Y ) 2 + 2 X + 3
-x 2
Both double integral are of the same form. the second
55. (B) R XY =
and
5 1
9
- =
2 2
4
2
11
11
2
- (2) =
s2Y = Y 2 - Y =
2
2
x y
dx dy = 64
24
= f X ( x) fY ( y)
- -
4
f X , Y ( x, y)
statistically independent.
56. (C) s2X = X 2 - X =
50. (A) E [( XY ) 2 ] =
Thus
xy
, 0 < x < 2 and 0 < y < 3
9
www.gatehelp.com
are
CHAPTER
7.2
RANDOM PROCESS
Statement for Question 1 - 4 :
3. The value of E[ X 2 ( t)] is
A random process X ( t) has periodic sample
(A)
t0 A 2
T
(B)
(C)
2 t0 A 2
3T
(D) 0
functions as shown in figure where A, T and 4 t0 T are

constant but is random variable uniformly distributed
on the interval (0, T).
4. The value of s2X is
X (t)
Fig. P7.2.1-4
1. The first order density function is

2t
T - 2 t0
d( x) + 0
(A) T
AT
0
(B)
0x<A
t0 A
4T
(B)
t0 A 2 t0
T
T
(C)
t0 A
T
2 t0
3 + T
(D)
t0 A 2
T
2 t0
3 + T
5. An ergodic random power x( t) has an auto-correlation

function
R XX ( t) = 18 +
2
1 + 4 cos(12 t)
6 + t2
The X is
(A) 18
(C) 17
(B) 13
(D) 18 17
6. For random process X = 6 and
else where
R XX ( t, t + t) = 36 + 25 e -|t|.
Consider following statements :
1. X ( t) is first order stationary.
2. X ( t) has total average power of 36 W.
2. The value of E[ X ( t)] is
(C)
t0 A 2 t0
T 3 T
else where
T - 2 t0
2 T0
d( x) +
T
AT
t A
(A) 0
2T
(A)
0x<A
T - 2 t0 2 t0
+
[ u( x) - u( x - A)]
T
AT
2t
T + 2 t0
d( x) + 0
(C) T
AT
0
(D)
t0 A 2
3T
3. X ( t) is a wide sense stationary.

t A
(B) 0
T
(D) 0
4. X ( t) has a periodic component.

The true statement is/are
(A) 1, 2, and 4
(B) 2, 3, and 4
(C) 2 and 3
(D) only 3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
399
UNIT 7
7. A random process is defined by X ( t) + A where A is
The variance of random variable Y = X ( t) dt will be
continuous random variable uniformly distributed on
(A) 1
(B) 2.31
(0,1). The auto correlation function and mean of the
(C) 4.54
(D) 0
process is
(A) 1/2 & 1/3
(B) 1/3 & 1/2
13. A random process is defined by X ( t) = A cos( pt)
(C) 1 & 1/2
(D) 1/2 & 1
where A is a gaussian random variable with zero mean

and variance s 2p . The density function of X(0)

A
random
process
(A)
is
defined
by
Y ( t) = X ( t) cos( w0 t + q) where X ( t) is a wide sense
1
2 ps A
x2
2 s 2A
(B)
(C) 0
2 ps A e
x2
2 s 2A
(D) 1
stationary random process that amplitude modulates a

carrier of constant angular frequency w0 with a random
phase q independent of X ( t) and uniformly distributed

on ( -p / p).
The two-level semi-random binary process is

defined by
X ( t) = A or -A
8. The E[ Y ( t)] is
where ( n - 1) T < t < nt and the levels A and -A
(B) -E[ X ( t)]

(D) 0
(A) E[ X ( t)]
(C) 1
occur with equal probability. T is a positive constant
9. The autocorrelation function of Y ( t) is

1
(B) R XX ( t) cos( w0 t)
(A) R XX ( t) cos( w0 t)
2
(C) 2 R XX ( t) cos( w0 t)
Consider a low-pass random process with a
white-noise power spectral density S X ( w) = N/2 as
shown in fig.P7.2.10-11.
and n = 0, 1, 2
14. The mean value E[ X ( t)] is
(A) 1/2
(B) 1/4
(C) 1
(D) 0
15. The auto correlation R XX ( t1 = 0.5 T, t2 = 0.7 T) will be

(A) 1
(B) 0
(C) A
(D) A 2/2
16. A random process consists of three samples function

X ( t, s1 ) = 2, X ( t, s2 ) = 2 cos t1 and X ( t, s3) = 3 sin t- each
occurring with equal probability. The process is
(A) First order stationary
(B) Second order stationary
Fig.P7.2.10-11
(C) Wide-sense stationary

10. The auto correlation function R X ( t) is
(D) Not stationary in any sense
(A) 2 NB sinc (2pbt)
(B) pNB sinc (2pbt)
(C) NB sinc (2pbt)
(A) 2 NB
(B) pNB
ergodic random process is shown in fig.P.7.2.17-19
(C) NB
D) D
The auto correlation function of a stationary
11. The power PX is

NB
2p
50
12. If X ( t) is a stationary process having a mean value

E[ X ( t)] = 3
R XX ( t) = 9 + 2 e
Page
400
and
autocorrelation
function
-|t|
20
-10
10
Fig. P7.2.17-19
www.gatehelp.com
Random Process
17. The mean value E[ X ( t)] is
Chap 7.2
24. A complex random process Z ( t) = X ( t) + jY ( t) is
(A) 50
(B)
50
defined by jointly stationary real process X ( t) and Y ( t).
(C) 20
(D)
20
The E[|Z ( t)|2 ] will be

(A) 2 R XY (0) + R XX (0) + RYY (0) (B) R XX (0) + RYY (0)
(C) R XX (0) - RYY (0)
18. The E[ X 2 ( t)] is

(A) 10
(B)
10
(C) 50
(D)
50
(D) RYY (0) - R XX (0)
25. Consider random process X ( t) = A0 cos( w0 t + q)

where A0 and w0 are constant and q is a random
variable uniformly distributed on the interval (0, p). The
19. The variance s2X is
power in X ( t) is
(A) 20
(B) 50
(A) A 2
(C) 70
(D) 30
(C)
20. Two zero mean jointly wide sense stationary

random process
X ( t) and Y ( t) have no periodic
components. It is know that s 2X = 5 and s2Y = 10. The

function, that can apply to the process is
2
(A) R XX ( t) = 6 u( t) e -3t
(C) R XY ( t) = 9(1 + 2 e 2 ) -1
sin( 3t)
(B) RYY ( t) = 5
3t
A2
1
4
(D) 1
real random process is

(A) d( w + w0 ) - d( w - w0 )
(C) d( w) +
w2
w + 16
2
w2
w2 + 25
w2
(D) 2
w + 16
(B)
27. The valid power density spectrum is
21. A stationary zero mean random process X ( t) is
w2
1 + w2 + jw2
(C) e - ( w -1 )
(B)
w2
- d( w)
w +1
(D)
w2
w + 3w2 + 3
component. The valid auto correlation function is

(A) 16 + 18 cos( 3t)
(B) 24 da 2 (2 p)
e ( -6 t )
(C)
(1 + 3t 2 )
(D) 24d( t - t)
A2
1
2
26. The non valid power spectral density function of a
(A)
ergodic has average power of 24 W and has no periodic
(B)
28. A power spectrum is given as

P
r XX ( w) = 1 + ( w / W ) 2
22. Air craft of Jet Airways at Ahmedabad airport
w < KW
w > KW
where P , W , and K are real positive constants. The
arrive according to a poisson process at a rate of 12 per

hour. All aircraft are handled by one air traffic
sums bandwidth of power spectrum is
controller. If the controller takes a 2 - minute coffee
(A) W
tan + k
-1
k
(B) W
(C) W
tan -1 k
+1
k
(D)
break, what is the probability that he will miss one or

more arriving aircraft ?
(A) 0.33
(B) 0.44
(C) 0.55
(D) 0.66
29. Consider the power spectrum given by

P
r XX ( w) =
0
23. Delhi airport has two check-out lanes that develop

waiting lines if more than two passengers arrives in
any one minute interval. Assume that a poission
process describes the number of passengers that arrive
(A) 0.16
(C) 0.32
(B) 0.29
(D) 0.49
w <W
w >W
where P and W are real positive constants. The

rms bandwidth of the power spectrum is
for check-out. The probability of a waiting line if the

average rate of passengers is 2 per minute, is
k
-1
tan -1 k
(A)
(C)
2
3
www.gatehelp.com
(B)
W2
3
(D)
W
2
Page
401
UNIT 7
30. For a random process R XX ( t) = P cos 4 ( w0 t) where P
37. A random process X ( t) has an autocorrelation
and w0 are constants. The power in process is
function R XX ( t) = A 2 + Be -|t| Where A and B are
(A) P
(B) 2P
constants. A system have an input response
(C) 3P
(D) 4P
e - Wt 0 < t
h( t) =
0 t <0
31. A random process has the power density spectrum

r XX ( w) =
6w2
[1 + w 2 ] 3
where W is a real positive constant, which X ( t) is
. The average power in process is
(A) 1/4
(B) 3/8
(C) 5/8
(D) 1/2
its input. The mean value of the response is

A
A
(B)
(A)
W
2W
32. A deterministic signal A cos( w0 t), where A and w0
(C)
are real constants is added to a noise process N ( t) for

which r NN ( w) =
W2
W2+ w2
and W > 0 is a constant. The ratio
2A
W
38. In previous question if impulse response of system is
of average signal power to average noise power is
(C)
e - Wt sin( w0 t) 0 < t
h( t) =
0
t <0
A
(B)
W
A2
(D)
W
(A) 1
2A
W
where W and w0 are real positive constants, the

mean value of response is
33. The autocorrelation function of a random process
(A)
Aw0
w + W2
(C)
2A
1
2
w0 w0 + W 2
X ( t) is
2
R XX ( t, t + t) = 12 e Yt cos 2 (24 t)
The R XX ( t) is
(A) 6 e -4 t
(C) 48 e
(B) 12 e -4 t
-4 t 2
power density spectrum f XX ( w) is

(B)
(C) 3 + jw2
35.
The
4 e -3|t|
1 + w2
of jointly
wide
sense
- Wt
where A > 0 and W > 0 are constants. The r XX ( w) is

A
W - w2
(B)
A
W + w2
(C)
A
W + jw
(D)
A
W - jw
E[ X ( t)] = 2, the mean value of the system's response

Y ( t) is
(A)
1
128
(B)
1
64
(C)
3
128
(D)
1
32
A random process X ( t) is applied to a network with
stationary process X ( t) and Y ( t) is R XY ( t) = Au( t) e
(A)
impulse response h( t) = u( t) te - at
Y ( t) is known to have the same form R XY ( t) = u( t) te - at

40. The auto correlation of Y ( t) is
4 + at - a|t|
1 + at - a|t|
(A)
(B)
e
e
3
4a
3a 2
36. A random process X ( t) is applied to a linear time

system.
A response
Y ( t) = X ( t) - X ( t - t)
occurs when t is a real constant. The system's transfer

function is
(A) 1 - e jwt
(C) 2 je - jwt/ 2 cos
Page
402
wt
2
(B) 2 je - jwt/ 2 sin

(D) 1 + e - jwt
where a > 0 is a
constant. The cross correlation of X ( t) with the output
(C)
invariant
2
+W
1
+ W2
(D) 18d( w)
cross correlation
A
2 w0
input of a system for which h( t) = 3u( t) t 2 e -8 t . If
6
6 + 7 w3
2
w0
A
(D)
2 w0 w02
(B)
2
0
39. A stationary random process X ( t) is applied to the
34. If X ( t) and Y ( t) are real random process, the valid
(A)
(D) 0
wt
2
4 + at - a|t|
e
8a2
(D)
1 + at - a|t|
e
4 a3
41. The average power in Y ( t) is

1
1
(A)
(B) 3
a
4a3
(C)
1
3a 2
www.gatehelp.com
Random Process
Chap 7.2
SOLUTION
A random noise X ( t) having a power spectrum

r XX ( w) =
3
49+ w 2
is applied to a differentiator that has a
transfer function H ( w) = jw. The output is applied to a

network for which h( t) = u( t) t 2 e -7t
1.
(A)
Let
have
value
Now
e.
P { X x = e} = FX ( X|= e) and for any must be zero

for x < 0 because x( t) is never negative. The event
{ X 0} is satisfied whenever x( t) is zero. This happens
42. The average power in X ( t) is

(A) 5/21
(B) 5/24
(C) 5/42
(D) 3/14
during
the
fraction
of
time ( T - 2 t0 ) / T.
FX ( x|= e) = [( T - 2 T0 ) / T} u( x).
For
Hence
0x<A
the
additional time interval or fraction of time where X x

becomes 2 to 2 t0 x / AT.
43. The power spectrum of Y ( t) is
2t x
T - 2 t0
Thus FX ( x = e) =
u( x) + 0 , 0 x < A
T
AT
(A)
4 w2
( 49 + w2 ) 3
(B)
12 w2
( 49 + w2 ) 4
(C)
42 w3
( 49 + w2 ) 2
= 1,A x
= 0,x < 0
By differentiation
44. White noise with power density N0/2 is applied to a

lowpass network for which H(0) = 2. It has a noise
2t
T - 2 t0
f X ( x = e) =
d( x) + 0 , 0 x < A
AT
T
= 0 else where
bandwidth of 2 MHz. If the average output noise power
f X , e ( x, e) = f X ( x = e) f( e)
is 0.1 W in a 1 - W resistor, the value of N0 is

(A) 12.5 nW/Hz
(B) 12.5 mW/Hz
(C) 25 nW/Hz
(D) 25 mW/Hz
2 T0
T - 2 t0
,0 x < A and 0 < e < T
=
d( x) +
2
AT 2
T
45. An ideal filter with a mid-band power gain of 8 and
f X ( x) =
power spectrum r XX ( w) =
- w 2 /8
the network's output is ( F (2) = 0.9773)

(B) 90.3
(C) 20.2
(D) 100.4
( x, e) de
X ,
2t
T - 2 t0
=
d( x) + 0 .0 x < A
AT
T
. The noise power at
(A) 60.8
bandwidth of 4 rad/s has noise X ( t) at its input with

50
8p
= 0 elsewhere.
xf
2. (B) E[ X ( t)] =
( x) dx
46. White noise with power density N0/2 = 6 mW/Hz is

applied to an ideal filter of gain 1 and bandwidth W
2t x
t A
T - 2t
- x T 0 d( x) dx + 0 AT0 dx = 0T
A
rad/s. If the output's average noise power is 15 watts,

the bandwidth W is
3. (C) E[ X 2 ( t)] =
(A) 2.5 10 -6
(B) 2.5 p 10 -6
(C) 5 10 -6
(D) p5 10 -6
2 t0 x 2 2 t0 A 2
=
3T
AT
0
f X ( x) dx =
4. (D) s2X = E[ X 2 ( t)] - { E[ X ( t)]} 2

2
47. A system have the transfer function H ( w) = 1 + ( w1/W ) 4

where W is a real positive constant. The noise
bandwidth of the system is
2 t0 A 2 t02 A 2 t0 A 2
=
3T
T
T2
2 t0
3 - T
5. (A) We know that ( i) if X ( t) has a periodic component
(A)
1
3
pW 2
(B)
(C)
1
6
pW 2
1
4
pW 2
then R XX ( t) will have a periodic component with the

-
same period. (ii) if E[ X ( t)] = X m 0 and X ( t) is ergodic

with no periodic components then lim R XX ( t) = X
|t|
************
Thus we get X = 18 or X= 18
www.gatehelp.com
Page
403
UNIT 7
6. (C) X = Constant and R XX ( t) is not a function of t, so

X ( t) is a wide sense stationary. So 1 is false & 3 is true.
13. (A) For t = 0,X(0)= A,
So f X ( x) =
2 ps A
x2
2
2 sA
PXX = R XX (0) = 36 + 25 = 61.

Thus 2 is false if X ( t) has a periodic component, then
14. (D) E[ X ( t)] = AP ( A) + ( - A) P ( - A) =
R XX( t) will have a periodic component with the same

period. Thus 4 is false.
15. (C) Here R XX ( t1 , t2 )= A 2

1
7. (B) R XX ( t, t + t) = E[ X ( t) X ( t + t)] = E[ A 2 ] = a 2 da =
0
X= E[ X ( t)] = E[ A ] = a da =
0
1
3
= E X [ X ( t)] cos( w0 t + q)
-X
If
both
and
t1
are
t2
in
the
same
interval
( n - 1) T < t, t2 < nT, n = 0, , 2...

and R XX ( t1 , t2 ) = 0 otherwise
1
2
Hence R XX (0.5 T, 0.7 T) = A 2

16. (D) Let x1 = 2, x2 = 2 cos t and x3 = 3 sin( t)
1
1
1
Then f X ( x) = d( x - x1 ) + d( x - x2 ) + d( x - x3)
2
3
3
8. (D) E[ Y ( t)} = E[ X ( t) cos( w0 t + q)]

X
A A
- =0
2 2
1
dq = 0
2p
where E X [] represent expectation with respect to X
and E[ X ( t)] =
xf
( x) dx
only
=
9. (B) RYY ( t, t + t)
x 3 d( x - x ) + 3 d( x - x ) + 3 d( x - x )
1
= E[ X ( t) cos( w0 t + q) X ( t + t) cos( w0 t + q + w0 t)]

1
= R XX ( t) [cos( w0 t) + cos(2 w0 t + 2 q + w0 t)]
2
1
= R XX ( t) cos( w0 t)
2
10. (C) S X ( w) =
1
[2 + 2 cos t + 3 sin t ]
3
The mean value is time dependent so X ( t) is not

stationary in any sense.
17. (D) We know that for ergodic with no periodic
N
w
rect
2
4 pb
component
2
lim R XX ( t) = X ,
We know that R X ( t) S X ( w)
W
w
sin(Wt) rect
p
2W
|t|
Thus X = 20
or
X = 20
18. (C) R XX (0) = E[ X 2 ( t)] = R XX (0) = 50 = X 2
Here W = 2pB
Hence R X ( t) =
2 pB N
sin (2pBt) = NB sinc (2pBt)
p 2
19. (D) s2X = X 2 - X = 50 - 20 = 30

20. Here X = 0, Y = 0, R XX (0) = 5, sY2 = RYY (0) = 10
11. (C) PX = X = R X (0) = NB since sinc (0) = 1

2
For (A) : Function does not have even symmetry

For (B) : Function does not satisfy RYY (0) = 10
12. (C) E[ Y ] = E[ X ( t) dt = E[ X ( t)]dt = 3 dt = 6

0
For
2 2
E[ Y 2 ] = E[ X ( t) dt X ( u) du]] = E[ X ( t) X ( u) du dt ]
(C)
Function
not
satisfy
|R XY ( t)| R XX (0) RYY (0) = 50
0 0
2 2
2 2
21. (D) For (A) : It has a periodic component.
0 0
0 0
For (B) ; It is not even in t, total power is also incorrect.
= R XX ( t - u) dt du = [9 + 2 e -|t - u| ]dt du
2 2
= 36 + 2 e -|t - u|dt du = 4(10 + e -2 )

0 0
s2Y = E[ Y 2 ] - ( E[ Y ]) 2 = 4(1 + e -2 ) = 4.541
For (C) It depends on t not even in t and average power

is .
22. (A) P (miss/or more aircraft)= 1 - P(miss 0)
= 1 - P (0 arrive) = 1 -
Page
404
does
www.gatehelp.com
( lt) 0 e - lt
0!
UNIT 7
E[ Y ( t)] = A h( x)dx = A e - Wt dt =
So W = 2.5 p 106
A
W
38. (A) X = A
E[ Y ( t)] = Y = X h( t) dt = A e
47. (B) Noise bandwidth Wn =
H( w)
H (0)
XY
2 -8 t
*********
( t + x)h( x) dx
u( x)u( x + t)( tx + x ) e
= e - at
-2 ax
dx
There are two cases of interest t 0 and t < 0 Since

RYY ( t) is an even function we solve only the ease t 0
RYY ( t) = e - at ( tx + x2 )e -2 ax dx =
0
1 + at - ax
e
4 a3
41. (B) Power in y( t) = RYY (0) =
1
4a3
dw
1
3
3
r XX ( w) dw = 2 p - 49 + w2 = 14
2p -
42. (D) PXX =
F
43. (B)h2 = 49 t) t 2 e -7t
2
= H 2 ( w)
(7 + jw) 3
2
sYY ( w) = s XX ( w) = H1 ( w) H 2 ( w) =
12 w2
( 49 + w2 ) 4
44. (A) PYY =

So N0 =
N0 H (0) Wn
2p
2 p(0.1)
2
H (0) Wn
= 0.1
2 p(0.1)
(2) 2 2 p 2 106
. 10 -8 W/Hz = 12.5 nW/Hz

= 125
45. (A) PYY =
4
2
1
r XX ( w) H ( w) dw
2 p -
w2
1
50 - 8
=
e
2p 4 8p
=
Page
406
200
=
p
w2
2 (u)
2 p( 4)
200
200
[ F (2) - F ( -2)] =
[2 F (2) - 1)] = 60.8
p
p
46. (B) PYY =

=
(8 ) dw
2
1
r XX ( w) H( w) dw
2 p -
1
6 10 -6 W 6 10 -6 W
-6
d
w
=
=
6
10
= 15
2 p -W
p
p
W
www.gatehelp.com
dw
dw
pW
=
4
(
)
+
1
w
/W
2
2
0
3
39. (C)Y = X h( t) dt = 2 3t e dt =
128
0
-
40. (D) RYY ( t)=
Wn = H ( w) dwsince H(0) = 1 =
0
Aw
sin( w0 t) dt = 2 0 2
w0 + W
- Wt
CHAPTER
7.3
NOISE
1. The power spectral density of a bandpass white noise
5. A mixer stage has a noise figure of 20 dB. This mixer
n( t) is N / 2 as shown in fig.P.7.3.1. the value of n is
stage is preceded by an amplifier which has a noise
figure of 9 dB and an available power gain of 15 dB.

The overall noise figure referred to the input is
Fig. P7.3.1
(A) 11.07
B) 18.23
(C) 56.48
(D) 97.38
6. A system has three stage cascaded amplifier each
(A) NB
(B 2 NB
(C) 2pNB
(D)
stage having a power gain of 10 dB and noise figure of 6
NB
p
dB. the overall noise figure is
2. In a receiver the input signal is 100 mV, while the
(A) 1.38
(B) 6.8
(C) 4.33
(D) 10.43
internal noise at the input is 10 mV. With amplification
7. A signal process m( t) is mixed with a channel noise
the output signal is 2 V, while the output noise is 0.4 V.
n( t). The power spectral density are as follows
The noise figure of receiver is

Sm ( w) =
(A) 2
(B) 0.5
(C) 0.2
3. A receiver is operated at a temperature of 300 K. The

transistor used in the receiver have an average output
resistance of 1 kW. The Johnson noise voltage for a
receiver with a bandwidth of 200 kHz is
(A) 1.8 mV
(B) 8.4 mV
(C) 4.3 mV
(D) 12.6 mV
(C) 4 m V
(D) 16 10 -18 V
(C)
w2 + 10
w2 + 9
(B)
1
w + 10
2
A sonar echo system on a sub marine transmits a
noise voltage generated in a bandwidth of 10 kHz is

(B) 0.4 m V
The optimum Wiener-Hopf filter is

w2 + 9
(A) 2
w + 10
Statement for Question 8-9
4. A resistor R = 1 kW is maintained at 17 o C. The rms

(A) 16 10 -14 V
6
, Sn ( w) = 6
9 + w2
random noise n( t) to determine the distance to another

targeted submarine. Distance R is given by vt R / 2
where v is the speed of the sound wave in water and t R
is the time it takes the reflected version of n( t) to
return. Assume that n( t) is a sample function of an
ergodic random process N ( t) and T is very large.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
407
UNIT 7
8. The V will be
14. The standard spot noise figure of amplifier is
(A) 2 R NN ( t R - t T )
(B) R NN ( t R - 2 t T )
(A) 4 dB
(B) 5 dB
(C) R NN ( t R - t T )
(D)
R NN ( t R - t T )
(C) 7 dB
(D) 9 dB
1
2
9. What value of the delay t T will cause v to be
15. If a matched attenuator with a loss of 3.2 dB is
maximum ?
placed between the source and the amplifier's input,

what is the operating spot noise figure of the attenuator
(A) t R
(B) 2t R
(C) 3t R
amplifier
cascade
if
the
attenuator's
temperature is 290 K ?
10. Two resistor with resistance R1 and R2 are
(A) 9 dB
(B) 10.4 dB
connected in parallel and have Physical temperatures
(C) 11.3 dB
(D) 13.3 dB
T1 and T2 respectively. The effective noise temperature

Ts of an equivalent resistor is
physical
16. In previous question what is the standard spot noise

figure of the cascade ?
(A)
T1 R1 + T2 R2
R1 + R2
(B)
T1 R1 + T2 R1
R1 + R2
(C)
T1 T2 ( R1 + R2 ) 2
( T1 + T2 ) R1 R2
(D)
( T1 + T2 ) R1 R2
T1 + T2 ( R1 + R2 ) 2
(A) 10.3 dB
(C) 14.9 dB
(B) 12.2 dB
(D) 17.6 dB
17. Omega Electronics sells a microwave receiver (A)

having an operating spot noise figure of 10 dB when
driven by a source with effective noise temperature 130
An amplifier has a standard spot noise figure
K Digilink (B) sells a receiver with a standard spot
F0 = 6.31 (8.0 dB). The amplifier, that is used to amplify
noise figure of 6 dB. Microtronics (C) sells a receiver
the output of an antenna have antenna temperature of
with standard spot noise figure of 8 dB when driven by
Ta = 180 K
a source with effective noise temperature 190 K. The

best receiver to purchase is
11. The effective input noise temperature of this
(A) A
(B) B
amplifier is
(C) C
(D) all are equal
(A) 2520 K
(B) 2120 K
(C) 2710 K
(D) 1540 K

An amplifier has three stages for which Te1 = 150 K
12. The operating spot noise figure is
(first stage), Te 2 = 350 K, and Te 3 = 600 K (output stage).
(A) 3.2 dB
(B) 6.4 dB
Available power gain of the first stage is 10 and overall
(C) 9.8 dB
(D) 11.9 dB
input effective noise temperature is 190 K
13. An amplifier has three stages for which Te1 = 200 K
18. The available power gain of the second stage is
(first stage), Te 2 = 450 K, and Te 3 = 1000K (last stage). If
(A) 12
(B) 14
the available power gain of the second stage is 5, what
(C) 16
(D) 18
gain must the first stage have to guarantee an effective

input noise temperature of 250 K ?
19. The cascade's standard spot noise figure is
(A) 10
(C) 16
(A) 1.3 dB
(B) 2.2 dB
(C) 4.3 dB
(D) 5.3 dB
(B) 13
(D) 19
20. What is the cascade's operating spot noise figure
An amplifier has an operating spot noise figure of
Page
408
when used with a source of noise temperature Ts = 50 K
10 dB when driven by a source of effective noise
(A) 1.34 dB
(B) 3.96 dB
temperature 225 K.
(C) 6.81 dB
(D) None of the above.
www.gatehelp.com
Noise
Chap 7.3
21. Three network are cascaded. Available power gains
elements
are G1 = 8, G2 = 6 and G3 = 20. Respective input effective
matched attenuator with an overall loss of 2.4 dB and a
spot noise temperature are Te1 = 40 K, Te 2 = 100 K and
physical temperatures of 275 K. The overall system
Te 3 = 180 K.
noise temperature of the receiver T sys = 820 K.
(A) 58.33 K
(B) 69.41 K
(C) 83.90 K
(D) 98.39 K
that can be modeled as an impedance
26. The average effective input noise temperature of the

receiver is
22. Three identical amplifier, each having a spot
(A) 420.5 K
(B) 320.5 K
effective input noise temperature of 125 K and available
(C) 220.5 K
(D) 10.5 K
power G are cascaded. The overall spot effective input

noise temperature of the cascade is 155 K. The G is
27.
(A) 3
(B) 5
attenuator-receiver cascade is
(C) 7
(D) 9
(A) 13.67 d
(B) 11.4 dB
(C) 1.4 dB
(D) 1.367 dB
23. Three amplifier that may be connected in any order

in a cascade are defined as follows:
The
average
operating
noise
figure
of
the
28. If receiver has an available power gain of 110 dB

and a noise bandwidth of 10 MHz, the available output
Amplifier
Effective Input Noise

Temperature
Available Power
Gain
110 K
120 K
150 K
12
noise power of receiver is

(A) 6.5 mW
(B) 8.9 mW
(C) 10.3 mV
(D) 11.4 mV
29. If antenna attenuator cascade is considered as a

noise source, its average effective noise temperature is
The sequence of connection that will give the

lowest overall effective input noise temperature for the
cascade is
(A) 63 K
(B) 149 K
(C) 263 K
(D) 249 K
(A) ABC
(B) CBA
(C) ACB
(D) BAC
An amplifier when used with a source of average

noise temperature 60 K, has an average operating noise
24. What is the maximum average effective input noise

temperature that an amplifier can have if its average
standard noise figure is to not exceed 1.7 ?
(A) 203 K
(B) 215 K
(C) 235 K
(D) 255 K
figure of 5.
30. The T e is
(A) 70 K
(B) 110 K
(C) 149 K
(D) 240 K
25. An amplifier has an average standard noise figure
31. If the amplifier is sold to engineering public, the
of 2.0 dB and an average operating noise figure of 6.5
noise figure that would be quoted in a catalog is
dB when used with a source of average effective source
(A) 0.46
(B) 0.94
temperature Ts . The Ts is
(C) 1.83
(D) 2.93
(A) 156.32 K
(B) 100.81 K
(C) 48.93 K
32. What average operating noise figure results when

the amplifier is used with an antenna of temperature
Statement for Question
30 K ?
An antenna with average noise temperature 60 K

connects to a receiver through various microwave
(A) 9.54 dB
(B) 10.96 dB
(C) 11.23 dB
(D) 12.96 dB
www.gatehelp.com
Page
409
UNIT 7
33. An engineer of RS communication purchase an
(A) 1 / W
(B) 2.5 / W
amplifier with average operating noise figure of 1.8
(C) 4.5 / W
(D) 6 / W
when used with a 60 W broadband source having

average source temperature of 80 K. When used with a
different 60 W source the average operating noise figure
39. White noise, for which R XX ( t) = 10 -2 8( t) is applied to

a network with impulse response h( t) = 4( t) 3 - te-4 t The
is 1.25. The average noise temperature of the source is
network's output noise power in a 1 W resistor is
(A) 125 K
(B) 156 K
(A) 0.15 mW
(B) 0.35 mW
(C) 256 K
(D) 292 K
(C) 0.55 mW
(D) 0.95 mW
34. The Te for unit 1 and 2 unit are, respectively

(A) 126.4 K and 256.9 K
40. White noise with power density N0/2 = 6(10 -6 ) W/Hz

is applied to an ideal fitter (gain= 1) with bandwidth W
(B) 256.9 K and 126.4 K
(rad/sec). For output's average noise power to be 15 W,
(C) 527.8 K and 864.2 K
the W must be
(D) 864.2 K and 527.8 K
(A) 2.5 p(10 -6 )
(B) -2.5 p(106 )
(C) 4.5 p(10 -2 )
(D) 4.5 p(106 )
35. The excess noise power of unit 1 and unit 2 are

respectively
41. An ideal filter with a mid-band power gain of 8 and
(A) 15.4 nW and 27.1 nW
bandwidth of 4 rad/s has noise X ( t) at its input with
(B) 23.8 nW and 21.1 nW
power spectrum ( F (2) = 0.9773)
(C) 23.8 nW and 27.1 nW
w2
50 - 8
r XX ( w) =
e
8p
(D) 15.4 nW and 21.1 nW

36. Consider following statement
S1 : If the source noise temperature T s is very small,
The noise power at the network's output is

164
343
(B)
(A)
p
p
unit-2 is the best to purchase

S2 : If the source noise temperature T s is very small
(C)
211
p
(D)
191
p
unit - 1 is the best to purchase.

42. A system has the power transfer function
correct statement is
(A) S1
(B) S2
(C) both S1 and S2
(D) None
37. A source has an effective noise temperature of

and feeds an amplifier that has an
Ts ( w) = 100800
+ w2
available power gain of Ga ( w) =
8
10 + jw
H( w) =
) . The T
2
for this
source is
(A) 10 K
(B) 20 K
(C) 30 K
(D) 40 K
where W is a real positive constant. The noise

bandwidth of the system is
pW
(A)
2 2
(C)
38. A system have an impulse response
w
1+
W
pW
2
(B)
pW
2
43. White noise with power density N0/2 is applied to a

low pass network for which H(0) = 2. It has a noise
- Wt
e
e<t
h=
t
<0
0
bandwidth of 2 MHz. If the average output noise power
where W is a real positive constant. White noise
is 8.1 W in a 1 W resistor, the N0 is
with power density 5w/Hz is applied to this system. The
(A) 6.25 108 W/Hz
(B) 6.25 10 -8 W/Hz
mean-squared value of response is
(C) 125
. 108 W/Hz
(D) 125
. 10 -8 W/Hz
Page
410
www.gatehelp.com
Noise
Chap 7.3
SOLUTION
An amplifier has a narrow bandwidth of 1 kHz and

standard spot noise figure of 3.8 at its frequency of
operation. The amplifier's available output noise power
fc + B
1. (B) n2 = 2
fc + B
N
df = 2 NB
2
is 0.1 mW when its input is connected to a radio

receiving antenna having an antenna temperature of 80
K.
2. (A) NF =
100/10
S/N
i
i
=
=2
2/0.4
So/N o
44. The amplifier's input effective noise temperature Te
3. (A) vn2 = 4kTBR
is
= 4 1.38 10 -23 300 200 10 3 10 3 = 3.3 10 -12
(A) 812 K
(B) 600 K
(C) 421 K
(D) 321 K
vnrms = 1.8m V
4. (B) vn2 = 4kTBR,
45. Its operating spot noise figure Fop is

(A) 5.16
(B) 7.98
(C) 11.15
(D) 16.23
46. Its available power gain Ga is

(A) 2 1012
(B) 4 1012
(C) 8 1012
(D) 11 1012
T = (273 + 17) K = 290 K,
R = 1000W, B = 10 Hz, k = 1.38 10 -23 J/K

4
vn2 = 4 1.38 10 -23 290 10 3 10 4 = 16 10 -14 V 2

vnrms = 0.4m V
5. (A) F1 = 9 dB = 7.94,
F2 = 20 dB = 100
A1 = 15 dB = 31.62,
100 - 1
F -1
.
= 7.94 +
= 1107
F = F1 + 2
31.62
A
6. (C) Gain of each stage A1 = A2 = A3 = 10 dB
Noise figure of each stage
F1 = F2 = F3 = 6 dB or F1 = F2 = F3 = 4 db
F - 1 F3 - 1
4 -1 4 -1
+
=4+
+
= 4.33
F = F1 + 2
A1
A1 A2
10
100
7. (B) H op ( w) =
8. (C) V =
1
2T
Sm ( w)
=
Sm ( w) + Sm ( w)
6
9+ w 2
6
9+ w 2
+6
1
10 + w2
n( t - t
)n( t - t R ) dt
-T
Since T is very large

1
T 2 T
V = lim
n( t - t
)n( t - t R ) dt = A[ n( t - t T ) n( t - t R )]
-T
Since N ( t) is ergodic,
V R NN ( t R - t T )
9. (A) Because R NN ( t) R NN (0) for any auto correlation

function, V will be maximum if t R = t T
10. (B) Use the current form of equivalent circuit
2 kT1 dw 2 kT2 dw
2kTs dw
where in2 =
,
in2 = i12 + i22 =
+
pR1
pR2
pR
T
T
Thus Ts = 1 + 2
R1 R2
www.gatehelp.com
T R + T2 R1
R = 1 2
R1 + R2
Page
411
UNIT 7
11. (D) Te = T0 ( F0 - 1) = 290( 6.31 - 1) = 1539.9 K
13. (B) Te = 250 = Te1 +
6 G 2 - 25 G - 25 = 0 or G = 5
23. (A) Sequence Te
120 150
ABC110 +
+
= 146.25
4
4( 6)
Te 2 Te 3
+
G1
G2
450 1000
250 = 200 +
+
G1
5 G2
14. (D) F0 = 1 +
(125 - 155) G 2 + 125 G + 125 = 0
Te
1540
=1 +
= 9.56 or 9.8 dB
Ta
180
12. (C) Fop = 1 +
or
ACB110 +
G1 = 13
150
120
+
= 150.00
4
4(12)
BAC 120 +
Ts
225
( Fop - 1) = 1 +
(10 - 1)
T0
290
CBA150 +
110 150
+
= 144.583 Best
6
6( 4)
120
110
+
= 161528
.
12
(12)( 6)
= 7.98 or 9.0 dB
24. (A) Te = T0 ( F - 1) 290(17
. - 1) = 203 K
15. (D) Here L = 2.089 or 3.2 dB, TL = 290 K

Te = Te1 +
Te 2
T ( F - 1)
= TL ( L - 1) + 0 0
G1
1/ L
(or 2.0 dB) and F OP 4.467 (or

25. (D) Here F0 1585
.
6.5 dB)
= 290[(2.089 - 1) + (2.089)(7.98 - 1)] = 4544.4 K
Ts =
4544.4
= 212
. or 13.3 dB
Fop = 1 +
225
16. (B) F0 = 1 +
T0 ( F0 - 1) 290(1585
- 1)
.
=
= 48.93 K
4.467 - 1
F op - 1
(or 2.4 dB), TL = 275 K

26. (B) Here Ta = 60 K, L = 1738
.
4544.4
= 16.67 or 12.2 dB
290
and T sys = 820 K.
17. (B) For A: Fop = 10(or 10 dB) when Ts = 130 K
TR =
[ T sys - Ta - TL ( L - 1)] 820 - 60 - 275(1738

.
- 1)
=
L
1738
.
= 320.5 K
TeA = 130(10 - 1) = 1170 K

For B: Fo = 398
. (or 6 dB) when Ts = 290 K
27. (B) F op = 1 +
. - 1) = 364.2 K
TeB = 290( 398
For C: Fo = 6.3(or 8 dB) when Ts = 190 K
TeC = 190( 6.3 - 1) = 1007 K, (B) is better as TeB is less.
18. (A) Te = Te1 +
Te1
Te 3
+
G1 G1 G2
Te 3
G2 =
G1 ( Te - Te1 -
600
=
Te 2
) 10(190 - 150 G1
19. (B) F0 = 1 +
350
10
N clo =
= 12
1
1
Te 2
Te 3
= Te1 1 +
+ 2
+
G
G
G1
G1 G2
Page
412
kT sys GR ( w)Wn 1.38(10 -23)( 820)(1011 )(10 7)

=
2 pL
1738
.
-5
or 6.51 mW
.
= 651110
29. (C) dN ao = k[ Ta + TL ( L - 1)]
dw
dw
= kTs
2p
2p
Thus Ts = Ta + TL ( L - 1)
= 60 + 275(1738
.
- 1) = 263 K
T
Te 3
100 280
21. (A) Te = Te1 + e 2 +
= 40 +
+
= 58.33 K
G1
G1 G2
8
8( 6)
or ( Te1 - Te ) G + Te1 G + Te1 = 0
= 13.67 or 11.4 dB
and WPV = 2 p(10 7) Hz
T
190
20. (C) Fop = 1 + e = 1 +
= 4.8 or 6.81 dB
Ts
50
Te
T sys - Ta
820 - 60
=1 +
=1 +
60
Ts
Ts
28. (A) Here GR ( w0 ) = 1011 (or 110 dB)
Te
190
=1 +
= 1.655 or 2.19 dB
T0
290
22. (B) Te = Te1 +
We know that
30. (D) T e = T s ( F op - 1) = 60(5 - 1) = 240 K

31. (C) F o = 1 +
Te
240
=1 +
= 1.8276
290
290
32. (A) F op = 1 +
www.gatehelp.com
Te
240
=1 +
= 9 or 9.54 dB
30
Ts
CHAPTER
7.4
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
7. An AM broadcast station operates at its maximum

allowed total output of 50 kW with 80% modulation.
The power in the intelligence part is
Statement for Question 1 - 3

An AM signal is represented by
x( t) = (20 + 4 sin 500 pt) cos(2 p 10 5 t) V
1. The modulation index is
(A) 20
(C) 0.2
(B) 4
(D) 10
(B) 204 W
(D) 416 W
3. The total sideband power is

(A) 4 W
(C) 16 W
AM
signal
has
(C) 6.42 kW
(A) 0.68
(B) 0.73
(C) 0.89
(D) None fo the above
9. A modulating signal is amplified by a 80% efficiency

amplifier before being combined with a 20 kW carrier to
generate an AM signal. The required DC input power to
the amplifier, for the system to operate at 100%
modulation, would be
(B) 8 W
(D) 2 W

An
(B) 31.12 kW
8. The aerial current of an AM transmitter is 18 A when

unmodulated but increases to 20 A when
modulated.The modulation index is
2. The total signal power is

(A) 208 W
(C) 408 W
(A) 12.12 kW
the
form
(A) 5 kW
(B) 8.46 kW
fc = 10 5 Hz.
(C) 12.5 kW
(D) 6.25 kW
10. A 2 MHz carrier is amplitude modulated by a 500

Hz modulating signal to a depth of 70%. If the
unmodulated carrier power is 2 kW, the power of the
modulated signal is
x( t) = [20 + 2 cos 3000 pt + 10 cos 6000 pt ]cos 2 pfc t
(A)
201
400
(B) - 201
400
(C)
199
400
(D) - 199
400
where
5. The ratio of the sidebands power to the total power is

(A)
43
226
(C)
26
226
(B)
26
226
(D)
43
224
(A) 2.23 kW
(B) 2.36 kW
(C) 1.18 kW
(D) 1.26 kW
11. A carrier is simultaneously modulated by two sine
6. A 2 kW carrier is to be modulated to a 90% level. The

total transmitted power would be
waves with modulation indices of 0.4 and 0.3. The
(A) 3.62 kW
(C) 1.4 kW
(A) 1.0
(C) 0.5
Page
414
(B) 2.81 kW
resultant modulation index will be
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 0.7
(D) 0.35
Amplitude Modulation
Chap 7.4
12. In a DSB-SC system with 100% modulation, the

power saving is
Which of the following frequencies will NOT be present

in the modulated signal?
(A) 50%
(B) 66%
(A) 990 KHz
(B) 1010 KHz
(C) 75%
(D) 100%
(C) 1020 KHz
(D) 1030 KHz
13. A 10 kW carrier is sinusoidally modulated by two

carriers corresponding to a modulation index of 30%
and 40% respectively. The total radiated power(is
(A) 11.25 kW
(B) 12.5 kW
(C) 15 kW
(D) 17 kW
14. In amplitude modulation, the modulation envelope

has a peak value which is double the unmodulated carrier
value. What is the value of the modulation index ?
(A) 25%
(C) 75%
(A) 695 kHz
(B) 700 kHz
(C) 705 kHz
(D) 710 kHz
21. A message signal m( t) = sinc t + sinc 2 ( t) modulates

the carrier signal ( t) = A cos 2pfc t. The bandwidth of the
modulated signal is
(A) 2 fc
(B) 50%
(D) 100%
(C) 2
15. If the modulation index of an AM wave is changed

from 0 to 1, the transmitted power
(A) increases by 50%
(C) increases by 100%
20. For an AM signal, the bandwidth is 10 kHz and the

highest frequency component present is 705 kHz. The
carrier frequency used for this AM signal is
(B) increases by 75%

(D) remains unaffected
(B)
1
2
(D)
1
4
fc
22. The signal

m( t) = cos 2000 pt + 2 cos 4000 t is
multiplied by the carrier c( t) = 100 cos 2pfc t where fc = 1
MHz to produce the DSB signal. The expression for the
upper side band (USB) signal is
(A) 100 cos(2 p( fc + 1000) t) + 200 cos(2 p( fc + 200) t)
16. A diode detector has a load of 1 kW shunted by a

10000 pF capacitor. The diode has a forward resistance
(B) 100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) + 200 cos(2 p( fc - 2000) t)
of 1 W. The maximum permissible depth of modulation,
(C) 50 cos(2 p( fc + 1000) t) + 100 cos(2 p( fc + 2000) t)
so as to avoid diagonal clipping, with modulating signal
(D) 50 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) + 100 cos(2 p( fc - 100) t)
frequency fo 10 kHz will be

(A) 0.847
(C) 0.734
(B) 0.628

The Fourier transform
M ( f ) of a signal m( t) is
17. An AM signal is detected using an envelop detector.
shown in figure. It is to be transmitted from a source to
The carrier frequency and modulating signal frequency
destination. It is known that the signal is normalized,
are 1 MHz and 2 kHz respectively. An appropriate value
meaning that -1 m( t) 1
M( f)
for the time constant of the envelope detector is.

(A) 500 m sec
(B) 20 m sec
(C) 0.2 m sec
(D) 1 m sec
-10000
18. An AM voltage signal s( t), with a carrier frequency

of 1.15 GHz has a complex envelope g( t) = AC [1 + m( t)],
where Ac = 500 V, and the modulation is a 1 kHz
sinusoidal test tone described by m( t) = 0.8 sin(2 p 10 3 t)
appears across a 50 W resistive load. What is the actual
power dissipated in the load ?
(A) 165 kW
(B) 82.5 kW
(C) 3.3 kW
(D) 6.6 kW
10000
Fig.P7.4.23-26
23. If USSB is employed, the bandwidth of the

modulated signal is
(A) 5 kHz
(B) 20 kHz, 10 kHz
(C) 20 kHz
24. If DSB is employed, the bandwidth of the modulated

signal is
19. A 1 MHz sinusoidal carrier is amplitude modulated

by a symmetrical square wave of period 100 m sec.
(A) 5 kHz
(B) 10 kHz
(C) 20 kHz
www.gatehelp.com
Page
415
UNIT 7
25. If an AM modulation scheme with a = 0.8 is used,

the bandwidth of the modulated signal is.
(A) 5 kHz
(B) 10 kHz
(C) 20 kHz
m(t)
x(t) Square- Law

Device
y(t)
Filter
AM Signal
cos wct
Fig.P7.4.30-31
26. If an FM signal with kf = 60 kHz is used, then the

bandwidth of the modulated signal is
30. The filter should be a
(A) 5 kHz
(B) 10 kHz
(A) LPP with bandwidth W
(C) 20 kHz
(B) LPF with bandwidth 2W
27. A DSB modulated signal x( t) = Am( t) cos 2pfc t is

mixed
(multiplied)
with
local
carrier
xL ( t) = cos(2pfc t + q) and the output is passed through a

LPF with a bandwidth equal to the bandwidth of the
message m( t). If the power of the signal at the output of
the low pass filter is pout and the power of the
modulated signal by pu , the
p out
pu
is
(A) 0.5 cos q
(B) cos q
(C) 0.5 cos q
(D)
cos 2 q
28. A DSB-SC signal is to be generated with a carrier

frequency fc = 1 MHz using a non-linear device with the
input-output characteristic vo = a0 vi + a1 vi3 where a0
and a1 are constants. The output of the non-linear
device can be filtered by an appropriate band-pass filter.
Let vi = Ac cos(2pfct) + m( t) where m( t) is the message
signal. Then the value of fc(in MHz) is
(A) 1.0
(B) 0.333
(C) 0.5
(D) 3.0

2b
2a
(B)
(A)
Am
Am
a
b
a
Am
b
b
Am
a
(D)
32. A message signal is periodic with period T, as shown

in figure. This message signals is applied to an AM
modulator with modulation index a = 0.4. The
modulation efficiency would be
m(t)
K1
T
t
-K1
Fig.P7.4.32
29. A non-linear device with a transfer characteristic

given by i = (10 + 2 vi + 0.2 vi2 ) mA is supplied with a
carrier of 1 V amplitude and a sinusoidal signal of 0.5 V
amplitude in series. If at the output the frequency
component of AM signal is considered, the depth of
modulation is
(A) 18 %
(D) a BPF with center frequency f0 and BW = W such

that f0 - Wm > f0 - W2 > Wm
(C)
1
2
(C) a BPF with center frequency f0 and BW = W such

that f0 - Wm > f0 - W2 > 2Wm
(A) 51 %
(B) 11.8 %
(C) 5.1 %

The figure 6.54-57 shows the positive portion of
the envelope of the output of an AM modulator. The
message signal is a waveform having zero DC value.
m(t)
(B) 10 %
45
(C) 20 %
(D) 33.33 %
30
15
Consider the system shown in figP7.4.30-31. The

modulating signal m( t) has zero mean and its maximum
(absolute) value is Am = max m( t) . It has bandwidth Wm .
The nonlinear device has a input-output characteristic
y( t) = ax( t) + bx 2 ( t).
Page
416
Fig.P7.4.33-36

(A) 0.5
(B) 0.6
(C) 0.4
(D) 0.8
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 7.4
34. The modulation efficiency is
41. The lower sideband of the SSB AM signal is
(A) 8.3 %
(B) 14.28 %
(A) -100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) + 200 sin(2 p( fc - 1000) t)
(C) 7.69 %
(B) -100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) - 200 sin(2 p( fc - 1000) t)
35. The carrier power is
(C) 100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) - 200 sin(2 p( fc - 1000) t)
(A) 60 W
(B) 450 W
(C) 30 W
(D) 900 W
(D) 100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) + 200 sin(2 p( fc - 1000) t)

36. The power in sidebands is

(A) 85 W
Consider the system shown in figure 6.69-70. The
(B) 42.5 W
(C) 56 W
average value of m( t) is zero and maximum value of
(D) 37.5 W
m( t) is M. The square-law device is defined by

37. In a broadcast transmitter, the RF output is
represented as
e( t) = 50[1 + 0.89 cos 5000 t + 0.30 sin 9000 t ]cos( 6 106 t)V
y( t) = 4 x( t) + 10 x( t).
S
m(t)
x(t) Square- Law

Device
y(t)
Filter
AM Signal
What are the sidebands of the signals in radians ?

cos wct
(A) 5 10 3 and 9 10 3
(B) 5.991 106 , 5.995 106 , 6.005 106 and 6.009 106
(C) 4 10 3, 1.4 10 4
(D) 1 10 , 11
. 10 , 3 10 , and 15
. 10
6
42. The value of M, required to produce modulation

index of 0.8, is
38. An AM modulator has output

x( t) = 40 cos 400 pt + 4 cos 360 pt + 4 cos 440 pt
The modulation efficiency is
(A) 0.01
(B) 0.02
(C) 0.03
(D) 0.04
Fig. P7.4.42-43
(A) 0.32
(B) 0.26
(C) 0.52
(D) 0.16
43. Let W be the bandwidth of message signal m( t). AM

signal would be recovered if
39. An AM modulator has output
(A) fc > W
(B) fc > 2W
(C) fc 3W
(D) fc > 4W
x( t) = A cos 400 pt + B cos 380 pt + B cos 420 pt

The carrier power is 100 W and the efficiency is
40%. The value of A and B are
(A) 14.14, 8.16
(B) 50, 10
(C) 22.36, 13.46
44. A super heterodyne receiver is designed to receive

transmitted signals between 5 and 10 MHz. High-side
tuning is to be used. The tuning range of the local
oscillator for IF frequency 500 kHz would be
(A) 4.5 MHz - 9.5 MHz
(B) 5.5 MHz - 10.5 MHz
A single side band signal is generated by

modulating signal of 900-kHz carrier by the signal
(C) 4.5 MHz - 10.5 MHz
m( t) = cos 200 pt + 2 sin 2000 pt. The amplitude of the
carrier is Ac = 100.
(B) - sin(2 p1000 t) + 2 cos(2000 pt)
45. A super heterodyne receiver uses an IF frequency of

455 kHz. The receiver is tuned to a transmitter having
a carrier frequency of 2400 kHz. High-side tuning is to
be used. The image frequency will be
(C) sin(2 p1000 t) + 2 cos(1000 t)
(A) 2855 kHz
(B) 3310 kHz
(C) 1845 kHz
(D) 1490 kHz
$ ( t) is
40. The signal m
(A) - sin(2 p1000 t) - 2 cos(2000 pt)
(D) sin(2 p1000 t) - 2 cos(2 p1000 t)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
417
UNIT 7
46. In the circuit shown in fig.P7.4.46, the transformers

are center tapped and the diodes are connected as
shown in a bridge. Between the terminals 1 and 2 an
a.c. voltage source of frequency 400 Hz is connected.
Another a.c. voltage of 1.0 MHz is connected between 3
and 4. The output between 5 and 6 contains components
at
49. In fig.P7.4.49
m( t) =
2 sin 2 pt
sin 199pt
, s( t) = cos 200 pt and n( t) =
t
t
Multiplier
LPF
1 Hz
y(t)
s(t)
n(t)
Fig.P7.4.49
The output y( t) will be

sin 2pt
(A)
t
Multiplier
|H(jw)|=1
s(t)
Adder
m(t)
Fig.P7.4.46
(A) 400 Hz, 1.0 MHz, 1000.4 kHz, 999.6 kHz
(B)
sin 2 pt sin pt
+
cos 3pt
t
t
(C)
sin 2 pt sin 0.5 pt

+
cos 15
. pt
t
t
(D)
sin 2 pt sin pt
+
cos 0.75 pt
t
t
(B) 400 Hz, 1000.4 kHz, 999.6 kHz

(C) 1 MHz, 1000.4 kHz, 999.6 kHz
(D) 1000.4 kHz, 999.6 kHz
47. A superheterodyne receiver is to operate in the
frequency range 550 kHz-1650 kHz, with the
denote
intermediate frequency of 450 kHz. Let R = CCmax
min
the required capacitance ratio of the local oscillator and
I denote the image frequency (in kHz) of the incoming
signal. If the receiver is tuned to 700 kHz, then
50. 12 signals each band-limited to 5 kHz are to be

transmitted over a single channel by frequency division
multiplexing. If AM -SSNB modulation guard band of 1
kHz is used, then the bandwidth of the multiplexed
signal will be
(A) 51 kHz
(B) 61 kHz
(D) 81 kHz
(A) R = 4.41, I = 1600
(B) R = 2.10, I = 1150
(C) 71 kHz
(C) R = 3, I = 1600
(D) R = 9.0, I = 1150
51. Let x( t) be a signal band-limited to 1 kHz.

Amplitude modulation is performed to produce signal
A
proposed
demodulation
g( t) = x( t) sin 2000pt.
technique is illustrated in figure 6.83. The ideal low
pass filter has cutoff frequency 1 kHz and pass band
gain 2. The y( t) would be
48. Consider a system shown in Figure . Let X ( f ) and

Y ( f ) denote the Fourier transforms of x( t) and y( t)
respectively. The ideal HPF has the cutoff frequency 10
kHz. The positive frequencies where Y ( f ) has spectral
peaks are
(A) 2 y( t)
x(t)
HPF
10 kHz
Balanced
Modulator
Balanced
Modulator
10 kHz
13 kHz
X(f )
-3
-1
Fig.P7.4.48
(A) 1 kHz and 24 kHz

(B) 2 kHz and 24 kHz
(C) 1 kHz and 14 kHz
(D) 2 kHz and 14 kHz
Page
418
f (kHz)
y(t)
(C)
1
2
y( t)
(B) y( t)
(D) 0
52. Suppose we wish to transmit the signal

x( t) = sin 200 pt + 2 sin 400 pt using a modulation that
create the signal g( t) = x( t) sin 400pt. If the product
g( t) sin 400pt is passed through an ideal LPF with
cutoff frequency 400p and pass band gain of 2, the
signal obtained at the output of the LPF is
1
2
(A) sin 200pt
(B)
(C) 2 sin 200pt
(D) 0
sin 200 pt
53. In a AM signal the received signal power is 10 -10 W

with a maximum modulating signal of 5 kHz. The noise
spectral density at the receiver input is 10 -18 W/Hz. If
the noise power is restricted to the message signal
www.gatehelp.com
bandwidth only, the signals-to-noise ratio at the input

to the receiver is
(A) 43 dB
(B) 66 dB
(C) 56 dB
(D) 33 dB
Chap 7.4
SOLUTION
1. (C) u( t) = (20 + 4 sin 500 pt) cos(2 p 10 5 t) V
= 20(1 + 0.2 sin 500 pt) cos(2 p 10 5 t) V,
a = 0.2

Consider the following Amplitude Modulated (AM)
2. (B) Pc =
signal, where fm < B

x AM ( t) = 10(1 + 0.5 sin 2 pfm t) cos 2 pfc t.
(B) 12.5
(C) 6.25
(D) 3.125
25
2 N0 B
(D)
4. (B) x( t)
= [20 + 2 cos(2 p1500 t) + 10 cos(2 p3000 t)]cos(2 pfc t)
1
1
= 20 1 +
cos(2 p1500 t) + cos(2 p3000 t) cos(2 pfc t)
10
2
55. The AM signal gets added to a noise with Power

Spectra Density Sn ( f ) given in the figure below. The
ration of average sideband power to mean noise power
would be
25
25
(B)
(A)
8 N0 B
4 N0 B
(C)
25
N0 B

A certain communication channel is characterized
by 80 dB attenuation and noise power-spectral density
of 10 -10 W/Hz. The transmitter power is 40 kW and the
message signal has a bandwidth of 10 kHz.
56. In the case of conventional AM modulation, the
predetecion SNR is
This is the form of a conventional AM signal with

message signal
1
1
m( t) =
cos(2 p1500 t) + cos(2 p3000 t)
10
2
1
1
= cos 2 (2 p1500 t) +
cos(2 p1500 t) 10
2
1
1
The minimum of g( z) = z 2 +
is achieved for
z10
2
1
201
1
and it is min( g( z)) = . Since z = is in
z =20
400
20
the range of cos (2 p1500 t), we conclude that the
201
minimum value of m( t) is . Hence, the modulation
400
201
index is a = 400
5. (B) x( t) = 20 cos(2 pfc t) + cos(2 p( fc - 1500) t)
+ cos(2 p( fc - 1500) t)
(A) 108
(B) 2 108
= 5 cos(2 p( fc 3000) t) + 5 cos(2 p( fc + 3000) t)
(C) 10 2
(D) 2 10 2
The power in the sidebands is

1 1 25 25
+
= 26
Psidebands = + +
2 2
2
2
57. In case of SSB, the predetecion SNR is

(A) 2 10 2
(B) 4 10 2
(C) 2 10 3
(D) 4 10 3
*************
= 204 W
3. (A) Psb = Pt - Pc = 204 - 200 = 4 W
54. The average side-band power for the AM signal

given above is
(A) 25
(0.2) 2
Pt = Pc 1 +
2
20 2
= 200 W,
2
The total power is Ptotal = Pcarrier + Psidebands = 200 + 26 = 226

The ratio of the sidebands power to the total power is
Psidebands 26
=
Ptotal
226
0.9 2
a2
6. (B) Pt = Pc 1 +
= 2000 1 +
= 2810 W
2
2
a2
7. (A) Pt = Pc 1 +
Pc = 37.88 kW,
www.gatehelp.com
or
0.8 2
50 10 3 = Pc 1 +
2
Pi = ( Pt - Pc ) = (50 - 37.88) = 12.12 kW

Page
419
UNIT 7
a 2 2
a 2 2
8. (A) I t = I c 1 +
or 20 = 18 1 +
or a = 0.68
2
2
18. (A) Pt =
Pt =
500 2
2
Pi = 30 - 20 = 10 kW
The DC input power =
10
= 12.5 kW.
0.8
m( t) =
4 ( -1) n -1
x( t) =
cos[2 pfm (2 n - 1)] sin(2 p1000 10 3 t)
p n =1 2 n - 1
So frequency component (106 fm (2 n - 1) will be present
2
P. If carrier is
3
2
suppressed then P or 66% power will be saved.
3
where n = 1, 2, 3, ....
For fm = 10 kHz and n = 1 & 2 frequency present is 990,
970, 1030 kHz.
Thus 1020 kHz will be absent.
20. (B) fc + fm = 705 kHz,
BW = 2 fm = 10 kHz or fm = 5 kHz
fc = 705 - 5 = 700 kHz
= 1125
. kW
21. (C) x( t) = m( t) c( t) = A(sinc ( t) + sinc 2 ( t) cos(2pfc t)
14. (D) x( t) = Ac (1 + a cos 2 pfm t) cos 2 pfc t

Thus a =1, therefor modulation
Here Ac (1 + a) = 2 Ac ,
4 ( -1) n -1
cos[2 pfm (2 n - 1) ]
p n =1 2 n - 1
The modulated output
11. (C) a 2 = a1a + a 22 = 0.32 + 0.4 2 = 0.5 2 or a = 0.5
0.32 0.4 2
= 10 1 +
+
2
2
fc = 1000 kHz, x( t) = c( t) m( t)
Expressing square wave as modulating signal m( t)
0.7 2
a 2 2
= 2 1 +
= 2.23 kW
Pt = Pc 1 +
2
2
a2 a2
13. (A) Pt = Pc 1 + 1 + 2
2
2
0.8 2
= 165 kW
1
+
19. (C) c( t) = sin 2p fc t,
a = 70% = 0.7
12. (B) In previous solution Pc =
2
a 2 m( t)
Ac2
1 +
2
2
Here modulation index a =1. Thus
9. (C) Pt = 20000 1 + , Pt = 30 kW,

2
10. (A) Pc = 2 kW,
Taking the Fourier transform of both sides, we obtain
index is 1 or 100% modulation.
X( f ) =
15. (A) If modulation index a is 0, then
A
[ P( f ) + L( f )] * ( d( f - fc ) + d( f + fc ))
2
A
[ P( f - fc ) + L( f - fc ) + P( f + fc ) + L( f - fc )]
2
0 2 Ac2
=
1 +
2 2
1
Since P( f - fc ) 0 for f - fc < , whereas L( f - fc ) 0
2
If modulation index is 1 then
for f - fc < 1. Hence, the bandwidth of the bandpass
Pt1 =
Pt2 =
Ac2
2
Ac2
2
12 3 2
= Ac ,
1 +
2 4
filter is 2.
Pt 2 3
=
Pt1 2
22. (C) x( t) = m( t) c( t)
Thus Pt2 = 15
. Pt1 and Pt2 is increases by 50%
= 100[cos(2 p1000 t) + 2 cos(2 p2000 t)]cos(2 pfc t)

= 100 cos(2 p1000 t) cos(2 pfc t) + 200 cos(2 p2000 t) cos(2 pfc t)
100
=
[cos(2 p( fc + 1000) t) + cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t)]
2
16. (A) fm = 10 kHz, R = 1000 W, C = 10000 pF

Hence 2pfm RC = 2 p 10 4 10 3 10 -8 = 0.628
a max = (1 + (0.628) 2 )
17. (B)
1
2
= 0.847
1
1
,
RC
fc
BWm
200
[cos(2 p( fc + 2000) t) + cos(2 p( fc - 2000) t)]
2
Thus, the upper sideband (USB) signal is
Here fc = 1 MHz
xu ( t) = 50 cos[2 p( fc + 1000) t ] + 100(2 p( fc + 2000) t)
Signal Bandwidth BWm = 2 fm = 2 2 10 3 = 4 kHz

Thus
1
1
or 10 -6 RC 250 ms
RC
106
4 10 3
Thus appropriate value is 20 m sec

Page
420
23. (B) When USSB is employed the bandwidth of the

modulated signal is the same with the bandwidth of the
message signal. Hence WUSSB = W = 10 4 Hz
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 7
37.
(B)
Sidebands
are
( 6 106 5000)
and
43. (C) The filter characteristic is shown in fig.S7.4.43
( 6 10 9000)
6
H(f )
Thus 6.005 10 , 5.995 10 , 5.991 10 or 5.991 10 ,

6
m(t)
6.005 106 and 6.009 106

38. (B) x( t) can be written as
f
W
x( t) = ( 40 + 8 cos 40 pt) cos 400 pt

8
modulation index a =
= 0.2
40
1
Pc = ( 40) 2 = 800 W
2
fc + W < 2 f or fc > W
1
1
Psb = B 2 + B 2 = 66.67
2
2
the
Hilbert
44. (B) Since High-side tuning is used

fLO = fm + f IF = 500 kHz,
fLOL = 5 + 0.5 = 5.5 MHz,
45. (B) fimage = fL + 2 f IF = 2400 = 3310 kHz

46. (D) The given circuit is a ring modulator. The output
or B = 8.161
is DSB-SC signal. So it will contain m( t) cos( nwc t) where

n = 1, 2, 3...... Therefore there will be only (1 MHz 400
transform
of
sin (2 p1000 t) is cos (2 p1000 t)
Hz) frequency component.

47. (A) fmax = 1650 + 450 = 2100 kHz
1
$ ( t)= sin (2 p1000 t) - cos (2 p1000 t)

Thus m
fmin = 550 + 450 = 1000 kHz.
41. (D) The expression for the LSSB AM signal is.
frequency is minimum, capacitance will be maximum
x l ( t) = Ac m( t) cos(2 pfc t) + Ac m( t) sin(2 pfc t)
R=
Substituting
$ ( t) = sin(2 p1000 t) - 2 cos(2 p1000 t)
and m
= 100[cos(2 p1000 t) cos(2 pfc t) + sin(2 p1000 t) sin(2 pfc t)]

+200[cos(2 pfc t) sin(2 p1000 t) - sin(2 pfc t) cos(2 p1000 t)]
= 100 cos(2 p( fc - 1000) t) - 200 sin(2 p( fc - 1000) t)
= 4m(t) + 4 cos wc t + 10m2 (t) + 20m(t) cos wc t + 5 + 5 cos 2wc t
xc ( t) = 4[1 + 5 Mmn ( t)]cos wc t

5M = 0.8
or
M = 0.16
component of 11 kHz will remain. The output of 2nd

modulator will be (13 11) kHz. So Y ( f ) has spectral
peak at 2 kHz and 24 kHz.
49. (C) m( t) s( t) = y1 ( t)
42. (D) y( t) = 4( m( t) + cos wc t) + 10( m( t) + cos wc t) 2
m( t) = Mmn ( t)
or R = 4.41
kHz and (10 - 1) kHz. After passing the HPF frequency
+100[sin(2 p1000 t) - 2 cos(2 p1000 t) sin(2 pfc t)]
xc ( t) = 4[1 + 5 m( t)]cos wc t
2p LC
output of first modulator spectral peak will be at (10 + 1)
xl ( t) = 100[cos(2 p1000 t) + 2 sin(2 p1000 t) cos(2 pfc t)]
The AM signal is,
f =
48. (B) Since X ( f ) has spectral peak at 1 kHz so at the
we obtain
= 5 + 4m(t) + 10m2 (t) + 4[1 + 5m(t)] cos wc t + 5 cos 2wc t
2
Cmax fmax
= 2 = (2.1) 2
Cmin
fmin
or
fi = fc + 2 f IF = 700 + 2( 455) = 1600 kHz
Ac = 100, m( t) = cos(2 p1000 t) + 2 sin(2 p1000 t)
Page
422
Therefore fc > 3W
fLOU = 10 + 0.5 = 10.5 MHz
40. (D) The Hilbert transform of cos (2 p1000 t) is

whereas
2fc
fc+W
fc - W > 2W or fc > 3W ,
A2
39. (A) Carrier power Pc =
= 100 W, A = 14.14
2
40
Psb
Psb
or
Eeff =
= 0.4
=
100 + Psb
Pc + Psb 100
sin (2 p1000 t),
fc-W fc
Fig.S7.4.43
The components at 180 Hz and 220 Hz are side band

1
1
Psb = ( 4) 2 + ( 4) 2 = 16 W,
2
2
Psb
16
Eeff =
=
Pc + Psb 800 + 16
Psb = 66.67 W,
2W
2 sin(2 pt) cos(200 pt) sin(202 pt) - sin(198 pt)

=
t
t
y1 ( t) + n( t) = y2 ( t) =
sin 202 pt - sin 198 pt sin 198 pt

+
t
t
y2 ( t) s( t) = y( t)
=
[sin 202 pt - sin 198 pt + sin 199 pt ]cos 200 pt

t
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 7.4
55. (D) Noise power = Area rendered by the spectrum
1
[sin( 402 pt) + sin(2 pt) - {sin( 398 pt) - sin(2 pt)}
2
+ sin( 399pt) - sin( pt)]
After filtering
sin(2 pt) + sin(2 pt) - sin( pt)
2t
sin(2 pt) + 2 sin(0.5 t) cos(15
. pt)
=
2t
sin 2 pt sin 0.5 pt
=
+
cos 15
. pt
2t
t
y( t) =
= N0 B
Ratio of average sideband power to mean noise
6.25
25
Power =
=
N0 B 4 N0 B
56. (C) Since the channel attenuation is 80 db, then
P
10 log T = 80
PR
or PR = 10 -8 PT = 10 -8 40 10 3 = 4 10 -4 Watts
If the noise limiting filter has bandwidth B, then the
50. (D) The total signal bandwidth = 5 12 = 60 kHz
pre-detection noise power is
There would be 11 guard band between 12 signal. So
fc +
Pn = 2
guard band width = 11 kHz

Total band width = 60 + 11 = 71 kHz
fc -
B
2
B
2
N0
df = N 0 B = 2 10 -10 B Watts
2
In the case of DSB or conventional AM modulation,
51. (D) x1 ( t) = g( t) cos(2000pt)
B = 2W = 2 10 4
1
= x( t) sin(2000 pt) cos(2000 pt) = x( t) sin( 4000 pt)
2
1
X1 ( jw) =
X ( j( w - 4000 p)) - X ( j( w + 4000 p))
4j
Hz, whereas in SSB modulation
B = W = 10 . Thus, the pre-detection signal to noise

4
ratio in DSB and conventional AM is

SNR DSB,AM =
This implies that X1 ( jw) is zero for w 2000 p because

w < 2 pfm = 2 p1000. When x1 ( t) is passed through a LPF
with cutoff frequency 2000p, the output will be zero.
PR
4 10 -4
=
= 10 2
Pn 2 10 -10 2 10 4
57. (A) In SSB modulation B = W = 10 4

SNR SSB =
52. (A) y( t) = g( t) sin( 400 pt) = x( t) sin 2 ( 400 pt)

(1 - cos)( 800 pt)
= (sin(200 pt) + 2 sin( 400 pt)
2
1
= [sin(200 pt) - sin(200 pt) cos( 800 pt) + 2 sin( 400 pt)
2
4 10 -4
= 2 10 2
2 10 -10 10 4
***********
-sin( 400 pt) cos( 800 pt)

1
1
= sin(200 pt) - [sin(1000 pt) - sin( 6000 pt)]
2
4
1
+ sin( 400 pt) - [sin(1200 pt) - sin( 400 pt)]
4
If this signal is passed through LPF with frequency
400p and gain 2, the output will be sin(200pt)
53. (A) Message signal BW fm = 5 kHz
Noise power density is 10 -18 W/Hz
Total noise power is 10 -18 5 10 3 = 5 10 -15 W
Input signal-to-noise ratio
SNR=
10 -10
= 2 10 4 or 43 dB
5 10 -15
54. (C) Average side band power is

Ac2 a 2 10 2 (0.5) 2
=
= 6.25 W
4
4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
423
CHAPTER
7.6
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
Fig. P7.6.1-5 shows fourier spectra of signal x( t)

and y(t). Determine the Nyquist sampling rate for the
A signal x( t) is multiplied by rectangular pulse

train c( t) shown in fig.P7.6.6-7..
c(t)
given function in question.

X( jw)
0.25 ms
Y( jw)
-210-3
-10-3
Fig.P7.6.1-5
10-3
210-3
Fig.P7.6.6-7
6. x( t) would be recovered form the product. x( t) c( t) by

using an ideal LPF if X ( jw) = 0 for
1. x( t)
(A) 100 kHz
(B) 200 kHz
(A) w > 2000 p
(B) w > 1000 p
(C) 300 kHz
(D) 50 kHz
(C) w < 1000 p
(D) w < 2000 p
7. If X ( jw) satisfies the constraints required, then the
2. y( t)
pass band gain A of the ideal lowpass filter needed to
(A) 50 kHz
(B) 75 kHz
recover x( t) from e( t) x( t) is
(C) 150 kHz
(D) 300 kHz
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 8
3. x 2 ( t)
(A) 100 kHz
(B) 150 kHz
(C) 250 kHz
(D) 400 kHz
4. y 3( t)
(A) 100 kHz
(B) 300 kHz
(C) 900 kHz
(D) 120 kHz
8. Consider a set of 10 signals xi ( t), i = 1, 2, 3, ...10.. Each

signal is band limited to 1 kHz. All 10 signals are to be
time-division multiplexed after each is multiplied by a
carrier e( t) shown in Figure. If the period T of e( t) is
chosen the have the maximum allowable value, the
largest value of D would be
c(t)
5. x( t) y( t)
(A) 250 kHz
(B) 500 kHz
(C) 50 kHz
(D) 100 kHz
Page
434
-2T
-T
Fig.P7.6.8
www.gatehelp.com
2T
Digital Transmission
(A) 5 10 -3 sec
-5
(C) 5 10 sec
(B) 5 10 -4 sec
Chap 7.6
15. A CD record audio signals digitally using PCM. The

audio signal bandwidth is 15 kHz. The Nyquist samples
-6
(D) 5 10 sec
are quantized into 32678 levels and then binary coded.

9. A compact disc recording system samples a signals
The minimum number of binary digits required to
with a 16-bit analog-to-digital convertor at 44.1 kbits/s.
encode the audio signal
The CD can record an hours worth of music. The
(A) 450 k bits/sec
(B) 900 k bits/sec
approximate capacity of CD is
(C) 980 340 k bits/sec
(D) 490 170, k bits/sec
(A) 705.6 M Bytes
(B) 317.5 M Bytes
(C) 2.54 M Bytes
(D) 5.43 M Bytes
16. The American Standard Code for Information

Interchange has 128 characters, which are binary
10. An analog signal is sampled at 36 kHz and
coded. If a certain computer generates 1,000,000
quantized into 256 levels. The time duration of a bit of
character per second, the minimum bandwidth required
the binary coded signal is
to transmit this signal will be
(A) 5.78 ms
(B) 3.47 ms
(A) 1.4 M bits/sec
(B) 14 M bits/sec
(C) 6.43 ms
(D) 7.86 ms
(C) 7 M bits/sec
(D) 0.7 M bits/sec
11. An analog signal is quantized and transmitted using
17. A binary channel with capacity 36 k bits/sec is
a PCM system. The tolerable error in sample amplitude
available for PCM voic transmission. If signal is band
is 0.5% of the peak-to-peak full scale value. The
limited to 3.2 kHz, then the appropriate values of
minimum binary digits required to encode a sample is
quantizing level L and the sampling frequency will be
(A) 5
(B) 6
(A) 32, 3.6 kHz
(B) 64, 7.2 kHz
(C) 7
(D) 8
(C) 64, 3.6 kHz
(D) 32, 7.2 kHz
18. Fig.P7.4.18 shows a PCM signals in which
Statement for Question 12-13.

Ten telemetry signals, each of bandwidth 2kHz,
are to be transmitted simultaneously by binary PCM.
The maximum tolerable error in sample amplitudes is
0.2% of the peak signal amplitude. The signals must be
amplitude level of + 1 volt and - 1 volt are used to

represent binary symbol 1 and 0 respectively. The code
word used consists of three bits. The sampled version of
analog signal from which this PCM signal is derived is
sampled at least 20% above the Nyquist rate. Framing

and synchronizing requires an additional 1% extra bits.
Fig.P7.4.18
12. The minimum possible data rate must be

(A) 272.64 k bits/sec
(B) 436.32 k bits/sec
(A) 4 5 1 2 1 3
(B) 8 4 3 1 2
(C) 936.32 k bits/sec
(C) 6 4 3 1 7
(D) 1 2 3 4 5
13. The minimum transmission bandwidth is
19. A PCM system uses a uniform quantizer followed by
(A) 218.16 kHz
(B) 468.32 kHz
a 8-bit encoder. The bit rate of the system is equal to 108
(C) 136.32 kHz
bits/s. The maximum message bandwidth for which the

system operates satisfactorily is
14. A Television signal is sampled at a rate of 20%

above the Nyquist rate. The signal has a bandwidth of 6
MHz. The samples are quantized into 1024 levels. The
(A) 25 MHz
(B) 6.25 MHz
(C) 12.5 MHz
(D) 50 MHz
minimum bandwidth required to transmit this signal
20. Twenty-four voice signals are sampled uniformly at
would be
a rate of 8 kHz and then time-division multiplexed. The
(A) 72 M bits/sec
(B) 144 M bits/sec
(C) 72 k bits/sec
(D) 144 k bits/sec
sampling process uses flat-top samples with 1 ms

duration. The multiplexing operating includes provision
www.gatehelp.com
Page
435
UNIT 7
for synchronization by adding and extra pulse of 1 ms
quantized into 256 level using a m-low quantizer with
duration. The spacing between successive pulses of the
m = 225.
multiplexed signal is
(A) 4 ms
(B) 6 ms
(C) 7.2 ms
(D) 8.4 ms
26. The signal-to-quantization-noise ratio is
21. A linear delta modulator is designed to operate on

speech signals limited to 3.4 kHz. The sampling rate is
10 time the Nyquist rate of the speech signal. The step
size d is 100 m V. The modulator is tested with a this
test signal required to avoid slope overload is
(A) 2.04 V
(B) 1.08 V
(C) 4.08 V
(D) 2.16 V
linear
DM
(B) 38.06 dB
(C) 42.05 dB
(D) 48.76 dB
27. It was found that a sampling rate 20% above the

rate wou7ld be adequate. So the maximum SNR, that
can be realized without increasing the transmission
bandwidth, would be
(A) 60.4 dB
(B) 70.3 dB
(C) 50.1 dB
28. For a PCM signal the compression parameter
Statement fo Question 22-23 :

Consider
(A) 34.91 dB
m = 100 and the minimum signal to quantization-noise

system
designed
to
ratio is 50 dB. The number of bits per sample would be.
accommodate analog message signals limited to bandwidth
(A) 8
(B) 10
of 3.5 kHz. A sinusoidal test signals of amplitude Amax = 1
(C) 12
(D) 14
V and frequency fm = 800 Hz is applied to system. The
29. A sinusoid massage signal m( t) is transmitted by
sampling rate of the system is 64 kHz.

22. The minimum value of the step size to
binary
avoid
overload is
PCM
without
compression.
the
signal
to-quantization-noise ratio is required to be at least 48

dB, the minimum number of bits per sample will be
(A) 240 mV
(B) 120 mV
(A) 8
(B) 10
(C) 670 mV
(D) 78.5 mV
(C) 12
(D) 14
23. The granular-noise power would be

(A) 1.68 10 -3 W
(C) 2.48 10
If
-3
30. A speech signal has a total duration of 20 sec. It is
(B) 2.86 10 -4 W
(D) 112
. 10
-4
sampled at the rate of 8 kHz and then PCM encoded.

The signal-to-quantization noise ratio is required to be
40 dB. The minimum storage capacity needed to

24. The SNR will be
(A) 298
(C) 4.46 10
accommodate this signal is

(B) 1.7510 -3
(A) 1.12 KBytes
(B) 140 KBytes
(D) 201
(C) 168 KBytes
25. The output signal-to-quantization-noise ratio of a 10-bit
31. The input to a linear delta modulator having fa
PCM was found to be 30 dB. The desired SNR is 42 dB. It
step-size D = 0.628 is a sine wave with frequency fm and
can be increased by increasing the number of quantization
peak amplitude Em . If the sampling frequency fs = 40
level.In this way the fractional increase in the transmission
kHz, the combination of the sinc-wave frequency and
bandwidth would be (assume log 2 10 = 0.3)
the peak amplitude, where slope overload will take
(A) 20%
(B) 30%
piace is
(C) 40%
(D) 50%
Em
(A) 0.3 V
fm
8 kHz
(B) 1.5 V
4 kHz
A signal has a bandwidth of 1 MHz. It is sampled
(C) 1.5 V
2 kHz
at a rate 50% higher than the Nyquist rate and
(D) 3.0 V
1 kHz
Statement for Question 26-27.
Page
436
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 7.6
32. A sinusoidal signal with peak-to-peak amplitude of
38. Four signals g1 ( t), g 2 ( t), g s ( t) and g 4 ( t) are to be
1.536 V is quantized into 128 levels using a mid-rise
multiplexed and transmitted. g1 ( t) and g 4 ( t) have a
uniform quantizer. The quantization-noise power is
bandwidth of 4 kHz, and the remaining two signals
-6
(A) 0.768 V
(B) 48 10 V
(C) 12 10 -6 V 2
(D) 3.072 V
have bandwidth of 8 kHz,. Each sample requires 8 bit
for encoding. What is the minimum transmission bit

rate of the system.
33. A signal is sampled at 8 kHz and is quantized using
(A) 512 kbps
(B) 16 kbps
for a
(C) 192 kbps
(D) 384 kbps
8 bit uniform quantizer. Assuming SNR q
sinusoidal signal, the correct statement for PCM signal

39. Three analog signals, having bandwidths 1200 Hz,
with a bit rate of R is
600 Hz and 600 Hz, are sampled at their respective
(A) R = 32 kbps, SNR q = 25.8 dB
Nyquist rates, encoded with 12 bit words, and time
(B) R = 64 kbps, SNR q = 49.8 dB
division multiplexed. The bit rate for the multiplexed
(C) R = 64 kbps, SNR q = 55.8 dB
signal is
(D) R = 32 kbps, SNR q = 49.8 dB
(A) 115.2 kbps
(B) 28.8 kbps
(C) 57.6 kbps
(D) 38.4 kbps
34. A 1.0 kHz signal is flat-top sampled at the rate of

180 samples sec and the samples are applied to an ideal
rectangular LPF with cat-off frequency of 1100 Hz, then
the output of the filter contains
40. The minimum sampling frequency (in samples/sec)

required to reconstruct the following signal form its
samples without distortion would be
(A) only 800 Hz component
(B) 800 and 900 Hz components
sin 2 p1000 t
sin 2 p1000 t
x( t) = 5
+ 7
pt
pt
(C) 800 Hz and 1000 Hz components
(A) 2 10 3
B) 4 10 3
(D) 800 Hz, 900 and 1000 Hz components
(C) 6 10 3
(D) 8 10 3
35. The Nyquist sampling interval, for the signal

sinc (700 t) + sinc (500 t) is
1
(A)
sec
350
p
(B)
sec
350
1
(C)
sec
700
p
(D)
sec
175
41.
The
minimum
step-size
required
for
Delta-Modulator operating at32 K samples/sec to track

the signal (here u( t) is the nuit function)
x( t) = 125 t( u( t) - u( t - 1)) + (250 - 125 t)( u( t - 1) - u( t - 2)s
so that slope overload is avoided, would be
36. A signal x( t) = 100 cos(24 p 10 ) t is ideally sampled

3
(A) 2 -10
(B) 2 -8
(C) 2 -6
(D) 2 -4
with a sampling period of 50 m sec and then passed

through an ideal lowpass filter with cutoff frequency of
42. Four signals each band limited to 5 kHz are
15 KHz. Which of the following frequencies is/are
sampled at twice the Nyquist rate. The resulting PAM
present at the filter output
samples are transmitted over a single channel after
(A) 12 KHz only
(B) 8 KHz only
time division multiplexing. The theoretical minimum
(C) 12 KHz and 9 KHz
(D) 12 KHz and 8 KHz
transmissions bandwidth of the channel should be

equal to.
37. In a PCM system, if the code word length is
(A) 5 kHz
(B) 20 kHz
increased form 6 to 8 bits, the signal to quantization
(C) 40 kHz
(D) 80 kHz
noise ratio improves by the factor.

(A) 8/6
(B) 12
(C) 16
(D) 8
43. Four independent messages have bandwidths of 100

Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz and 400 Hz respectively. Each is
www.gatehelp.com
Page
437
UNIT 7
sampled at the Nyquist rate, time division multiplexed
50. A speech signal occupying the bandwidth of 300 Hz
and transmitted. The transmitted sample rate, in Hz,
to 3 kHz is converted into PCM format for use in digital
is given by
communication. If the sampling frequency is8 kHz and
(A) 200
(B) 400
each sample is quantized into 256 levels, then the
(C) 800
(D) 1600
output bit the rate will be
44.
The
Nyquist
sampling
rate
for
the
signal
g( t) = 10 cos(50 pt) cos 2 (150 pt). Where ' t ' is in seconds, is
(A) 3 kb/s
(B) 8 kb/s
(C) 64 kb/s
(D) 256 kb/s
(A) 150 samples per second
51. If the number of bits in a PCM system is increased
(B) 200 samples per second
from n to n + 1, the signal-to-quantization noise ratio
(C) 300 samples per second
will increase by a factor.
(D) 350 samples per second
(A)
45. A TDM link has 20 signal channels and each
(C) 2
channel is sampled 8000 times/sec. Each sample is

represented by seven binary bits and contains an
additional bit for synchronization. The total bit rate for
the TDM link is
(A) 1180 K bits/sec
(B) 1280 K bits/sec
(C) 1180 M bits/sec
(D) 1280 M bits/sec
46. In a CD player, the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz and

the samples are quantized using a 16-bit/sample
quantizer. The resulting number of bits for a piece of
music with a duration of 50 minutes is
(A) 1.39 10 9
(B) 4.23 10 9
(C) 8.46 10 9
(D) 12.23 10 9
( n + 1)
n
(B)
(D) 4
52. In PCM system, if the quantization levels are

increased
form
to
8,
the
256
quantization
levels.
(A) remain same
(B) be doubled
(C) be tripled
(D) become four times
53. Assuming that the signal is quantized to satisfy the

condition of previous question and assuming the
approximate bandwidth of the signal is W. The
minimum required bandwidth for transmission of a
will be.
(A) 5 W
(B) 10 W
(C) 20 W
The
bit
transmission rate for the time-division multiplexed

signal will be
(A) 8 kbps
(C) 256 kbps
************
(B) 64 kbps
(D) 512 kbps
48. Analog data having highest harmonic at 30 kHz

generated by a sensor has been digitized using 6 level
PCM. What will be the rate of digital signal generated?
(A) 120 kbps
(C) 240 kbps
(B) 200 kbps

(D) 180 kbps
49. In a PCM system, the number of quantization levels

is 16 and the maximum lsignal frequency is 4 kHz.; the
bit transmission rate is
(A) 32 bits/s
(C) 32 kbits/s
Page
438
(B) 16 bits/s
(D) 64 dbits/s
bandwidth
requirement will.
sampled at Nyquist rate are converted into binary PCM

using
relative
binary PCM signal based on this quantization scheme
47. Four voice signals. each limited to 4 kHz and

signal
( n + 1) 2
n2
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 7
16. (C) 128= 2 7,. We need 7 bits/character. For 1,000,000

character we need 7 Mbits/second. Thus minimum
bandwidth = 7 Mbits/sec.
26. (B)
3 L2
So
=
= 6394 = 38.06 dB
N o [ln(m + 1)]2
27. (C) Nyquist Rate = 2 MHz
17. (D) fs > 2 fm = 6400 Hz, nfs 63000

36000
36000
n
= 5.63, n = 5, L = 2 n = 32, fs =
= 7.2 kHz.
6400
5
50% higher rate = 3 MHz,
Thus transmission bandwidth is 3 MHz 8 = 24 Mbits/s.

New sampling rate is at 20% above the Nyquist rate.
Sampling rate= 12
. 2 = 2.4 MHz.
18. (D) The transmitted code word are
bits per second=

0
bits
24 M sec
= 10 bits
2.4 MHz
So 3(1024) 2
=
= 102300 = 50.1 dB
N o (ln 256) 2
Level = 210 = 1024,

Fig.S.7.6.18
In 1st word 001(1)

28. (B)
In 2nd word 010(2)

In 3rd word 011(3)
3 L2
So
=
50 dB, m = 100
N o [ln(m + 1)]2
3 L2
= 100 000 or
[ln 101) 2
In 4th word 100(4)

In 5th word 101 (5)
L = 842.6
Because L is power of 2, we select L = 1024 = 210 .
19. (B) Message bandwidth= W, Nyquist rate = 2W
Thus 10 bits are required.
Bandwidth = 2W 8 = 16W bit/s

29. (A) So = m 2 ( t), N o =
108
W=
= 6.25 MHz
16
16W= 10 , or
1
20. (A) Sampling interval T, =
= 125 ms. There are 24
8k
channels and 1 sync pulse, so the time allotted to each
channel is Tc =
T
25
= 5 ms. The pulse duration is 1 ms. So
the time between pulse is 4 ms.

21. (B) Amax =
22. (D) Amax =
23. (D) N o =
24. (C)
L = 256 = 28
So 3 L2 m 2 ( t)
,
=
3 L2
No
mp2
since signal is sinusoidal
m 2 ( t) 1
= ,
mp2
2
3 L2
= 48 dB = 63096, L = 205.09
2
Since L is power of 2, so we select L = 256
Hence 256 = 28 ,
dfs 0.1 68 k
= 108
. V
=
wm 2 p 10 3
3mp2
So 8 bits per sample is required .
30. (B) ( SNR) q = 176

. + 6.02( n) = 40 dB, n = 6.35
We take the n = 7.
df s
A w
1 2 p 800
or d = max m =
= 78.5 mV
wm
fs
50 10 3
d2 B (0.0785) 2 3500
=
= 1122
.
10 -4 W
3 fs
3 64000
So
0.5
= 4.46 10 3
=
N o 112
. 10 -4
Capacity = 20 8 k 7 = 112
. Mbits = 140 Kbytes
31. (B) For slope overload to take place Em
df s
2 pfm
This is satisfied with Em = 15

. V and fm = 4 kHz.
32. (C) Step size d=
2 mp
L
1536
.
= 0.012 V
128
quantization noise power

S
25. (A) o L2 ,
No
S
L = 2 n o = 10 log( C2 2 n )
N o dB
= log C + 20 n log 2 = a + 6 n dB.
This equation shows
that increasing n by one bits increase the by 6 dB.

Hence an increase in the SNR by 12 dB can be
accomplished by increasing 9is form 10 to 12, the
transmission bandwidth would be increased by 20%
Page
440
d2 (0.012) 2
= 12 10 -6 V 2
=
12
12
33. (B) Bit Rate = 8 k 8 = 64 kbps

(SNR) q = 176
. + 6.02 n dB = 176
. + 6.02 8 = 49.8 dB
34. (B) fs = 1800 samples/sec,
www.gatehelp.com
fm =
1800
= 900 Hz
2
Since the sampling rate is 1800 samples/sec the highest

frequency that can be recovered is 900 Hz.
The
maximum
frequency
component
will
be
150 + 25 = 175 Hz.
x( t) is band limited with fm = 350 Hz,
Thus Nyquist
1
rate is 2 fm = 700 Hz, Sampling interval =
sec
700
1
1
=
= 20 kHz,
T 50 10 -6
1 + cos 300 pt
44. (D) g( t) = 10 cos 50 pt
= 5 cos 50 pt + 5 cos 50 pt cos 300 pt
35. (C) x( t) = sinc 700t + sinc 500t

1
= [sin 700 pt + sin 500 pt ]
pt
36. (D) fs =
Chap 7.6
Thus fs = 2 175 = 350

. sample per second.
45. (B) Total sample = 8000 20 = 160 k sample/sec
Bit for each sample = 7 + 1 = 8
Bit Rate = 160 k 8 = 1280 10 3 bits/sec
fc = 12 kHz
The frequency passed through LPF are fc , fs - fm or 12

kHz, 8 kHz
46. (B) The sampling rate is fs = 44100 meaning that we

take 44100 samples per second. Each sample is
quantized using 16 bits so the total number of bits per
37. (C) P =
( SNR)1 2
, Here n = code word length,
=
(SNR)2 2 2 n 1
2n 2
16
n1 = 61 n2 = 8,
Thus rate =
second is 4410016. For a music piece of duration 50

min = 3000- sec the resulting number of bits per
channel
2
= 16
212
(left
= 2.1168 10
and
right)
is 44100 16 3000
and the overall number of bits is
2.1168 10 2 = 4.2336 10 9
9
38. (D) Signal g1 ( t), g 2 ( t), g s ( t) and g 4 ( t) will have 8 k, 8

k, 16 k and 16 k sample/sec at Nyquist rate. Thus
47. (C) Nyquist Rate = 2 4k = 8 kHz
48000 sample/sec bit rate 48000 8 = 384 kbps
Total sample = 4 8 = 32 k sample/sec
39. (C) Analog signals, having bandwidth 1200 Hz, 600

Hz and 600 Hz have 2400, 1200 samples/sec at Nyquist
256 = 28 , so that 8 bits are required

Bit Rate = 32 k 8 = 256 kbps
rate. Hence 48000 sample/sec
48. (D) Nyquist Rate = 2 30 k = 60 kHz
bit rate = 48000 sample/sec 12 = 57.6 kbps
2 n 6 Thus n = 3,
sin 2 p1000 t
sin 2 p1000 t
40. (C) x( t) = 5
+ 7
pt
pt
49. (C) Nyquist rate= 2 4 = 8 kHz

2 n = 16 or n = 4,
Maximum frequency component = 3 1000 = 3 kHz

Sampling rate = 2 fm = 6 kHz
50. (C) fs = 8 kHz,
41. (B) Here fs = 32 k sample/sec

1 1
fm = =
Em = 125,
T 2
51. (D)
For slope-overload to be averted Em

D
Em fm
fs
or D
Bit Rate = 4 8 = 32 kbits/sec

2 n = 256 n = 8
Bit Rate = 8 8k = 64 kb/x
1
2
So
a 2 2 n , If PCM is increased form n to n + 1,
No
the ratio will increase by a factor 4. Which is
fs
fm
independent of n.
1
2
125( )
(128)( )
or D 2 -8
or D
3
32 10
32 1024
42. (D) fm = 5 kHz,
Bit Rate = 60 3 = 18 kHz
Nyquist Rate = 2 5 = 10 kHz
Since signal are sampled at twice the Nyquist rate so
52. (C) If L = 2, then 2 = 2 n or n = 1 ND If L = 8, then

8 = 2 n or n = 3. So relative bandwidth will be tripled.
53. (B) The minimum bandwidth requirement for
transmission of a binary PCM signal is BW= vW. Since
sampling rate = 2 10 = 20 kHz.
v = 10, we have BW = 10 W
Total transmission bandwidth = 4 20 = 80 kHz

43. (D) Signal will be sampled 200, 200, 400 and 800
sample/sec thus 1600 sample per second,
***********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
441
CHAPTER
7.8
SPREAD SPECTRUM
5. The Antijam margin is
A pseudo-noise (PN) sequance is generated using a
(A) 47.5 dB
(B) 93.8 dB
feedback shift register of length m = 4. The chip rate is
(C) 86.9 dB
(D) 12.6 dB
10 chips per second

6.
1. The PN sequance length is
A slow
FH/MFSK
system
has
the
following
parameters.
(A) 10
(B) 12
Number of bits per MFSK symbol = 4
(C) 15
(D) 18
Number of MFSK symbol per hop = 5

The processing gain of the system is
2. The chip duration is

(A) 1ms
(B) 0.1 ms
(C) 0.1 ms
(D) 1 ms
(B) 15 ms
(C) 6.67 ns
(D) 0.67 ns
(B) 37.8 dB
(C) 6 dB
(D) 26 dB
7.
A fast
FH/MFSK
system
has
the
following
parameters.
3. The period of PN sequance is

(A) 15
. ms
(A) 13.4 dB
Number of bits per MFSK symbol = 4

Number of pops per MFSK symbol = 4
The processing gain of the system is
(A) 0 dB
(B) 7 dB
(C) 9 dB
(D) 12 dB
A direct sequence spread binary phase-shiftkeying system uses a feedback shift register of Length
19 for the generation of PN sequence . The system is

required to have an average probability of symbol error
due to externally generated interfering signals that
does not exceed 10 -5
A rate 1/2 convolution code with dfrec = 10 is used

to encode a data requeence occurring at a rate of 1 kbps.
The modulation is binary PSK. The DS spread
spectrum sequence has a chip rate of 10 MHz
4. The processing gain of system is
8. The coding gain is
(A) 37 dB
(B) 43 dB
(A) 7 dB
(B) 12 dB
(C) 57 dB
(D) 93 dB
(C) 14 dB
(D) 24 dB
Page
450
www.gatehelp.com
Spread Spectrum
9. The processing gain is
Chap 7.8
(A) 14 dB
(B) 37 dB
(C) 58 dB
(D) 104 dB
A CDMA system consist of 15 equal power user

that transmit information at a rate of 10 kbps, each
using a DS spread spectrum signal operating at chip
10. A total of 30 equal-power users are to share a
rate of 1 MHz. The modulation scheme is BPSK.
common communication channel by CDM. Each user

transmit information at a rate of 10 kbps via DS spread
16. The Processing gain is
spectrum and binary PSK. The minimum chip rate to
(A) 0.01
(B) 100
(C) 0.1
(D) 10
obtain a bit error probability of 10
-5
(A) 1.3 106 chips/sec
(B) 2.9 10 5 chips/sec
(C) 19
. 106 chips/sec
(D) 1.3 10 5 chips/sec
11. A CDMA system is designed based on DS spread
17. The value of e b/J 0 is

(A) 8.54 dB
(B) 7.14 dB
(C) 17.08 dB
(D) 14.28 dB
spectrum with a processing gain of 1000 and BPSK

modulation scheme. If user has equal power and the
18. How much should the processing gain be increased
desired level of performance of an error probability of
to allow for doubling the number of users with affecting
10 -6 , the number of user will be
the autopad SNR
(A) 89
(B) 117
(A) 1.46 MHz
(B) 2.07 MHz
(C) 147
(D) 216
(C) 4.93 MHz
(D) 2.92 MHz
12. In previous question if processing gain is changed to
19.
500, then number of users will be
processing gain of 500. If the desired error probability is
(A) 27 users
(B) 38 users
10 -5 and ( e b / J 0 ) required to obtain an error probability
(C) 42 users
(D) 45 users
of 10 -5 for binary PSK is 9.5 dB, then the Jamming
A DS/BPSK
spread
spectrum
signal
has
margin against a containers tone jammer is

A DS spread spectrum system transmit at a rate of
(A) 23.6 dB
(B) 17.5 dB
(C) 117.4 dB
(D) 109.0 dB
1 kbps in the presets of a tone jammer. The jammer

power is 20 dB greater then the desired signal, and the
required b / J 0 to achieve satisfactory performance is
10 dB.

An m = 10 ML shift register is used to generate the
pre hdarandlm sequence in a DS spread spectrum
13. The spreading bandwidth required to meet the

specifications is
system. The chip duration is Tc = l ms and the bit

duration is Tb = NTc , where N is the length (period of
the m sequence).
(A) 10 7 Hz
(B) 10 3 Hz
(C) 10 5 Hz
(D) 106 Hz
20. The processing gain of the system is
14. If the jammer is a pulse jammer, then pulse duty

cycle that results in worst case jamming is
(A) 0.14
(B) 0.05
(C) 0.07
(D) 0.10
(A) 10 dB
(B) 20 dB
(C) 30 dB
(D) 40 dB
21. If the required e b/J 0 is 10 and the jammer is a tone

jammer with an average power J av, then jamming
15. The correspond probability of error is
margin is.
(A) 4.9 10 -3
(B) 6.3 10 -3
(A) 10 dB
(B) 20 dB
(C) 9.4 10 -4
(D) 8.3 10 -3
(C) 30 dB
(D) 40 dB
www.gatehelp.com
Page
451
UNIT 7

An FH binary orthogonal FSK system employs an
m = 15 stage liner feedback shift register that generates
an ML sequence. Each state of the shift register selects
one of L non over lapping frequency bands in the
hopping pattern. The bit rate is 100 bits/s. The
demodulator employ non coherent detection.
22. If the hop rate is one per bit, the hopping bandwidth
for this channel is
(A) 0.4 GHz
(B) 0.6 GHz
(C) 0.7 GHz
(D) 0.9 GHz
28. The probability of error for the worst-case partial

band jammer is
(A) 0.2996
(B) 0.1496
(C) 0.0368
(D) 0.0298
29. The minimum hop rate for a FH spread spectrum

system that will prevent a jammer from operating five
onives away from the receiver is
(A) 6.5534 MHz
(B) 9.4369 MHz
(C) 2.6943 MHz
(A) 3.2 bHz
(B) 3.2 MHz
(C) 18.6 MHz
(D) 18.6 kHz
23. Suppose the hop rate is increased to 2 hops/bit and

the receiver uses square law combining the signal over
two hops. The hopping bandwidth for this channel is
(A) 3.2767 MHz
(B) 13.1068 MHz
(C) 26.2136 MHz
(D) 1.6384 MHz
***********
Statement for Qquestion 24-25 :

In a fast FH spread
spectrum system, the
information is transmitted via FSK with non coherent

detection. Suppose there are N = 3 hops/bit with hard
decision decoding of the signal in each hop. The channel
is AWGN with power spectral density
1
2
N0 and an SNR
20-13 dB (total SNR over the three hops)

24. The probability of error for this system is
(A) 0.013
(B) 0.0013
(C) 0.049
(D) 0.0049
25. In case of one hop per bit the probability of error is

(A) 196
. 10 -5
(B) 196
. 10 -7
(C) 2.27 10 -5
(D) 2.27 10 -7

A slow FH binary FSK system with non coherent
detection
operates
at
e b / J 0 = 10,
with
hopping
bandwidth of 2 GHz, and a bit rate of 10 kbps.

26. The processing gain of this system is
(A) 23 dB
(B) 43 dB
(C) 43 dB
(D) 53 dB
27. If the jammer operates as a partial band jammar,

the bandwidth occupancy for worst case jamming is
Page
452
www.gatehelp.com
Spread Spectrum
Chap 7.8
W/R
W/R
=
= b
J av/Pav N u - 1 J 0
SOLUTION
W/R = b
J0
1. (C) The PN sequence length is

N= 2 m - 1 = 2 4 - 1 = 15
W = R b
J0
2. (B) The chip duration is

1
TC = 7 s = 0.1 ms
10
( N u - 1)
( N u - 1)
where R = 10 4 bps, N u = 30 and b / J 0 = 10

Therefore, W = 2.9 106 Hz
The minimum chip rate is 1 / Tc = W = 2.9 106 chips/sec
3. (A) The period of the PN sequence is

T= NTC = 15 0.1 = 15
. ms
11. (D) To achieve an error probability of 10 -6 , we
4. (C) m= 19
required b
J0
n= 2 m - 1 = 219 - 1 = 219
= 10.5 dB
dB
Then, the number of users of the CDMA system is
The processing gain is 10 log10 N= 10 log10 219
W/R
1000
+1=
+ 1 = 89 users
b /J 0
11.3
= 190 0.3 or 57 dB
Nu =
Eb
5. (A) Antijam margin = (Processing gain) - 10 log10
N0
12. (D) If the processing gain is reduced to W/R = 500,
The probability of error is

1
Pe = erfc
2
Eb
N0
N u=
500
+ 1 = 45 users
11.3
13. (D) We have a system where ( J av/Pav) dB = 20 dB,
With Pe = 10 -5, we have Eb / N 0 = 9.
R = 1000 bps and (b /J 0 ) dB = 10 dB
Hence, Antijam margin = 57 - 10 log10 9 = 57 - 9.5
J
W
Hence, we obtain = av + b
R dB Pav dB J 0
or =47.5 dB
6. (D) The precessing gain (PG) is
FH Bandwidth W c
PG =
= 5 4 = 20
=
Symbol Rate
Rs
= 30 dB
dB
W
= 1000
R
W = 1000 R = 106 Hz
Hence, expressed in decibels, PG= 10 log10 20 = 26 db

7. (D) The processing gain is
PG = 4 4 = 16
Hence, in decibels,
14. (C) The duty cycle of a pulse jammer of worst-case

0.71
0.7
jamming is a =
=
= 0.07
b /J 0 10
15. (D) The corresponding probability of error for this
PG = 10 log10 16 = 12 dB
8. (A) The coding gain is Rcd min =
then
worst-case jamming is
1
10 = 5 or 7 dB
2
9. (B) The processing gain
P2 =
0.083 0.083
=
= 8.3 10 -3
e b/J 0
10
16. (B) Precessing gain is
10 7
W
=
= 5 10 3 or 37 dB
R 2 10 3
W 106
=
= 100
R 10 4
17. (A) We have N u = 15 users transmitting at a rate of
10. (C) We assume that the interference is characterized
10,000 bps each, in a bandwidth of W = 1MHz.
as a zero-mean AWGN process with power spectral
The e b/J 0 is.
-5
density J 0 . To achieve an error probability of 10 , the

required b /J 0 = 10 we have
e b W/R 106 / 10 4 100

=
=
=
14
14
J 0 Nu - 1
= 7.14 or 8.54 dB
www.gatehelp.com
Page
453
UNIT 7
18. (B) With N u = 30 and e b/J 0 = 7.14, the processing
ec
gain should be increased to
1 P= e 2 N 0
2
W/R= (7.14)(29) = 207
where e c / N 0 = 20 / 3. The probability of a bit error is
W= 207 104 = 2.07 MHz
Pb = 1 - (1 - p) 2 = 1 - (1 - 2 p + p2 ) = 2 p - p2
Hence the bandwidth must be increased to 2.07 MHz

19. (B) The processing gain is given as
W
= 500 or 27 dB
R
=e
ec
2 N0
ec
1 - 2 N0
e
= 0.0013
2
25. (C) In the case of one hop per bit, the SNR per bit is
ec
The ( e b/J 0 ) required to obtain an error probability of
20, Hence,
Pb =
1 - 2 N 0 1 -10
e
= e = 2.27 10 -5
2
2
10 -5 for binary PSK is 9.5 dB. Hence, the jamming

26. (D) We are given a hopping bandwidth of 2 GHz and
margin is
a bit rate of 10 kbs.
e
J av
W
= - b = 27.95 or 17.5 dB
R
P
J 0 dB
av dB
dB
Hence,
20. (C) The period of the maximum length shift register

sequence is
a* W = 2/( e b/J 0 ) = 0.2
Since Tb = NTc then the processing gain is

T
N b = 1023 or 30 dB
Tc
Hence a* W = 0.4 GHz

28. (C) The probability of error with worst-case
partial-band jamming is
21. (B) A Jamming margin is

e
- b = 30 - 10 = 20 dB
dB J 0 dB
where J av = J 0W J 0/Tc = J 0 10
22. (A) The length of the shift-register sequence is

L = 2 m - 1215 - 1 = 32767 bits
For binary FSK modulation, the minimum frequency
separation is 2/T, where 1/T is the symbol (bit) rate.
The hop rate is 100 hops/sec. Since the shift register
e -1
e -1
= 3.68 10 -2
=
( e b/J 0 ) 10
Dd= 2 8050 = 16100

Dd
Dd= x t or t =
t
Dd 16100
t=
=
= 5.367 10 5
x
3 108
1
1
f= =
= 18.63 kHz
t 5.367 10 -5
L = 32767 states and each state utilizes a
bandwidth of 2/T = 200 Hz, then the total bandwidth

for the FH signal is 6.5534 MHz.
23. If the hopping rate is 2 hops/bit and the bit rate is
100 bits/sec, then, the hop rate is 200 hops/sec. The
minimum
frequency
separation
for
orthogonality
2/T = 400 Hz. Since there are N = 32767 states of the

shift register and for each state we select one of two
frequencies
separated
by
400
Hz,
the
hopping
bandwidth is 13.1068 MHz.

24. (B) The total SNR for three hops is 20 ~ 13 dB.
Therefore the SNR per hop is 20/3. The probability of a
chip error with non-coherent detection is
Page
454
P2 =
29. (D) d= 5 miles = 8050 meters
has
27. (A) The bandwidth of the worst partial-band

jammer is a* W, where
N = 210 - 1 = 1023
W
J av
=
P
av dB Rb
W 2 10 9
=
= 2 10 5or 53 dB
10 4
R
www.gatehelp.com
***********
UNIT 8
10. A field is given as

G=
Electromagnetics
16. A field is given as
13
( yu x + 3u y + xu z )
x2 + y2
G =
25
( xu x + yu y )
x2 + y2
The unit vector in the direction of G at P(3, 4, -2)
The field at point (-2, 3, 4) is

(A) 13( -2 u x + 3u y + 4 u z )
(B) -2 u x + 3u y + 4 u z
(C) 13( 3u x + 4 u y - 2 u z )
(D) 3u x + 4 u y - 2 u z
11. A field is given as F = yu x + zu y + xu z The angle

between G and u x at point (2, 2, 0) is
(A) 45
(B) 30
(C) 60
(D) 90
is
(A) 0.6 u x + 0. 8 u y
(B) 0. 8 u x + 0.6 u y
(C) 0.6 u y + 0. 8 u z
(D) 0.6 u z + 0.6 u x
17. A field is given as F = xyu x + yzu y + zxu x The value of

4 2
the double integral I = F u ydzdx in the plane y = 7 is

0 0
12. A vector field is given as

G = 12 xyu x + 6( x 2 + 2) u y + 18 z 2 u z
(A) 128
(B) 56
(C) 190
(D) 0
18. Two vector extending from the origin are given as
The equation of the surface M on which |G | = 60 is

(A) 4 x 2 y 2 + 4 x 4 + 9 z 4 + 2 x 2 = 96
(B) 2 x 2 y 2 + x 4 + 9 z 4 + 2 x 2 = 96
(C) 2 x 2 y 2 + 4 x 4 + 9 z 4 + 2 x 2 = 96
(D) 4 x 2 y 2 + x 4 + 9 z 4 + 2 x 2 = 96
R1 = 4 u x + 3u y - 2 u z and R 2 = 3u x - 4 u y - 6 u z . The
area of the triangle defined by R1 and R 2 is
(A) 12.47
(B) 20.15
(C) 10.87
(D) 15.46
19. The four vertices of a regular tetrahedron are

located at O (0, 0, 0), A(0, 1, 0), B(0.5
13. A vector field is given by
E = 4 zy u z + 2 y sin 2 x u y + y sin 2 x u z
2
(C) Plane x =
3p
2
, 0.5,
2
3
). The unit vector perpendicular (outward) to
(A) 0.41u x + 0.71u y + 0.29 u z

(B) 0.47 u x + 0.82 u y + 0.33u z
(B) Plane x = 0
(C) -0.47 u x - 0.82 u y - 0.33u z
(D) all
(D) -0.41u x - 0.71u y - 0.29 u z

20. The two vector are R AM = 20 u x + 18 u y - 18 u z and
14. The vector field E is given by

E = 6 zy 2 cos 2 x u x + 4 xy sin 2 x u y + y 2 sin 2 x u z
The region in which E = 0 is
R AN = - 10 u x + 8 u y + 15 u z . The unit vector in the plane

of the triangle that bisects the interior angle at A is
(A) 0.168 u x + 0.915 u y + 0.367 u z
(A) y = 0
(B) x = 0
(B) 0.729 u x + 0.134 u y - 0.672 u z
(C) z = 0
np
(D) x =
2
(C) 0.729 u x + 0.134 u y + 0.672 u z

(D) 0.168 u x + 0.915 u y - 0.367 u z
15. Two vector fields are F = -10 u x + 20 x( y - 1) u y and

G = 2 x 2 yu x - 4 u y + 2 u z . At point A(2, 3, -4) a unit
vector in the direction of F - G is
21. Two points in cylindrical coordinates are A( r = 5,

f = 70 , z = -3) and B(r = 2, f = 30 , z = 1). A unit vector
at A towards B is
(A) 0.18 u x + 0.98 u y - 0.05 u z
(A) 0.03u x - 0.82 u y + 0.57 u z
(B) -0.18 u x - 0.98 u y + 0.05 u z
(B) 0.03u x + 0.82 u y + 0.57 u z
(C) -0.37 u x + 0.92 u y + 0.02 u z
(C) -0.82 u x + 0.003u y + 0.57 u z
(D) 0.37 u x - 0.92 u y - 0.02 u z

Page
458
3, 0.5, 0) and C
the face ABC is
The surface on which E y = 0 is

(A) Plane y = 0
0 .5
3
(D) 0.003u x - 0.82 u y + 0.57 u z

www.gatehelp.com
Vector Analysis
22. A field in cartesian form is given as

D = xu x +
29. The vector
yu y
x +y
2
B=
10
u r + r cos q u q + u f
r
in cartesian coordinates at (-3, 4, 0) is
In cylindrical form it will be

u
u
uf
(B) D = r +
(A) D = r
r
r
cos f
(C) D = ru r
Chap 8.1
(D) D = ru r + cos f u f
(A) u x - 2 u y
(B) - 2u x + u y
(C) 1.36 u x + 2.72 u y
(D) -2.72 u x + 1.36 u x
30. The two point have been given A (20, 30 , 45 ) and
23. A vector extends from A(r = 4, f = 40 , z = -2) to B(
B ( 30, 115 , 160 ). The |R AB | is
r = 5, f = -110 , z = 1). The vector R AB is
(A) 22.2
(B) 44.4
(A) 4.77 u x + 7.30 u y + 4 u z
(C) 11.1
(D) 33.3
(B) -4.77 u x - 7.30 u y + 4 u z

(C) -7.30 u x - 4.77 u y + 4 u z
31. The surface r = 2 and 4, q = 30 and 60, f = 20 and
(D) 7.30 u x + 4.77 u y + 4 u z
80 identify a closed surface. The enclosed volume is
24. The surface r = 3, r = 5, f = 100 , f = 130 , z = 3 and
(A) 11.45
(B) 7.15
(C) 6.14
(D) 8.26
z = 4.5 define a closed surface. The enclosed volume is

(A) 480
(B) 5.46
32. The surface r = 2 and 4, q = 30 and 50 and f = 20
(C) 360
(D) 6.28
and 60 identify a closed surface. The total area of the

enclosing surface is

z = 4 define a closed surface. The total area of the
enclosing surface is
(A) 6.31
(B) 18.91
(C) 25.22
(D) 12.61
(A) 34.29
(B) 20.7
33. At point P(r = 4, q = 0.2 p , f = 0.8 p), u r in cartesian
(C) 32.27
(D) 16.4
component is
(A) 0.48 u x + 0.35 u y + 0.81u z
z = 4.5 define a closed volume. The length of the longest
(B) 0.48 u x - 0.35 u y - 0.81u z
straight line that lies entirely within the volume is
(C) -0.48 u x + 0.35 u y + 0.81u z
(A) 3.21
(B) 3.13
(D) 0.48 u x - 0.35 u y - 0.81u z
(C) 4.26
(D) 4.21
34. The expression for u y in spherical coordinates at P(
27. A vector field H is
r = 4, q = 0.2 p, f = 0.8 p) is
f
H = rz 2 sin f u r + e - z sin u f + r 3u z
2
(A) 0.48 u r + 0.35 u q - 0.81u f

(B) 0.35 u r + 0.48 u q - 0.81u f
At point 2, , 0 the value of H u x is

3
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.433
(C) -0.433
(D) -0.25
(C) -0.48 u r + 0.35 u q - 0.81u f

(D) -0.35 u r + 0.48 u q - 0.81u f
35. Given a vector field
28. A vector is A = yu x + ( x + z) u y. At point P(-2, 6, 3)
D = r sin f u r -
A in cylindrical coordinate is
(A) -0.949 u r - 6.008 u f
(B) 0.949 u r - 6.008 u f
(C) -6.008 u r - 0.949 u f
(D) 6.008 u r + 0.949 u f
1
sin q cos f u q + r 2 u f
r
The component of D tangential to the spherical

surface r = 10 at P(10, 150, 330) is
www.gatehelp.com
Page
459
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
(A) 0 .043u q + 100 u f
40. The gradient of the functionG = r 3 sin 2 q sin 2 f sin q
(B) -0 .043u q - 100 u f
at point P ( 12 ,
(C) 110 u q + 0.043u f
(A) 1.41u r + 3u z
(B) u x + u y + u z
(D) 0 .043u q - 100 u f
(C) 3.46 u r + 9.3u q
(D) All
36. The circulation of F = x 2 u x - xzu y - y 2 u z around the
41.
path shown in fig. P8.1.36 is
The
1
2
1
2
) is
directional
derivative
of
function
F = xy + yz + zx at point P(3, -3, - 3) in the direction

toward point Q(4, -1, -1) is
z
1
(A) -3
(B) 1
(C) -2
(D) 0
42. The temperature in a auditorium is given by

T = 2 x 2 + y 2 - 2 z 2 . A mosquito located at (2, 2, 1) in the
y
auditorium desires to fly in such a direction that it will
get warm as soon as possible. The direction, in that it
must fly is
(A) 8 u x + 8 u y - 4 u z
Fig. P8.1.36
(A) -
1
3
(B)
1
6
(B) 2 u x + 2 u y - u z
(C) -
1
6
(D)
1
3
(D) -(2 u x + 2 u y - u z )
(C) 4 u x + 4 u y - 4 u z
37. The circulation of A = r cos f u r + z sin f u z around

the edge L of the wedge shown in Fig. P8.1.37 is
43. The angle between the normal to the surface

x2 y + z = 3
x ln z - y 2 = -4
and
at
the
point
of
intersection (-1, 2, 1) is
(A) 73.4
(B) 36.3
(C) 16.6
(D) 53.7
44. The divergence of vector A = yzu x + 4 xyu y + yu z at

60
point P(1, -2, 3) is
Fig. P8.1.37
(A) 2
(B) -2
(D) 4
(A) 1
(B) -1
(C) 0
(C) 0
(D) 3
45.
The
divergence
of
the
38. The gradient of field f = y 2 x + xyz is

(A) y( y + z) u x + x(2 y + z) u y + xyu z
(B) y(2 x + z) u x + x( x + z) u y + xyu z
(C) y 2 u x + 2 yxu y + xyu z
(A) 2.6
(B) 1.5
(C) 4.5
(D) -4.5
46. The divergence of the vector
(D) y(2 y + z) u x + x(2 y + z) u y + xyu z
A = rz 2 cos f u r + z sin 2 f u z is
39. The gradient of the field f = r z cos 2 f at point

2
(1, 45 , 2) is
(A) 4u f
(B) 4 2u f
(C) -4u f
(D) -4 2u f
Page
460
vector
A = 2 r cos q cos f u r + r u f at point P(1, 30, 60) is

1 2
(A) 2rz 2 cos f u r + sin 2 f u z

(B) 2rz 2 cos f u r + sin 2 f u z
(C) 2 z 2 cos f u r + sin 2 f u z
(D) z sin 2
www.gatehelp.com
f
u r + 2rz cos f u f + z 2 sin f u z
r
Vector Analysis
Chap 8.1
47. The flux of D = r 2 cos 2 f u r + 3 sin f u f over the
54. If V = x 2 y 2 z 2 , the laplacian of the field V is
closed surface of the cylinder 0 z < 3,
(A) 2( xy 2 + yz 2 + zx 2 )
r = 3 is
(A) 324
(B) 81p
(B) 2( x 2 y 2 + y 2 z 2 + z 2 x 2 )
(C) 81
(D) 64p
(C) ( x 2 y 2 + y 2 z 2 + z 2 x 2 )
48. The curl of vector A = e xyu x + sin xy u y + cos 2 xz u z

is
(D) 0
55. The value of 2 V at point P(3, 60, -2) is if
(A) y e xyu x + x cos xy u y - 2 x sin 2 xz u z
V = r 2 z(cos f + sin f)
(B) z sin 2 xy u y + ( y cos xy - xe xy) u z

(C) z sin 2 xy u y + ( x cos xy - xe xy) u z
(D) xy e xyu x + xy cos xy u y - 2 xz sin 2 xz u z
(A) -8.2
(B) 12.3
(C) -12.3
(D) 0
56. If the scalar field V = r 2 (1 + cos q sin f) then 2 V is
49. The curl of vector field

A = rz sin f u r + 3rz 2 cos f u r at point (5, 90, 1) is
(A) 0
(B) 12u q
(C) 6u r
(D) 5u f
(A) 1 + 2(1 - r 2 ) cos q sin f

(B) 6 + 4 cos q sin f - cot q cosec q sin f
(C) 2 + 2(1 - r 2 ) cos q sin f
(D) 0
50. The curl of vector field

1
A = r cos q u r - sin q u q + 2 r 2 sin q u f is
r
1
(A) cos q u r - cos q u q
r
57. ln r is equal to
(B) 2 r 2 cos q u r - 4 r sin q u q + 2 sin q - r sin q u f

r
(A) ( fu z )
(B) ( zu f)
(C) (ru f)
(D) (ru z )
58. If r = xu x + yu y + zu x then ( r ) r 2 is equal to

(A) 2 r 2
(B) 3r 2
(D) 0
(C) 4 r 2
(D) 0
51. If A = ( 3 y 2 - 2 z) u x - 2 x 2 z u y + ( x + 2 y) u z , the value
59. If r = xu x + yu y + zu x is the position vector of point
of A at P(-2, 3, -1) is
P( x, y, z) and r =|r| then r n r is equal to
(C) 4 r cos q u r - 6 r sin q u q + sin q u f
(A) -( 6 u x + 4 u y)
(B) 8 ( u x + u y)
(A) nr n
(B) ( n + 3) r n
(C) -8( u x + u y)
(D) 0
(C) ( n + 2) r n
(D) 0
52. The grad A of a vector field
60. If F = x 2 yu x - yu y, the circulation of vector field F
A = x 2 yu x + y 2 zu y - 2 xzu z is
around closed path shown in fig. P8.1.60 is,
(A) 2 xy + 2 yz - 2 x
(B) x 2 y + y 2 z - 2 xz
(C) 2 x 2 y + 2 y 2 z - 2 xz
S
(D) 0
53. If V = xy - x 2 y + y 2 z 2 , the value of the div grad V
is
Fig. P8.1.60
(A) 0
(B) z + x 2 + 2 y 2 z
(C) 2 y( z 2 - yz - x)
(D) 2( z - y - y)
2
(A)
7
3
(B) -
7
6
(C)
7
6
(D) -
7
3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
461
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
61. If A = r sin f u r + r 2 u r , and L is the contour of fig.
SOLUTIONS
A. dL is
P8.1.61, then circulation
1. (D) d = ( x1 - x2 ) 2 + ( y1 - y2 ) 2 + ( z1 - z 2 ) 2
= ( 4 - 2) 2 + ( -6 - 3) 2 + ( 3 - ( -1)) 2 = 4 + 81 + 16 = 101
L
2. (A) R AB = R B - R A
= ( 3u x + 0 u y + 2 u z ) - (5 u x - u y + 0 u z )
-2
-1
= -2 u x + u y + 2 u z
|R AB | =
Fig. P8.1.61
(A) 7 p + 2
(B) 7 p - 2
(C) 7p
(D) 0
uR = -
22 + 1 + 22 = 3
2
1
2
ux + u y + uz
3
3
3
3. (C) The component of F parallel to G is
62. The surface integral of vector

F = 2r 2 z 2 u r + r cos 2 f u z
over the region defined by 2 r 5, -1 < z < 1,
F G
(10, - 6, 5) (0.1, 0.2, 0.3)
G =
(0.1, 0.2, 0.3)
2
G
0.12 + 0.2 2 + 0.32
= 9.3(0.1, 0.2, 0.3) = (0.93, 1.86, 2.79)
0 < f < 2 p is
(A) 44
(B) 176
(C) 88
(D) 352
63. If D = xyu x + yzu y + zxu z , then the value of A dS
is, where S is the surface of the cube defined by

0 x 1, 0 y 1, 0 z 1
(A) 0.5
(B) 3
(C) 0
(D) 1.5
4. (C) The vector component of F perpendicular to G is

F G
( 3, 2, 1) ( 4, 4, - 2)
=F G = ( 3, 2, 1) ( 4, 4, - 2)
G2
42 + 42 + 22
= (3, 2, 1)- (2, 2, - 1) = (1, 0, 2) = u x + 2 u z
5. (C) R = 3u x + 4 M - N
= 3u x + 4(2 u x + 3u y - 4 u z ) -( -4 u x + 4 u y + 3u z )
= 15 u x + 8 u y - 19 u z
64. If D = 2rzu r + 3z sin f u r - 4r cos f u z and S is the
|R| =
15 2 + 8 2 + 19 2 = 25.5 = 25.5
surface of the wedge 0 < r < 2, q < f < 45 , 0 < z < 5, then
6. (B) R = - M + 2N
the surface integral of D is

(A) 24.89
(B) 131.57
= - ( 8 u x + 4 u y - 8 u z ) + 2( 8 u x + 6 u y - 2 u z )
(C) 63.26
(D) 0
= 8u x + 8u y + 4u z
8u x + 8u y + 4u z
uR =
82 + 82 + 42
65. If the vector field

F = ( axy + bz 3) u x + ( 3 x 2 - gz) u y + ( 3 xz 2 - y) u z
is irrotational, the value of a , b and g is
2
2
1
2 2 1
ux + u y + uz = , ,
3
3
3
3 3 3
(A) a = b = g = 1
(B) a = b = 1, g = 0
-M + 2N = -( 8, 4, - 8) + 2( 8, 6, - 2) = (8, 8, 4)
(C) a = 0,
(D) a = b = g = 0
uR =
b = g =1
**************
uR =
2 2 1
= , ,
3 3 3
8 +8 +4
( 8, 8, 4)
2
2
1
ux + u y + uz
3
3
3
1 + 7 -6 - 2 4 + 0
7. (C) Mid point is
,
,
= (4, -4, 2)
2
2
2`
uR =
Page
462
www.gatehelp.com
( 4, - 4, 2)
4 + 4 +2
2
2 1
2
= , - ,
3
3 3
Vector Analysis
2
2
1
ux - u y + uz
3
3
3
8. (A) G = 24(1)(2) u x + 12(1 + 2) u y + 18( -1) 2 u z

= 48 u x + 36 u y + 18 u z
2 1
2
9. (A) A = ( 6, - 2, - 4), B = k , - ,
3 3
3
|B - A |= 10
2
2
2
1
6 - k + -2 + k + -4 - k = 100
3
3
3
k2 - 8 k - 44 = 0
k = 1175
. ,
Chap 8.1
= -34 u x + 84 u y - 2 u z
-34 u x + 84 u y - u z
uR =
34 2 + 84 2 + 2 2
= - 0.37 u x + 0.92 u y - 0.02 u z
16. (A) At P(3, 4, -2)
25
G= 2
( 3u x + 4 u y) = 3u x + 4 u y
3 + 42
3u x + 4 u y
= 0.6 u x + 0.8 u y
uG =
32 + 4 2
17. (B) F u y = Fy = yz
2 1
2
B = 1175
. ,- ,
3 3
3
4 2
I=
yzdzdx =
0 0
= (7.83, -7.83, -3.92)
2
0 0 yzdz
dx = 2 ydx = 2( 4) y = 8 y
At y = 7, I = 8(7) = 56
13
10. (D) G =
( 3u x + 4 u y - 2 u z )
2
( -2) + ( 3) 2
= 3u x + 4 u y - 2 u z
u x u y u z
1
1
18. (B) Area = R1 R 2 =
4
3 -2
2
2
3 -4 -6
11. (A) Let q be the angle between F and u x ,
= u x ( -18 - 8) - u y( -24 + 6) + u z ( -16 - 9)
Magnitude of F is |F|= y + z + x
= -26 u x + 18 u y - 25 u z
F u x = (F)(1) cos q = y
y
cos q =
=
2
y + z 2 + x2
R1 R 2 = 26 2 + 18 2 + 25 2 = 40.31
2
2 +2
2
area =
q = 45
40.31
= 20.15
2
19. (B) R BA = (0, 1, 0) - (0.5 3 , 0.5, 0) = ( -0.5 3 , 0.5, 0)

0.5
R BC =
, 0.5,
3
12. (D) |G|= 60

(12 xy) 2 + ( 6( x 2 + 2)) 2 + (18 z 2 ) 2 = 60
144 x 2 y 2 + 36( x 4 + 4 x 2 + 4) + 324 z 4 = 3600
4 x y + ( x + 4 x + 4) + 9 z = 100
4 x 2 y 2 + x 4 + 9 z 4 + 4 x 2 = 96
R BA R BC
13. (D) For E y = 0, 2 y sin 2 x = 0
sin 2 x = 0,
3p
x = 0,
2
2 x = 0, p , 3p ,
y =0
Hence (D) is correct.

14. (A)
E = y( 6 zy cos 2 x u x + 4 x sin 2 x u y + y sin 2 x u z )
Hence in plane y = 0,
E = 0.
15. (C) R = F - G
= ( -10 u x + 20 x( y - 1) u y) - (2 x 2 yu x - 4 u y + 2 u z )
At P(2, 3, - 4) ,
R = F - G = ( -10 u x + 80 u y) - (24 u x - 4 u y + 2 u z )
= u x 0.5
2
3
- (0.5 3 , 0.5, 0)
uy
ux
= 0.5 3 0.5
1
0
3
1
= , 0,
3
2
3
uz
0
2
3
2
0.5
- u y (0.5 2 ) + u z
3
3
= 0.41u x - 0.71u y + 0.29 u z

The required unit vector is
0.41u x + 0.71u y + 0.29 u z
=
0.412 + 0.712 + 0.29 2
= 0.47 u x + 0.81u y + 0.33u z
20. (A) The non-unit vector in the required direction is
1
= ( u AN + u AM )
2
( -10, 8, 15)
u AN =
= ( -0.507, 0.406, 0.761)
100 + 64 + 225
www.gatehelp.com
Page
463
UNIT 8
(20, 18, - 10)
u AM =
400 + 324 + 100
Electromagnetics
26. (A) A(r = 3, f = 100 , z = 3) = A( -0.52, 2.95, 3)
= (0.697, 0.627, -0.348)
B(r = 5, f = 130 , z = 4.5) = B( -321

. , 3.83, 4.5)
1
( u AM + u AN )
2
1
= [(0.697, 0.627, - 0.348) + ( -0.507, 0.406, 0.761) ]
2
length = |B - A|
B - A = ( -321
. , 3.83, 4.5) - ( -0.52, 2.95, 3)
= ( -2.69, 0.88, 15
. )
= (0.095, 0.516, 0.207)

(0.095, 0.516, 0.207)
= (0.168, 0.915, 0.367)
u bis =
0.095 2 + 0.516 2 + 0.2612
Hence (A) is correct.
|B - A| = |( -2.69,
0.88, 15
. )| = 2.69 2 + 0.88 2 + 15
. 2 = 3.21
p
27. (C) At P 2, , 0 , H = 0.5 u f + 8 u z
3
u x = cos f u r - sin f u f =
21. (D) In cartesian coordinates

A (5 cos 70 , 5 sin 70 , - 3) = A(171
. , 4.70, - 3)
1
( u r - 3u f)
2
3
= -0.433
H u x = (0.5)
2
B (2 cos ( -30 ), 2 sin ( -30 ), - 3) = B(173

. , - 1, 1)
R AB = R B - R A = (173
. , - 1, 1) - (171
. , 4.70, - 3)
Ar cos f sin f 0 Ax
28. (A) Af = - sin f cos f 0 A y

0
1 Az
Az 0
= (0.02, - 5.70, 4)
(0.02, - 5.70, 4)
= (0.003, -0.82, 0.57)
u AB =
0.02 2 + 5.70 2 + 4 2
22. (A) x = r cos f ,
At P (-2, 6, 3)
y = r sin f
6
A = 6 u x + u y , f = tan -1
= 108.43
-2
r cos f u x + r sin f u y 1
D= 2
= (cos f u x + sin f u y)
r cos 2 f + r 2 sin 2 f r
cos f = - 0.316, sin f = 0.948
1
Dr = D u r = [cos f ( u x u r) + sin f ( u y u r)]
r
=
1
1
[cos 2 f + sin 2 f] =
r
r
Df = D u f =
=
0.948 0 6
Ar -0.316
A = -0.948 -0.316 0 1
f

0
1 0
Az 0
Ar = 6 ( -0.316) + 0.948 = -0.949,
1
[cos f ( u x u f) + sin f ( u y uf)]
r
Af = 6( -0.948) - 0.316 = -6.008, Az = 0

Hence (A) is correct option.
1
[cos f ( - sin f) + sin f (cos f)] = 0
r
Therefore D =
29.(B) At P (-3, 4, 0)
1
ur
r
r = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = 32 + 4 2 + 0 2 = 5
23. (B) A( 4 cos 40 , 4 sin 40 , - 2) = A( 306

. , 2.57, - 2)
B (5 cos ( -110 ), 5 sin ( -110 ), 2) = B ( -171
. , - 4.7, 2)
R AB = R B - R A = ( -171
. , - 4.7, 2) - ( 306
. , 2.57, - 2)
4 .5 130 5
rdrdfdz
Bx sin q cos f cos q cos f - sin q Br

B = sin q sin f cos q cos f cos f B
y
q
- sin q
1 Bf
Bz cos q
= 6.28
3 100 3
25. (C) Area is

=2
135 4
rdrdf +
45 2
4 135
2 dfdz +
3 45
4 135
4 4
3 45
3 2
4 dfdz + 2 drdz
r p
p
= 2 + (2)(1) = 32.27
2
2 2 2
2
Page
464
f = tan -1
x2 + y2 p
=
z
2
y
4
= tan -1
= 126.87
x
-3
B = 2u r + u f
= ( -4.77, - 7.3, 4)
24. (D) Vol =
q = tan -1
-0.6 0 -0.8 2
= 0.8
0 -0.6 0

-1
0 1
0
Bx = 2( -0.6) + 0.8 = -2
B y = 2(0.2) - 0.6 = 1
Bz = 0
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
C3 = r cos f dr
Along 3,
A dL
=
f=60
r2
= -1
2
Electromagnetics
44. (D) A =
Ax A y Az
=0 + 4x + 0
+
+
x
y
z
At P (1, -2, 3), A = 4
= C1 + C2 + C3 = 1
45. (A)
38. (A) f = u x
f
f
f
+ uy
+ uz
x
y
z
A =
= y( y + z) u x + x(2 y + z) u y + xyu z
39. (C) f = u r
f
1 f
f
+ uf
+ uz
x
r y
z
1
( 6 r 2 cos q cos f) + 0 + 0
r2
At P (1, 30, 60), A = 6(1)(cos 30 )(cos 60 ) = 2.6
= 2 r 2 z cos 2 f u r - 2rz sin 2 f u f + r 2 cos 2 f u z
46. (C) A =
At P (1, 45, 2), f = - 4u f

40. (B) r sin q cos f = x , r sin q sin f = y , r cos q = z
G = r 3 sin 2 q sin 2 f sin q
1 (rrz 2 cos f) ( z sin 2 f)

= 2 z 2 cos f + sin 2 f
+
r
r
z
D dS
( 4 xyz)
( 4 xyz)
( 4 xyz)
G = u x
+ uy
+ uz
x
x
z
D =
= 4 yzu x + 4 xzu y + 4 xyu z

1 1 1
At P , , , G = u x + u y + u z
2 2 2
F = -6u x , R PQ = ( 4, - 1, - 1) - ( 3, - 3, - 3) = (1, 2, 2)
T
T
T
+ uy
+ uz
x
y
z
= 2 xu x + 2 yu z - 4 z u z
1 (rr 2 cos 2 f) 1 ( z sin f)

3
+
= 3r cos 2 f + sin f
r
r
r
r
r
2
f+
z
sin
r
f rdfdzdr
2p
2p
= dz zr 2 dr cos 2 f df + zdz dr sin f df = 81p
At P(3, -3, - 3),
= -2
D dv
41. (C) F = ( y + z) u x + ( x + z) u y + ( x + y) u z
( -6 u x ) ( u x + 2 u y + 2 u z )
D dv = 3r cos
v
42. (C) T = u x
By divergence theorem
= 4( r sin q cos f)( r sin q sin f)( r cos q) = 4 xyz
1 (rAr) 1 ( Af) ( Az )
+
+
r r
r q
z
47. (B) The flux is D dS ,
= r 3(2 sin q cos q)(2 sin f cos f) sin q
F u R =
1 (r 2 Ar )
1 (sin q Aq)
1 (sin q Af)
+
+
r2
r sin q
r sin q
f
r
q
u x
48. (B) A =
x
Ax
uy
y
Ay
u z u x
uy
uz

z x
y
z
Az e xy sin xy cos 2 xz
u x (0 - 0) - u y(2 cos xz ( - sin xz) z) + u z ( y cos xy - xexy)

= z sin 2 xy u y + ( y cos xy - xe xy) u z
At P(2, 2, 1), T = 4 u x + 4 u y - 4 u z
43. (A) Let f = x 2 y + z - 3, g = x ln z - y 2 + 4
f = 2 xyu x + x 2 u y + u z
g = ln z u x - 2 yu y +
x
uz
z
At point P (-1, 2, 1)
uf =
-4 u x + u y + u z
18
cos q = u f u g =
-1
q = cos 0.28 = 73.4

Page
466
, ug =
-5
18 17
-4 u y - u z
17
= 0.286
u r
1
49. (D) A =
r r
Ar
uf uz
f z
Af Az
ur
uf
uz
1
=
r r
f
z
rz sin f 2r 2 z 2 cos f 0
=
1
1
u r (-6r 2 z cos f) - u f (-r sin f) u z (6rz 2 cos f - rz cos f)
r
r
At point P(5, 90, 1), A = 5 u f

www.gatehelp.com
Vector Analysis
u r
1
50. (C) A = 2
r sin q r
Ar
56.(B)
r sin qu f
r sin q Af
ru q
q
rAq
2 V =
1
r 2 sin q
u r ( 2r 3 sin q - 0) -
2 V
1 2 V
1

V
1
r
+ 2
sin q
+ 2
2
2
r r
r r sin q q
q r sin q f2
= 6 + 4 cos q sin f - cot q cosec q sin f

57. (A) r = x 2 + y 2
1
1
u q ( 6r 2 sin 2 q - 0) + u f ( 0 + r sin q)
r sin q
r
ln r = u x
= 4 r cos q u r - 6 r sin q u q + sin q u f

ux
uy
uz
51. (A) A =
x
y
z
2
2
( 3 y - 2 z) ( -2 x z) ( x + 2 y)
ux
uy
x
y
+ 2 x2 ) 3
uz
-( 4 xz + 6 y)
A = -6 u x - 4 u y = -( 6 u x + 4 u y)
uz

z
-2 xz
-1
n
r n r = 2 x 2 ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) 2
2
n
= n( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 )( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) 2
2
55. (A) V =
r
2
V
r
r
F = -x uz
dS = dxdy ( -u z )
( F) dS = - ( - x ) dxdy
2
= 2( y z + x z + x y ) = 2( x y + y z + z x )
2
( F) dS
2V 2V 2V
54. (B) 2 V =
+
+
x 2
y 2
z 2
2
+ 3r n
60. (C) By Stokes theorem F dL =
= -2 y + 2 z - 2 y = 2( z - y - y)
2
-1
= nr n + 3r n = ( n + 3) r n
( z - 2 xy) (2 yz - x ) ( x - 2 y z)
+
+
x
y
z
2
+ rn + rn + rn
= ( z - 2 xy) u x + (2 yz - x ) u y + ( x - 2 y z) u z
( xr n ) ( yr n ) ( zr n )
+
+
x
y
z
-1
-1
n
n
+ 2 y 2 ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) 2 + 2 z 2 ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) 2
2
2
x
y
x
y
ux + 2
u y = ux + u y
2
2
r
r
x +y
x +y
V
V
V
53. (D) V = u x
+ uy
+ uz
x
y
z
tan -1
where r n = ( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) 2
( A) = 0
y
x
uz
59. (B) r n r =
= - y 2 u x + 2 zu y - x 2 u z
(V ) =
uy
= x(2 x) + y(2 y) + z(2 z) = 2( x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) = 2 r 2
At P(-2, 3, -1),
uy
y
y2 z
u x
y
uz =
x
x
2
58. (A) ( r ) r 2 = x
+y
+z
( x + y 2 + z 2 )
x
y
z
= u x ( -6) - u y( -4 z) + u z (0) = -6 u x + 4 zu y
ux

52. (D) A =
x
2
x y
ln r
ln r
ln r
x
y
+ uy
+ uz
= 2 ux + 2 u y
r
r
x
y
z
f u z = tan -1
= u x (2 + 2 x 2 ) - u y(1 - ( -2)) + u z ( -4 xz - 6 y)
A =
(2
2 sin q
cos q sin f
cos q sin f sin q
sin 2 q
= 6(1 + cos q sin f) -
ur
ru q
r sin q u f
1
= 2
r sin q r
q
f
3
2
r cos q - sin q 2 r sin q
=
Chap 8.1
1 2V 2V
+
+ 2
2
z 2
r f
x dydx + x dydx
2
0 0
= 4 z(cos f + sin f) - z(cos f + sin f) + 0 = 3z(cos f + sin f)

1
3
= -8.2
At P(3, 60, -2), 2 V = 3( -2) +
2
2
2 -x + 2
1 x
x dx + x (2 - x) dx
3
x4
1
2
= + x3 - x4
4
3
4 1
0
=
1 16
1 7
2 1 1 14
+
- 4 - - = +
-4+ =
4 3
3
4 6
3 4 4
www.gatehelp.com
Page
467
UNIT 8
A dL =
61. (C)
ab
bc
cd
da
D dS = ( D)dv
A dL
= 4 rdr
-2
-1
=0
A dL
r df
A dL = r 3df
= r 3 df = (1) 3( -p) = - p
p
62. (B) Using divergence theorem
F =
Fdv
1
(2r 2 z 2 ) = 4 z 2 = 4 z 2
r r
1
F dv = 4 z rdrdfdz = 4 z
2
( xy) ( yz) ( zx)

+
+
x =y+z+ x
x
y
z
1
= 3 xdx
0
( y + z + x) dxdydz
1
dy
0 0 dz = 3 2 = 15.
64. (B) D =
Page
468
2p
A dS =
= 4z +
dz rdr df = 176
A dS = ( A)dv
S
A =
-1
63. (D)
uy
y
3 x 2 - gz
*******
=0
A dL = 0 + 8 p + 0 - p = 7 p
F dS
f = p, A dL = 0,
Along da, dr = 0,
A dL
45
i.e. a = 1 = b = g.
= (2) 3 p = 8 p
If F is irrotational, F = 0
A dL = r 3df
Along cd, df = 0,
A dL
uz
z
3 xz 2 -
= ( -1 + g) u x + ( 3bz 2 - 3z 2 ) u y + ( 6 x - ax) u z
Along bc, dr = 0,
45
ux
65. (A) F =
a
x
bz 2
+
f = 0,
A dL
zdz df + 3 dr zdz cos f df
A dL = 0,
3z
cos f rdrdfdz
4 z +
r
4 25 p
25 1
= 4
.
= 13157
+ 3(2)
2 2 4
2 2
Fig. S8.1.61
Along ab, df = 0,
D dS =
Electromagnetics
1 (rDr) 1 ( Df) ( Dz )
+
+
r r
r q
z
3
z cos f
r
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
8.2
ELECTROSTATICS
1. Let Q1 = 4 mC
be located at P1 (3, 11, 8) while
Q2 = -5 mC is at P2 (6, 15, 8). The force F2 on Q2 will be
6. A 2 mC point charge is located at A (4, 3, 5) in free

space. The electric field at P(8, 12, 2) is
(A) -( 4.32 u x + 5.76 u y) N
(B) 4.32 u x + 5.76 u y N
(A) 131.1u r + 159.7 u f - 49.4 u z
(C) -( 4.32 u x + 5.76 u y) mN
(D) 4.32 u x + 5.76 u y mN
(B) 159.7 u r + 27.4 u f - 49.4 u z
2. Four 5 nC positive charge are located in the z = 0

plane at the corners of a square 8 mm on a side. A fifth
(C) 1311
. u r + 27.4 u f - 49.4 u z
(D) 159.7 u r + 137.1u f - 49.4 u z
5 nC positive charge is located at a point 8 mm distant

from each of the other charge. The magnitude of the
7. A point charge of -10 nC is located at P1 (0, 0, 0.5)
total force on this fifth charge is
and a charge of 2 mC at the origin. The E at P(0, 2, 1) is
(A) 2 10 -4 N
(C) 0.014 N
(B) 4 10 -4 N
(D) 0.01 N
3. Four 40 nC are located at A(1, 0, 0), B(-1, 0, 0), C(0,
(A) 68.83u r + 14.85 u f
(B) 68.83u r + 64.01u f
(C) 68.83u r - 14.85 u f
(D) 68.83u r - 64.01u f
8. Charges of 20 nC and -20nC are located at (3, 0, 0)
1, 0) and D(0, -1, 0) in free space. The total force on the
and (-3, 0, 0) and (-3, 0, 0), respectively. The magnitude
charge at A is
of E at y axis is
(A) 24.6u x mN
(C) -13.6u x mN
(B) -24.6u x mN
(D) 13.76u x mN
4. Let a point charge 41 nC be located at P1 (4, -2, 7) and

a charge 45 nC be at P2 (3, 4, 2). The electric field E at
P3(1, 2, 3) will be
1080
(9 + y 2 ) 3 2
(B)
1080
(9 + y 2 ) 3
(C)
108
(9 + y 2 ) 3 2
(D)
108
(9 + y 2 ) 3
9. A charge Q0 located at the origin in free space
(A) 0.13u x + 0.33u y + 0.12 u z
produces a field for which E2 = 1 kV m at point P(2, 2,
(B) -0.13u x - 0.33u y - 0.12 u z
1). The charge Q0 is
(C) 115
. u x + 2.93u y + 109
. uz
(D) -115
. u x - 2.93u y - 109
. uz
5. Let a point charge 25 nC be located at P1 (4, -2, 7) and
a charge 60 nC be at P2 (-3, 4, -2). The point, at which on
the y axis, is Ex = 0, is
(A) -7.46
(C) -6.89
(A)
(B) -22.11
(D) (B) and (C)
(A) 2 mC
(B) -3 mC
(C) 3 mC
(D) -2 mC
10. The volume charge density r n = r oe -|x|-| y|-|z| exist over

all free space. The total charge present is
(A) 2r o
(B) 4r o
(C) 8r o
(D) 3r o
www.gatehelp.com
Page
469
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
11. A uniform volume charge density of 0.2 mC m 2 is
18. Two identical uniform charges with r l = 80 nC m are
present throughout the spherical shell extending from
located in free space at x = 0, y = 3 m. The force per
r = 3 cm to r = 5 cm. If r = 0 elsewhere, the total charge
unit length acting on the line at positive y arising from
present throughout the shell will be
the charge at negative y is
(A) 41.05 pC
(B) 257.92 pC
(A) 9.375u y mN
(B) 37.5u y mN
(C) 82.1 pC
(D) 129.0 pC
(C) 19.17u y mN
(D) 75u y mN
12.
If r v =
1
z 2 + 10
5 e -0 .1 r( p-|f|) mC m 3 in
the region
19. A uniform surface charge density of 10 nC m 2 is
0 r 10, -p < f < p and all z, and r v = 0 elsewhere,
present in the region x = 0, - 2 < y < 2 and all z if e = e o
the total charge present is
, the electric field at P(3, 0, 0) has
(A) 1.29 mC
(B) 2.58 mC
(C) 0.645 mC
(D) 0
(A) x component only

(B) y component only
13. The region in which 4 < r < 5, 0 < q < 25 , and
(C) x and y component
0.9 p < f < 11

. p contains the volume charge density of
(D) x, y and z component
f
2
r v = 10 ( r - 4) ( r - 5) sin q sin . Outside the region,

r v = 0. The charge within the region is
20. The surface charge density is r s = 5 nC m 2 , in the
(A) 0.57 C
(B) 0.68 C
region r < 0.2 , z = 0, and is zero elsewhere. The electric
(C) 0.46 C
(D) 0.23 C
field E at A(r = 0, z = 0.5) is
14. A uniform line charge of 5 nC m is located along the
(A) 5.4 V m
(B) 10.1 V m
(C) 10.5 V m
(D) 20.2 V m
line defined by y = -2, z = 5. The electric field E at P(1,

21. Three infinite charge sheet are positioned as
2, 3) is
(A) -9 u y + 4.5 u z
(B) 9 u y - 4.5 u z
follows: 10 nC m 2 at x = -3, - 40 nC m 2 at y = 4 and 50
(C) -18 u y + 9 u z
(D) 18 u y - 9 u z
nC m 2 at z = 2. The E at (4, 3, -2) is
15. A uniform line charge of 6.25 nC m is located along

the line defined by y = -2, z = 5. The E at that point in
the z = 0 plane where the direction of E is given by
1
3
u y - 23 u z ), is
(A) 4.5 u y + 9 u z
(B) 4.5 u y - 9 u z
(C) 9 u y - 18 u z
(D) 18 u y - 36 u z
(C) -48u y V m
(D) 24u y V m
(D) -0.56 u x - 2.23u y + 2.8 u z kV m

Let E = 5 x 3u x - 15 x 2 yu y . The equation of the
(A) y =
respectively. The E at P(6, 0, 6) will be

(B) 48u y V m
(C) 0.56 u x + 2.23u y + 2.8 u z kV m
stream line that passes through P(4, 2, 1) is
and y = -3
(A) -24u y V m
(B) 0.56 u x - 2.23u y + 2.8 u z kV m
22.
16. Uniform line charge of 20 nC m and -20 nC m are

located in the x = 0 plane at y = 3
(A) 0.56 u x + 2.23u y - 2.8 u z kV m
128
x3
(B) x =
128
y3
64
x2
(D) x =
64
y2
(C) y =
23. A point charge 10 nC is located at origin. Four
17. Uniform line charges of 100 nC m lie along the
uniform line charge are located in the x = 0 plane as
entire extent of the three coordinate axes. The E at
follows : 40 nC m
at y = 1 and -5 m, -60 nC m
P(-3, 2, -1) is
y = -2 and - 4 m. The D at P(0, -3, 4) is
(A) -192
. u x + 2 u y - 108
. u z kV m
(A) -19.1u y + 25.5 u z pC m 2
(B) -0.96 u x + u y - 0.54 u z kV m
(B) 19.1u y - 25.5 u z pC m 2
(C) 0.96 u x - u y + 0.54 u z kV m
(C) -16.4 u y + 219

. u z pC m 2
(D) 192
. u x - 2 u y + 108
. u z kV m
(D) 16.4 u y - 219

. u z pC m 2
Page
470
www.gatehelp.com
at
Electrostatics
24. A point charge 20 nC
Chap 8.2
is located at origin. Four
31. A spherical surface of radius of 3 mm is centered at
uniform line charge are located as follows 40 nC m at
P(4, 1, 5) in free space. If D = xu x C m 2 the net electric
y = 1 and 50 nC m at y = 2. The electric flux that
flux leaving the spherical surface is
leaves the surface of a sphere, 4 m in radius, centered

at origin is
(A) 1.33 nC
(B) 1.89 mC
(C) 1.33 mC
(D) 1.89 mC
(A) 113.1 mC
(B) 339.3 nC
(C) 113.1 nC
(D) 452.4 nC
32. The electric flux density is
25. The cylindrical surface r = 8 C contains the surface

charge density, r s = 5 e
-20|z|
D=
nC m . The flux that leaves
the surface r = 8 cm, 1 cm < z < 5 cm
30 < f < 90 is
(A) 270.7 nC
(B) 9.45 nC
(C) 270.7 pC
(D) 9.45 pC
1
[10 xyzu x + 5 x 2 zu y + (2 z 3 - 5 x 2 y) u z ]
z2
The volume charge density r v at (-2, 3, 5) is

(A) 6.43
(B) 8.96
(C) 10.4
(D) 7.86
26. Let D = 4 xy u x + 2( x 2 + z 2 ) u y + 4 yzu z C m 2 . The

total charge enclosed in the rectangular parallelepiped
33. If D = 2ru r C m 2 , the total electric flux leaving the
0 < x < 2, 0 < y < 3, 0 < z < 5 m is
surface of the cube, 0 < x , y, z < 0.4 is
(A) 360 C
(B) 180 C
(A) 0.32
(B) 0.34
(C) 100 C
(D) 560 C
(C) 0.38
(D) 0.36
27. Volume charge density is located in free space as

rv = 2e
-1000 r
nC m
for 0 < r < 1 mm
and
rv = 0
34. If E = 4 u x - 3u y + 5 u z in the neighborhood of point

P(6, 2, -3). The incremental work done in moving 5 C
elsewhere. The value of Dr on the surface r = 1 mm is
charge a distance of 2 m in the direction u x + u y + u z is
(A) 1.28 pC m 2
(B) 0.28 pC m 2
(A) -60 J
(B) 34.64 J
(C) 0.78 pC m 2
(D) 0.32 pC m 2
(C) -34.64 J
(D) 60 JJ
and 4 carry uniform
35. If E = 100 u r V m , the incremental amount of work
charge densities of 20 nC m and -4 nC m . The Dr at
done in moving a 60 mC charge a distance of 2 mm from
2 < r < 4 is
P(1, 2, 3) toward Q(2, 1, 4) is
28. Spherical surfaces at r = 2

2
(A) -
16
nC m 2
r2
(B)
80
(C) 2 nC m 2
r
16
nC m 2
r2
80
(D) - 2 nC m 2
r
+ 6 z 3u z C m 2 . The total charge enclosed in the volume

0 < x, y , z < a is
5 4
a
3
(B) a 5 + 6 a 4
(C) 6 a 5 + a 4
(D)
(B) 3.1 mJ
(C) -31
. mJ
(D) 0
36. A 10 C charge is moved from the origin to P(3, 1, -1)
29. Given the electric flux density, D = 2 xyu x + x 2 u y
(A) 6 a 5 +
(A) -5.4 mJ
5 5
a + 6a4
3
in the field E = 2 xu x - 3 y 2 u y + 4 u z V m along the

straight line path x = -3 y, y = x + 2 z. The amount of
energy required is
(A) -40 J
(B) 20 J
(C) -20 J
(D) 40 J
37. A uniform surface charge density of 30 nC m 2 is

present on the spherical surface r = 6 mm in free space.
30. Let D = 5 x y z u y . The flux enclosed by volume
The V AB between A ( r = 2 cm, q = 35 , f = 55 )
x = 3 and 3.1, y = 1 and 1.1, and z = 2 and 2.1 is
( r = 3 cm, q = 40 , f = 90 ) is
(A) 49.6
(B) 24.8
(A) 2.03 V
(B) 10.17 V
(C) 35.4
(D) 36.4
(C) 4.07 mV
(D) -10.17 V
www.gatehelp.com
and B
Page
471
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
38. A point charge is located at the origin in free space.
(A) -4.94 nC
(B) -4.86 nC
The work done in carrying a charge 10 C from point A
(C) -5.56 nC
(D) -3.68 nC
( r = 4, q = p 6 , f = p 4) to B( r = 4, q = p 3 , p 6) is
(A) 0.45 mJ
(B) 0.32 mJ
(C) -0.45 mJ
(D) 0
46. A dipole having

Qd
= 100 V m 2
4 pe o
39. Let a uniform surface charge density of 5 nC m 2 be

present at the z = 0 plane, a uniform line charge density
of 8 nC m be located at x = 0, z = 4 and a point charge
of 2 mC be present at P(2, 0, 0). If V = 0 at A(0, 0, 5),
the V at B(1, 2, 3) is
(A) 10.46 kV
(B) 1.98 kV
(C) 0.96 kV
(D) 3.78 kV
is located at the origin in free space and aligned so

that its moment is in the u z direction. The E at point
( r = 1, 45 , f = 0) is
(A) 158.11 V m
(B) 194.21 V m
(C) 146.21 V m
(D) 167.37 V m
47. A dipole located at the origin in free space has a

40. A non uniform linear charge density, r L = 6 ( z + 1)
moment p = 2 10 -9 u z C.m. The points at which | E|q = 1
nC m lies along the z axis. The potential at P(r = 1, 0, 0)
mV m on line y = z, x = 0 are
in free space is ( V = 0)
(A) y = z = 23.35
(B) y = z = 16.5, x = 0
(C) y = z = 16.5
(D) y = 0, z = 23.35, x = 0
(A) 0 V
(B) 216 V
(C) 144 V
(D) 108 V
48. A dipole having a moment p = 3u x - 5 u y + 10 u z
41. The annular surface, 1 cm < r < 3 cm carries the
nC.m is located at P(1, 2, -4) in free space. The V at Q
nonuniform surface charge density r s = 5r nC m . The V
(2, 3, 4) is
at P(0, 0, 2 cm) is
(A) 81 mV
(B) 90 mV
(C) 63 mV
(D) 76 mV
42. If V = 2 xy 2 z 3 + 3 ln( x 2 + 2 y 2 + 3z 2 ) in free space the

magnitude of electric field E at P (3, 2, -1) is
(A) 72.6 V/m
(B) 79.6 V/m
(C) 75 V/m
(D) 70.4 V/m
V. The volume charge density at r = 0.6 m is

(B) -1.79 nC m 3
(C) 1.22 nC m 3
(D) -1.22 nC m 3
(B) 1.26 V
(C) 2.62 V
(D) 2.52 V
49. A potential field in free space is expressed as

V = 40 xyz . The total energy stored within the cube
1 < x, y, z < 2 is
43. It is known that the potential is given by V = 70 r 0 .6

(A) 1.79 nC m 3
(A) 1.31 V
(A) 1548 pJ
(B) 0
(C) 774 pJ
(D) 387 pJ
50. Four 1.2 nC point charge are located in free space at

the corners of a square 4 cm on a side. The total
potential energy stored is
44. The potential field V = 80 r 2 cos q V. The volume
(A) 1.75 mJ
(B) 2 mJ
(C) 3.5 mJ
(D) 0
charge density at point P(2.5, q = 30 , f = 60 ) in free

51. Given the current density
space is
(A) -2.45 nC m 3
(C) -1.42 nC m
(B) 1.42 nC m 3
(D) 2.45 nC m
J = 10 5[sin (2 x) e -2 yu x + cos (2 x) e -2 yu y ] kA m 2
The total current crossing the plane y = 1 in the
45. Within the cylinder r = 2, 0 < z < 1 the potential is
u y direction in the region 0 < x < 1, 0 < z < 2 is
given by V = 100 + 50r + 150r sin f V. The charge lies
(A) 0
(B) 12.3 mA
within the cylinder is
(C) 24.6 mA
(D) 6.15 mA
Page
472
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
64. In a certain region where the relative permitivity is
69. A potential field exists in a region where e = f ( x). If
2.4, D = 2 u x - 4 u y + 5 u z nC m 2 . The polarization is
r v = 0, the 2 V is
1 dF V
(A) f ( x) dx x
(A) 2.8 u x - 5.6 u y + 7 u z nC m 2

(B) 3.4 u x - 6.9 u y + 8.6 u z nC m 2
(C) 1.2 u x - 2.3u y + 2.9 u z nC m 2
(C)
(D) 3.89 u x - 6.43u y + 8.96 u z nC m 2

65. Medium 1 has the electrical permitivity e1 = 15
. eo
and occupies the region to the left of x = 0 plane.
Medium 2 has the electrical permitivity e 2 = 2.5 e o and
occupies the region to the right of x = 0 plane. If E1 in
medium 1 is E1 = (2 u x - 3u y + 1u z ) V m
then E2
in
(B) f ( x)
1 df V
f ( x) dx x
(D) -f ( x)
where r v = 0. It is know that both Ex and V are zero at

the origin. The V ( x, y) is
(A) 3( x 2 - y 2 )
(B) 3( y 2 - x 2 )
(C) 4 x 2 - 3 y 2
(D) 4 y 2 - 3 x 2
(A) (2.0 u x - 1.8 u x + 0.6 u z ) V m

(B) (1.67 u x - 3u y + u z ) V m
(C) (1.2 u x - 3u y + u z ) V m
(D) (1.2 u x - 1.8 u y + 0.6 u z ) V m
*********
66. Two perfect dielectrics have relative permitivities

e r1 = 2 and e r 2 = 8. The planner interface between them
is the surface x - y + 2 z = 5. The origin lies in region 1.
If E1 = 100 u x + 200 u y - 50 u z V m then E2 is
(A) 400 u x + 800 u y - 200 u z V m
(B) 400 u x + 200 u y - 50 u z V m
(C) 25 u x + 200 u y - 50 u z V m
(D) 125 u x + 175 u z V m
67. The two spherical surfaces r = 4 cm and r = 9 cm are
for
u r then E2
4 < r < 6 and e r 2 = 5 for 6 < r < 9. If E1 = 1000
r2
is
(A)
5000
ur V m
r2
(B)
400
ur V m
r2
(C)
2500
ur V m
r2
(D)
2000
ur V m
r2
68. The surface x = 0 separate two perfect dielectric. For

x > 0,
let
e r1 = 3,
while
er 2 = 5
where
x < 0.
If
E1 = 80 u x - 60 u y - 40 u z V m then E2 is
(A) (133.3u x - 100 u z - 66.7 u z ) V m
(B) (133.3u x - 60 u z - 40 u z ) V m
(C) ( 48 u x - 36 u y - 24 u z ) V m
(D) ( 48 u x - 60 u y - 40 u z ) V m
Page
474
df V
dx x
70. If V ( x, y) = 4 e 2 x + f ( x) - 3 y 2 in a region of free space
medium 2 is
separated by two perfect dielectric shells, e r1 = 2
df V
dx x
www.gatehelp.com
Electrostatics
SOLUTIONS
1. (C) F2 =
=
f = tan -1
= 65.9 cos 56.3 + 148.3 sin 56.3 = 159.7
(4, 4), (-4, 4), (4, -4), (-4, 4), the fifth charge will be on
the z-axis at location z = 4 2. By symmetry, the force on
the fifth charge will be z
directed, and will be four
times the z component
q2
4 pe o d 2
(5 10 -9) 2
= 10 -2 N
4 p ( 8.85 10 -12 )( 8 10 -3) 2
2
= -65.9 sin 56.3 + 148.3 cos 56.3 = 27.4 ,

Ez = -49.4
7. (C) Ep =
2 10 -8
4 pe o
R1
2R 2
- |R |3 + |R |3
1
2
R 2 = (0, 2, 1) - (0, 0, 0) =(0, 2, 1)

- (2 u y + 0.5 u z ) 2(2 u y + u z )
Ep = 9 10 9 10 -8
+
( 4.25) 3 2
( 5)3 2
E p = 54.9 u y + 44.1u z
3. (D) The force will be

( 40 10 -9) 2 R CA
R DA
R BA
F=
+
+
3
3
3
4 pe o
|R CA| |R DA| |R BA|
where R CA = u x - u y , R DA = u x + u y , R BA = 2 u x
F=
Ef = E r u f = 65.9( u x u f) + 148.3 ( u y u f)
R1 = (0, 2, 1) -(0, 0, 0.5) =(0, 2, 0.5)
|R CA|=|R DA|= 2,
12
= 56.3, and z = 2
8
Er = Ep u p = 65.9( u x u r) + 148.3 ( u y u r)
2. (D) Arranging the charge in the xy plane at location
4 u x + 9 u y - 3u z
(106) 3 / 2
Then at point P, r = 8 2 + 12 2 = 14.4,
= ( 4.32 u x + 5.76 u y) mN
2 10 -6
4 pe o
= 65.9 u x + 148.3u y - 49.4 u z
Q1Q2 R12
4 pe o |R12|3
( 4 10 -6 )( -5 10 -6 ) ( 3u x + 4 u y)
4 pe o
53
F=
Chap 8.2
|R BA|= 2
u x - u y u x + u y 2u x
( 40 10 -9) 2
+
+
-9
4 p ( 8.85 10 ) 2 2
8
2 2
At P, r = 5 , q = cos -1
1
5
= 63.4 and f = 90
So Er = E p u r = 54.9[ u y u r ] + 44.1[ u z u r ]
= 54.9 sin q sin f + 44.1 cos q = 68.83
Eq = E r u q = 54.9[ u y u q ] + 44.1[ u z u q ]
= 54.9 cos q sin f + 44.1 ( - sin q) = -14.85
Ef = Er u f = 54.9( u y u f) + 44.1( u z u f) =54.9 cos f = 0
= 1376
. u x mN
8. (A) Let a point on y axis be P(0, y, 0)
10 -9 41R13
45R 23
4. (C) E =
+
2
|R 23|2
4 pe o |R13|
Ep =
R13 = -3u x + 4 u y - 4 u z ,
R 23 = 4 u x - 2 u y + 5 u z
41( -3u x + 4u y - 4u z 45( 4u x + -2u y + 5u z

E = 9 10 9 10 -9
+
( 41) 3 / 2
( 45) 3 / 2
= 1152
.
u x + 2.93u y + 1089
.
uz
5. (D) The point is P3(0, y, 0)
R13 = -4 u x + ( y + 2) u y - 7 u z ,
R12 = 3u x + ( y - 4) u y + 2 u z
Ex =
10 -9
25 ( -4)
60 3
+
4 pe o [ 65 + ( y + 2) 2 ]3 2
[13 + ( y - 4) 2 ]3 2
To obtain Ex = 0,
0.48 y 2 + 1392
. y + 7312
. =0
which yields the two value y = -6.89, - 22.11

6. (B) Ep =
2 10 -6 R AP
4 pe o |R AP|3
20 10 -8
4 pe o
R1
R2
-|R |3 - |R |3
1
2
R1 = (0, y, 0) - (3, 0, 0) =(-3, y, 0)

R 2 = (0, y 0) - (-3, 0, 0) = (3, y, 0),
|R1 | = |R 2 | =
9 + y2
-3u x + yu y 3u x + yu y
+
Ep = 20 10 -9 9 10 9
2 3
( 9 + y 2 ) 3
( 9 + y )
-1080 u x
1080
, |E| = =
=
2 32
(9 + y )
(9 + y 2 ) 3 2
9. (B) The field at P will be
Q -2 u x + 2 u y - u z
Ep = 0
, Ez = 1 kV m
4 pe o
93 2
Q0 = -4 pe o 9 3 2 10 3 = -3 m C
10. (C) This will be 8 times the integral of r n over the
first octant
www.gatehelp.com
Page
475
UNIT 8
Q = 8
6 u x - 3u y 6 u x + 3u y
EP = 20nC 2 9 10 9
36 + 9
36 + 9
r oe - x - y- z dxdydz = 8ro
11. (C) Q =
2p
= -48u y V m
0 .05
0.2 r sin q drd qdf

2
0 .03
r3
= 4 p(0.2) = 82.1 pC
3 0 .03
12. (A) Q =
-p 0
e
=5
R xp = ( -3, 0, - 1, ) - ( -3, 0, 0, ) = (0, 2, -1)

Similarly R yp = (-3, 0, -1), R zp = (-3, 2, 0)
5 e -0 .1 r( p-|f|)
z 2 + 10
10
-0 .1 r
R xp
R yp
R zp
+
+
3
3
3
|R xp| |R yp| |R zp|
rL
2 pe o
17. (B) EP =
0 .05
- p 10
Electromagnetics
( -0.1 - 1)
( -0.101)
(0.1) 2
0
Ep = 100 10 -9 2 9 10 -9
2u y - u z -3u x - u z -3ux + 2u y
+
+
E p = 100 10 -9 2 9 10 -9
5
10
13
2p
( p - f) dz
2
+ 10
0 z
= -0.96 u x + u y - 0.54 u z kV m
p2 dz
- z + 10
Q = 5 26.4
18. (C) At y = 4, E =
z
1
= 5 26.4 p2
tan -1
= 129
. mC
10 -
10
dF = dqE = r L dzE
r 2L dzu y
F=
2 pe o
13. (A)
f = 10
1 .1 p 25 5
( r - 4)( r - 5) sin q sin 2 r
0 .9p 0 4
25
1 .1 p
r 5 9 r 4 20 r 3 1
1
f
= 10 +
2 q - 4 sin 2 q -2 cos 2
5
4
3
0 .9p
4
0
= 10 [ -3.39 ][0.0266 ][0.626 ] = 0.57 C
( 6) = 18.75 u y mN
r s dS R - R
4 pe o |R - R|3
19. (A) E =
sin q drdqdf
rL
uy ,
2 pe o
where R = 3u x and R = yu y + zu z ,
2
3u x - yu y - zuz
r
dydz
EPA = L
4 pe o - -2 (9 + y 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
Due to odd function
Rp
r
,
14. (D) Ep = L
2 pe o |R p|2
EPA =
R p = (1, 2, 3) - (1, -2, 5) = (0, 4, -2)
So there is only x component.
|R |
p
= 20,
5 10 -9
Ep =
2 pe o
4u y - 2u z
= 18 u y - 9 u z
20
15. (C) With z = 0, the general field is

Ez = 0 =
r L ( y + 2) u y - 5 u z
2 pe o ( y + 2) 2 + 25
we require |E2 | = |2E y|

So 2 ( y + 2) = 5
E=
y=
1
2
6.25 2.5 u y - 5 u z
= 9 u y - 18 u z
2 pe o 6.25 + 25
rL
4 pe o
- -2
3u x dydz
(9 + y 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
20. (D) There will be z component of E only

R = zu z , R = ru r ,
Ez , Pa =
rs
4 pe o
2 p 0 .2
R - R = zu z - ru z
zrdrdf
2
+ r 2)3 2
(z
0
0 .2
2pr s z
rz 1
1
1
=
= s 2 2
2
2
eo z
4 pe o z + r
z + 0.04
0
Ez =
rs
eo
z
1 2
z + 0.04
, at z = 0.5, Ez = 20.2 V m
21. (A) Since charge sheet are infinite, the field

magnitude associated with each one will be r s 2 e o ,
which is position independent. The field direction will
r
16. (C) Ep = L
2 pe o
R+ Q
R- Q
2
2
|R + Q| |R - Q|
R+ Q = (6, 0, 6) - (0, 3, 6) = (6, -3, 0)

R- Q = (6, 0, 6) - (0, -3, 6) = (6, 3, 0)
Page
476
depend on which side of a given sheet one is positioned.

10 10 -9
40 10 -9
50 10 -9
EA =
ux uy uz
2 eo
2 eo
2 eo
= 0.56 u x + 2.23u y - 2.8 u z

www.gatehelp.com
Electrostatics
22. (A)
dy E y -15 x 2 y -3 y
=
=
=
5 x3
dx Ex
x
dy
3dx
=y
3
At P, 2 =
C1
43
a a
ln y = -3 ln x ln C y =
C1 = 128
Chap 8.2
y =
C1
,
x3
128
x3
-x
a a
= a4 + 0 -
a
a
+
+ 0 + 6a5 = a4 + 6a5
3
3
of
D y
y
= 20 x 4 y 3z 4
cube
=(3.05
1.05
2.05)
and
Volume
V = (0.1) 3 = 0.001
f = 20 ( 305
. ) 4 (105
. ) 3 (2.05) 3 (2.05) 4 0.001 =35.4
24. (C) h1 = 2 4 2 - 1 = 7.75,
31. (C) F = ( D ) Dv
h2 = 2 4 2 - 1 = 6.93
QT = 2 7.75 40n + 2 6.93 50 + 20n =1.33 mC
Top
30. (C) D =
Center
Botoom
Right
D = -19.1u y + 25.5 u z pC m 2
a a
dxdz + x 2 dxdz + -6(0) 3 dxdy + 6a 3dxdy

0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
1
4
4244
3 1
4243 1
442443 1
4
4244
3
Left
at that point. Thus D arises from the point charge alone

10 10 -9 ( -3u y + 4 u z )
,
D=
( 32 + 4 2 )1 .5
4p
a a
arrangement of line charges, whose field will all cancel
0 .05 90
Back
Front
a a
23. (A) This point lies in the center of a symmetric
25. (D) Q =
a a
29. (C) Q = D n dS = 2 aydydz + -2(0) dydz

S
0 0
0 0
1
4 24 3 1
44244
3
( x) 4
3
. nC
p(0.003) = 1131
x 3
10 y
2 + 10 x 2 y
=8.96
32. (B) r v = D =
+ 0 +
z3
( -2 , 3, 5)
5 e -20 z (0.08) dfdz nC
0 .01 30
0 .05
p p
1 -20 z
= - (5)(0.08) e
2 6
20
0 .01
33. (C) D =
= 9.45 10 -3 nC = 9.45 pC
D dv = 6 (0.4)
26. (A) Out of the 6 surface only 2 will contribute to the

net outward flux. The y component of D will penetrate
the surface y = 0 and y = z and net flux will be zero. At
x = 0 plane Dx = 0 and at z = 0 plane Dz = 0.
This leaves the 2 remaining surfaces at x = 2 and z = 5.
The net outward flux become
5 3
f = D x = 2 u x dydz +
0 0
2p p
x =2
u z dzdy
0 0
-r e
Q = 8 p
1000
2 -1000 r
-1000 r
2 e -1000 r ( -1000 r - 1)
1000(1000) 2
0
Q = 4 10 -9nC,
Dr =
4.0 10 -9
Q
= 0.32 C m 2
=
2
4 pr
4 p (0.001) 2
28. (C) 4 pr Dr = 4 p(2 ) 20 10

2
Dr =
80
nC m 2
r2
= -5( 4 u x - 3u y + 5 u z )
=-
10
3
( u x + u y + u z )(2)
3
( 4 - 3 + 5) = -34.64 J
( u x - u y + u z )(2 10 -3)
= -( 60 10 -6 ) 100 u r
r 2 sin q drdqdf
0 .001
34. (C) dW = - qE dL
(2, 1, 4) - (7, 2, 3) = (1, -1, 1)

ux - u y + uz
, dW = - qE dL
u PQ =
3
0 .001
= 0.38
35. (B) The vector in this direction is
0 0
0 .001
2e
3 2
= 5 4(2) ydy + 2 4(5) ydy = 360 C.
27. (D) Q =
1 d 2
( r 2 r) = 6 ,
r 2 dr
-9
Cm ,
= - 12
10 -6
3
( u r u x - u r u y)
2
At r , f = tan -1 = 63.4
1
u r u x = cos 63.4 = 0.447,
u r u y = sin 63.4 = 0.894
dW = 31
. mJ
36. (A) W = - q E dL
www.gatehelp.com
Page
477
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
= -10 (2 xu x - 3 y 2 u y + 4 u z ) ( dxu x + dyu y + dzu z )

3
-1
18 z
-6 xy 2 z 2 + 2
uz
2
2
x
+
y
+
z
2
3
= -10 2 xdx + 10 3 y 2 dy - 10 4 dz = -40 J
. u z V m,
Ep = 7.1u x + 22.8 u y - 711
|E|= 75 V m
37. (D) rA = 2 cm, rB = 3 cm

V ( r) =
43. (D) E = -V = -
Q
4 pa 2r s ( 6 10 -3) 2 30 10 -9
=
=
4 pe o r
4 pe o r
8.85 10 -12 r
= -42 r -0 .4 u r V m,
0.122
0.122 0.122
, V AB = V A - VB =
V ( r) =
=
= 2.03
r
0.02
0.03
38. (D) W = -
Q1Q2
4 pe o
rB
rA
dr Q1Q2
=
r 2 4 pe o
D = e oE = -42 r -0 .4 e o u r C m 2
1 d 2
1 d
e
rv = D = 2
( r Dr ) = 2
( -42 e o r 1 .6 )= - 67.2 1o.4
r dr
r dr
r
1
1
r - r
B
A
At r = 0.6 m,
rv = -
rA = rB , W = 0
39. (B) VP ( s) =
Q
,
4pe o r
r L dr
r
+ C1 = - L ln r + C1
2 pe or
2 pe o
Vs ( z) = -
rs
rz
dz + C2 = s + C2
2 eo
2 eo
D = e oE = -80 e o (2 r cos q u r - r sin q u q)

1 2 2
rv = D = 2
( r Dr ) +
( Dr sin q)
r sin q q
r r
Here r , r , z are the scalar distance from the charge.

r = 2 2 + 5 2 = 29 , r = (5 - 4) 2 = 1 , z = 5
By putting these value. C = -193
. 10 3
2
r = 12 ` + 12 = 2 , z = 3,
40. (D) Vr =
1
r v = eo
(rEr) +
Ef
r f
r r
(50 + 150 sin f)
150 sin f
50e o
= e o +
=C m2
r
r
r
1 2p 2
Q =
R = zu z , R = ru r, dS = rdrdf,
Vr =
0 .01
(5 10 -9)r 2 drdf
4 pe o r 2 + z 2
z2
5 10 -9 r
2
2
r
+
z
ln (r + r 2 + z 2 )
2 eo
2
2
0 .01
At z = 0.02, Vp = 0.081 V
0 0
50 e o
rdrdfdz = - 2 p(50) e o 2 = -5.56 nC
r
46. (A) V =
42. (C) E = -V
6x
= - 2 y 2 z 2 + 2
ux
2
2
x + 2 y + 3z
12 y
- 4 xyz 3 + 2
uy
2
2
x + 2 y + 3z
Qd cos q 100 cos q

,
=
4 pe o r 2
r2
1 V
V
E = -V = -
ur +
uq
r
r
Page
478
,
0 .03
Vp =
1 V
V
ur uf
r
r f
D = e o E, r v = D = e o E
r s dS
41. (A) Vr =
,
4 pe o|R - R|
2 p 0 .03
r V = -320 e o cos q = -2.45 nC m 3
= -(50 + 150 sin f) u r - (150 cos f) u f ,
VB = 198
. kV
6 10 -9 dz
r L dz
=
= 108 V
4 ( 2 1) 3 2
oR
- pe o z +
4 pe
1
12 sin q cos q
r v = -80 e o 2 3r 2 cos q
r sin q
r
45. (C) E = -V = -
At point N, r = (2 - 1) + 2 + z = 14
2
V
1 V
ur uq
r
r q
= -160 r cos q u r + 80 r sin q u q V m
Q
r
r
- L ln r - s z + C
4 pe o r 2 pe o
2 pe o
V =
67.2 8.85 10 -12

= -1.22 nC m 3
(0.6)1 .4
44. (A) E = -V = -
Vl (r) = -
dV
u r = -(0.6)(70) r -0 .4 u r
dr
100
(2 cos q u r + sin q u q),
r3
|E| = 100( 4 cos 2 q + sin 2 q)1 2

47. (A) E =
www.gatehelp.com
= 100
5
= 158.11 V m
2
2 10 -9
[2 cos q u r + sin q u q ],
4 pe o r 3
Electrostatics
55. (A) I = J n z = 0 .2 dS
y = z lies at q = 45
2 10 -9 1
= 10 -3
Eq =
4 pe o r 3 2
(required)
=
r 3 = 12.73 10 3, r = 23.35
56. (B) So Eal = Est =
Solving
4 pe o (1 + 1 + 8 2 )1 .5
1
1
49. (A) E = -V = 40 2 u x +
uy +
uz
2
2
x
yz
xy
z
xyz
E Edv
2
J al =
sac
J st
sst
J st = 3.2 10 5 A m 2
57. (B) J =
We = 800 e o
J al J st
=
sal sst
I = p(2 10 -3) J st + p[( 4 10 -3) 2 - (2 10 -3) 2 ]J al = 80
( 3u x - 5 u y + 10 u z ) ( u x + u y + 8 u z ) 10 -9
=1.31 V
eo
2
0 .4
40
40
rdrdf =
log[r 2 + (0.1) 2 ] (2 p)
2
2
r + (0.1)
2
0
= 40 p log 17 = 356 A
where R - R = Q - P = (1, 1, 8)
We =
2 p 0 .4
P (R - R)
48. (A) V =
4 pe o|R - R|3
So VP =
Chap 8.2
E=
4
u r A m2,
2prl
4
12.73
J
ur V m
=
=
s 2 prls
rl
3
12.73
12.73 5
6.51
V
u r u rdr =
ln
=
l
r
l
3
l
3
V = - E dL =
1
1
1
x 4 y 2 z 2 + x 2 y 4 z 2 + x 2 y 2 z 4 dxdydz
V 6.51 1.63
R=
=
=
W
I
4l
r
= 1548 pJ
V
1 V
V
58. (D) E = -V = -
ur +
uf +
u z
r f
z
r
(r + 1) 2
= -z 2 cos f u r +
z sin f u f - 2(r + 1) z cos f u z
r
1 4
50. (A) W = qn Vn
2 n =1
V1 = V21 + V31 + V41 =
q 1
1
1
+
+
4 pe o 0.04 0.04 0.04 2
E = -1.82 u f + 14.5 u f - 2.67 u z V m

E E
r s = eo E n s = eo
|E|
V1 = V2 = V3 = V4
W =
2 (1.2 10 -9) 2
1
( 4) q1 V1 =
4 pe o (0.04)
2
51. (B) I = J n
=
10
r s = e o 1.82 2 + 14.5 2 + 2.67 2 = 1315

. pC m 2
2 1
y =1
2 1
. mJ
2 + 2 = 175
dS = J u y
0 0
y =1
dxdz
59. (C) V =
cos (2 x) 2 -2 y dxdz = 12307 kA = 12.3 MA
p
p
sin
3
2 = 2.5 V
23
40 cos
So the equation of the surface is

40 cos q sin f
= 2.5, 16 cos q sin f = r 3
r2
0 0
52. (C) I = J n dS
S
60. (A) E = -V, D = eE = - e oV
2 p 0 .3p
800 sin q
(0.80) 2 sin q dqdf =154.8 A
2
+
(
0
.
80
)
4
0 .1 p
53. (D) F = ma = qE,

a=
qE ( -1.602 10 -19)( -4 106 )

=
u z = 7.0 1017 u z m s 2 ,
m
9.11 10 -3
v = at = 7.0 10 tu z m s
17
54. (D)
=
r V
1
J z
= - J =
(rJ r) +
t
r r
z
1
-20
(25) +
=0
r r
z r 2 + 0.01
x
200 x
ux + 2
u z C m2
= -e o 200 z
2
(
)
x
x
+
4
x
+
4
200 e o x
D (z= 0 ) = - 2
u z C m2,
x +4
r s = D u z z= 0 =
Q=
-3
- 200 e o x
C m2,
x2 + 4
2
1
- 200 e o x
dxdy = -( 3)(200) e o ln[ x 2 + 4 ]
2
x2 + 4
0
= - 300 ln 2 = - 1.84 nC
www.gatehelp.com
Page
479
UNIT 8
61. (B) E = -V ,
-3 xy 2 z 3 satisfy this equation.
62. (D) The plane can be replaced by -60 nC at Q (2, 5,

-6).
Electromagnetics
Since E is normal to the surface

e
2 1000
400
En 2 = r1 En 1 =
ur = 2 ur V m
r2
r
er 2
5
R = (5, 3, 1) - (2, 4, 6) = (3, -1, -5)
68. (D) D n 1 = D n 2
R = (5, 3, 1)-(2, 4, -6) = (3, -1, 7),
D n 1 = 80 3e o = D n 2 = 5 e oEn 1 ,
|R |= 35 , |R|= 59
E2 = 48 u x - 60 u y - 40 u z
VP =
q
q
q 1
1
=
4 pe o R 4 pe o R 4 pe o 35
59
-9
Vp = 60 10 9 10
-9
rL
2p eo
0 = ( - f ( x)V )
dF V
2V
2V
2V
=-
+ f ( x) 2 + f ( x) 2 + f ( x) 2
x
y
z
dx x
Final Distance from the charge

rL
ln
2 pe o Initial Distance from the charge
1
12 + (2 - 1) 2
12 + (2 - (-2)) 2
12 + 32
- ln
- ln
ln + ln
1
1
1
2
= 2.40 kV
64. (C) P = D - e oE = D -
. e o = 2.5 e o En 2
= 2 15
Et1 = Et 2 ,
D D
= ( e r - 1)
er er
e1E N1 = e 2E N 2
En 1 = - 817
.
1
6
f ( x1 ) = -4 e 2 x + 3 x 2 + C, f (0, 1) = -4 + C2
V (0, 0) = 0 = 4 + f (0)
f ( x) = -4 e
C2 = 0. f (0) = -4
+ 3x ,
2x
- 4 e2 x + 3 x 2 - 3 y 2 = 3 ( x 2 - y 2 )
[u x - u y + 2u z ]
*********
Et1 = Et 2 and D n 1 = D n 2
e r1 e oEn 1 = e r 2 e oEn 2
e
1
1
= r1 En 1 = E n 1 , E2 = Et 2 + En 1
er 2
4
4
= 133.3 u x + 166.7 u y + 16.67 u z - 8.33 u x + 8.33 u y - 16.67 u z
= 125 u x + 175 u y V m
67. (B) D n 1 = D n 2 ,
Page
480
[100 - 200 - 100 ] = -817

. Vm
Et1 = E1 - En 1 = 133.3u x + 166.7 u z + 16.67 u z
En 2
2x
V ( x, y) = 4 e
= -33.33u x + 33.33u y - 66.67 u z V m
2 V = 0,
Integrating again
66. (D) The unit vector that is normal to the surface is

u x - u y + 2u z
F
,
uN =
=
|F|
6
1
It follow that C1 = 0
En 2 = 12
.
E2 = 1.2 u x - 3u y + 1u z
En 1 = E1 u N =
70. (A) r v = 0
2 f
- 6 =0
x 2
f
f
= -16 e 2 x + 6
= - 8 e 2 x + 6 x + C1
x
x
V
f
Ex =
= 8 e2 x +
x
x
f
f
Ex (0) = 8 +
=0
= -8
x x = 0
x x = 0
P = 12
. u x - 2.3u y + 2.9 u z nC m 2
65. (C) D n 1 = D n 2
dF V
=-
+ f ( x) 2 V
dx x
1 dF V
2V = f ( x) dx x
2 V = 16 e2 x +
(2.4 - 1) 10 -9
2.4
P = (2 u x - 4 u y + 5 u z )
e r1 e oEn 1 = e r 2 e oEn 2
En1 = 48
D = r v = 0 = ( - f ( x)V )
1
1
35 - 59 = 21 V
V0 = 0,
Vp = -
D = eE
69. (A) D = eE = - f ( x)V ,
63. (A) Using method of images

Vp - V0 = -
and Et1 = Et 2 ,
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics

An infinite filament on the z-axis carries 10 mA in
In the cylindrical region
the u z direction. Three uniform cylindrical current
2 r
+
for r 0.6
r 2
3
for r > 0.6
Hf =
r
Hf =
sheets are also present at 400 mA m at r = 1 cm, -250

mA m at r = 2 cm and 300 mA m at r = 3 cm.
9. The magnetic field H f at r = 0.5 cm is
(A) 0.32 A m
(B) 0.64 A m
15. The current density J for r < 0.6 mm is
(C) 1.36 mA m
(D) 0
(A) 2u z A m
(B) -2u z A m
(C) u z A m
(D) 0
10. The magnetic field H f at r = 15

. cm is
(A) 1.63 A m
(B) 0.37 A m
16. The current density J for r > 0.6 mm is
(C) 2.64 A m
(D) 0
(A) 2u z A m
(B) -3u z A m
(C) 3u z A m
(D) 0
11. The magnetic field H f at r = 3.5 cm is

(A) 0.14 A m
(C) 0.27 A m
(B) 0.56 A m
17.
(D) 0.96 A m
v = ( 3u x + 12 u y - 4 u z ) 10
An
electron
5
with
velocity
m s experiences no net
forces at a point in a magnetic field B = u x + 2 u y + 3u z

mWb m 2 . The electric field E at that point is
In the fig. P8.3.1214 The region 0 z 2 is filled
(A) -4.4 u x + 1.3u y + 0.6 u z kV m
with an infinite slab of magnetic material (m r = 2.5). The
(B) 4.4 u x - 1.3u y - 0.6 u z kV m
surface of the slab at z = 0 and z = 2, respectively, carry
(C) -4.4 u x + 1.3u y + 0.6 u z kV m
surface current 30u x A m and -40u x as shown in fig.
(D) 4.4 u x - 1.3u y - 0.6 u z kV m
18. A point charge of 2 10 -16 C and 5 10 -26 kg is
mo
z=2
-40ux A/m
moving in the combined fields B = - 3u x + 2 u y - u z mT

and E = 100 u x - 200 u y + 300 u z V m. If the charge
velocity at t = 0 is v(0) = (2 u x - 3u y - 4 u z ) 10 5 m s, the
mr = 2.5
mo
z=0
30ux A/m
Fig. P8.3.1214
12. In the region 0 < z < 2 the H is

(A) -35u y A m
(B) 35u y A m
(C) -5u y A m
(D) 5u y A m
acceleration of charge at t = 0 is
(A) 600[ 3u x + 2 u y - 3u z ]10 9 m s 2
(B) 400[ 6 u x + 6 u y - 3u z ]10 9 m s 2
(C) 400[ 6 u x - 6 u y + 3u z ]10 9 m s 2
(D) 800[ 6 u x + 6 u y - u z ]10 9 m s 2
19. An electron is moving at velocity v = 4.5 10 7 u y
13. In the region z < 0 the H is

(A) 5u y A m
(B) -5u y A m
(C) 10u y A m
(D) -10u y A m
14. In the region z > 2 the H is

(A) 5u y A m
(B) -5u y A m
(C) 35u y A m
(D) -35u y A m
Page
482
m s along the negative y-axis. At the origin, it

encounters the uniform magnetic field B = 2 .5 u z mT,
and remains in it up to y = 2.5 cm. If we assume that the
electron remains on the y axis while it is in the
magnetic field, at y = 50 cm the x and z coordinate are
respectively
(A) 1.23 m, 0.23 m
(B) -1.23 m, -0.23 m
(C) -11.7 cm, 0
(D) 11.7 cm, 0
www.gatehelp.com
Magnetostatics
Chap 8.3
25. If the current filament is located at y = 0.5, z = 0,
A rectangular loop of wire in free space joins points
and u L = u x , then F is
A(1, 0, 1) to B(3, 0, 1) to C(3, 0, 4) to D(1, 0, 4) to A. The
(A) 35 .2 u y nN m
(B) 68.3u x nN m
wire carries a current of 6 mA flowing in the u z
(C) 105.6 u z nN m
(D) 0
direction from B to C. A filamentary current of 15 A

flows along the entire z, axis in the u z directions.
20. The force on side BC is
(A) -18u x nN
(B) 18u x nN
(C) 3.6 u x nN
(D) -3.6 u x nN
21. The force on side AB is

(A) 23.4 u z mN
(B) 16.4 u z mN
(C) 19.8 u z nN
(D) 26.3u z nN
(B) -36u x nN
(C) 54u x nN
(D) -54u x nN
fig.
P8.3.23.
The
magnetic
B = 6 xu x - 9 yu y + 3zu z Wb m 2 .
flux
The
(C) 4u x mN m
(D) -4u x mN m
27. The force exerted on the filament by the current
density
total
(B) -0.4 u x N m
A conducting current strip carrying K = 6 u z A m

lies in the x = 0 plane between y = 0.5 and y = 15
. m.
There is also a current filament of I = 5 A in the u z
direction on the z axis.
23. Consider the rectangular loop on z = 0 plane shown

in
(A) 0.4 u x N m
22. The total force on the loop is

(A) 36u x nN
26. Two infinitely long parallel filaments each carry 100

A in the u z direction. If the filaments lie in the plane
y = 0 at x = 0 and x = 5 mm, the force on the filament
passing through the origin is
is
force
experienced by the rectangular loop is
strip is
(A) 12.2 u y mN m
(B) 6.6 u y mN m
(C) -12.2 u y mN m
(D) -6.6 u y mN m
28. The force exerted on the strip by the filament is
y
2
5A
(A) -6.6 u y mN m
(B) 6.6 u y mN m
(C) 2.4 u x mN m
(D) -2.4 u x mN m
In a certain material for which m r = 6.5,

0
H = 10 u x + 25 u y - 40 u z A m
Fig. P8.3.23
(A) 30u z N
(B) -30u z N
(C) 36u z N
(D) -36u z N
29. The magnetic susceptibility c m of the material is

(A) 5.5
(C) 7.5
(B) 6.5
30. The magnetic flux density B is

Three uniform current sheets are located in free
(A) 82 u x + 204 u y - 327 u z mWb m 2
space as follows: 8u z A m at y = 0, -4u z A m at y = 1
(B) 82 u x + 204 u y - 327 u z mA m
and -4u z A m at y = -1. Let F be the vector force per
(C) 82 u x + 204 u y - 327 u z mT
meter length exerted on a current filament carrying 7
(D) 82 u x + 204 u y - 327 u z mA m
mA in the u L direction.
31. The magnetization M is
24. If the current filament is located at x = 0, y = 0.5
(A) 75 u x + 187.5 u y - 300 u z A m 2
and u L = u z , then F is
(B) 75 u x + 187.5 u y - 300 u z A m 2
(A) 35 .2 u y nN m
(B) -35 .2 u y nN m
(C) 55 u x + 137.5 u y - 220 u z A m 2
(C) 105.6 u y nN m
(D) 0
(D) 55 u x + 137.5 u y - 220 u z A m 2

www.gatehelp.com
Page
483
UNIT 8
32. The magnetic energy density is

(A) 19 mJ m
If H increases from 0 to 210 A m, the energy
(B) 9.5 mJ m
(C) 16.3 mJ m
Electromagnetics
stored per unit volume in the alloy is
(D) 32.6 mJ m 2
(A) 6.2 MJ m 3
(B) 1.3 MJ m 3
(C) 2.3 kJ m 3
(D) 2.9 kJ m 3

For a given material magnetic susceptibility
c m = 31
. and within which B = 0.4 yu z T.
(B) 151.6 yu z kA m
(C) 102.7 yu z kA m
(D) 77.6 yu z kA m
cube of size a, the magnetization volume current

density is
12
(A)
uz
a
33. The magnetic field H is

(A) 986.8 yu z kA m
40. If magnetization is given by H = 6a ( - yu x + xu y) in a
(C)
34. The magnetization M is
6
uz
a
(B)
6
( x - y)
a
(D)
3
( x - y)
a
41. The point P(2, 3, 1) lies on the planner boundary
(A) 241yu z kA m
(B) 318.2 yu z kA m
separating region 1 from region 2. The unit vector
(C) 163yu z kA m
u N12 = 0.6 u x + 0.48 u y + 0.64 u z is directed from region 1

to
35. In a material the magnetic field intensity is

H = 1200 A m when B = 2 Wb m 2 . When H is reduced to
400
A m,
B = 1.4
Wb m 2 .
The
change
in
the
magnetization M is
(A) 164 kA m
(B) 326 kA m
(C) 476 kA m
(D) 238 kA m
region
2.
If
m r1 = 2,
H1 = 100 u x - 300 u y + 200 u z A m, then H 2 is

(A) 40.3u x + 48.3u y - 178.9 u z A m
(B) 80.2 u x - 315.8 u y + 178.9 u z A m
(D) 80.2 u x + 48.3u y + 178.9 u z A m
each atom has a dipole moment of 2.6 10 -30 u y A m 2 .

The H in material is (m r = 4.2)
(A) 2.94 u y A m
(B) 0.22 u y A m
(C) 0.17 u y A m
(D) 2.24 u y A m
42. The plane separates air ( z > 0, m r = 1) from iron

( z 0, m r = 20). In air magnetic field intensity is
H = 10 u x + 15 u y - 3u z A m. The magnetic flux density
in iron is
(A) 5.02 u x + 7.5 u y - 0.076 u z mWb m 2
(B) 12.6 u x + 18.9 u y - 75.4 u z mWb m 2
37. In a material magnetic flux density is 0.02 Wb m 2
(C) 251u x + 377 u y - 377

. u z mWb m 2
and the magnetic susceptibility is 0.003. The magnitude
(D) 251u x + 377 u y - 1508 u z mWb m 2
of the magnetization is
(B) 23.4 A m
(C) 16.3 A m
(D) 8.4 A m
43. The plane 2 x + 3 y - 4 z = 1 separates two regions.

Let m r1 = 2 in region 1 defined by 2 x + 3 y - 4 z > 1, while
m r 2 = 5 in region 2 where 2 x + 3 y - 4 z < 1. In region
38. A uniform field H = - 600 u y A m exist in free space.
H1 = 50 u x - 30 u y + 20 u z A m. In region 2, H 2 will be
The total energy stored in spherical region 1 cm in
(A) 63.4 u x + 4318

. u y - 19.4 u z A m
radius centered at the origin in free space is
(B) 52.9 u x - 25.66 u y + 14.2 u z A m
(A) 0.226 J m
(B) 1.452 J m
(C) 1.68 J m 3
(C) 48.6 u x - 16.4 u y - 46.3u z A m
(D) 0.84 J m 3
39. The magnetization curve for an iron alloy is

approximately given by
B=
Page
484
1
H + H 2 mWb m 2
3
and
(C) 40.3u x - 315.8 u y - 178.9 u z A m
36. A particular material has 2.7 10 29 atoms m 3 and
(A) 47.6 A m
m r2 = 8
********
www.gatehelp.com
Magnetostatics
SOLUTIONS
1. (C) H =
=
I
4p
IdL u R
4 pR 2
-
[2 + ( 3 - y) ]
2
2 32
R = (1 + x) + 32 + 2 2 = x 2 + 2 x + 14
2
H=
-u ydy[2 u x + ( 3 - y) u y ]
-(1 + x) u x + 3u y + 2 u z
uR =
Chap 8.3
4 dxu x [ -(1 + x) u x + 3u y + 2 u z ]
4 p ( x 2 + 2 x + 14) 3 2
(12 u z - 8 u y) dx
4 p( x
+ 2 x + 14)
3/2
2 u z dy
I
=
2
4 p 0 [2 + ( 3 - y) 2 ]3 2
= 0.147 u z - 0.098 u y A m
3 - y = 2 tan q, -dy = 2 sec 2 q,
5. (B) H =
q1 = 56.31, q 2 = -90
H=
I
4p
56 .31
-90
2 u z dq
2 sec q
I
u z [sin q ] -5690.31 = 145.8 u z mA m
=
4p
2. (A) H = H y + H z , H z =
Iz
uf
2pr
r = ( -3) 2 + ( 4) 2 = 5
3u y + 4 u x
=
5
5
24 ( 4 u x + 3u y)
Hz =
= 0.611u x + 0.458 u y mA m
2 p(5)
5
uf =
Hy =
- u z ( -3u x + 4 u y)
Iy
2pr
I
uf 2 pr
( -3u x + 5 u z )
34
3u z - 5 u x
34
( -5 u x + 3u z )
12
2 p 34
-a
3. (A) H =
I
uf 2 pr
-4
Idzu z (ru r - zu z )
4 p(r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
I
a
12
2 pr
(r + a 2 )
I
At r = 1, H =
2pr
1+ a
1
a=
2p
-a
Iau f
2 pr(r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
u A m
f
1
2
= 0.577 m
IdL u R
4 pR 2
Idfu f ( - ur )
I
uz A m
=
2a
4 pa
K u R dxdy
4 pR 2
4 u x ( - xu x - yu y - 3u z ) dx dy
7. (D) H =
2
4 p( x 2 + y 2 + 9) 3 2
-2 -
I
4
u
1f
2 pr
(r 2 + 16)
=-
IdL u R
, IdL = 4 dxu x
4 pR 2
I = 3 A, a = 0.5 m, H = 3u z A m
I
I
8
uf uf
2 pr
4 p r (r 2 + 16)
4. (B) H =
6. (A) H =
H = 0.1u f A m
rIdzu f
4 p(r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
f = 60 , I = 3p,
-a
Idzu z (ru r - zu z )
4 p(r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
rIdzu f
rIu f
z
- a 4 p(r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2 = 4 p r 2 (r 2 + z 2 ) 3 2
rdz
I
I
uf uf
2
2 pr
4 p -4 4 p(r + z 2 ) 3 2
At r = - 3,
4 p13
34
H = H y + H z = 0.331u x + 0.458 u y + 0.168 u z mA m
= - 0.281u x + 0.168 u z mA m
u f , r = ( -3) + (5) = 34
uf = u y
Hy =
I
uf 2 pr
2(12 u z - 8 u y)
4 ( - yu z - 3u y) dx dy
-2 -
2
4 p( x 2 + y 2 + 9) 3 2
12 u ydx dy
4 p( x
-2 -
3
uy
p
-2
+ y 2 + 9) 3 2
2
dy
y2 + 9
2
6
1
y
u y tan -1 = -0.75 u y A/m
p
3
3 -2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
485
UNIT 8
IdL u R
4 pR 2
-Idzu z ( -zu z + u y)
8. (D) H =
=
0
=
0
4 p(1 + z )
2 32
Idzu x
+
4 p(1 + z 2 ) 3 2
I zu x
=
4 p (1 + z 2 )
Idxu x ( - xu x + u y)
4 p(1 + x )
2 32
Idxu z
4 p(1 + x 2 ) 3 2
uy
2
12
uz
3 10 5 10 -3
-4
= [ u x ( -8 - 36) - u y( -4 - 9) + u z (12 - 6)] 10 2 V m

= -4.4 u x + 1.3u y + 0.6 u z kV m
18. (D) v(0) B = (2 u x - 3u y - 4 u z )10 5
(1 + x 2 )
xu z
u x
1
Electromagnetics
( -3u x + 2 u y - u z )10 -3
I
( u x + u z ) = 0.8 ( u x + u z ) mA m
4p
= 1100 u x + 1400 u y - 500 u z

F(0) = Q [E + v B]
= 2 10 -16 [1200 u x + 1200 u y - 200 u z ]
9. (A) Using Amperes circuital law
= 4 10 -14 [ 6 u x + 6 u y - u z ]
H dL = 2prHf = I encl
F = ma
At r = 0.5 cm,
I encl = 10 mA
-3
2 p(5 10 ) H f = 10, H f = 0.32 A m

10. (B) At r = 15
. cm enclosed current
I encl = 10 + 2 p(0.01)( 400) = 35.13 mA
2 p(0.015) H f = 35.13 10
-3
H f = 0.37 A m
11. (C) The enclosed current is

I encl = 10 + 2 p(0.01) 400 - 2 p(0.02)250 + 2 p(0.03) 300
= 60.3 mA m
2 p(0.035) H f = 60.3 M
12. (A) H =
H f = 0.27 A m
1
( -30 - 40) u x ( -u z ) = -35 u y A m
2
a=
F 4 10 -14
=
[6u x + 6u y - u z ]
m 5 10 -26
= 800[ 6 u x + 6 u y - u z ] 10 9 m s 2
19. (C) F = e v B
= - (1.6 10 -19)( 4.5 10 7 u y)(2.5 10 -3 u z )
= -1.8 10 -14 u x N
This force will be constant during the time the electron
travels the field. It establishes a negative x directed
velocity as it leaves the field, given by the acceleration
times the transit time tt ,
Ftt -1.8 10 -14 2.5 10 -2
=
m 9.1 10 -31 4.5 10 7
0.5 - 0.025
=
= 106
. 10 -8 s
4.5 10 7
vx =
t50
= -11
. 10 7 m s
In that time, the electron moves to an x coordinate

1
13. (B) H = K u n
2
1
= ( 30 - 40) u x ( -u z ) = -5 u y A m
2
given by
. 10 7)(106
. 10 -8 ) = -0.117 m
x = vx t50 = -(11
x = -117
. cm, z = 0
C
1
14. (A) H = ( -30 + 40) u x + ( -u z ) = 5 u y A m
2
15. (C) J = H =
=
1
r2
2 +
2
r r
1 (rH f)
uz
r r
u z = u z A m
20. (A) FBC = I loop dL Bfrom

4
= ( 6 10 -3) dzu z
1
1 3
r = 0
r r r
position along the loop segment.

3
( 6 10
1
-3
) dxu x
15m o
uy
2 px
45 10 -3
m o ln 3u z = 19.8 u z nN
p
17. (A) F = e(E + v B)

If F = 0, E = -v B = B v
Page
486
15m o
u y = -1.8 10 -8 u x = -18 u x nN
2 p( 3)
21. (C) The field from the long wire now varies with
FAB =
16. (D) J =
wire at BC
www.gatehelp.com
Magnetostatics
22. (A) This will be the vector sum of the forces on the
four sides. By symmetry, the forces on sides AB and CD
will be equal and opposite, and so will cancel. This
leaves the sum of forces on side BC and DA
4
FDA =
-( 6 10
-3
) dxu z
15m o
u y = 54 u x nN
2 p(1)
Chap 8.3
28. (A) F =
K BdS =
area
1 1 .5
6u
0 0 .5
-5m o u x
dy
2 py
15m o 15
.
=ln
u y = -6.6 u y mN m
p
0.5
29. (A) c m + 1 = m r , c m + 1 = 6.5 , c m = 5.5
Ftotal = FDA + FBC = (54 - 18) u x = 36 u x nN

30. (A) B = mH = m om rH
23. (A) F = IdL R
= 4 p 10 -7 6.5(10 u x + 25 u y - 40 u z )
= I dxu x B + I dyu y B + I dxu x B + I dyu y B
= 82 u x + 204 u y - 327 u z mWb m 2
u x B = u x [ 6 xu x - 9 yu y + 3zu z ] = 3zu y - 9 yu z
31. (C) M = c m H = 55 u x + 137.5 u y - 220 u z A m
u y B = u y[ 6 xu x - 9 yu y + 3zu z ] = 3zu x - 6 xu z
z = 0 for all element
3
32. (B) W =
F = I dx (-9 yu z) y=1 + I dy(-6 xu z) x=3 + I dx (-9 yu z) y=2 + I dy(-6 xu z) x=1
= I ( -18 - 18 + 36 + 6) u z = 5 6 u z = 30 u z N
24. (B) Within the region -1 < y < 1, the magnetic fields
from the two outer sheets (carrying -4u z A m) cancel,
leaving only the field from the center sheet. Therefore
1
1
H B = mH 2
2
2
1
6.5 4 p 10 -7 (100 + 625 + 1600) = 9.5 mJ m 2
2
33. (D) m r = c m + 1 = 31
. + 1 = 4.1, m = m om r = 4.1m o
H=
0.4 yu z
B
=
= 77.6 yu z kA m
m 4.1 4 p 10 -7
H = -4 u x A m (0 < y < 1) and H = 4 u x A m ( -1 < y < 0).

Outside (y > 1 and y < - 1) the fields from all three sheet
cancel, leaving H = 0 ( y > 1, y < - 1). So at x = 0, y = 0.5
F
= Iu z B = (7 10 -3) u z - 4m o u x = -35.2 u y nN m
m
-100 m o u y
2 p (5 10 -3)
= 0.4 u x N m
m r1 =
27. (B) The field from the current strip at the filament
location
3m o
.
6m o u x
15
dy =
ln
u x
y
p
0
2
p
.5
0 .5
1 .5
B=
= 1.32 10 -6 u x Wb m 2
1
F = IdL B
0
1
1
m
=
= 1326.3
m o 600 4 p 10 -7
M1 = c m H1 = 1590
.
106 A m
1.4
B
For case 2, m = 2 =
H 2 400
IdL B
= 100 dzu z
2
B1
=
H 1200
c m = m r - 1 = 1325.3
35. (C) For case 1, m =

m r1 =
F
25. (D)
= Iu x ( -4m o u x ) = 0
m
26. (A) F =
34. (A) M = c m H = ( 31
. )(77.6) yu z = 241 yu z kA m
= 5 dzu z 1.32 10 -6 u x dz = 6.6 u y mN m
1.4
= 2785.2
400 4 p 10 -7
c m = 2784.2 2784.2
M 2 = c m H 2 = 1114
.
106 A m
DM = (1590
.
- 1114
.
) 106 = 476 kA m
36. (B) M = Nm = (2.7 10 29)(2.6 10 -30 u y)
= 0.7 u y A m
H=
0.7 u y
M
=
= 0.22 u y A m
m r - 1 4.2 - 1
37. (A) M =
www.gatehelp.com
B
mo
+ 1
cm
-1
Page
487
UNIT 8
-1
Electromagnetics
The normal component of H1 is
0.02 1
+ 1 = 47.6 A m
4 p 10 -7 0.003
H N1 = (H1 u N 21 ) u N 21
H1 u N 21 = (50 u x - 30 u y + 20 u z ) (0.37 u x + 0.56 u y - 0.74u z )
= 18.5 - 16.8 - 14.8 = -131

.
1
1
38. (A) W = H B = m o H 2
2
2
1
= ( 4 p 10 -7)( 600) 2 = 0.226 J m 3
2
Ho
= -4.83u x - 7.24 u y + 9.66 u z A m

Tangential component of H1 at the boundary
HT1 = H1 - H N1
H. dB = H 3 + 2 H dH
39. (A) W =
2
o
Ho
(H1 u N 21 ) u N 21 = ( -131
. )(0.37 u x + 0.56 u y - 0.74 u z )
= (50 u x - 30 u y + 20 u z ) - ( -4.83u x - 7.24 u y + 9.66 u z )

= 54.83u x - 22.76 u y + 10.34 u z A m
3
o
2H
H
+
= 6.2 MJ m 3
6
3
40. (A) J b = M =
H T 2 = H T1
m
2
H N 2 = r1 H N1 = ( -4.83u x - 7.24 u y + 9.66 u z )
m r2
5
12
uz
a
= -193
. u x - 2.90 u y + 3.86 u z A m
H 2 = H T 2 + H N 2 = (54.83u x - 22.76 u y + 10.34 u z )
41. (B) B1 = 200m o u x - 600m o u y + 400m o u z
+ ( -193
. u x - 2.9 u y + 3.86 u z )
= 52.9 u x - 25.66 u y + 14.2 u z
Its normal component at the boundary is

B1 N = (B1 u N12 ) u N12
********
= (52.8 u x + 42.24 u y + 56.32 u z ) m o = B2 N

B
H 2 N = 2 N = 6.60 u x + 5.28 u y + 7.04 u z
8m o
H1 N =
B1 N
= 26.40 u x + 2112
. u y + 28.16 u z
12m o
H1 T = H1 - H1 N = (100 u x - 300 u y + 200 u z )

-(26.4 u x + 2112
. u y + 28.16 u z )
= 73.6 u x - 32112
. u y + 171.84 u z
H1 T = H 2 T
H 2 = H 2 N + H 2 T = 80.2 u x - 315.8 u y + 178.9 u z A m
42. (C) H N1 = - 3u z , H T1 = 10 u x + 15 u y
H T 2 = H T1 = 10 u x + 15 u y
m
1
( -3u z ) = 0.15 u z
H N 2 = 1 H N1 =
m2
20
H 2 = H N 2 + H T 2 = 10 u x + 15 u y - 0.15 u z
B2 = m 2H 2 = 20 4 p 10 -7(10 u x + 15 u y - 0.15 u z )
= 251u x + 377 u y - 377
. u z mWb m 2
43. (B) At the boundary normal unit vector
2 u x + 3u y - 4 u z
(2 x + 3 y - 4 z)
un =
=
| (2 x + 3 y - 4 z)|
29
= 0.37 u x + 0.56 u y - 0.74 u z
Since this vector is found through the gradient, it will
point
in
the
direction
of
increasing
values
of
2 x + 3 y - 4 z, and so will be directed into region 1. Thus

u n = u n 21 .
Page
488
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Statement for Q.89:
Electromagnetics
The location of the sliding bar in fig. P8.4.89 is
Consider the fig. P8.4.1213. The rails have a
given by x = 5 t + 4 t . The separation of the two rails is
resistance of 2 W m. The bar moves to the right at a
30 cm. Let B = x u z T.
constant speed of 9 m s in a uniform magnetic field of
0.8 T. The bar is at x = 2 m at t = 0.
VM
0.2 cm
I
Fig. P8.4.89.
8. The voltmeter reading at t = 0.5 s is
16 cm
(A) -21.6 V
(B) 21.6 V
Fig. P8.41214
(C) -6.3 V
(D) 6.3 V
12. If 6 W resistor is present across the left-end with the
9. The voltmeter reading at x = 0.6 m is
right end open-circuited, then at t = 0.5 sec the current
(A) -1.68 V
(B) 1.68 V
I is
(C) -0.933 V
(D) 0.933 V
(A) -45 mA
(B) 45 mA
(C) -60 mA
(D)60 mA

A perfectly conducting filament containing a 250W
13. If 6 W resistor is present across each end, then I at
resistor is formed into a square as shown in fig.
0.5 sec is
P8.4.10-11.
(A) -12.3 mA
(B) 12.3 mA
(C) -7.77 mA
(D) 77.7 mA
y
I(t)

0.5 cm
The internal dimension of a coaxial capacitor is
250 W
a = 1.2 cm, b = 4 cm and c = 40 cm. The homogeneous

material inside the capacitor has the parameter
e = 10 -11 F m, m = 10 -5 H m and s = 10 -5 S m.The electric
Fig. P8.4.1011
field intensity is E = 10r cos (10 5 t) u p V m.

7
10. If B = 6 cos (120 pt - 30 ) u z T, then the value of I ( t)

is
14. The current density J is
(A) 2.26 sin (120 pt - 30 ) A

(B) 2.26 cos (120 pt - 30 ) A
(C) -2.26 sin (120 pt - 30 ) A
(D) -2.26 cos (120 pt - 30 ) A
11. If B = 2 cos p( ct - y) u z mT, where c is the velocity of
light, then I ( t) is
200
sin (10 5 t) u r A m 2
r
(B)
400
sin (10 5 t) u r A m 2
r
(C)
100
cos (10 5 t) u r A m 2
r
(A) 1.2(cos pct - sin pct) mA
(B) 1.2(cos pct - sin pct) mA
15. The quality factor of the capacitor is
(C) 1.2(sin pct - sin pct) mA
(A) 0.1
(B) 10
(C) 0.2
(D) 20
(D) 1.2(sin pct - sin pct) mA

Page
490
(A)
www.gatehelp.com
Maxwells Equations
16. The following fields exist in charge free regions
(B) -4 a sin (15

. 108 t - ax) u z mA m
P = 60 sin ( wt + 10 x) u z
(C) 4 a sin (15

. 108 t - ax) u z m A m
Q = 10r cos ( wt - 2r) u f
(D) 4 a sin (15

. 108 t - ax) u z mA m
R = 3r 2 cot f u r + 1r cos fu f
21. The value of a is
S=
(A) 4.3
(B) 2.25
(C) 5
(D) 6
1
r
sin q sin ( wt - 6 r) u q
The possible electromagnetic fields are

(A) P, Q
(B) R, S
(C) P, R
(D) Q, S

Let H = 2 cos (1010 t - bx) u z A m, m = 3 10 -5 H m,
17. A parallel-plate capacitor with plate area of 5 cm 2

and plate separation of 3 mm has a voltage 50 sin (10 3 t)
V
Chap 8.4
applied to its plates. If e r = 2,
the displacement
current is
e = 1.2 10 -10 F m and s = 0 everywhere.

22. The electric flux density D is
(A) 120 cos (1010 t - bx) nC m 2
(A) 148 cos (1010 t) nA
(B) 261 cos (1010 t) mA
(B) -120 cos (1010 t - bx) nC m 2
(C) 261 cos (1010 t) nA
(D) 148 cos (1010 t) mA
(C) 120 cos (1010 t + bx) nC m 2

18. In a coaxial transmission line ( e r = 1), the electric

23. The magnetic flux density B is
field intensity is given by

E=
(A) 6.67 10 4 cos (1010 t + bx) T
100
cos (10 9 t - 6 z) u r V m.
r
(B) 6.67 10 4 cos (1010 t - bx)

(C) 6 10 -5 cos (1010 t + bx) T
The displacement current density is

100
(A) sin (10 9 t - 6 z) u r A m 2
r
(B)
(D) 6 10 -5 cos (1010 t - bx) T

116
sin (10 9 t - 6 z) u r A m 2
r
(C) -
0.9
sin (10 9 t - 6 z) u r A m 2
r
(D) -
216
cos (10 9 t - 6 z) u r A m 2
r
A material has s = 0 and e r = 1. The magnetic field

intensity is H = 4 cos (106 t - 0.01z) u y A m.
24. The electric field intensity E is
(A) 4.52 sin (106 t - 0.01z) kV m
(B) 4.52 sin (106 t - 0.01z) V m
(C) 4.52 cos (106 t - 0.01z) V m
Consider the region defined by |x|,|y| and |z|< 1.

Let e = 5 e o , m = 4m o , and s = 0 the displacement current
(D) 4.52 cos (106 t - 0.01z) kV m
density J d = 20 cos (15

. 108 t - ax) u y m A m 2 . Assume
25. The value of m r is
no DC fields are present.
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 16
19. The electric field intensity E is

(A) 6 sin (15
. 108 t - ax) u y mV m
26. The surface r = 3 and 10 mm, and z = 0 and 25 cm
(B) 6 cos (15

. 10 t - ax) u y mV m
are perfect conductors. The region enclosed by these
(C) 3 cos (15

. 108 t - ax) u y mV m
surface has m = 2.5 10 -6 H m, e = 4 10 -11 F m and
(D) 3 sin (15

. 108 t - ax) u y mV m
s = 0. If H = 2r cos 8 pz cos wt u f A m, then the value of w

is
20. The magnetic field intensity is
(A) 2 p 106 rad s
(B) 8 p 106 rad s
(A) -4 a sin (15

. 108 t - ax) u z m A m
(C) 2 p 108 rad s
(D) 8 p 108 rad s
www.gatehelp.com
Page
491
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
27. For distilled water m = m o , e = 81e o , and s = 2 10 -3
SOLUTIONS
S m, the ratio of conduction current density to

displacement current density at 1 GHz is
(A) 111
. 10 -5
(B) 4.44 10 -4
(C) 2.68 10 -6
(D) 1.68 10 -7
1. (B) emf = -
= 2 p(0.2) 2 (20)( 377) sin 377 t mV = 0.95 cos 377 t V
28. A conductor with cross-sectional area of 10 cm 2

carrier
conductor
current
2 sin (10 9 t)
mA.
If
2. (A) emf =
s = 2.5 106 S m and e r = 4.6, the magnitude of the

(A) 48.4 m A m
(B) 8.11 nA m
F = p(0.1) 2 B = 0.31 cos (120 pt)
(D) 16.4 m A m 2
(C) 32.6 nA m 2
emf = Vba ( t) = -
29. In a certain region
dF
dt
= 0.31(120 p) sin (120 pt) = 118.43 sin(120 pt)
J = ( 4 yu x + 2 xzu y + z u z ) sin (10 t) A m

3
Vab = - 118.43 sin (120 pt)
If volume charge density r v in z = 0 plane is zero,

4. (D) I =
then r v is
(A) 3z 2 cos (10 4 t) mC m 3
(B) 0.3z 2 cos (10 4 t) mC m 3
(C) -3z cos (10 t) mC m
2
1
1
Bo wL2 = ( 4)(2)(2) 2 = 16 V
2
2
3. (C) Since B is constant over the loop area, the flux is
displacement current density is

2
dF
d
B dS
=dt
dt
Vab 118.43 sin (120 pt)

=
= 0.47 sin (120 pt)
R
250
5. (A) emf = -
(D) -0.3z 2 cos (10 4 t) mC m 3
30. In a charge-free region (s = 0, e = e o e r , m = m o )

magnetic field intensity is
H = 10 cos (10 t - 4 y) u z
11
dF
d
=dt
dt
B u dz
z
loop area
d
( 3)( 4)( 6) cos 5000 t = -360000 sin 5000 t
dt
I=
emf
360000 sin 5000 t
= - 0.4 sin 5000 t A
=R
900 10 3
A m. The displacement current density is

1 1
(A) -40 sin (10 9 t - 4 y) u y A m
6. (C) F =
(B) 40 sin (10 9 t - 4 y) u y A m
20m
cos ( 3 108 t - y) dx dy
0 0
= [20m o sin ( 3 108 t - y)]10
(C) -40 sin(10 3 t - 4 y) u x A m
= 20 m o [sin ( 3 108 t - 1) - sin ( 3 108 t)] Wb
(D) 40 sin (10 9 t - 4 y) u x A m

31. In a nonmagnetic medium ( e r = 6.25) the magnetic
field of an EM wave is H = 6 cos bx cos (108 t) u z A m.
The corresponding electric field is
(A) 903 sin (0.83 x) sin (108 t) V m
Emf = -
dF
dt
= - 20 (4p 10 -7)(3 108 ) [cos (3 108 t - 1) - cos (3 108 t)]
= 7540[cos ( 3 108 t) - cos ( 3 108 t - 1)] V

7. (D) In this case F = [20m o (2 p) sin ( 3 108 t - y)]20 p = 0
(B) 903 sin (12

. x) sin (10 t) V m
(C) 903 sin (0.83 x) cos (108 t) V m
8. (A) F =
(D) 903 sin (12

. x) cos (108 t) V m
B dS =
area
E = 5 cos(10 9 t - 8 x) u x + 4 sin(10 9 t - 8 x) u z V m.
(A) 3.39
(B) 1.84
(C) 5.76
(D) 2.4
***********
Page
492
t dtdy
2
= 0.1 x 3 = 0.1(5 t + 4 t 3) 3 Wb
32. In a nonmagnetic medium
The dielectric constant of the medium is
0 .3 x
emf = -
dF
= -0.1( 3)(5 t + 4 t 3) 2 (5 + 12 t 2 )
dt
At t = 0.5 s, emf = -0.1( 3)(2.5 + 0.5) 2 (5 + 3) = -21.6 V

9. (C) At x = 0.6 m, 0.6 = 5 t + 4 t 3
At t = 0.119 s,
www.gatehelp.com
emf = -0.933 V
t = 0.119 s
Maxwells Equations
10. (A) F =
B dS = 6(0.5)
Chap 8.4
I d = 2 prlJ d = - 2 pl(10) sin (10 5 t) = - 8 psin (10 5 t) A
cos (120 pt - 30 ) Wb
area
Quality factor
dF
emf = = 6(0.5) 2 (120 p) sin (120 pt - 30 )
dt
The current is
emf 6(0.5) 2 (120 p)

=
sin (120 pt - 30 ) A
R
250
= 2.26 sin (120 pt - 30 ) A
B dS = (0.5)(2) cos( py - pct) dy
area
1
p
1
sin pct - - sin pct = [ - cos pct - sin pct ] mWb
p
2
p
dF
emf = = c [cos pct - sin pct ] mV
dt
=
I ( t) =
Ic
8
= 0.1
80
16. (A) P = 0, P = -
emf 3 108
=
[cos pct - sin pct ] mA
250
R
is a possible EM field
sin f
1
( 3r 2 cot f)
R =
0, R is not an EM field.
r r
r
S =
(sin 2 f)
1
sin ( wt - 6 r)
0
r sin q
r
2
S is not an EM field. Hence (A) is correct.
= 12
. [cos pct - sin pct ] A
17. (A) D = eE = e
12. (A) The flux in the left-hand closed loop is

Id = J S =
Fl = B area = (0.8)(0.2)(2 + 9t)

dF L
= - (0.16)(9) = -1.44 V
emfl = dt
V
d
increasing with time,

Rl = 6 + 2[2 (2 + 9 t)]W, At t = 0.5, Rl = 32 W
1.44
Il = = - 45 mA
32
18. (C)
D
E
100
=e
Jd =
= eo
[ - sin (10 9 t - 6 z)] 10 9 u r A m 2
t
t
r
=-
current from the right loop, which is now closed. The

flux in the right loop, whose area decreases with time,
is Fr = (0.8)(0.2)(16 - 2 - 9 t)
dF R
= 1.44 V
emfR = dt
0.9
sin (10 9 t - 6 z) u r A m 2
r
19. (D) D = J d dt + C1 =
20 10 -6
sin (15
. 108 - ax) u y
15
. 108
. 108 t - ax) u y C m 3
= 1.33 10 -13 sin (15
C1 is set to zero since no DC fields are present.
E=
Rr = 44 W
The contribution to the current from the right loop

-144
Ir =
= 032.7 mA
44
The total current = -32.7 - 45 = -77.7 mA
14. (C) J = s E =
dD e dV
=
dt d dt
eS dV 2 e o 5 10 -4
=
10 3 50 cos (10 3 t)
3 10 -3
d dt
13. (C) In this case, there will be contribution to the
At 0.5 s,
Jd =
= 148 cos (1010 t) nA
While the bar in motion, the loop resistance is
Rr = 6 + 2 (2 (14 - 9 t)),
Pz
uy 0
x
P is a possible EM field
1
Q = 0, Q =
[10 cos ( wt - 2r)]u z 0
r r
0 .5
11. (D) F =
Id
100
cos (10 5 t) u r A m 2
r
15. (A) Total conduction current

100
cos (10 5 t) u r A m 2
I C = J dS = 2prlJ = 2 prl
r
= 80 pcos (10 5 t) A
D eE
10
=
sin (10 5 t) A m 2
Jd =
=t
t
r
D 1.33 10 -13
=
sin (15
. 108 - ax) u y
e
5 eo
= 3 10 -3 sin (15
. 108 t - ax) V m
20. (D) E =
E y
x
uz = -
B
t
= -a( 3 10 -3) cos (15

. 108 t - ax) u z = -
B
t
B=
a( 3 10 -3)
sin (15
. 108 t - ax) u z
15
. 108
H=
2 10 -11
B
=
sin (15
. 108 t - ax) u z A m
m 4 4 p 10 -7
. 108 t - ax) u z mA m
= 4 10 -6 a sin (15
21. (B) H = www.gatehelp.com
H z
u y = Jd
x
Page
493
UNIT 8
= a 2 ( 4 10 -6 ) cos (15
. 108 t - ax) = J D
Electromagnetics
27.(B) At high frequency
Comparing the result

a 2 4 10 -6 = 20 10 -6 , a = 5 = 2.25
22. (B) H = -
H z
D
uy =
x
t
2b
cos (1010 t - bx) u y C m 2
D =1010
b=
w
. 10 -10 = 600
= 1010 me = 1010 3 10 -5 12
v
Jd =
E=
Ic
sS
4.6 e o (10 9)
2 cos (10 9 t) 10 -3
2.5 106 10 10 -4
29. (B) J = (0 + 0 + 3z 2 ) sin (10 4 t) = -
23. (D) B = mH = 6 10 -5 cos (1010 t - bx) u z T

H y
Ic
= sE
S
E
e I c
Jd = e
=
t sS t
|J d | = 32.6 nA m 2
D = -120 cos (1010 t - bx) u y nC m 2
24. (A) H = -
2 10 -3
= 4.44 10 -4
2 p 10 9 81 e o
28. (C) J c =
D
= 2b sin (1010 t - bx) u y
t
Jc
sE
s
=
=
J d weE we
3z 2 cos (10 4 t)
+ C1
10 4
rv =
ux
8r
t
At z = 0, r v = 0, C1 = 0
r v = 0.3z 2 cos (10 4 t) mC m 3
E
H = 0.04 cos (10 t - 0.01z) u x = e o
t
6
30. (D) J d = H =
0.04 sin (106 t - 0.01z) u x

E=
106 e o
H z
ux
y
= 40 sin (10 9 t - 4 y) u y A m
= 4.52 sin (10 t - 0.01z) u x kV m

6
31. (A) H = -
Ex
H
25. (B) E =
uy = -m
z
t
= 6b sin (bx) cos (108 t) u y

1
E = 6b sin (bx) cos (108 t) u y dt
e
6b
sin (bx) sin (108 t) u y
=
e1010
-0.04(0.01)
H
cos (106 t - 0.01z) u y = - m rm o
106 e o
t
H=
0.04(0.01)
sin (106 t - 0.013) u y
(106 )(106 )m rm o e o
0.04(0.01)
=4
1012 m rm o e o
mr =
(0.04)(0.01)
( 3 108 ) 2 = 9
4(1012 )
H=
Er
(16 p)( 8 p)
H
uf =
cos ( 8 pz) sin ( wt) u f = -m
z
rew
t
6(0.833)
sin (bx) sin (108 t) u y V m
6.25 e o 108
b=
w w
=
er ,
v c
8=
10 9
108 e r
3
128 p2
cos ( 8 pz) cos ( wt) u f
rew2
w=
8p
me
8p
4 10
-11
2.5 10 -6
= 8 p 108 rad s
Page
494
w = 10 9, b = 8,
e r = 5.76
**********
This result must be equal to the given H field. Thus
6.25 = 0.833
32. (C) For nonmagnetic medium m r = 1
16 p
sin ( 8 pz) sin ( wt) u r
rew
128 p2 2
=
remw2 r
w w
108
=
er =
v c
3 108
= 903 sin (0.83 x) sin (108 t) u y V m
16 p
E
=
sin ( 8 pz) cos ( wt) u r = e
r
t
E=
e = 6.25 e o , b =
E=
H f
26. (D) H = ur
z
E=
H z
E
uz = e
y
t
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
8.5
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE PROPAGATION
Statement for Q.13:

A y-polarized uniform plane wave with a frequency
(A) 6.43 106 m s
(B) 2.2 10 7 m s
(C) 1.4 108 m s
of 100 MHz propagates in air in the + x direction and

impinges normally on a perfectly conducting plane at
Statement for Q.56:
x = 0. The amplitude of incident E-field is 6 mV m.

1. The phasor H s of the incident wave in air is
(A) 16 e
(C) 16 e
-j
2p
x
3
-j
2p
x
3
uz m A m
(B) -16 e
ux m A m
-j
2p
x
3
-j
2p
x
3
(D) -16 e
A uniform plane wave in free space has electric

field Es = (2 u z + 3u y) e - jbx V m.
uz m A m
5. The magnetic field phasor H s is
ux m A m
(B) (5.3u y - 8 u z ) e - jbx m A m
(A) ( -5.3u y - 8 u z ) e - jbx m A m

(C) ( -5.3u y + 8 u z ) e - jbx m A m
2. The E-field of total wave in air is
(D) (5.3u y + 8 u z ) e - jbx m A m
2p
(A) j12 sin
x u y mV m
3
6. The average power density in the wave is
2p
(B) - j12 sin
x u y mV m
3
(A) 34 mW m 2
(B) 17 mW m 2
(C) 22 mW m 2
(D) 44 mW m 2
2p
(C) 12 cos
x u y mV m
3
7. The electric field of a uniform plane wave in free
2p
(D) -12 cos
x u y mV m
3
field phasor H s is
space is given by Es = 12 p( u y + ju z ) e - j15x . The magnetic
3. The location in air nearest to the conducting plane,

where total E-field is zero, is
(A) x = 15
. m
(B) x = -15
. m
(C) x = 3 m
(D) x = - 3 m
vp is
( -u z + ju y) e - j15x
(B)
12
ho
( u z + ju y) e - j15x
(C)
12
ho
( -u z - ju y) e - j15x
(D)
12
ho
( u z - ju y) e - j15x
A lossy material has m = 5m o , e = 2 e o . The phase
uniform plane wave propagating in a certain lossless

material is ( 6 u y - j5 u z ) e
12
ho
Statement for Q.89:
4. The phasor magnetic field intensity for a 400 MHz

- j18 x
(A)
A m . The phase velocity
constant is 10 rad m at 5 MHz.

8. The loss tangent is
(A) 2913
(B) 1823
(C) 2468
(D) 1374
www.gatehelp.com
Page
495
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
9. The attenuation constant a is
16.
(A) 4.43
(B) 9.99
m r = 1, e 2 = 1) pipe with inner and outer radii 9 mm and
(C) 5.57
12 mm carries a total current of 16 sin (106 pt) A. The
60
long
aluminium
( s = 35
. 10 7 S m,
effective resistance of the pipe is

At
50
MHz
lossy
dielectric
material
is
characterized by m = 2.1m o , e = 3.6 e o and s = 0.08 S m.
(A) 0.19 W
(B) 3.48 W
(C) 1.46 W
(D) 2.43 W
The electric field is Es = 6 e - jgx u z V m.
17. Silver plated brass wave guide is operating at 12
10. The propagation constant g is
m r = e r = 1) is 5d, the minimum thickness required for
(A) 7.43 + j2.46 per meter
wave-guide is
(B) 2.46 + j7.43 per meter
(A) 6.41 mm
(B) 3.86 mm
(C) 6.13 + j5.41 per meter
(C) 5.21 mm
(D) 2.94 mm
GHz. If at least the thickness of silver ( s = 6.1 10 7 S m,
(D) 5.41 + j 6.13 per meter
11. The impedance h is
A uniform plane wave in a lossy nonmagnetic
(A) 101.4 W
(B) 167.4 W
(C) 98.3 W
(D) 67.3 W
media has
Es = (5 u x + 12 u y) e - gz , g = 0.2 + j 3.4 m -1

A
non
magnetic
18. The magnitude of the wave at z = 4 m and t = T 8

medium
has
an
intrinsic
impedance 360 30 W.
is
(A) 10.34
(B) 5.66
(C) 4.36
(D) 12.60
12. The loss tangent is

(A) 0.866
(B) 0.5
19. The loss suffered by the wave in the interval
(C) 1.732
(D) 0.577
0 < z < 3 m is
13. The Dielectric constant is

(A) 1.634
(B) 1.234
(C) 0.936
(D) 0.548
(A) 4.12 dB
(B) 8.24 dB
(C) 10.42 dB
(D) 5.21 dB

The plane wave E = 42 cos ( wt - z) u x V m in air
normally hits a lossless medium (m r = 1, e r = 4) at z = 0.
The amplitude of a wave traveling through a lossy

nonmagnetic medium reduces by 18% every meter. The
20. The SWR s is
wave operates at 10 MHz and the electric field leads the
(A) 2
magnetic field by 24.
(C)
14. The propagation constant is

(A) 0.198 + j0.448 per meter
(B) 0.346 + j0.713 per meter
(C) 0.448 + j0.198 per meter
1
3
(D) 3
22. The reflected electric field is
15. The skin depth is

(A) 2.52 m
(B) 5.05 m
(C) 8.46 m
(D) 4.23 m
Page
496
21. The transmission coefficient t is

2
4
(A)
(B)
3
3
(C)
(D) 0.713 + j0.346 per meter
1
2
(B) 1
(A) -14 cos ( wt - z) u x V m

(B) -14 cos ( wt + z) u x V m
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
33. The region z < 0 is characterized by e r = m r = 1 and
Region 2 (0 < z < 6 cm): m 2 = 2 mH m, e 2 = 25 pF m
s = 0.
Region 3 (z > 6 cm):
The
total
electric
field
E s = 150 e - j10 z u x + 50 20 e j10 z u x
here
is
given
39. The lowest frequency, at which a uniform plane
impedance of the region z > 0 is

(A) 692 + j176 W
(C) 176 + j 692 W
(B) 193 - j 49 W
wave incident from region 1 onto the boundary at z = 0
(D) 49 - j193 W
will have no reflection, is

Region 1, z < 0 and region 2, z > 0, are both perfect
dielectrics. A uniform plane wave traveling in the u z
direction
has
frequency
m 3 = 4 mH m, e 3 = 10 pF m
V m. The intrinsic
of
3 1010
rad s.
Its
wavelength in the two region are l1 = 5 cm and l2 = 3

cm.
(A) 2.96 GHz
(B) 4.38 GHz
(C) 1.18 GHz
(D) 590 MHz
40. If frequency is 50 MHz, the SWR in region 1 is

(A) 0.64
(B) 1.27
(C) 2.38
(D) 4.16
41. A uniform plane wave in air is normally incident
34. On the boundary the reflected energy is
onto a lossless dielectric plate of thickness l 8 , and of
(A) 6.25%
(B) 12.5%
intrinsic impedance h = 260 W. The SWR in front of the
(C) 25%
(D) 50%
plate is
35. The SWR is

(A) 1.67
(B) 0.6
(C) 2
(D) 1.16
(A) 1.12
(B) 1.34
(C) 1.70
(D) 1.93
42. The E-field of a uniform plane wave propagating in

a dielectric medium is given by
36. A uniform plane wave is incident from region 1

(m r = 1, s = 0) to free space. If the amplitude of incident
z
z
8
E = 2 cos 108 t u x - sin 10 t uy V m
3
3
wave is one-half that of reflected wave in region, then

the value of e r is
(A) 4
(B) 3
(C) 16
(D) 9
37. A 150 MHz uniform plane wave is normally incident

from air onto a material. Measurements yield a SWR of
3 and the appearance of an electric field minimum at
0.3l in front of the interface. The impedance of material
is
(A) 502 - j 641 W
(B) 641 - j502 W
(C) 641 + j502 W
(D) 502 + j 641 W
The dielectric constant of medium is

(A) 3
(B) 9
(C) 6
(D)
43. An electromagnetic wave from an under water

source with perpendicular polarization is incident on a
water-air interface at angle 20 with normal to surface.
For water assume e r = 81, m r = 1. The critical angle q c is
(A) 83.62
(B) 6.38
(C) 42.6

***********
38. A plane wave is normally incident from air onto a

semi-infinite slab of perfect dielectric ( e r = 3.45). The
fraction of transmitted power is
(A) 0.91
(B) 0.3
(C) 0.7
(D) 0.49

Consider three lossless region :
Region 1 (z < 0):
Page
498
m 1 = 4 mH m, e1 = 10 pF m
www.gatehelp.com
Electromagnetic Wave Propagation
SOLUTIONS
1. (A) w = 2 p 10
8. (B) Loss tangent
rad s
w
2 p 10
2p
=
=
rad m
c
3 108
3
Es = 6 e
2p
-j x
3
u y mV m
uE u H = ux ,
Hs =
6
e
120 p
-j
2p
x
3
u y u H = ux ,
uz
= 16 e
-j
2p
x
3
u H = uz
10 =
x=
uz m A m
Er = -6 e
2p
x
3
52
2
[ 1+ x
s
= 1823
we
1 + x2 - 1
1 + x2 + 1
me
s
1+
- 1
2
we
2p
= - j12 sin
x u y mV m
3
10. (D) a = w
3. (B) The electric field vanish at the surface of the
s
0.08
=
=8
we
3.6 50 106 2 pe o
conducting plane at x = 0. In air the first null occur at

3
l
p
x =- 1 ==- m
2
2
b1
w 2 p 400 10
=
= 1.4 108 m s
b
18
5. (C) The wave is propagating in forward x direction.
2 p 50 106
3 108
(2.1)( 3.6)
( 65 - 1) = 5.41
2
me
s
1+
+ 1
2
we
2 p 50 106
3 108
(2.1)( 3.6)
( 65 + 1) = 6.13
2
g = a + jb = 5.41 + j 6.13 per meter.
Therefore u E u H = u x .
uH = - uy
For u E = u y , u y u H = u x u H = u z
1
Hs =
( -2 u y + 3u z ) e - jbx = ( -5.3u y + 8 u z ) e - jbx mA m
120 p
6. (B) Pavg =
a=
b=w
For u E = u z , u z u H = u x
+1
a = 10 0.999 = 9.99
2p
-j x
- j 2 px
E = Ei + Er = 6 e 3 u y - 6 e 3 u y mV m
4. (C) vp =
a
1822
=
b
1824
u y mV m,
2 p 5 106
3 108
a
=
b
9. (B)
2. (B) For conducting plane G = -1,
s
=x
we
me
s
1+
+ 1
2
we
b=w
b=
Chap 8.5
11. (A) |h| =
1
Re {Es H *s }
2
12. (C)
1
{(5.3) u x + 3( 8) u x } 10 -3 = 17.3u x mW m 2
2
7. (D) Since Pointing vector is in the positive x
direction, therefore u E u H = u x .
For u E = u y , u y u H = u x
u H = uz
For u E = u z , u z u H = u x
12
Hs =
( u z - ju y) e - j 15x
ho
u H = -u y ,
m
e
1 + s
we
1
4
2.1
3.6 = 101.4
1
64 4
s
= tan 2 q n = tan 60 = 1732
.
we
13. (D) |h| =
120 p
360 =
m
e
2 4
1 + s
we
120p
er
e r = 0.548
2 4
(1 + 1732
.
)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
499
UNIT 8
14. (A) |E| = Eo e - az
ho
- ho
1
h2 - h1
G=
= 2
=ho
3
h2 + h1
+ ho
2
1
1 + |G| 1 + 3
s=
=
=2
1 - |G| 1 - 1
3
Eo e - a1 = (1 - 0.18) Eo
e - a1 = 0.82
q n = 24
1
= 0.198
0.82
s
tan 2 q n =
= 1111
.
we
a = ln
s
1+
-1
we
a
=
b
h
2 o
2h2
2 =2
21. (A) t =
=
h2 + h1 ho + 2
3
2
s
1+
+1
we
0.198
=
b
234 - 1
234 + 1
b = 0.448
22. (A) Eor = GEoi = -
g = a + jb = 0.198 + j0.448
15. (B) d =
d=
1
pfsm
Rac =
23. (C) h1 = ho , h2 =
1
p 5 10 35
. 10 7 m o
= 120 mm
l
sdw
Since d is very small, w = 2pr outer

60
= 0.19 W
Rac =
7
. 10 120 10 -6 2 p 12 10 -3
35
5
p 12 10 m o 6.1 10 7
= 2.94 mm
h1 = ho
18. (B) E = Re{E s e jwt } = (5 u x + 12 u y) e -0 .2 z cos ( wt - 3.4 z)

T
8
377
h - 377
= 2
3000 h 2 + 377
e r = 12.5,
|E|= 13e -0 .8 cos - 13.6 = 5.66

4
G=
19. (D) Loss = aDz = 0.2 3 = 0.6 Np
Eor = -
20. (A) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
Page
500
mr
h
= o
2
er
h - h1 18
h1 = 2
-3
h2 + h1 6 10
h2 = 485.37 = ho
mr
er
m r = 20.75
25. (A) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
0.6 Np = 5. 21 dB.
h - ho
3000
ho = 2
h2 + ho
E = (5 u x + 12 u y) e -0 .8 cos - 13.6
4
1 Np = 8.686 DB,
mr
mr
= ho
12.5
er
Eor
h - h1
=G = 2
Eoi
h2 + h1
h - h1
Eoi
h1 H or = 2
h2 + h1
pfms
At z = 4 m, t =
24. (D) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
But Eor = h1 H or = GEoi
m ho ho
=
=
2
e er
ho
- ho
1
h2 - h1
G=
= 2
=ho
3
h2 + h1 1
+ ho
2
f = 5 10 5 Hz,
5
17. (D) t = 5 d =
1
( 42) = -14
3
Er = - 14 cos ( wt - z) u x V m
1
1
=
= 5.05
a
0.198
16. (A) w = p106
Electromagnetics
m r ho
=
2
er
1
h2 - h1
=3
h2 + h1
1
10
(10) = 3
3
10
Eor
H or =
=
= 8.8 10 -3
ho
3 377
uE u H = uk ,
-u y u H = -u z
H r = -8.8 cos ( wt - z) u x mA m
w w
b =1 = =
m r er
v c
www.gatehelp.com
u H = -u x
Electromagnetic Wave Propagation
w=
3 108
= 0.5 108 rad s.
12 3
26. (D) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
33.(A) G =
G=
m r ho
=
= 0.58ho
er
3
h - h1 0.58ho - ho
G= 2
=
= -0. 266
h2 + h1 0.58h o + h o
27. (B) ETotal = Ei + Er ,
Eor = GEoi = -2.66
ho
G=
1
sin 45 = 0.333
4.5
sin q t1 =
q t1 = 19.47
q t2 = sin -1 0.47 = 28
But cos q t =
G=
h1
h
cos q B = o cos 58.2 = 2.6 cos 58.2
ho
h2
2.6
q t = 31.8
mr
h
= o = 0.447ho
er
5
Ei
Er
ho -
h - h1
G= 2
= - 0.38, t = 1 + G = 0.62
h2 + h1
G=
h2 - h1
=
h2 + h1
m r2
m r1
+ ho
er 2
e r1
ho
m r 2 1 + 0.447
=
= 0.382, 2.62
m r1 1 0.447
e r1 m r 2
=
e r 2 m r1
= 0.056, 17.9
m r1
m r2
m r32
m r31
m r2
m r1
+
m r32
m r31
e r1
-1
er 2
e r1
er 2
l2
-1
l
= 1
l2
+1
+1
l1
mr
h
= o
er
er
1 h2 - h1
=
2 h2 + h1
ho
er 1
=
ho
2
ho +
er
37. (C) At minimum
G = 0.447
m r2
m r1
- ho
er 2
e r1
ho
1+
Et = tEi = 92.7 cos ( wt - 8 y) u z V m

32. (B) |G| = 0.2 ,
e r1 l2
=
e r 2 l1
1
l2 - l1 3 - 5
=
=4
l2 + l1 3 + 5
36. (D) h2 = ho , h1 = ho
G=
1
4 = 5
35. (A) s =
=
1
1 - |G|
3
14
2.6 e o
= 2.6
eo
31. (A) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
ho
er 2
e r1
h2 - h1
=
=
ho
ho
h2 + h1
+
er 2
e r1
1 + |G|
30. (A) Since both media are non magnetic

e1
=
e2
The fraction of the incident energy that is reflected is

1
= 6.25%.
G2 =
16
e
4.5
29. (B) sin q t 2 = 1 sin q t1 =
(0.333) = 0.47
e2
2.25
tan q B =
= 692 + j176 W
e j 20
3
e j 20
3
28. (B) m o = m 1 = m 2
eo
sin q i
e1
1 +
= 377
2 pc
2 pc
34. (A) e r1 =
, e r 2 =
l1 w
l2 w
ETotal = 10 cos ( wt - z) u y - 2.66 cos ( wt + z) u y V m
h2 - h1
, h1 = ho ,
h2 + h1
1 + G
h2 = ho
1-G
Et = 7.34 cos ( wt - z) u y V m
Er 50 20 e j 20
=
=
Ei
150
3
Eot = tEoi = 7.34
t = 1 + G = 0.734,
sin q t1 =
Chap 8.5
er = 9
( f + p)
= 0.3l ,
2b
2p
f = 0.2 p
l
s -1
3 -1 1
=
=
|G| =
s+1
3+1 2
h - ho
G = 0.5 e j 0 .2 p = 2
h2 + ho
b=
m r1 - m r 2
m r1 + m r 2
1 + 0.5 e j 0 .2 p
= 641 + j502 W
h2 = ho
j 0 .2 p
1 - 0.5 e
www.gatehelp.com
Page
501
UNIT 8
ho
3.45
ho
3.45
- ho
+ ho
= -0.3
43. (B) q c = sin -1
39. (C) This frequency gives the condition b2 d = p

Where d = 6 cm, b2 = w m 2 e 2
f =
p
0.06
1
2 0.06 2 10 -6 25 10 -12
= 118
. GHz
40. (B) At 50 MHz,

b2 = w m 2 e2 = 2 p 50 10 6 2 10 -6 25 10 -12 = 2. 2
b2 d = 2.22(0.06) = 0.133
h1 =
m1
4 10 -6
=
= 632 W
e1
10 -11
h3 = 632 W
h2 =
m2
2 10 -6
=
= 283 W
e2
25 10 -12
The input impedance at the first interface is

h + jh2 tan (b2 d)
632 + j283(0.134)
= 283
hin = h2 3
283 + j 632(0.134)
h2 + jh3 tan (b2 d)
= 590 - j138
h - h1 590 - j138 - 632
G = in
=
= 0.12 - 100.5
h in + h1 590 - j138 + 632
s=
1 + |G|
1 - |G|
1 + 0.12
= 1.27
1 - 0.12
41. (C) bd =
2p l p
p
= , tan
=1
l 8 4
4
h2 = 260, h1 = h3 = ho
h + jh2 tan (b2 d)
377 + j260
= 260
hin = h2 3
+
j
tan
(
d
)
h
h
b
260 + j 377
2
3
2
= 243 - j92 W
h - ho 243 - j92 - 377
G = in
=
= 0.26 - 137
hin + ho 243 - j92 + 377
s=
1 + |G|
1 - |G|
126
.
= 170
.
0.74
42. (A) w = 108 rad s, b =

Page
502
er
e r = 3.
er 2
= sin -1
e r1
1
= 6.38
81
********
2
w m 2 e2 =
108
The transmitted fraction is 1 - |G| = 1 - 0.09 = 0.91.
3 108
mr
ho
=
er
3.45
38. (A) h1 = ho , h2 = ho
h - h1
G= 2
=
h2 + h1
Electromagnetics
1
3
rad m, v =
c
er
w
b
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
8.7
WAVEGUIDES
Statement for Q.13:
Statement for Q.67:
A 2 cm by 3 cm rectangular waveguide is filled
In an air-filled rectangular waveguide the cutoff
with a dielectric material with e r = 6. The waveguide is
frequencies for TM11 and TE03 modes are both equal to
operating at 20 GHz with TM11 mode.
12 GHz.
1. The cutoff frequency is
6. The dominant mode is
(A) 3.68 GHz
(B) 22.09 GHz
(A) TM10
(B) TM 01
(C) 9.02 GHz
(D) 16.04 GHz
(C) TE01
(D) TE10
2. The phase constant is

(A) 816 rad m
(B) 412 rad m
(C) 1009 rad m
(D) 168 rad m
7. At dominant mode the cutoff frequency is

(A) 11.4 GHz
(B) 4 GHz
(C) 5 GHz
(D) 8 GHz
3. The phase velocity is

(A) 1.24 108 m s
(B) 154
. 106 m s
(C) 305
. 10 m s
(D) 7.48 10 m s
8. For an air-filled rectangular waveguide given that
4. In an an-filled rectangular wave guide, the cutoff

frequency of a TE10 mode is 5 GHz where as that of TE01
2 px
3py
12
Ez = 10 sin
sin
cos (10 t - bz) V m
a
b
If the waveguide has cross-sectional dimension
mode is 12 GHz. The dimensions of the guide is
a = 6 cm and b = 3 cm, then the intrinsic impedance of
(A) 3 cm by 1.25 cm
(B) 1.25 cm by 3 cm
this mode is
(C) 6 cm by 2.5 cm
(D) 2.5 cm by 6 cm
(A) 373.2 W
(B) 378.9 W
(C) 375.1 W
(D) 380.0 W
5. Consider a 150 m long air-filled hollow rectangular

waveguide with cutoff frequency 6.5 GHz. If a short
pulse of 7.2 GHz is introduced into the input end of the
guide, the time taken by the pulse to return the input
end is

In an air-filled waveguide, a TE mode operating at
6 GHz has
(A) 920 ns
(B) 460 ns
(C) 230 ns
(D) 430 ns
www.gatehelp.com
2 px
py
E y = 15 sin
cos sin ( wt - 12 z) V m
a
b
Page
511
UNIT 8
9. The cutoff frequency is
Electromagnetics
16. The cross section of a waveguide is shown in fig.
(A) 4.189 GHz
(B) 5.973 GHz
P8.7.16. It has dielectric discontinuity as shown in fig.
(C) 8.438 GHz
(D) 7.946 GHz
P8.7.16. If the guide operate at 8 GHz in the dominant

mode, the standing wave ratio is
y
10. The intrinsic impedance is

(A) 35.72 W
(B) 3978 W
(C) 1989 W
(D) 71.44 W
2.5 cm
mo, eo
Statement for Q.1112.
mo, 2.25eo
z
5 cm
Fig. P8.7.16
Consider an air-filled rectangular wave guide with

cm. The y-component of the
a = 2.286 cm and b = 1016
.
(A) -3.911
(B) 2.468
TE mode is
(C) 1.564
(D) 4.389
2 px
3py
10
E y = 12 sin
cos
sin (10 p 10 t - bz) V m
a
b

Consider the rectangular cavity as shown in fig.
11. The propagation constant g is
P8.7.1719.
(A) j4094.2
(B) j400.7
(C) j2733.3
(D) j276.4
12. The intrinsic impedance is

(A) 743 W
(B) 168 W
(C) 986 W
(D) 144 W
Consider a air-filled waveguide operating in the

TE12 mode at a frequency 20% higher than the cutoff
frequency.
13. The phase velocity is
(A) 1.66 108 m s
(B) 5.42 108 m s
(C) 2.46 108 m s
(D) 9.43 108 m s
(A) 1.66 108 m s
(B) 4.42 108 m s
(C) 2.46 108 m s
(D) 9.43 108 m s
rectangular
waveguide
is
filled
17. If a < b < c, the dominant mode is

(A) TE011
(B) TM110
(C) TE101
(D) TM101
18. If a > b > c, then the dominant mode is
14. The group velocity is
Fig. P8.7.1719
15.
(A) TE011
(B) TM110
(C) TE101
(D) TM101
19. If a = c > b, then the dominant mode is
with
(A) TE011
(B) TM110
(C) TE101
(D) TM101
polyethylene ( e r = 2.25) and operates at 24 GHz. The
20. The air filled cavity resonator has dimension a = 3
cutoff frequency of a certain mode is 16 GHz. The
cm, b = 2 cm, c = 4 cm. The resonant frequency for the
intrinsic impedance of this mode is
TM110 mode is
(A) 2248 W
(B) 337.2 W
(A) 5 GHz
(B) 6.4 GHz
(C) 421.4 W
(D) 632.2 W
(C) 16.2 GHz
(D) 9 GHz
Page
512
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
SOLUTIONS
frequency, the TM1 mode propagates through the guide

without suffering any reflective loss at the dielectric
interface. This frequency is
1. (A) fc =
er2 = 2.1
er1 = 4 Incident wave
1 cm
z
Fig. P8.7.34
(A) 8.6 GHz
(B) 12.8 GHz
(C) 4.3 GHz
(D) 7.5 GHz
v m
n
+
2 a
b
3 108
2 6 10 -2
1
1
+ = 3.68 GHz
2
3
2
f
f
w
2. (C) bp = b 1 - c =
1 - c
f
v
f

A 6 cm 4 cm rectangular wave guide is filled with
bp =
2 p 20 10 9 6
3.68
1 -
= 1009 rad m
3 108
20
dielectric of refractive index 1.25.

35. The range of frequencies over which single mode
3. (A) vp =
w
2 p 20 10 9
=
= 1.24 108 m s
bp
1009
operation will occur is

(A) 2.24 GHz < f < 3.33 GHz
4. (A) For TE10 mode fc =
(B) 2 GHz < f < 3 GHz

(C) 4.48 GHz < f <7.70 GHz
v
3 108
=
= 3 cm
2 fc 2 5 10 9
a=
(D) 4 GHz < f < 6 GHz
For TE01 mode fc =

36. The range of frequencies, over which guide support
b=
both TE10 and TE01 modes and no other, is

(A) 3.35 GHz < f < GHz
(B) 2.5 GHz < f < 3.6 GHz
c
f
1 - c
f
(C) 3 GHz < f < 3.6 GHz
37. Two identical rectangular waveguide are joined end
t=
v
,
2b
v
3 108
=
= 1.25 cm
2 fc 2 12 10 9
5. (D) v =
(D) 2.5 GHz < f < 4.02 GHz
v
,
2a
3 108
6.5
1 -
7.2
= 6.975 108 ms
2l
2 150
=
= 430 ns
v 6.975 108
to end where a = 2 b. One guide is air filled and other is

filled with a lossless dielectric of e r . it is found that up
6. (C) 12 10 9 =
to a certain frequency single mode operation can be

simultaneously
ensured
in
both
guide.
For
this
frequency range, the maximum allowable value of e r is

(A) 4
(B) 2
(C) 1
(D) 6
3 108
3
0+
2
b
2
12
. 10 9 =
b = 375
. cm
2
3 108 1
1
+
a = 1.32 cm
2
. 10 -2
a
375
Since a < b, the dominant mode is TE01 .
38. A parallel-plate guide operates in the TEM mode
7. (B) fc 01 =
3 108
v
=
= 4 GHz
2 b 2 375
. 10 -2
only over the frequency range 0 < f < 3 GHz. The

dielectric between the plates is teflon ( e r = 2.1). The
8. (C) Ez 0, this must be TM 23 mode ( m = 2, n = 3)
maximum allowable plate separation b is

(A) 3.4 cm
(B) 6.8 cm
(C) 4.3 cm
(D) 8.6 cm
*************
Page
514
fc =
3 108
2 10 -2
f =
w 1012
=
= 159.2 GHz
2p 2p
www.gatehelp.com
2
3
+ = 15.81 GHz
6
3
Waveguides
Chap 8.7
ho
377
f
15.81
hTM = 377 1 - c = 377 1 -
= 375.1 W
f
159.2

h1 =
9. (B) m = 2, n = 1, bp = 12, f = 6 GHz
In dielectric medium
f
w
1 - c
bp =
v
f
2 p 6 10 9
f
12 =
1 - c
8
3 10
6
fc =
h=
fc = 5.973 GHz
377
10. (B) hTE =
f
1 - c
f
377
5.973
1 -
= 3978 W
11. (B) m = 2, n = 3,
2
fc =
2
3
2
.
286
.
1016
3 108
c m
n
+ =
2 a
2 10 -2
b
f
1 - c
f
er
3 108
377
2.25
= 251.33 W, h2 =
f
1 - c
f
259.23 - 406.7
h2 - h1
=
= -0.22
259.23 + 406.7
h2 + h1
s=
1 + |G| 1 + 0.22
=
= 1564
.
1 -|G| 1 - 0.22
46.2
1 -
50
377
46.2
1 -
50
hTE =
h
f
1 - c
f
f
1 - c
1.2 f c
n = 1, 2, 3.....
= 986 W
p = 1, 2, 3...... ,
1
1 1
>
>
a
b c
if a < b < c, then
fr1 =
377
= 251.33 W
.
15
251.33
16
1 -
24
v 1
1
+
2 a
b
The lowest TE mode is TE011 with
= 337.2 W
16. (C) Since a > b, the dominant mode is TE10 .

In free space fc =
For TE mode to z
= 5. 42 108 m s
er
v m
n
p
+ +
2 a
b

c
The lowest TM mode is TM110 with
3 10
= 259.23 W
p = 0, 1, 2 ......
f
f
14. (A) v g = v 1 - c = c 1 - c = 1.66 108 m s
. fc
f
12
377
n = 1, 2, 3...... ,
fr 2 =
15. (B) h =
2
1 -
8
m = 1, 2, 3.....,
251.33
G=
= 2 GHz
2 0.05 2.25
m = 1, 2, 3...... ,
13. (A) v = c, f = 1.2 fc

vp =
= 406.7 W
where for TM mode to z
2 p 50 10 9
=
3 108
377
ho
3
1 -
8
= 400.7 m -1 , g = jbp = j 400.7

12. (C) hTE =
2 a er
17. (A) fr =
10 p 1010
= 50 GHz
2p
f
w
1 - c
bp =
v
f
= 46.2 GHz
f =
f
1 - c
f
c
3 108
=
= 3 GHz
2 a 2 0.05
v 1
1
+
2 b
c
fr 2 > fr1 , Hence the dominant mode is TE011

18. (B) If a > b > c then
1 1 1
< <
a b c

2
fr1 =
v 1
1
+
2 a
b

2
fr 2 =
v 1
1
+
2 a
c
fr 2 > fr1
www.gatehelp.com
Hence the dominant mode is TM110 .

Page
515
UNIT 8
1 1 1
= <
a c b
19. (C) If a = c > b, then

2
fr1 =
v 1
1
+
2 a
b
fr 2 =
v 1
1
+
2 a
c
v m
n
p
+ +
2 a
b
c
3 108 2
2
a
m<
mc
2 b er
f >
a = 10.6 cm
2 3 108
2 0.01 e r
mc
2 b er
15
. 108
a
12
. 15
. 108
a
3 10 9 <
er = 9
m<
15
. 108
,
b
0.8 15
. 108
b
b < 4 cm, Thus (C) is correct option.
27. (C) fc =
= 10 10
c
3 108
=
= 2.3 GHz
2 a 2 0.065
vp =
f
1 - c
f
3 108
2.3
1 -
= 4.7 108 m s
28. (B) For TE10 mode
2 fb e r
c
Rs =
m < 316
.
p 9 10 9 4 p 10 -7
= 0.0568
. 10 7
11
1
pfm
=
=
sc d
sc
2
2
2 b fc
2 15
. 3.876
Rs 1 +

0.0568 1 +
a f
2.4 9
=
ac =
2
2
f
3.876
15
. 10 -2 233.8 1 -
bh 1 - c
9
f
= 0.022
,
fc 2 = 2 fc1 = 15 GHz
29. (B)
f =
c
3 108
=
= 20 GHz
l
0.015
vg2
f
15
8
= c 1 - c = 3 108 1 -
= 2 10 m s
20
f
Page
516
3 10 9 >
m 2 + k2 n2
a > 6 cm
Thus total 7 modes.
25. (A) fc =
3 GHz < 0.8 fc 01
The maximum allowed m is 3. The propagating mode
2 b er
c m
15
. 108
n
+ =
2 a
a
b
The next higher mode is TE01 , fc 01 =
will be TM1 , TE1 , TM 2 , TE2 , TM 3 , TE3 and TEM
24. (B) fcm =
7.21
2 30 10 9 0.01 2.5
3 108
mc
6.15
3 GHz > 12
. fc
23. (A) For a propagating mode f > fcm ,

fcm =
6.8
2 b er
14.4
Dominant mode is TE10 , fc10 =
21. (A) m = n = 1, p = 0, a = b = c, fr = 2 Ghz,
22. (A) fc =
lc (cm)
v m
n
p
+ +
2 a
b
c
mc
TE20
fcmn =
2 10 9 =
TE11
26. (C) Let a = kb , 1 < k < 2
3 108 1
1
+ = 9 GHz
2 0.01 3
2
fr =
TE01
TE10
l > lc . Hence TE10 mode can be used.
fr2 < fr1 Hence the dominant mode is TE101 .

20. (D) fr =
Mode

2
Electromagnetics
sd
10 -15
10 -15
=
=
we 2 p 9 10 9 2.6 8.85 10 -12
1.3
sd
<< 1, hence v
we
fc =
1
me
3 108
2 2.4 10 -2 2.6
c
2.6
, h
377
2.6
= 233.8
= 3.876 GHz
2
c m
n
+ , lc =
2
2
2 a
b

m
n
+
a
b
ad =
www.gatehelp.com
sdh
f
1 - c
f
10 -15 233.8
3.876
2 1 -
= 1.3 10 -13 Np m
Waveguides
30. (D) Dominant mode is TE10 mode

fc =
-7
= 1.429 10 -2 W
2 b fc
2 3.4 2.08
-2
Rs 1 +

a f 1.429 10 1 + 7.2 3
=
ac =
2
2
f
2.08
377 0.034 1 -
bh 1 - c
3
f
e- a c z
1
=
2
-3
Np m
z=
1
ln 2 = 308 m
ac
c m
3 108 m
n
n
+ =
+
2 a
2 0.01 8
10
b
2
34. (B) The ray angle is such that the wave is interface
fc1 =
f =
2 b e r1
3 1010
= 7.5 GHz
2 1 2
7.5
fc1
=
= 12.8 GHz
cos q cos 54.1
fc10 =
c
a2 e r
fc 01 =
m
n
= 15 +
GHz
8
10
c
b2 e r
c
2 er
m
n
+
a
b
3 108
= 2 GHz
. 0.06
2 125
3 108
= 3 GHz
. 0.04
2 125
2 GHz < f < 3 GHz
fc 01 = 15
. GHz,
fc11 = 2.4 GHz
fc 20 = 375
. GHz ,
fc 02 = 3 GHz,
fc 21 = 4.04 GHz,
fc12 = 354
. GHz,
36. (C) fc11 =
3 108
. 10 -2
2 125
If fc < f , then mode will be transmit. Hence six mode
37. (A) fc =
will be transmitted.
c
2 er
m
n
+ , In guide 1 e r = 1
2b
b
lowest cutoff frequency fc10 =

32. (C) For dominant mode (m = 1, n = 0)
Since given frequency is below the cutoff frequency, 3

GHz will not be propagated and get attenuated
2
mp
np w
g = a + jb =
-
+
a
b n
mp w
p 2 p 3 10
a=
- =
-
8
a
c

0.04 3 10
2
33. (B) fc =
fc10 =
c m
n
+
2 a
b
c
2b
In guide 2 lowest cutoff frequency fc10 =

Next lowest cutoff frequency fc20 =
c
2 e r 2 (2 b)
c
2 e r 2 ( b)
For single mode fc10 < f < fc10
b = 0, Since wave is attenuated,

2
c
2(2 b)
Next lowest cutoff frequency fc 20 =
c m
3 108
n
GHz
.
fc =
= 375
+ =
2 a
2 0.04
b
1
1
+ = 3.6 GHz
6

4
3 GHz < f < 3.6 GHz
fc 30 = 5.625 GHz , fc 03 = 4.5 GHz
fc10 = 1.875 GHz
2.1
= 35.9 .
4
The ray angle q = 90 -35.9 = 54.1
35. (A) fc =
31. (B)
fcmn =
2p 1.5 1.875
p
-
3 108
0.08
at Brewsters angle q B = tan -1
For TE10 mode
= 2.25 10
= j439
.
p 3 10 4 p 10
5.8 10 7
pfm o
=
sc
mp
np
w
+
- =
a
b
n
g=
c
3 108
=
= 2.08 GHz
2 a 2 0.072
Rs =
Chap 8.7
= 47.1
c
c
<f <
2(2 b)
2 e r ( b)
38. (A) f < fc
f <
3 10 9 <
3 108
c
=
= 1.875 GHz
2 a 2 0.08
er < 4
v
3 108
=
2 b 2 b 2.1
3 108
2 b 2.1
b < 3.4 cm
*******************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
517
CHAPTER
8.8
ANTENNAS
1. A Hertizian dipole at the origin in free space has
5. The time-average poynting vector at 50 km is
dl = 10 cm and I = 20 cos (2 p 10 t) A. The | E| at the
(A) 6.36u r mW m 2
(B) 4.78u r mW m 2
distant point (100, 0, 0) is
(C) 9.55u r mW m 2
(D) 12.73u r mW m 2
(A) 0.252 V m
(B) 0.126 V m
(C) 0.04 V m
(D) 0.08 V m
6. The maximum electric field at that location is
Statement for Q.23:

A 25 A source operating at 300 MHz feeds a
Hertizian dipole of length 4 mm situated at the origin.
Consider the point P(10, 30, 90).
2. The H at point P is
(A) j0.25 mA m
(B) 94.25 mA m
(C) j0.5 mA m
(D) 188.5 mA m
(A) 24 mV m
(B) 85 mV m
(C) 109 mV m
(D) 12 mV m
7. In free space, an antenna has a far-zone field given

by E =
1
r
10 sin 2 q e - jbr u q V m. The radiated power is
(A) 0.23 W
(B) 0.89 W
(C) 1.68 W
(D) 1.23 W
8.
At
Pave =
the
far
field,
an
antenna
cos q cos f u r W m , where
1
r2
p
2
0<q<p
and
0 < f < . The directive gain of the antenna is
3. The E at point P is
(A) j0.25 mV m
(B) j0.5 mV m
(A) cos q cos f
(B) 2 sin q cos f
(C) j94.25 mV m
(D) j188.5 mV m
(C) 8 cos q sin f
(D) 8 sin q cos f
4. An antenna can be modeled as an electric dipole of
length 4 m at 3 MHz. If current is uniform over its

length, then radiation resistance of the antenna is
(A) 1.974 W
(B) 1.263 W
(C) 2.186 W
(D) 2.693 W
Statement for Q.56:

A antenna located on the surface of a flat earth
Page
518
produces
The radiation intensity of antennas has been

given. Determine the directivity of antenna.
9. U( q, f) = sin 2 q, 0 < q < p ,
0 < f < 2p
(A) 1.875
(B) 2.468
(C) 3.943
(D) 6.743
transmit an average power of 150 kW. Assume that all
10. U( q, f) = 4 sin 2 q sin 2 f ,
the power is radiated uniformly over the surface of
(A) 15
(B) 12
hemisphere with the antenna at the center.
(C) 3
(D) 6
www.gatehelp.com
0 < q < p,
0 <f<p
Antennas
11. The radiation intensity of a antenna is given by

U( q, f) = 8 sin q cos f , where 0 < q < p and 0 < f < p. The
2
directive gain is
(A) 6 sin 2 q cos 2 f
(C) 3 sin 2 f cos 2 q
(B) 3 sin 2 q cos 2 f

(D) 6 sin 2 f cos 2 q
Chap 8.8
19. Two identical antenna separated by 12 m are

oriented for maximum directive gain. At a frequency of
5 GHz, the power received by one is 30 dB down from
the transmitted by the other. The gain of antenna is
(A) 22 dB
(C) 19 dB
(B) 16 dB
(D) 13 dB
At the far field, an antenna radiates a field
12. The total radiated power is
An L-band pulse radar has common transmitting

and receiving antenna. The antenna having directive
gain of 36 dB operates at 1.5 GHz and transmits 200
kW. The object is 120 km from the radar and its
scattering cross section is 8 m 2 .
(A) 1.36 W
(C) 0.844 W
20. The magnitude of the incident electric field
0.4 cos 2 q - jbr

Ef =
e
kV m
4 pr
(B) 2.14 W
(D) 3.38 W
intensity of the object is

13. The directive gain at q = p 3 is
(A) 0.3125
(C) 1.963
14. An antenna has directivity of 100 and operates at

150 MHz. The maximum effective aperture is
(A) 31.8 m 2
(C) 26.4 m 2
21. The magnitude of the scattered electric field at the

radar is
(A) 18 mW
(C) 17 mW
(B) 62.4 m 2
(D) 13.2 m 2
15. Two half wave dipole antenna are operated at 100

MHz and separated by 1 km. If 100 W is transmitted by
one, the power received by the other is (D = 1.68)
(A) 12 mW
(C) 18 mW
(B) 2.46 V m
(D) 0.17 V m
(A) 1.82 V m
(C) 0.34 V m
(B) 0.625
(D) 3.927
(B) 12 mW
(D) 126 mW
22. A transmitting antenna with a 300 MHz carrier

frequency produces 2 kW of power. If both antennas has
unity power gain, the power received by another
antenna at a distance of 1 km is
(A) 11.8 mW
(C) 18.4 mW
(B) 10 mW
(D) 16 mW
16. The electric field strength impressed on a half wave
(B) 18.4 mW
(D) 12.7 mW
23. A bistatic radar system shown in fig. P8.7.23 has
dipole is 6 mV m at 60 MHz. The maximum power
following parameters: f = 5 GHz,
received by the antenna is (D = 1.68)
22 dB. To obtain a return power of 8 pW the minimum
(A) 159 nW
(C) 196 mW
necessary radiated power is
(B) 230 nW
(D) 318 mW
Gdt = 34 dB,
Gdr =
Target s = 2.4m2
Scattered wave
17. The power transmitted by a synchronous orbit
Incident
wave
satellite antenna is 480 W. The antenna has a gain of
4 km
40 dB at 15 GHz. The earth station is located at

distance of 24, 567 km. If the antenna of earth station
has a gain of 32 dB, the power received is
(A) 32 pW
(C) 10.2 pW
Receiving
antenna
Transmitting
antenna
3 km
Fig. P8.7.23
(B) 3.2 fW
(D) 1.3 fW
(A) 1.394 kW
(C) 1.038 kW
18. The directive gain of an antenna is 36 dB. If the
(B) 2.046 kW
(D) 3.46 kW
time average power density at that distance is
24. The radiation resistance of an antenna is 63 W and

loss resistance 7 W. If antenna has power gain of 16,
then directivity is
(A) 9.42 mW m 2
(C) 1.32 mW m 2
(A) 48.26 dB
(C) 38.96 dB
antenna radiates 15 kW at a distance of 60 km, the

(B) 6.83 mW m 2
(D) 10.46 mW m 2
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 12.5 dB
(D) 24.7 dB
Page
519
UNIT 8
Electromagnetics
25. An antenna is desired to operate on a frequency of
SOLUTIONS
40 MHz whose quality factor is 50. The bandwidth of

antenna is
(A) 5.03 MHz
(C) 127 kHz
(B) 800 kHz

26. A thin dipole antenna is l 15 long. If its loss

(B) 59%
(C) 74.5%
(D) 25.5%

An array comprises of two dipoles that are
separated by the wavelength. The dipoles are fed by
currents of the same magnitude and phase.
27. The array factor is
(A) 2 cos ( p cos q + 45 )
(C) 2 cos ( p sin q + 45 )
(B) 2 cos ( p sin q )

(D) 2 cos ( p cos q )
(B) 60, 120
(C) 45, 135
(D) 0, 180
At far field | Eq| =
2. (A) b =
Hf =
29. The maximum of the pattern occur at

(A) q = 45 , 135
(B) q = 0, 90 , 180
(C) q = 30 , 150
(D) q = 60 , 150
)
(C) cos ( 2p cos q + 2p )
(B) cos ( 4p cos q +
)
(D) sin ( 2p cos q + 2p )
p
2
(B) 4 cos ( 4p cos q) cos (8p cos q)

(C) 4 cos ( 4p cos q) sin ( 2p cos q)
(D) 4 cos ( 4p cos q) sin (8p cos q)
***********
Page
520
c 3 108
=
= 100
f 3 106
dl
4
1
1
=
=
<
l 100 25 10
80 p2
dl
Rrad = 80 p2 =
= 1263
.
W
625
l
5. (C) Prad = Pave dS = Pave 2 pr 2
Pave =
Prad
150 10 3
=
= 9.55 mW m 2
2 pr 2 2 p(50 10 3) 2
P = 9.55 u r mW m 2
31. An antenna consists of 4 identical Hertizian dipoles

uniformly located along the zaxis and polarized in the
z-direction. The spacing between the dipole is l / 4 . The
group pattern function is
(A) 4 cos ( 4p cos q) cos ( 2p cos q)
j(2.5)(2 p) ( 4 10 -3) - j 2 p10

e
= j0.25 mA m
4 p(10)
30. An array comprises two dipoles that are separated

by half wavelength. If the dipoles are fed by currents,
that are 180 out of phase with each other, then array
factor is
p
4
w 2 p 300 106
=
= 2p
c
3 108
3. (C) E = Eq = hH f = 377 H f = j94.25 mV m

4. (B) l =
(A) sin ( 4p cos q +
hI obdl
sin q
4 pr
r = 10 m, q = 30 , f = 90
jI bdl
At far field H = H f = o
sin q e - jbr
4 pr
28. The nulls of the pattern occur when q is

(A) 30, 150
w 2 p 10 7 2 p
=
=
c
3 108
30
h = 120 p = 377, I o = 20, dl = 10 cm

p
At (100 cm, 0, 0), q =
2
120 p 20 0.1 2 p
= 0.126 V m
| Eq| =
4 p 100
30
resistance is 1.2 W, the efficiency is

(A) 41.1%
1. (B) b =
6. (B) Pave =
( Emax ) 2
2h
Emax = 2hPave
Emax = 2 377 9.55 10 -6 = 85 mV m
7. (B) Pave =
Prad =
|E|2
2h
100 sin 2 2 q
sin q dq df
2h
p
100
(2 p)(2 sin q cos q) 2 sin q dq
2 120 p 0
10
sin 3 q cos 2 qdq = 0.89 W
3 0
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 8
Gd =
2p
l = 2p , a = 0
l
bd cos q + a
AF = 2 cos
= 2 cos ( p cos q)= 2 cos ( p cos q)
2
4 p(12) 1
= 79.48 = 19 dB
0.06
10 3
27. (D) bd =
20. (A) Gd = 36 dB = 3981

Gd =
4 pr 2 Pi
Prad
Pi =
Gd Prad |E|2
=
4 pr 2
2h
28. (B) cos ( p cos q) = 0
(240 p) Gd Prad
|E|=
4 pr 2
( 60)( 3981)(200 10 3)
(120 10 3) 2
= 1.82 V m
21. (B) |Es|=
1.82
=
120 10 3
22. (D) l =
|Er|2 s |Ei| s
=
4 pr 2
4p
r
8
4p
l
1
Pr = Gdr Gdt
2000 = 12.7 mW
P = (1)(1)
3
4
p
r
4 p10
Gdr Gdt l
4 p 4 pr1 r2
p
3p
,
2
2
cos q =
1
2
q = 60 , 120
29. (B) Maxima occur when
d( AF )
=0
dq
sin ( p cos q) p sin q = 0
q = 0, 90 , 180
31. (A) ( AF ) N
Nf
sin
2
=
y
sin
2
y = bd cos q + a , N = 4
sin 4 x 2 sin 2 x cos 2 x
=
= 4 cos x cos 2 x
sin x
sin x
y p
2p l p
= cos q
bd =
= , a = 0,
2 4
l 4 2
p
AF = 4 cos cos q cos cos q .

4
2
sPrad
Gdt = 34 dB = 2512, Gdr = 22 dB = 158.5

r1 = 3 km, r2 = 32 + 4 2 = 5 km
l=
p cos q =
2p l
=p , a =p
l 2
p
bd cos q + a
p
AF = 2 cos
= cos cos q +
2
2
c
3 108
=
=1 m
f 300 106
23. (C) Pr =
30. (B) bd =
= 12 mW
Electromagnetics
3 108
= 0.06 m, Pr = 8 pW
5 10 9
2
8 10
-12
0.06
(2512)(158.5)
(2.4) Prad
4p
4
3
5
p
(
k
)(
k
)
kW
Prad = 1038
.
24. (B) Efficiency =

D=
************
63
= 0.9
63 + 7
Gain
16
=
= 17.78 = 12.5 dB
Efficiency 0.9
25. (B) BW =
f 40 106
=
= 800 kHz
Q
50
dl
26. (C) Radiation resistance Rr = 80 p2
l
1
= 80 p2
. W
= 351
15
Efficiency =
Page
522
351
.
Rr
=
= 74.5 %
. + 12
.
Rr + RL 351
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
9.1
LINEAR ALGEBRA
0
1. If A = - 1
1
0
-2
-2
3
l
is a singular matrix, then l is
(A) 0
(B) -2
(C) 2
(D) -1
7. Every diagonal elements of a Hermitian matrix is

(A) Purely real
(B) 0
(C) Purely imaginary
(D) 1
8. Every diagonal element of a SkewHermitian matrix

is
2. If A and B are square matrices of order 4 4 such
(A) Purely real
(B) 0
that A = 5B and A = a B , then a is
(C) Purely imaginary
(D) 1
(A) 5
(B) 25
(C) 625
(D) None of these
9. If A is Hermitian, then iA is
3. If A and B are square matrices of the same order

such that AB = A and BA = A , then A and B are both
(A) Symmetric
(B) Skewsymmetric
(C) Hermitian
(D) SkewHermitian
(A) Singular
(B) Idempotent
10. If A is SkewHermitian, then iA is
(C) Involutory
(D) None of these
(A) Symmetric
(B) Skewsymmetric
(C) Hermitian
(D) SkewHermitian.
-5 -8 0
4. The matrix, A = 3 5 0 is
1 2 -1
(A) Idempotent
(C) Singular
- 1 - 2
11. If A = 2
1
2 - 2
(B) Involutory
(D) None of these
5. Every diagonal element of a skewsymmetric matrix
-2
- 2 , then adj. A is equal to
(A) A
(B) c t
(C) 3A t
(D) 3A
is
(A) 1
(C) Purely real
6. The matrix, A =
-
(B) 0
(D) None of these
1
2
i
2
i
2
1
2
is
(A) Orthogonal
(B) Idempotent
(C) Unitary
(D) None of these
-1 2
12. The inverse of the matrix
is
3 -5
5
(A)
3
2
1
-5 -2
(C)
-3 -1
www.gatehelp.com
5
(B)
2
3
1
(D) None of these

Page
525
UNIT 9
1
13. Let A = 5
4 0
1
(A) -10 2
4
-1 -1
0
0
1
(C) -10
-1
0
2
-1
0
0 , then A -1 is equal to
2
1
0
2
1
(B) -5
1
2
-1 -1
0
0
Engineering Mathematics
19. The system equationsx + y + z = 6, x + 2 y + 3z = 10,

x + 2 y + lz = 12 is inconsistent, if l is
0
0
(A) 3
(B) -3
(C) 0
(D) None of these.
20.
The
system
of
equations
5 x + 3 y + 7 z = 4,
3 x + 26 y + 2 z = 9, 7 x + 2 y + 10 z = 5 has
(A) a unique solution
(D) None of these
(B) no solution
(C) an infinite number of solutions
2 -1
14. If the rank of the matrix, A = 4 7
1 4
3
l is 2, then
the value of l is
(D) none of these

21. If A is an nrow square matrix of rank (n - 1), then
(A) adj A = 0
(B) adj A 0
(D) None of these
(A) -13
(B) 13
(C) adj A = I n
(C) 3
(D) None of these
22.
The
system
of
equations
x - 4 y + 7 z = 14,
15. Let A and B be nonsingular square matrices of the
3 x + 8 y - 2 z = 13, 7 x - 8 y + 26 z = 5 has
same order. Consider the following statements.
(A) a unique solution
(I) ( AB) T = A TBT
(II) ( AB) -1 = B-1 A -1
(B) no solution
(III) adj( AB) = (adj. A)(adj. B)
(IV) r( AB) = r( A)r(B)
(C) an infinite number of solution

(D) none of these
(V) AB = A B
(A) I, III & IV
(B) IV & V
4
3
23. The eigen values of A =
are
9
5
(C) I & II
(D) All the above
(A) 1
(B) 1, 1
(C) -1, - 1
(D) None of these
Which of the above statements are false ?
1 -1
3 -2 is
4 -3
2
16. The rank of the matrix A = 0
2
(A) 3
(B) 2
2
8 -6
24. The eigen values of A = -6

7 - 4 are
3
2 - 4
(C) 1
(D) None of these
(A) 0, 3, -15
(B) 0, - 3 , - 15
(C) 0, 3, 15
(D) 0, - 3, 15
17.
The
system
15 x - 6 y + 5 z = 0,
of
equations
lx - 2 y + 2 z = 0
has
3 x - y + z = 0,
a
nonzero
solution, if l is
(A) 6
(B) -6
(C) 2
(D) -2
18.
The
system
of
then the eigen values of the matrix 2A are

1
3
(B) 2 , - 4 , 6
(A) , - 1 ,
2
2
(C) 1 , - 2, 3
equation
x - 2 y + z = 0,
2 x - y + 3z = 0, lx + y - z = 0 has the trivial solution as

the only solution, if l is
(A) l (C) l 2
Page
526
4
5
(B) l =
25. If the eigen values of a square matrix be 1, - 2 and 3,
4
3
(D) None of these
(D) None of these.
26. If A is a nonsingular matrix and the eigen values

of A are 2 , 3 , - 3 then the eigen values of A -1 are
1 1 -1
(A) 2 , 3 , - 3
(B) , ,
2 3 3
(C) 2 A , 3 A , - 3 A
www.gatehelp.com
(D) None of these
Linear Algebra
cos 2 f
cos f sin f
B=
cos
f
sin
f
sin 2 f
27. If -1 , 2 , 3 are the eigen values of a square matrix A

then the eigen values of A 2 are
(A) -1 , 2 , 3
(B) 1, 4, 9
(C) 1, 2, 3
(D) None of these
is a null matrix, then q and f differ by

(A) an odd multiple of p
28. If 2 , - 4 are the eigen values of a nonsingular

matrix A and A = 4, then the eigen values of adj A are
(A)
1
2
, -1
(C) 2 , - 4
1
4
(C) 4, 16
(C) an odd multiple of
p
2
p
2
(D) an even multiple
(D) 8 , - 16
35. If A and B are two matrices such that A + B and AB
eigenvalues of A T are
1
2
(B) an even multiple of p
(B) 2 , - 1
29. If 2 and 4 are the eigen values of A then the

(A)
Chap 9.1
are both defined, then A and B are

(A) both null matrices
(B) 2, 4
(B) both identity matrices
(D) None of these
(C) both square matrices of the same order

(D) None of these
30. If 1 and 3 are the eigenvalues of a square matrix A

0
36. If A =
tan
then A 3 is equal to
(A) 13( A - I 2 )
(B) 13A - 12I 2
(C) 12( A - I 2 )
(D) None of these
31. If A is a square matrix of order 3 and A = 2 then

A (adj A) is equal to
2
(A) 0
0
2
0
0
0
12
(B) 0
0
1
(C) 0
0
1
0
0
(D) None of these
0
1
2
8
32. The sum of the eigenvalues of A = 4
0
1
2
cos a - sin a2
then (I - A )
is equal to
cos a
sin a
(A) I + A
(B) I - A
(C) I + 2 A
(D) I - 2 A
- 4
, then for every positive integer
- 1
3
37. If A =
1
2
5
0
- tan a2
a
2
n, A n is equal to
3
9 is
1 + 2 n
(A)
n
4n
1 + 2 n
1 + 2 n
(B)
n
1 - 2 n
(C)
n
4n
1 + 2 n
(D) None of these
(A) 18
(B) 15
cos a
38. If A a =
- sin a
(C) 10
(D) None of these
statements :
equal to
sin a
, then consider the following
cos a
I. A a A b = A ab
33. If 1, 2 and 5 are the eigen values of the matrix A
then A is equal to
(A) 8
(B) 10
(C) 9
(D) None of these
34. If the product of matrices

cos q
cos q sin q
A =
and
2
cos q sin q sin q
2
- 4n
1 - 2 n
II. A a A b = A ( a + b)
cos n a
III. ( A a ) n =
n
- sin a
sin n a
cos n a
cos na
IV. ( A a ) n =
- sin na
sin na
cos na
Which of the above statements are true ?

(A) I and II
(B) I and IV
(C) II and III
(D) II and IV
www.gatehelp.com
Page
527
UNIT 9
39. If A is a 3-rowed square matrix such that A = 3,

then adj (adj A) is equal to :
(A) 3A
(B) 9A
(C) 27A
(D) none of these
40. If A is a 3-rowed square matrix, then adj (adj A) is
1 2 0
T
45. If A =
, then AA is
3 -1 4
1 3
(A)
-1 4
1 0 1
(B)
-1 2 3
1
2
(C)
1 26
(D) Undefined
equal to
(A) A
(B) A
46. The matrix, that has an inverse is
(C) A
(D) A
3 1
(A)
6 2
5 2
(B)
2 1
6 2
(C)
9 3
8 2
(D)
4 1
41. If A is a 3-rowed square matrix such that A = 2,

then adj (adj A 2 ) is equal to
(A) 2 4
(B) 28
47. The skew symmetric matrix is
(C) 216
(D) None of these
0 -2 5
(A) 2
0 6
-5 -6 0
1 5 2
(B) 6 3 1
2 4 0
0 1 3
(C) 1 0 5
3 5 0
0 3 3
(D) 2 0 2
1 1 0
2 x
42. If A =
x
0
1
and A -1 =
x
-1
0
, then the value
2
of x is
(A) 1
(C)
1
2
(B) 2
(D) None of these
1
1 1 0

48. If A =
and B = 0 , the product of A and B
1 0 1
1
1 2
43. If A = 2 1 then A -1 is
1 1
is
1 4
(A) 3 2
2 5
1 -2
(B) -2
1
1 2
2 3
(C) 3 1
2 7
(D) Undefined
-1 -8 -10
(C) 1 -2
-5
15
9 22
Page
528
1 0
(B)
0 1
1
(C)
2
1 0
(D)
0 2
A
49. Matrix D is an orthogonal matrix D =
C
2 -1
1 -2 - 5
44. If A = 1 0 and B =
then AB is
0
3 4
3
4
-1 -8 -10
(A) -1 -2
5
15
9 22
1
(A)
0
0 -10
0
(B) -1 -2
-5
0 21 -15
0 -8 -10
(D) 1 -2
-5
9 21 15
value of B is
1
(A)
2
(C) 1
(B)
B
. The
0
1
2
(D) 0
50. If A n n is a triangular matrix then det A is

n
(A)
( -1) a
i =1
ii
(B)
ii
(D)
i =1
(C)
( -1) a
i =1
www.gatehelp.com
ii
a
i =1
ii
Linear Algebra
t 2 cos t
dA
51. If A = t
, then dt will be
sin
e
t
Chap 9.1
SOLUTIONS
t 2 sin t
(A) t
e sin t
2t cos t
(B) t
e sin t
1. (B) A is singular if A = 0
2t - sin t
(C) t
cos t
e
(D) Undefined
0
-1
1
0
-2
-2
3 =0
l
-2
+ 2
1
l 0
1
- ( -1)
-2
- 2
0
+ 0
3 - 2
3
= 0
l
52. If A R n n , det A 0, then
(A) A is non singular and the rows and columns of A

are linearly independent.
( l - 4) + 2( 3) = 0
(B) A is non singular and the rows A are linearly

dependent.
2. (C) If k is a constant and A is a square matrix of
(C) A is non singular and the A has one zero rows.
order n n then kA = kn A .
(D) A is singular.
A = 5B A = 5B = 5 4 B = 625 B
l - 4 + 6 =0 l = -2
a = 625
************
3. (B) A is singular, if A = 0,
A is Idempotent, if A 2 = A
A is Involutory, if A 2 = I
Now, A 2 = AA = ( AB) A = A( BA) = AB = A
and B2 = BB = (BA)B = B( AB) = BA = B
A 2 = A and B2 = B,
Thus A & B both are Idempotent.

-5 -8
4. (B) Since, A = 3 5
1 2
0 -5 -8
0 3 5
-1 1 2
1 0 0
= 0 1 0 = I,
0 0 1
A2 = I
0
0
-1
A is involutory.
5. (B) Let A = [ aij ] be a skewsymmetric matrix, then

AT = - A ,
aij = - aij ,
if i = j then aii = - aii
2 aii = 0
aii = 0
Thus diagonal elements are zero.

6. (C) A is orthogonal if AA T = I
A is unitary if AA Q = I , where A Q is the conjugate
transpose of A i.e., A Q = ( A) T .
Here,
AA Q =
1
2
i
2
1
2
i
1
2
i
2
2 1
=
1 0
2
i
0
= I2
1
Thus A is unitary.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
529
UNIT 9
7. (A) A square matrix A is said to be Hermitian if

A = A. So aij = a ji . If i = j then aii = aii i.e. conjugate of
Q
an element is the element itself and aii is purely real.

8. (C) A square matrix A is said to be Skew-Hermitian
if A = - A.
If A is SkewHermitian then A = - A
a ji = - aij ,
if i = j then aii = - aii
Now, ( iA) Q = i A Q = - iA Q = - iA,
Now, ( iA) Q = i A Q = - ( -A ) = iA then iA is Hermitian.

11. (C) If A = [ aij ]n n then det A = [ cij ]nT n
Where cij is the cofactor of aij
Also cij = ( -1) i + j M ij , where M ij is the minor of aij ,
row
and
the
the remaining matrix.

1
Now, M11 = minor of a11 i.e. -1 =
-2
-2
= -3
Similarly
1
2 - 2
2
= 6 ; M13 =
=-6
M12 =
1
2 - 2
2
-2
-1
= - 6 ; M 22 =
1
2
-1
M 23 =
2
- 2
= 6 ; M 31
- 2
-2
=
1
-1 - 2
= 6 ; M 33
M 32 =
2 - 2
-2
=3 ;
1
- 2
= 6 ;
-2
-1 - 2
=
2
= 3
1
C11 = ( -1)1 + 1 M11 = -3; C12 = ( -1)1 + 2 M12 = -6 ;

1+ 3
C13 = ( -1)
C22 = ( -1)
2+ 2
M13 = -6; C21 = ( -1)

M 22 = 3; C23 = ( -1)
2+1
2+ 3
M 21 = 6;
M 23 = -6;
C31 = ( -1) 3+ 1 M 31 = 6; C32 = ( -1) 3+ 2 M 32 = -6 ;

C33 = ( -1) 3+ 3 M 33 = 3
C11
det A = C21
C31
C12
C22
C32
T
C13
C23
C33
-5
adj A =
-3
0
0 = 4 0,
2
1
10 -10
4 0
2
-1 = 10 2
0
2
-1 -1
4
0
0
4 0
1
10 2
4
-1 -1
0
0
0
0
14. (B) A matrix A ( m n ) is said to be of rank r if

(i) it has at least one nonzero minor of order r, and
(ii) all other minors of order greater than r, if any; are
zero. The rank of A is denoted by r( A). Now, given that
r( A) = 2 minor of order greater than 2 i.e., 3 is zero.
2 - 1
Thus A =4
7
1
4
3
l = 0
2( 35 - 4 l) + 1(20 - l) + 3(16 - 7) = 0,
70 - 8 l + 20 - l + 27 = 0,
9 l = 117
l = 13
15. (A) The correct statements are

( AB) T = BT A T , ( AB) -1 = B-1 A -1 ,
adj ( AB) = adj (B) adj ( A)
r( AB) r( A) r(B), AB = A B
Thus statements I, II, and IV are wrong.
A = 2( -9 + 8) + 2( -2 + 3) = - 2 + 2 = 0
- 2
- 1
1
adj A
A
A -1 =
- 2 5
=
- 1 3
adj A ==
= -1
16. (B) Since
-3 -6 -6
-1 -2 -2
= 6
3 -6 = 3 2
1 -2 = 3A T
3
1
6 -6
2 -2
Page
530
-5
-3
column
corresponding to aij and then take the determinant of
-2
M 21 =
-2
1
-1
- 3
- 1
A =5
10. (C) A is SkewHermitian then A Q = - A
the
3 -5
-5
Also, adj A =
-2
( iA ) Q = - ( iA )
Thus iA is SkewHermitian.
leaving
13. (A) Since, A -1 =
9. (D) A is Hermitian then A Q = A
by
-1
Now, Here A =
it is only possible when aii is purely imaginary.
obtained
1
adj A
A
12. (A) Since A -1 =
A -1 =
aii + aii = 0
r( A ) < 3
2 1
= 6 0
Again, one minor of order 2 is
0 3
www.gatehelp.com
r( A ) = 2
UNIT 9
5
3-l
= 0

- 5 - l
-4
31. (A) Since A(adj A) = A I 3
( 3 - l)( - 5 - l) + 16 = 0
l + 2l + 1 = 0
2
- 15 + l + 2 l + 16 = 0
2
( l + 1) = 0
2
l = - 1, - 1
1
A(adj A) = 2 0
0
1
0
0 2
0 = 0

1 0
0
2
0
0
0
Thus eigen values are -1 , - 1

32. (A) Since the sum of the eigenvalues of an nsquare
24. (C) Characteristic equation is A - lI = 0
matrix is equal to the trace of the matrix (i.e. sum of the
-6
2
8 -l
-6
7-l
- 4= 0
- 4 3 - l
2
l2 - 18 l2 + 45 l = 0
l( l - 3)( l - 15) = 0
diagonal elements)
so, required sum = 8 + 5 + 5 = 18
33. (B) Since the product of the eigenvalues is equal to
the determinant of the matrix so A = 1 2 5 = 10
l = 0 , 3 , 15
25. (B) If eigen values of A are l1 , l2 , l3 then the eigen

values of kA are kl1 , kl2 , kl3. So the eigen values of 2A
are 2 , - 4 and 6
34. (C)
cos q cos f cos ( q - f) cos q sin f cos ( q - f)
AB =
=A
cos f sin q cos ( q - f) sin q sin f cos ( q - f)
null matrix when cos ( q - f) = 0
26. (B) If l1 , l2 ,........, l
are the eigen values of a
nonsingular matrix A, then A -1 has the eigen values

1 1
1
1 1
,
, ........,
. Thus eigen values of A -1 are , ,
l1 l2
ln
2 3
-1
.
3
This happens when ( q - f) is an odd multiple of
p
.
2
35. (C) Since A + B is defined, A and B are matrices of

the same type, say m n. Also, AB is defined. So, the
number of columns in A must be equal to the number of
rows in B i.e. n = m. Hence, A and B are square matrices
27. (B) If l1 , l2 , ......, l
are the eigen values of a matrix
A, then A has the eigen values l12 , l22 , ........, l 2n . So,
of the same order.
eigen values of A 2 are 1, 4, 9.

28. (B) If l1 , l2 ,...., l
are the eigen values of A then
the eigen values adj A are

eigenvalues of adj A are
A
l1
A
l2
,......,
A
l
; A 0. Thus
4 -4
,
i.e. 2 and-1.
2
4
29. (B) Since, the eigenvalues of A and A are square so

T
the eigenvalues of A T are 2 and 4.

30. (B) Since 1 and 3 are the eigenvalues of A so the
characteristic equation of A is
( l - 1) ( l - 3) = 0 l2 - 4 l + 3 = 0
Also, by CayleyHamilton theorem, every square
matrix satisfies its own characteristic equation so
A 2 - 4 A + 3I 2 = 0
A 2 = 4 A - 3I 2
A 3 = 4 A 2 - 3A = 4( 4 A - 3I) - 3A
A 3 = 13A - 12I 2
Page
532
a
1 - tan 2
2
a
2 = 1-t
36. (A) Let tan = t, then, cos a =
a
t + t2
2
1 + tan 2
2
2 tan
and sin a =
a
1 + tan 2
2
2t
1 + t2
- sin a
cos a
cos a
(I - A )
sin a
1
=
- tan a
a
2
a
2
tan
1 - t2
t 1 + t 2
1
=
-t 1 2 t
2
(1 + t )
cos a
sin a
- sin a
cos a
-2 t
(1 + t 2 )
1 - t2
1 + t 2
1 - tan
1 - t
2 = (I + A )
=
=
t
1
a
tan
1
www.gatehelp.com
Linear Algebra
- 4 3
- 1 1
3
37. (B) A 2 =
1
1 + 2 n
=
n
- 4 5
=
- 1 2
- 8
- 3
1 3
1 2 0
45. (C) AA =
2 -1
3 -1 4 0 4
- 4n
, where n = 2.
1 - 2 n
cos a
38. (D) A a A b =
- sin a
cos ( a + b)
=
- sin ( a + b)
sin a cos b
cos a - sin b
(1)( 3) + (2)( -1) + (0)( 4)

(1)(1) + (2)(2) + (0)(0)
=
(
3
)(
1
)
+
(
+
1
)(
2
)
(
4
)(
0
)
(
3
)( 3) + ( -1)( -1) + ( 4)( 4)
sin b
cos b
1
5
=
1
26
sin ( a + b)
= Aa+ b
cos ( a + b)
46. (B) if A is zero, A -1 does not exist and the matrix A
Also, it is easy to prove by induction that

sin na
cos na
(A a )n =
- sin na cos na
39. (A) We know that adj (adj A) = A
n -2
is said to be singular. Only (B) satisfy this condition.

5 2
A =
= (5)(1) - (2)(2) = 1
2 1
A.
47. (A) A skew symmetric matrix A n n is a matrix with
Here n = 3 and A = 3.
A T = -A . The matrix of (A) satisfy this condition.
So, adj (adj A) = 3( 3- 2 ) A = 3A.

40. (C) We have adj (adj A) = A
1
1 1 0 (1)(1) + (1)(0) + (0)(1) 1
48. (C) AB =
0 =
=
1 0 1 1 (1)(1) + (0)(0) + (1)(1) 2

( n -1 ) 2
Putting n = 3, we get adj (adj A) = A .
49. (C) For orthogonal matrix
41. (C) Let B = adj (adj A 2 ).

Then, B is also a 3 3
[K
A2 = A
2 x
42. (C)
x
2 x
0
( 3-1 ) 2
0 1
x -1
0 1
=
2 x 0
det M = 1 And M -1 = M T , therefore Hence D -1 = D T

A C
1 0 -B
DT =
= D -1 =
A
-BC -C
B 0
-C
1
This implies B =
B=
B = 1
-BC
B
matrix.
adj {adj (adj A 2 )} = adj B = B3

= adj (adj A 2 ) = A 2
Chap 9.1
3-1
= A 16 = 216
0 1
=
2 0
0
,
1
=B
Hence B = 1
50. (B) From linear algebra for A n n triangular matrix
0
1
So, 2 x = 1
det A = aii , The product of the diagonal entries of A

i =1
1
x= .
2
43. (D) Inverse matrix is defined for square matrix only.

2 -1
1 -2 -5
44. (C) AB = 1 0
3 4
0
-3 4
d( t 2 )
dA dt
51. (C )
=
t
dt d( e )
dt
d(cos t)
dt = 2 t - sin t
d(sin t) e t
cos t
dt
52. (A) If det A 0, then A n n is non-singular, but if

A n n is non-singular, then no row can be expressed as a
(2)(1) + ( -1)( 3) (2)( -2) + ( -1)( 4) (2)( -5) + ( -1)(0)

= (1)(1) + (0)( 3)
(1)( -2) + (0)( 4)
(1)( -5) + (0)(0)
( -3)(1) + ( 4)( 3) ( -3)( -2) + ( 4)( 4) ( -3)( -5) + ( 4)(0)
linear combination of any other. Otherwise det A = 0
-1 -8 -10
= 1 -2
-5
15
9 -22
************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
533
CHAPTER
9.2
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS
1. If f ( x) = x 3 - 6 x 2 + 11 x - 6 is on [1, 3], then the point
6. A point on the curve y = x - 2 on [2, 3], where the
c ] 1, 3 [ such that f ( c) = 0 is given by

1
1
(A) c = 2
(B) c = 2
2
3
tangent is parallel to the chord joining the end points of
(C) c = 2
1
2
(D) None of these
2. Let f ( x) = sin 2 x, 0 x
Then, c is equal to
p
(A)
4
(C)
the curve is
p
2
and f ( c) = 0 for c ] 0, 2p [.
x
2
3. Let f ( x) = x( x + 3) e , -3 x 0. Let c ] - 3, 0 [ such

that f ( c) = 0. Then, the value of c is
(B) -3
(C) -2
1
(D) 2
7 1
(C) ,
4 2
9 1
(D) ,
2 4
value of c of the mean value theorem is
(D) None
(A) 3
7 1
(B) ,
2 4
7. Let f ( x) = x( x - 1)( x - 2) be defined in [0, 12 ]. Then, the
p
(B)
3
p
6
9 1
(A) ,
4 2
(A) 0.16
(B) 0.20
(C) 0.24
(D) None
8. Let f ( x) = x 2 - 4 be defined in [2, 4]. Then, the value

of c of the mean value theorem is
(A) - 6
(B)
(C)
(D) 2 3
4. If Rolles theorem holds for f ( x) = x 3 - 6 x 2 + kx + 5 on

1
, the value of k is
[1, 3] with c = 2 +
3
(A) -3
(B) 3
mean-value theorem is
(A) 0.5
(B) ( e - 1)
(C) 7
(C) log ( e - 1)
(D) None
(D) 11
5. A point on the parabola y = ( x - 3) 2 , where the
Page
534
9. Let f ( x) = e x in [0, 1]. Then, the value of c of the
tangent is parallel to the chord joining A (3, 0) and B (4,
10. At what point on the curve y = (cos x - 1) in ]0, 2p[ ,
1) is
is the tangent parallel to x axis ?
(A) (7, 1)
3 1
(B) ,
2 4
(A) , - 1
2
(B) ( p, - 2)
7 1
(C) ,
2 4
1 1
(D) - ,
2 2
2 p -3
(C)
,
3 2
(D) None of these
www.gatehelp.com
Differential Calculus
11. log sin ( x + h) when expanded in Taylors series, is

equal to
Chap 9.2
16. If u = tan -1
(A) log sin x + h cot x -
1 2
h cosec2 x + K
2
(A) 2 cos 2 u
(B) log sin x + h cot x +
1 2
h sec 2 x + K
2
(C)
(C) log sin x - h cot x +
1 2
h cosec2 x + K
2
(B)
1
tan u
4
(D) None of these

x
1
sin 2 u
2
(B) sin 2u
(C) sin u
x 3 + y 3 + x 2 y - xy 2
, then the value of
x 2 - xy + y 2
u
u
is
+y
x
y
(A)
p
p
x-
x-
2
2
(B) 1 +
-K
2!
4!
1
sin 2 u
4
(D) 2 tan 2 u
17. If u = tan -1
12. sin x when expanded in powers of x - is

2
2
3
2
p
p
p
x-
x-
x-
2
2
2
(A) 1 +
+
+
+K
2!
3!
4!
x + y
u
u
equals
, then x
+y
x
y
x+ y
(D) 0
y
y
18. If u = f + xy , then the value of
x
x
x2
p
p
x-
x-
2
2
p
(C) x - +
+
+K
!
!
2
3
5
2u
2u
2u
+ 2 xy
+ y 2 2 , is
2
dx
dx dy
y
(A) 0
(B) u
(C) 2u
(D) -u
(D) None of these

p
13. tan + x when expanded in Taylors series, gives

4
4
2
(A) 1 + x + x + x 3 + K
3
(B) 1 + 2 x + 2 x 2 +
(C) 1 +
8 3
x +...
3
x2 x4
+
+K
2! 4!
19. If z = e x sin y, x = log e t and y = t 2 , then

by the expression
dz
is given
dt
(A)
ex
(sin y - 2 t 2 cos y)
t
(B)
ex
(sin y + 2 t 2 cos y)
t
(C)
ex
(cos y + 2 t 2 sin y)
t
(D)
ex
(cos y - 2 t 2 sin y)
t
20. If z = z( u, v) , u = x 2 - 2 xy - y 2 , v = a, then
(A) ( x + y)
z
z
= ( x - y)
x
y
(B) ( x - y)
z
z
= ( x + y)
x
y
3u
is equal to
14. If u = e , then
x y z
(C) ( x + y)
z
z
= ( y - x)
x
y
(D) ( y - x)
z
z
= ( x + y)
x
y
(A) e xyz [1 + xyz + 3 x 2 y 2 z 2 ]
21. If f ( x, y) = 0, f( y, z) = 0, then
(D) None of these

xyz
(B) e
xyz
[1 + xyz + x y z ]
(C) e
xyz
[1 + 3 xyz + x y z ]
f f f f dz
y z x y dx
(B)
(C)
f f dz f f
y z dx x y
(D) None of these
(D) e xyz [1 + 3 xyz + x 3 y 3z 3 ]

15. If z = f ( x + ay) + f( x - ay), then
(A)
z
z
= a2 2
x 2
y
(B)
z
z
= a2 2
y 2
x
(C)
2z
1 2z
=- 2
2
y
a x 2
(D)
2z
2z
= - a2 2
2
x
y
(A)
3 3
f f f f dz
y z x x dx
22. If z = x 2 + y 2 and x 3 + y 3 + 3 axy = 5 a 2 , then at
x = a, y = a,
dz
is equal to
dx
(A) 2a
(B) 0
(C) 2 a 2
(D) a 3
www.gatehelp.com
Page
535
UNIT 9
23. If x = r cos q, y = r sin q where r and q are the

functions of x, then
dx
is equal to
dt
2u
2 y
y
30. If u = x n -1 yf , then x 2 + y
is equal to
x
y x
x
(B) n( n - 1) u
(A) nu
(A) r cos q
dr
dq
- r sin q
dt
dt
(B) cos q
dr
dq
- r sin q
dt
dt
(C) r cos q
dr
dq
+ sin q
dt
dt
(D) r cos q
dr
dq
- sin q
dt
dt
u
x
(C) ( n - 1)
(D) ( n - 1)
u
y
31. Match the ListI with ListII.

ListI
r r
is equal to
+
dx 2 y 2
2
24. If r 2 = x 2 + y 2 , then
2
2
r
r
(A) r 2 +
x
y
r
1 r
+
2
r x
y
(C)
2
2
r
r
(B) 2 r 2 +
x
y
(D) None of these
25. If x = r cos q, y = r sin q, then the value of

is
(A) 0
(C)
(i) If u =
(D)
2q 2q
+
x 2 y 2
r
y
then x 2
x4 + y4
1
3
u
16
(C) udu = mxdx + nydy
(D)
27. If y 3 - 3ax 2 + x 3 = 0, then the value of

to
(B)
(C) -
2 a2 x4
y5
(D) -
d y
is equal
dx 2
2 a2 x2
y5
(4) -
(B) dz =
xdy + ydx
x2 + y2
(C) dz =
xdx - ydy
x2 + y2
(D) dz =
xdx - ydy
x2 + y2
(B) 1
(C) u
(D) eu
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
in the area is approximately equal to

(A) 1%
(B) 2%
(C) p%
(D) 4%
33. Consider the Assertion (A) and Reason (R) given

below:
x2 + y2
u
u
, then x
is equal to
+y
x+ y
x
y
(A) 0
(I)
and minor axes of an ellipse, then the percentage error
y
, then
x
xdy - ydx
x2 + y2
1
u
4
32. If an error of 1% is made in measuring the major
2 a2 x2
y5
(A) dz =
u
x
Correct match is
du
dx
dy
=m
+n
u
x
y
a2 x2
y5
2u
2u
2u
+ 2 xy
+ y2
2
x
x y
y 2
(2)
(3) 0
(A) -
2
2u
2u
2 u
+
2
xy
+
y
x 2
x y
y 2
u
u
y
(iv) If u = f then x
+y
x
y
x
(1) -
(B) du = mdx + ndy
Page
536
ListII
(A) du = mx m -1 y n + nx m y n -1
29. If u = log
(ii) If u =
26. If u = x m y n , then
28. z = tan -1
x2 - y2
(iii) If u = x 2 + y 2 then x 2
(B) 1
r
x
x2 y
2u
2u
then x 2 + y
x+ y
x
x y
u
u
y
Assertion (A): If u = xyf , then x
= 2u
+y
x
y
x
Reason (R): Given function u is homogeneous of
degree 2 in x and y.
Of these statements
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
explanation of A
www.gatehelp.com
Chap 9.2
(B) Both A and R are true and R is not a correct

explanation of A
41. If a < 0, then f ( x) = e ax + e - ax is decreasing for

(A) x > 0
(B) x < 0
(C) A is true but R is false
(C) x > 1
(D) x < 1
(D) A is false but R is true
42. f ( x) = x 2 e - x is increasing in the interval
34. If u = x log xy, where x 3 + y 3 + 3 xy = 1, then

equal to
(A) (1 + log xy) -
x x2 + y
y y 2 + x
(B) (1 + log xy) -
y y + x
x x 2 + y
(C) (1 - log xy) -
x x + y
y y 2 + x
du
is
dx
(A) ] -, [
(B) ] -2, 0 [
(C) ] 2, [
(D) ] 0, 2 [
43. The least value of a for which f ( x) = x 2 + ax + 1 is

increasing on ] 1, 2, [ is
(A) 2
(B) -2
(C) 1
(D) -1
44. The minimum distance from the point (4, 2) to the

parabola y 2 = 8 x, is
y y2 + x
(D) (1 - log xy) - 2
x x + y
(A)
(B) 2 2
(C) 2
(D) 3 2
z
z
y
35. If z = xyf , then x
is equal to
+y
x
y
x
(A) z
(B) 2z
45. The co-ordinates of the point on the parabola
(C) xz
y = 3 x - 3, are
y = x 2 + 7 x + 2 which is closest to the straight line
(D) yz
36. f ( x) = 2 x 3 - 15 x 2 + 36 x + 1 is increasing in the

interval
(A) (-2, -8)
(B) (2, -8)
(C) (-2, 0)
(D) None of these
(A) ] 2, 3 [
(B) ] -, 3 [
46. The shortest distance of the point (0, c), where
(C) ] -, 2 [ ] 3,
(D) None of these
0 c < 5, from the parabola y = x 2 is
37. f ( x) =
x
is increasing in the interval
( x 2 + 1)
(A) ] -, - 1 [ ] 1, [
(B) ] -1, 1 [
(C) ] -1, [
(D) None of these
4c + 1
2
(A)
4c + 1
(B)
(C)
4c - 1
2
(D) None of these

x
1
47. The maximum value of is
x
38. f ( x) = x 4 - 2 x 2 is decreasing in the interval

(A) ] -, -1 [ ] 0, 1 [
(B) ] -1, 1 [
(C) ] -, -1 [ ] 1, [
(D) None of these
(A) e
1
(C)
e
39. f ( x) = x 9 + 3 x 7 + 6 is increasing for

(A) all positive real values of x
(B) e
1
e
(D) None of these
(B) all negative real values of x
250
48. The minimum value of x 2 +

is
x
(C) all non-zero real values of x
(A) 75
(B) 50
(C) 25
(D) 0
(D) None of these

40. If f ( x) = kx 3 - 9 x 2 + 9 x + 3 is increasing in each
49. The maximum value of f ( x) = (1 + cos x) sin x is
interval, then
(A) 3
(B) 3 3
(C) 4
(D)
(A) k < 3
(B) k 3
(C) k > 3
(D) k 3
www.gatehelp.com
3 3
4
Page
537
UNIT 9
50. The greatest value of

f ( x) =
(A)
SOLUTIONS
sin 2 x
p
sin x +
4
on the interval [0, 2p ] is

1
2
1. (B) A polynomial function is continuous as well as

differentiable. So, the given function is continuous and
differentiable.
(B)
f (1) = 0 and f ( 3) = 0. So, f (1) = f ( 3).

By Rolles theorem Ec such that f ( c) = 0.
(D) - 2
(C) 1
Now, f ( x) = 3 x 2 - 12 x + 11
51. If y = a log x + bx 2 + x has its extremum values at
x = -1 and x = 2, then
1
(A) a = - , b = 2
2
Now, f ( c) = 0
(C) a = 2, b = 52.
The
(B) a = 2, b = -1
1
2
f ( c) = 3c 2 - 12 c + 11.
3c 2 - 12 c + 11 = 0
c = 2
.
3
(D) None of these

2. (A) Since the sine function is continuous at each
co-ordinates
of
the
point
on
the
curve
4 x 2 + 5 y 2 = 20 that is farthest from the point (0, -2) are

(A) ( 5 , 0)
(B) ( 6 , 0)
(C) (0, 2)
(D) None of these
53. For what value of x 0 x , the function

2
x
has a maxima ?
y=
(1 + tan x)
(A) tan x
(B) 0
(C) cot x
(D) cos x
p
x R, so f ( x) = sin 2 x is continuous in 0, .
2
f ( x) = 2 cos 2 x, which clearly exists for all
p
p
x ]0, [ .So, f ( x) is differentiable in x ]0, [.
2
2
Also,
p
Also, f (0) = f = 0. By Rolles theorem, there exists
2
p
c ]0, [ such that f ( c) = 0.
2
2 cos 2 c = 0
2c =
p
2
c=
p
.
4
3. (C) Since a polynomial function as well as an

exponential function is continuous and the product of
two continuous functions is continuous, so f ( x) is
*************
continuous in [-3, 0].

f ( x) = (2 x + 3) e
x
2
- x + 6 - x2
1 -2 2
e ( x + 3 x) = e 2
2
2
which clearly exists for all x ] - 3, 0 [.

f ( x) is differentiable in ] -3, 0 [.
Also, f ( -3) = f (0) = 0.
By Rolles theorem c ] -3, 0 [ such that f ( c) = 0.
- c + 6 - c2
e 2
=0
2
Now, f ( c) = 0
c + 6 - c 2 = 0 i.e. c 2 - c - 6 = 0
( c + 2) ( 3 - c) = 0
c = -2, c = 3.
Hence, c = -2 ] -3, 0 [ .
4. (D) f ( x) = 3c 2 - 12 x + k
f ( c) = 0
Page
538
www.gatehelp.com
3c 2 - 12 c + k = 0
UNIT 9
u
u 1
+ y sec 2 u
= tan u
x
y 2
p
p
p
f = 1, f = 0, f = -1,
2
2
2
x sec 2 u
p
p
f = 0, f = 1, ....
2

2
13. (B) Let f ( x) = tan x Then,
17. (A) Here tan u =
2
3
p
p
p x
p x p
f + x = f + xf +
f +
f +...
4
4
4 2!
4 3! 4
f ( x) = sec , f ( x) = 2sec x tan x,

2
f ( x) = 2sec 4 x + 4sec 2 x tan 2 x etc.

p
p
p
p
f = 1, f = 2, f = 4, f = 16, ...
4
4
4
4
x2
x3
p
Thus tan + x = 1 + 2 x +
4 +
16 + K
2
6
4
8
= 1 + 2 x + 2 x + x3 + K
3
2
14. (C) Here u = e xyz
u
= exyz yz
x
= e xyz (1 + 3 xyz + x 2 y 2 z 2 )
Which is homogeneous of degree 1

f
f
Thus x
+y
= f
x
y
z
= f ( x + ay) + f ( x - ay)
x
z
= a 2 f ( x + ay) + a 2 f( x - ay)....(2)
y 2
2
Hence from (1) and (2), we get
tan u =
x+
x+ y
x+
x2
and x 2
2
2v
2v
2 v
+
2
xy
+
y
= 0....(1)
x 2
x y
y 2
2w
2w
2w
+ 2 xy
+ y2
= 0....(2)
2
x
x y
y 2
Adding (1) and (2), we get

x2
2
2
2
2
(
v
+
w
)
+
2
xy
(
v
+
w
)
+
y
( v + w) = 0
x 2
x y
y 2
x2
2u
2u
2u
+ 2 xy
+ y2 2 = 0
2
x
x y
y
z
= e x sin y
x
z
dx 1
And
= e x cos y, x = log e t
=
y
dt t
z
= f ( x + ay) + f( x - ay)....(1)
dx 2
z
= af ( x + ay) - af ( x - ay)
y
x+ y
Then u = v + w
19. (B) z = e x sin y
16. (B) u = tan -1
f
u 1
+y
= sin 2 u
x
y 2
y
y
18. (A) Let v = f and w = xY
x
x
15. (B) z = f ( x + ay) + f( x - ay)
2z
2z
= a2 2
2
y
x
= f (say)
Which is a homogeneous equation of degree 1/2

f
f 1
By Eulers theorem. x
+y
= f
x
y 2
x
x 3 + y 3 + x 2 y - xy 2
= f (say)
x 2 - xy + y 2
homogeneous of degree one
3u
= e xyz (1 + 2 xyz) + ( z + xyz 2 ) e xyz xy
x y z
u
u 1
1
+y
= sin u cos u = sin 2 u
x
y 2
4
Now v is homogeneous of degree zero and w is
2u
= ze xyz + yzexyz xz = e xyz ( z + xyz 2 )
xy
As above question number 16 x
Now,
Page
540
(tan u)
(tan u) 1
+y
= tan u
x
y
2
dy
= 2t
dt
dz z dx z dy
=
dt x dt y dt
And y = t 2
= e x sin y
ex
1
+ e x cos y 2 t = (sin y + 2 t 2 cos y)
t
t
20. (C) Given that

z = z( u, v), u = x 2 - 2 xy - y 2 , v = a....(i)
z z u z v
=
+
....(ii)
x u x v x
z z u z v
and
=
+
....(iii)
y u y v y
From (i),
u
u
v
v
=2x -2y ,
= -2 x - 2 y,
= 0,
=0
x
y
x
y
www.gatehelp.com
Substituting these values in (ii) and (iii)
24. (C) r 2 = x 2 + y 2
z z
z
=
(2 x - 2 y) +
0....(iv)
x u
v
and
and
z z
z
=
( -2 x - 2 y) +
0....(v)
y u
v
2r 2r
+
=2 + 2 + 4
x 2 y 2
2
2
r
2 r 2 y 1 r
+
=
+
y
x 2 y 2 r 2 x

21. (C) Given that f ( x, y) = 0, f( y, z) = 0
25. (A) x = r cos q ,
These are implicit functions

f
dz
y
=f
dy
z
f f

dy dz x y
dx dy f f
y z
or,
r
r
=2y
= 2 x and
y
x
2r
2r
= 2 and
=2
2
x
y 2
2
z
z
= ( y - x)
x
y
f
dy
= - x ,
f
dx
y
r
r
and + = 4 x 2 + 4 y 2 = 4 r 2
x

y
From (iv) and (v), we get

( x + y)
Chap 9.2
y
q = tan -1
x
tan q =
q
1
-y
-y
=
= 2
2
2
x 1 + ( y x) x x + y 2
and
2q
-2 xy
=
x 2 ( x 2 + y 2 ) 2
Similarly
f f dz f f
y z dx x y
y
x
y = r sin q
2q
2 xy
2q 2q
and
= 2
+
=0
2
2 2
y
(x + y )
x 2 y 2
26. (D) Given that u = x m y n

Taking logarithm of both sides, we get
22. (B) Given that z = x + y

2
log u = m log x + n log y
and x + y + 3axy = 5 a ...(i)

dz z z dy
=
+
....(ii)
dx x y dx
3
from (i),
Differentiating with respect to x, we get

1 du
1
1 dy
du
dx
dy
or,
= m + n
=m
+ n
u dx
x
y dx
u
x
y
z
1
z
=
2x ,
=
2
2
x 2 x + y
y 2
1
x + y2
2
2y
dy
dy
and 3 x + 3 y
+ 3ax
+ 3ay.1 = 0
dx
dx
2
x 2 + ay
dy
= - 2
dx
y + ax
Substituting these value in (ii), we get

dz
=
dx
x
x2 + y2
x 2 + ay
- 2
x 2 + y 2 y + ax
y
a
dz
=
+
2
dx
( a , a )
a + a2
a 2 + aa
= 0
- 2
a 2 + a 2 a + a. a
a
27. (D) Given that f ( x, y) = y 3 - 3ax 2 + x 3 = 0

fx = - 6 ax + 3 x 2 , f y = 3 y 2 , fxx = - 6 a + 6 x ,
f yy = 6 y , fxy = 0
fxx ( f y) 2 - 2 fx f y fxy + f yy( fx ) 2
d2 y
=-
2
( f y) 3
dx
( 6 x - 6 a( 3 y 2 ) 2 - 0 + 6 y( 3 x 2 - 6 ax) 2
= -
(3 y2 )3
2
= - 5 ( -ax 3 - ay 3 + 4 a 2 x 2 )
y
=-
2
[ -a( a 3 + y 3) + 4 a 2 x 2 ]
y5
23. (B) Given that x = r cos q, y = r sin q....(i)
=-
2
[ -a( 3ax 2 ) + 4 a 2 x 2 ] [ \ x 3 + y 3 - 3ax 2 = 0]
y5
dx x dr x dq
=
+
....(ii)
dt r dt q dt
=-
2 a2 x2
y5
From (i),
x
x
= cos q,
= - r sin q
r
q
Substituting these values in (ii), we get

dx
dr
dq
= cos q
- r sin q
dt
dt
dt
28. (A) Given that z = tan -1
www.gatehelp.com
y
....(i)
x
Page
541
UNIT 9
dz z z dy
=
+
....(ii)
dx x y dx
From (i)
z
=
y
z
=
x
In (c) u = x1 2 + y1 2 It is a homogeneous function of

1
degree .
2
-y
-y
2 = 2
+ y2
x
x
y
1+
x
1
x2
x
1
= 2
2
y x x + y
1+
x
1
Hence correct match is
f is a homogeneous function of degree one
e u
e u
x
+y
= eu
x
y
u
u
+y
=1
x
y
log A = log p + log a + log b
(log A) = (log p) + (log a) + (log b)

A
a b
=0 +
+
A
a
b
100
100
100
A =
a +
b
A
a
b
100
100
But it is given that
a = 1, and
b = 1
a
b
100
A = 1 + 1 = 2
A
Differentiating partially w.r.t. x, we get

2 u u
2u
n u
+
+
y
=
2
x
x
y x
x
x
Area A = pab
It is a homogeneous function of degree n

u
u
Eulers theorem x
+y
= nu
x
y
ellipse
y
30. (C) Given that u = x n -1 yf .
x
32. (B) Let 2a and 2b be the major and minor axes of the
u
u
or xe u
+ ye u
= eu
x
y
or, x
1 1
1
- 1 u = - u
2 2
4
zero.
u
u
x
+y
= 0. u = 0
x
y
x2 + y2
x2 + y2
, eu =
= f (say)
x+ y
x+ y
f
f
x
+y
= f
x
y
2u
2u
2u
+ 2 xy
+ y2
= n( n - 1) u
2
x
x dy
y 2
y
In (d)u = f It is a homogeneous function of degree
x
Substituting these in (ii), we get

dz
-y
x
dy
xdy - ydx
, dz =
=
+
dx x 2 + y 2 x 2 + y 2 dx
x2 + y2
29. (B) u = log
Thus percentage error in A =2%
2u
2u
u
+y
= ( n - 1)
2
x
y x
x
y
33. (A) Given that u = xyf . Since it is a homogeneous
x
x2 y
It is a homogeneous function of
31. (B) In (a) u =
x+ y
function of degree 2.
By Eulers theorem x
degree 2.
2u
2u
u u
(as in question 30)
x 2 +y
= ( n - 1)
=
x
x y
x x
In (b) u =
x1 2 - y1 2
. It is a homogeneous function of
x1 4 + y1 4
1 1 1
degree - =
2 4 4
x2
=
Page
542
2u
2u
2u
+ 2 xy
+ y 2 2 = n( n - 1) u
2
x
x y
y
1 1
3
u
- 1 u = 4 4
16
Thus x
u
u
+y
= nu (where n = 2)
x
y
u
u
+y
= 2u
x
y
34. (A) Given that u = x log xy....(i)

x 3 + y 3 + 3 xy = 1....(ii)
u u u dy
we know that
....(ii)
=
+
x x y dx
From (i)
and
www.gatehelp.com
u
1
= x
y + log xy = 1 + log xy
x
xy
u
1
x
= x
x=
y
xy
y
Now, D = (2 t 2 - 4) 2 + ( 4 t - 2) 2 is minimum when
From (ii), we get

3 x2 + 3 y2
Chap 9.2
dy
dy
+ 3 x
+ y 1 = 0
dx
dx
x + y
dy
= - 2
dx
y + x
2
Substituting these in (A), we get

du
x x 2 + y
= (1 + log xy) + - 2
dx
y y + x
35. (B) The given function is homogeneous of degree 2.
z
z
Eulers theorem x
+y
= 2z
x
y
E = (2 t 2 - 4) 2 + ( 4 t - 2) 2 is minimum.
Now, E = 4 t 4 - 16 t + 20
dE
= 16 t 3 - 16 = 16 ( t - 1) ( t 2 + t + 1)
dt
dE
=0
t =1
dt
d2 E
d2 E
2
.
So,
=
48
t
= 48 > 0.
dt 2
dt 2
( t =1 )
So, t = 1 is a point of minima.
Thus Minimum distance = (2 - 4) 2 + ( 4 - 2) 2 = 2 2 .
36. (C) f ( x) = 6 x - 30 x + 36 = 6( x - 2)( x - 3)

2
Clearly, f ( x) > 0 when x < 2 and also when x > 3.
45. (A) Let the required point be P ( x, y). Then,
f ( x) is increasing in ] -, 2 [ ] 3, [.
perpendicular distance of P ( x, y) from y - 3 x + 3 = 0 is
37. (B) f ( x) =
p=
( x + 1) - 2 x
1- x
= 2
( x 2 + 1) 2
( x + 1) 2
2
Clearly, ( x 2 + 1) 2 > 0 for all x.

So, f ( x) > 0
y - 3x + 3
10
x2 + 4 x + 5
(1 - x 2 ) > 0
10
=
=
x2 + 7 x + 2 - 3 x + 3
10
( x + 2) 2 + 1
10
or p =
( x + 2) 2 + 1
10
dp 2 ( x + 2)
d p
2
and
=
=
2
dx
dx
10
10
2
(1 - x) (1 + x) > 0
So,
This happens when -1 < x < 1.
d2 p
> 0.
x = -2, Also,
2
dx x = -2
So, f ( x) is increasing in ] -1, 1 [.
dp
=0
dx
38. (A) f ( x) = 4 x 3 - 4 x = 4 x( x - 1)( x + 1).
So, x = -2 is a point of minima.
Clearly, f ( x) < 0 when x < - 1 and also when x > 1.
When x = -2, we get y = ( -2) 2 + 7 ( -2) + 2 = -8.
Sol. f ( x) is decreasing in ] -, -1 [ ] 1, [.
The required point is ( -2, - 8).
39.(C) f ( x) = 9 x8 + 21 x6 > 0 for all non-zero real values
46. (C) Let A (0, c) be the given point and P ( x, y) be any
of x.
point on y = x 2 .
D = x 2 + ( y - c) 2 is shortest when E = x 2 + ( y - c) 2 is
40. (C) f ( x) = 3kx - 18 x + 9 = 3 [ kx - 6 x + 3]
shortest.
This is positive when k > 0 and 36 - 12 k < 0 or k > 3.
Now,
41. (A) f ( x) = ( e ax + e - ax ) = 2 cosh ax.

f ( x) = 2 a sinh ax < 0 When x > 0 because a < 0
42. (D) f ( x) = - x 2 e - x + 2 xe - x = e - x x(2 - x).
Clearly, f ( x) > 0 when x > 0 and x < 2.
43. (B) f ( x) = (2 x + a)
1 < x <2
2 <2x < 4 2 + a <2x + a < 4 + a
(2 + a) < f ( x) < ( 4 + a).
For f ( x) increasing, we have f ( x) > 0.
E = x 2 + ( y - c) 2 = y + ( y - c) 2 E = y 2 + y - 2 cy + c2
dE
d2 E
= 2 > 0.
= 2 y + 1 - 2 c and
dy
dy 2
dE
=0
dy
y =c -
2
Thus E minimum, when y = c -

2
1
1
Also, D = c - + c - - c
2
2
= c-
\2 + a 0 or a - 2. So, least value of a is -2.
2
. .. x = y = c - 2
1
4c - 1
=
4
2
44. (B) Let the point closest to (4, 2) be (2 t 2 , 4).

www.gatehelp.com
Page
543
UNIT 9
1
47. (B) Let y = then, y = x - x
x
51. (C)
1
d2 y
= x - x (1 + log x) 2 - x - x
2
dx
x
dy
=0
1 + log x = 0
dx
d y
1
dx 2 1 = - e

x =
2
So, x =
1
-1
e
dy
=0
dx
(x = 2 )
x=
1
e
48. (A) f ( x) = 2 x -
500
250
and f ( x) = 2 + 3
x
x2
f ( x) = 0
250
=0
x2
a
+ 4b + 1 = 0
2
a + 8 b = -2....(ii)
52. (C) The given curve is

ellipse.
dz
=0
df
x = p 3 or
x = p.
p -3 3
f =
< 0. So, x = p 3 is a point of maxima.
2
3
p
p 3 3
.
Maximum value = sin 1 + cos =
3
3
4
2 sin x cos x
sin x + cos x
cos f = 0
2 cos f ( 4 - sin f) = 0
when f =
d 2z
= -2 cos 2 f - 8 sin f
df2
p d 2z
,
< 0.
2 df2
p
z is maximum when f = . So, the required point is
2
p
p
5 cos , sin i.e. (0, 2).

2
2
53. (D) Let z =
1 + tan x 1 tan x
= +
x
x
x
dz
1
d 2z 2
= - 2 + sec 2 x and
=
+ 2sec2 x tan x
dx
x
dx 2 x 3
dz
1
x = cos x.
=0
- 2 + sec 2 x = 0
x
dx
2 2
2 2
(say),
=
(sec x + cosec x)
z
Then,
where z = (sec x + cosec x).

dz
cos x
= sec x tan x - cosec x cot x =
(tan 3 x - 1).
dx
sin 2 x
d 2z
= 2 cos 3 x + 2sec2 x tan x > 0.
dx 2
x = cos x
p
p
in 0, .
4
2
dz
=0
dx
Sign of
dz
changes from -ve to +ve when x passes
dx
x=
p
f= .
2
dz
= - sin 2 f + 8 cos f
df
x2 y2
+
= 1 which is an
5
4
z = 5 cos 2 f + 4 (1 + sin f) 2
dz
= -10 cos f sin f + 8(1 + sin f) cos f

df
49. (D) f ( x) = (2 cos x - 1)(cos x + 1) and
tan x = 1
1
and a = 2.
2
when z = D 2 is maximum
250
Thus minimum value = 25 +

= 75.
5
Thus z has a minima and therefore y has a maxima at

x = cos x.
through the point p 4. So, z is minimum at x = p 4 and

************
therefore, f ( x) is maximum at x = p 4.
Maximum value =
Page
544
a + 2 b = 1....(i)
D = ( 5 cos f - 0) 2 + (2 sin f + 2) 2 is maximum
x = 5.
f ( x) = - sin x(1 + 4 cos x).

1
or cos x = -1
f ( x) = 0 cos x =
2
Let the required point be ( 5 cos f , 2 sin f). Then,
f (5) = 6 > 0. So, x = 5 is a point of minima.
50. (C) f ( x) =
- a - 2b + 1 = 0
< 0.
1
is a point of maxima. Maximum value = e1 e .
e
2x -
Solving (i) and (ii) we get b = -
dy a
= + 2 bx + 1
dx x
dy
=0
dx
( x = -1 )
dy
= - x - x (1 + log x)
dx
2 2
= 1.
[sec( p 4) + cosec ( p 4)]
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
9.3
INTEGRAL CALCULUS
1.
(A)
x
dx is equal to
+1
1
log ( x 2 + 1)
2
(C) tan -1
(B) log ( x 2 + 1)
x
2
2. If F ( a) =
5.
(D) 2 tan -1 x
1
,
log a
to
1
(A)
( a x - a a + 1)
log a
(C)
3.
1
( a x + a a + 1)
log a
1
(B)
(ax - aa)
log a
(D)
1
( a x + a a - 1)
log a
(B) cot x + cosec x + c
(C) tan x - sec x + c
(D) tan x + sec x + c
4.
( 3 x + 1)
dx is equal to
2
-2x + 3
2x
2x -1
3
5
(A) log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) +
tan -1
4
2
5
(B)
2x -1
4
log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) + 5 tan -1
3
5
2x -1
4
2
(C) log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) +
tan -1
3
5
5
2x -1
3
2
(D) log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) +
tan -1
4
5
5
is equal to
tan -1 (tan x)
(B) 2 tan -1 (tan x)
(C)
1
2
tan -1 (2 tan x)
(D) 2 tan -1 ( 12 tan x)
2 sin x + 3 cos x
3 sin x + 4 cos x dx is equal to
(A)
9
1
x+
log( 3 sin x + 4 cos x)
25
25
(B)
18
2
x+
25
25
(C)
18
1
x+
25
25
(D) None of these
(A)
(A) - cot x + cosec x + c
1
2
7.
dx
1 + sin x is equal to
(A)
6.
a > 1 and F ( x) = a 2 dx + K is equal
dx
1 + 3 sin
(B)
(C)
3 + 8 x - 3 x 2 dx is equal to
3x - 4
3 3
3 + 8 x - 3 x2 -
3x - 4
sin -1
18 3
5
25
3x - 4
25 3
3x - 4
sin -1
3 + 8 x - 3 x2 +
6
18
5
3x - 4
6 3
3 + 8 x - 3 x2 -
3x - 4
sin -1
18 3
5
25
(D) None of these

8.
dx
(A)
(C)
2 x + 3x + 4
2
1
2
1
2
www.gatehelp.com
sin -1
is equal to
4x + 3
cosh -1
23
4x + 3
23
(B)
1
2
sinh -1
4x + 3
23
(D) None of these
Page
545
UNIT 9
9.
2x + 3
x + x+1
2
dx is equal to
(A) 2 x 2 + x + 1 + 2 sinh -1
(C) 2 x 2 + x + 1 + sinh -1
(D) 2 x 2 + x + 1 - sinh -1
10.
(A)
1+ x + x
(A)
1
2
( x + 1) 2
-1
log x 2 + 1 + tan
(B)
1
4
( x + 1) 2
log
+ 2 tan -1
x2 + 1
2x + 1
(C)
1
2
( x + 1) 2
-1
log x 2 + 1 - 2 tan
2x + 1
+ x3
is equal to
(D) None of these
is equal to
x - x2
3
16.
dx
dx
15.
2x + 1
x 2 + x + 1 + 2 sinh -1
(B)
2x + 1
x - x2 + c
(C) log (2 x - 1) + c
sin x
1 - sin x dx
is equal to
(A) - x + sec x + tan x + k
(B) - x + sec x + tan x
(B) sin -1 (2 x - 1) + c
(C) - x + sec x - tan x
(D) - x - sec x - tan x
(D) tan -1 (2 x - 1) + c
17.
e { f ( x) + f ( x)} dx is equal to
x
(A) e f ( x)
(B) e x f ( x)
(C) e x + f ( x)
(D) None of these
11.
( x + 1)
(A)
2 cosh -1
1 + x
1 - 2 x - x2
dx is equal to
(B)
(C) - 2 cosh -1
1 + x
12.
(A)
(C)
13.
dx
sin x + cos x
1
2
cosh -1
2
1 + x
cosh -1
2
1 + x
(D) -
is equal to
log tan x +
4
x p
log tan +
2
2 8
dx
sin( x - a) sin( x - b)
(D)
1
2
x p
log tan +
2 6
x p
log tan +
2
4 4
is equal to
(A) sin( x - a) log sin( x - b)
sin( x - a)
(C) sin( a - b) log
sin( x - b)
dx
ex - 1 is equal to
(C) log ( e
Page
546
-x
- 1)
x
+c
2
(B) e x cot
(C) e x tan x + c
x
+c
2
(D) e x cot x + c
x3
dx is equal to
+1
(A) x 2 + log ( x 2 + 1) + c
(B) log ( x 2 + 1) - x 2 + c
(C)
1 2 1
x - log ( x 2 + 1) + c
2
2
(D)
1 2 1
x + log( x 2 + 1) + c
2
2
(A) x sin -1 x + 1 - x 2 + c
(B) x sin -1 x - 1 - x 2 + c
(C) x sin -1 x + 1 + x 2 + c
(D) x sin -1 x - 1 - x 2 + c
21.
sin( x - a)
1
(D)
log
sin( a - b)
sin( x - b)
(A) log ( e x - 1)
1 + sin x
e 1 + cos x dx is
20. sin -1 x dx is equal to
x -a
(B) log sin
x -b
14.
(A) e x tan
19.
(B)
18. The value of
sin x + cos x
1 + sin 2 x
dx is equal to
(A) sin x
(B) x
(C) cos x
(D) tan x
1
22. The value of

(B) log (1 - e x )
(D) log (1 - e )
x
(A) -1/2
(C) 1/2
www.gatehelp.com
5 x - 3 dx is
0
(B) 13/10
(D) 23/10
UNIT 9
39.
(x
46. The area bounded by the curve r = q cos q and the

p
lines q = 0 and q = is given by
2
p p2
p p2
(B)
(A)
- 1
- 1
4 16
16 6
+ y 2 ) dydx is equal to
0 x
(A)
7
60
(B)
(C)
4
49
(D) None of these
3
35
(C)
1
1 + x2
dy dx is
40. The value of

p
log ( 2 + 1)
4
(B)
(C)
p
log ( 2 + 1)
2
(D) None of these
p
log ( 2 - 1)
4
(C)
(B)
36
5
(D) None of these
x + y = a and x + y = a in the first quadrant is given

2
by
a2 - x 2
(A)
(C) 4
p2
a cos 2 q
rdrdq
rdrdq
(B) 2
p2
(D) 2
cos 2 q
p a cos 2 q
0 0
rdrdq
rdrdq
48. The area of the region bounded by the curve

1
x2 4
y= 0
(A)
(C)
dxdy
3x ( x 2 + 2)
y= x 2 4
dydx
x2 4
y= 0
(D)
y= 0
dydx
3x ( x 2 + 2)
y= x 2 4
dxdy
below by z = 0 and bounded above by z = h is given by

(B) pa 2 h
1
pa 3h
3
(D) None of these
50.
(B)
49. The volume of the cylinder x 2 + y 2 = a 2 bounded
(C)
cos 2 q
dxdy
(B)
a-x
p4
(A) pah
a2 - x 2
dxdy
(D) None of these
y ( x 2 + 2) = 3 x and 4 y = x 2 is given by
42. The area of the region bounded by the curves

2
(A) 4
ydxdy is equal to
32
5
p2
- 1
16
41. If A is the region bounded by the parabolas y 2 = 4 x

and x = 4 y, then
48
(A)
5
p
16
47. The area of the lemniscate r 2 = a 2 cos 2 q is given by
(A)
(D) None of these
a 2 - y2 a
dxdy
(C)
a-x
43. The area bounded by the curves y = 2 x , y = - x,

x = 1 and x = 4 is given by
33
(B)
2
(A) 25
47
(C)
4
44. The area bounded by the curves y 2 = 9 x, x - y + 2 = 0
e x + y+ z dxdydz is equal to
(B)
(C) ( e - 1) 2
(D) None of these
x+ z
-1
x -z
( x + y + z) dy dx dz is equal to
(A) 4
(B) -4
(C) 0
(D) None of these
is given by
(A) 1
(B)
1
2
3
2
(D)
5
4
(C)
*************
45. The area of the cardioid r = a (1 + cos q) is given by

(A) 2
a (1 + cos q)
a (1 + cos q)
q= 0 r = 0
(C) 2
p2
Page
548
r=0
rdrdq
(B) 2
rdrdq
(D) 2
0
p4
a (1 + cos q)
r=a
a (1 + cos q)
r=0
3
( e - 1)
2
(A) ( e - 1) 3
51.
101
(D)
6
1 1 1
0 0 0
rdrdq
rdrdq
www.gatehelp.com
Integral calculus
SOLUTIONS
1. (A)
F ( a) =
ax
+K
log a
aa
+K
log a
1
aa
1 - aa
K =
=
log a log a log a
F ( x) =
3. (C)
a
1-a
1
+
=
[ a x - a a + 1]
log a log a log a
x
dx
1 + sin x
dx
x
x
x
x
2
+ cos 2 + 2 sin cos
sin
2
2
2
2
x
sec 2
dx
2
=
=
dx
2
2
x
x
x
1 + tan
cos + sin
2
2
2
x
Put 1 + tan = t
2
x
2 dt
2
sec2 dx = 2 dt 2 dt = - + K
2
t
t
x
-2 cos
-2
2
+K
=
+K =
x
x
x
cos + sin
1 + tan
2
2
2
x
x
x
-2 cos
cos - sin
2
2
2
=
+K
x
x
x
x
cos + sin
cos - sin
2
2
2
2
x
x
2 x
-2 cos
+ 2 sin cos
2
2
2 +K
=
2 x
2 x
- sin
cos
2
2
-(1 + cos x) + sin x
=
+ k = tan x - sec x - 1 + K
cos x
= tan x - sec x + c
3x + 1
dx
2x -2x + 3
2
p=
5
dx
3
log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) +
2
2
4
4
5
1
x - +
3
5 1
= log (2 x 2 - 2 x + 3) +
tan -1
4
4 5
5. (C) Let I =
=
1
2
5
2
x-
dx
1 + 3 sin 2 x
cosec2 x dx
cosec2 x dx
=
cosec 2 x + 3 (1 + cot2 x) + 3
Put cot x = t
I =
=
3
5
, q =
4
2
3
4x -2
5
dx
dx + 2
4 2 x2 - 2 x + 3
2 2x -2x + 3
I=
1
1
log t = log ( x 2 + 1)
2
2
2. (A) F ( x) = a x dx + K =
4. (A) Let I =
Let 3 x + 1 = p( 4 x - 2) + q
x
dx
2
x +1
Put x 2 + 1 = t 2 xdx = dt
1 1
x
x 2 + 1 dx = 2 t dt
=
Chap 9.3
- cosec2 x dx = dt
1
-dt
t 1
cot x
= cot-1 = cot-1
4 + t2 2
2 2
2
1
tan -1 (2 tan x)
2
6. (C) Let I =
2 sin x + 3 cos x
dx
3 sin x + 4 cos x
Let (2 sin x + 3 cos x) = p( 3 cos x - 4 sin x)

+ q( 3 sin x + 4 cos x)
p=
1
18
, q=
25
25
I=
1
25
3 cos x - 4 sin x
3 sin x + 4 cos x
18
3 sin x + 4 cos x dx + 25 3 sin x + 4 cos x dx
1
18
log ( 3 sin x + 4 cos x) +
x
25
25
2
1
= 3
2
2
2
2
x -
4 5
4
5
-1
3
x - - x - + sin 5
3
3
3
3
3 + 8 x - 3 x 2 dx = 3
4
5
- x - dx
3
3

7. (B)
3x - 4
25 3
3x - 4
3 + 8 x - 3 x2 +
sin -1
6
18
5
8. (B)
www.gatehelp.com
dx
2 x + 3x + 4
2
1
2
dx
23
3
x + +
4
2
Page
549
UNIT 9
sinh
2x + 3
9. (B)
3
4 = 1 sinh -1 4 x + 3
2
23
23
x+
-1
x2 + x + 1
x2 + x + 1
dx +
2x + 1
dx + 2
= 2 x 2 + x + 1 + 2 sinh -1
dx
x 1- x
13. (D)
x2 + x + 1
3
1
x + +
2
2
1
x+
2
3
2
2x + 1
I =
( x + 1) 1 - 2 x - x 2
dx = -
1
dt
t2
dt
1
t 2 -
2
=-
1
sin( a - b)
1
sin ( a - b)
sin [( x - b) - ( x - a)]
dx
sin( x - b) cos( x - a) - cos( x - b) sin( x - a)

dx
1
[cot( x - a) - cot( x - b)]dx
sin( a - b)
1
[log sin ( x - a) - log sin ( x - b)] dx
sin ( a - b)
sin( x - a)
1
log
sin ( a - b)
sin( x - b)
14. (D) Let I =
dx
e - x dx
=
1 - e- x
-1
dx
15. (B) Let I =
=
dt
2 t2 - 1
dx
1 + x + x2 + x3
dx
(1 + x) (1 + x 2 )
A
Bx + C
1
=
+
2
(1 + x)(1 + x ) 1 + x 1 + x 2
Let
1 = A(1 + x 2 ) + ( Bx + C)(1 + x)
1
2
cosh -1
2
x + 1
=-
sin( a - b) dx
Put 1 - e - x = t e - x dx = dt
dt
I =
= log t = log (1 - e - x )
t
1
dt
t2
12. (C)
Page
550
1
1
1 - 2 - 1 - - 1
t
t
t
=-
1
t
-
=-
x+c
dx
=I
(2 x - 1) + c
Put x + 1 =
cosec x + 4 dx
I = 2 dq = 2 q + c = 2 sin -1
11. (D) Let I =
1
sin( a - b)
Put x = sin q dx = 2 sin q cos q dq

2 sin q cos q
2 sin q cos q
I =
dq =
dq
2
sin q cos q
sin q 1 - sin q
I = sin
sin x +
4
dx
-1
dx
1
1
p
1
x p
log tan +
- log cot x + =
2
4
2
2
2 8
2 dx
( x 2 + x + 1)1 2
+ 2 sinh -1
1
2
10. (B)
dx
x2 + x + 1
2x + 1
dx
sin x + cos x
dx
p
p
sin x cos + cos x sin
4
4
cosh -1
1
Comparing the coefficients of x 2 , x and constant terms,

2
A + B = 0, B + C = 0, C + A = 1
Solving these equations, we get
1
1
1
A = , B=- , C=
2
2
2
1
1
1 x -1
I =
dx - 2
dx
2 1+ x
2 x +1
=
1
1
1
log (1 + x) - log ( x 2 + 1) + tan -1 x
2
2
2
1
4
( x + 1) 2
log
+ 2 tan -1
x2 + 1
www.gatehelp.com
Integral calculus
16. (B) Let I =
sin x
dx
1 - sin x
1 - (1 - sin x)
dx
1 - sin x
1
1 + sin x
dx - dx =
dx - x
1 - sin x
1 - sin 2 x
1 + sin x
dx - x = (sec2 x + sec x tan x) dx - x
cos 2 x
= tan x + sec x - x
Chap 9.3
sin x + cos x
(sin x + cos 2 x) + 2 sin x cos x
2
sin x + cos x
(cos x + cos x) 2
dx
sin x + cos x
dx = dx = x
sin x + cos x
35
35
5 x - 3 dx = - 5 x - 3 dx +
22. (D)
= e x f ( x) dx + e x f ( x) dx
= { f ( x) e x - f ( x) ex dx} + ex f ( x) dx = f ( x) ex
9
9
=+ +
10 5
=
1 + sin x
18. (A) Let I = e
dx
1 + cos x
x
23. (B)
24. (D)
dt
= [tan -1 t ]1e
+1
p
4
x(1 - x) dx = ( x - x ) dx
2
1
1
1
= x 2 - x 3 = c 2 ( 3 - 2 c)
2
3
0 6
x3
x x2
dx = 2
dx
x +1
x +1
x( x + 1 - 1)
x
dx = xdx - 2
dx
2
x +1
x +1
2
20. (A) Let I = sin

= sin -1 x x -
-1
1
1 - x2
x
1 - x2
x dx = sin
-1
x 1 dx
x dx
dx
xdx = - tdt = x sin -1 x + dt

= x sin -1 x + t = x sin -1 x + 1 - x 2 + c
sin x + cos x
1 + sin 2 x
dx
x(1 - x) dx = 0
1 2
c ( 3 - 2 c) = 0
6
c=
3
2
25. (D) Put x 2 + x = t
In second part put 1 - x 2 = t 2
e x dx = dt =
1 2 1
x - log ( x 2 + 1) + c
2
2
21.
e x dx
2x
+1
= tan -1 e - tan -1 1 = tan -1 e -
x
= e tan + c
2
x-
dx
=
+ e- x
= x sin
Put e x = t
1 x
x
x
x
x
x
e 2 tan - e 2 tan dx + e tan dx
2
2
2
2
-1
e
0
1
x
x
= e x sec 2 dx + e x tan dx
2
2
2
5
9 9
2 - 3 - 10 - 5
9 1 9 13
+ - +
=
10 2 10 10
1
x
x
1 + 2 sin cos
x
2
2
dx
=e
x
2 cos 2
5 x - 3 dx
35
35
19. (C) I =
5 x2
5
= - x 2 + 3 x +
- 3 x
2
0
3 5
2
17. (B) Let I = e { f ( x) + f ( x)} dx

x
dx
2x + 1
x+ x
26. (A)
dx =
0
dt
t
(2 x + 1) dx = dt
= 2( t1 2 ) 20 = 2 2
sin 5 xdx
Since, f ( - x) = ( - x) 4 sin 5 ( - x) = -x 4 sin 5 x

f ( x) is odd function thus
p
sin 5 x dx = 0
27. (A)
www.gatehelp.com
p2
p2
2
cos x dx =
1
(cos 2 x + 1) dx
2
Page
551
UNIT 9
1 1
sin 2 x + x
2 2
0
p
p
= 2 sin (1 - t) - dt =
2
4
1 1
p
(sin p - sin 0) + - 0
2 2
2
p
p
= - 2 sin t - dt = - 1
2
4
1 1
p p
(0 - 0) - 0 + =
2 2
2 4
2I = 0
p2
2 sin 4 - 2 t dt
0
3 1
G G 1 p
p2
p
2
2
Aliter 1. cos 2 x dx = = 2 =
2
4
4
0
2 G
2
p2
Aliter 2. Use Wallis Rule
cos
x =
I =0
31. (C) Let I =
2a
f ( x)
f ( x) + f (2 a - x) dx ....(1)
0
I=
f (2 a - x)
2a
f (2 a - x) + f ( x) dx....(2)
0
1 p p
=
2 2 4

2I =
2a
f ( x) + f (2 a - x)
f ( x) + f (2 a - x) dx
28. (B) Let I = a 2 - x 2 dx
Put x = a sin q dx = a cos q dq when x = 0, q = 0,

p
when x = a, q =
2
32. (C) Let I =
2a
1 dx = [ x ]
2a
0
= 2a
I = a
Put
p2
= a 2 cos 2 q dq = a 2
0
1 p
(By Wallis Formula)
2 2
1 - x2
1 - x2
xdx
1 - x2 = t
1
2 1 - x2
( -2 x) dx = dt
when x = 0, t = 1, when x = 1, t = 0
0
pa 2
4
I = -e t dt = -[ e t ]10 = -[ e 0 - e1 ] = e - 1
1
Aliter:
p2
I = a 2 - a 2 sin 2 q a cos q dq
a 2 - x 2 dx
1
pa 2 pa 2
x
1
=
= x a 2 - x 2 + a 2 sin -1 = 0 +
4
2
a 0
4
2
p2
dx
1
x
+ x2
0
33. (B) Let I =
=
0
29. (D) Let I = log (tan x) dx ....(1)

0
dx
3
1
x - +
2
2
p2
I = log tan - x dx
2
2
1
1 2 p p
-1
=
- tan -1 +
tan
3 6 6
3
3
3
p2
I = log (cot x)....(2)
1
x-
1
-1
2
tan
3
3
2
2 0
2p
3 3
2p 3
9

p2
2 I = [log (tan x) + log (cot x)]dx
34. (B) Let I =
-1
p2
= log (tan x cot x) dx

0
p2
= log 1 dx = 0
I =0
Page
552
-x
-1 x dx +
0
dx =
-1dx + 1 dx = -[ x ]
0
-1
-1
+ [ x ]10
= - [0 - ( -1)] + [1 - 0 ] = 0
pt p
30. (D) Let I = 2 sin - dt ....(i)
2 4
0
35. (C)
100 p
|sin x|dx = 100 |sin x|dx
[ . .. sin x is periodic with period p]

www.gatehelp.com
x dx
0
Integral calculus
= 100 sin x dx = 100( - cos x) 0p
40. (D)
1 + x2
= 100( - cos p + cos 0) = 100(1 + 1) = 200.

p
= ( - cos x) m (sin x) n
1
[ x 1 + x 2 + log( x + 1 + x 2 )]10
2
1
= [ 2 + log (1 + 2 )]
2
=
41. (A) Let I = ydxdy,
= -cos m x sin n x, if m is odd

I = cos
dx
f ( p - x) = cos m ( p - x) sin n ( p - x)
x2
Where f ( x) = cos m x sin n x
dydx = [ y ]01 +
= 1 + x 2 dx
36. (C) Let I = cos m x sin nx dx = f ( x) dx
x sin x dx = 0, if m is odd
Solving the given equations y 2 = 4 x and x 2 = 4 y , we get
x = 0, x = 4 . The region of integration A is given by
2 x
4
y2
=
ydydx
2 dx
x2 4
0 x2 4
0
4 2 x
A =
37. (A) Let I = xF (sin x) dx ....(1)

0
48
x5
1
x4
dx = x 2 4 x = 5
160
2
10
0
4
= ( x - p) F [sin ( p - x)]dx
I =
Chap 9.3
( p - x) F(sin x) dx ....(2)
42. (A) The curves are

p
2 I = pF (sin x) dx
x 2 + y 2 = a 2 ...
....(i)
x + y = a...
....(ii)
I=
The curves (i) and (ii) intersect at A (a, 0) and B (0,a)
1
pF (sin x) dx
2 0
p2
38. (B) Let I =

0
The required area A =
ex 2 x
x
+ 2 tan dx
sec
2
2
2
p2
x
1
= e xsec 2 dx +
2
2
0
4 2 x
A =
x
1
Here, I1 = e x sec 2 dx
2
2
0
e
0
= e - I 2 , I1 + I 2 = e
p2
I = I1 + I 2 = e
x
0 e 2 tan 2 dx
x
tan
dydx
y = - x....(ii)
2 x
-x
= [2 x + x ]dx
1
32
4 1 101
=
+ 8 - + =
6
3
3 2
p2
dydx = [ y ]
1 -x
p2
y= a - x
If a figure is drawn then from fig. the required area is
p2
= e p 2 tan - 0 4
x =0
y = 2 x i.e., y 2 = 4 x....(i)
x
0 e tan 2 dx = I1 + I 2
x
p2
a2 - x 2
43. (D) The given equations of the curves are
p2
1
x
1
= e x 2 tan 2 0 2
2
44. (B) The equations of the given curves are
x
dx
2
y 2 = 9 x....(i)
x - y + 2 = 0....(ii)
The curves (i) and (ii) intersect at
p2
A(1, 3) and B(4, 6)
p2

1
39. (B)
1 3
2
2
2
x ( x + y ) dy dx = 0 x y + 3 y x dx
1
1
= x 5 2 + x 3 2 - x 3 - x 3 dx
3
3
0
1
2 52 1 4
3
2
= x7 2 +
x - x =
15
3 0 35
7
4 3 x
A =
dydx = [ y ]
1 x+ 2
3 x
x+ 2
dx
= [ 3 x - ( x + 2)]dx = 2 x 3 2 - x 2 - 2 x
2
1
1
1
1
= (16 - 8 - 8) - 2 - - 2 =
2
www.gatehelp.com
Page
553
UNIT 9
Thus the equation volume is V = 4 zdxdy
45. (A) The equation of the cardioid is

r = a (1 + cos q)
....(i)

p a (1 + cos q)
Required area A = 2
=
=
1
2
1
4
cos 2 qdq =
2
q dq +
0
1
4
1
4
dq
1 1 1
50. (A)
p2
q (1 + cos 2 q)dq
2
1 1
= [ ex +
2
q cos 2 q dq
dxdydz
1 1
] dydz = [ e1 +
0 0
= [( e 2 + z - e1 + z ) - ( e1 + z - e z )]dz
0
= ( e 2 + z - 2 e1 + z + e z ) dz = [ e 2 + z - 2 e1 + z + e z ]10
0
p3 1 -p
1
+
-0 96 4 4
8
= ( e 3 - 2 e 2 + e) - ( e 2 - 2 e + 1)
p2
= e 3 - 3e 2 + 3e - 1 = ( e - 1) 3
p2
cos 2 q dq
51. (C)
z x+ z
( x + y + z) dydxdz
-1 0 x - z
p2
p
p3
p 11
- sin 2 q =
96 16 8 2
0 16
p2
- 1
16
47. (A) The curve is r 2 = a 2 cos 2 q

p4
1 2
r = 0rdrdq = 4 0 2 r 0
p4
x+ z
( x + y + z) 2
-1 0
dxdz
2
x- y
(2 x + 2 z) 2 2 x 2
-
dxdz
2
2
-1 0
1 z
1 z
1
1 3
( x + z) 3 x 3
= 2 (( x + z) 2 - x 2 ) dx dz = 2
- dz
3
3 0
-1 0
-1
cos 2 q
dq
sin 2 q
= 2 a cos 2 q dq= 2 a
= a2
0
0
2
2
= [(2 z) 3 - z 3 - z ]dz =
3 -1
3
48. (C) The equations of given curves are
1 1
= 4 - = 0
4 4
p4
y( x 2 + 2) = 3 x....(i)
z4
z
dz
=
6
4
4
-1
-1
1
and 4 y = x 2 ....(ii)
The curve (i) and (ii) intersect at A (2, 1).

The required area A =
3x ( x 2 + 2 )
x =0
y= x 2 4
dxdy
49. (B) The equation of the cylinder is x 2 + y 2 = a 2

The equation of surface CDE is z = h.
Page
554
- e y + z ]dydz
= [ e1 + y + z - e y + z ]10 dz
p3 1
cos 2 q
cos 2 q
- -q
- d q
96 4
2 0
2
0
y+ z
p 4 a cos 2 q
x + y+ z
y+ z 1
0
0 0
p2
1 p
= pa 2 h.
2 2
0 0 0
p2
q= 0
dx = a cos q dq,
p2
p3 1
=
+ - q sin 2 q dq
96 4 0
A =4
p2
p2
p2
1 1
1 sin 2 q
sin 2 q
= q 3 + q 2
dq
- 2q
4 3 0
4
2 0
2
dx = 4 h a 2 - x 2 dx
q cos q
p2
p2
p2
= 4 ha 2 cos 2 q dq = 4 ha 2
1 2
r = 0rdrdq = 0 2 r o
p2
p 2 q cos q
a2 - x 2
Volume V = 4 h a 2 - a 2 sin 2 q a cos q dq
The required area
p2
r = q cos q....(i)
q= 0
hdydx = 4 h [ y ]
Let x = a sin q,
r=0
46. (C) The equation of the given curve is
A=
=4
a2 - x 2
rdrdq
q= 0
www.gatehelp.com
********
Complex Variables
Chap 9.5
10. The integration of f ( z) = x 2 + ixy from A(1, 1) to B(2,
17. The value of f ( 3) is
4) along the straight line AB joining the two points is
(A) 6
(B) 4i
-29
(A)
+ i11
3
(C) -4i
(D) 0
(C)
29
(B)
- i11
3
23
+ i6
5
(D)
18. The value of f (1 - i) is
23
- i6
5
11.
e2 z
c ( z + 1) 4 dz = ? where c is the circle of z = 3
(A)
4 pi -3
e
9
(B)
4 pi 3
e
9
(C)
4 pi -1
e
3
(D)
8 pi -2
e
3
12.
1 - 2z
c z( z - 1)( z - 2) dz = ? where c is the circle z = 15.
(A) 2 + i 6 p
(B) 4 + i 3p
(C) 1 + ip
(D) i3p
(A) 7 ( p + i2)
(B) 6 (2 + ip)
(C) 2 p (5 + i13)
(D) 0
Statement for 1921:

Expand the given function in Taylors series.
19. f ( z) =
(A) 1 + 2( z + z 2 + z 3......)
(B) -1 - 2( z - z 2 + z 3......)
(C) -1 + 2( z - z 2 + z 3......)
20. f ( z) =
13. ( z - z 2 ) dz = ? where c is the upper half of the circle
(B)
-3
(D)
2
3
(C)
2
14.
2
3
-1
1
1
1 - ( z - 1) + 2 ( z - 1) 2 .......
2
2
2
(B)
1
1
1
1 - ( z - 1) + 2 ( z - 1) 2 .......
2
2
2
(C)
1
1
1
1 + ( z - 1) + 2 ( z - 1) 2 .......
2
2
2
cos pz
dz = ? where c is the circle z = 3
c z -1
(B) - i2 p
(C) i6 p2
(D) - i6 p2
15.
(A) i2 p
21. f ( z) = sin z about z =
sin pz 2
c ( z - 2)( z - 1) dz = ? where c is the circle z = 3
(A) i6p
(B) i2p
(C) i4p
(D) 0
16. The value of
1 cos pz
dz around a rectangle with
2 pi c z 2 - 1
vertices at 2 i , -2 i is
(A) 6
(B) i2 e
(C) 8
(D) 0
1
p 1
p
+
1
z
z
- .......
4 2 !
4
2
(B)
1
p 1
p
1 + z - + z - + .......
4 2 !
4
2
(C)
1
p 1
p
1 - z - - z - - .......
4 2 !
4
2

22. If z + 1 < 1, then z -2 is equal to
(A) 1 +
x + y = 4.
( n + 1)( z + 1)
n -1
n =1
(B) 1 +
( n + 1)( z + 1)
n +1
n =1
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
f ( z0 ) =
dz , where c is the circle
( z - z0 )
c
2
p
4
(A)
Statement for Q. 1718:
1
about z = 1
z +1
(A)
z =1
-2
(A)
3
z -1
about the points z = 0
z +1
(C) 1 +
n( z + 1)
n =1
(D) 1 +
www.gatehelp.com
( n + 1)( z + 1)
n =1
Page
565
UNIT 9
Statement for Q. 2325.
28. The Laurents series of f ( z) =

1
in Laurents
( z - 1)( z - 2)
Expand the function
series for the condition given in question.

23. 1 < z < 2
1 2
3
(A) + 2 + 3 + .......
z z
z
(B) K - z -3 - z -2 - z -1 (C)
1 1
1
1 3
- z - z2 z -K
2 4
8
18
where z < 1
1
5 3 21 5
(A) z z +
z ..........
4
16
64
(B)
1 1 2
5 4 21 6
+ z +
z +
z ..........
2 4
16
64
(C)
1
3
15 5
z - z3 +
z ..........
2
4
8
(D)
1 1 2 3 4 15 6
+ z + z +
z ..........
2 2
4
8
1
3
7
+ 2 + 4 ...........
2
z
z
z
1 - e Zz
at its pole is
z4
-4
(B)
3
29. The residue of the function
24. z > 2
(A)
4
3
(C)
-2
3
(A)
6 13 20
+
+ 3 + ........
z z2
z
(B)
1 8 13
+
+
+ .........
z z2 z3
(C)
1
3
7
+ 3 + 4 + .........
2
z
z
z
(D)
2
3
4
- 3 + 4 - ........
2
z
z
z
25. z < 1
(A) 1 + 3z
+7 2 15 2
z +
z .....
2
4
(B)
1 3
7
15 3
+ z + z2 +
z ...
2 4
8
16
(C)
1 3 z2 z3
+ +
+
.......
4 4
8 16
26. If z - 1 < 1 , the Laurents series for
30. The residue of z cos
1
is
z( z - 1)( z - 2)
( z - 1) 3 ( z - 1) 5
- .........
2!
5!
(D) - ( z - 1)
-1
1
at z = 0 is
z
-1
(B)
2
1
2
(C)
1
3
31.
z(1 - z)( z - 2) dz = ? where c is
(D)
1 - 2z
-1
3
z = 15
.
(A) - i3p
(B) i3 p
(C) 2
(D) -2
32.
z cos z
dz = ? where c is z - 1 = 1
p
c z
(A) 6 p
(B) - 6p
(C) i2p
(C) - ( z - 1) - ( z - 1) - ( z - 1) - ..........
3
2
3
(A)
( z - 1) 3 ( z - 1) 5
- ...........
2!
5!
(B) - ( z - 1) -1 -
(D)
(A) - ( z - 1) -
z
is,
( z + 1)( z 2 + 4)
2
- ( z - 1) - ( z - 1) - ( z - 1) - .........
3
33.
2
z e z dz = ? where c is z = 1
c
27. The Laurents series of
1
for z < 2 is
z( e z - 1)
1
1
1
1 2
(A) 2 +
+
+ 6z +
z + ..........
z
2 z 12
720
1
1
1
1 2
(B) 2 +
z + ..........
z
2 z 12 720
(C)
1
1
1
1 2
+
+
z2 +
z + ..........
z 12 634
720

Page
566
(B) - i3p
(A) i3p
C)
34.
ip
3
2p
dq
2 + cos q = ?
0
(A)
-2 p
2
(C) 2 p 2
www.gatehelp.com
(B)
2p
3
(D) -2 p 3
Complex Variables
35.
x2
( 2 + a 2 )( x 2 + b2 ) dx = ?
- x
(A)
p ab
a+b
(B)
(C)
p
a+b
(D) p ( a + b)
36.
dx
1+ x
p ( a + b)
ab
=?
(A)
(C)
p
6
(B)
2p
3
(D)
p
2
***************
p
3
Chap 9.5
SOLUTIONS
1. (C) Since, f ( z) = u + iv =
u=
x3 - y3
;
x2 + y2
v=
x 3(1 + i) - y 3(1 - i)
; z 0
x2 + y2
x3 + y3
x2 + y2
Cauchy Riemann equations are

u v
u
v
and
=
=x y
y
x
By differentiation the value of
we get
u y v v
at(0, 0)
,
,
,
x y x y
0
, so we apply first principle method.
0
At the origin,
u
u(0 + h, 0) - u(0, 0)
h3 h2
= lim
= lim
= 1
h 0
h 0
x
h
h
u
u(0, 0 + k) - u(0, 0)
- k3 k2
= lim
= lim
= -1
k 0
v h 0
k
k
v
v(0 + h, 0) - v(0, 0)
h3 h2
= lim
= lim
=1
h 0
x h 0
h
h
v
v(0, 0 + k), v(0, 0)
k3 k2
= lim
= lim
=1
k 0
y k 0
k
k
Thus, we see that
u v
u
v
and
=
=x y
y
x
Hence, Cauchy-Riemann equations are satisfied at

z = 0.
Again, f (0) = lim
z 0
f ( z) - f (0)
z
( x 3 - y 3) + i( x 3 + y 3)
1
= lim
2
2
z 0
(x + y )
( x + iy)
Now let z 0 along y = x, then

( x 3 - y 3) + i( x 3 + y 3)
1
2i
1+ i
f (0) = lim
=
=
2
2
z 0
(x + y )
( x + iy) 2(1 + i)
2
Again let z 0 along y = 0, then

x 3 + i( x 3) 1
f (0) = lim
=1 + i
2
x 0
x
(x )
So we see that f (0) is not unique. Hence f (0) does not
exist.
Df
df
= lim
dz Dz 0 Dz
Du + iDv
or f ( z) = lim
Dz 0 Dx + iDy
2. (A) Since, f ( z) =
....(1)
Now, the derivative f ( z) exits of the limit in equation

(1) is unique i.e. it does not depends on the path along
which Dz 0.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
567
UNIT 9
Let Dz 0 along a path parallel to real axis
Dy = 0 \ Dz 0
Now let v be the conjugate of u then

v
v
u
u
dv =
dx +
dy = dx +
dy
x
y
y
x
Dx 0
Now equation (1)

Du + iDv
Du
Dv
f ( z) = lim
= lim
+ i lim
Dx 0
Dx 0 Dx
Dx 0 Dx
Dx
u
v
f ( z) =
+i
x
x
(by Cauchy-Riemann equation)
....(2)
dv = 2 x dx + 2(1 - y) dy
On integrating v = x 2 - y 2 + 2 y + C
Again, let Dz 0 along a path parallel to imaginary
5. (C) Given f ( z) = u + i v
....(1)
axis, then Dx 0 and Dz 0 Dy 0
....(2)
Thus from equation (1)

Dz + iDv
Du
Dv
u v
= lim
+ i lim
=
+
f( z) = lim
Dy 0
Dy 0 iDy
Dy 0 iDz
iD y
i y y
add equation (1) and (2)
f ( z) =
-i u v
+
y
y
....(3)
Now, for existence of f ( z) R.H.S. of equation (2) and (3)

must be same i.e.,
u
v v
u
+i
=
-i
x
x y
y
if ( z) = -v + iu
(1 + i) f ( z) = ( u - v) + i( u + v)
F ( z) = U + iV
where, F ( z) = (1 + i) f ( z); U = ( u - v); V = u + v

Let F ( z) be an analytic function.
Now, U = u - v = e x (cos y - sin y)
U
U
and
= e x (cos y - sin y)
= e x ( - sin y - cos y)
x
y
Now, dV =
u v
v -u
and
=
=
x y
x
y
-U
U
dx +
dy....(3)
y
x
= e x (sin y + cos y) dx + e x (cos y - sin y) dy
u
u v
v
f ( z) =
-i
=
+i
x
y y
x
= d[ e x (sin y + cos y)]

on integrating V = e x (sin y + cos y) + c1
3. (A) Given f ( z) = x 2 + iy 2 since, f ( z) = u + iv
F ( z) = U + iV = e x (cos y - sin y) + ie x (sin y + cos y) + ic1
Here u = x 2 and v = y 2
u
u
Now, u = x 2
= 2 x and
=0
x
y
= e x (cos y + i sin y) + ie x (cos y + i sin y) + ic1
and v = y 2
and f ( z) =
(1 + i) f ( z) = (1 + i) e z + ic1
( i + 1)
i
i(1 - i)
f ( z) = e z +
c1 = e z + c1
= ez +
c1
2
1+ i
(1 + i)(1 - i)
v
v
= 0 and
=2y
x
y
we know that
F ( z) = (1 + i) e x + iy + ic1 = (1 + i) ez + ic1
f ( z) =
u
u
-i
x
y
....(1)
f ( z) = e z + (1 + i) c
6. (C) u = sinh x cos y
v
v
+ i ....(2)
y
x
Now, equation (1) gives f ( z) = 2 x
....(3)
and equation (2) gives f ( z) = 2 y
....(4)
Now, for existence of f ( z) at any point is necessary that

the value of f ( z) most be unique at that point, whatever
be the path of reaching at that point
u
= cosh x cos y = f( x, y)
x
u
and
= - sinh x sin y = y( x, y)
y
by Milnes Method
f ( z) = f( z, 0) - iy( z, 0) = cosh z - i 0 = cosh z
On integrating f ( z) = sinh z + constant
From equation (3) and (4) 2 x = 2 y

Hence, f ( z) exists for all points lie on the line x = y.
f ( z) = w = sinh z + ic
u
2u
4. (B)
= 2(1 - y) ;
=0
x
x 2
....(1)
the function x and hence i.e. in w).
u
2u
= -2 x ;
=0
y
y 2
....(2)
7. (A)
(As u does not contain any constant, the constant c is in
Page
568
2u 2u
+
= 0, Thus u is harmonic.
x 2 y 2
v
v
= 2 y = h( x, y),
= 2 x = g( x, y)
x
y
by Milnes Method f ( z) = g( z, 0) + ih( z, 0) = 2 z + i 0 = 2 z

On integrating f ( z) = z 2 + c
www.gatehelp.com
Complex Variables
8. (D)
v -( x 2 + y 2 ) - ( x - y)2 y
=
y
( x2 + y2 )2
f ( z o) =
y - x - 2 xy
= g( x, y)
( x2 + y2 )2
2
Chap 9.5
n!
2 pi
f ( z) dz
(z - z )
o
Taking n = 3,
or
n +1
f ( z) dz
(z - z )
f ( z) dz
(z - z )
pi
f ( z o)
3
n +1
2pi n
f ( z o)
n!
....(1)
e 2 z dz
e 2 z dz
=
( z + 1) 4 c [ z - ( -1)]4
v ( x 2 + y 2 ) - ( x - y)2 x y 2 - x 2 + 2 xy
=
=
= h( x, y)
x
( x2 + y2 )2
( x2 + y2 )2
Given fc
By Milnes Method
Taking f ( z) = e 2 z , and z o = -1 in (1), we have
f ( z) = g( z, 0) + ih( z, 0) = -
e 2 z dz
1
1
1
+ i - 2 = - (1 + i) 2
z2
z
z
( z + 1)
pi
f ( -1)....(2)
3
f ( -1) = 8 e
e 2 z dz
( z + 1)
Since, f ( z) is analytic within and on z = 3

8 pi - z
e 2 z dz
=
e
4
3
|z |= 3 ( z + 1)
By Milnes Method
12. (D) Since,
f ( z) = f( z, 0) - iy( z, 0)
2 cos 2 z - 2
-2
=
- i(0) =
= - cosec2 z
(1 - cos 2 z) 2
1 - cos 2 z
1 - 2z
Formula
1
I1 = dz = 2 pi
c z
On A, z = 1 + i and On B, z = 2 + 4 i
Let z = 1 + i corresponds to t = 0
1
f ( z o) = 2pi
x = b, y = d
b = 1, d = 1
f ( z) dz = ( x
c
x = a + b, y = c + d
a = 1, c = 3
+ ixy)( dx + idy)
[( t + 1)
everywhere in c i.e. z = 15
. , hence by Cauchys integral
+ i( t + 1)( 3t + 1)][ dt + 3i dt ]
t= 0
theorem
1
I3 =
dz = 0....(4)
-2
z
c
= [( t 2 + 2 t + 1) + i( 3t 2 + 4 t + 1)](1 + 3i) dt
0
t3
29
= (1 + 3i) + t 2 + t + i( t 3 + 2 t 2 + t) = + 1 1i
3
3
using equations (2), (3), (4) in (1), we get

1 - 2z
1
3
c z( z - 1)( z - 2) dz = 2 (2 pi) + 2 pi - 2 (0) = 3pi
11. (D) We know by the derivative of an analytic

function that
the circle z = 15
. , so the function f ( z) is analytic
....(2)
inside z = 15
. , therefore I 2 = 2 pi....(3)
1
For I 3 =
dz, the singular point z = 2 lies outside
-2
z
c
dx = dt ; dy = 3 dt
and it
f ( z) dz
[Here f ( z) = 1 = f ( z o) and z o = 0]
c z - zo
1
Similarly, for I 2 =
dz, the singular point z = 1 lies
-1
z
c
and z = 2 + 4 i corresponding to t = 1
2 = a + 1, 4 = c + 1
z dz
z = 15
. , therefore by Cauchys integral
lies inside
AB is , y = 3t + 1
1
3
I1 + I 2 - I 3....(1)
2
2
10. x = at + b, y = ct + d
Since, z = 0 is the only singularity for I1 =
f ( z) = - cosec2 z dz + ic = cot z + ic
1 - 2z
1
1
3
=
+
z( z - 1)( z - 2) 2 z z - 1 2( z - 2)
z( z - 1)( z - 2) dz
On integrating
and t = 1
....(3)
If is the circle z = 3
u
2 sin 2 x sinh 2 y
=
= y( x, y)
y (cosh 2 y - cos 2 x) 2
8 pi -2
e
3
2 cos 2 x cosh 2 y - 2
= f( x, y)
(cosh 2 y - cos 2 y) 2
-2
equation (2) have
u 2 cos 2 x (cosh 2 y - cos 2 x) - 2 sin 2 2 x

9. (A)
=
x
(cosh 2 y - cos 2 x) 2
then, t = 0
f ( z) = 8 e 2 z
Now, f ( z) = e 2 z
On integrating
1
1
f ( z) = (1 + i) 2 dz + c = (1 + i) + c
z
z
13. (B) Given contour c is the circle z = 1
www.gatehelp.com
Page
569
UNIT 9
z = e iq
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
c z - zo dz = 2 pif( zo)
dz = ieiqdq
Now, for upper half of the circle, 0 q p

2
( z - z ) dz =
c
(e
iq
- e 2 iq) ie iqdq
f ( z o) = 2pif( z o)
f ( z) = 6 z + 7 and f( z) = 6
f (1 - i) = 2 pi[ 6(1 - i) + 7 ] = 2 p (5 + 13i)
1 1
1
2
( e 2 pi - 1) - ( e 3px - 1) =
i 2
3
3
19. (C) f ( z) =
14. (B) Let f ( z) = cos pz then f ( z) is analytic within and

on z = 3, now by Cauchys integral formula
1
f ( z) dz
f ( z)
f ( z o) =
dz
= 2pif ( z o)
2pi c z - z o
c z - zo
take f ( z) = cos pz, z o = 1, we have

cos pz
z = 3 z - 1 dz = 2 pif (1) = 2pi cos p = -2pi
z -1
2
=1 z +1
z +1
f (0) = -1, f (1) = 0

2
f ( z) =
( z + 1) 2
f ( z) =
-4
( z - 1) 3
f ( z) =
12
( z + 1) 4
f (0) = 2;
f (0) = -4;
f (0) = 12; and so on.
Now, Taylor series is given by
sin pz 2
15. (D)
dz
c ( z - 1)( z - 2)
f ( z) = f ( z 0 ) + ( z - z 0 ) f ( z 0 ) +
( z - z0 ) 2
f ( z 0 ) +
2!
sin pz 2
sin pz 2
dz -
dz
z -2
z -1
c
c
( z - z0 ) 3
f ( z 0 ) + .....
3!
= 2 pif (2) - 2 pif (1) since, f ( z) = sin pz 2
about z = 0
f ( z) = -1 + z(2) +
f (2) = sin 4 p = 0 and f (1) = sin p = 0
16. (D) Let, I =

=
since, f( z) = 3z 2 + 7 z + 1
p
e 2 iq e 3iq
= i ( e 2 iq - e 3iq)dq = i
3i 0
2i
0
f ( z o) = 2pif( z o)
and f ( z o) = 2pi f( z o)
q= 0
=i
1
2 pi
z
c
1
cos pz dz
-1
z2
z3
( -4) +
(12) + ....
2!
3!
= -1 + 2 z - 2 z 2 + 2 z 3....
f ( z) = -1 + 2( z - z 2 + z 3 ....)
1
1
1
cos pz dz
2 2 pi c z - 1 z + 1
20. (B) f ( z) =
1
z +1
f ( z) =
-1
( z + 1) 2
f (1) =
-1
4
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
c z - 3 dz , since zo = 3 is the only
f ( z) =
2
( z + 1) 3
f (1) =
1
4
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
singular point of
and it lies outside the
z -3
f ( z) =
-6
( z + 1) 4
f (1) = -
Or I =
1 cos nz cos nz
dz
z +1
4 pi c z - 1
17. (D) f ( 3) =
circle x 2 + y 2 = 4 i.e., z = 2, therefore
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
is
z -3
f (1) =
f ( z) = f ( z 0 ) + ( z - z 0 ) f ( z 0 ) +
( z - z0 ) 2
f ( z 0 )
2!
+
Hence by Cauchys theorem
3z 2 + 7 z + 1
dz = 0
z -3
( z - z0 ) 3
f ( z 0 ) + K
3!
about z = 1
f ( z) =
18. (C) The point (1 - i) lies within circle z = 2 ( . .. the

distance of 1 - i i.e., (1, 1) from the origin is 2 which is
less than 2, the radius of the circle).
Let f( z) = 3z 2 + 7 z + 1 then by Cauchys integral formula
Page
570
3
and so on.
8
Taylor series is
analytic everywhere within c.

f ( 3) =
1
2
2
1
-1 ( z - 1)
+ ( z - 1)
+
2
2!
4
3
1 ( z - 1) 3
- +K
+
3! 8
4
1 1
1
1
( z - 1) + 3 ( z - 1) 2 - 4 ( z - 1) 3 +....
2 22
2
2
or f ( z) =
www.gatehelp.com
1
1
1
1
1 - ( z - 1) + 2 ( z - 1) 2 - 3 ( z - 1) 3 + ....
2
2
2
2
Complex Variables
21. (A) f ( z) = sin z

f ( z) = cos z
p
1
p
f = sin =
4
2
4
1
1
1 1
1
z z2 z3
1 + +
+
+ .. - 1 + + 2 + 3 + K
2
2
4
9
z
z
z
z
1 1
1
1 3
or f ( z) = K-z -4 - z -2 - z -1 - - z - z 2 z -K
2 4
8
18
f ( z) = -
1
p
f =
2
4
f ( z) = - sin z
1
p
f = 4
2

f ( z) = - cos z
1
p
and so on.
f = 4
2

24. (C)
( z - z0 )
f ( z 0 )
2!
about z =
( z - z0 ) 3
f ( z 0 ) + ....
3!
p
4
2
z -
4
+
3!
22. (D) Let f ( z) = z -2 =
1
1
=
2
z
[1 - (1 + z)]2
-1
1
2
4
8
1 + + 2 + 3 + ....
z
z z
z
f ( z) =
1
3
7
+
+
+K
z2 z3 z4
25. (B) z < 1,
z
1
1
1
= - 1 -
z -2 z -1
2
2
1
1
1
1
=
+
z( z - 1)( z - 2) 2 z z - 1 2( z - 2)
Since, 1 + z < 1, so by expanding R.H.S. by binomial
For z - 1 < 1 Let z - 1 = u
theorem, we get
+ ( n + 1)(1 + z) n + K
or f ( z) = z -2 = 1 +
( n + 1)( z + 1)
z = u + 1 and u < 1
1
1
1
1
=
+
z( z - 1)( z - 2) 2 z z - 1 2( z - 2)
n =1
1
1
1
23. (B) Here f ( z) =
....(1)
=
( z - 1)( z - 2) z - 2 z - 1
Since, z > 1
1
< 1 and z < 2
z
1
1
1
1
=
= 1 -
1 z
z -1
z
z 1 -
z
z
2
<1
and
-1
z
1
1
=
1 - = z -2 2
2
2
equation (1) gives
1
1
1
1
1
- +
= (1 + u) -1 - u-1 - (1 - u) -1
2
2( u + 1) u 2( u - 1) 2
1
1
[1 - u + u2 - u3 + ... ] - u-1 - (1 + u + u2 + u3 + ...)
2
2
1
3
-1
= ( -2 u - 2 u - ...) - u = -u - u3 - u5 - K - u-1
2
=
Required Laurents series is

f ( z) = -( z - 1) -1 - ( z - 1) - ( z - 1) 3 - ( z - 1) 5 - K
-1
27. (B) Let f ( z) =
1
1 1
1
1 + + 2 + 3 + K
z
z z
z
-1
+ (1 - z) -1
1
2
26. (D) Since,
-1
z z2 z3
1
+
+
+
+ K + (1 + z + z 2 + z 3 + ...)
2
4
8
1 3
7
15 3
f ( z) = + z + z 2 +
z +K
2 4
8
16
=-
f ( z) = [1 - (1 + z)]-2
f ( z) = 1 + 2(1 + z) + 3(1 + z) 2 + 4(1 + z) 3 + K
1
<1
z
1
1 1
1
1 + + 2 + 3 + K
z z
z
2
1
1
2
= 1 -
z -2 z
z
2
3
1
1
p 1
p
p
1 + z - - z - - z - -...
4 2 !
4
3!
4
2
-1
11
3
7
+ 2 + 3 + K
zz z
z
1
+K
1 1
< <1
z 2
Laurents series is given by

1
2
4 98
1 1
1
1
f ( z) = 1 + + 2 + 3 + .. - 1 + + 2 + 3 + ..
z
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z -
1
p 1
4
f ( z) =
+ z -
+
2!
4 2
2
f ( z) =
and
2
<1
z
1
1
1
= 1 -
z -1 z
z
Taylor series is given by

f ( z) = f ( z 0 ) + ( z - z 0 ) f ( z 0 ) +
Chap 9.5
z z
z
1 + 2 + 4 + 9 + K
1
z( e z - 1)
z
z3 z4
+
+
+ K - 1
z 1 + z +
2 ! 3! 4 !
www.gatehelp.com
Page
571
Complex Variables
f ( z) dz = 2 pi 6 = 3 pi
-idz
dq =
; z q 2p
z
e 2 iq
b( z) dz = 0
r
c: z =1
(x
dz
z + 4z + 1
x
p
dz =
2
2
+ a )( x + b )
a+b
2
dz
= f ( z) dz
1
+ z6
c
c
36. (C) Let I =
Let f ( z) =
e 3iq
dq
R
a 2
b2
+ 2 e 2 iq + 2
R
R
Now when R ,
-idz
dq
0 2 + cos q = c 1 z 1 ;
2 + z +
2
z
2p
1
1
and cos q = z +
2
z
= - 2i
ie 2 iqiRe iqdq
2 2 iq
+ a 2 )( R 2 e2 iq + b2 )
0 (R e
f ( z) dz =
Now
34. (B) Let z = eiq
Chap 9.5
1
z2 + 4z + 1
c is the contour containing semi circle r of radius R and
f ( z) has poles at z = - 2 + 3, -2 - 3 out of these only
segment from -R to R.
For poles of f ( z), 1 + z6 = 0
z = -2 + 3 lies inside the circle c : z = 1
f ( z) dz = 2pi(Residue at z = -2 +
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
3)
z = ( -1) p 6 = e i ( 2 n + 1 ) p 6
lim
z -2 +
( z + 2 - 3) f ( z) = lim
z -2 +
f ( z) dz = 2 pi 2
2p
dq
2 + cos q = -2 i
0
3
pi
3
1
3
( z + 2 + 3)
1
2 3
pi
3
=
- 3+i
, i,
2
Only poles z =
Now, residue at z = -2 + 3
2p
+ 3+i
2
1
=
( z1 - z 2 )( z1 - z 3)( z1 - z 4 )( z1 - z 5)( z1 - z6 )
Residue at z =
3i(1 + 3 i)
where c is be semi circle r with segment on real axis

from -R to R.
The poles are z = ia, z = ib. Here only z = ia and
z = ib lie within the contour c
f ( z) dz = 2pi
c
Residue at z =
1 + 3i
is
12 i
f ( z) dz +
Now
Residue at z = ib
z2
-b
= lim ( z - ib)
=
z ib
( z - ia)( z + ia)( z + ib)( z - ib) 2 i( a 2 - b2 )
R
f ( z) dz = f ( z) dz + f ( z) dz
c
f ( z) dz
f ( z) dz =
-R
2p
....(1)
3
iq
iRe dq
f ( z) dz = 1 + R e
6 6 iq
where R ,
1 + 3i
12 i
-R
2 pi
2p
(1 - 3i + 1 + 3i + 2 i) =
12 i
3
z
a
=
( z - ia)( z - ia)( z 2 + b2 ) 2 i( a 2 - b2 )
1
3i(1 - 3i)
Residue at z = ia,
z ia
1
6i
f ( z) dz = f ( z) dz +
or
(sum of residues at z = ia and z = ib)
= lim ( z - ia)
1 - 3i
12 i
Residue at z = i is
z2
35. (C) I = 2
dz = f ( z) dz
2
2
2
c ( z + a )( z + b )
c
3+i
lie in the contour
2
ie iqdq
R5
1
+ e6 iq
R6
f ( z) dz 0
r
(1)
ax
2p
=
1 + x6
3
-R
p
2 pi
( a - b) =
a+b
2 i ( a 2 - b2 )
********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
573
CHAPTER
9.6
PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS
1. In a frequency distribution, the mid value of a class is
6. A distribution consists of three components with
15 and the class interval is 4. The lower limit of the
frequencies 45, 40 and 15 having their means 2, 2.5 and
class is
2 respectively. The mean of the combined distribution is
(A) 14
(C) 12
(A) 2.1
(C) 2.3
(B) 13
(D) 10
2. The mid value of a class interval is 42. If the class
7. Consider the table given below
size is 10, then the upper and lower limits of the class
are
(A) 47 and 37
(C) 37.5 and 47.5
(B) 37 and 47
(D) 47.5 and 37.5
3. The following marks were obtained by the students

in a test: 81, 72, 90, 90, 86, 85, 92, 70, 71, 83, 89, 95,
85,79, 62. The range of the marks is
(A) 9
(B) 17
(C) 27
(D) 33
(B) 2.2
(D) 2.4
Marks
Number of Students
0 10
12
10 20
18
20 30
27
30 40
20
40 50
17
50 60
The arithmetic mean of the marks given above, is
4. The width of each of nine classes in a frequency
(A) 18
(B) 28
distribution is 2.5 and the lower class boundary of the
(C) 27
(D) 6
lowest class is 10.6. The upper class boundary of the

highest class is
(A) 35.6
(B) 33.1
(C) 30.6
(D) 28.1
5.
In
monthly
test,
the
marks
8. The following is the data of wages per day: 5, 4, 7, 5,

8, 8, 8, 5, 7, 9, 5, 7, 9, 10, 8 The mode of the data is
(A) 5
(C) 8
obtained
in
(B) 7
(D) 10
9. The mode of the given distribution is
mathematics by 16 students of a class are as follows:

0, 0, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 5, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 8
Weight (in kg)
40
43
46
49
52
55
Number of Children
16
The arithmetic mean of the marks obtained is

(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
Page
574
(A) 55
(B) 46
(C) 40
(D) None
www.gatehelp.com
Probability and Statistics
10. If the geometric mean of x, 16, 50, be 20, then the
16. The mean deviation of the following distribution is
value of x is
(A) 4
(C) 20
(B) 10
(D) 40
11. If the arithmetic mean of two numbers is 10 and
Chap 9.6
10
11
12
13
14
12
18
12
(A) 12
(C) 1.25
(B) 0.75
(D) 26
their geometric mean is 8, the numbers are

(A) 12, 18
(C) 15, 5
17. The standard deviation for the data 7, 9, 11, 13,
(B) 16, 4
(D) 20, 5
15 is
12. The median of

0, 2, 2, 2, -3, 5, -1, 5, 5, -3, 6, 6, 5, 6 is
(B) -1.5
(D) 3.5
(A) 0
(C) 2
(A) 2.4
(B) 2.5
(C) 2.7
(D) 2.8
18. The standard deviation of 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 is
13. Consider the following table
(A) 1
(B) 0
(C) 2.83
(D) 2.73
Diameter of heart (in mm)
Number of persons
19. The probability that an event A occurs in one trial of
120
an experiment is 0.4. Three independent trials of
121
122
14
123
124
125
experiment are performed. The probability that A

occurs at least once is
(A) 0.936
(B) 0.784
(C) 0.964
(D) None
20.
Eight
coins
are
tossed
simultaneously.
The
probability of getting at least 6 heads is

The median of the above frequency distribution is
(A) 122 mm
(B) 123 mm
(C) 122.5 mm
(D) 122.75 mm
(A)
7
64
(B)
37
256
(C)
57
64
(D)
249
256
21. A can solve 90% of the problems given in a book and

14. The mode of the following frequency distribution, is
Class interval
Frequency
36
69
912
21
1215
23
1518
10
1821
12
2124
(A) 11.5
(B) 11.8
(C) 12
(D) 12.4
B can solve 70%. What is the probability that at least

one of them will solve a problem, selected at random
from the book?
(A) 0.16
(B) 0.63
(C) 0.97
(D) 0.20
22. A speaks truth in 75% and B in 80% of the cases. In

what percentage of cases are they likely to contradict
each other narrating the same incident ?
(A) 5%
(B) 45%
(C) 35%
(D) 15%
23. The odds against a husband who is 45 years old,

living till he is 70 are 7:5 and the odds against his wife
15. The mean-deviation of the data 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,
who is 36, living till she is 61 are 5:3. The probability
11, 14 is
that at least one of them will be alive 25 years hence, is
(A) 4
(B) 3.25
(A)
61
96
(B)
(C) 2.75
(D) 2.4
(C)
13
64
(D) None
www.gatehelp.com
5
32
Page
575
UNIT 9
24. The probability that a man who is x years old will
30. If 3 is the mean and (3/2) is the standard deviation
die in a year is
of a binomial distribution, then the distribution is
A1 , A2 , K, An each x
p. Then amongst n
persons
years old now, the probability
that A1 will die in one year is

(A)
1
n2
(B) 1 - (1 - p) n
(C)
1
[1 - (1 - p) n ]
n2
(D)
1
[1 - (1 - p) n ]
n
drawn from each bag, the probability that both are

white is
5
24
60
1 4
(D) +
5 5
the distribution is
12
1 3
(B) +
4 4
24
1 1
(D) +
2 2
32
1
(B)
4
1 5
(C) +
6 6
(D) None
32. A die is thrown 100 times. Getting an even number

is considered a success. The variance of the number of
contains 4 white and 2 red balls. If one ball is drawn
(A) 50
(C) 10
from each bag, the probability that one is white and one
is red, is
8
27
16
1 1
(A) +
7 8
successes is
(C)
binomial distribution are 24 and 18 respectively. Then,
26. A bag contains 5 white and 4 red balls. Another bag
13
(A)
27
12
31. The sum and product of the mean and variance of a
bag contains 3 white and 5 black balls. If one ball is
(C)
1 3
(B) +
2 2
4 1
(C) +
5 5
25. A bag contains 4 white and 2 black balls. Another
1
(A)
24
12
3 1
(A) +
4 4
(B) 25
(D) None
33. A die is thrown thrice. Getting 1 or 6 is taken as a

5
(B)
27
success. The mean of the number of successes is

3
2
(A)
(B)
2
3
(D) None
(C) 1
(D) None
27. An anti-aircraft gun can take a maximum of 4 shots
34. If the sum of mean and variance of a binomial
at an enemy plane moving away from it. The
distribution is 4.8 for five trials, the distribution is
probabilities of hitting the plane at the first, second,
1 4
(A) +
5 5
third and fourth shot are 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 and 0.1
respectively. The probability that the gun hits the plane
is
(A) 0.76
(B) 0.4096
(C) 0.6976
(D) None of these
2 3
(C) +
5 5
1 2
(B) +
3 3
(D) None of these
35. A variable has Poission distribution with mean m.

The probability that the variable takes any of the
28. If the probabilities that A and B will die within a
values 0 or 2 is
year are p and q respectively, then the probability that
m2
(A) e - m 1 + m +
2 !
(B) e m (1 + m) -3 2
(C) e 3 2 (1 + m 2 ) -1 2
m2
(D) e - m 1 +
2 !
only one of them will be alive at the end of the year is

(A) pq
(B) p(1 - q)
(C) q(1 - p)
(D) p + 1 - 2 pq
29. In a binomial distribution, the mean is 4 and
36.
variance is 3. Then, its mode is
P (2) = 9 P ( 4) + 90 P ( 6), then the mean of X is
(A) 5
(B) 6
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) None
(C) 3
(D) None
Page
576
www.gatehelp.com
If
is
Poission
variate
such
that
Chap 9.6
37. When the correlation coefficient r = 1, then the
43. If Sxi = 30,
two regression lines
y = 318 and n = 6, then the regression coefficient bxy
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
is
yi = 42,
xi yi = 199, xi2 = 184,
2
i
are perpendicular to each other

coincide
are parallel to each other
do not exist
(A) -0.36
(C) 0.26
(B) -0.46
(D) None
44. Let r be the correlation coefficient between x and y
38. If r = 0, then
(A) there is a perfect correlation between x and y
(B) x and y are not correlated.
and byx , bxy be the regression coefficients of y on x and

x on y respectively then
(A) r = bxy + byx
(B) r = bxy byx
(D) there is a negative correlation between x and y
(C) r = bxy byx
(D) r =
39. If Sxi = 15,
45. Which one of the following is a true statement.
(C) there is a positive correlation between x and y
Syi = 36,
Sxi yi = 110 and n = 5, then
cov ( x, y) is equal to
(A) 0.6
(C) 0.4
(B) 0.5
(D) 0.225
40. If cov ( x, y) = -16.5, var ( x) = 2.89 and var ( y) = 100,

then the coefficient of correlation r is equal to
(A)
1
2
( bxy + byx ) = r
(B)
(C)
1
2
( bxy + byx ) > r
(D) None of these
1
2
( bxy + byx ) < r
46. If byx = 1.6 and bxy = 0.4 and q is the angle between
two regression lines, then tan q is equal to
(A) 0.18
(C) 0.16
(B) -0.64
(D) -0.97
(A) 0.36
(C) 0.97
1
( bxy + byx )
2
(B) 0.24
(D) 0.3
41. The ranks obtained by 10 students in Mathematics
47. The equations of the two lines of regression are :
and Physics in a class test are as follows
4 x + 3y + 7 = 0
and 3 x + 4 y = 8 = 0. The correlation
coefficient between x and y is
Rank in Maths
Rank in Chem.
10
48. If cov( X , Y ) = 10, var ( X ) = 6.25 and var( Y ) = 31.36,
then r( X , Y ) is
49. If x = y = 15,
n = 5, then bxy = ?
(A) - 13
(B) -
10
(C) - 14
(D) - 12
The coefficient of correlation between their ranks is

(A) 0.15
(C) 0.625
42. If Sxi = 24,
(B) 0.224
(D) None
yi = 44,
(A) 1.25
(B) 0.25
(C) -0.75
(D) 0.92
(A)
5
7
(B)
(C)
3
4
(D) 0.256
50. If x = 125,
4
5
x 2 = y 2 = 49, xy = 44 and
2
3
y = 100, x 2 = 1650, y 2 = 1500,
xy = 50 and n = 25, then the line of regression of x on

y is
Sxi yi = 306, xi2 = 164,
yi2 = 574 and n = 4, then the regression coefficient byx
(A) 22 x + 9 y = 146
(B) 22 x - 9 y = 74
(C) 22 x - 9 y = 146
(D) 22 x + 9 y = 74
is equal to
(A) 2.1
(C) 1.225
(B) 1.6
(D) 1.75
*********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
577
UNIT 9
SOLUTION
A.M. = A +
S( fd)
300
= 25 +
= 28.
Sf
100
1. (B) Let the lower limit be x. Then, upper limit is

x + ( x + 4)
x + 4.
= 15 x = 13.
2
8. (C) Since 8 occurs most often, mode =8.
2. (A) Let the lower limit be x. Then, upper limit x + 10.
10. (B) ( x 16 50)1 3 = 20
x + ( x + 10)
= 42
2
x = 37.
9. (B) Clearly, 46 occurs most often. So, mode =46.
Lower limit = 37 and upper limit =47.

3. (D) Range = Difference between the largest value
= (95 - 62) = 33.
4. (B) Upper class boundary = 10.6 + (2.5 9) = 331
..
x 16 50 = (20) 3
20 20 20
x =
= 10.
16 50
11. (B) Let the numbers be a and b Then,

a+b
= 10
2
ab = 8
( a + b) = 20
and
ab = 64
a - b = ( a + b) 2 - 4 ab = 44 - 256 = 144 = 12.
5. (B)
Solving a + b = 20 and a - b = 12 we get a = 16 and
Marks
Frequency f
f 1
20
12
Diameter of heart
(in mm)
Number of
persons
Cumulative
frequency
f = 16
( f x) = 64
120
121
14
122
14
28
123
36
124
41
125
50
A.M. =
b = 4.
12. (D) Observations in ascending order are
-3, -3, -1, 0, 2, 2, 2, 5, 5, 5, 5 6, 6, 6
Number of observations is 14, which is even.
Median =
1
1
[7 the term +8 the term] = (2 + 5) = 35
. .
2
2
13. (A) The given Table may be presented as
( f x) 64
=
= 4.
f
16
6. (B) Mean =
45 2 + 40 2.5 + 15 2 220
=
= 2.2.
100
100
7. (B)
n
n
= 25 and
+ 1 = 26.
2
2
Class
Mid
value x
Frequenc
yf
Deviation
d = x- A
f d
Here n = 50. So,
010
12
-20
-240
Medium =
1020
15
18
-10
-180
2030
25 = A
27
3040
35
20
10
200
14. (B) Maximum frequency is 23. So, modal class is
4050
45
17
20
320
1215.
5060
55
30
180
L1 = 12, L2 = 15, f = 23, f1 = 21 and f2 = 10.
Sf = 100
Page
578
S ( f d) = 390
1
122 + 122
(25th term +26 th term) =
= 122.
2
2
[ . .. Both lie in that column whose c.f. is 28]
Thus Mode = L1 +
www.gatehelp.com
f - f1
( L2 - L1 )
2 f - f1 - f2
= 12 +
(23 - 21)
(15 - 12) = 12.4.
( 46 - 21 - 10)
Chap 9.6
3 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 10 + 11 + 14
15. (C) Mean =
= 8.
8
1 1
1 1
= 8 C6 + 8 C7 + 8 C8
2
2

2 2
87
1
1
1
37
=
+ 8
+
=
2 1 256
256 256 256
1

2
Sd = 3 - 8 + 5 - 8 + 8 - 8 + 10 - 8 + 11 - 8 + 14 - 8
21. (C) Let E = the event that A solves the problem. and
= 22
F = the event that B solves the problem.
Sd 22
Thus Mean deviation =
=
= 2.75.
n
8
Clearly E and F are independent events.

90
70
P ( E) =
= 0.9, P ( F ) =
= 0.7,
100
100
16. (B)
P ( E F ) = P ( E) P ( F ) = 0.9 0.7 = 0.63
f x
d = x-M
f d
10
30
11
12
132
12
12
18
216
13
12
156
12
14
42
Sf = 48
Sfx = 576
Thus M =
= P ( E) + P ( F ) - P ( E F ) = (0.9 +0.7 - 0.63) =0.97.
Sfd = 36
576
= 12.
48
B speaks the truth)]

= P (E and F ) + P (E and F)
= P ( E) P ( F ) + P ( E ) P ( F )
Sd2 = 7 - 11 + 9 - 11 + 11 - 11 + 13 - 11 + 15 - 11 = 40
s=
Sd 2
40
=
= 8 = 2 2 = 2 1.41 = 2.8.
n
5
3 1 1 4
3
1 7 7
=
100 % = 35%.
+ =
+ =
4 5 4 5 20 5 20 20
23. (A) Let E = event that the husband will be alive 25

years hence and F =event that the wife will be alive 25
6 + 8 + 10 + 12 + 14 50
18. (C) M =
=
= 10.
5
5
years hence.
2
Sd2 = 6 - 10 2 + 8 - 10 + 10 - 10 + 12 - 10 + 14 - 10 = 40
6=
F =event that B speaks the truth.

75
3
80 4
Then, P ( E) =
= ,
P( F) =
=
100 4
100 5
3 1
4 1
P ( E) = 1 - = ,
P( F ) = 1 - =
4 4
5 5
= P[(A speaks truth and B tells a lie) or (A tells a lie and
7 + 9 + 11 + 13 + 15 55
=
= 11.
5
5
22. (C) Let E =event that A speaks the truth.
P (A and B contradict each other).
Sfd 36
So, Mean deviation =
=
= 0 .75
n
48
17. (D) m =
Required probability = P ( E F )
Then,
P ( E) =
5
12
and P ( F ) =
3
8
5 7
3 5
and P ( F ) = 1 - = .
Thus P ( E) = 1 =
12
12
8
Sd2
40
=
n
5
Clearly, E and F are independent events.
= 8 = 2 2 = 2 1.414 = 2.83 (app.)
So, E and F are independent events.

19. (B) Here p = 0.4, q = 0.6 and n = 3.
P(at least one of them will be alive 25 years hence)
Required probability = P(A occurring at least once)
= 1 - P(none will be alive 24 years hence)

7
5 61
= 1 - P ( E F ) = 1 - P ( E) P ( F ) = 1 =
12
8 96
= 3C1 (0.4) (0.6) 2 + 3C2 (0.4) 2 (0.6) + 3C3 (0.4) 3

4
36
16
6
64 784
=3
+ 3
+
= 0.784.
=
10 100
100 10 1000 1000
20. (B) p =
1
,
2
q=
1
,
2
24. (D) P(none dies)

= (1 - p) (1 - p)....n times = (1 - p) n
n = 8. Required probability
= P (6 heads or 7 heads or 8 heads)
P(at least one dies) = 1 - (1 - p) n .

1
P(A1 dies) = {1 - (1 - p) n }.
n
www.gatehelp.com
Page
579
Sxi 15
yi 36
=
= 3, y =
=
= 7.2
n
5
n
5
Sx y
110
cov( x, y) = i i - x y =
- 3 7.2 = 0.4
n
5
47. (C) Given lines are : y = -2 -
39. (C) x =
40. (D) r =
cov ( x, y)
var ( x) var ( y)
-16.5
2.89 100
Chap 9.6
7 3
and x = - - y
4 4
-3
-3
and
.
byx =
bxy =
4
4
3
-3 -3 9
or r = - = -0.75.
So, r 2 =
=
4 16
4
4
= -0.97.
41. (B) Di = -2, - 8, - 2, 3, 3, - 3, 3, 0, 2, 4.
[. .. byx and bxy are both negative r is negative]
SDi2 = ( 4 + 64 + 4 + 9 + 9 + 9 + 9 + 0 + 4 + 16) = 128.
6( SDi2 )
6 128 37
R = 1 2
= 1 - 10 99 = 165 = 0.224.
(
)
n
n
1
48. (A) r( X , Y ) =
( Sxi )( Syi )
n
42. (A) byx =
2 ( Sxi ) 2
Sxi - n
49. (C) byx =
Sxi yi -
50. (B) bxy =

=
( Sxi )( Syi ) 199 - 30 42
Sxi yi
6
n
43. (B) byx =
=
2 ( Syi ) 2
42 42
Syi - n
318
6
(199 - 210) -11

=
=
= -0.46.
( 318 - 294) 24
r 2 = bxy byx
45. (C)
cov( X , Y )
var( X ) var( Y )
10
6.25 31.36
5
7
nSxy - ( Sx)( Sy)

nSx 2 - ( Sx) 2
5 44 - 15 15
1
=
= 5
49
15
15
4
24 44
306
4
= ( 306 - 264) = 42 = 2.1
=
2
(164 - 144) 20
(24)
164 - 4
44. (C) byx = r
3
x
4
nSxy - ( Sx)( Sy)

nSy 2 - ( Sy) 2
25 50 - 125 100
9
=
25 1500 - 100 100 22
Also,
x=
125
= 5,
25
y=
100
= 4.
25
Required line is x = x + bxy ( y - y)

9
x =5 +
( y - 4) 22 x - 9 y = 74.
22
sy
sx
and bxy = r
sx
sy
r = bxy byx .
1
1 sy
sx
( bxy + byx ) > r is true if r
+r
>r
sy
2
2 sx
i.e. if s2y + sx2 > 2 sx s y

i.e. if ( s y - sx ) 2 > 0, which is true.
46. (A) r = 1.6 0.4 = .64 = 0.8
byx = r
m1 =
sy
sx
sy
sx
byx
r
1 sy
1
5
,
=
2=
r sx 0.8
2
m - m2
tan q = 1
1 + m1 m2
1.6
=2
0.8
m2 = r
sy
sx
= 0.8 2 = 1.6.
2.5 - 1.6 0.9

=
= 0.18.
=
1 + 2.5 1.6 5
www.gatehelp.com
Page
581
(B)
x2
x5
x8
x11
+
+
+
2
20 160 4400
(C)
x2
x5
x8
x11
+
+
+
2
20 160 2400
2
(D)
Chap 9.7
Statement for Q. 1819:

dy
For
= 1 + y 2 given that
dx
x:
0.2
0.4
0.6
y:
0.2027
0.4228
0.6841
11
x
x
x
x
+
+
+
2
40 480 2400
12. For dy dx = xy given that y = 1 at x = 0. Using Euler

method taking the step size 0.1, the y at x = 0.4 is
Using Milnes method determine the value of y for

x given in question.
(A) 1.0611
(B) 2.4680
18. y (0.8) = ?
(C) 1.6321
(D) 2.4189
(A) 1.0293
(B) 0.4228
(C) 0.6065
(D) 1.4396
Statement for Q. 1315.

For dy dx = x 2 + y 2 given that y = 1 at x = 0.
19. y (10
. ) =?
Determine the value of y at given x in question using
(A) 1.9428
(B) 1.3428
modified method of Euler. Take the step size 0.02.
(C) 1.5555
(D) 2.168
13. y at x = 0.02 is
(A) 1.0468
(B) 1.0204
(C) 1.0346
(D) 1.0348
Apply Runge Kutta fourth order method to obtain

y (0.2), y (0.4) and y (0.6) from dy dx = 1 + y 2 , with y = 0
at x = 0. Take step size h = 0.2.
14. y at x = 0.04 is
(A) 1.0316
(B) 1.0301
(C) 1.403
(D) 1.0416
20. y (0.2) = ?
15. y at x = 0.06 is
(A) 1.0348
(B) 1.0539
(C) 1.0638
(D) 1.0796
(A) 0.2027
(B) 0.4396
(C) 0.3846
(D) 0.9341
21. y (0.4) = ?
(A) 0.1649
(B) 0.8397
(C) 0.4227
(D) 0.1934
16. For dy dx = x + y given that y = 1 at x = 0. Using
22. y (0.6) = ?
modified Eulers method taking step size 0.2, the value
(A) 0.9348
(B) 0.2935
(C) 0.6841
(D) 0.563
of y at x = 1 is
(A) 3.401638
(B) 3.405417
(C) 9.164396
(D) 9.168238
23. For dy dx = x + y 2 , given that y = 1 at x = 0. Using

Runge Kutta fourth order method the value of y
17. For the differential equation dy dx = x - y 2 given
x = 0.2 is (h = 0.2)
that
(A) 1.2735
(B) 2.1635
(C) 1.9356
(D) 2.9468
x:
0.2
0.4
0.6
y:
0.02
0.0795
0.1762
24. For dy dx = x + y given that y = 1 at x = 0. Using

Runge Kutta fourth order method the value of y
Using Milne predictorcorrection method, the y at

next value of x is
(A) 0.2498
(B) 0.3046
(C) 0.4648
(D) 0.5114
at
x = 0.2 is
at
(h = 0.2)
(A) 1.1384
(B) 1.9438
(C) 1.2428
(D) 1.6389
*********
www.gatehelp.com
Page
583
UNIT 9
SOLUTIONS
x2 = x0 = 35
. -
1. (B) Let f ( x) = x 3 - 4 x - 9
x1 - x0
f ( x0 )
f ( x1 ) - f ( x0 )
0.5
( - 0.5441) = 37888
.
0.3979 + 0.5441
Since f (2) is negative and f ( 3) is positive, a root lies
Since f ( 37888
.
) = - 0.0009 and f ( 4) = 0.3979, therefore
between 2 and 3.
the root lies between 3.7888 and 4.
First approximation to the root is

1
x1 = (2 + 3) = 2.5.
2
Taking x0 = 37888
.
, x1 = 4, we obtain
0.2112
x3 = 37888
.
( - .009) = 37893
.
0.3988
Then f ( x1 ) = 2.5 3 - 4(2.5) - 9 = - 3.375
Hence the required root correct to three places of
i.e. negative\The root lies between x1 and 3. Thus the
decimal is 3.789.
second
approximation
1
x2 = ( x1 + 3) = 2.75.
2
4. (D) Let f ( x) = xe x - 2, Then f (0) = - 2, and
to
the
root
is
Then f ( x2 ) = (2.75) 3 - 4(2.75) - 9 = 0.7969 i.e. positive.

The root lies between x1 and x2 . Thus the third
1
approximation to the root is x3 = ( x1 + x2 ) = 2.625.
2
Then
f ( x3) = (2.625) 3 - 4(2.625) - 9 = - 1.4121
i.e.
negative.
The root lies between x2 and x3 . Thus the fourth
1
approximation to the root is x4 = ( x2 + x3) = 2.6875.
2
Hence the root is 2.6875 approximately.
2. (B) Let f ( x) = x 3 - 2 x - 5
f (1) = e - 2 = 0.7183
So a root of (i ) lies between 0 and 1. It is nearer to 1.
Let us take x0 = 1.
Also f ( x) = xe x + e x and f (1) = e + e = 5.4366
By Newtons rule, the first approximation x1 is
f ( x0 )
0.7183
x1 = x0 =1 = 0.8679
f ( x0 )
5.4366
f ( x1 ) = 0.0672, f ( x1 ) = 4.4491.
Thus the second approximation x2 is
f ( x1 )
0.0672
x2 = x1 = 0.8679 = 0.8528
f ( x1 )
4.4491
Hence the required root is 0.853 correct to 3 decimal
So that f (2) = - 1 and f ( 3) = 16
places.
i.e. a root lies between 2 and 3.

Taking
x0 = 2, x1 = 3, f ( x0 ) = - 1, f ( x1 ) = 16,
in
the
method of false position, we get

x1 - x0
1
x2 = x0 f ( x0 ) = 2 +
= 2.0588
f ( x1 ) - f ( x0 )
17
5. (B) Let y = x + log10 x - 3.375

To obtain a rough estimate of its root, we draw the
graph of (i ) with the help of the following table :
Now, f ( x2 ) = f (2.0588) = - 0.3908 i.e., that root lies

between 2.0588 and 3.
Taking x0 = 2.0588, x1 = 3, f ( x0 )
-2.375
-1.074
0.102
1.227
= - 0.3908, f ( x1 ) = 16 in (i), we get

0.9412
x3 = 2.0588 ( - 0.3908) = 2.0813
16.3908
Taking 1 unit along either axis = 0.1, The curve crosses
Repeating this process, the successive approximations
approximation to the root.
are
Now let us apply NewtonRaphson method to
x4 = 2.0862, x5 = 2.0915, x6 = 2.0934, x7 = 2.0941,
f ( x) = x + log10 x - 3.375
1
f ( x) = 1 + log10 e
x
the xaxis at x0 = 2.9, which we take as the initial
x8 = 2.0943 etc.
Hence the root is 2.094 correct to 3 decimal places.
Taking x0 = 35
. , x1 = 4, in the method of false position,
f (2.9) = 2.9 + log10 2.9 - 3.375 = - 0.0126

1
f (2.9) = 1 +
log10 e = 11497
.
2.9
we get
The first approximation x1 to the root is given by
3. (C) Let f ( x)2 x - log10 x - 7
Page
584
www.gatehelp.com
x1 = x0 -
f ( x0 )
0.0126
= 2.9 +
= 2.9109
f ( x0 )
11497
.
at x = 0,
Thus the second approximation x2 is given by
d2 y
=1 + 2 = 3
dx 2
at x = 0, y = 1,
f ( x1 )
0.0001
= 2.9109 +
= 2.91099
f ( x1 )
11492
.
Hence the desired root, correct to four significant

figures, is 2.911
d 3y
d2 y
dy
y
=
2
2
dx 3
dx 2
dx
6. (B) Let x = 28 so that x 2 - 28 = 0

Taking f ( x) = x 2 - 28, Newtons iterative method gives
28
f ( xn )
x 2 - 28 1
= xn - n
= xn +
2 xn
2
f ( xn )
xn
dy d 2 y
d 3y
y
3
+
dx dx 2
dx 3
d4 y
= -2
dx 4
at x = 0, y = 1
Now since f (5) = - 3, f ( 6) = 8, a root lies between 5 and

6.
d4 y
= 34
dx 4
The Taylor series expression gives

y( x + h) = y( x) + h
Taking x0 = 5.5,
x1 =
1
28 1
28
= 5.5 +
x0 +
= 5.29545
2
5.5
x0 2
x2 =
1
28 1
28
= 5.29545 +
x1 +
= 5.2915
2
5.29545
x1 2
d 3y
=-8
dx 3
x = 0, y = 1,
at
xn + 1 = xn -
dy
= -1
dx
y = 1,
d2 y
dy
=1 -2y
2
dx
dx
f ( x1 ) = - 0.0001, f ( x1 ) = 11492
.
x2 = x1 -
Chap 9.7
dy h2 d 2 y h3 d 3 y h4 d 4 y
+K
+
+
+
3 ! dx 3 4 ! dx 4
dx 2 ! dx 2
y(0.1) = 1 + 0.1( -1) +
(0.1) 2
(0.1) 3
(0.1) 4
3+
( -8) +
34 + ......
2!
3!
4!
= 1 - 0.1 + 0.015 - 0.001333 + 0.0001417 = 0.9138

9. (C) Here f ( x, y) = x 2 + y 2 , x0 = 0
1
28 1
28
= 5.2915 +
x3 = x2 +
= 5.2915
2
5.2915
x2 2
y0 = 0
We have, by Picards method
Since x2 = x3 upto 4 decimal places, so we take
y = y0 +
28 = 5.2915.
f ( x, y) dx
....(1)
x0
The first approximation to y is given by

7. (B) Let h = 0.1,
dy
= 1 + xy
dx
3
given x0 = 0,
d2 y
dy
=x
+y
dx 2
dx
d y
d y
dy
,
=x
+2
dx 3
dx 2
dx
given that
x1 = x0 + h = 0.1
x = 0,
d y
d y
d y
=x
+3
dx 4
dx 3
dx 2
y =1
The Taylor series expression gives :

dy h2 d 2 y h3 d 3 y
+
+
+
3 ! dx 3
dx 2 ! dx 2
y (0.1) = 1 + 0.1 1 +
y(0.1) = 1 + 0.1 +
(0.1) 2
(0.1) 3
1 +
2 +K
2!
3!
0.01 0.001
+
+K
2
3
= 1 + 0.1 + 0.005 + 0.000033 .........

8. (B) Let h = 0.1,
given
dy
= x - y2
x1 = x0 + h = 0.1,
dx
f ( x, y ) dx
0
x0
dy
d2 y
d 3y
d4 y
,
= 1 ; 2 = 1,
=
2
= 3 and so on
dx
dx
dx 3
dx 4
y( x + h) = y( x) + h
y (1 ) = y0 +
x0 = 0,
Where y0 = 0 +
f ( x, 0) dx = x dx.
2
...(2)
The second approximation to y is given by

x
f ( x, y
y ( 2 ) = y0 +
(1 )
) dx = 0 +
x0
x
= 0 + x 2 +
9
0
x
Now,
x3
dx
3
x
x
dx =
+
3 63
y (0.4) =
10. (C) Here
f x,
(0.4) 3 (0.4) 7
+
= 0.02135
3
63
f ( x, y) = y - x ; x0 = 0, y0 = 2
We have by Picards method
= 11053
.
y0 = 1
y = y0 +
x0
f ( x, y) dx

y (1 ) = y0 +
f ( x, y0 ) dx = 2 +
x0
www.gatehelp.com
f ( x, 2) dx
0
Page
585
UNIT 9
= 2 + (2 - x) dx
=2 + 2x -
x2
2
....(1)
f ( x, y
(1 )
=2 +
Here
f x, 2 + 2 x -
x0
2
= 2 + (2 + 2 x 0
x
2
....(2)
f x, 2 + 2 x +
=2 +
x0
y4 = y3 + hf ( x3 , y3) = 10302
.
+ 0.1 f (0.3 , 10302
.
)
x
x
dx
2
6
2
= 10302
.
+ 0.03090
.
y4 = y( 0 .4 ) = 10611
Hence y( 0 .4 ) = 10611
.
x
x
= 2 + 2 + 2 x +
- dx
2
6
0
x
13. (B) The Eulers modified method gives
x2 x3 x4
+
2
6 24
=2 + 2x +
11. (B) Here
f ( x, y) = x + y 2 , x0 = 0
y1* = y0 + hf ( x0 , y0 ),
h
y1 = y0 + [ f ( x0 , y0 ) + f ( x1 , y1*)]
2
y0 = 0
Now, here h = 0.02, y0 = 1, x0 = 0
We have, by Picards method

y = y0 +
.
y1* = 1 + 0.02 f (0, 1), y1* = 1 + 0.02 = 102
h
Next y1 = y0 + [ f ( x0 , y0 ) + f ( x , y1*)]
2
0.02
=1 +
[ f (0, 1) + f (0.02, 102
. )]
2
f ( x, y0 ) dx
x0

y (1 ) = y0 +
f ( x, y ) dx
0
=0 +
x0
x
f ( x, 0) dx
= 1 + 0.01 [1 + 10204
.
] = 10202
.
x
= 0 + xdx =
2
0
So,
f ( x, y
(1 )
) dx = 0 +
x0
f x,
0
x2
2
dx
= 10202
.
+ 0.02 [ f (0.02, 10202
.
)]
= 10202
.
+ 0.0204
= 10406
.
h
Next y2 = y1 + [ f ( x, y) + f ( x2 , y2* )]
2
0.02
y2 = 10202
.
+
[ f (0.02, 10202
.
) + f (0.04, 10406
.
)]
2
x
x
x
dx =
+
= x +
2
50
4
0
x
The third approximation is given by

y ( 3) = y0 +
f ( x, y
(2 )
= 10202
.
+ 0.01 [10206
.
+ 10422
.
] = 10408
.
) dx
x0
.
y2 = y( 0 .04 ) = 10408
x2
x5
dx
= 0 + f x,
+
2
20
0
x
15. (C) y3* = y2 + hf ( x2 , y2 )
2 x7
x2
x5
x8
x11
x4
x10
dx =
+
+
+
= x +
+
+
2
20 160 4400
4
400
40
0
12. (A) x: 0
Page
586
0.1
0.2
.
y1 = y (0.02) = 10202
14. (D) y2* = y1 + h f ( x1 , y1 )

y ( 2 ) = y0 +
y3 = y2 + hf ( x2 , y2 ) = 101
. + 0.1 f (0.2 , 101
. )
n = 3 in (1) gives
) dx
x0
x
n = 2 in (1) gives
. + 0.0202 = 10302
.
y3 = y( 0 .3) = 101
(2 )
h = 0.1
Thus y2 = y( 0 .2 ) = 101
.
f ( x, y
y0 = 1,
= 1 + 0.1 f (0.1 , 1) = 1 + 0.1 (0.1) = 1 + 0.01
The third approximation to y is given by

y ( 3) = y0 +
x0 = 0,
n = 0 in (1) gives y2 = y1 + h f ( x1 , y1 )
x
x
2
6
=2 + 2x +
....(1)
y1 = 1 + 0.1 f (0, 1) = 1 + 0 = 1
dx
x2
- x) dx
2
yn + 1 = yn + h( xn , yn )
y1 = y0 + hf ( x0 , y0 )
) dx
x0
x
Eulers method gives

n = 0 in (1) gives

y ( 2 ) = y0 +
0.3
0.4
= 10416
.
+ 0.02 f (0.04, 10416
.
)
= 10416
.
+ 0.0217 = 10633
.
h
Next y3 = y2 + [ f ( x2 , y2 ) + f ( x3 , y3*)]
2
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 9
1
1
k2 = hf x0 + h, y0 + k1 = (0.2) f (0.1, 0.1) = 0.202

2
2
h
k
k2 = hf x0 + , y0 + 1
2
2
1
1
k3 = hf x0 + h, y0 + k2 = (0.2) f (0.1, 0.101) = 0.2020

2
2
= (0.2) f (0.1, 11
. ) = 0.2(1.31) = 0.262
h
k
k3 = hf x0 + , y0 + 2
2
2
k4 = hf ( x0 + h, y0 + k3) = 0.2 f (0.2, 0.2020) = 0.20816

1
k = [ k1 + 2 k2 + 2 k3 + k4 ]
6
1
= [0.2 + 2 (.202) + 2 (.20204) + 0.20816 ],
6
k = 0.2027
such that
y1 = y(0.2) = y0 + k = 0 + 0.2027 = 0.2027
21. (C) We now to find y2 = y(0.4), k1 = hf ( x1 , y1 )

= (0.2) f (0.2, 0.2027) = 0.2 (10410
.
)
= .2082
= 0.2 f (0.1, 1131

. ) = 0.2758
k4 = hf ( x0 + h, y0 + k3)
= (0.2) f (0.2, 12758
.
) = 0.3655
1
k = [ k1 + 2 k2 + 2 k3 + 2 k4 ]
6
1
= [0.2 + 2 (0.262) + 2 (0.2758) + 0.3655 ] = 0.2735
6
Here
y1 = y( 0 .2 ) = y0 + k
= 1 + 0.2735
12735
.
1
1
k2 = hf x1 + h , y1 + k1
2
2
24. (C) Here f ( x, y) = x + y h = 0.2
= (0.2) f (0.3, 0.3068)
k1 = hf ( x0 , y0 ) = 0.2 f (0, 1) = 0.2

h
k
. ) = 0.24
k2 = hf x0 + , y0 + 1 = (0.2) f (0.1, 11
2
2
To find y1 = y( 0 .2 ) ,
= 0.2188
1
1
k3 = hf x1 + h , y1 + k2
2
2
h
k
. ) = 0.244
k3 = hf x0 + , y0 + 2 = (0.2) f (0.1, 112
2
2
= 0.2 f (0.3, 0.3121) = .2194

k4 = hf ( x1 + h, y1 + k3) = 0.2 f (0.4, .4221) = 0.2356
1
k = [ k1 + 2 k2 + 2 k3 + k4 ]
6
1
= [0.2082 + 2(.2188) + 2(.2194) + 0.356 ] = 0.2200
6
k4 = hf ( x0 + h, y0 + k3) = (0.2) f (0.2, 1244

.
) = 0.2888
1
k = [ k1 + 2 k2 + 2 k3 + k4 ]
6
1
= [0.2 + 2(0.24) + 2(0.244) + 0.2888 ] = 0.2428
6
y2 = y( 0 .4 ) = y1 + k = 0.2200 + .2027 = 0.4227
y1 = y( 0 .2 ) = y0 + k = 1 + 0.2428
= 12428
.
22. (C) We now to find y3 = y( 0 .6 ) , k1 = hf ( x2 , y2 )

= (0.2) f (0.4, 0.4228)
= 0.2357
1
1
k2 = hf x2 + h, y2 + k1
2
2
***********
= (0.2) f (0.5, 0.5406) = 0.2584

1
1
k3 = hf x2 + h, y2 + k2
2
2
= 0.2 f (0.5, .5520) = 0.2609

1
k4 = [ k1 + 2 k2 + 2 k3 + k4 ]
6
1
= [0.2357 + 2(.2584) + 2(0.2609) + 0.2935 ]
6
1
= [0.2357 + 0.5168 + 0.5218 + 0.2935 ] = 0.2613
6
y3 = y( 0 .6 ) = y2 + k = .4228 + 0.2613 = 0.6841
23. (A) Here given
f ( x, y) = x + y
x0 = 0
y0 = 1,
h = 0.2
To find y1 = y( 0 .2 ) ,
k1 = hf ( x0 , y0 )
Page
588
= (0.2) f (0, 1) = (0.2) 1 = 0.2

www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
10.5
EC-07
1. If E Denotes expectation, the variance of a random
6. For the function e- x , the linear approximation around
variable X is given by
x = 2 is
(A) E[ X 2 ] - E 2 [ X ]
(B) E[ X 2 ] + E 2 [ X ]
(C) E[ X ]
(D) E [ X ]
2. The following plot shows a function y which varies

2
linearly with X. The value of the integral I = y dx is

y
(B) 1 - x
(C) [ 3 + 2 2 - 1(1 + 2 x ]e -2
(D) e -2
7. An independent voltage source in series with an

impedance Z s = Rs + jX s delivers a maximum average
power to a load impedance Z L when
3
2
1
-1
(A) ( 3 - x) e -2
(A) Z L = RS + jX S
(B) Z L = RS
(C) Z L = jX S
(D) Z L = RS - jX S
8. The RC circuit shown in the figure is

R
(A) 1.0
(B) 2.5
(C) 4.0
(D) 5.0
C
+
Vi
Vo
3. For x << 1, coth( x) can be approximated as
(C)
1
x
4. lim
(D)
sin( q/2)
q0
1
x2
is
(C) 2
(D) not defined
(C) a band-pass filter
(D) a band-reject filter
impurities are introduced with a concentration of N A

per cm 3(where N A >> ni ) the electron concentration per
5. Which of the following functions is strictly bounded ?
(C) x 2
(B) a high-pass filter
semiconductor are ni per cm 3 at 300 K. Now, if acceptor
(B) 1
1
x2
(A) a low-pas filter
9. The electron and hole concentrations in an intrinsic
(A) 0.5
(A)
(B) x 2
(A) x
(B) e x
(D) e - x
cm 3 at 300 K will be
(A) ni
(B) ni + N A
(C) N A - ni
(D)
www.gatehelp.com
ni2
NA
Page
639
UNIT 10
10. In a
p+ n junction diode under reverse biased the
Previous year Papers
15. If closed-loop transfer function of a control system is
magnitude of electric field is maximum at
given as T( s) =
(A) the edge of the depletion region on the p -side
(A) an unstable system
(B) the edge of the depletion region on the n -side
(B) an uncontrollable system
(C) the p+ n junction
(C) a minimum phase system
(D) the center of the depletion region on the n-side
(D) a non-minimum phase system
11. The correct full wave rectifier circuit is
16. If the Laplace transform of a signal y( t) is
Output
(B)
Input
Output
(A)
Input
Y ( s) =
1
s ( s -1 )
s-5
( s + 2 )( s + 3)
then It is
, then its final value is
(A) -1
(B) 0
(C) 1
(D) unbounded
17. If R( t) is the auto correlation function of a real,

wide-sense stationary random process, then which of
(A) R( t) = R( -t)
Output
(D)
Input
Output
Input
the following is NOT true

(B) R( t) R(0)
(C) R( t) = - R( -t)
(D) The mean square value of the process is R(0)
12. In a trans-conductance amplifier, it is desirable to
18. If S( f )is the power spectral density of a real,
have
wide-sense stationary random process, then which of

the following is ALWAYS true?
(A) a large input resistance and a large output

resistance
(B) a large input resistance and a small output
resistance
(A) S(0) S( f )
(B) S( f ) 0
(C) S( - f ) = -S( f )
(D)
S( f )df
=0
(C) a small input resistance and a large output

resistance
19. A plane wave of wavelength l is traveling in a

direction making an angle 30 o with positive x -axis. The
(D) a small input resistance and a small output

resistance
E field of the plane wave can be represented as (E0 is

constant)
13. X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5-bit binary

numbers represented in two's complement format. The
sum of X and Y represented in two's complement format
using 6 bits is
(A) 100111
(B) 0010000
(C) 000111
(D) 101001
3p p
j wt x z
l l
3p p
j wt +
x z
l l
(A) E = yE0 e
(C) E = yE0 e
p
3p
j wt - x
z
l l
p
3p
j wt - x +
z
l
l
(B) E = yE0 e
(D) E = yE0 e
20. If C is close curve enclosing a surface S, then the
the electric flux density D are related by

14. The Boolean function Y = AB + CD is to be realized
using only 2-input NAND gates. The minimum number
of gates required is
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
Page
640
magnetic field intensity H , the current density j and
(A) H . d s = j +
.d l
t
s
c
(B) H . d l = j +
d .d s
t
s
s
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 10
29. For the circuit shown in the figure, the Thevenin
33. Group I lists four types of p - n junction diodes.
voltage and resistance looking into X - Y are
match each device in Group I with one of the option in
1W
X
Group II to indicate the bias condition of the device in

its normal mode of operation.
Group-I
(P) Zener Diode
(Q) Solar cell
(R) LASER diode
(S) Avalanche Photodiode
2W
2A
1W
2i
(A)
(C)
4
V, 2W
3
2
(B) 4 V, W
3
4
2
V, W
3
3
(D) 4 V, 2W
Group-II
(1) Forward bias
(2) Reverse bias
(A) P - 1 Q - 2 R - 1 S - 2
(B) P - 2 Q - 1 R - 1 S - 2
(C) P - 2 Q - 2 R - 1 S - 2
30. In the circuit shown, Vc is 0 volts at t = 0 sec. for

t > 0, the capacitor current ic ( t), where t is in seconds, is
given by
(D) P - 2 Q - 1 R - 2 S - 2
34. The DC current gain (b) of a BJT is 50. Assuming
that the emitter injection efficiency is 0.995, the base
iC
20 kW
4 mF
20 kW
10 V
transport factor is
+
VC
-
(A) 0.980
(B) 0.985
(C) 0.990
(D) 0.995
35. group I lists four different semiconductor devices.

(A) 0.50 exp( -25 t) mA
match each device in Group I with its characteristic
(B) 0.25 exp( -25 t) mA
property in Group II.
(C) 0.50 exp( -25 t) mA

(D) 0.25 exp( -25 t) mA
31. In the AC network shown in the figure, the phasor
(B) P - 1 Q - 4 R - 3 S - 2
Group-II
(1) Population inversion
(2)Pinch-off voltage
(3) Early effect
(4) Fat-band voltage
(A) P - 3 Q - 1 R - 4 S - 2
voltage V AB (in volts) is
Group-I
(P)BJT
(Q)MOS capacitor
(R) LASER diode
(S) JFET
5W
(C) P - 3 Q - 4 R - 1 S - 2
5W
(D) P - 3 Q - 2 R - 1 S - 4
-j3
j3
36. For the Op-Amp circuit shown in the figure, Vo is
(A) 0
(C) 12.5 30 o
2 kW
(B) 5 30 o
(D) 17 30 o
1 kW
vo
1V
32. A p+ n junction has a built-in potential of 0.8 V. The
1 kW
1 kW
depletion layer width at reverse bias of 1.2V is 2 mm.

For a reverse bias of 7.2 V, the depletion layer width
will be
(A) 4 mm
(B) 4.9 mm
(C) 8 mm
(D) 12 mm
(A) -2 V
(B) -1 V
(C) -0.5 V
(D) 0.5 V
37. For the BJT circuit shown, assume that the b of the
transistor is very large and VBE = 0.7 V . The mode of
operation of the BJT is
Page
642
www.gatehelp.com
EC-07
10 kW
2V
10 V
Chap 10.5
(A) 7.00 to 7.29 V
(B) 7.14 to 7.29 V
(C) 7.14 to 7.43 V
(D) 7.29 to 7.43 V
41.
1 kW
The
Boolean
expression
Y = AB CD + ABCD+ ABCD+ ABCD

(A) cut-off
(B) saturation
minimized to
(C) normal active
(D) reverse active
(A) Y = A B CD + A B C + A C D
38. In the Op-Amp circuit shown, assume that the diode

current follows the equation I = I s exp(V/VT ). For
Vi = 2 V , V0 = V01 ,
and
Vi = 4 V , V0 = V02 .
for
The
relationship between V01 and V02 is
can
be
(B) Y = A B CD + B C D + A B C D
(C) Y = AB C D + B C D + AB CD
(D) Y = AB C D + B C D + A B C D
42. The circuit diagram of a standard TTL NOT gate is
shown in the figure. Vi = 2.5 V , the modes of operation of

vi
2 kW
the transistors will be

vo
VCC =5 V
(A) V02 = 2 V01
(B) V02 = e V01
(C) V02 = V01 ln 2
(D) V01 - V02 = VT ln 2
100 W
1.4 kW
4 kW
2
Q4
+
39. In the CMOS inverter circuit shown, if the
Q1
Q2
D
+
transconductance parameters of the NMOS and PMOS

transistors are kn = kp = m n Cox
Wn
Ln
= m p Cox
Wp
Lp
Q3
= 40 mA/V 2
1 kW
and their threshold voltages are VTHn = VTHp = 1V , the
current I is
5V
(A) Q1 : revere active;Q2 : normal active; Q3: saturation;

Q4 :cut-off
PMOS
2.5 V
(B) Q1 : revere active;Q2 : saturation; Q3: saturation;

Q4 :cut-off
NMOS
(A) 0 A
(B) 25 mA
(C) 45 mA
(D) 90 mA
(C) Q1 : normal active;Q2 : cut-off; Q3: cut-off;

Q4 :saturation
(D) Q1 : saturation;Q2 : saturation; Q3: saturation;
Q4 :normal active
40. For the Zener diode shown in the figure, the Zener
43. In the following circuit, X is given by
voltage at knee is 7V, the knee current is negligible and

0
the Zener dynamic resistance is 10W. if the input
1
1
0
voltage ( Vi ) range is from 10 to 16V, the output voltage
(V0 ) ranges
from
S1 S0
200 W
+
vi
I0 4-to-1
MUX
I1
Y
I2
I3
0
1
1
0
I0 4-to-1
I1 MUX
I2
Y
I3
S1
vo
(A) X = A B C + A B C + A BC + ABC
(B) X = ABC + A B C + ABC + ABC

www.gatehelp.com
S0
Page
643
UNIT 10
(C) X = AB + BC + AC
47. (A) The 3-dB bandwidth of the low-pas signal e- t u( t),
(D) X = A B + B C + AC
44. The following binary values were applied to the X
where u( t) is the unit step function, is given by

1
1
(A)
Hz
(B)
2 - 1 Hz
2p
2p
and Y inputs of NAND latch shown in the figure in the
(C)
sequence indicated below
(D) 1 Hz
48. A Hilbert transformer is a
X = 0, Y = 1; X = 0, Y = 0; X = 1, Y = 1.
(A) non-linear system

(C) time-varying system
X
P
(B) non-causal system

(D) low-pass system
49. The frequency response of a linear, time-invariant

system is given by H ( f ) = 1 + j510 pf . The step response of
Q
Y
the system is
The corresponding stable P , Q outputs will be

(A) P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0 or P = 0, Q = 1
(B) P = 1, Q = 0; P = 0, Q = 1; or P = 0 Q = 1; P = 0, Q = 1
(C)
(C) P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 1; P = 1, Q = 0 or P = 0, Q = 1
(D)P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 1; P = 1, Q = 1
t
-
(B) 5 1 - e 5 u( t)
(A) 5( 1 - e -5t ) u( t)
1
(1 - e-5t )u(t)
2
50.
5-point
(C)
sequence
t
-
1
1 - e 5 u( t)
x[ n]
is
given
as
45. For the circuit shown, the counter state (Q1Q0 )
x[ -3] = 1, x[ -2 ] = 1, x[ -1] = 0, x[0 ] = 5, x[1] = 1. Let X ( e jw )
follows the sequence
denote the
discrete-time Fourier transform of x[ n]. The
p
value of
X (e
jw
)dw is
-p
(A) 5
(B) 10p
(D) 5 + j10 p
(C) 16p
Q0
D0
D1
Q1
51. The z-transform x[ z ] of a sequence x[ n] is given by

X ( z) = 1 -02.z5-1 . It is given that the region of convergence of
x[ n] includes the unit circle. The value of x[0] is
(A) 00, 01, 10, 11, 00
(B) 00, 01, 10, 00, 01
(C) 00, 01, 11, 00, 01
(D) 00, 10, 11, 00, 10
(A) -0.5
(B) 0
(C) 0.25
(D) 0.5
52. A Control system with PD controller is shown in

46.
8085
the figure If the velocity error constant K V = 1000 and
microprocessor system as an I/O mapped I/O as show in
the damping ration z = 0.5, then the value of K P and K D
the figure. The address lines A0 and A1 of the 8085 are
are
An
8255
chip
is
interfaced
to
an
used by the 8255 chip to decode internally its thee ports
R(s)
and the Control register. The address lines A3 to A7 as
C(s)
well as the IO/M signal are used for address decoding.

The range of addresses for which the 8255 chip would
get selected is
8255
(A) K P = 100, K D = 0.09
(B) K P = 100, K D = 0.9
(C) K P = 10, K D = 0.09
(D) K P = 10, K D = 0.9
53. The transfer function of a plant is

T( s) =
(A) F8H - FBH
(B) F8H - FCH
(C) F8H - FFH
(D) F0H - F7H
Page
644
www.gatehelp.com
5
(s + 5)( s2 + s + 1)
EC-07
The second-order approximation of T( s) using

dominant pole concept is
1
(A)
(s + 5)(s + 1)
(C)
(B)
5
s2 + s + 1
(s + 5)(s + 1)
1
s2 + s + 1
(D)
1
s 2 -1
. If the plant is operated in a unity feedback
stabilize this control system is

10( s - 1)
10( s + 4)
(A)
(B)
s+2
s+2
10( s + 2)
s + 10
(B)
1
s + 11s + 11
(C)
10 s + 10
s + 11s + 11
(D)
1
s + s + 11
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
decreasing
decreasing
decreasing
increasing
the
the
the
the
step size
granular noise
sampling rate
step size
digital communications. The expression for p( t) with

unity roll-off facto is given by
s + 10
p( t) =
55. A unity feedback control system has an open-loop
sin 4 pWt
4 pWt(1 - 16W 2 t 2 )
The value of p( t) at t =
transfer function
G( s) =
59. The raised cosine pulse p( t) is used for zero ISI in
2(s + 2)
(D)
10
s + 11s + 11
2
can be reduced by
configuration, then the lead compensator that an
(C)
(A)
58. In delta modulation, the slope overload distortion
54. The open-loop transfer function of a plant is given

as G( s) =
Chap 10.5
K
.
s( s 2 + 7 s + 12)
The gain K for which s = 1 + j1 will lie on the root
1
is
4W
(A) -0.5
(B) 0
(C) 0.5
(D)
60. In the following scheme, if the spectrum M ( f ) of
locus of this system is

(A) 4
(B) 5.5
(C) 6.5
(D) 10
m( t) is as shown, then the spectrum Y ( f ) of y( t) will be

M
m(t)
56. The asymptotic Bode plot of a transfer function is as

S
shown in the figure. The transfer function G( s)

Hilbert
Transform
corresponding to this Bode plot is

0
G(jw)dB
60 dB
-20 dB/dec
(A)
40 dB
(B)
-40 dB/dec
20 dB
w
1
10
20 100
-60 dB/dec
(A)
1
( s + 1)( s + 20)
(B)
1
s( s + 1)( s + 20)
(C)
100
s( s + 1)( s + 20)
(D)
100
s( s + 1)(1 + 0.05 s)
(D)
61.
During
transmission
over
certain
binary
57. The state space representation of a separately
communication channel, bit errors occurs independently
excited DC servo motor dynamics is given as
with probability p. The probability of AT MOST one bit
dw
dt
dia
dt
1 w 0
-1
= -1 -10 i + 10 u
a

in error in a block of n bits is given by

(A) pn
(C) np(1 - p) n -1 + (1 - p) n
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 1 - pn
(D) 1 - (1 - p) n
Page
645
UNIT 10
62. In a GSM system, 8 channels can co-exist in 200
67. A load of 50W is connected in shunt in a 2-wire
KHz bandwidth using TDMA. A GSM based cellular
transmission line of Z 0 = 50W as shown in the figure.
operator is allocated 5 MHz bandwidth. Assuming a
The 2-port scattering parameter matrix (s-matrix) of
1
5
frequency reuse factor of , i.e. a five-cell repeat pattern,
the shunt element is
the maximum number of simultaneous channels that
- 1
(A) 12
2
can exist in one cell is

(A) 200
(C) 25
(B) 40
(D) 5
0 1
(B)
1 0
1
2
1
2
2
- 1
3
(C) 23
1
3 - 3
63. In a Direct Sequence CDMA system the chip rate is

1.2288 106 chips per second. If the processing gain is
desired to be at Least 100, the data rate
(A) must be less than or equal to 12.288 10 3 bits/sec
(B) must be greater than 12.288 10 3 bits per sec
(C) must be exactly equal to 12.288 10 3 bits per sec
1
(D) 43
- 4
- 43
1
4
68. The parallel branches of a 2-wire transmission line

are terminated in 100 W and 200 W resistors as shown
in the figure. The characteristic impedance of the line is
Z 0 = 50W and each section has a length of 4l . The voltage
reflection coefficient G at the input is
(D) can take any value less than 122.88 10 3 bits/sec
l/4
l/4
200
64. An air-filled rectangular waveguide has inner
dimensions of 3 cm 2 cm. The wave impedance of the

TE20 mode of propagation in the waveguide at a
frequency
of
30
GHz
is
(free
space
impedance
h0 = 377 W)
(A) 308W
(B) 355W
(C) 400W
(D) 461W
200 W
l/4
65. The H field (in A/m) of a plane wave propagating in

(A) - j
free space is given by
H=x
p
5 3
5
cos( wt - bz) + y sin wt - bz +

h0
h0
2
The time average power flow density in Watts is

h0
100
(B)
(A)
100
h0
(C) 50h20
(D)
7
5
(C) j
5
7
69. A
l
2
(B)
-5
7
(D)
5
7
dipole is kept horizontally at a height of
l0
2
above
a perfectly conducting infinite ground plane. The
radiation pattern in the lane of the dipole (E plane)
50
h0
looks approximately as
(A)
(B)
66. The E field in a rectangular waveguide of inner

dimensions a b is given by
E=
wm p
2 px
H 0 sin
sin( wt - bz) y
h2 2
a
Where H 0 is a constant, and a and b are the

dimensions
along
the
x -axis
and
the
(C) TM 20
(D) TE10
Page
646
(D)
y -axis
is
(B) TM11
respectively. The mode of propagation in the waveguide

(A) TE20
www.gatehelp.com
EC-07
70. A right circularly polarized (RCP) plane wave is
Common Data for Questions 74, 75 :
incident at an angle of 60 o to the normal, on an

air-dielectric interface. If the reflected wave is linearly
polarized, the relative dielectric constant xr 2 is
Two 4-ray signal constellations are shown. It is

given that f1 and f2 constitute an orthonormal basis for
the two constellations. Assume that the four symbols in
both the constellations are equiprobable. Let N0 / 2
Linearly
Polarized
RCP
Chap 10.5
denote the power spectral density of white Gaussian
air
noise.
Dielectric
(B) 3
(D) 3
(A) 2
(C) 2
Common Data for Questions 71, 72, 73:

The
figure
shows
the
high-frequency
capacitance-voltage(C-V) characteristics of a Metal/

SiO2/silicon
(MOS)
capacitor
having
an
area
of
1 10 -4 cm 2 . Assume that the perimitivities ( e 0 e r ) of

silicon and Si O2 are 1 10 -12 F/cm and 35
. 10 -13 F/cm
respectively.
C
Constellation 1
74. The ratio of the average energy of constellation 1 to

the average energy of constellation 2 is
(A) 4 a 2
(B) 4
(C) 2
(D) 8
75.
7 pF
Constellation 2
If
these
constellations
are
used
for
digital
communications over an AWGN channel, then which of

the following statements is true ?
(A) Probability of symbol error for Constellation 1 is
lower
1 pF
V
71. The gate oxide thickness in the MOS capacitor is

(A) 50 nm
(B) 143 nm
(C) 350 nm
(D) 1 mm
72. The maximum depletion layer width in silicon is
(B) Probability of symbol error for Constellation 1 is

higher
(C) Probability of symbol error is equal for both the
constellations
(D) The value of N 0 will determine which of the two
constellations has a lower probability of symbol error,
(A) 0.143 mm
(B) 0.857 mm
Linked Answer Questions: Q. 76 to Q. 85 Carry
(C) 1 mm
(D) 1.143 mm
Two marks Each.
73. Consider the following statements about the C-V

characteristics plot:
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 76 & 77:

Consider the Op-Amp circuit shown in the figure.
S1: The MOS capacitor has an n-type substrate.
R1
S2: If positive charges are introduced in the oxide, the
R1
C-V plot will shift to the left.

vi
Then which of the following is true?

(A) Both S1 and S2 are true
vo
R
C
(B) S1 is true and Se is false

(C) S1 is false and S2 is true
(D) Both S1 and S2 are false
www.gatehelp.com
Page
647
UNIT 10
76. The transfer function V0 ( s)/Vi ( s) is
80. The eigenvalue and eigenvector pairs ( li Vi ) for the
(A)
1 - sRC
1 + sRC
(B)
1 + sRC
1 - sRC
(C)
1
1 - sRC
(D)
1
1 + sRC
system are
1
1
(A) -1, and -2,
-1
-2
77. If Vi = V1 sin( wt) and V0 = V2 sin( wt - f), then the

minimum and maximum values of f (in radians) are
respectively
(A) - 2p and
p
2
(C) -p and 0
(B) 0 and
p
2
1
1
(B) -1, and -2,
-1
-2
1
1
(C) -1 and -2,
1
-2

1
1
(D) -2, and 1,
1

-2
(D) - 2p and 0
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 78 & 79.

An 8085 assembly language program is given
below.
81. The system matrix A is

0 1
(A)
-1 1
1
1
(B)
-1 -2
1
2
(C)
-1 -1
1
0
(D)
-2 -3
Line 1:
MVI A, B5H
2:
MVI B, OEH
3:
XRI 69H
4:
ADD B
5:
ANI 9BH
6:
CPI 9FH
7:
STA 3010H
density function f ( x) as shown in the figure. Decision
8:
HLT
boundaries of the quantizer are chosen so as t maximize
Statement fo Linked Answer Questions 82 & 83:

An input to a 6-level quantizer has the probability
78. The contents of the accumulator just after execution

of the ADD instruction in line 4 will be
(A) C3H
(B) EAH
(C) DCH
(D) 69H
the entropy of the quantizer output. It is given that 3

consecutive decision boundaries are ' -1' , '0 ' and '1'.
f(x)
a
79. After execution of line 7 of the program, the status

-5
of the CY and Z flags will be

(A) CY = 0, Z = 0
(B) CY = 0, Z = 1
(C) CY = A, Z = 0
(D) CY = 1, Z = 1
-1
82. The values of a and b are

(A) a =
1
1
and b =
6
12
(B) a =
1
3
and b =
5
40
(C) a =
1
1
and b =
4
16
(D) a =
1
1
and b =
3
24

Consider a linear system whose state space
representation is x( t) = Ax( t). If the initial state vector of
1
the system is x(0) = , then the system response is
-2
e -2 x
. If the itial state vector of the system
x( t) =
-2 t
-2 e
83. Assuming that the reconstruction levels of the

quantizer are the mid-points of the decision boundaries,
the ratio of signal power to quantization noise power is
1
changes to x(0) = , then the system response
-2
(A)
152
9
(B)
e- t
becomes x( t) = - t
-e
(C)
76
3
(D) 28
Page
648
www.gatehelp.com
64
3
EC-07
ANSWER
In the digital-to Analog converter circuit shown in

the figure below, VR = 10 V and R = 10 kW.
R
2R
2R
2R
Chap 10.5
1. A
2. B
3. C
4. A
5. D
6. A
7. D
8. C
9. D
10 .C
11. C
12. A
13. C
14. B
15. D
16. A
17. C
18. B
19. A
20. D
21. C
22. A
23. C
24. D
25. B
26. B
27. A
28. D
29. D
30. A
31. D
32. A
33. B
34. B
35. C
2R
R
vo
+
84. The current is

(A) 3125
. mA
(B) 62.5mA
36. C
37. B
38. D
39. D
40. C
(C) 125mA
(D) 250mA
41. D
42. B
43. A
44. C
45. B
46. C
47. A
48. A
49. B
50. B
51. D
52. B
53. C
54. A
55. D
56. D
57. A
58. D
59. C
60. A
61. C
62. B
63. A
64. C
65. D
66. A
67. B
68. D
69. C
70. D
71. A
72. B
73. C
74. B
75. B
76. A
77. C
78. B
79. C
80. A
81. D
82. A
83.
84. B
85. C
85. The voltage V0 is

(A) -0.781 V
(B) -1.562 V
(C) -3.125 V
(D) -6.250 V
************
www.gatehelp.com
Page
649
CHAPTER
10.1
EC-03
Duration : Three Hours
Maximum Marks : 150
4. The Laplace transform of i( t) is given by

I ( s) =
Q.130 carry one mark each
As t , The value of i( t) tends to
1. The minimum number of equations required to

analyze the circuit shown in Fig. Q. 1 is
C
2
s(1 + s)
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D)
5. The differential equation for the current i( t) in the

R
circuit of Fig. Q.5 is

R
i1(t)
Fig. Q1
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 6
(D) 7
sin t
2W
2H
1F
Fig. Q5
impedance consisting of 1W resistance in series with 1
d 2i
di
(A) 2 2 + 2
+ i( t) = sin t
dt
dt
H inductance. The load that will obtain the maximum
(B) 2
d 2i
di
+2
+ 2 i( t) = cos t
dt 2
dt
(C) 2
d 2i
di
+2
+ i( t) = cos t
2
dt
dt
(D) 2
d 2i
di
+2
+ 2 i( t) = sin t
dt 2
dt
2.. A source of angular frequency 1 rad/sec has a source
power transfer is
(A) 1 W resistance
(B) 1 W resistance in parallel with 1 H inductance
(C) 1 W resistance in series with 1 F capacitor
(D) 1 W resistance in parallel with 1 F capacitor
6. n-type silicon is obtained by doping silicon with

3. A series RLC circuit has a resonance frequency of
(A) Germanium
(B) Aluminium
1 kHz and a quality factor Q = 100. If each of R, L and C
(C) Boron
(D) Phosphorus
is doubled from its original value, the new Q of the

circuit is
7. The bandgap of silicon at 300 K is
(A) 25
(B) 50
(C) 100
(D) 200
(A) 1.36 eV
(B) 1.10 eV
(C) 0.80 eV
(D) 0.67 eV
www.gatehelp.com
Page
591
EC-03
Chap 10.1
20. A 0 to 6 counter consists of 3 flip flops and a
25. A PD controller is used to compensate a system.
combination circuit of 2 input gate(s). The combination
Compared
circuit consists of
compensated system has
(A) one AND gate
(A) a higher type number
(B) one OR gate
(B) reduced damping
(C) one AND gate and one OR gate
(C) higher noise amplification
(D) two AND gates
(D) larger transient overshoot
21. The Fourier series expansion of a real periodic
26. The input to a coherent detector is DSB-SC signal
signal with fundamental frequency f0 is given by
plus noise. The noise at the detector output is
g p ( t) =
n = -
e j 2 pf0t . It is given that c3 = 3 + j5. Then c-3 is
to
the
uncompensated
system,
the
(A) the in-phase component
(A) 5 + j 3
(B) -3 - j5
(B) the quadrature component
(C) -5 + j 3
(D) 3 - j5
(C) zero
(D) the envelope
22. Let x( t) be the input to a linear, time-invariant

system. The required output is 4 x( t - 2). The transfer
27. The noise at the input to an ideal frequency detector
function of the system should be
is white. The detector is operating above threshold. The
(A) 4 e
j 4 pf
(C) 4 e
- j 4 pf
23.
(B) 2 e
- j8 pf
power spectral density of the noise at the output is
j8 pf
(A) raised-cosine
(B) flat
(C) parabolic
(D) Gaussian
(D) 2 e
sequence
x( n)
with
the
z-transform
X ( z) = z 4 + z 2 - 2 z + 2 - 3z -4 is applied as an input to a
28. At a given probability of error, binary coherent FSK
linear, time-invariant system with the impulse response
is inferior to binary coherent PSK by
h( n) = 2 d( n - 3) where
(A) 6 dB
(B) 3 dB
(C) 2 dB
(D) 0 dB
1, n = 0
d( n) =
0, otherwise
29. The unit of H is
The output at n = 4 is
(A) Ampere
(A) -6
(B) zero
(C) 2
(D) -4
(C) Ampere/meter
(B) Ampere/meter
2
(D) Ampere-meter
30. The depth of penetration of electromagnetic wave in

24. Fig. Q.24 shows the Nyquist plot of the open-loop
a medium having conductivity s at a frequency of 1
transfer function G( s) H ( s) of a system. If G( s) H ( s) has
MHz is 25 cm. The depth of penetration at a frequency
one right-hand pole, the closed-loop system is
of 4 MHz will be
Im
GH - plane
w=0
(-1, 0)
Re
(A) 6.25 cm
(B) 12.50 cm
(C) 50.00 cm
(D) 100.00 cm
Q.3190 carry two marks each.
w is positive
31. Twelve 1 W resistance are used as edges to form a
Fig. Q24
cube. The resistance between two diagonally opposite
(A) always stable

(B) unstable with one closed-loop right hand pole
(C) unstable with two closed-loop right hand poles
(D) unstable with three closed-loop right hand poles
corners of the cube is

5
(A) W
6
(C)
6
5
www.gatehelp.com
(B) 1 W
(D)
3
W
2
Page
593
UNIT 10
32. The current flowing through the resistance R in the

circuit in Fig. Q.32 has the form P cos 4 t, where P is
1
F
10.24
Previous Year Papers
- Ls I s
1
= s
1 I 2 s
R + Ls +
0
Cs

R + Ls + Cs
(D)
- Ls
M=0.75 H
35. An input voltage

3W
R = 3.92 W
V=2cos 4t
v( t) = 10 2 cos ( t + 10) + 10 3 cos (2 + 10 ) V
is applied to a series combination of resistance

R = 1W and an inductance L = 1 H. The resulting steady
Fig. Q32
state current i( t) in ampere is
(A) (0.18 + j 0.72)
(B) (0.46 + j 190

. )
(C) -(0.18 + j 190

. )
(D) -(0.192 + j 0.144)
The circuit for Q.3334 are given in Fig. Q.3334.

For both the questions, assume that the switch S
is in position 1 for a long time and thrown to
position 2 at t = 0.
1
(B) 1 - cos ( t + 55 ) + 10
3
cos (2 t + 55 )
2
(C) 10 cos ( t - 55 ) + 10 cos (2 t + 10 - tan -1 2)

(D) 1 - cos ( t - 55 ) + 10
3
cos (2 t - 35 )
2
36. The driving-point impedance Z ( s) of a network has
the pole-zero locations as shown in Fig. Q.36. If Z(0) = 3,

R
(A) 10 cos ( t + 55 ) + 10 cos (2 t + 10 + tan -1 2)
i1
then Z ( s) is
i2
Im
C
1
Fig. Q33-34
-3
Re
-1
33. At t = 0 + , the current i1 is

(A)
-V
2R
-V
(C)
4R
(B)
s - plane
-1
-V
R
Fig. Q36
(D) zero
34. I1 ( s) and I 2 ( s) are the Laplace transforms of i1 ( t) and
(A)
3( s + 3)
s + 2s + 3
(B)
2( s + 3)
s + 2s + 2
(C)
3( s - 3)
s2 - 2 s - 2
(D)
2( s - 3)
s2 - 2 s - 3
i2 ( t) respectively. The equations for the loop currents

I1 ( s) and I 2 ( s) for the circuit shown in Fig. Q.3334,
37. The impedance parameters Z11 and Z12
after the switch is brought from position 1 to position 2
two-port network in Fig. Q.37 are
at t = 0, are
1
R + Ls + Cs
(A)
- Ls
2W
R + Ls + Cs
(B)
- Ls
V
- Ls I s -
1
s
=
1 I 2 s
R+
0
Cs
R + Ls + Cs
(C)
- Ls
V
- Ls I s -
1
s
=
1 I 2 s
R + Ls +
0
Cs
Page
594
2W
3W
- Ls I s
1
= s
1 I 2 s
R+
0
Cs

1W
1W
Fig. Q37
(A) Z11 = 2.75W and Z12 = 0.25 W

(B) Z11 = 3W
and Z12 = 0.5 W
(C) Z11 = 3W
and Z12 = 0.25 W
(D) Z11 = 2.25 W

www.gatehelp.com
of the
and Z12 = 0.5 W
EC-03
Chap 10.1
38. An n-type silicon bar 0.1 cm long and 100 mm 2 in
(A) 2.26 eV
(B) 1.98 eV
cross-sectional
(C) 1.17 eV
(D) 0.74 eV
area
has
majority
carrier
concentration of 5 10 20 / m 3 and the carrier mobility is

0.13 m 2 /V-s at 300 K. If the charge of an electron is 1.5
43..When the gate-to-source voltage ( VGS ) of a MOSFET
10 -19 coulomb, then the resistance of the bar is
with threshold voltage of 400 mV, working in saturation
(A) 106 Ohm
is 900 mV, the drain current is observed to be 1 mA.
(C) 10
-1
(B) 10 4 Ohm
Ohm
(D) 10
-4
Ohm
Neglecting the channel width modulation effect and

assuming that the MOSFET is operating at saturation,
39. The electron concentration in a sample of uniformly

doped n-type silicon at 300 K varies linearly from
1017 cm 3 at x = 0 to 6 1016 cm 3 at x = 2 mm. Assume a
situation that electrons are supplied to keep this
concentration gradient constant with time. If electronic
charge is 1.6 10 -19 coulomb and the diffusion constant
Dn = 35 cm 2 s, the current density in the silicon, if no
electric field is present, is
the drain current for an applied VGS of 1400 mV is

(A) 0.5 mA
(B) 2.0 mA
(C) 3.5 mA
(D) 4.0 mA
44. If P is Passivation, Q is n-well implant, R is

metallization and S is source/drain diffusion, then the
order in which they are carried out in a standard n-well
CMOS fabrication process, is
(A) zero
(B) -112 A cm 2
(C) +1120 A cm 2
(D) -1120 A cm 2
(A) PQRS
(B) QSRP
(C) RPSQ
(D) SRQP
40. Match items in Group 1 with items in Group 2, most

suitably.
45. An amplifier without feedback has a voltage gain of
Group 1
Group 2
50, input resistance of 1 kW and output resistance of 2.5
P. LED
1. Heavy doping
kW. The input resistance of the current-shunt negative
Q. Avalanche photo diode
2. Coherent radiation
feedback amplifier using the above amplifier with a
R.Tunnel diode
3.Spontaneous
feedback factor of 0.2, is
S. LASER
4. Current gain
emission
(A) 1/11 kW
(B) 1/5 kW
(C) 5 kW
(D) 11 kW
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
P-1
P-2
P-3
P-2
Q-2
Q-3
Q-4
Q-1
46. In the amplifier circuit shown in Fig. Q.46, the
R-4
R-1
R-1
R-4
values of R1 and R2 are such that the transistor is
S-3
S-4
S-2
S-3
operating at VCE = 3 V and I C = 15

. mA when its b is
41. At 300 K, for a diode current of 1 mA, a certain

germanium diode requires a forward bias of 0.1435 V,
150. For a transistor with b of 200, the operating point

( VCE , I C ) is
VCC = 6 V
whereas a certain silicon diode requires a forward bias

R1
of 0.718 V. Under the conditions stated above, the
R2
closest approximation of the ratio of reverse saturation

current in germanium diode to that in silicon diode is
(A) 1
(C) 4 10
(B) 5
(D) 8 10 3
Fig. Q46
42. A particular green LED emits light of wavelength

5490 A. The energy bandgap of the semiconductor
material
used
there
is
(Planks
(A) (2 V, 2 mA)
(B) (3 V, 2 mA)
(C) (4 V, 2 mA)
(D) (4 V, 1 mA)
constant
= 6.626 10 -34 J s)
www.gatehelp.com
Page
595
UNIT 10
47. The oscillator circuit shown in Fig. Q.47 has an ideal
51. Three identical amplifiers with each one having a
inverting amplifier. its frequency of oscillation (in Hz) is
voltage gain of 50, input resistance of 1 kW and output

resistance of 250 W, are cascaded. The open circuit
voltage gain of the combined amplifier is
(A) 49 dB
(B) 51 dB
(C) 98 dB
(D) 102 dB
52. An ideal sawtooth voltage waveform of frequency

500 Hz and amplitude 3 V is generated by charging a
capacitor of 2 mF in every cycle. The charging requires
Fig. Q47
(A)
(2 p 6 RC)
1
(C)
( 6 RC)
1
(B)
(2 pRC)
(A) constant voltage source of 3 V for 1 ms
6
(D)
(2 pRC)
(C) constant current source of 3 mA for 1 ms
(B) constant voltage source of 3 V for 2 ms
(D) constant current source of 3 mA for 2 ms

48. The output voltage of the regulated power supply
53. The circuit shown in Fig. Q.53 has 4 boxes each
shown in Fig. Q.48 is
described by inputs, P, Q, R and outputs Y, Z with
Y = P Q R, Z = RQ + PR + QP . The circuit acts as
1 kW
a
15 V DC
Unregulated
Power source
Q
Vz = 3 V
40 kW
Regulated
DC Output
20 kW
_
Z Y R
Fig. Q48
(A) 3 V
(C) 9 V
Z Y R
(B) 6 V
(D) 12 V
Z Y R
Z Y R
Output
Fig. Q53
49. The action of a JFET in its equivalent circuit can

best be represented as a
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(B) 4 bit substracter giving P - Q
Current Controlled Current Source

Current Controlled Voltage Source
Voltage Controlled Voltage Source
Voltage Controlled Current Source
(C) 4 bit substracter giving Q - R

(D) 4 bit adder giving P + Q + R
50. If the op-amp in Fig. Q.50 is ideal, the output

voltage Vout will be equal to
54. If the functions W , X , Y and Z are as follows

W = R + PQ + RS
X = PQRS + P Q R S + PQ R S
5 kW
Y = RS + PR + PQ + P Q
1 kW
2V
Vout
1 kW
3V
8 kW
Fig. Q50
(A) 1 V
(B) 6 V
(C) 14 V
(D) 17 V
Page
596
(A) 4 bit adder giving P + Q
Z = R + S + PQ + P Q R + PQ S Then
(A) W = Z , X = Z
(B) W = Z , X = Y
(C) W = Y
(D) W = Y = Z
55. A 4 bit ripple counter and a 4 bit synchronous

counter are made using flip flops having a propagation
delay of 10 ns each. If the worst case delay in the ripple
www.gatehelp.com
EC-03
counter and the synchronous counter be R and S

respectively, then
(A) R =10 n, S =40 ns
(B) R =40 ns,
S =10 ns
(C) R =10 ns, S =30 ns
(D) R =30 ns, S =10 ns
56. The DTL, TTL, ECL and CMOS families of digital

ICs are compared in the following 4 columns
P
Fanout is
minimum
DTL
DTL
TTL
CMOS
Power
consumption is
minimum
TTL
CMOS
ECL
DTL
Propagation delay
is minimum
CMOS
ECL
TTL
TTL
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Chap 10.1
BCD to binary code

Binary to excess -3 code
Excess -3 to Gray code
Gray to Binary code
59. In the circuit shown in Fig. Q.59, A is a parallel-in,

parallel-out 4 bit register, which loads at the rising edge
of the clock C. The input lines are connected to a 4 bit
bus, W. Its output acts as the input to a 16 4 ROM
whose output is floating when the enable input E is 0. A
partial table of the contents of the ROM is as follows
MSB
CLK
The correct column is

(A) P
(B) Q
(C) R
(D) S
57. The circuit shown in Fig. Q.57 is a 4 bit DAC. The

input bits 0 and 1 are represented by 0 and 5 V
respectively. The OP AMP is ideal, but all the resistance
and the 5 V inputs have a tolerance of 10%. The
specification (rounded to the nearest multiple of 5%) for
the tolerance of the DAC is
(A) 35%
(B) 20%
(C) 10%
(D) 5%
ROM
R
R
CLK
2R
t1
4R
Fig. Q59
Vout
8R
R
Fig. Q57
58. The circuit shown in Fig. Q.58 converts

MSB
t2
Address
Data
0011
1111
0100
1010
1011
10
1000
12
0010
14
1000
The clock to the register is shown, and the

data on the W bus at time t1 is 0110. The data on the
bus at time t2 is
MSB
Fig. Q58
www.gatehelp.com
Page
597
UNIT 10
(A) 1111
(B) 1011
Data for Q.6566 are given below. Solve the
(C) 1000
(D) 0010
problems and choose the correct answers.

X ( t) is a random process with a constant mean
60. In an 8085 microprocessor, the instruction CMP B

has been executed while the content of the accumulator
value of 2 and the autocorrelation function

R X ( t) = 4[ e
is less than that of register B. As a result
-0 .2 t
+ 1].
(A) Carry flag will be set but Zero flag will be reset
(B) Carry flag will be reset but Zero flag will be set
(C) Both Carry flag and Zero flag will be reset
65. Let X be the Gaussian random variable obtained by

sampling the process at t = ti and let
Q ( a) =
(D) Both Carry flag and Zero flag will be set
61. Let X and Y be two statistically independent

random variables uniformly distributed in the ranges
( -1, 1) and (( -2, 1) respectively. Let Z = X + Y . Then the
probability that ( Z - 2) is
(A) zero
(C)
1
3
1
2p
y2
2
dy
The probability that [ x 1] is

(A) 1 - Q(0.5)
(B) Q(0.5)
(C) Q( 2 1 2 )
(D) 1 - Q( 2 1 2 )
(B)
1
6
66. Let Y and Z be the random variables obtained by
(D)
1
12
sampling X ( t)
at t = 2
and t = 4
respectively. Let
W = Y - Z . The variance of W is
62. Let P be linearity, Q be time-invariance, R be
causality and S be stability. A discrete time system has
(A) 13.36
(B) 9.36
(C) 2.64
(D) 8.00
the input-output relationship,

67. Let x( t) = 2 cos ( 800 pt) + cos (1400 pt). x( t) is sampled
n 1
x( n)
y( n) = 0,
n =0
x( n + 1) n -1
with the rectangular pulse train shown in Fig. Q.67.

The only spectral components (in kHz) present in the
where x( n) is the input and y( n) is the output. The
sampled signal in the frequency range 2.5 kHz to

3.5 kHz are
above system has the properties
-3
p(t)
(A) P, S but not Q, R
(B) P, Q, S but not R
(C) P, Q, R, S
(D) Q, R, S but not P
T0 = 10 sec
Data for Q.6364 are given below. Solve the
-T0
-T0/6 0 T0/6
T0
Fig. Q67
(A) 2.7, 3.4
(B) 3.3, 3.6
filter (RC-LPF) with R = 1 kW and C = 10

. mF.
(C) 2.6, 2.7, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6
(D) 2.7, 3.3
63. Let H ( f ) denote the frequency response of the
68. The signal flow graph of a system is shown in Fig.
RC-LPF. Let f1 be the highest frequency such that

H ( f1 )
0.95. Then f1 (in Hz) is
0 | f | f1
H (0)
Q.68. The transfer function
The system under consideration is an RC low-pass
(A) 327.8
(B) 163.9
(C) 52.2
(D) 104.4
R(s)
C(s )
R(s )
1
s
of the system is
1
s
6
-4
-2
-3
C(s)
Fig. Q68
64. Let t g ( f ) be the group delay function of the given

RC-LPF and f2 = 100 Hz. Then t g ( f2 ) in ms, is
(A) 0.717
(B) 7.17
(C) 71.7
(D) 4.505
Page
598
6
(A) 2
s + 29 s + 6
(B)
6s
s + 29 s + 6
s( s + 2)
s + 29 s + 6
(D)
s( s + 27)
s + 29 s + 6
(C)
www.gatehelp.com
EC-03
69 The root locus of the system

G( s) H ( s) =
Chap 10.1
72. The gain margin and the phase margin of a

feedback system with
K
s( s + 2)( s + 3)
G( s) H ( s) =
has the break-away point located at
s
are
( s + 100) 3
(A) (-0.5, 0)
(B) (-2.548, 0)
(A) - dB, 0
(B) ,
(C) (-4, 0)
(D) (-0.784, 0)
(C) , 0
(D) 88.5 dB,
70. The approximate Bode magnitude plot of a
73. The zero-input response of a system given by the
minimum phase system is shown in Fig. Q.70. The
state-space equation
x& 1 1 0 x1
x1 (0) 1
x& = 1 1 x and x (0) = 0 is
2
2
2
transfer function of the system is

dB
160
140
20
0.1
100
10
( s + 0.1)
( s + 10) 2 ( s + 100)
e t
(C) t
te
t
(D) t
te
frequency fc = 1 MHz using a nonlinear device with the
( s + 0.1) 3
(B) 10 7
( s + 10)( s + 100)
(C) 108
e t
(B)
t
74. A DSB-SC signal is to be generated with a carrier
Fig. Q70
( s + 0.1) 3
(A) 108
( s + 10) 2 ( s + 100)
te t
(A)
t
( s + 0.1)
( s + 10)( s + 100) 2
3
(D) 10 9
input-output characteristic v0 = a0 v1 + a1 vi3 where a0 and

a1
are constants. The output of the nonlinear device
can be filtered by an appropriate band-pass filter. Let

vi = Acl cos (2pfcl t) + m( t)
where
m( t) is the message
l
c
signal. Then the value of f (in MHz) is

71. A second-order system has the transfer function
C (s)
4
= 2
R (s) s + 4s + 4
(A) 1.0
(B) 0.333
(C) 0.5
(D) 3.0
The data for Q.75-76 are given below. Solve the

With r ( t) as the unit-step function, the response
c( t) of the system is represented by
(A)
Step Response
Let m( t) = cos [( 4 p 10 3) t ] be the message signal
(B)
and c( t) = 5 cos [(2 p 106 ) t ] be the carrier.
Step Response
75. c( t) and m( t) are used to generate an AM signal. The

Amplitude
Amplitude
1.5
1
0.5
0
10
15
Time (sec)
20
25
modulation index of the generated AM signal is 0.5.

Total side band power
Then the quantity
is
Carrier power
0.5
(C)
10
5
Time (sec)
(D)
1
Amplitude
(A)
1
2
(B)
1
4
(C)
1
3
(D)
1
8
76. c( t) and m( t) are used to generate an FM signal. If
Step Response
Step Response
1.5
Amplitude
the peak frequency deviation of the generated FM is

three times the transmission bandwidth of the AM
0.5
signal,
0.5
then
the
coefficient
of
the
term
cos [2 p(1008 10 t)] in the FM signal (in terms of the

3
0
0
2
4
Time (sec)
4
Time (sec)
Bessel coefficients) is
(A) 5 J 4 ( 3)
www.gatehelp.com
(B)
5
2
J8 ( 3)
Page
599
EC-03
Chap 10.1
86. A uniform plane wave traveling in air is incident on
90. Two identical antennas are placed in the q = p
the plane boundary between air and another dielectric
plane as shown in Fig. Q.90. The elements have equal
medium with e r = 4. The reflection coefficient for the
amplitude excitation with 180 polarity difference,
normal incidence, is
operating at wavelength l. The correct value of the
magnitude of the far-zone resultant electric field
(A) zero
(B) 0.5 180
(C) 0.333 0
(D) 0.333180
strength normalized with that of a single element, both

computed for f = 0, is
87. If the electric field intensity associated with a

perfect
dielectric
medium
E( z, t) = 10 cos (2 p 10 t - 0.1pz)
7
is
given
by
then
the
volt/m,
uniform plane electromagnetic wave traveling in a

f
s
velocity of the traveling wave is

(A) 3.00 108 m/sec
(B) 2.00 108 m/sec
(C) 6.28 10 7 m/sec
(D) 2.00 10 7 m/sec
Fig. Q.90
88. A short-circuited stub is shunt connected to a

transmission line as shown in Fig. Q.88. If Z 0 = 50 ohm,
2 ps
(A) 2 cos
2 ps
(B) 2 sin
ps
(C) 2 cos
l
ps
(D) 2 sin
l
the admittance Y seen at the junction of the stub and
**************
the transmission line is
l/8
Zo
Zo
Z L 100 W
Zo
l/2
Y
Fig. Q.88
(A) (0.01 - j0.02) mho
(B) (0.02 - j0.01) mho
(C) (0.04 - j0.02) mho
(D) (0.02 + j0) mho
89. A rectangular metal wave guide filled with a

dielectric material of relative permitivity e r = 4 has the
inside dimensions 3.0 cm 1.2 cm. The cut-off frequency
for the dominant mode is
(A) 2.5 GHz
(B) 5.0 GHz
(C) 10.0 GHz
(D) 12.5 GHz
www.gatehelp.com
Page
601
UNIT 10
ANSWER SHEET
Page
602
1.
(B)
2.
(C)
3.
(B)
4.
(C)
5.
(C)
6.
(D)
7.
(B)
8.
(A)
9.
(C)
10.
(A)
11.
(B)
12.
(D)
13.
(B)
14.
(C)
15.
(A)
16.
(D)
17.
(C)
18.
(B)
19.
(B)
20.
(D)
21.
(D)
22.
(C)
23.
(B)
24.
(A)
25.
(C)
26.
(A)
27.
(A)
28.
(D)
29.
(B)
30.
(B)
31.
(A)
32.
(*)
33.
(D)
34.
(D)
35.
(C)
36.
(B)
37.
(A)
38.
(C)
39.
(C)
40.
(C)
41.
(C)
42.
(A)
43.
(D)
44.
(B)
45.
(A)
46.
(A)
47.
(A)
48.
(C)
49.
(D)
50.
(B)
51.
(D)
52.
(D)
53.
(B)
54.
(A)
55.
(B)
56.
(C)
57.
(A)
58.
(D)
59.
(C)
60.
(A)
61.
(A)
62.
(A)
63.
(C)
64.
(B)
65.
(A)
66.
(C)
67.
(A)
68.
(A)
69
(D)
70
(A)
71.
(B)
72.
(D)
73.
(C)
74
(A)
75
(D)
76.
(D)
77.
(B)
78.
(A)
79
(C)
80
(D)
81.
(B)
82.
(D)
83.
(B)
84.
(C)
85.
(C)
86.
(D)
87.
(B)
88.
(A)
89
(B)
90.
(D)
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 10
5. For the R-L circuit shown in Fig. Q.5, the input
(C) current controlled current source
voltage vi ( t) = u( t). The current i( t) is
(D) current controlled voltage source
1H
i(t)
10. Voltage series feedback (also called series-shunt

feedback) results in
vi(t)
2W
(A) increase in both input and output impedances

(B) decrease in both input and output impedances
(C) increase in input impedance and decrease in
output impedance
Fig Q.5
(A)
(B)
i(t)
(D) decrease in input impedance and increase in

output impedance
i(t)
0.5
0.31
1
0.63
t(sec)
t(sec)
(C)
11. The circuit in Fig. Q.11 is a
(D)
i(t)
i(t)
0.5
0.31
vi
1
0.63
vo
t(sec)
t(sec)
6. The impurity commonly used for realizing the base
Fig Q.11
region of a silicon n-p-n transistor is

(A) Gallium
(B) Indium
(C) Boron
(D) Phosphorus
7. If for a silicon n-p-n transistor, the base-to-emitter

voltage ( VBE ) is 0.7 V and the collector-to-base voltage
(A) low-pass filter
(B) high-pass filter
(C) band-pass filter
(D) band-reject filter
12. Assuming VCEsat = 0.2 V and b = 50, the minimum

base current ( I B ) required to drive the transistor in Fig.
Q.12 to saturation is
( VCB ) is 0.2 V, then the transistor is operating in the

(A) normal active mode
(B) saturation mode
(C) inverse active mode
(D) cutoff mode
3 V
IC
1 kW
IB
8. Consider the following statements S1 and S2.

S1 : The b of a bipolar transistor reduces if the base
Fig Q12.
width is increased.
S2 : The b of a bipolar transistor increases if the
doping concentration in the base is increased.
Which one of the following is correct ?
(A) 56 mA
(B) 140 mA
(C) 60 mA
(D) 3 mA
(A) S1 is FALSE and S2 is TRUE
13. A master-slave flip-flop has the characteristic that
(B) Both S1 and S2 are TRUE
(A) change in the input is immediately reflected in

the output
(C) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE

(D) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE
(B) change in the output occurs when the state of the

master is affected
9. An ideal op-amp is an ideal
(C) change in the output occurs when the state of the

slave is affected
(A) voltage controlled current source

(B) voltage controlled voltage source
Page
604
(D) both the master and the slave states are affected
at the same time
www.gatehelp.com
EC-04
Chap 10.2
14. The range of signed decimal numbers that can be
19. The impulse response h[ n] of a linear time-invariant
represented by 6-bit 1s complement numbers is
system is given by
(A) -31 to +31
(B) -63 to +64
(C) -64 to +63
(D) -32 to +31
15.
A digital
system is
required
h[ n] = u[ n + 3] + u[ n - 2 ] - 2 u[ n - 7 ]
where u[ n] is the unit step sequence. The above
to amplify
system is
binary-encoded audio signal. The user should be able to
Vout
control the gain of the amplifier from a minimum to a

maximum in 100 increments. The minimum number of
bits required to encode, in straight binary, is
(A) 8
(B) 6
(C) 5
(D) 7
Vin
0
Fig Q.18
16. Choose the correct one from among the alternatives

A, B, C, D after matching an item from Group 1 with
the most appropriate item in Group 2.
(A) stable but not causal

(B) stable and causal
(C) causal but unstable
Group 1
Group 2
P: Shift register
1: Frequency division
Q: Counter
2: Addressing in memory chips
R: Decoder
3: Serial to parallel data conversion
(D) unstable and not causal

20. The distribution function FX ( x) of a random variable
X is shown in Fig. Q.20. The probability that X = 1 is
Fx(x)
1.0
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
P3
P3
P2
P1
Q2
Q1
Q1
Q3
R1
R2
R3
R2
0.55
0.25
-2
AND-OR-Invert (AOI) gate. For the inputs shown in

Fig. Q.17, the output Y is
(A) zero
(B) 0.25
(C) 0.55
(D) 0.30
H ( z) =
Fig Q.17
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) AB
(D) AB
21. The z-transform of a system is
Input are
Floating
Fig Q.20
17. Fig. Q.17 shows the internal schematic of a TTL
A
B
z
z - 0.2
If the ROC is |z |< 0.2, then the impulse response

of the system is
18. Fig. Q.18 is the voltage transfer characteristic of

(A) an NMOS inverter with enhancement mode
transistor as load
(B) an NMOS inverter with depletion mode transistor
as load
(A) (0.2) n u[ n]
(B) (0.2) n u[ -n - 1]
(C) -(0.2) n u[ n]
(D) -(0.2) n u[ -n - 1]
22. The Fourier transform of a conjugate symmetric

function is always
(C) a CMOS inverter
(A) imaginary
(B) conjugate anti-symmetric
(D) a BJT inverter
(C) real
(D) conjugate symmetric
www.gatehelp.com
Page
605
EC-04
Chap 10.2
33. Consider the Bode magnitude plot shown in Fig.
Q.33. The transfer function H ( s) is
S1 : At the resonant frequency the impedance of a

series RLC circuit is zero.
20 log H(jw)
0
S2 : In a parallel GLC circuit, increasing the

conductance G results in increase in its Q factor.
20 dB/dec
-20 dB/dec
-20
40 dB/dec

1
100
10
Fig Q.33
(C) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE
(A)
( s + 10)
( s + 1)( s + 100)
(B)
10( s + 1)
( s + 10)( s + 100)
(D) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE
(C)
10 2 ( s + 1)
( s + 10)( s + 100)
(D)
10 3( s + 100)
( s + 1)( s + 10)
38..
In
an
N A = 9 10
16
V ( s)
of an RLC
34. The transfer function H ( s) = o
Vi ( s)
circuit is given by
6
H ( s) =
10
s + 20 s + 106
2
The Quality factor (Q-factor) of this circuit is

(A) 25
(B) 50
(C) 100
(D) 5000
abrupt
concentrations
cm
on
3
pn
the
junction,
p-side
and
the
reverse biased and the total depletion width is 3 mm.

The depletion width on the p-side is
(A) 2.7 mm
(B) 0.3 mm
(C) 2.25 mm
(D) 0.75 mm
39. The resistivity of a uniformly doped n-type silicon

sample is 0.5 W-cm. If the electron mobility (m n ) is 1250
cm 2 /V-sec and the charge of an electron is 1.6 10 -19
Coulomb, the donor impurity concentration ( N D) in the
sample is
conditions
(A) 2 1016 cm 3
(B) 1 1016 cm 3
(C) 2.5 1015 cm 3
(D) 5 1015 cm 3
zero.
Its
transfer
function
H ( s) = VC ( s) Vi ( s) is
1
(A) 2
s + 10 3 s + 106
10 mH
10 kW
are
respectively. The p-n junction is
35. For the circuit shown in Fig. Q.35, the initial

are
doping
n-side
106
(B) 2
s + 10 3 s + 106
40. Consider an abrupt p-n junction. Let Vbi be the

built-in potential of this junction and VR be the applied
vi(t)
reverse bias. If the junction capacitance ( C j ) is 1 pF for
vo(t)
100 mF
Vbi + VR = 1 V, then for Vbi + VR = 4 V, C j will be
Fig Q35.
(C)
10 3
s 2 + 10 3 s + 106
(D)
(A) 4 pF
(B) 2 pF
(C) 0.25 pF
(D) 0.5 pF
106
s 2 + 106 s + 106
S1 : The threshold voltage ( VT ) of a MOS capacitor

decreases with increase in gate oxide thickness.
36. A system described by the following differential

equation
d2 y
dy
+3
+ 2 y = x( t)
dt 2
dt
S2 : The threshold voltage ( VT ) of a MOS capacitor

decreases with increase in substrate doping
concentration.
is initially at rest. For input x( t) = 2 u( t), the output

y( t) is
-t
-2 t
(A) (1 - 2 e + e ) u( t)
-t
-2 t
(C) (0.5 + e + 15
. e ) u( t)
-t
-2 t
(B) (1 + 2 e - e ) u( t)
-t
-2 t
(D) (0.5 + 2 e + 2 e ) u( t)
(C) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE

(D) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE
www.gatehelp.com
Page
607
UNIT 10
42. The drain of an n-channel MOSFET is shorted to
46. A bipolar transistor is operating in the active region
the gate so that VGS = VDS . The threshold voltage ( VT ) of
with a collector current of 1 mA. Assuming that the b of
the MOSFET is 1 V. If the drain current ( I D) is 1 mA for
the transistor is 100 and the thermal voltage ( VT ) is 25
VGS = 2 V, then for VGS = 3 V, I D is
mV, the transconductance ( g m ) and the input resistance
(A) 2 mA
(B) 3 mA
( rp)
(C) 9 mA
(D) 4 mA
of
the
transistor
in
the
common
emitter
configuration, are
(A) g m = 25 mA/V and rp = 15.625 kW
43. The longest wavelength that can be absorbed by
(B) g m = 40 mA/V and rp = 4.0 kW
silicon, which has the bandgap of 1.12 eV, is 1.1 mm. If
(C) g m = 25 mA/V and rp = 2.5 kW
the longest wavelength that can be absorbed by another

material is 0.87 mm, then the bandgap of this material
is
(D) g m = 40 mA/V and rp = 2.5 kW

47. The value of C required for sinusoidal oscillations of
(A) 1.416 eV
(B) 0.886 eV
(C) 0.854 eV
(D) 0.706 eV
frequency 1 kHz in the circuit of Fig. Q.47 is

2.1 kW
1 kW
44. The neutral base width of a bipolar transistor,

biased in the active region, is 0.5 mm. The maximum
electron concentration and the diffusion constant in the
1 kW
base are 1014 cm 3 and Dn = 25 cm 2 sec respectively.

Assuming negligible recombination in the base, the
1 kW
collector current density is (the electron charge is

1.6 10 -19 Coulomb)
(A) 800 A/cm2
(B) 9 A/cm2
(C) 200 A/cm2
(D) 2 A/cm2
Fig Q.47
(A)
45. Assume that the b of the transistor is extremely
1
mF
2p
(C)
large and VBE = 0.7 V, I C and VCE in the circuit shown in

Fig. Q.45 are
1
2p 6
(B) 2p mF
mF
(D) 2 p 6 mF
48. In the op-amp circuit given in Fig. Q.48, the load
5 V
current iL is
IC
R1
2.2 kW
4 kW
vi
+
VEC
R1
vo
1 kW
300 kW
R1
R2
iL
RL
Fig Q.45
Fig Q.48
(A) I C = 1 mA, VCE = 4.7 V

(B) I C = 0.5 mA, VCE = 375
. V
(A) -
vs
R2
(B)
vs
R2
(C) -
vs
RL
(D)
vs
R1
(C) I C = 1 mA, VCE = 2.5 V

(D) I C = 0.5 mA, VCE = 39
. V
Page
608
www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 10
57. Consider the sequence of 8085 instructions given
60. A 1 kHz sinusoidal signal is ideally sampled at 1500
below
samples /sec and the sampled signal is passed through
LXI H, 9258
an ideal low-pass filter with cut-off frequency 800 Hz.
MOV A, M
The output signal has the frequency
CMA
MOV M , A
Which one of the following is performed by this
(A) zero Hz
(B) 0.75 kHz
(C) 0.5 kHz
(D) 0.25 kHz
61. A rectangular pulse train s( t) as shown in Fig. Q.61
sequence?
is convolved with the signal cos 2 ( 4 p 10 3 t). The
(A) Contents of location 9258 are moved to the

accumulator
convolved signal will be a

s(t)
(B) Contents of location 9258 are compared with the

contents of the accumulator
(C) Contents of location 8529 are complemented and

stored in location 8529
(D) Contents of location 5892 are complemented and
stored in location 5892
58. A Boolean function f of two variables x and y is
1 ms
Fig Q.61
(A) DC
(B) 12 kHz sinusoid
(C) 8 kHz sinusoid
(D) 14 kHz sinusoid
62. Consider the sequence
defined as follows :
x[ n] = [ -4 - j5 1 + j2 5 ]
f (0, 0) = f (0, 1) = f (1, 1) = 1; f (1, 0) = 0

Assuming complements of x
and y
are not
available, a minimum cost solution for realizing f

using only 2-input NOR gates and 2-input OR gates
(each having unit cost) would have a total cost of
(A) 1 unit
(B) 4 units
(C) 3 units
(D) 2 units
The conjugate anti-symmetric part of the sequence is

(A) [-4 - j2.5
and store the result in the accumulator. The numbers

are available in registers B and C respectively. A part of
4 - j2.5]
j2
(B) [- j2.5
(C) [- j2.5
j2
(D) [-4
59. It is desired to multiply the numbers 0AH by 0BH
j2.5]
0]
4]
63. A causal LTI system is described by the difference

equation
2 y[ n] = ay[ n - 2 ] - 2 x[ n] + bx[ n - 1]
the 8085 program for this purpose is given below:
The system is stable only if
MVI A, 00H
LOOP:
(A) a = 2, b < 2
(B) a > 2, b > 2
(C) a < 2, any value of b
HLT
(D) b < 2, any value of a
END
64. A causal system having the transfer function
The sequence of instructions to complete the
H ( s) =
program would be
(A) JNZ LOOP, ADD B, DCR C
1
s+2
is excited with 10u( t). The time at which the
(B) ADD B, JNZ LOOP, DCR C
output reaches 99% of its steady state value is
(C) DCR C, JNZ LOOP, ADD B
(A) 2.7 sec
(B) 2.5 sec
(C) 2.3 sec
(D) 2.1 sec
(D) ADD B, DCR C, JNZ LOOP

Page
610
www.gatehelp.com
EC-04
65. The impulse response h[ n] of a linear time invariant

system is given as
-2 2
h[ n] = 4 2
0
n = 2, - 2
sin(2 t)
sin( -2 t)
(B)
sin(
t
)
sin(
-3t)
otherwise
e jpn 4 , then the output is

(C) 4 e jpn
(B) 4 2 e - jpn
(D) -4 e jpn
2
-2
69. If A =
, then sin At is
1 -3
sin( -4 t) + 2 sin( -t) - sin( -4 t) + 2 sin( -t)
(A)
2 sin( -4 t) + sin( -t)
- sin( -4 t) + sin( -t)
n = 1, - 1
If the input to the above system is the sequence

(A) 4 2 e jpn
Chap 10.2
sin( 4 t) + 2 sin( t) 2 sin( -4 t) - 2 sin( -t)

- sin( -4 t) + sin( t)
2 sin( 4t) + sin( t)
(C)
cos( -t) + 2 cos( t) 2 cos( -4 t) - 2 sin( -t)
(D)
-2 cos( 4 t) + cos( t)
- cos( -4 t) + sin( -t)
66. Let x( t) and y( t) with Fourier transforms F ( f ) and
70. The open-loop transfer function of a unity feedback
Y ( f ) respectively be related as shown in Fig. Q.66. Then
system is
Y ( f ) is
G( s) =
x(t)
y(t)
-2
-2
The range of K for which the system is stable is

21
(A)
(B) 13 > K > 0
> K >0
4
(C)
-1
Fig Q.66
1
(A) - X ( f 2) e - j 2 pf
2
1
(B) - X ( f 2) e j 2 pf
2
(C) - X ( f 2) e j 2 pf
(D) - X ( f 2) e - j 2 pf
the number of roots which lie in the right half of
phase of the system response at 20 Hz is

(B) 0
(C) 90
(D) 180
x3
x4
(A) 4
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 1
x& 1 = -3 x1 - x2 = u, x& 2 = 2 x1 , y = x1 + u
68. Consider the signal flow graph shown in Fig. Q.68.

x
The gain 5 is
x1
b
the s-plane is
72. The state variable equations of a system are :
(A) 90
x2
(D) -6 < K <
P ( s) = s 5 + s 4 + 2 s 3 + 2 s 2 + 3s + 15
zeros at 5 Hz, 100 Hz and 200 Hz. The approximate
21
<K <
4
71. For the polynomial
67. A system has poles at 0.01 Hz, 1 Hz and 80 Hz;
x1
K
s( s + s + 2)( s + 3)
2
x5
The system is
(A) controllable but not observable
(B) observable but not controllable
(C) neither controllable nor observable
(D) controllable and observable
Fig Q.68
(A)
(B)
(C)
1 - ( be + cf + dg)
abcd
bedg
1 - ( be + cf + dg)
abcd
1 - ( be + cf + dg) + bedg
1 - ( be + cf + dg) + bedg
(D)
abcd
1 0
At
73. Given A =
, the state transition matrix e is
0 1
given by
0 e- t
(A) - t
0
e
0 et
(B) t
e 0
e - t
0
(C)
-t
0 e
e t 0
(D)
t
0 e
www.gatehelp.com
Page
611
UNIT 10
74. Consider the signal x( t) shown in Fig. Q.74. Let h( t)

denote the impulse response of the filter matched to
x( t), with h( t) being non-zero only in the interval 0 to 4
sec. The slope of h( t) in the interval 3 < t < 4 sec is
x(t)
1
t(sec)
Fig. Q.74
(A) sec -1
(B) 1 sec -1
(C) 1/2 sec -1
(D) 1 sec -1
78. Consider a binary digital communication system

with equally likely 0s and 1s. When binary 0 is
transmitted the voltage at the detector input can lie
between the levels -0.25 V and +0.25 V with equal
probability; when binary 1 is transmitted, the voltage at
the detector can have any value between 0 and 1 V with
equal probability. If the detector has a threshold of 0.2V
(i.e. if the received signal is greater than 0.2V, the bit is
taken as 1), the average bit error probability is
(A) 0.15
(B) 0.2
(C) 0.05
(D) 0.5
79. A random variable X with uniform density in the

interval 0 to 1 is quantized as follows:
75. A 1 mW video signal having a bandwidth of 100
if 0 X 0.3,
xq = 0
MHz is transmitted to a receiver through a cable that
if 0.3 X 1,
xq = 0.7
has 40 dB loss. If the effective one-sided noise spectral

density at the receiver is 10 -20 Watt/Hz, then the
signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is
(A) 50 dB
(B) 30 dB
(C) 40 dB
(D) 60 dB
76. A 100 MHz carrier of 1V amplitude and a 1 MHz
where xq
is the quantized value of X. The
root-mean square value of the quantization noise is

(A) 0.573
(B) 0.198
(C) 2.205
(D) 0.266
80. Choose the correct one from among the alternatives

A, B, C, D after matching an item from Group 1 with
modulating signal of 1V amplitude are fed to a balanced
the most appropriate item in Group 2.
modulator. The output of the modulator is passed
Group 1
Group 2
1 : FM
P : Slope overload
2 : DM
Q : m-law
3 : PSK
R : Envelope detector
4 : PCM
S : Capture effect
through an ideal high-pass filter with cut-off frequency

of 100 MHz. The output of the filter is added with 100
MHz signal of 1V amplitude and 90 phase shift as
shown in Fig. Q.76. The envelope of the resultant signal
is
1 Mhz, 1 V
HPF
100 Mhz
Balanced
Modulator
y(t)
T : Hilbert transfer
U : Matched filter
100 Mhz, 1 V 90
100 Mhz, 1 V
Fig Q.76
(A) constant
(C)
5 4 - sin(2 p 106 t)
(B)
1 + sin(2 p 106 t)
(D)
5 4 + cos(2 p 106 t)
77. Two sinusoidal signals of same amplitude and

frequencies 10 kHz and 10.1 kHz are added together.
The combined signal is given to an ideal frequency
detector. The output of the detector is
(A) 0.1 kHz sinusoid
(B) 20.1 kHz sinusoid
(C) a linear function of time (D) a constant

Page
612
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
1T
1S
1S
1U
2P
2U
2P
2R
3U
3P
3U
3S
4S
4T
4Q
4Q
81. Three analog signals, having bandwidth 1200 Hz,

600 Hz and 600 Hz, are sampled at their respective
Nyquist rates, encoded with 12 bit words, and time
division multiplexed. The bit rate for the multiplexed
signal is
(A) 1, 15.2 kbps
(B) 28.8 kbps
(C) 27.6 kbps
(D) 38.4 kbps
www.gatehelp.com
EC-04
Chap 10.2
82. Consider a system shown in Fig. Q.82. Let X ( f ) and
(C) B1 = 20 kHz, B2 = 10 kHz
Y ( f ) denote the Fourier transforms of x( t) and y( t)
(D) B1 = 10 kHz, B2 = 10 kHz
respectively. The ideal HPF has the cutoff frequency 10

85. Consider a 300 W, quarter-wave long (at 1 GHz)
kHz.
transmission line as shown in Fig. Q.85. It is connected
X(f )
to a 10 V, 50W source at one end and is left open

circuited at the other end. The magnitude of the voltage
at the open circuit end of the line is
-3
-1
HPF
10 kHz
Balanced
Modulator
x(t)
f (kHz)
Balanced
Modulator
10 kHz
13 kHz
y(t)
10 V, 50 W source
Zo = 300 W
l/4
Fig Q.85
Fig Q.82
The positive frequencies where Y ( f ) has spectral
(A) 10 V
(B) 5 V
(C) 60 V
(D) 60/7 V
peaks are
(A) 1 kHz and 24 kHz
(B) 2 kHz and 24 kHz
86. In a microwave test bench, why is the microwave
(C) 1 kHz and 14 kHz
(D) 2 kHz and 14 kHz
signal amplitude modulated at 1 kHz ?

(A) To increase the sensitivity of measurement
83. A parallel plate air-filled capacitor has plate area of

10 -4 m 2 and plate separation of 10 -3 m. It is connected
to a 0.5 V, 3.6 GHz source. The magnitude of the
(B) 100 mA
(C) 10 A
(D) 1.59 mA
(C) To study amplitude modulation

(D) Because crystal detector fails at microwave
frequencies
displacement current is ( e o = 1 36 p 10 -9 F m)
(A) 10 mA
(B) To transmit the signal to a far-off place
84. A source produces binary data at the rate of 10
r
87.
If
and
E = (a$ x + ja$ y) e jkz - jwt
r
jkz - jwt
,the time-averaged Poynting
H = ( k wm )(a$ y + ja$ x ) e
vector is
kbps. The binary symbols are represented as shown in
(A) null vector
Fig.Q.84
(B) ( k wm )a$ z
(C) (2k wm )a$ z
(D) ( k 2wm )a$ z
Binary 1
Binary 1
88. Consider an impedance Z = R + jX marked with
1V
point P in an impedance Smith chart as shown in Fig.

0
0.1
t(ms)
0.1
t(ms)
Q.88. The movement from point P along a constant

resistance circle in the clockwise direction by an angle
-1 V
45 is equivalent to
Fig Q.84
.5
r=0
The source output is transmitted using two

modulation schemes, namely Binary PSK (BPSK) and
Quadrature PSK (QPSK). Let B1 and B2 be the
bandwidth
requirements
of
BPSK
x=0
respectively.
Assuming that the bandwidth of the above rectangular
x = -0.5
P
pulses is 10 kHz, B1 and B2 are
x = -1
(A) B1 = 20 kHz, B2 = kHz

Fig. Q.88
(B) B1 = 10 kHz, B2 = 10 kHz

www.gatehelp.com
Page
613
CHAPTER
10.3
EC-05

150
Maximum Marks :
5. The function x( t) is shown in the figure. Even and

odd parts of a unit step function u( t) are respectively,
x(t)
Question 1- 30 Carry one Mark each.
-1
d2 y
dy
2
3 2 + 4
+ y +2= x
dt
dt
Fig. Q5
1 1
(A) ,
x( t)
2 2
(A) degree = 2, order = 1

(B) degree = 3, order = 2
(C)
(C) degree = 4, order = 3

(D) degree = 2, order =3
1 1
(B) - ,
x( t)
2 2
1
1
, - x( t)
2
2
1
1
(D) - , - x( t)
2
2
6. The region of convergence of z - transform of the

n
(B) 4 cos(20 t + 3) + 2 sin(710 t)

(D) 1
(C)
2. Choose the function f ( t); - < t < for which a
(C) e
-t
sin(25 t)
5
6
sequence u( n) - u( -n - 1) must be
6
5
5
5
(B) z >
(A) z <
6
6
Fourier series cannot be defined.

(A) 3 sin(25 t)
1. The following differential equation has
5
6
<z <
6
5
(D)
6
< z <
5
3. A fair dice is rolled twice. The probability that an odd

7. The condition on R, L and C such that the step
number will follow on even number is

1
1
(B)
(A)
2
6
(C)
1
3
(D)
response y( t) in the figure has no oscillations, is

L
1
4
u(t)
y(t)
4. A solution of the following differential equation is

given by
Fig. Q7
d2 y
dy
-5
+ 6y =0
dt 2
dt
(A) y = e 2 x + e -3x
(B) y = e 2 x + e 3x
(C) y = e -2 x + e -3x
(D) y = e -2 x + e -3x
1
(A) R
2
L
C
L
(C) R 2
C
www.gatehelp.com
L
C
1
(D) R =
LC
(B) R
Page
615
UNIT 10
8. The ABCD parameters of an ideal n:1 transformer

n 0
shown in the figure are
. The value of x will be
0 X
i
i1
(A) abundance of Silicon on the surface of the Earth.

(B) larger bandgap of Silicon in comparison to
Germanium.
(C) favorable properties of Silicon - dioxide (SiO2)
+
n:1
(D) lower melting point.
v1
v2
14. The effect of current shunt feedback in an amplifier

is to
Fig. Q8
(A) n
1
(B)
n
(C) n2
(D)
(A) increase the input resistance and decrease the

output resistance.
(B) increase both input and output resistance
1
n2
(C) decrease both input and output resistance.
9. In a series RLC circuit, R = 2 kW, L = 1 H and

1
m. The resonant frequency is
400
1
(A) 2 10 4 Hz
(B) 10 4 Hz
p
(D) decrease the input resistance and increase the

output resistance.
15. The input resistance of the amplifier shown in the
C=
figure is
30 kW
10 kW
(D) 2 p 10 Hz
(C) 10 Hz
vo
10. The maximum power that can be transferred to the

load resistor RL from the voltage source in the figure is
Ri
100 W
Fig. Q15
RL
10 V
(B) 10 W
(C) 0.25 W
(D) 0.5 W
(B) 10 kW
(C) 40 kW
(D) infinite
16. The first and the last critical frequency of an RC -
Fig. Q10
(A) 1 W
30
(A)
kW
4
driving point impedance function must respectively be

(A) a zero and a pole
(B) a zero and a zero
11. The bandgap of Silicon at room temperature is
(C) a pole and a pole
(A) 1.3 eV
(B) 0.7 eV
(D) a pole and a zero
(C) 1.1 eV
(D) 1.4 eV
17. The cascode amplifier is a multistage configuration

of
12. A Silicon PN junction at a temperature of 20 C has

a reverse saturation current of 10 pico - Amperes (pA).
(A) CC - CB
(B) CE - CB
(C) CB - CC
(D) CE - CC
The reserve saturation current at 40 C for the same

bias is approximately
18. Decimal 43 in Hexadecimal and BCD number
(A) 30 pA
(B) 40 pA
(C) 50 pA
(D) 60 pA
system is respectively
(A) B2, 0100 011
(B) 2B, 0100 0011
13. The primary reason for the widespread use of
(C) 2B, 0011 0100
Silicon in semiconductor device technology is
(D) B2, 0100 0100
Page
616
www.gatehelp.com
EC-05
Chap 10.3
19. The Boolean function f implemented in the figure
23.
using two input multiplexes is
s( t) = 8 cos 20 p - + 4 sin(15 pt) is

2
0 MUX
f
0 MUX
The
power
in
(A) 40
(B) 41
(C) 42
(D) 82
the
signal
24. Which of the following analog modulation scheme

requires
the
minimum
transmitted
power
and
minimum channel bandwidth?

B
Fig. Q19
(A) ABC + ABC
(B) ABC + ABC
(C) ABC + A B C
(D) A BC + ABC
(A) VSB
(B) DSB - SC
(C) SSB
(D) AM
25. A linear system is equivalently represented by two

sets of state equations:
X& = AX + BU And W& = CW + DU
20. Which of the following can be impulse response of a

The eigenvalues of the representations are also
causal system?
computed as [ l] and [m ]. Which one of the following
(A)
(B)
h(t)
statements is true?
h(t)
(C)
(D)
h(t)
(A) [ l] = [m ] and X = W
(B) [ l] = [m ] and X W
(C) [ l] [m ] and X = W
(D) [ l] = [m ] and X W
26. Which one of the following polar diagrams
h(t)
corresponds to a lag network?

(A)
(B)
Im
Im
w= 0
w=
Re
1
21. Let x( n) = u( n), y( n) = x 2 ( n) and Y ( e jw ) be the
2
w= 0
w=
Re
j0
Fourier transform of y( n) then Y ( e ) is

1
(A)
4
(B) 2
(C) 4
4
(D)
3
(C)
(D)
Im
Im
w=
w= 0
w=
w= 0
Re
Re
22. Find the correct match between group 1 and group 2

Group 1
27. Despite the presence of negative feedback, control
Group II
systems still have problems of instability because the
P. {1 + km( t)} A sin( wc t)
W. Phase Modulation
(A) Components used have non-linearities
Q. km( t) A sin( wc t)
X.Frequency Modulation
R. A sin( wc t + km( t))
Y. Amplitude Modulation
(B) Dynamic equations of the subsystem are not

known exactly.
(C) Mathematical analysis involves approximations.
(A) P-Z, Q-Y, R-X, S-W
(B) P-W, Q-X, R-Y, S-Z
(C) P-X, Q-W, R-Z, S-Y
(D) P-Y, Q-Z, R-W, S-X
(D) System has large negative phase angle at high

frequencies.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
617
EC-05
37. Given an orthogonal matrix

1 1 1 1
1 1 -1 -1
, [ AA T ]-1 is
A =
1
1
0
0
0 0
1 -1
(A) 5 V and 2 W
(B) 7.5 V and 2.5 W
(C) 4 V and 2 W
(D) 3 V and 2.5 W
41. If R1 = R2 = R3 = R and R3 = 11
. R in the bridge
circuit shown in the figure, then the reading in the ideal
14 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
4
(A)
1
0
0
0
2
0 0 0 1
12 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
2
(B)
1
0
0
0
2
0 0 0 1
1
0
(C)
0
0
0 0 0
0 1 0 0
4
(D)
0 0 14 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
Chap 10.3
voltmeter connected between a and b is

R1
R4
10 V
1
4
V
R3
R2
Fig. Q41
38. For the circuit show in the figure, the instantaneous
(A) 0.238 V
(B) 0.138 V
current ii ( t) is
(C) -0.238 V
(D) 1 V.
-j2
j2
42. The h parameters of the circuit shown in the figure
i1
5 0 A
3W
are
10 60O A
I1
I2
10 W
+
20 W
V1
Fig. Q38
10 3
(A)
90 Amps.
2
10 3
(B)
- 90 Amps.
2
(C) 5 60 Amps
(D) 5 - 60 Amps
V2
-
Fig. Q42
39. Impedance Z as shown in the given figure is

j2 W
j5 W
j10 W
0.1 0.1
(A)
-0.1 0.3
-1
10
(B)
1
0
.
05
30 20
(C)
20 20
1
10
(D)
1
0
.
05
j2 W
j10 W
43. A square pulse of 3 volts amplitude is applied to C-R

circuit shown in the figure. The capacitor is initially
Fig. Q39
uncharged. The output voltage VO at time t = 2 sec is
(A) j29 W
(B) j9 W
(C) j19 W
(D) j39 W
0.1 mF
I1
Vi
-j2
I2
+
3V
1 kW
V1
40. For the circuit shown in figure, Thevenin's voltage

and Thevenin's equivalent resistance at terminals a - b
2 sec
V2
-
is
Fig. Q43
5W
0.5I1
5W
10 V
(A) 3 V
(B) -3 V
(C) 4 V
(D) -4 V
44. A Silicon sample A is doped with 1018 atoms/cm 3 of

Fig. Q40
boron. Another sample b of identical dimension is doped

with 1018 atoms/cm 3 phosphorus. The ratio of electron to
www.gatehelp.com
Page
619
UNIT 10
hole mobility is 3. The ratio of conductivity of the
48. The OP-amp circuit shown in the figure is filter. The
sample A to B is
type of filter and its cut. Off frequency are respectively.

1
3
(A) 3
(B)
2
(C)
3
3
(D)
2
10 kW
10 kW
vo
vi
1 mF
45. A Silicon PN junction diode under reverse bias has

depletion region of width 10 mm. The
relative
permitivity of Silicon, e r = 117

. and the preemptively of
free
space
e o = 8.85 10
-12
F/m.
The
depletion
capacitance of the diode per square meter is

(A) 100 mF
(B) 10 mF
(C) 1 mF
(D) 20 mF
1 kW
Fig. Q48
(A) high pass, 1000 rad/sec.

(B) Low pass, 1000 rad/sec.
(C) high pass, 1000 rad/sec.
(D) low pass, 10000 rad/sec.
46. For an npn transistor connected as shown in figure

VBE = 0.7 volts. Given that reverse saturation current of
the junction at room temperature 300 K is 10 -13 A, the
49. In an ideal differential amplifier shown in the

figure, a large value of ( RE )
VCC
emitter current is
RC
RC
IC
_
V1
VBE
+
V2
RE
-VEE
Fig. Q46
(A) 30 mA
(B) 39 mA
(C) 49 mA
(D) 20 mA
Fig. Q49
(A) increase both the differential and common - mode

gains
47. The voltage eo is indicated in the figure has been
(B) increases the common mode gain only
measured by an ideal voltmeter. Which of the following
(C) decreases the differential mode gain only
can be calculated ?
(D) decreases the common mode gain only.

1 MW
50. For an n-channel MOSFET and its transfer curve

shown in the figure, the threshold voltage is
eo
VD=5 V
ID
1 MW
Transfer
Characteristics
VG=1 V
G
S
Fig. Q47
1V
(A) Bias current of the inverting input only
VGS
VS=1 V
Fig. Q50
(B) Bias current of the inverting and non-inverting

inputs only
(A) 1 V and the device is in active region
(C) Input offset current only
(B) -1 V and the device is in saturation region
(D) Both the bias currents and the input offset

current.
(C) 1 V and the device is in saturation region
Page
620
(D) -1 V and the device is in active region.

www.gatehelp.com
UNIT 10
57. The given figure shows a ripple counter using
60. Match
positive edge triggered flip-flops. If the present state of
combination.
the following and choose the correct
Group 1
the counter is Q2Q1Q0 = 001 then its next state Q2Q1Q
E. Continuos and periodic signal
will be
1
1
T0
Q0
F. Continuous and periodic signal
1
T1
Q1
T2
G. Discrete and aperiodic signal
Q2
H. Discrete and periodic signal

CLK
Q0
Q1
Group 2
Q2
1. Fourier representation is continuous and aperiodic
Fig. Q57
(A) 010
(D) 100
(B) 111
(D) 101
2. Fourier representation is discrete and aperiodic

3. Fourier representation is continuous
4. Fourier representation is discrete and periodic
58. What memory address range is NOT represents

by chip # 1 and chip # 2 in the figure A0 to A15 in this
(A) E-3, F-2, G-4, H-1
(A) E-1, F-3, G-2, H-4
(C) E-1, F-2, G-3, H-4
(D) E-2, F-1, G-4, H-3
figure are the address lines and CS means chip select.

61. A signal x( n) = sin( w0 n + f) is the input to a linear
A0 - A7
256 bytes
time- invariant system having a frequency response
Chip #1
H ( e jw ). If the output of the system Ax( n - n0 ) then the

most general form of will be
(A) -n0 w0 + b for any arbitrary real
A8
(B) -n0 w0 + 2pk for any arbitrary integer k
A9
(C) n0 w0 + 2 pk for any arbitrary integer k
A9
(D) -n0 w0 f
A8
62. For a signal the Fourier transform is X ( f )). Then

A0 - A7
the inverse Fourier transform of X ( 3 f + 2) is given by
256 bytes
(A)
Chip #2
1 t j 3pt
x e
2 2
(B)
(C) 3 x( 3t) e - j 4 pt
A10 - A16
not used
(B) 1500 - 16FF
(C) F900-FAFF
(D) F800 - F9FF
j 4 pt
3
(D) x( 3t + 2)
63. The polar diagram of a conditionally stable system
Fig. Q58
(A) 0100 - 02FF.
1 t x e
3 3
for open loop gain K = 1 is shown in the figure. The open

loop transfer function of the system is known to be
stable. The closed loop system is stable for
Im
59. The output y( t) of a linear time invariant system is

related to its input x( t) by the following equation
-8
-2
-0.2
y( t) = 0.5 x( t - td + T) + x( t - td ) + 0.5 x( t - td + T)
The filter transfer function H( w) of such a system
is given by
(A) (1 + cos wT) e - jwt d
(B) (1 + 0.5 cos wT) e - jwt d
(C) (1 - cos wT) e - jwt d
(D) (1 - 0.5 cos wT) e - jwt d
Page
622
www.gatehelp.com
Fig. Q63
Re
EC-05
1
1
<K <
2
8
(A) K < 5 and
(B) K <
1
(C) K < and 5 < K
8
1
1
and < K < 5
2
8
1
(D) K > and 5 > K
8
66. A ramp input applied to an unity feedback system

results in 5% steady state error. The type number and
zero frequency gain of the system are respectively
(A) 1 and 20
64. In the derivation of expression for peak percent
(C) 0 and
overshoot
-px
M p = exp
1 - x2
Chap 10.3
100%
(B)0 and 20
1
20
(D) 1 and
1
20
67. A double integrator plant G( s) = K s 2 , H ( s) = 1 is to

be compensated to achieve the damping ratio and and
undamped natural frequency, w = 5 rad/s which one of
Which one of the following conditions is NOT

required?
(A) System is linear and time invariant
(B) The system transfer function has a pair of
complex conjugate poles and no zeroes.
the following compensator Ge ( s) will be suitable ?

s+3
s + 9.9
(A)
(B)
s + 9.9
s+3
(C)
s-6
s + 8.33
(D)
s-6
s
(C) There is no transportation delay in the system.

68. An unity feedback system is given as
(D) The system has zero initial conditions.
G( s) =
65. Given the ideal operational amplifier circuit shown
in the figure indicate the correct transfer characteristics
assuming ideal diodes with zero cut-in voltage.
Indicate the correct root locus diagram.

(A)
10 V
K (1 - s)
.
s( s + 3)
jw
jw
(B)
vi
vo
-10 V
2 kW
(C)
jw
jw
(D)
0.5 kW
2 kW
Fig. Q65
(A)
Vi
Vo
(B)
69. A MOS capacitor made using P type substrate is in

the accumulation mode. The dominant charge in the
Vo
+10 V
channel is due to the presence of
+10 V
(A) holes
-8 V
+5 V
Vi
-5 V
+8 V
Vi
(B) electrons
(C) positively charged ions
(C)
(D) negatively charged ions
-10 V
-10 V
(D)
Vo
70. A device with input x( t) and output y( t) is
Vo
+10 V
characterized y( t) = x 2 ( t). An FM signal with frequency
+5 V
-5 V
deviation of 90 kHz and modulating signal bandwidth

+5 V
Vi
+5 V
-5 V
-5 V
-10 V
Vi
of 5 kHz is applied to this device. The bandwidth of the

output signal is
(A) 370 kHz
(B) 190 kHz
(C) 380 kHz
(C) 95 kHz
www.gatehelp.com
Page
623
EC-05
Chap 10.3
COMMON DATA QUESTION 78, 79, 80:
81b. If in addition following code exists from 019H
Given, rd = 20 kW, I DSS = 10 mA, Vp = -8 V
onwards,
ORI 40 H
20 V
ADD M
2 kW
What will be the result in the accumulator after

the last instruction is executed?
+
+
2 MW
vi
vo
2V
(B) 20 H
(C) 60 H
(D) 42 H
Statement for Linked Answer Question 82a
Zo
Zi
(A) 40 H
and
82b:
The dopen loop transfer function of a unity
Fig. Q78
feedback system is given by
78. Z i and Z O of the circuit are respectively

(A) 2 MW and 2 kW
(B) 2 MW and
(C) and 2 kW
(D) and
20
kW
11
82a. The gain and phase crossover frequencies in

rad/sec are, respectively
20
kW
11
79. I D and VDS under DC conditions are respectively

(A) 5.625 mA and 8.75 V
(B) 7.500 mA and 5.00 V
(C) 4.500 mA and 11.00 V
(D) 6.250 mA and 7.50 V
80. Transconductance in milli-Siemens (mS)
and
(A) 0.632 and 1.26
(B) 0.632 and 0.485
(C) 0.485 and 0.632
(D) 1.26 and 0.632
82b. Based on the above results, the gain and phase

margins of the system will be
(A) -7.09 dB and 87.5
(B) 7.09 dBand 87.5
(C) 7.09 dB and -87.5
(D) -7.09 and -87.5
voltage gain of the amplifier are respectively

(A) 1.875 mS and 3.41
(B) 1.875 mS and -3.41
(C) 3.3 mS and -6
(D) 3.3 mS and 6
Statement for linked answer question 83a and 83b

Asymmetric three - level midtread quantizer is to
be designed assuming equiprobable occurrence of all
Linked Answer Questions : Q.81a to 85b Carry
quantization levels.
Two Marks Each

83a. If the probability density function is divided into
Statement For Linked Answer Questions 81a and
three regions as shown in the figure, the value of a in
81b:
the figure is
p(x)
Consider an 8085 microprocessor system.

81a. The following program starts at location 0100H.
Region 1
LXI SP, OOFF
-3
LXI H, 0701
Region 2
-1 -a
Region 3
a1
Fig. Q83
MVI A, 20H
(A)
1
3
(B)
2
3
SUB M
(C)
1
2
(D)
1
4
The content of accumulator when the program

counter reaches 0109 H is
(A) 20 H
(B) 02 H
(C) 00 H
(D) FF H
83b. The quantization noise power for the quantization

region between - a and + a in the figure is
(A)
4
81
(B)
1
9
(C)
5
81
(D)
2
81
www.gatehelp.com
Page
625
UNIT 10
Statement of Linked Answer Questions 84a
y[n]
and
84b
(C)
Voltage standing wave pattern in a lossless
transmission line with characteristic impedance 50 and
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-2
-1
a resistive load is shown in the figure.
0 1
y[n]
V(z)
(D)
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1
l/2
85b. The Fourier transform of y[2 n] will be
Fig. Q84a and Q84b
(A) e-2 jw [cos 4 w + 2 cos 2 w + 2 ]
84a. The value of the load resistance is

(A) 50 W
(B) 200 W
(C) 12.5 W
(D) 0
(B) [cos 2 w + 2 cos w + 2 ]

(C) e - jw [cos 2 w + 2 cos w + 2 ]
(D) e -2 jw [cos 2 w + 2 cos w + 2 ]
84b. The reflection coefficient is given by

(A) -0.6
(B) -1
(C) 0.6
(D) 0
************
Statement of Linked Answer Question 85a and

85b:
A sequence x (n) has non-zero values as shown in
the figure.(A)
x[n]
2
1
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
Fig. Q85
85a. The sequence

n
x - 1
y[ n] = 2
for n even
will be
for n odd
y[n]
2
1
(A)
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
y[n]
2
1
(B)
-6
Page
626
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
10.4
EC-06
Maximum Marks : 150
Q.1 to carry Q.20 one marks each and Q.21 to Q.85

carry two marks each.
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
1
0 is
(D) e t u( t)
H ( jw) = A( w) e jf( w )
does
not
produce
any
phase
distortions if
(A) A( w) = Cw2 , f( w) = kw3
(B) A( w) = Cw2 , f( w) = kw
(C) A( w) = Cw, f( w) = kw2
(D) A( w) = C, f( w) = kw-1
corresponding to peak and valley currents are Vp , VD

respectively. The range of tunnel-diode voltage for
(B) P + ( P)
VDwhich the slope of its I - VD characteristics is
(D) ( P) - 2P
negative would be
(C) 2P + P
(C) e - t u( t)
7. The values of voltage ( VD) across a tunnel-diode
2. P Where P is a vector, is equal to

(A) P P - P
(B) e 2 t u( t)
6. A low-pass filter having a frequency response
1 1
1. The rank of the matrix 1 -1
1 1
(A) e-2 t u( t)
(A) VD < 0
(B) 0 VD < Vp
( P) ds where P is a vector, is equal to

(A) P dl
(B) P dl
(C) Vp VD < Vv
(D) VD Vv
(C) P dl
semiconductor under equilibrium is
3.
(D) Pdv
8. The concentration of minority carriers in an extrinsic

(A) Directly proportional to the doping concentration
4. A probability density function is of the form

p( x) = Ke
-a x
, x ( -, )
(B) Inversely proportional to the doping concentration

(C) Directly proportional to the intrinsic concentration
(A) 0.5
(B) 1
(D) Inversely proportional to the intrinsic

concentration
(C) 0.5
(D) a
9. Under low level injection assumption, the injected
The value of K is
5. A solution for the differential equation

x( t) + 2 x( t) = d( t)
With initial condition x(0 -) = 0
Page
628
minority carrier current for an extrinsic semiconductor

is essentially the
(A) Diffusion current
(B) Drift current
(C) Recombination current
(D) Induced current
www.gatehelp.com
EC-06
10. The phenomenon known as Early Effect in a

bipolar transistor refers to a reduction of the effective
base-width caused by
(B) The reverse biasing of the base collector

junction
(C) The forward biasing of emitter-base junction
(D) The early removal of stored base charge during
saturation-to-cut off switching
11. The input impedance ( Z i ) and the output impedance
( Z 0 ) of an ideal trans-conductance (voltage controlled
current source) amplifier are
(B) Z i = 0, Z 0 =
(C) Z i = , Z 0 = 0
(D) Z i = , Z 0 =
15. The Dirac delta function is defined as

1 t =0
(A) d( t) =
0 otherwise
1 t =0
(B) d( t) =
0 otherwise
(A) Electron Hole recombination at the base
(A) Z i = 0, Z 0 = 0
Chap 10.4
t =0
(D) d( t) =
0
t =0
and
otherwise
otherwise
points on its I D - VGS curve :

(i) VGS = 0 at I D = 12 mA and
(C)
3
< z <3
2
d( t) dt = 1
(B)
2
< z <3
3
(D)
1
2
<z <
3
3
control system is given by

G( s) =
highest trans conductance gain for small signals?

(D) VGS = 3 Volts
16. If the region of convergence of x1 [ n] + x2 [ n] is

1
2
< z < then the region of convergence of x1 [ n] - x2 [ n]
3
3
Which of the following Q point will give the
(C) VGS = 0 Volts
d( t) dt = 1
17. The open-loop function of a unity-gain feedback
(ii) VGS = -6 Volts at I D = 0 mA
(B) VGS = -3 Volts
and
includes
1
(A) < z < 3
3
12. An n-channel depletion MOSFET has following two
(A) VGS = -6 Volts
1
(C) d( t) =
0
K
( s + 1)( s + 2)
The gain margin of the system in dB is given by

(A) 0
(B) 1
13. The number of product terms in the minimized
(C) 20
(D)
sum-of-product
18. In the system shown below, x( t) = (sin t) u( t) In
expression
obtained
through
the
following K map is (where, d denotes dont care

states)
steady-state, the response y( t) will be

x(t)
(A) 2
(B) 3
(C) 4
(D) 5
y(t)
1
s+1
Fig Q. 18
(A)
(C)
sin t -
4
2
1
1
e - t sin t
(B)
sin t +
4
2
(D) sin t - cos t
19. The electric field of an electromagnetic wave

propagation in the positive direction is given by
14. Let x( t) X ( jw) be Fourier Transform pair. The
E = a$ x sin( wt - bz) + a$ y sin( wt - bz + p 2)
Fourier Transform of the signal x(5 t - 3) in terms of
The wave is
X ( jw) is given as
j 3w
j 3w
(A)
1 e
5
jw
X
(B)
1
e
5
(C)
1 - j 3w jw
e
X
5
5
(D)
1 j 3w jw
e X
5
5
jw
X
(A) Linearly polarized in the zdirection

(B) Elliptically polarized
(C) Left-hand circularly polarized
(D) Right-hand circularly polarized
www.gatehelp.com
Page
629
EC-06
Chap 10.4
30. A two-port network is represented by ABCD,
34. In the figures shown below, assume that all the
parameters given by
capacitors are initially uncharged. If vi ( t) = 10 u( t) Volts,
V1 A
I = C
1
vo( t)is given by
B V2
D -I 2
1k
If port 2 is terminated by the input impedance
DRL + A
(C)
C + BRL
4 mF
Vi(t)
1 mF
4k
VO(t)
-
ARL + B
(D)
D + CRL
Fig. Q.34
31. In the two port network shown in the figure below

z12 and z 21 are respectively
(A) 8 e -0 .004 t Volts
(B) 8(1 - e -0 .004 t ) Volts
(C) 8u( t) Volts
(D) 8 Volts
35. Consider two transfer functions
I1
I2
G1 ( s) =
bI1
re
seen at port 1 is given by

A + BRL
ARL + C
(A)
(B)
C + DRL
BRL + D
ro
1
s
And G2 ( s) = 2
s 2 + as + b
s + as + b
The 3dB bandwidths of their frequency responses

are, respectively
Fig Q.31
(A) re and bro
(B) 0 and -bro
(C) 0 and bro
(D) re and -bro
32.
The
first
and
the
last
critical
(A)
a 2 - 4 b,
a2 + 4 b
(B)
a 2 + 4 b,
a2 - 4 b
(C)
a 2 - 4 b,
a2 - 4 b
(D)
a 2 + 4 b,
a2 + 4 b
36. A negative resistance Rneg is connected to a passive
frequencies
(singularities) of a driving point impedance function of a
network N having driving point impedance Z1 ( s) as

shown below. For Z 2 ( s) to be positive real,
Rneg
passive network having two kinds of elements, are a

pole and a zero respectively. The above property will be
satisfied by
(A) RL network only
(B) RC network only
Z1(s)
Z2(s)
(C) LC network only
Fig Q.36
(D) RC as well as RL networks

33. A 2 mH inductor with some initial current can be
represented as shown below, where s is the Lap lace
Transform variable. The value of initial current is
Is
(A) Rneg Re Z1 ( jw), "w
(B) Rneg Z1 ( jw) , "w
(C) Rneg Im Z1 ( jw), "w
(D) Rneg Z1 ( jw), "w
37. In the circuit shown below, the switch was

connected to position 1 at t < 0 and at t = 0, it is changed
to position 2. Assume that the diode has zero voltage
0.002s
drop and a storage time ts . For 0 < t ts , vR is given by

(all in Volts)
1 mV
5V
(A) 0.5A
(B) 2.0A
(C) 1.0 A
(D) 0.0 A
Fig Q.33
5V
1 kW
vR
_
Fig Q.37
www.gatehelp.com
Page
631
UNIT 10
(A) vR = -5
(B) vR = +5
(C) 0 vR < 5
(D) -5 vR < 0
The voltage VC across the capacitor at t = 1 is
38. The majority carriers in an ntype semiconductor

have an average drift velocity v in a direction
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B. The
electric field E induced due to Hall effect acts in the
direction.
(A) 0 Volt
(B) 6.3 Volts
(C) 9.45 Volts
(D) 10 Volts
42. For the circuit shown below, assume that the zener
diode is ideal with a breakdown voltage of 6 volts. The
waveform observed across R is
6V
(A) v B
(B) B v
(C) along v
(D) opposite to v
+
12sin wt
39. Find the correct match between Group 1 and Group
VR
2.
Group 1
Group 2
Fig Q.42
6V
E-Varactor diode
1-Voltage reference
F-PIN diode
2-High frequency switch
G-Zener diode
3-Tuned circuits
H-Schottky diode
4-Current controlled attenuator
(A)
(A) E-4, F-2, G-1, H-3
(B) E-2, F-4, G-1, H-3
(C) E-3, F-4, G-1, H-2
(D) E-1, F-3, G-2, H-4
6V
(B)
40. A heavily doped n- type semiconductor has the

following data:
-12 V
Hole-electron ratio
:0.4
Doping concentration
:4.2 108 atoms/m 3
Intrinsic concentration
:15
. 10 4 atoms/m 3
The
ratio
of
conductance
of
the
12 V
n-type
(D)
semiconductor to that of the intrinsic semiconductor of

same material and ate same temperature is given by
(A) 0.00005
(B) 2,000
(C) 10,000
(D) 20,000
-6 V
(C)
41. For the circuit shown in the following figure, the
-6 V
capacitor C is initially uncharged. At t = 0 the switch S

is closed. In the figures shown the OP AMP is supplied
Q. 43 A new Binary Coded Pentary (BCP) number
with and the ground has been shown by the symbol
system is proposed in which every digit of a base5
number is represented by its corresponding 3bit
C=1 mF
binary code. For example, the base5 number 24 will be

1 kW
VC +
represented by its BCP code 010100. In this numbering

vo
system, the BCP code 10001001101 corresponds of the

following number is base5 system
10 V
Fig Q.41
Page
632
(A) 423
(B) 1324
(C) 2201
(D) 4231
www.gatehelp.com
EC-06
44. An I / O peripheral device shown in Fig.(b) below is
Chap 10.4
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
to be interfaced to an 8085 microprocessor. To select the

I/O device in the I/O address range D4 H D7 H, its
chipselect ( CS) should be connected to the output of
the decoder shown in as below:
LSB
A2
3-to-8
Decoder
A3
A4
MSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DATA
IORD
IOWR
I/O
Peripheral
A1
47. Two D flip flops, as shown below, are to be
A0
connected as a synchronous counter that goes through
A7
A6
A5
the following sequence

00 01 11 10 00 K
CS
Fig Q.44
(A) output 7
(B) output 5
(C) output 2
Q0
D0
Clock
D1
Q1
Q0
45. For the circuit shown in figures below, two 4 bit

parallel in serial out shift registers loaded with the
MSB
CK
CK
(D) output 0
Q1
Fig Q.47
The inputs D0 and D1 respectively should be
data shown are used to feed the data to a full adder.
connected as,
Initially, all the flip flops are in clear state. After
(A) Q1 and Q0
(B) Q0 and Q1
(C) Q1Q0 and Q1Q0
(D) Q1 Q0 and Q1Q0
applying two clock pulses, the outputs of the full-adder

should be
1
48. Following is the segment of a 8085 assembly
Full Adder
CLK
language program
CLK
Ci
CO
D
CLK
3000 H
CLK
Fig Q.45
(A) S = 0 C0 = 0
(B) S = 0 C0 = 1
(C) S = 1 C0 = 0
(D) S = 1 C0 = 1
46. A 4 bit D / A converter is connected to a free

running 3 big UP counter, as shown in the following
figure. Which of the following waveforms will be
observed at VO ?
Q2
D3
Q1
D1
Q0
D3
3 - Bit Counter
On completion of RET execution, the contents of

SP is
(A) 3CF0 H
(B) 3CF8 H
(C) EFFD H
(D) EFFF H
1 kW
49. The point P in the following figure is stuck at 1.
D2
Clock
LXI SP, EFFF H

CALL 3000 H
:
:
:
LXI H, 3CF4
PUSH PSW
SPHL
POP PSW
RET
D/A Converter
vo
The output f will be

A
B
1 kW
C
Fig Q.46
Fig Q.49
www.gatehelp.com
Page
633
EC-06
(A)
p
2
(B)
p
3
(C)
p
4
(D)
p
6
(C) RC <
Chap 10.4
1
wc
(D) RC >
1
wc
64. In the following figure the minimum value of the

constant C , which is to be added to y1 ( t) and y2 ( t)
59. A linear system is described by the following state
such that y1 ( t) and y2 ( t)
equation
Q is quantizer with L levels,

stepwise D allowable signal
dynamic range [-V, V]
0 1
X& ( t) = AX ( t) + BU ( t), A =
-1 0
x(t) with range

-V , V
2 2
The state transition matrix of the system is

sin t
cos t
sin t
- cos t
(B)
sin
t
cos
t
- cos t - sin t
(C)
cos t
- sin t
- cos t - sin t
(D)
sin t
cos t
cos t
(A)
- sin t
(A) D
60. The minimum step- size required for a Delta

Modulator operating at 32 K , samples/sec to track the
D2
12
(B)
D
2
(D)
D
L
(A) 4 10 4 Hz
(B) 2 106 Hz
(C) 2 10 9 Hz
(D) 2 1010 Hz
61. A zero mean white Gaussian noise is passed

through an ideal lowpass filter of bandwidth 10 kHz.
The output is then uniformly sampled with sampling
period ts = 0.03 msec. The samples so obtained would be
(A) correlated
(B) statistically independent
(C) uncorrelated
(E) orthogonal
62. A source generates three symbols with probabilities

0.25, 0.25, 0.50 at a rate of 3000 symbols per second.
Assuming independent generation of symbols, the most
efficient source encoder would have average bit rate as
(A) 6000 bits/sec
(B) 4500 bits/sec
(C) 3000 bits/sec
(D) 1500 bits/sec
63. The diagonal clipping in Amplitude Demodulation
66. A medium of relative permitivity e r 2 = 2 forms an

interface with free space. A point source of
electromagnetic energy is located in the medium at a
depth of 1 meter from the interface. Due to the total
internal reflection, the transmitted beam has a circular
cross-section over the interface. The area of the beam
cross-section at the interface is given by
(A) 2 p m 2
(C)
p
2
(B) p2 m 2
(D) p m 2
m2
67. A medium is divide into regions I and II about x = 0

plane, as shown in the figure below. An electromagnetic
wave with electric field E1 = 4 a$ x + 3a$ y + 5 a$ z is incident
normally on the interface from region I. The electric file
E2 in region II at the interface is
Region I
m1=mo
er1=4
s1=0
(using envelope detector) can be avoided if RC time

constant of the envelope detector satisfies the following
condition, (here W is message bandwidth and wc is
(B) RC >
Region II
m2=mo
er2=4
s2=0
E2
E1
carrier frequency both in rad /sec)

1
W
(D) 2 -4
So that slope overload is avoided, would be
(A) RC <
y2(t)
(B) 2 -8
x( t) = 125 t( u( t) - u( t - 1)(250 - 125 t)( u( t - 1) - u( t - 2))
(C) 2 -6
65. A message signal with 10 kHz bandwidth is lower

side Band SSB modulated with carrier fc1 = 106 Hz
frequency the resulting signal is then passed through a
Narow Band Frequency Modulator with carrier
frequency fc 2 = 10 9 Hz. The bandwidth of the output
would be
signal (here u( t) is the unit function)
(A) 2
y1(t)
Fig Q.64
(C)
-10
and are different, is
1
W
x<0
www.gatehelp.com
x=0
Fig Q.67
x>0
Page
635
UNIT 10
(A) E2 = E1
(B) 4 a$ x + 0.75 a$ y - 125

. a$ z
72. If bDC is increase by 10%, the collector to- emitter
(C) 3a$ x + 3a$ y + 5 a$ z
(D) -3a$ x + 3a$ y + 5 a$ z
voltage drop
(A) increases by less than or equal to 10%
68. When a planes wave traveling in free-space is
(B) decreases by less than or equal to 10%
incident normally on a medium having the fraction of
(C) increases by more than 10%
power transmitted into the medium is given by
(D) decreases by more than 10%
(A) 8/9
(B) 1/2
(C) 1/3
(D) 5/6
73. The small signal gain of the amplifier vc vs is
69. A rectangular wave guide having TE10 mode as
(A) 10
(B) 5.3
(C) 5.3
(D) 10
dominant mode is having a cut off frequency 18-GHz

for the mode TE30 . The inner broad wall dimension of
Common Data for Question 74, 75 :
the rectangular wave guide is
Let g( t) = p( t)* p( t) where * denotes convolution
(A) 5/3cms
(B) 5 cms
and p( t) = u( t) - u( t - 1) with u( t) being the unit step
(C) 5/2 cms
(D) 10 cms
function.
70. A mast antenna consisting of a 50 meter long
74. The impulse response of filter matched to the signal
vertical conductor operates over a perfectly conducting
s( t) = g( t) - d( t - 2)* g( t) is given as:
ground plane. It is base-fed at a frequency of 600 kHz.
(A) s(1 - t)
(B) -s(1 - t)
The radiation resistance of the antenna in Ohms is
(C) -s( t)
(D) s( t)
2 p2
(A)
5
(C)
p2
(B)
5
4 p2
5
75. An Amplitude Modulated signal is given as

x AM = 100( p( t) + 0.5 g( t)) cos wc t
(D) 20 p2
In the interval. One set of possible values of the

modulating signal and modulation index would be
Common Data for Question 71,72,73:

In the transistor amplifier circuit show in the
figure
below,
the
transistor
has
the
(B) t, 10
.
(C) t, 2.0
(D) t 2 , 0.5
following
Linked Answer Question : Q.75 to Q.85 carry two
parameters:
marks each.
bDC = 60, VBE = 0.7 V, hie , hfe

The capacitance can be assumed to be infinite.
12 V
1 kW
5.3 kW
+
vC
CC
Statement of Linked Answer Question 76 & 77:

A regulated power supply, shown in figure below,
has an unregulated input (UR) of 15 volts and
generates a regulated output Use the component values
shown in the figure.
53 kW
vS
(A) t, 0.5
Q1
15 V (UR)
+
10 kW
1 kW
Fig Q.70
12 kW
71. Under the DC conditions, the collector to- emitter

voltage drop is
(A) 4.8 Volts
(B) 5.3 Volts
(C) 6.0 Volts
(D) 6.6 Volts
6V
24 kW
Fig Q.76
Page
636
www.gatehelp.com
vo
UNIT 10
ANSWER
take 400 ms for an electromagnetic wave to travel from

source end to load end and vice versa. At t = 400 ms,
the voltage at the load end is found to be 40 volts.
84. The load resistance is
(A) 25 Ohms
(B) 50 Ohms
(C) 75 Ohms
(D) 100 Ohms
1. C
2. D
3. A
4. C
5. A
6. B
7. C
8. B
9. A
10 .B
11. D
12. D
13. A
14. A
15. D
16. D
17.D
18. A
19. C
20. A
21. A
22. B
23. D
24. C
25. D
26. C
27. A
28. C
29. A
30. D
31. B
32. B
33. A
34. B
35. B
36. B
37. D
38. A
39. C
40. D
41. D
42. B
43. D
44. B
45. D
46. B
47. A
48. B
49. D
50. B
51. C
52. B
53. C
54. B
55. D
56. B
57. C
58. D
59.A
60. B
61. B
62. B
63. D
64. C
65. B
66. D
67. C
68. A
69. C
70. A
71. C
72. B
73. A
74. D
75. A
76. C
77. B
78. A
79.
80. C
81. B
82. C
83.C
84.
85.
85. The steady state current through the load

resistance is
(A) 1.2 Amps
(B) 0.3 Amps
(C) 0.6 Amps
(D) 0.4 Amps
***********
Page
638
www.gatehelp.com
CHAPTER
10.7
EC-09
Q.1 - Q. 20 carry one mark each.

12 V
1. The order of the differential equation

3
d 2 y dy
4
-1
+
+ y = e is
dr 2 dt
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
10 V
2. The Fourier series of a real periodic function has only

P.
Q.
R.
S.
10 min
Cosine terms if it is even

sine terms if it is even
cosine terms if it is odd
sine terms if it is odd
(A) 220 J
(B) 12 kJ
(C) 13.2 kJ
(D) 14.4 kJ
5. In an n-type silicon crystal at room temperature,

which of the following can have a concentration of
4 1019 cm-3?
Which of the above statements are correct?
(A) Silicon atoms
(B) Holes
(C) Dopant atoms
(D) Valence electrons
(A) P and S
(B) P and R
6. The full forms of the abbreviations TTL and CMOS in
(C) Q and S
(D) Q and R
reference to logic families are
3. A function is given by f ( t) = sin t + cos 2 t. Which of

2
the following is true ?

(A) f has frequency components at 0 and 1 / 2 p Hz
(B) f has frequency components at 0 and 1 / p Hz
(C) f has frequency components at 1 / 2 p and 1 / p Hz
(A) Triple Transistor Logic and Chip Metal Oxide

Semiconductor
(B) Tristate Transistor Logic and Chip Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
(C) Transistor Transistor Logic and Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor
(D) f has frequency components at 0.1 / 2 p and 1 / p Hz
(D) Tristate Transistor Logic and Complementary

Metal Oxide Silicon
4. A fully charged mobile phone with a 12 V battery is
7. The ROC of Z-transform of the discrete time sequence
good for a 10 minute talk-time. Assume that, during the
1
1
x( n) = u( n) - u( -n - 1) is
3
2
1
1
1
(B) z >
(A) < z <
3
2
2
talk-time, the battery delivers a constant current of 2 A

and its voltage drops linearly from 12 V to 10 V as
shown in the figure. How much energy does the battery
deliver during this talk-time ?
Page
662
www.gatehelp.com
EC-09
(C) z <
1
3
Chap 10.7
11. A fair coin is tossed 10 times. What is the
(D) 2 < z < 3
probability that ONLY the first two tosses will yield
8. The magnitude plot of a rational transfer function

G( s) with real coefficients is shown below. Which of the
following compensators has such a magnitude plot ?
heads ?
1
(A)
2
(B)
10
(D)
10
10
10
1
(C)
2
20 dB
1
C2
2
1
C2
2
12. If the power spectral density of stationary random

process is a sinc-squared function of frequency, the
shape of its autocorrelation is
- 40 dB
(A)
(A) Lead compensator
(B)
(B) Lag compensator

(C) PID compensator|
(D) Lead-lag compensator
9. A white noise process X ( t) with two-sided power
(C)
(D)
spectral density 1 10 -10 W/Hz is input to a filter whose

magnitude squared response is shown below.
1
-10 kHz
10 kHz
13. If f ( z) = c0 + c1 z -1 , then
The power of the output process Y ( t) is given by

(A) 5 10 -7 W
(B) 1 10 -6 W
(C) 2 10 -6 W
(D) 1 10 -5 W
1 + f ( z)
dz is given by
z
unit circle
(A) 2 pc1
(B) 2 p(1 + c0 )
(C) 2 pjc1
(D) 2 pj(1 + c0 )
14. In the interconnection of ideal sources shown in the

figure, it is known that the 60 V source is absorbing
10. Which of the following statements is true regarding
power.
the fundamental mode of the metallic waveguides
Which of the following can be the value of the

current source I ?
shown ?
20 V
.P: Coaxial
Q: Cylindrical
I
60 V
12 A
R: Rectangular
(A) Only P has no cutoff-frequency

(B) Only Q has no cutoff-frequency
(A) 10 A
(B) 13 A
(C) Only R has no cutoff-frequency
(C) 15 A
(D) 18 A
(D) All three have cut-off frequencies
15. The ratio of the mobility to the diffusion coefficient

in a semiconductor has the units
www.gatehelp.com
Page
663
UNIT 10
(A) V -1
(C) V.cm
-1
(B) cm. V -1
20. Two infinitely long wires carrying current are as
(D) V.s
shown in the figure below. One wire is in the y - z plane

and parallel to the y -axis. The other wire is in the x - y
16. In a microprocessor, the service routine for a certain
plane and parallel to the x -axis. Which components of
interrupt starts from a fixed location of memory which
the resulting magnetic field are non-zero at the origin ?
cannot be externally set, but the interrupt can be
delayed or rejected Such an interrupt is
1A
(A) non-maskable and non-vectored

(B) maskable and non-vectored
(C) non-maskable and vectored
(D) maskable and vectored

17. If the transfer function of the following network is
V0 ( s)
1
the value of the load resistance RL is
=
Vi ( s) 2 + sCR
+
1A
x
(A) x, y, z components
(B) x, y components
(C) y, z components
(D) x, z components
Q. 21 to Q. 60 carry two marks each.
(A) R/4
(B) R/2
(C) R
(D) 2 R
18. Consider the system
21. Consider two independent random variables X and

Y with identical distributions. The variables X and Y
1 1
1
take values 0, 1 and 2 with probabilities ,
and
2 4
4
respectively. What is the conditional probability
1 0
dx
= Ax + Bu with A =
dt
0 1
p
and B = where p and q are arbitrary real numbers.
q
Which
of
the
following
statements
about
P ( X + Y = 2 X - Y = 0) ?
(A) 0
(C)
the
(B)
1
6
1
16
(D) 1
controllability of the system is true ?
22. The Taylor series expansion of
(A) The system is completely state controllable for

any nonzero values of p and q
by
sin x
at x = p is given
x-p
(A) 1 +
( x - p) 2
+...
3!
(B) -1 -
( x - p) 2
+...
3!
(C) The system is uncontrollable for all values of p

and q
(C) 1 -
( x - p) 2
+...
3!
(D) -1 +
( x - p) 2
+...
3!
(D) We cannot conclude about controllability from the

given data
23. If a vector field V is related to another vector field A
(B) Only p = 0 and q = 0 result in controllability
through V = A, which of the following is true? Note :

19. For a message signal m( t) = cos(2pfm t) and carrier of
C and SC refer to any closed contour and any surface
frequency fc , which of the following represents a single
whose boundary is C.
side-band (SSB) signal ?
(A)
(A) cos(2 pfm t) cos(2 pfc t)

(B) cos(2pfc t)
(C) cos[2p( fc + fm ) t ]
(B)
SC
www.gatehelp.com
SC
A. dl = V . dS
C
(C) V . dl = A. dS
(D) [1 + cos(2 pfm t) cos(2 pfc t)]

Page
664
V . dl = A. dS
SC
(D) A. dl = V . dS
C
SC
EC-09
Chap 10.7
24. Given that F ( s) is the one-sided Laplace transform

of f ( t), the Laplace transform of
(A) sF ( s) - f (0)
(C)
(B)
f ( t) dt is
1
F ( s)
s
100 V
1
(D) [ F ( s) - f (0)]
s
F ( t) dt
25. Match each differential equation in Group I to its
(A) 0.2 e -125t u( t) mA
(B) 20 e -1250 t u( t) mA
family of solution curves from Group II.
(C) 0.2 e -1250 t u( t) mA
(D) 20 e -1000 t u( t) mA
P.
Q.
R.
S.
Group 1
dy y
=
dx x
dy
y
=dx
x
dy x
=
dx y
Group II
29. In the circuit shown, what value of RL maximizes
1. Circles
the power delivered to RL ?
2. Straight lines
3. Hyperbolas
dy
x
=dx
y
100 V
(A) P - 2, Q - 3, R - 3, S - 1
(B) P - 1, Q - 3, R - 2, S - 1
(C) P - 2, Q - 1, R - 3, S - 3
(D) P - 3, Q - 2, R - 1, S - 2
26. The eigen values of the following matrix are
8
W
3
(A) 2.4 W
(B)
(C) 4 W
(D) 6 W
30. The time domain behavior of an RL circuit is
-1 3 5
-3 -1 6
0 0 3
represented by
di
+ Ri= V0 (1 + Be - Rt / L sin t) u( t).
dt
V
For an initial current of i(0) = 0 , the steady state
R
value of the current is given by
V
2 V0
(B) i( t)
(A) i( t) 0
R
R
L
(A) 3, 3 + 5 j, 6 - j
(B) -6 + 5 j, 3 + j, 3 - j
(C) 3 + j, 3 - j, 5 + j
(D) 3, - 1 + 3 j, - 1 - 3 j
27. An AC source of RMS voltage 20 V with internal

impedance Z s = (1 + 2 j)W feeds a load of impedance
Z L = (7 + 4 j)W in the figure below. The reactive power
(C) i( t)
consumed by the load is
V0
(1 + B)
R
(D) i( t)
2 V0
(1 + B)
R
31. In the circuit below, the diode is ideal. The voltage V

is given by
1A
(A) 8 VAR
(B) 16 VAR|
(C) 28 VAR
(D) 32 VAR
28. The switch in the circuit shown was on position a

for a long time, and is move to position b at time t = 0.
(A) min( Vi ,1)
(B) max( Vi 1)
(C) min( -Vi ,1)
(C) max( -Vi ,1)
The current i( t) for t > 0 is given by

www.gatehelp.com
Page
665
EC-09
(A) NAND: first (0,1) then (0,1) NOR: first (1,0) then
(0,0)
Chap 10.7
(B) NAND: first (1,0) then (1,0) NOR: first (1,0) then
(1,0)
(C) NAND: first (1,0) then (1,0) NOR: first (1,0) then
(0,0)
(D) NAND: first (1,0) then (1,1) NOR: first (0,1) then
(0,1)
A) Causal, LP
(B) BIBO, LTI
(C) BIBO, Causal, LTI
(D) LP, LTI
39. What are the counting states (Q1 , Q2 ) for the counter
42. The 4-point Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of a
shown in the figure below?
discrete time sequence {1,0,2,3} is

Q
Q
JK
Flip Flop
Clock
(A) [0,-2+2j,2,-2-2j]
(B) [2,2+2j,6,2-2j]
(C) [6,1-3j,2,1+3j]
(D) [6-1+3j,0,-1,-3j]
JK
Flip Flop
43. The feedback configuration and the pole-zero
locations of G( s) =
(A) 11, 10, 00, 11, 10,...
(B) 01, 10, 11, 00, 01,...
(C) 00, 11, 01, 10, 00,...
(D) 01, 10, 00, 01, 10,...
s2 - 2 s + 2
are shown below. The root
s2 + 2 s + 2
locus for negative values of k, i.e. for - < k < 0, has

breakaway/break-in points and angle of departure at
pole P (with respect to the positive real axis) equal to
Im (s)
40. A system with transfer function H ( z) has impulse
response h(.) defined as h(2) = 1, h( 3) = -1 and h( k) = 0
+
-
otherwise. Consider the following statements.
G(s)
Re (s)
S1: H ( z) is a low-pass filter.

S2: H ( z) is an FIR filter.
Which of the following is correct?
(A) Only S2 is true
(B) Both S1 and S2 are false
(A) 2 and 0
(B) 2 and 45
(C) 3 and 0
(D) 3 and 45
44. An LTI system having transfer function
s2 + 1
s2 + 2 s + 1
(C) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a reason for

S1
and input x( t) = sin( t + 1) is in steady state. The output
(D) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a reason

for S1
{ x( k)}. Which of the following is true?
41. Consider a system whose input x and output y are

related by the equation
where h( t) is shown in the graph.

the
following
(B) y(.) is nonzero for all sampling frequencies ws

(D) y(.) is zero for ws > 2, but nonzero for w2 < 2
of
(A) y(.) is zero for all sampling frequencies ws

(C) y(.) is nonzero for ws > 2, but zero for ws < 2
y( t)= x( t - t) h(2 t) dt
Which
is sampled at a rate ws rad/s to obtain the final output
four
45. The unit step response of an under-damped second
properties
are
possessed by the system ?

BIBO: Bounded input gives a bounded output.
Causal: The system is causal,
order system has steady state value of -2. Which one of

the following transfer functions has these properties ?
-2.24
-3.82
(A) 2
(B) 2
s + 2.59 s + 112
.
s + 191
. s + 191
.
(C)
LP: The system is low pass.
-2.24
s - 2.59 s + 112
.
2
(D)
-382
s - 191
. s + 191
.
2
LTI: The system is linear and time-invariant.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
667
UNIT 10
46. A discrete random variable X takes values from 1 to

5 with probabilities as shown in the table. A student
(D) j =
1
B0 z$
, r 0
m 0 x 2 + y 2
calculates the mean of X as 3.5 and her teacher

calculates the variance of X as 1.5. Which of the
50. A transmission line terminates in two branches,
following statements is true ?
each of length l / 4, as shown. The branches are

terminated by 50W loads. The lines are lossless and
P ( X = k)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.2
0.1
have the characteristic impedances shown. Determine

the impedance Z i as seen by the source.
(A) Both the student and the teacher are right

(B) Both the student and the teacher are wrong
(C) The student is wrong but the teacher is right
(D) The student is right but the teacher is wrong
Q. 47 A message signal given by
1
1
1n( t)= cos w1 t - sin w2 t
2
2
(A) 200W
(B) 100W
(C) 50W
(D) 25W
Common Date Questions
is amplitude-modulated with a carrier of frequency
Common Date for Questions 51 and 52:
wc to generate
Consider
s( t)= [1 + m( t)]cos wc t
modulation scheme ?
(B) 11.11%
(C) 20%
(D) 25%
the resulting capacity C2 is given by

(D) C2 = C1 + 0.3B
2
B0 z$
2
m 0 x + y2
, r 0
Permittivity of free space = 8.85 10 -14 F.cm -1

Dielectric constant of silicon = 12
51 The built-in potential of the junction
(D) cannot be estimated from the data given

52. The peak electric field in the device is
(A) 0.15 MV . cm -1 , directed from p-region to n-region
[ Hint : The algebra is trivial in cylindrical coordinates.]
(B) j = -
Depletion width on the n-side = 0.1 mm
(C) is 0.82
What current distribution leads to this field ?
1
B0 z$
, r 0
m 0 x 2 + y 2
Doping on the n-side = 1 1017 cm -3
(B) is 0.76 V
x
y
B= B0 2
y$ - 2
x$
2
2
x +y
x +y
(B) 0.15 MV . cm -1 , directed from n-region to p-region

(C) 1.80 MV . cm -1 , directed from p-region to n-region
(D) 1.80 MV . cm -1 , directed from n-region to p-region
Common Data for Questions 53 and 54:
(C) j = 0, r 0
Page
668
room
(A) is 0.70 V
49. A magnetic field in air is measured to be
(A) j =
at
Thermal voltage = 26 mV
capacity C1 . If the SNR is doubled keeping B constant,
(C) C2 = C1 + 2 B
junction
Intrinsic carrier concentration = 1.4 1010 cm -3
a signal to noise ratio SNR >> 1 and bandwidth B has
(B) C2 = C1 + B
p-n
Depletion width on the p-side = 10

. mm
48. A communication channel with AWGN operating at
(A) C2 = 2 C1
silicon
temperature having the following parameters:
What is the power efficiency achieved by this

(A) 8.33%
www.gatehelp.com
EC-09
Chap 10.7
The Nyquist plot of a stable transfer function G( s)
Consider the CMOS circuit shown, where the gate
is shown in the figure. We are interested in the stability
voltage VG of the n-MOSFET is increased from zero,
of the closed loop system in the feedback configuration
while the gate voltage of the p-MOSFET is kept
shown.
constant at 3 V. Assume that, for both transistors, the
Im
magnitude of the threshold voltage is 1 V and the

product of the trans-conductance parameter and the
+
-1-0.5
Re
(W/L) ratio, i.e. the quantity mCax (W / L), is 1 mA . V -2 .
G(s)
-
-j
53. Which of the following statements is true?

(A) G( s) is an all-pass filter
(B) G( s) has a zero in the right-half plane
(C) G( s) is the impedance of a passive network
57. For small increase in VG beyond 1 V, which of the
(D) G( s) is marginally stable
following gives the correct description of the region of

54. The gain and phase margins of G( s) for closed loop
operation of each MOSFET ?
stability are
(A) Both the MOSFETs are in saturation region
(A) 6 dB and 180
(B) 3 dB and 180
(B) Both the MOSFETs are in triode region
(C) 6 dB and 90
(D) 3 dB and 90
(C) n-MOSFET is in triode and p-MOSFET is in

saturation region
Common Data for Questions 55 and 56:

The amplitude of a random signal is uniformly
(D) n-MOSFET is in saturation and p-MOSFET is in

triode region.
distributed between -5 V and 5 V.

55. If the signal to quantization noise ratio required in
58. Estimate the output voltage V0 for VG = 15

. V.
uniformly quantizing the signal is 43.5 dB, the step size
[Hint : Use the appropriate current-voltage equation for
of the quantization is approximately
each MOSFET, based on the anser to Q. 57.]
(A) 0.0333 V
(B) 0.05 V
(C) 0.0667 V
(D) 0.10 V
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 59 and

60:
56. If the positive values of the signal are uniformly

quantized with a step size of 0.05 V, and the negative
Two products are sold from a vending machine,
values are uniformly quantized with a step size of 0.1 V,
which has two push buttons P1 and P2 . When a button is
the resulting signal to quantization noise ratio is
pressed, the price of the corresponding product is
approximately
displayed in a 7-segment display.
(A) 46 dB
(B) 43.8 dB
(C) 42 dB
(D) 40 dB
If no buttons are pressed, '0' is displayed,

signifying 'Rs. 0'.
If only P1 is pressed, '2' is displayed, signifying 'Rs.
Linked Answer Questions

Statement for Linked Answer Questions 57 and 58
2'.
If only P2 is pressed, '5' is displayed, signifying 'Rs.
:
5'.
If both P1 and P2 are pressed, 'E' is displayed,

signifying 'Error'.
www.gatehelp.com
Page
669

Gate by RK Kanodia

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gate by RK Kanodia

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GATE EC BY RK Kanodia

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION

Electronics & Communication Engineering

NODIA & COMAPNY

1. A solid copper sphere, 10 cm in diameter is deprived

electrons by a charging scheme. The charge on

6. In the circuit of fig P1.1.6 a charge of 600 C is

2. A lightning bolt carrying 15,000 A lasts for 100 ms. If

3. If 120 C of charge passes through an electric

conductor in 60 sec, the current in the conductor is

4. The energy required to move 120 coulomb through

8. Consider the circuit graph shown in fig. P1.1.8. Each

branch of circuit graph represent a circuit element. The

9. For the circuit shown in fig P.1.1.9 the value of

13. The voltage vo in fig. P1.1.11 is always equal to

(D) None of the above

(D) None of the above

11. Twelve 6 W resistor are used as edge to form a cube.

The resistance between two diagonally opposite corner

24. Let i( t) = 3te-100 t A and v( t) = 0.6(0.01 - t) e -100 t V for

the network of fig. P.1.1.24. The power being absorbed

by the network element at t = 5 ms is

25. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.25 bulb A uses 36 W when

29. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.29 power is delivered by

when lit. The additional A bulbs in parallel to this

circuit, that would be required to blow the fuse is

(A) dependent source of 192 W

(B) dependent source of 368 W

(C) independent source of 16 W

26. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.26, the power absorbed by

(D) independent source of 40 W

30. The dependent source in fig. P.1.1.30

31. In the circuit of fig. P.1.1.31 dependent source

32. A capacitor is charged by a constant current of 2 mA

36. The waveform for the current in a 200 mF capacitor

and results in a voltage increase of 12 V in a 10 sec

is shown in fig. P.1.1.36 The waveform for the capacitor

interval. The value of capacitance is

33. The energy required to charge a 10 mF capacitor to

34. The current in a 100 mF capacitor is shown in fig.

P.1.1.34. If capacitor is initially uncharged, then the

waveform for the voltage across it is

35. The voltage across a 100 mF capacitor is shown in

38. In the circuit shown in fig. P.1.1.38

iin ( t) = 300 sin 20 t mA, for t 0.

Let C1 = 40 mF and C2 = 30 mF. All capacitors are

(A) -0.25cos 20t V

(B) 0.25cos 20t V

(C) -36cos 20t mV

(D) 36cos 20t mV

1. (C) n = 10 20 , Q = ne = e10 20 = 16.02 C

9. (B) Voltage is constant because of 15 V source.

2. (D) DQ = i D t = 15000 100m = 15

10. (C) Voltage across 60 W resistor = 30 V

11. (C) The current i will be distributed in the cube

6. (A) In order for 600 C charge to be delivered to the

12. (C) If we go from +side of 1 kW through 7 V, 6 V and

13. (D) It is not possible to determine the voltage across

14. (D) Req = 5 +

7. (A) Going from 10 V to 0 V

Req2 + 15 Req = 5 Req + 75 + 10 Req + 50

Req = 125 = 1118

We can say Cd = 20 mF, Ceq = 20 + 40 = 60 mF